SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
MONIES WILLIAMS.
2. onti on :
HENRY FROWDE,
OXFOKD UNIVEBSITY PRESS WAREHOUSE,
7 PATERNOSTER ROW.
SOLD ALSO BY
W. H. ALLEN AND CO.
WATERLOO PLACE,
Publithert to the India Office.
PRACTICAL GRAMMAR
OF THE
SANSKRIT LANGUAGE,
ARRANGED WITH REFERENCE TO
THE CLASSICAL LANGUAGES OF EUROPE,
FOR THE USE OF
ENGLISH STUDENTS.
BY
MONIER WILLIAMS, M.A., D.C.L,
Hon. Doctor in Law of the University of Calcutta;
Hon. Member of the Bombay Asiatic Society;
Member of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland, and of the Oriental Society of Germany;
Boden Professor of Sanskrit in the University of Oxford.
FOURTH EDITION.
ENLARGED AND IMPROVED.
AT THE CLARENDON PRESS.
M.DCCC.LXXVII.
[ All rights reserved. ]
PREFACE
TO THE FOURTH EDITION.
NOW that this Grammar has reached a fourth edition it
may, perhaps, without presumption, be allowed to rest on
its own merits. I have, therefore, dispensed with much
of the prefatory matter which introduced the previous
editions.
Any one who compares the present Grammar with its
predecessor will see at once the difference between the
two, not indeed in its structure and arrangement, nor
even in the numbering of the rules, but in the fuller and
more complete explanation of points of detail.
It may be well, however, to draw attention to some of
the most noteworthy alterations and improvements.
A table shewing the interchange of letters in the three
sister languages, Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin, has been
given at pages 18-20.
The list of suffixes at pages 57-75 has been consider-
ably enlarged, and arranged in alphabetical order under
each declension.
The subject of declension has been elucidated by a
clearer method of synopsis.
A more complete account of Sanskrit accentuation has
been given at the end of the volume.
The Beading Exercises have been slightly curtailed.
The publication by the Delegates of the Clarendon Press
of such a Class-book as the Nala, and quite recently of
the Sakuntala, sufficiently supplies what is likely to be
needed for the prosecution of the study of Sanskrit after
the elements of Grammar have been acquired.
a3
2GG4S68
VI PREFACE TO THE FOURTH EDITION.
Four indices instead of two have been appended.
In order to bring the present edition into harmony
with the Greek and Latin grammars now in use, some
of the grammatical terms have been altered, e. g. suffix
has been substituted for affix ; stem for base ; special
and general tenses for conjugational and non-conjugational
tenses respectively.
Some errors which, notwithstanding all my efforts,
crept into the last edition have been corrected, and a
few other improvements effected. But I dare not even
now hope to have attained the standard of perfection.
Sanskrit is far too vast and intricate a subject to admit
of such pretensions. I can, however, with truth affirm,
that I have done what I could to bring the present
work up to the level of the scholarship of the day;
and my acknowledgments are due to Mr. E. L. Hogarth,
M. A., of Brasenose College, for his aid in conducting
the sheets through the Press.
In conclusion I may, perhaps, be permitted to express
a hope that my second visit to India will add to my
powers of improving any future edition that may be
required, as it certainly will increase my ability to pro-
mote a more general knowledge of the Sanskrit language
and literature among my own fellow-countrymen, to
whose rule a vast Eastern Empire has been committed,
and who cannot hope, except through Sanskrit, to gain
a proper acquaintance with its spoken dialects, or to
understand the mind, read the thoughts, and reach the
very heart and soul of its vast populations.
M. W.
OXFOBD, October 1876.
CONTENTS.
PAGE
CHAP. I. LETTERS ... 1
Pronunciation . ....... 9
Classification .. . . . . . .14
Interchange of letters in Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin . . 18
Method of writing ........ 20
CHAP. II. SANDHI OB EUPHONIC COMBINATION OF LETTERS . . 23
Sect. I. Changes of vowels . .... 24
Sect. II. Changes of consonants . . . . . .32
CHAP. III. ROOTS, AND THE FORMATION OF NOMINAL STEMS . 51
Formation of the stems of nouns by suffixes . . . .57
CHAP. IV. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. GENERAL OBSERVATIONS . . 76
Sect. I. Inflexion of nouns whose stems end in vowels . . 83
Sect. II. Inflexion of nouns whose stems end in consonants . 95
Sect. III. Adjectives 113
Sect. IV. Numerals 118
CHAP. V. PRONOUNS 123
CHAP. VI. VERBS. GENERAL OBSERVATIONS . . . . .133
Terminations . . . . . . . . .136
Summary of the ten conjugations! classes . . . .144
The augment . . . . . . . . .146
Reduplication . . . . . . . . .147
Formation of the stem in the four Special tenses :
Of group I. or verbs of the first, fourth, sixth, and tenth classes 150
Of groups II. and III. Preliminary observations . . . 155
The new rules of Sandhi required for group H. . . .157
Of group II. or verbs of the second, third, and seventh classes 160
Of group HI. or verbs of the fifth, eighth, and ninth classes . 166
Formation of the stem in the six General tenses :
Perfect ' . ",.'- . , . 168
First and Second Future . . , ,= , . . . . 178
Rules for inserting or rejecting the vowel i . . ' . .180
Aorist 186
Precative or Benedictive . . . . . . .193
Conditional 196
Infinitive . . . . . . . . . . 196
Passive verbs . . . . . . . . .197
Causal verbs ......... 203
Desiderative verbs ........ 209
Frequentative or Intensive verbs . . . . . .213
Nominal verbs . 217
Vlll CONTENTS.
PAGE
Participles. . . . . . .- . . . .219
Participial nouns of agency . . . . . .234
Examples of verbs inflected at full :
Table of verbs of the ten conjugational classes inflected at full 235
Table of passive verbs inflected at full . . . . .244
Auxiliary verbs conjugated . ...... 249
Group I. Verbs of the first class conjugated . . . .250
Verbs of the fourth class conjugated . . . . .266
Verbs of the sixth class conjugated . . . . .271
Verbs of the tenth class conjugated . . . . .276
Group H. Verbs of the second class conjugated . . . .279
Verbs of the third class conjugated ... . . .287
Verbs of the seventh class conjugated . . . . .291
Group III. Verbs of the fifth class conjugated . . . . . 296
Verbs of the eighth class conjugated . :- .. ... ; . . 301
Verbs of the ninth class conjugated . . : . . . 304
Passive verbs conjugated . . . .., .309
Causal verbs conjugated . . . . . . . 311
Desiderative verbs conjugated . . . . . .312
Frequentative or Intensive verbs conjugated . . . ,314
CHAP. VII. INDECLINABLE WORDS.
Adverbs "..' . . .317
Conjunctions . . . . . . . . .321
Prepositions 322
Adverbs in government with nouns - . . . . .323
Interjections . . . . . . . . . 324
CHAP. VIII. COMPOUND WORDS.
Sect. I. Compound nouns . . . . . . . .325
Tat-purusha or dependent compounds 327
Dvandva or copulative (aggregative) compounds . . . 330
Karma-dha'raya or descriptive (determinative) compounds . 333
Dvigu or numeral (collective) compounds . . . .334
Avyayi-bhava or adverbial (indeclinable) compounds . .335
Bahu-vrihi or relative compounds . . . . . .336
Complex compounds . . . . . . . .341
Changes of certain words in certain compounds . . . 344
Sect. II. Compound verbs 347
Sect. III. Compound adverbs . . . . . . .353
CHAP. IX. SYNTAX 354
CHAP. X. EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION AND PARSING . . .387
SCHEME OF THE MORE COMMON SANSKRIT METRES .... 392
ACCENTUATION .......... 397
INDICES 401
LlST OP COMPOUND OR CONJUNCT CONSONANTS . .415
CHAPTER I.
LETTERS.
i. THE Deva-nagari or Nagari character (or its modifications*),
in which the Sanskrit language is usually written, is adapted to the
expression of nearly every gradation of sound ; and almost every
letter has a fixed and invariable pronunciation (see, however, 16).
There are fourteen vowels (or without Iri thirteen, see 3. d] and
thirty-three simple consonants. To these may be added a nasal sign,
standing for either true or substitute Anusvdra (see 6), and a sign
for a hard breathing, called Visarga (see 8). They are here first
exhibited in the order followed in dictionaries. All the vowels,
excepting a, have two forms ; the first is the initial, the second the
medial or non-initial.
VOWELS.
Nasal sign called true or proper Anusvdra, * n. Substitute
Anusvdra, * m.
Sign for a hard breathing, called Visarga, \ fy.
CONSONANTS.
Gutturals, ^ k ^ kh T g ^F gh 5*r>
Palatals, ^1 d ^ 6h ^f y ^5^ j h >T n
Cerebrals, % t ^ th 3d ^ dh ^5J n
Dentals, ff^ ^J/A ^c? VrfA Tw
Labials, ^T jo ^U ph ^ b ^ bh "T w
Semivowels, ^| y ^ r (vj* / ^ v
Sibilants, ^T ^ *A ^5
Aspirate, ^ h
Two characters, 35 ?, 555 ^ (often = T rf, 7 d^), are used in the Veda.
* Such as the Bengali, Gujarati, &c. In the South of India Sanskrit is gene-
rally written, not in the Deva-nagari, but in the Telugu, Kanarese, and Malay alam
% B
2 LETTERS.
The characters are written from left to right, like the Roman.
The compound or 1 conjunct consonants (see 5) may be multi-
plied to the extent of four or five hundred. The most common
are given here. A more complete list will be found at the end of
the volume.
THE MORE COMMON CONJUNCT CONSONANTS.
5 kk, H kt, ^5 or -jfi kr, U kl, u kv, ^ ksh, & khy, r* gn, yj gr,
g gl, H 0^r, H nk, *j$ ng, w AJ, ^5 Mh, ^ 6y, ** jj, ^ jn, if jv,
^ h6, sg wJA, ^ nj, % tt, ^f #y, 5- ci^, sjf rfy, ip nt, ^ w^, ^ we?,
^T nn, TPI wy, W tt, r*I /^, ^ /w, W ^m, W /y, ^ or & tr, 13 tv, W ts,
sq ^Ay, ^ dff, ^ c?cfA, ^ c?6A, IT dm, ?r c?y, ^ dr, ^ dv, Vf dhy, 29 dhv,
nf w/, ^ nd, ^ rm, ^T wy, jo/, "Of joy, TJ pr, jr j9/, ^T &/, ^ 6c?, "sii 6y,
, w i*/, i c*t/, 5. i*/, a
j*, ^Tjoy, 1T^, 3TX
br, ? 6^y, >J 6^r, 1*1 mbh, WT mm, WT my, m/, TIT yy, % rk }
rm, BI lp, W ^, ^T vy, "3 w, ^g ^, ^T sy, ^ sr, ^ s/, TJ sv, *A/,
shth, t^T s^w, ni *Ay, ^i sk, ^( skh, ^3" 5/, 5T sth t ^r #w, W sm f
shm, ^ kshy, TX( gny, nq gbhy, J?T ^ry, ! nkt, ^JJ wA'y,
(5(fAr, }|3f wrfy, T^ 1 /5/z, |RI tmy, *t( try, w /*y, |f ///*,
, n ddhy, U dbhy, ^f c?ry, T^ w/y, *5?i miy, ^ r</r, * ryy t
rtsny.
,
kshn, "S5R
characters, as well as in the Grantha (or Grantham), which is a name for the character
used for Sanskrit in the Tamil country, the Tamil alphabet being too defective to
represent all the necessary sounds. In the second edition of this Grammar I gave
a comparative table of old Inscription characters from Mr. Edward Thomas'
edition of Prinsep's Indian Antiquities, which shows that the present form of
Deva-nagari character is traceable to the inscriptions of As'oka, who is called
Piyadasi for Priyadarsin a well-known Buddhist king, grandson of Candra-gupta
=Sandrakottos and who must have reigned over nearly the whole of India, his
capital being Patali-putra (=Pali-bothra, the modern Patna). These inscriptions
are found on rocks at Giri-nagara (Girnar) in Gujarat on the Western coast, and
at Dhauli in Kuttack on the Eastern coast (in the province of Orissa); and again
at a place called Kapurdigiri, quite N. of the Panjab, a little to the E. of Purusha-
pura (Peshawar). It is from the Girnar rock-inscriptions that the present Deva-
nagari is most evidently derived, and these are not yet clearly traceable to a
Phenician origin, those of Kapurdigiri being more so.
LETTERS. 3
Observe In reading the following pages for the first time, the
attention should be confined to the large type.
Observe also When reference is made to other parts of the
Grammar, the numbers will denote the paragraphs, not the pages.
The letters (except r, called Repha, and except the nasal sign
called Anusvdra and the sign for the hard breathing called Visarga)
have no names (like the names in the Greek alphabet), but the
consonants are enunciated with the vowel a. Native grammarians,
in designating any letter, add the word ORR kdra ; thus, 'SJcRn: a-kdra,
' the letter a ; ' ^BR ka-kdra, ' the letter lea. 3
NUMERICAL FIGURES.
1 ^ ^ $ M % S fc * 10 <tt ^ 3dM
1234567 89 10 Ji 12 345
THE VOWELS AND THE METHOD OP WRITING THEiM.
2. The short vowel *si a is never written unless it begin a word,
because it is supposed to be inherent in every consonant. Thus,
ak is written 'Sc^r, but ka is written cj ; so that in such words as
tRoB kanaka, ^TR nagara, &c., no vowel has to be written. The
mark x under the k of ^[, called Virdma (see 9), indicates a con-
sonantal stop, that is, the absence of any vowel, inherent or other-
wise, after a final consonant. It is omitted in the first tables that
the letters may be kept unencumbered by additional marks.
a. The other vowels, if written after a consonant, take the place of
the inherent a. They assume two forms, according as they are initial
or not initial. Thus, W^ dk, ^RT fed; ^cjr ik, fas, ki.
b. Observe here, that the short vowel f i, when initial, is written
in its right place, but when not initial, is always written before the
letter after which it is pronounced. Hence, in order to write such
a word as iti, the letters would have to be arranged thus, iit ^fir.
c. Perhaps the true explanation of this peculiarity is that in the earliest alphabets
the two i's were written over the consonant to which they belonged, short i
inclining to the left, and long i to the right, a perpendicular stroke having been
afterwards added.
3. The long vowels T d and ^ i, not initial, take their proper place
after a consonant. Also the non-initial o and au (which are formed
by placing ^ and % over T a), like T d, take their proper place after
B 2
4 LETTERS.
their consonants; thus, oft ko, ^ Jcau. The vowels u, u, ri, ri, In,
not initial, are written under the consonants after which they are
pronounced; as, ^ ku, ^ ku, ^ kri, cjr kri, ^r klri.
a. Except when u or u follows T. r, in which case the method of
writing is peculiar ; thus, ^ ru, ^ ru.
b. When, however, the vowel ^J ri follows n r the vowel is written
in its initial form and r in the crescent shape placed over it (see 5. a) ;
thus, fVf^ffT nirriti, 'the goddess of destruction/
c. The vowels ri, ri, Iri and Iri are peculiar to Sanskrit (see 1 1 . c).
55 Iri only occurs in the root ^\klrip, ' to make/ and its derivatives.
d. The long "c Iri is only used in technical grammatical ex-
planations ; strictly it has no existence, and is useless except as
contributing to the completeness of the alphabetical system.
e. The vowels e and ai, not initial, are written above the consonants
after which they are pronounced ; thus, ij ke, % kai.
f. In a few words initial vowels follow other vowels ; e. g.
'without debt;' Ju^f go-agra, 'a number of -cows;' TT^T pra-uga, 'the pole of
a chariot ; ' uTrPJ titau, ' a sieve.'
METHOD OP WRITING THE SIMPLE CONSONANTS.
4. The consonants have only one form, whether initial or not
initial. And here note that in every consonant, and in the initial
vowels, there is a perpendicular stroke or the commencement of
one, and that all have a horizontal line at the top ; but in two
of the letters, i^ dh and >T bh, this horizontal line is broken. In
writing rapidly, the student will do well to form the perpendicular
stroke first, then the distinctive parts of the letter, and lastly the
horizontal line. The natives, however, sometimes form the horizontal
line first.
METHOD OP WHITING THE CONJUNCT CONSONANTS.
5. The necessity for conjunct consonants is caused by the fact
that every consonant is supposed to have the vowel ^r a inherent
in it, so that it is never necessary to write this vowel, excepting at
the beginning of a word or, in a few cases, of a syllable (see 3. /").
Hence when any simple consonants stand alone in any word, the
short vowel ^ a must always be pronounced after them ; but when
they appear in conjunction with any other vowel, this other vowel
of course takes the place of short ^r a. Thus such a word as
LETTEliS.
would be pronounced kaldnatayd, where long ^TT d being
written after / and y takes the place of the inherent vowel. But
supposing that, instead of kaldnatayd, the word had to be pronounced
kldntyd, how are we to know that kl and nty have to be uttered
without the intervention of any vowel ? This occasions the necessity
for conjunct or compound consonants. Kl and nty must then be
combined together thus, 31, ^, and the word is written ^n-WT.
And here we have illustrated the two methods of compounding con-
sonants ; viz. ist, by writing them one above the other; 2ndly, by
placing them side by side, omitting in all, except the last, the per-
pendicular line which lies to the right.
a. Some letters, however, change their form entirely when combined
with other consonants. Thus ^ r, when it is the first letter of a
conjunct consonant, is written above in the form of a crescent,
as in efiij kurma, efin^q kdrtsnya ; and when the last, is written below
in the form of a small stroke, as in the word gsfoj kramena.
b. So again in T?J * ksha and ^r t jna the simple elements "air ^ and
"3f ST are scarcely traceable.
c. In some conjunct consonants the simple letters slightly change
their form j as, 31 sa becomes *{ in ^[ s6a ; ^ d with TJ ya becomes
H dya; ^ d with V dha becomes 5 ddha ; <* d with >T bha be-
comes 5 dbha ; j(t with 'C ra becomes ^r tra or 3 tra ; ZF k with K ta
becomes ^5 kta.
d. Observe, that when r comes in the middle of a conjunct consonant, it takes
the same form as at the end ; thus, iff grya, >J gra. When conjunct consonants
commencing with c are followed by the vowels t, i, e, at, o, au, or by a nasal
symbol (see 6), then ^ is for the convenience of typography written on the right
of all ; thus, fiy rni, ^ff rni, efi rke, %T rkau, ^ rkam.
ANUSVi.BA AND ANUN^SIKA.
6. Anusvdra ( m), i. e. * after-sound,' is a nasal sound which
always belongs to a preceding vowel, and can never be used like
a nasal consonant to begin a syllable (though like a consonant it
imparts, in conjunction with a following consonant, prosodial length
to the preceding short vowel). It is denoted by a simple dot,
* Sometimes formed thus *if, and pronounced kya in Bengali.
t This compound is sometimes pronounced gya or nya, though it will be more
convenient to represent it by its proper equivalent jna.
6 LETTEKS.
which ought to come either immediately over the vowel after which
the nasalization is sounded, or on the right of the vowel-mark ; thus,
3i kam, ^ kum, f% kirn, offtf kirn.
This dot serves two purposes. It marks, i. the Anusvara
proper or True Anusvara ; 2. a short substitute for the five nasal
consonants; in which latter case it may be called Substitute
Anusvara.
a. True Anusvara denotes the nasalization of the vowel which
precedes it before $T s, ^ sh, ^ s, and ^ h, in the body of words.
It is then pronounced with the nose only (like n in the French
mon, &c.), and will in this Grammar be represented in the Indo-
Romanic type by w, as in ^l ansa, ^shffff anhati.
But since the true Anusvara must take the place of a final ^ m
when the three sibilants 5^ , ^ sh, ^ s, and the aspirate ^ h (but see
7. c) follow ; and also generally when T r follows at the beginning
of a word (see e. next page); it is then in this Grammar expressed
by m; thus, fl* 31<if^ * 8 written if SH|*T tarn satrum ; TR nWR*
becomes if TTWR^ tarn rdjdnam ; and w with root <J is written
^ samhri.
b. Substitute Anusvara is sometimes used, for shortness, as a
substitute for any of the five nasal consonants T , *T w, irr n, q[ n,
if m, which belong to the five classes of letters (see 15), when no
vowel intervenes between these and a following consonant in the
middle of the same word (thus the syllables ^ ink, ^ in6, *IR^ and,
y^int, ^c^imp may for shortness be written ^SF, ^, ^?r, ^, ^).
In these cases Anusvara must be pronounced like the nasal con-
sonant for which it has been substituted, and in this Grammar it
will always be represented in Indo-Romanic type by these nasal
consonants.
But Anusvara is more usually substituted for these nasals when
final and resulting from the euphonic adaptation of the final m of
accus. cases sing., nom. cases neut., some adverbs and persons of
the verb to a following word (see 60). It will then in this Grammar
be represented in the Indo-Romanic type by m, as in the cases
mentioned in 6. a.
c. Anusvara is even used in some printed books, though less
correctly, for the final | m of the words specified in the last
paragraph when they stand in a pause (i. e. at the end of a
LETTERS. 7
sentence or clause, or when not followed by another word). In
such cases, too, it should be represented by m.
d. But Anusvara is never admitted as a substitute for the original
final 5^ n of a pada or inflected word (as in accus. cases plur., loc.
cases of pronominals, the 3rd pers. plur. and pres. part, of verbs, &c.,
see 54), unless the next word begin with 6, t, t, or their aspirates,
when, by 53, a sibilant is interposed before the initial letter.
e. And in the case of roots ending in ^ n or IT m, these final
nasals, if not dropped, pass into Anusvara before terminations or
suffixes beginning with a sibilant or h, but are not changed before
semivowels; thus r*^ + **ffi = *feffi mansyate, 'he will think;' ^ +
*I = *RT manye, ' I think' (617) ; i&{+'3tfft = 'ifeff : ftyansyati, 'he will
restrain;' TPT -f *T = J T T *T gamy a, 'accessible' (602); TH + ^ = 'TO
namra, ' bent.' *m followed by *T3T is yiiT samrdj, ' a sovereign.'
f. Hence it appears that the nasal sign Anusvara is peculiarly
the nasal of the three sibilants ST s, ^ sh, ^ s, and the aspirate * h ;
and that the true Anusvara always occurs before these letters. It
is also to a certain degree the nasal of the semivowel ^ r; so that
these five consonants having a nasal sign of their own have no
relationship to the corresponding nasal consonant of their respective
classes.
7. That Anusvara is less peculiarly the nasal of the semivowels
is evident from e. above. Hence H m final in a word (not a root)
may, before ^ y, "& I, r v, either pass into Anusvara or be repre-
sented by ijf, o|, ^, or assimilate itself to these letters ; thus *nr + TR
= tni*? or *TOT, IT + r^<+* x = 4 pftfcT or trlftcirT.
In the latter case the nasal character of *i y and ?5 / is
denoted by a nasal symbol called Anundsika (i. e. ' through the
nose,' sometimes called Candra-vindu, 'the dot in the crescent'),
which is also applied to mark the nasality of a final <5 / deduced
from a final ^ n when followed by initial 7$ I, see 56. Of course
the word T&zr^samyant, ' going conformably ' (formed from *fo + ^n^ ),
retains the m.
a. And this Anundsika * is not only the sign of the nasality of
IT y, p^ /, and ^ v, in the preceding cases, but also marks the nasality
of vowels, though in a less degree than Anusvara, see 1 1 . f.
b. In the Veda Anunasika is written for a final ^ n after a long vowel before
another vowel ; as, ^RT ^^Tfiff for <WI^ f'^lfa Rig-veda vni. I, 6.
8 LETTERS.
c. Observe A final *T m before f^fim, J Jin, ^Jiy, 1 hi, 5^ hv, may either be
changed to Anusvara or undergo assimilation with the second letter; thus HP
faw WTj^fiT, f% jgrf or fan^ jgi, f% ?r: or f^tgr:, &c. (see 7).
or
VISARGA, JIHVAMULIYA. AND UPADHMANIYA.
8. The sign Visarga, 'emission of breath/ (sometimes said to
derive its name from symbolizing the rejection of a letter in pro-
nunciation,) usually written thus :, but more properly in the form
of two small circles I, is used to represent a distinctly audible and
harder aspiration than the letter 7 h. It is reckoned under the vdhya-
prayatna, and is said, like the hard consonants, to be a-ghosha, without
the soft articulation. This sign is never the representative of ^ h.
Although conveniently represented by h, it should be borne in mind
that Visarga (#) is a harder aspirate than f h, and is in fact a kind
of sibilant, being often a substitute for s and r preceded by vowels
whenever the usual consonantal sound of these letters passes into an
aspiration at the end of a sentence or through the influence of a
k, kh, p, ph, or a sibilant commencing the next word.
And since, according to native grammarians, ^ s ought not to be
allowed at the end of a complete word, all those inflections of nouns
and verbs which end in s and stand separate from other words are,
in native Grammars, made to end in Visarga.
But in this Grammar such inflections are allowed to retain their
final ^ s. We have only to bear in mind that this s is liable at the
end of a sentence, or when followed by certain consonants, to pass
into an audible breathing more distinct than s in the French les or
the English isle, viscount, when it is represented by h (:).
In some parts of India Visarga has a slightly reverberating sound
very difficult of imitation ; thus n*r; rdmafy is almost like TJT^ rdmaha,
Wf'^: agnih like Tfffnfff agnihi, f^rt|: 6ivaih like f^ftr sivaihi.
a. An Ardha-visarga, 'half-visarga,' or modification of the symbol Visarga, in
the form of two semicircles X > ls sometimes employed before k, kh, and p, ph.
Before the two former letters this symbol is properly called JihvdmuUya, and the
organ of its enunciation said to be the root of the tongue (jihvd-mula). Before
p and ph its proper name is Upadhmdniya, 'to be breathed upon,' and its organ
of utterance is then the lips (oshthd).
The Jihvamuliya and Upadhmaniya are therefore to be regarded as the sibilants
of the guttural and labial classes respectively. (See Pan. i. i, 9.)
b. The sign Ardha-visarga is now rarely seen in printed Sanskrit texts. In the
LETTERS. 9
Vedas the Upadhmaniya occurs, but only after an Anusvara or Anunasika;
thus, f X^^s or TXTf^i an d in this case also the symbol Visarga may be
used for it.
VIRAMA, AVAGRAHA, &C.
9. The Virdma, 'pause' or 'stop/ placed under a consonant (thus
W fy, indicates the absence of the inherent ^T a, by help of which the
consonant is pronounced.
Observe Virama properly means the pause of the voice at the
end of a sentence. In some MSS. it is employed like a mark of
punctuation at the close of a sentence ending with a consonant,
while the mark I is the proper means of denoting the close of a
sentence ending in a vowel, all the preceding words being written
without separation, because supposed to be pronounced without
pause.
10. The mark 5 (Avagraha, sometimes called Ardhdkdra, half the
letter a), placed between two words, denotes the elision (lopo) or
suppression (abhinidhdno) of an initial ^r a after ^ e or ^ o final
preceding. It corresponds to our apostrophe in some analogous
cases. Thus, TfsfTj te'pi for "ff ^rft| te apt.
a. In books printed in Calcutta the mark s is sometimes used to resolve a long
d resulting from the blending of a final d with an initial a or d; thus TnjTStj^f for
iT*!T ^M3<4, usually written riVim$4. Sometimes a double mark ss denotes an
initial long ^TT. The mark s is also used in the Veda as the sign of a hiatus between
vowels, and in the pada text to separate the component parts of a compound or of
other grammatical forms.
b. The half pause I is a stop or mark of punctuation, usually placed at the end
of the first line of a couplet or stanza.
c. The whole pause II is placed at the end of a couplet, or is used like a full stop,
rf. The mark of repetition indicates that a word or sentence has to be repeated.
It is also used to abbreviate a word, just as in English we use a full point ; thus *?
stands for *J%, as chap, for chapter; so H for SW.
PRONUNCIATION OF SANSKRIT VOWELS.
1 1. The vowels in Sanskrit are pronounced for the most part as
in Italian or French, though occasional words in English may exem-
plify their sound ; but every vowel is supposed to be alpa-prdna,
' pronounced with a slight breathing ' (see 14. a).
a. Since 18 a is inherent in every consonant, the student should
be careful to acquire the correct pronunciation of this letter. There
10 LETTERS.
are many words in English which afford examples of its sound, such
as vocal, cedar, zebra, organ. But in English the vowel u in such
words as fun, bun, sun, more frequently represents this obscure sound
of a ; and even the other vowels may occasionally be pronounced
with this sound, as in her, sir, son.
b. The long vowel ^n a is pronounced as a in the English father,
far, cart ; \ i as the i in pm, lily ; \ i as the i in marine, police ;
"3 u as the u in push ; ^ u as the u in rude.
c. The vowel ^ ri, peculiar to Sanskrit, is pronounced as the ri
in merrily, where the i of ri is less perceptible than in the syllable
ri, composed of the consonant r and the vowel i *. ^ ri is pro-
nounced nearly as the ri in chagrin, being hardly distinguishable from
the syllable tf ; but in the case of the vowels ri and ri there is a mere
vibration of the tongue in the direction of the upper gums, whereas in
pronouncing the consonant r, the tongue should actually touch them
(see 19, 20) : % e as the e in prey, there; ^rt o as in so ; JJ ai as ai
in aisle; 'OT au as au in the German Haus or as ou in the English
house f. * /n and * /n differ little in sound from the letter <5 /
with the vowels ri and ri annexed.
d. Hence it appears that every simple vowel in Sanskrit has a
short and a long form, and that each vowel has one invariable
jsound; so that the beginner can never, as in other languages, be
in doubt as to pronunciation or prosody.
e. Note, however, that Sanskrit possesses no short e and o in opposition to the
long diphthongal sounds of e and o.
/. Although for all practical purposes it is sufficient to regard vowels as either
short or long, it should be borne in mind that native grammarians give eighteen
different modifications of each of the vowels a, i, u, ri, and twelve of Iri, which are
thus explained : Each of the first four vowels is supposed to have three prosodial
lengths or measures (mdtrd), viz. a short (hrasva), a long (dirgha), and a prolated
* That there is not, practically, much difference between the pronunciation of
the vowel ri and the syllable ft ri may be gathered from the fact that some words
beginning with ^ are also found written with ft, and vice versa; thus, ftffe and
^fe, ftfo and ^jft, ft^T and ^T. Still the distinction between the definition
of a vowel and consonant at 19 and 20 should be borne in mind. There is no doubt
that in English the sound of ri in the words merrily and rich is different, and
that the former approaches nearer to the sound of a vowel.
t Colloquially in India ai is often pronounced rather like e and au like o.
LETTERS. 11
(pluta) ; the long being equal to two, and the prolated to three short vowels.
Each of these three modifications may be uttered with a high tone, or a low tone,
or a tone between high and low ; or in other words, may have the acute, or the
grave, or the circumflex accent. This gives nine modifications to a, i, u, ri; and
each of these again may be regarded either as nasal or non-nasal, according as it
is pronounced with the nose and mouth, or with the mouth alone. Hence result
eighteen varieties of every vowel, excepting Iri, e, at, o, au, which have only
twelve, because the first does not possess the long and the last four have not
the short prosodial time. A prolated vowel is marked with three lines underneath
or with 3 on one side, thus ^TT or ^TT^ (see Pan. i. 2, 27).
PRONUNCIATION OP SANSKRIT CONSONANTS.
12. 3F k, r j, *{P> \ & are pronounced as in English.
a. i\ g has always the sound of g in gun, give, never of g in gin.
b. ^T 6 is pronounced like ch in church, or as c in Italian.
Observe that ^ 6 is a simple consonantal sound, although repre-
sented in English words by ch. It is a modification or softening
of k, just as j is of g, the organ of utterance being in the palate,
a little in advance of the throat. Hence, in Sanskrit and its cognate
languages, the palatals 6 and j are often exchanged with the gutturals
k and g. See 25.
c. T^t, ^d are more dental than in English, t being something
like t in stick, and d like th in this; thus veda ought to be pro-
nounced rather like vet ha. But in real fact we have no sound
exactly equivalent to the Indian dentals t and d. The sound of th
in thm, the*, is really dental, but, so to speak, over-dentalized, the
tongue being forced through the teeth instead of against them.
Few Englishmen acquire the correct pronunciation of the Indian
dentals. They are said to be best pronounced by resting the end of
the tongue against the inside of the front teeth and then suddenly
removing it.
13. ^ t, ? d. The sound of these cerebral letters is in practice
hardly to be distinguished from the sound of our English t and d.
Properly, however, the Sanskrit cerebrals should be uttered with a
duller and deeper intonation, produced by keeping the tongue as far
back in the head (cerebrum) as possible, and slightly turning it
upwards. A Hindu, however, would always write any English
word or name containing t and d with the cerebral letters. Thus
such words as trip, drip, London would be written
c 2
1 2 LETTERS.
In Bengal the cerebral ! d and <? dh have nearly the sound of a dull r ; so
that vidala, ' a cat/ is pronounced like virdla.
In some words both T t and T d seem interchangeable with "^ r and c^ ,- so
that ^t^Mof, 'to be lame,' may be also written ^OT^, ^t^, <<cl^. In Prakrit
cerebral letters often stand for the Sanskrit dentals. Cerebrals rarely begin words
in Sanskrit.
14. ^ kh, ^ ffh, ^ ch, ** jh, 3 th, ^ dh, ^ th, V dh, ^ ph,
*T bh. These are merely aspirated forms of simple consonants.
They are not double or compound letters ; h is only added to
denote a distinct aspiration. Thus ^ is pronounced like kh in
irikhorn, not like the Greek ^ > "ST as th in anthill, not as in think ;
"Hi as ph in wphz/7, not as in physic, but colloquially ph is often
pronounced like f (as phala is pronounced /a/a) ; >? M as in
cabhorse. Care must be taken not to interpolate a vowel before
the aspirate. Indeed it is most important to acquire the habit
of pronouncing the aspirated consonants distinctly. Dei and
dhd, prishta and prishtha, stamba and stambha, kara and khara
have very different meanings, and are pronounced very differently.
Few Englishmen pay sufficient attention to this, although the
correct sound is easily attainable. The simple rule is to breathe
hard while uttering the aspirated consonant, and then an aspirated
sound will come out with the consonant before the succeeding
vowel.
a. With regard to aspiration we may note that according to Pan. i. i, 9, the
letters are all either slightly aspirated (alpa-prdna) or more strongly aspirated
(mahd-prdna}. To the former belong vowels, semivowels, nasals, and k, g, 6, j, t,
d, t, d, p, b, which are supposed to require a slight breathing in uttering them
when they are initial. The mahd-prdna letters are kh, gh, ch, jh, th, dh, th, dh, ph,
bh, s, sh, s, h, Anusvara, Visarga, Jihvamuliya, and Upadhmaniya.
15. ^ n, *T n, Tn n, ^ n, T m. Each of the five classes of
consonants in Sanskrit has its own nasal sound, represented by a
separate nasal letter. In English and most other languages the
same fivefold division of nasal sounds might be made, though we
have only one nasal letter to express the guttural, palatal, cerebral,
and dental nasal sounds. The truth is, that in all languages the
nasal letters take their sound from the organ employed in uttering
the consonant that follows them. Thus in English it will be found
that guttural, palatal, cerebral, dental, and labial nasals are followed
by consonants of the same classes, as in ink, sing, inch, under, plinth,
LETTERS. 13
imp. If such words existed in Sanskrit, the distinction of nasal
sounds would be represented by distinct letters ; thus, ^
Compare 6.
a. It should be observed, however, that the guttural nasal "^ n, which is rarely
found by itself at the end of a word in Sanskrit, never at the beginning, probably
has, when standing alone, the sound of ng in sing, where the sound of g is almost
imperceptible. So that the English sing might be written ftHF. The palatal 5?
is only found in conjunction with palatal consonants, as in ^h6, Ts^nj, 3 6n, and
IT jn, This last may be pronounced like ny, or like gn in the French campagne.
Jn Bengal, however, it always has the sound of gy : thus TTsjTT is pronounced rdgyd.
The cerebral nasal TFT n is generally the result of a preceding cerebral letter, as
explained at 58. It is found in conjunction with cerebral consonants, but is not
found at the beginning of pure Sanskrit words (except when used artificially as a
substitute for roots beginning with ^n). It is pronounced, as the other cerebrals,
by turning the tip of the tongue rather upwards. The dental and labial nasals
5^ n and ^ m are pronounced with the same organs as the class of letters to
.which they belong. See 21.
1 6. ^ y, \ r, c5 /, ^ v are pronounced as in English. Their
relationship to and interchangeableness with (samprasdrana) the
vowels z, ri, Iri, u, respectively, should never be forgotten. See
22. a.
When "3 v is the last member of a conjunct consonant it is
pronounced like w, as 'g'R is pronounced dwdra ; but not after r, as
$T% sarva. To prevent confusion, however, ^ will in all cases be
represented by v, thus ?TR dvdra. See Preface to Sanskrit-English
Dictionary, p. xix.
. The character ^ Z is peculiar to the Veda. It appears to be a mixture of
c^f I and ^ r, representing a liquid sound formed like the cerebrals by turning
the tip of the tongue upwards ; and it is often in the Veda a substitute for the
cerebral 7 d when between two vowels, as Soft V 1 l& ^ or <* 4 n '
6. The semivowels r and I are frequently interchanged, r being an old form of I.
Cf. roots rabh, rip, with the later forms labh, lip. (See examples at 25.)
17. $I v , ^ sh, ^ s, ^ h. Of these, $T is a palatal sibilant,
and is pronounced like sh or like * in sure ; (compounded with r it
is sounded more like * in sun, but the pronunciation of s varies in
different provinces and different words.) ^ sh is a cerebral, rather
softer than our sh. That its pronunciation is hardly to be dis-
tinguished from that of the palatal is proved by the number of
words written indiscriminately with ^j or ^; as, cRt^j or eRfa. This ^
14 LETTERS.
is often corrupted into ^ in conversation, and "BT ksh is often pro-
nounced like 'S 6h. The dental ^ s is pronounced as the common
English s. Different sibilants, of course, exist in English, though
represented by one character, as in the words sure, session, pressure,
stick, sun.
* h is pronounced as in English, and is guttural.
CLASSIFICATION OP LETTERS.
1 8. In the arrangement of the alphabet at page i, all the con-
sonants, excepting the semivowels, sibilants, and h, were distributed
under the five heads of gutturals (kanthyd), palatals (tdlavya), cere-
brals (murdhanya), dentals (dantya), and labials (oshthya). We are
now to show that all the forty-seven letters, vowels, semivowels,
and consonants; may be referred to one or other of these five grand
classes, according to the organ principally concerned in their pro-
nunciation, whether the throat, the palate, the upper part of the
palate, the teeth, or the lips *.
a. We have also to show that all the letters may be regarded
according to another principle of division, and may be all arranged
under the head of either HARD or SOFT, according as the effort
of utterance is attended with expansion (vivdra), or contraction
(samvdrd), of the throat.
* a. According to some native grammars the classes (cargo) of consonants are
distinguished thus : ka-varga the class of guttural letters beginning with k, in-
cluding the nasal, 6a-varga the palatals, ta-varga the cerebrals, ta-varga the
dentals, pa-varga the labials, ya-varga the semivowels, sa-varga the sibilants and
the aspirate h.
b. In the S'iva-siitras of Panini the letters are arranged in fourteen groups :
thus, a i u n ri Iri k e o n ai au 6 h y v r t / n A m n n n m -jh bh n gh
dh dh sh j b g d d 6 kh ph 6h th th 6 t t v k p y * sh s r h L By taking the
first letter of any series and joining it to the last of any other series various classes
of letters are designated; thus al is the technical name for the whole alphabet;
hal for all the consonants ; a.6 the vowels ; ak all the simple vowels ; an the vowels
a, i, u, short or long ; e6 the diphthongs ; yan the semivowels ; jas the soft con-
sonants g, j, d, d, b ; jhas the same with their aspirates ; jhash the soft aspirates
alone ; yar all the consonants except h ; jhal all the consonants except the nasals
and semivowels; jhar all the consonants except the aspirate, nasals, and semi-
vowels.
LETTERS.
15
b. The following tables exhibit this twofold classification, the com-
prehension of which is of the utmost importance to the study of
Sanskrit grammar.
Gutturals
Palatals
Cerebrals
Dentals
Labials
a ^n
r ^r r
e i a
, _. _,
" u "3\u ^ft o w au
Tea ^ Ma
7f /a
IT da <? dha
3C da V dha
"3 ba >r bha
sa
The first two consonants in each of the above five classes and the
sibilants, including Visarga, are hard ; all the other letters, including
Anusvara, are soft, as in the following table :
HARD OB SURD LETTERS.
SOFT OR SONANT LETTERS.
fa* ztha*
ta* Tltha*
a
sa
T\ ga* "Ugha*
T da* TS dha*
^ da * v c?Aa *
*Ma*
fra
Note Hindu grammarians begin with the letters pronounced by the organ
furthest from the mouth, and so take the other organs in order, ending with the
lips. This as a technical arrangement is perhaps the best, but the order of creation
would be that of the Hebrew alphabet; ist, the labials; 2nd, the gutturals; 3rd, the
dentals.
c. Observe, that although ^ e, ^ ai, are more conveniently con-
nected with the palatal class, and ^ o, *%n au, with the labial, these
letters are really diphthongal, being made up of a + i, d + i, a + u,
d + u, respectively. Their first element is therefore guttural.
(In the Pratisakhyas the diphthongs e, ai, o, au are called
Sandhy-akshara.}
d. Note also, that it is most important to observe which hard
letters have kindred soft letters, and vice versa. The kindred hard
and soft are those in the same line marked with a star in the above
table ; thus ff, gh, are the corresponding soft letters to k, kh ;
j, jh, to <*, <?/*. and so with the others.
16 LETTERS.
In order that the foregoing classification may be clearly under-
stood, it is necessary to note the proper meaning of the term
vowel and consonant, and to define the relationship which the
nasals, semivowels, and sibilants, bear to the other letters.
19. A vowel is defined to be a sound (svard) or vocal emission
of breath from the lungs, modified or modulated by the play of one
br other of five organs, viz. the throat, the palate, the tongue, the
teeth, or the lips, but not interrupted or stopped by the actual
contact of any of these organs.
a. Hence ^r a, ^ i, gr u, ^ n, * Iri, with their respective long
forms, are simple vowels, belonging to the guttural, palatal, labial,
cerebral, and dental classes respectively, according to the organ
principally concerned in their modulation. But u e and TJ ai are
half guttural, half palatal ; ^ft o and ^ au half guttural, half labial.
See 18. c.
b. The vowels are, of course, held to be soft letters.
30. A consonant is not the modulation, but the actual stoppage,
of the vocal stream of breath by the contact of one or other of the
five organs, and cannot be enunciated without a vowel. Hence
the consonants from k to m in the table on p. i are often designated
by the term sparsa or sprishta, 'resulting from contact;' while the
semivowels y, r, I, v are called ishat -sprishta, ' resulting from slight
contact/ By native grammarians they are sometimes said to be
avidyamdna-vat, ' as if they did not exist/ because they have no
svara (sound or accent). Another name for consonant is vyahjana,
probably so called as 'distinguishing' sound.
a. All the consonants, therefore, are arranged under the five heads
of gutturals, palatals, cerebrals, dentals, and labials, according to the
organ concerned in stopping the vocal sound.
b. Again, the first two consonants in each of the five classes, and
the sibilants, are called hard or surd, i. e. non-sonant (a-ghosha],
because the vocal stream is abruptly and completely interrupted,
and no ghosha or sound allowed to escape ; while all the other
letters are called soft or sonant (ghosha-vat, 'having sound'),
because the vocal sound is less suddenly and completely arrested,
and they are articulated with a soft sound or low murmur
(ghosha).
c. Observe, that the palatal stop is only a modification of the
LETTERS. 17
guttural, the point of contact being moved more forward from the
throat towards the palate"".
In the same way the cerebral (murdhanya) stop is a modification
of the dental. See 13.
d. The cerebral letters have probably been introduced into
Sanskrit through pre-existing dialects, such as the Dravidian, with
which it came in contact (see 24). As these letters are pronounced
chiefly with the help of the tongue, they are sometimes appro-
priately called linguals.
21. A nasal or narisonant letter is a soft letter, in the utterance
of which the vocal stream of breath incompletely arrested, as in all
soft letters, is forced through the nose instead of the lips. As the
soft letters are of five kinds, according to the organ which interrupts
the vocal breathing, so the nasal letters are five, viz. guttural, palatal,
cerebral, dental, and labial. See 15.
22. The semivowels y, r, /, v (called Wfr:^l antahstha or antah-
sthd because they stand between the other consonants and the
sibilants) are formed by a vocal breathing, which is only half
interrupted, the several organs being only slightly touched (ishat-
sprishta) by the tongue. They are, therefore, soft or sonant
consonants, approaching nearly to the character of vowels in
fact, half vowels, half consonants. See 16.
a. Each class of soft letters (excepting the guttural) has its own
kindred semivowel to which it is nearly related. Thus the palatal
soft letters ^ i, \ i, T* e, ^ ai, r j, have "^ y for their kindred semi-
vowel. Similarly T r is the kindred semivowel of the cerebral soft
letters ^ n, ^ n, and ? d; so also <^ / of the dentals o Iri, o lri y
and ^ d f ; and ^ v of "7 u, "& u, "sft o, ^ au, and * b.
b. The guttural soft letters have no kindred semivowel in Sanskrit,
unless the aspirate 7 h be so regarded.
* The relationship of the palatal to the guttural letters is proved by their fre-
quent interchangeableness in Sanskrit and in other languages. See 24, 25, and 176,
and compare church with kirk, Sanskrit tatvdr with Latin quatuor, Sanskrit 6a with
Latin que and Greek Kai, Sanskrit jdnu with English knee, Greek yow, Latin genu.
Some German scholars represent the palatals ^ and ^ by k' and g '.
f That "^ I is a dental, and kindred to ^ d, is proved by its interchangeableness
with d in cognate languages. Thus lacrima, OaKpVfj.a. Compare also
18 LETTERS.
23. The sibilants or hissing sounds (called "3iW^ ushman by native
grammarians) are hard letters, which, nevertheless, strictly speaking,
have in some measure the character of vowels. The organs of
speech in uttering them, although not closed, are more contracted
and less opened (ishad-vwrita) than in vowels, and the vocal stream
of breath in passing through the teeth experiences a friction which
causes sibilation.
a. The aspirate 7 h, although a soft letter, is also called an ushman.
b. The palatal, cerebral, and dental classes of letters have each their own sibilant
(viz. 9^, "W, ^, respectively, see 17). The Ardha-visarga, called Jihvdmuliya (X=%),
was once the guttural sibilation, and that called Upadhmdmya (X=</>) the labial sibila-
tion (see 8. a) ; but these two latter, though called ushman, have now gone out of use.
Visarga (I) is also sometimes, though less correctly, called an ushman. The exact
labial sibilation denoted by/, and the soft sibilation z are unknown in Sanskrit.
24. That some of the consonants did not exist in the original Sanskrit alphabet,
but have been added at later periods, will be made clear by a reference to the ex-
amples below, exhibiting the interchange of letters in Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin.
The palatals 6, 6h, j, jh, n were probably developed out of the corresponding
gutturals ; the cerebrals t, th, d, dh, n are thought to be of Dravidian origin ;
the guttural nasal n is evidently for an original n or m before a guttural letter;
I is supposed to be a more modern form of r; s belongs to the palatal class, and
is generally for an original k ; sh is for an original s, cf. root ush, ' to burn,' with
Lat. us-tu-s, from ur-o; h is for an original ffh, sometimes for dh, and occasionally
for bh (e. g. root grah, ' to seize,' for the Vedic grabh}.
Of the vowels probably only a, i, u were original ; ri is not original, and seems
to have been a weakened pronunciation of the syllable ar, and at a later period
Iri of al. In Prakrit n is represented by either t or u. The diphthongs are of
course formed by the union of simple vowels (see 29).
INTERCHANGE OP LETTERS IN SANSKRIT, GREEK, AND LATIN.
25. The following is a list of examples exhibiting some of the commonest inter-
changes of letters in Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin.
Sanskrit a = Greek a, e, o, = Latin a, e, o, i, u; e.g. Sk. a/ra-s, 'a plain,'
Gr. aypo-f, L. ager ; Sk. jaw-as, 'race,' Gr. yev-of, L. gen-us; Sk. janas-as,
gen. c., Gr. yve((r)-0f, yevcv$, L. gener-is; Sk. nava-s, 'new,' Gr. ve'o-f,
L. novu-s ; Sk. a^as-as, ' of work,' L. oper-is.
Sanskrit d = Gr. a, r h u, L. d, , 6; e. g. Sk. ma-tri (stem mdtar-), ' & mother,'
Gr. pyTyp (stem pyrep-), Dor. paTyp, Lat. miter; Sk. jna-ta-s, ' known,' Gr.
yvu-TO-f, L. (g)no-tu-s; Sk. sami-, 'half,' Gr. i)}M-, L. semi-.
Sanskrit i= Gr. l, = L. i, e; e. g. Sk. sami-, 'half,' Gr. ^/x<-, L. semi-.
Sanskrit /= Gr. /, = L. {; e. g. Sk.jiv-a-s, 'living,' Gr. /3<W, L. viv-u-s.
Sanskrit u = Gr. V, = L. M, o; e. g. Sk. wru-s, ' broad,' Gr. tvpv-i ; Sk. jdnu,
' knee,' Gr. yo'vv, L. genu.
INTERCHANGE OF LETTERS IN SANSKRIT, GREEK, AND LATIN. 19
Sanskrit w= Gr. v, = L. u; e. g. Sk. mush, mush-a-s, &c., 'a mouse,' Gr. f*v$,
L. mus.
Sanskrit n, i. e. ar = Gr. p with a short vowel, = L. r with a short vowel ; e. g.
Sk. mri-ta-s, ' dead,' Gr. (3po-TO-$ (for fJipo-ro-f or flOp-TO-f), L. mor-tuu-sj Sk.
mdtnbhyas, 'from mothers,' L. matr\bus- Sk. mdtnshu, 'in mothers,' Gr. (Ayrpao't.
Sanskrit rt'= Gr. p with a vowel, = L. r with a vowel; e. g. Sk. ddtr'in, ace. pi.
of ddtri, 'a giver,' Gr. ^o-T^p-a?, L. da-tor-es; Sk. ma?ris, L. mattes.
Sanskrit e=Gr. <, e/, o/, = L. oi, oi, #, os, i, M; e.g. Sk. ve6-a-s, 'an
abode,' Gr. (F)d'iK(i-s, L. view-s,- Sk. e-wi, 'I go,' Gr. ei-pi ; Sk. eva-s, 'going,'
' a course,' Gr. ai-uv, L. sevu-m.
Sanskrit ai = Gr. , 17, co, = L. in certain inflexions ; e. g. Sk. devy&i, ' to a
goddess,' Gr. Seoi, L. dese.
Sanskrit o = Gr. v, v, of, = L. au, o, u; e. g. Sk. gola-s, ' a ball,' Gr.
Sk. q/as, 'power,' L. au$reo.
Sanskrit aw=Gr. au, *?v, = L. a; e.g. Sk. n&u-s, 'a ship,' Gr. vavf,
L. navis, n&uta, ' a sailor.'
Sanskrit fc, fcA, (5, = Gr. tf, = L. c, q; e. g. Sk. kram's, kravya-m, 'raw flesh/'
Gr. Kpa$, KpeTov, L. crw-or, caro; Sk. khaZa-s, 'a granary,' said, 'a hall,' Gr.
KaXid, L. ceWa; Sk. da, 'and,' Gr. KO.I, L. -qwe.
Sanskrit g, j, = Gr. y (/3), = L. ^ (J); e. g. Sk. yug-a-m, ' a yoke,' Gr. vy-o-v,
L.jug-u-m; Sk. jaww, 'knee,' Gr. yovy, L. genu; Sk. ajra-s, 'a plain,' Gr. aypo-$,
L. ager; Sk. gau-s, 'a cow,' Gr. fiov-f, L. bo*; Sk. gMrtt-*, 'heavy,' Gr. (3apv-$,
L. gra-i-s.
Sanskrit gh = Gr. %, = L. $r; e.g. Sk. rt. s%h, 'to ascend,' Gr are^-o?,
o-Ti'xo-S, L. ve-stig-ium; Sk. Zaghw-s, 'light,' Gr. fAa^y-?.
Sanskrit <fA = Gr. fftf, = L. sc; e. g. Sk. tiadyd, ' shade,' Gr. (TKUX, ; Sk. rt. 6hid,
'to cleave,' Gr. o'X^-a', 0%/0-"% L. scind-o.
Sanskrit f (f A) = Gr. T, = L. t; e. g. Sk. trayas, ' three,' Gr. T/jeiV, L. tre*.
Sanskrit rf=Gr. 0, = L. d- e.g. Sk. dam-a-s, 'a house,' Gr. do/*o-f, L. domw-s.
Sanskrit rfA = Gr. 6, = L. initial/, non-initial d, b; e. g. Sk. da-dhd-mi, 'I place,
Gr. T/-&J-/X* ; Sk. dhw-ma-s, ' smoke,' Gr. 0v-/xo'-?, L. iu-mu-s; Sk. udh-ar,
' udder,' Gr. ovQap, L. wber; Sk. adh-as, 'food,' &c., Gr. avQ-o$, L. ad-or.
Sanskrit ^j (^A) = Gr. TT (0), = L. p (/); e. g. Sk. pitri, Gr. war^p, L. pa<er;
Sk. phwZ/a-m, ' a flower,' Gr. (^vAAc-v, L. foliu-m.
Sanskrit 6 = Gr. /S(T), = L. 6(/); e.g. Sk. rt. lamb, 'to hang down,' L. Idb-i;
Sk. budh-na-s, 'ground,' Gr. Trufi-jtx^v, L. iundu-s ; Sk. bwdA, 'to know,' Gr.
Sanskrit bh = Gr. <f>, = L. initial /, non-initial b; e. g. Sk. rt. bhri, bhar-a-mi,
'I bear,' Gr. </>ep-a>, L. fer-o; Sk. nabh-as, 'vapour,' 'a cloud,' Gr. vt(f>-og,
L. nub-e-s.
Sanskrit n, n, = Gr. y before gutturals, = L. n; e.g. Sk. an-^a-s, a hook,'
Gr. ayK-uv, oyK-o-g, L. anc-u-s, unc-u-s; Sk. puritan, 'five,' Gr. ff&Tf, L.
quinque.
D 2
20 INTERCHANGE OF LETTERS IN SANSKRIT, GREEK, AND LATIN.
Sanskrit n, n, = Gr. v, L. n; e. g. Sk. nava-s, ' new,' Gr. vec-?, L. novu-s.
Sanskrit wz = Gr. /*, = L. m,- e. g. Sk. ma'-fri, 'a mother,' Gr. py-Typ, L. ma-<er.
Sanskrit y = Gr. , ", = L. j; e.g. Sk. yakrit, 'liver,' Gr. yirap, L. jecur;
Sk. juff-a-m, Gr. %vy-o-v, L. ^ua-u-m.
Sanskrit r = Gr. p, A, = L. r, Z; e.g. Sk. raj an, 'king,' L. rex (stem ry-); Sk.
sara-s, 'whey,' Gr. OpO-f t L. seru-m; Sk. rudh-i-ra-s, 'blood-red,' Gr. fpvO-pos,
L. ruber, rufus; Sk. rt. ant, sravas, sru-ta-s, Gr. /cAe-Of, KAu-TO-f, L. in-c\y-tu-s.
Sanskrit Z=Gr. A, = L. J; e.g. Sk. rt. lu, lu-nd-mi, 'I cut,' Gr. Av-cy, L. re-lw-o,
so-to-o (for se-lw-o); Sk. k'A (=n'A), 'to lick,' Gr. A/%-O>, A/^-vo-f, L. lin^-o,
liy-wn'-o.
Sanskrit =rGr. f (u), or disappears, = L. w (M); e.g. Sk. nava-s, new,' Gr.
vefo-f, i.e. veo-f, L. nov-sy Sk. vish-a-s, 'poison,' Gr. i-o-$ t L. \irus; Sk. rfvi,
' two,' Gr. Wo, L. duo.
Sanskrit s (for an original k) = Gr. f, = L. c, 9 ; e. g. Sk. dasan, ' ten,' Gr. oe/ca,
L. decem; Sk. as'ca-s, 'a horse,' Gr. /TTTTO-?, iKKO-f, L. eqwu-sy Sk. sW, 'a dog,'
Gr. KV-WV, L. cara-i*.
Sanskrit s, sh, = Gr. 0", ' , disappears between two vowels, = L. s, changes to r
between two vowels; e.g. Sk. asti, 'he is,' Gr. ear/, L. est; Sk. janaa-as, 'of a
race,' Gr. yve(a}-o$, yevovg, L. gener-is; Sk. vish-as, 'poison,' Gr. i-0fi
L. oir-ttsy Sk. shaf, ' six,' Gr. e, L. sex.
Sanskrit h (for an original gh, sometimes for dh, and occasionally for bh) = Gr.
%, /f (sometimes 5),= L. h, c, q; e.g. Sk. hi-ma-s, winter,' Gr. %'-", L. \iiems;
Sk. hrid-aya-m, 'the heart,' Gr. Kap^-ia, L. cor (stem cord-}; Sk. haw for ghara
and dhan (in ja-gha'n-a, 'he killed;' m-dhara-a, 'death'), Gr. 5av-ar&f ; Sk. hi<a
for dhtte, ' placed ' (fr. dhd, Gr. ft?), Gr. 0eroV.
THE INDIAN METHOD OF WRITING.
36. According to Hindu grammarians every syllable ought to
end in a vowel *, except at the end of a clause or sentence, and
every final consonant ought to be attracted to the beginning of
the next syllable ; so that where a word ends in a consonant, that
consonant ought to be pronounced with the initial letter of the
next word. Hence in some Sanskrit MSS. all the syllables are
separated by slight spaces, and in others all the words are joined
together without any separation. Thus the two words ^ruO? Tjsn
dsid raj a would in some books be written ^n *ft "51 TT and in others
There seems little reason for considering the mere spaces
left between the words of a sentence to be incompatible with the
* Unless it end in Anusvara or Visarga //, which in theory are the only conso-
nantal sounds allowed to close a syllable until the end of a sentence.
METHOD OF WRITING. 21
operation of euphonic laws. Therefore in some Sanskrit books
printed in Roman type every uncompounded word capable of separa-
tion is separated, e. g. pitur dhanam ddatte ; which is even printed
in Deva-nagari letters (by those scholars who allow an extension of
the use of the mark called Virama) thus, ftnjT V*f*T ^TT^%, for
The following words and passages in the Sanskrit and English
character, are given that the Student, before proceeding further in
the Grammar, may exercise himself in reading the letters and in
transliteration.
To be turned into English letters.
,
5,
To be turned into Sanskrit letters.
Ada, asa, ali, ddi, dkhu, dgas, iti, isah, ihd y uddra, upanishad,
uparodha, uru, usha, rishi, eka, kakud, katu, koshah, ffaura, ghata,
caitya, Set, thalam, jetri, jhiri, tagara, damara, dhdla, nama 9
tatas, tathdi trina, tushdra, deha, daitya, dhavala, nanu, nayanam,
niddnam, pitri, bhauma, bheshajam, marus, mahat, yvga, rush, rudhis,
lauha, vivekas, satam, shodasan, sukhin, hridaya, tatra, adya, buddhi,
arka, kratu, ansa, anka, anga^ an6ala, anfana, kantha, anda, anta,
manda, sampurna.
22 METHOD OF WRITING.
The following story has the Sanskrit and English letters
interlined.
asti hastindpure vildso ndma rajakah tasya garda-
bho 'tibhdravdhandd durbalo mumurshur abhavat tatas tena
rajakendsau vydghratarmand pra66hddydranyasamipe sasyakshetre
: i ?nft
motitafy tato durdd avalokya vydghrabuddhyd kshetrapa-
k satvaram paldyante atha kendpi sasyarakshakena dhusara-
kambalakritatanutrdnena dhanuhkdndam sajjikritydvanatakdyena
l^T^ ferfH I Hrf^ W "^ ^ ^|1 T^H: y ^ I ^
ekdnte sthitam tatas tarn ca dure drishtvd gardabhah pushtdngo
gardabhiyamiti matvd sabdam kurvdnas tadabhimukham dhdvitaJj,
tatas tena Sasyarakshakena gardabho 'yamiti jndtvd lilayaiva
vydpdditah.
The following story is to be turned into Sanskrit letters.
Asti sriparvatamadhye brahmapurdkhyam nagaram. Tatra saila-
sikhare ghantdkarno ndma rdkahasah prativasatiti janapravddah &ru-
yate. Ekadd ghantdm dddya paldyamdnah ka$6i6 6auro vydghrena
vydpdditah. Tatpdnipatitd ghantd vdnaraify prdptd. Te vdnards tdm
ghantdm anukshanam vddayanti. Tato nagarajanair manushyah khd-
dito drishtafy pratikshanam ghantdrdvas6a fruyate. Anantaram
ghantdkarnafi kupito manushydn khddati ghantdm 6a vddayatityu-
SANDHI OR EUPHONIC COMBINATION OF LETTERS. 23
ktvd jandh sarve nagardt paldyitdh. Tatalj, kardlayd ndma kuttinyd
vimrisya markatd ghantdm vddayanti svayam vijndya raja vijndpitah.
Deva yadi kiyaddhanopakshayah kriyate taddham enam ghantdkarnam
sddhaydmi. Tato rdjnd tushtena tasyai dhanam dattam. Kuttinyd
6a mandalam kritvd tatra ganesddigauravam darsayitvd svayam
vdnarapriyaphaldnydddya vanam pravisya phaldnydkirndni. Tato
ghantdm parityajya vdnardh phaldsaktd babhuvuh. Kuttini 6a
ghantdm grihitvd nagaram dgatd sakalalokapujydbhavat.
CHAPTER II.
SANDHI OR EUPHONIC COMBINATION OF LETTERS.
WE are accustomed in Greek and Latin to certain euphonic
changes of letters. Thus for the perfect passive participle of reg-o
(stem reg-) we have (not reg-tu-s but) rec-tu-s, the soft g being changed
to the hard c before the hard t (cf. rex for reg-s). In many words
a final consonant assimilates with an initial; thus a-vv with 71/07x17
becomes o-vyyvcofjuj ; ev with Xa/UTrw, eXXa/xTra). Suppressus is
written for subpressus ; appellatus for adpellatus ; immensus for
inmensus ; affinitas for adfinitas ; qffero for obfero, but in perfect
obtuli; colloquium for conloquium; irrogo for inrogo. In English,
assimilations of the same kind take place in pronunciation, though
they are not always recognized in writing ; thus cupboard is pro-
nounced as if written cub-board, and blackguard as if written ^lag-
guard. These laws for the euphonic junction of letters are applied
throughout the whole range of Sanskrit grammar ; and that, too,
not only in the interior of words when a stem is united with its
terminations and suffixes, but in combining words in the same
sentence. Thus, if the sentence 'Rara avis in terris' were Sanskrit,
it would require, by the laws of Sandhi or combination, to be written
Rardvirinsterrih. The learner is recommended, after learning the
most common rules of combination, printed in large type, to pass
at once to the declension of nouns and conjugation of verbs.
24 EUPHONIC COMBINATION OP VOWELS.
There are two classes of rules of Sandhi, viz. i. Those affecting
the junction of final and initial letters of completely formed words
in sentences as well as of the stems of words in compounds ;
2. Those which take effect in the process of forming words by the
junction of roots and of stems, whether nominal or verbal, with suffixes
and terminations (see 74. a). As the rules which apply to one class
are generally applicable to the other, it will be convenient to consider
them together ; but some of the rules which come into operation in
the formation of verbs, are reserved till they are wanted (see 294).
SECT. I. EUPHONIC PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION
OF VOWELS.
27. The changes of vowels called Guna and Vriddhi should at once
be impressed on the memory. When the vowels ^ i and ^ i become
^ e, this is called a Guna change, or qualification (guna meaning
* quality '). When i and z become T* ai, this is called a Vriddhi
change, or increase. Similarly, "3" u and ^5 u are often changed to
their Guna ^ft o, and Vriddhi TOT au ; ^ ri and ^ ri to their Guna
TOT; ar, and Vriddhi TOTT: dr; and TO a, though it can have no corres-
ponding Guna change, has a Vriddhi substitute in TOT d.
a. Native grammarians consider that a is already a Guna letter, and on that
account can have no Guna substitute. Indeed they regard a, e, o as the only
Guna sounds, and a, ai, au as the only Vriddhi j a and d being the real Guna and
Vriddhi representatives of the vowels^" and "^. It is required, however, that r
should always be connected with a and a when these vowels are substituted for ri;
and I, when they are substituted for Iri.
b. Observe It will be convenient in describing the change of a vowel to its
Guna or Vriddhi substitute, to speak of that vowel as gunated or vriddhied.
28. In the formation of stems, whether nominal or verbal, the
vowels of roots cannot be gunated or vriddhied, if they are followed
by double consonants, i.e. if they are long by position; nor can a
vowel long by nature be so changed, unless it be final. The vowel
TO a is, as we have seen, already a Guna letter. See 27. a.
a. But in secondary derivatives long vowels are sometimes vriddhied : Wir3
sthaula, ' robust,' from ^rt sthula ; tf3 graiva, ' belonging to the neck,' from
?fteT gricd; *fhr maula, 'radical,' from JJc5 mulct (see 80. B).
29. The Guna sounds ^r e, TOt o are diphthongal, that is, composed
of two simple vowel sounds. Thus, ^ e is made up of a and i ;
TOT o of a and u ; so that a final TO a will naturally coalesce with an
EUPHONIC COMBINATION OF VOWELS. 25
initial ^ into e; with an initial 7 u into o. (Compare 18. c.) Again,
^ ar may be regarded as made up of a and ri; so that a final ^ a
will blend with an initial ^ ri into ar.
a. Similarly, the Vriddhi diphthong ^ ai is made up of a and e,
or (which is the same) d and * / and 'OT au of a and o, or (which is
the same) a and u. Hence, a final a will naturally blend with an
initial ^ e into ai ; and with an initial wfr o into aw. (Compare 18. c ;
and see note to table in next page.) The simple vowels in their
diphthongal unions are not very closely combined, so that e, o, ai,
au are liable to be resolved into their constituent simple elements.
b. If ai is composed of d and i, it may be asked, How is it that long d as well
as short a blends with i into e (see 32), and not into ai? In answer to this some
scholars have maintained that a long vowel at the end of a word naturally shortens
itself before an initial vowel (see 38. i), and that the very meaning of Guna is the
prefixing of short a, and the very meaning of Vriddhi, the prefixing of long d, to a
simple vowel. Hence the Guna of t is originally a i, though the two simple vowels
blend afterwards into e. Similarly, the original Guna of u is a u, blending after-
wards into o; the original Guna of ri is a ri, blending into ar.
c. The practice of gunating vowels is not peculiar to Sanskrit. The San-
skrit a answers to the Greek e or o (see 25), and Sanskrit ^fa emi, 'l go,'
which in the ist pers. plural becomes ^i^ imas, 'we go,' is originally a i mi,
corresponding to the Greek ft pi and </*ev. Similarly in Greek, the root </>uy
(e-(pvy-ov) is in the present favy-ca. Compare also the Sanskrit veda (vaida),
'he knows,' with Greek oToa; and compare Xt-Ao^TT-a, perfect of A/TT, with the
Sanskrit perfect.
30. Again, let it be borne in mind that TJ y is the kindred semi-
vowel of i, i, e, and ai; ^ v of u, u, o, and au; t r of ri and ri;
and <^ I of Iri and Iri. So that i, i, e, ai, at the end of words, when
the next begins with a vowel, may often pass into y, y, ay, ay,
respectively ; u, u, o, au, into v, v, av, dv ; and ri, ri, into r.
[Observe Iri is not found as a final.]
The interchange of vowels with their own semivowels is called
by Sanskrit grammarians samprasdrana.
In English we recognize the same interchangeableness, though
not in the same way; thus we write holy, holier ; asy, easily; and
we use ow for ou in now, cow, &c.
In order to impress the above rules on the mind, the substance
of them is embodied in the following table :
26
EUPHONIC COMBINATION OF VOWELS.
Simple
vowels, a or a i or i uoru
rior r i Iri or Iri
Guna substitute, e o
\ \
Vriddhi substitute, d ai au
ar al
\ \
dr dl
Simple
vowels,
i or i uoru
ri or ri Iri or Iri
Corresponding semivowel,
y ^
r I
Guna,
Guna resolved,
With semivowel substitute,
e . o
i ; i
a + i a+u
\ \
ay av
Vriddhi
t
ai au
\ \
a +e a + o
\ i
Vriddhi
resolved,
1 1
a + a + i a + a +*
\
, *d + i *d + u
It
With semivowel substitute,
1
dy dv
The following rules will now be easily understood. They apply
generally to the junction (i) of separate words in sentences and
compounds (2) of roots and stems with suffixes and terminations.
To distinguish the second class of combinations the sign + will be
used in the examples given. The object of most of the rules is to
prevent a hiatus between vowels f.
31. If any simple vowel (short or long) is followed by a similar
simple vowel (short or long), the two vowels blend into one long
similar vowel (Pan. vi. i, 101) ; e. g.
T ^rftjJ ^ na asti iha becomes fiw1^ ndstfha, ' he is not here.'
<lfl ^H^J 3Tl*iJ rdjd astu uttamah becomes TTiltci^TI rdjdstuttamah, let the
king be supreme.'
anta becomes ^flqiii jtodnta, ' end of life.'
adhi isvara becomes *t*fl*K adhisvara, ' supreme lord.'
ritu utsava becomes ^IJTH^ fitutsava, ' festival of the season.'
itri riddhi becomes fs ri Hgj pitriddhi, ' a father's prosperity.'
* Since e=a-fi and o=a+w, therefore a-\-e will equal a-f a+i or a-fi; and
a-f o will equal a+a+w or d+u.
t In the Vedic hymns hiatus between vowels is not uncommon ; cf. note to 66.
EUPHONIC COMBINATION OF VOWELS. 27
33. "3T a or ^n a, followed by the dissimilar vowels ^ i, <T u, ^ ri
(short or long), blends with i or i into the Guna ^ e; with u or u
into the Guna ^ft o*; with ri or ri into the Guna ^it ar (Pan. vr.
i, 87); e.g.
arama isvara becomes t|Ti yjn.parames'vara, ' mighty lord.*
hita upadesa becomes f^HTT^$I hitopades'a, ' friendly instruction.'
'ij$M ^n gangd udaka becomes ifjM^tf gangodaka, ' Ganges-water.'
tava riddhi becomes nqfs tavarddhi, ' thy growth.'
wza^a nsAi becomes Tsffn maharshi, ' a great sage.'
Similarly, if^ "e^^HT fapa Irikdra becomes ill sWi. tavalkdra, 'thy letter /ri.'
33. SS a or ^STT a, followed by the diphthongs ^ e, ^ft o, ^ az, or
w aw, blends with e into the Vriddhi ai ; with ai also into a* ; with
o into the Vriddhi au ; with aw also into au (Pan. vi. i, 88); e.g.
para edhita becomes ITfViT paraidhita, ' nourished by another.'
vidyd eva becomes f^S^ vidyaiva, ' knowledge indeed.'
T <j y d*l rfera aisvarya becomes ^q*a5 devai$varya, ' majesty of deity.'
naf^ alpa ojas becomes '*f<siii^ alpaujas, ' little energy.'
T^T W^I gangd ogha becomes TJJMM gangaugha, ' Ganges-current.'
1JT W^V^wmz aushadha becomes ^<J ol jv araushadha, 'fever-medicine.'
34. ^ i, "3 u, ^ ri (short or long), followed by any dissimilar
vowel or diphthong, pass into their kindred semivowels; viz. i or i
into y ; u or u into v\; ri or ri into r (Pan. vi. i, 77); e.g.
1 *' os/ro becomes ^ T ' a T^r agny-astra, ' fire-arms.'
TTuT "3~<4i~i prati uvd6a becomes Hi^Mi^f praty-uvd6a, 'he spoke in reply.'
iddnim becomes (i^l^ill*^^ iddntm, ' but now.'
i dnanda becomes TTc4l1^ mdtr-dnanda, ' a mother's joy.'
mdtri autsukya becomes *uefir*J'W mdtr-autsukya, ' a mother's
anxiety.'
35. Final ^ e and ^ft o, followed by an initial ^( a, if it begin
another word, remain unchanged, and the initial ^T a is cut off
(Pan. vi. i. 109); e.g.
te api becomes ffSftf te 'pi, 'they indeed ' (see 10).
so api becomes ^nsftl so 'pi, ' he indeed.'
* The blending of a and i into the sound e is recognized in English in such
words as sai/, nail, &c.; and the blending of a and u into the sound o is exemplified
by the French faute, baume, &c.
t Illustrated by some English words ; thus we pronounce a word like
million as if written millyo'fi ; and we write evangelist (not euangelist), saying,
playing, &c.
E 2
28 EUPHONIC COMBINATION OF VOWELS PRAGRIHYA.
a. In compounds the elision of initial a after a stem like go appears to be optional,
e.g. ffo-'6vdh or go-avdh, ' oxen and horses' (Pan. vi. i, 122). See 38. e.
b. But go may become gava in certain compounds, as go agram may become gavd-
gram, see 38. e; so go indra becomes gavendra, ' lord of kine,' or gav-indraby 36.
36. But followed by o, , z, w, M, ri, n, e, o, ai, au, if any one of
these begin another word, final ^ e and wt o are changed to ay and aw
respectively; and the y of ay, and more rarely the v of aw, may be
dropped, leaving the a uninfluenced by the following vowel (Pan. vi.
1,78); e.g.
F vitflWTt te dgatdh becomes nti'imJ toy dgatdh, and then IT ^TTiTFI ta dgatdh,
' they have come. 5
Similarly, fq!U ^ vishno iha becomes fqwHfcj^ vishnav iha, and then fan?T ^
vishnu iha, ' O Vishnu, here !'
Observe When go, 'a cow,' becomes gav in compounds, v is retained; e.g.
*ft ^5PC go fsvara becomes i^lnK yav-icara, ' owner of kine.'
*TT wVent^o okas becomes T^TcR^^ac-o&as, ' abode of cattle.'
a. And in the case of e and ^ft o followed by any vowel or
diphthong in the same word, even though the following vowel or
diphthong be a or e or o, then e must still be changed to ay, and
o to av, but both y and v must be retained ; e. g.
Si + TO je+a becomes "vWjaya, the present stem of.;*, ' to conquer ' (see 263).
^T T T + J? agne+e becomes wtM agnaye, ' to fire ' (dative case).
*TF 4- ^T bho+a becomes *T^ bhava, the present stem of bhu (see 263).
37. ^ z and ^ au, followed by any vowel or diphthong,
similar or dissimilar, are changed to dy and dv respectively (Pan.
vi. i, 78); e.g.
W^R ^Tfa kasmai apt becomes ^WT^ftl kasmdy apt, ' to any one whatever.'
*, f
T + ^?^ro+a* becomes HT^ rdyas, riches ' (nom. plur.).
^^T ^T^H dadau annum becomes ^^isqi daddv annam, ' he gave food.'
*fr + ^Tr nau+au becomes TRT ndvau, 'two ships' (nom. du.).
a. If both the words be complete words, the y and v are occasionally
dropped, but not so usually as in the case of e at 36 ; thus FWT ^fftl kasmd apt
for cn**n*4^ kasmdy apt, and ^T vq^ dadd annam for ^^t^** x daddv annam.
PBAGRIHTA EXCEPTIONS.
38. There are some exceptions (usually called pragrihya, 'to be
taken or pronounced separately') caused by vowels which must,
under all circumstances, remain unchanged. The most noticeable
are the terminations of duals (whether of nouns, pronouns, or verbs)
EUPHONIC COMBINATION OP VOWELS PRAGRIHYA. 29
in i, u, or e (Pan. I. i, u). These are not acted on by following
vowels ; e. g.
Wl\ ^WT kav{ et au, 'these two poets;' < ^ 7 *J N 3t J 'T bandhu imau, 'these two rela-
tions;' ^n^WTCffiT 'these two sit down;' T^TT ^TT 'these two cook;'
Tflraif 'BTRTR^ we two lie down.'
Observe The same applies to ^nft ami, nom. pi. masc. of the pronoun ^3*^.
a. The Vedic asme and yushme are also pragrihya according to Pan. i. I, 13.
&. Prolated vowels (n./) remain unchanged, as wees. opHir^'SlGf 'Come,
Krishna, here,' &c. (Pan. vi. I, 125; vm. 2, 82).
c. A vocative case in o, when followed by the particle iti, may remain unchanged,
as fcjn ^fif vishno iti, or may follow 36.
d. Particles, when simple vowels, and ^Sl o, as the final of an interjection, remain
unchanged, as 3[ ^5 * indra, *O, Indra!' T w^l u umesa, ' O, lord of Uma!'
^TT ^^ aho indra, ' Ho, Indra!' (Pan. i. i, 14, 15.)
Observe This applies also to the exclamation ^3TT d (but not to the a which
native grammarians call vtf^ dn, and which is used as a preposition before verbs
and before nouns with the meanings ' to,' ' up to,' ' as far as,' ' until,' ' a little ') ;
e. g. ^TT IJ^T d evam, ' Ah, indeed ! ' (but d udakdt becomes odakdt, 'as far as
water ; ' d ushna becomes oshna, ' slightly warm ').
e. Before initial 'W a the ^n o of TO go, 'a cow,' remains unchanged and
optionally cuts off the a; e.g. *fi "& *x*\^go-agram, or wj^go-'gram, 'a multitude
of cows' (cf. 35. a. b, 36. Obs.).
Other Exceptions.
f. The final a or d of a preposition blends with the initial ^J ri of a root into dr
(not into ar) ; e. g. IT ^H = ^^ ' to g on ; ' T^ ^^ = <JHT^ ' to approach ;'
H ^I = in^ 'to flow forth;' ^Tf ^S[ = ^srra 'to obtain' (Pan. vi. I, 91).
Compare 4601-0. 2 5" / (X.
g. The final a of a preposition is generally cut off before verbs beginning with
^ e or 'St o; see 783. k. Obs. and 783.^. Obs. (Pan. vi. i, 89, 94).
Observe The particle ^ when it denotes uncertainty is said to have the same
effect on a preceding final a.
h. The "3! u which takes the place of the ^T of TT? in the ace. pi. of such words
"^
as JJtNI, 'a steer training for the plough,' requires Vriddhi after a, as KB (3^.
. The ^ u of fcF*J may remain or be changed to "3v before a vowel, as f^PJ ^T*
or f<i^fi^ ' whether said.'
,;". According to Sakalya, a, i, u, ri (short or long), final in a word, may option-
ally either remain unchanged (but, if long, must be shortened) before a word
beginning with ^ or follow the usual rule, thus "5TSI ^ffo: (or even "3STT ^ffat
'a Brahman who is a Rishi') may be either Rt ^ffot or "S?(f^, but in no case
can "WSn ^fal be allowed to remain unchanged. Similarly, flT *^fa may be
either ^if^ or MM^fa ' according to the Rishi.'
So in the case of i or or ri, final in a word, followed by dissimilar vowels, thus
30 EUPHONIC COMBINATION OP. VOWELS EXCEPTIONS.
is either "Vgifd or ^f^i ^T& 'the discus armed here.' But com-
pounded words follow the usual rule, as *T^ ^<* = *f^<*<* ' river-water.' Except
before words beginning with rt, as in the example
(Benfey's larger Gram. p. 52), and in ^fa^f^n ' made prosperous by (the power
of) the sword,' Maha-bh. xviii. 105.
k. The words WjJ 'a cat' and Wf 'the h'p,' when used in compounds, may
optionally cut off a preceding final a; e. g. <^rt W| is ^cil ij or
^frff is ^HTCte or ^>w 'the lower lip ;' (see Pan. vi. r, 94. Vart.); and
may be either f^cn^ or f^qT<*^ ' a deity.'
/. So also the sacred syllable ^SH*? and the preposition ^HT d may cut off a final a;
e. g. f^NR ^\ ~W. f^ltT<Jl |*n ' Om ! reverence to S'iva ;' f^R 5ff^ (i. e. WT with
^) = f^l%f^ ' O S'iva, come ! '
m. The following words illustrate the same irregularity: '5TR ^T'V becomes
5Ifi'^; F% ^T^ becomes ^K^^ 'jujube;' rtl^ci ^RT becomes ^i^rtl^l
'plough-handle;' (see Gana S'akandhv-adi to Pan. vi. i, 94.)
. The following compounds are also irregular (see Pan. vi. i, 89. Vart.):
wsfif^*!/! akshauhim, ' a complete army ' (from aksha uhini for vdhinf).
WS praudha, ' grown up ' (from pra udha).
W% prauha, ' reflection ' (from pra uha).
^3T svaira, ^ft^ svairin, ' self -willed ' (from sva ira).
3J*^Tff sukhdrta, ' affected by joy ' (from sukha rita).
m*u prdrna, 'principal debt' (from pra rind).
kambaldrna, ' debt of a blanket * (from kambula rina).
vasandrna, ' debt of a cloth ' (from vasana rina).
^1*1) l<D rindrna, ' debt of a debt ' (from rina rina).
ffa praisha, ' an invitation ;' ita praishya, ' a servant ' (from pra esha).
The annexed table exhibits the combinations of vowels at one
view. Supposing a word to end in u, and the next word to begin
with au, the student must carry his eye down the first column
(headed ' final vowels ') till he comes to u, and then along the top
horizontal line of 'initial vowels/ till he comes to au. At the
junction of the perpendicular column under au and the horizontal
line beginning u, will be the required combination, viz. v au.
TABLE OP THE COMMONEST CHANGES OF VOWELS.
31
2 2.
O
cr
P
?
o
fD M
O CD
P
p
P-*
cr
3 fD
I 3
p-
fD *Q
a
8
o a . - 2 8
c*.
" ^
o p
i (
to
co co to "*
& CO P* ^ *2x 8X
CO ^ k CO
o\ .ON
^ Ox ^
H
VOWELS.
Ox
o a v a <* * <s
^
H-
f. Oo Oo
$ ^ Ox
a, H-
a
v. a a v, a a
a
Ox **
Ox
a Ox a a * <s
o ^^ ^i
(- OO OO
Oo Oo 55^
Ox
Ox Ox Ox Ox Ox Ox
Ox
Ox
a Ox a a * <s
to.
Oo Oo
OO * Oo a
1 1 tO
ee. CO
<s>x 4.
8 <*
|>
a Ox a a **
,~ CQ ^^
Oo OO
OO ,o x OO ^
H tO
I-
a Ox a a ^
Q ^8 ^8
Oo Oo -.
4^ 1-1 * NV
OO OO
8
8888 8
8
8x >
<s v
a Ox a a **
OO Oo ^
. . ^x
Oo Oo
Sx
8x 8x 8x 8x 8x
8x
,
*2
Oo *^4 Oo
2. 2. . 2. 2.
oo oo a
4*- to -^
3.
Ox
a ON. a a <s
2
*
2, - 3 , -a, -3, "* **
oo oo a
4^ to -*
fb fO
1 N
a Ox a a -s <s
00 OO
Oo Oo O
4^- Oo "
<*
f^ <% <b C6 C6
,
Ox
a Ox a a -
s
ft.
Oo Oo
4^ 4^
a a a g a a^
Oo 00 O
_. OO
a
a g
-^ .
*
a Ox a a - .
Oo, Oo
oo oo a
4- Oo 8
o o o o o o
O
Ox
a Ox a a *
<S
8
Oo Oo
a a aa~^aa
8888 8 8
oo oo a
* a 00 8
8
a >-.
8 to
32
EUPHONIC COMBINATION OF CONSONANTS.
SECT. II. EUPHONIC COMBINATION OF CONSONANTS.
39. Before proceeding to the combination of consonants, let the
letters be again regarded as divided into two grand classes of Hard
and Soft, as explained at 20. b.
HARD OB SURD.
SOFT OB SONANT.
k kh
9 9 h
n
h
a d
6 6h
i
j 3 h
n
y
it e ai
n
t fr
sh
b
4 dh
n
r
ri ri
or
t th
8
d dh
n
I
Iri Iri
m
p ph
b bh
m
V
u 11 o au
40. The stems of nouns and the roots of verbs may end in almost any letter,
and these final letters (whether single or conjunct) are allowed to remain when the
crude words stand alone ; but complete words, when they stand alone or at the
end of a sentence, can only, according to the native system, end in one of nine
consonants (or, including Visarga and the Anusvara substituted for final m, eleven),
viz. W k, <T f, H t, "^p, ^ n, *^ n, *^ n, *? m, c^ I, Visarga ('), and Anusvara (m);
and even stems of words not ending in one of the above eleven letters are liable to
undergo changes which shall make them so end, before the process of their
euphonic union with other suffixes and other words in sentences is commenced.
Panini (vni. 4, 56), however, seems to allow a word ending in one of the soft
consonants g, d, d, and b, optionally to stand at the end of a sentence or before a
pause ; e. g. ^Tcjf or ^1*1, &c.
41. In this Grammar the soft letters g, 4, d, b, the sibilant ^ s }
and the semivowel T r will be admitted as possible finals of com-
plete words standing alone, as well as of stems preparing for
euphonic combinations ; but the following five preliminary laws
must be enforced under any circumstances, without reference to
the initial letters of succeeding words.
FIVE PRELIMINARY LAWS.
I. A conjunct quiescent consonant (i. e. a conjunct consonant
having no vowel after it) is not generally allowed to remain at the
end of a word, but must be reduced to a simple one. As a general
rule this is done by dropping every consonant except the first;
thus 6arants becomes 6aran, avets becomes avet, 6ikirsh becomes 6ikir
(see 1 66. a).
GENERAL RULES FOR COMBINING CONSONANTS. 33
Observe, however, that ^J k, ^ t, T^ t, *{p, when preceded by ^C r, remain
conjunct if both elements of these conjunct letters are either radical or substitutes
for radical letters, e.g. urk, nom. of urj, 'strength' (176. h); amdrt, 3rd sing.
Impf. of rt. mrij (Pan. vni. 2, 24). But in abibhar for abibhart, t is rejected as
not being radical (see the table at 583 ; cf. fTwrov for ervvrovT).
II. An aspirated quiescent consonant is not allowed to remain
final, but is changed to its corresponding unaspirated letter ;
e. g. f^fcS^ titralikh becomes 6itralik (see 43) ; ^ 6h, however,
usually becomes ^ t (see under IV. below).
III. The aspirate f h is not allowed to remain final, but is usually
changed to 7 t (thus lih becomes lit) ; sometimes to eF k or T^ t *
(see 182, 305, 306).
IV. Final palatals, as being of the nature of gutturals, are
generally changed to gutturals ; thus ^ 6 is usually changed to
eF k, e.g. vd6 becomes vdk (see 176); but ^ 6h becomes Z t (see
176); ry is changed to J? g (or c^r k) and sometimes to ^d (or 7 t),
(see i76)f. [Technical grammatical expressions are excepted; cf.
50. b.-\
V. The sibilants sr, "\sh, if final, are generally changed into
<? t ; sometimes, however, ^6 becomes c^ k; and "9 sh either o^ k or
Visarga (see i8i)f.
a. The above changes must hold good before all suffixes and terminations of
nouns and verbs beginning with strong consonants (i. e. all consonants except
nasals and semivowels), and before Taddhita suffixes beginning with nasals.
b. But before terminations of nouns and verbs beginning with vowels, and
generally before weak consonants (i. e. nasals and semivowels), the finals of roots
and stems remain unchanged (see vd6, 176; va6, 650), even in opposition to the
general rule which requires the softening of a hard letter when a soft letter follows.
GENERAL RULES FOR COMBINATION OF CONSONANTS.
42. If two hard or two soft unaspirated letters come in contact,
there is generally no change ; thus
vidyut prakdsa remains f^Tritai^r vidyut-prakdsa, 'the brilliance
of lightning.'
* So in Arabic h becomes i t.
t So in cognate languages ch is often pronounced as k or passes into k. Com-
pare archbishop, archangel, church, kirk, &c. Again, nature is pronounced nachure,
and g in English is often pronounced as j.
Compare parochial with parish, and nation pronounced nashun.
F
34 .GENERAL RULES FOR COMBINING CONSONANTS.
f<<*l*i kumud vikdsa remains ^jfgfoM^ kumud-vikdsa, ' the blossoming of
the lotus.'
fir drisad adhogati remains d^tjfaTfw drisad-adhogati, 'the descent
of the rock.'
-J- ^ vidyut +su remains faartj vidyutsu, ' in lightnings ' (loc. case plur.).
43. If any hard letter (except a sibilant, see 6466) ends a word
when any soft initial letter follows, the hard (unless affected by
some special rule) is changed to its own soft, which must always be
in the unaspirated form by 41. II. (but see d. below) ; thus
^JKn <C*T sarit raya becomes TiVjH sarid-raya, 'the current of a river.'
iferi titralik (for titralikh, 41. II.) likhita becomes
titralig-likhita, painted by a painter.'
vdk (for vd6, 41. IV.) devi becomes ^P^ft vdg-devi, 'the goddess of
eloquence ;' similarly, ^T3 ^$? vdk isa becomes "^TH^T vdg-isa, ' the lord
of speech.'
fa<r *TqT vit (for visn, 41. V.) bhava becomes fejWfa vid-bhava, 'generated by
filth.'
a. An option is allowed before nasals, as follows : When two
words come together, the initial of the second word being a nasal,
then the final of the first word is usually (though not necessarily)
changed to the nasal of its own class (see Pan. vui. 4, 45) ; thus
tat netram becomes rf'^'ef*^ tan netram (or tad netram), ' that eye.'
ap mulam becomes 'f**tcJ*| aw mulam (or ab mularn), ' water and
roots.'
^ftj^l^ttm* mukha becomes ^ff^^ sarin-mukha (or T&frg^T sarid-mukha),
'the source of a stream.'
b. Before maya and mdtra, the nasalization is not optional but
compulsory; thus
T^fl T*J tit maya becomes pii4 tin-may a, formed of intellect.'
IT "HI vdk (for vd<5, 41. IV.) maya becomes qi-^i^ van-may a, ' full of words.'
T^PJ TT vit (for vish, 41. V.) maya becomes PwiM vin-maya, ' full of filth.'
Tn^TTW tat mdtram becomes n *i I d*{ tan-mdtram, merely that,' ' an element.'
c. In the case of roots followed by Krit suffixes there is not usually any change ;
e.g. $<? + *&{6had-}-man becomes ifl*^ 6hadman, ' disguise.'
d. It will be seen from 41. V. a. b. that the general rule 43 applies
to case-endings of nouns beginning with consonants, but not to
case-endings beginning with vowels. In the latter case, the final
consonant attracts the initial vowel, so as to form with it a separate
SPECIAL RULES FOR COMBINING CONSONANTS. 35
syllable; thus vdk -\-bhis becomes vdg-bhis, * by words;' but in vd6
+ d, 6 attracts a, thus vd-6d, ' by a speech' (not vdj-d) : sarit + bhis
= sarid-bhis, ' by rivers ; ' but in sarit + d, t attracts a, thus sari-td,
'by a river 5 (not sarid-d). So also samidh + d becomes sami-dhd t
' by fuel ' (not samid-d).
e. Similarly, in the case of verbal terminations beginning with
vowels or with m, v, y, attached to roots ending in hard letters (see
pat, 597. c ; kship, 635 ; va6, 650), rule 43 does not apply.
/. ^ 'six' (becoming tt3 by 41. V.), when followed by the augment n before the
case-ending ^TT^ dm, becomes "mSTPT shan-n-dm, because the final ^ becomes ^
and cerebralizes also the inserted n coming in contact with it. Similarly, ^7 i^frt
becomes *aqfiT shan-navati, 'ninety-six,' and ^7 f J W becomes M<alMMt shan
nagaryah, 'six cities.' Compare 58. b.
44. If a soft letter ends a word or stem, when any hard initial
letter follows, the soft is changed to its own hard, which must
always be in the unaspirated form by 41. II ; thus
^HJ^ + *J kumud+su becomes ^JW| kumutsu, loc. pi. of kumud, ' a lotus.'
1 TH^ + *J samid (for samidh, 41. IL)+sw becomes Tlf'fi^r samitsu, loc. pi. of
samidh, 'fuel.'
Note Similarly in Latin, a soft guttural or labial passes into a hard before
s and t; thus reg-\-si becomes (reksi) rexi, scrib-\-si=seripsi, reg+tum=(rektum)
rectum, &c.
a. With regard to palatals see 41. IV.
b. Soft letters, which have no corresponding hard, such as the nasals, semi-
vowels, and ^ h, are changed by special rules.
c. If the final be an aspirated soft letter, and belong to a stem whose initial is
'I g or T d, ^ d or "^ b, then the aspiration, which is suppressed in the final, is
transferred back to the initial letter of the stem; as ^ + *J budh+su becomes
J?[J bhutsu, loc. pi. of budh, 'one who knows' (177; cf. also duh, 182). Similarly
<T^+ I^ dadh + tas becomes V^^ dhattas, 'they two place;' and see 306. a,
299. a. b, 664.
Note Greek recognizes a similar principle in Ty>e'p0>, Qpt%o[Ji.ai ; rpvcf), GpvTTTCD :
cf. also Op%, i. e. 6piK-$ from the stem rpi 1 )^-.
CLASSIFICATION OF SPECIAL RULES.
It is stated at 40, 41, that complete words as well as stems
preparing for combination can only end in certain consonants. Of
these the most usually occurring final consonants are IT t and ? d t
the nasals q[ n and ? m, the dental sibilant ^ s (changed to Visarga
by native grammarians), and the semivowel ^ r (also by them changed
F a
36 CHANGES OF FINAL ^ t AND ^ d.
to Visarga). It will be sufficient, therefore, for all practical purposes
to give special rules under four heads :
ist, Changes of final i^and ^.
2nd, Changes of the nasals, especially ^ and JT.
3rd, Changes of final ^.
4th, Changes of final T.
CHANGES OF FINAL ^ t AND ^ d.
45. By the general rule (43), final H t becomes <? d before soft
consonants, and before vowels ; as T^TT ^Tft marut vdti becomes
T^SlfrT marud vdti, * the wind blows/
a. Certain exceptions are provided for by 41. V. b, 43. d. Hence also stems
ending in t followed by the suffixes vat, mat, vin, vala do not necessarily change ;
e. g. vidyut-vat, possessed of lightning ;' garut-mat, ' possessed of wings.'
46. And, by 44, final <* d generally becomes H t before hard con-
sonants ; as 1^ Tfinf becomes ^^Tr^rR drisat-patana, ' the fall of
a stone.'
47. And, by 43. a, final f^t or ^ d may become ^ n before n or m.
Assimilation of final w t or 3 d.
48. If 7^ t or ^ d ends a word, when an initial ^ 6, if j, or ?5 I
follows, then i^ t or ^ d assimilates with these letters ; thus
Hlffi^ cSfar?^ bliaydt lobhdt 6a becomes VmTWtara bhaydl lobhd<S 6a, ' from fear
and avarice.'
H^ *fi l<! HH tadjwanam becomes dTjfl^tf*^ taj jtvanam, 'that life.'
a. A final T^t or ^ d also assimilates with a following "^ 6h or ^Ljh, but by
41. II. the result will then be 6 6Ji; j jh; thus ?TiT f^ff% becomes TTf^aW (V ' he
cuts that ;' 7T^ VR^t = JC**RX ' the fish of him.'
b. Final "5! t or <T d assimilates in the same way with <? t, "S d, and their aspirates;
thus TTi^ TNiT becomes ugl^T ; Tf^ ^hfi^, fT|*NiP^; TTi^ 7|iC, ri^C .
Observe The converse does not take place in the contact of complete words ;
thus ^ K (not "%) 'those six :' but ^ + 'ff = ^ ' he praises,' see 325.
Final TT t or ^ d may also assimilate with initial T h and W^n.
49. If 1^ t or <* d ends a word and the next begins with 31
immediately followed by a vowel, semivowel, or nasal, then / or d is
changed to ^ 6, and the initial 5^ $ is usually changed to "3 ch ; e. g.
tat frutvd becomes TT^SHII ta thrutvd, ' having heard that ;' but
ta6 frutvd is allowable.
CHANGES OF FINAL i^ t AND ^ d. 37
a. Similarly, the change of initial SI s to ^ fh is optional after a final ^ ; thus
^lof-^ic! may either remain so or be written qiertstn ' a hundred speeches.' Again,
after a final Z t and \p this rule is said to be optional; but examples are not
likely to occur : though in Rig-veda in. 33, i, we have fq^ii^ijjl for fVRlZ
SH"^, the two rivers Vipas and Sutudri in the Panjab.
50. If IT t ends a word, when initial ^ h follows, the final ^ t is
changed to S d (by 43), and the initial f h optionally to V dh; thus
iffl ^tfw t at harati becomes ITStflT tad dharati, ' he seizes that ;' but H^ ^^fif
tad harati is allowable.
a. By a similar rule, and on the same principle, any consonant (except a nasal,
semivowel, or sibilant) followed by ^, must be softened if hard, and its soft aspi-
rate optionally substituted for the initial ?^ ; thus ^T^ If^flT vdk harati becomes
^PTRfTT vdg gharati, ' speech captivates.'
b. Similarly, ^T^ j[T3J a.6 hrasvah becomes ^TWji^t qj jhrasvah, 'a short vowel.'
Insertion of "at changeable to ^ 6.
51. When "^ 6h is between two vowels (long or short) in the body
of a simple word, H t changeable by 48. a. to ^ 6 must be inserted
before ^ 6h; thus root tf^ pra6h followed by a vowel must be
written JT^ai pra66ha (as in Tni3 papra66ha, ^jf*T, &c. at 631); so
also fq*+%^ becomes fcra^ *he has cut;' * + f8Ri^= ^fsa^
'he was cutting' (see Pan. vi. i, 73, 75).
Observe In the case of root mur6h there is no insertion of 6 in murdhana, &c.,
because ch is not between two vowels.
a. This insertion of 6 is obligatory when S 6h is initial, and when
a previous syllable of any word, either separate or compounded,
ends in a short vowel ; as, ^?5^tl W*TT or f^t?Ra[nn ' the shadow of a
rock.'
b. The same is obligatory after the preposition WT a and the
particle in md ; as ^n "GR becomes ^ |\d.y[ * covered ;' so TT ft{^
becomes n fa^i^wM* 66hidat, 'let him not cut' (Pan. vi. i, 74).
c. In all other cases after long vowels the insertion of ^ 6 is
optional ; as, q^'O'gTOf or ^<1aim ' the shade of a jujube tree ;'
or *T CaA'*in(l ' she cuts' (Pan. vi. i, 76).
d. An augment J(^t may optionally be inserted after final T t before initial
as, nitiiit or trHflI 'being six' (Pan. vin. 4, 42 ; 3, 39).
* f^ 6i is the syllable of reduplication to form the perfect of nj^ thid (252), and
a the augment to form the imperfect of all verbs (251).
38 CHANGES OF FINAL NASALS.
CHANGES OF THE NASALS, ESPECIALLY ^ n.
52. If the letter c^ n, preceded by a short vowel, ends a word,
when the next begins with any vowel, the n is doubled ; thus
f dsan atra becomes ^ST*fc^ dsann atra, ' they were here.'
^'1 In tasmin udydne becomes nf^R^irfn" tasminn udydne, ' in that garden.'
a. This applies equally to final ^ n and *!f n ; as TIW^ **f?T becomes IIWTflf ' he
goes towards the west;' ^JTOT vjftrt = j'iafW ' he is a good calculator' (see Pan.
viii. 3, 32); but these, especially the last, rarely occur as finals.
b. Technical terms in grammar, such as Un-adi (i. e. ' a list of suffixes beginning
with MW'), are said to be exceptions to this rule.
53. If <F^ n ends a word, when an initial ^ 6 or i^ t or Z t (or their
aspirates) follows, a sibilant is inserted between the final and initial
letter, according to the class of the initial letter ; and the ^ n then
passes into the true Anusvara, see 6. d ; e. g.
+ f^Tf kasmin+tit becomes "3T fVjH (\a i^ Icasminscit, ' in a certain person.'
TTTPT asmin taddge becomes ^nwwsiM asmins taddge, ' in this pool.'
ft mahdn tankah becomes *l^lgff! mahdnsh tankah, ' a large axe.'
a. The same holds good before ^[ 6h (as, m^su^TTiT he covers them'), and
before "^ th, 7 t h ; but the two latter are not likely to occur.
b. If s immediately follows t in a conjunct consonant, as in the word W^ ' a
sword-hilt,' there is no change; thus ?H^ W?j! remains SnTO^jJ.
c. A similar euphonic s is inserted between the prepositions sam, ava, part,
prati, and certain words which begin with Jc, as tl**K sans-kdra, W^ft sans-krita,
"HfZ&RT^parish-kdra, Itftf^iT^pratish-kdra, &c. (see 70); just as in Latin, between
the preposition ab and c, &c., e.g. ab-s-condo. Also, between ^ 'a male,' and
a word beginning with a hard consonant, as <*Mftrt a cuckoo,' thus M*3l i ft c5t ',
also when ^TT^ is repeated, e. g. <*l*hlt. or ^5ST*Sil\ ' whom ? ' ' whom ? ' ' which
of them ?' (Pan. vm. 3, 12, but cf.Vopa-deva n. 35.)
d. ^ra at the end of a root does not require an inserted * before terminations begin-
ning with t; thus $n^ + fff han + ti is s*ftfT hanti, ' he kills' (but see 57, 57. a, b}.
e. Except, also, JT^n^ prasdn (nom. of prasdm, 179. c); as, IT^TRTPfrfiT 'the
peaceful man spreads;' H^n (Wtl'lfH 'the peaceful man collects' (Pan. vm. 3, 7).
54. The only cases in which ^ n, when originally the final of a word, can pass
into Anusvara are given above at 53, 53. a; thus in classical Sanskrit combina-
tions like WTn^ oKtfff or ifTn^^lftT must not be written iri <*0fff, ITT ^ifff.
55. If ^ n ends a word, when the next begins with Si s, then
^ n and "SI may be combined in either of the two following ways :
ist, the final ^ n may be changed to palatal 5? n; thus
mahdn surafy may be written H^IV^U ' a great hero/
2ndly, the initial ^T s may be changed to ^ 6h ; thus
a. According to native authorities an augment t, changeable to c (51), may be
CHANGE OP ^ n (NOT FINAL) TO Tff n. 39
inserted in both cases, thus *ii<%^R or *T$fTCt|t:, but this is rarely done; and in
practice, both ^ and 3^ are sometimes erroneously left unchanged against the rule
(thus, ^Tr^ 3J5')-
b. Final ^ n may optionally insert an augment ^ k when any sibilant begins the
next word or syllable. Hence JTH^ $fif may be either Hl'^lfl (or Hl^S^T by 49. a)
or may remain unchanged.
c. Similarly, final OT n may insert <? t, and final ^ n may insert IT t before 1{s;
e.g. *J*TCT, 'a good reckoner,' is in loc. pi. ^'Hnj or *JT*ie*J ; and "3*^ W., 'he
being,' may be <**;; and some say the inserted letters may optionally be aspirated.
The insertion of II between a final ^ and initial ^ is common in the Veda; but
in later Sanskrit these insertions are not usual.
56. If ^ n ends a word, when the next begins with c^ I, the n assimilates with
the /, and the Candra-vindu mark * is placed over the I, substituted for n, to
denote its nasality ; thus ^tjl^ <TTfk becomes msjisarjifn or Mfie5 ej'Hffil ' he
clips the wings;' see 7. Similarly, ev + Aa/xTrw = eAAj,7r<y ; con-\-ligo = colligo.
a. Final ^ n, before "*{j or ^ j h, and 'T n, is properly written in the palatal
form ^, but in practice is often allowed to remain unchanged against the rule.
b. Final ^, before T d, ^ dh, and T!T n, should be written in the cerebral form JFT.
c. But final *^ n, before gutturals, labials, semivowels (except "V y), and the sibi-
lants ^J s, ^ sh, remains unchanged ; as, iTR^ *CZ those six.'
57. ^ n as the final of nominal stems is rejected before termina-
tions and suffixes beginning with consonants ; thus
dhanin + hhis becomes vftffa^ dhanibhis, ' by rich people ; '
yuvan -f tva becomes ^WW yuva-tva, * youth.' Similarly svdmin + vat
becomes svdmi-vat, * like a master.' But ilsf^iil rdjan-vat is excepted
in the sense of ' having a good king.' (Raghu-v. vi. ii\ Pan. viu.
2, 14; cf. also 4$*%i^udan-vat, 'the ocean,' Raghu-v. x. 6.)
a. ^ n as the final of a root is rejected before those terminations beginning with
consonants (excepting nasals and semivowels) which have no indicatory P (see
307 and 323) ; thus ^[+<tP is ^ftf, but "%^+tas is sHT^, see 654.
b.' Also, when a word ending in ^ n is the first (or any but the last) member of
a compound word, even though the next member of the compound begins with a
vowel ; e. g. *j*|c^ *J^TO raj an purusha becomes *jry?rR raja-purusha, the king's
servant;' jf^ ^*$rdjan indra becomes UIHJ; rdjendra, 'chief of kings;' *sl(Vr^
^T^T svdmin artham becomes *sl I MJ ^T svdmy-artham, 'on the master's account.'
c. ^ n not final, immediately preceded by a palatal, is changed to the palatal
form; e.g. *TT^ -f ^TT = *TT?n 'prayer,' TH^+^T = ^ 'a sacrifice;' similarly,
' a queen,' fern, of T.IT^ ' a king.'
Change of qr n (not final) to Tff n.
58. If ^ n (not final, and having immediately after it any vowel,
or one of the consonants ^ n, H m, TJ y, ^ v) follows any one of the
40 CHANGE OF ^ n (NOT FINAL) TO Tff n.
three cerebral letters ^J ri (short or long), ^ r, f{ sh, in the same
word (samdna-pade), then ^ n must be changed to the cerebral Ttr n,
even though any vowel or any of the guttural or labial consonants
at page 15 (viz. k, kh, g, gh, n, h, and p, ph, b, bh, m, v), or y or
Anusvdra, either singly or combined together or with any vowel,
intervene ; as in the following examples formed with suffixes or
terminations: f^nnftj (635) ; c|f*Nn (152) ; pnir(io7); ^njr ' causing
to grow fat;' ^jf^flT 'horned;' dtfJLM 'devout.' ^THl^R^ dtdrydni,
'the wife of an Xcarya/ is an exception (Pan. iv. i, 49. Vart.)*.
Obs. i. 5^T n final (i. e. followed by Virama) in a word is not so
changed; e.g. ^TTT^, not ^Tin^ (see 127).
Obs. 2. In a word like ^H^tT, ' they do/ / immediately after n
prevents the change. Similarly, jp&rc^ (671).
Obs. 3, This change of a dental to a cerebral letter is called nati in the Prati-
s'akhyas.
a. The intervention of any of the palatal, cerebral, or dental consonants at
p. 15, except y (viz. 6, dh, j, jh, n, s, t, th, d, dh, n, t, th, d, dh, I, s}, prevents the
operation of this rule, as in ^^TT ' worship ;' ^?^*T 'abandoning;' wtT*f 'playing;'
TWTfT ' roads ' (nom. pi. of qw*^) ; ^J/llw1 ' by a jackal ' (149).
The intervention of a labial, conjunct with ^ n, precludes any change in the
conjugational forms of the verb IJH/to satisfy/ cl. 5. (^pftfif &c., 618), and in
those of T|? ' to shake,' cl. 9. ( WWfiT &c., 694) ; see Pan. vm. 4, 39. In the Veda,
however, ijWtfrf is found. But the intervention of nasals, semivowels, or A, though
conjunct with the ^, do not prevent cerebralization, as in ^^*T5TT (157); ''SHJoJlIT
inst. c. of 'SU^ ' hostile ; ' *\ I <n I of ?JT^ ' a stone.'
Observe According to Pan. vi. i, 16, the past pass. part, of vra&, 'to cut,'
and ruj, 'to break,' should be ^TO, ^^T.
b. If two conjunct ^s follow the letters causing the cerebralization, they each
become ^, as in f^msr vishanna f (540).
c. Even in compound words where ^, ^, "^, ^ are in the first member of the
compound, and ^occurs in the second member, the change to HT may sometimes
take place (especially when the separate ideas inherent in each word are lost sight
of in a single object denoted), and sometimes is optional. When, however, the
* The whole rule 58 is thus expressed in the first two Sutras of Panini vm. 4,
CMrmT 1JT T! ttiim^ I *nd <$ i I *^*MqRsftj. The vowel ri is supposed to be
included in T. ^TT stands for the vowels, diphthongs, y, r, v, and h; ^ for the
guttural class of consonants ; "Q for the labial ; ^T^ for the preposition ^?T ; JT
for Anusvara.
f Except a word like JTTftmni redup. aorist of ^T5T 'to breathe,' with K.
CHANGE OF J^ (NOT FINAL) TO ^ . 41
words do not, so to speak, merge their individuality in a single object, no change
is generally allowed, but even in these cases it is impossible to lay down a precise
rule. The following are a few examples : ni*i<ifl 'a village-chief,' ^jnul 'foremost,'
'the Ramayana,' ^T&faPff 'a Rhinoceros' ('leather-snouted animal'),
'having a sharp nose,' but ^niif*t<*i 'a whip,' and *<ini*it/a pronoun,'
or ^*3c(t ' the river of heaven,' ^RT^R ' a plant ' (where ^WlTflRT might
be expected), fi(V.i<{l' or f*lf<.*u<{) ' a mountain-stream,' imqu ' a mango-grove,'
(ace. of pRT^) 'the killer of a Brahman.' Similarly, ^^O'T ace. c. of
' the slayer of Vritra,' but '^tf (where han becomes ghna) ; ^%Tsgfl ' the
whole day;' and in other similar compounds when the first member ends in
short a, but IRI ' afternoon' (if from TTO -ej^). See Pan. vni. 4, 3, &c.
d. In a compound, ^ is not generally changed to ^n, if the first member ends
in "^sh, and the next word is formed with a Krit suffix containing 7{n, as fi"4ll,
g^lt, ^"INH (Pan. vm. 4, 35).
e. If the second member of a compound contain a guttural or be monosyllabic,
the change of ^ to ^T n is necessary, as in <*SMwr*ui, *-fthli*!I (Pan. vm. 4, 13),
(Pan. vm. 4, 12); but not in compounds with agni, as ^TCtf'T.
59. The prepositions ^tf^, fa^ (for fa^), ""TO, ^ft, H, and ^ (for
require the change of ^ n to UT n in most roots beginning with
r^ (which in the Dhatu-patha are therefore written with cerebral irr) ;
e. g. irawfTf ' he bows/ ^nl^fif ' he leads inside/ fra^flf ' he drives
out/ trcr^^fff * he drives away/ W&Q ' guidance/ IHnTH* ' a guide/
^(Vin ' circumference/
a. But in the following roots the ^ is never changed, and these roots are there-
fore written in the Dhatu-patha with dental ^: TT^'to dance,' f^ 'to rejoice,'
ff 'to roar,' Tf^'to kill,' T7 'to dance*,' TTO 'to ask,' '^TPl'to ask,' T 'to lead.'
b. In the case of T3I ' to destroy,' the change of ^ into 5T only takes place,
when ST^ is not changed to ^, as M<U3*flT> Hft.^^^, but IHT?, fKns (Pan.
vni. 4, 36).
c. In the case of *J^'to kill,' the change of ^ to 5T takes place except when ^
is changed to *T, as in H^*cn, TI^!lf , but Htlfni (Pan. vm. 4, 24). An option is
allowed when ^ is followed by *T or ^, as in H^f*! or H^fiw, &c. (Pan. vm. 4, 23).
d. When the preposition f^T intervenes between the above-mentioned prepositions
and the root, the changeiof ^into ^takes place in the following verbs, T^, f^,
q^, XJ7, in, IT, ^, ^, IJT, ^T, "5T, 'fTT, ^, ^, ^, ff , f^. In most other
verbs the change is optional, as JlfifWr[fW or Tin!lftnif% (Pan. vm. 4, 17, 18).
e. After prepositions containing an r, the n of certain suffixes like ana is liable
to be cerebralized, but in the case of causal stems, and in some other cases, the
\
* According to some the resistance of this root to cerebralization is only when
it belongs to class 10, and means 'to drop or fall.'
G
42 CHANGES OP FINAL *T m.
\
change is optional (see Pan. vm. 4, 29-31); e.g. M<*I*TJ or
TnTT^TO. In TRTT, IPT^T, JToRWR, HJI*H, JWTT, &c., no change to n is
allowed (Pan. vm. 4, 32, 34). In the case of root W[ ' to breathe,' the final
becomes TO in UTTO and *<j<ir, making TTTfiSffff ' he breathes/ and 'mjflLlfW (Pan.
vm. 4, 19). The causal aorist allows two cerebral nasals, e. g. UlftlM!)^; as does
also the desid. of ^W^, e. g. MOfVjfidMftf. In this way final 7( may be changed
to ^ at the end of a word, as in WCT, mj*!^, formed from rt. 'an. But this is only
true of rt. ^Tc^. In no other case can final *^ become *!T. When r is separated
from the n of an by more than one letter, no change is allowed, as in
Changes of final IT m.
60. If IT m ends a word, when any one of the consonants k, kh,
g, gh; c, 6h, j, jh ; t, th, d, dh; t, th, d, dh, n; p, ph, b, bh, m
follows, then IT m may pass into Anusvara, or may, before any one
$ of those consonants, be changed to its own nasal ; thus Jpnr aTTTT
griham, jagdma is written either apr *wm or ^^'ITH ' he has gone
home ;' and nagaram prati either trrrt ufw or '^fTTrgfiT ' towards the
city; 5 but in these cases Anusvara is generally used. So also Tfa
preceded by prep, sam becomes either HTfa or TO^bf ' flight ;' ^w ^H
either ^TJ or ^RR 'collection; 3 w an^f either jfcrPET or ^R?n^ ' abandon-
ment;' but in these cases Anusvara is not so usual.
a. The final *T^m of a root is changed to 5^n or W n before suffixes beginning
with any consonant except y, r, I, s; thus npT + f*T = ^jfO^I (see 709). So also
q^ + ^= ^HJIH*! (see 58; and Pan. vm. 2, 65).
b. Before SF, "9, ^, ^, a final T is represented by Anusvara; also generally
before the semivowels, but see 6. e.f, 7.
c. With regard to final T N before ?^ when followed by m, n, y, I, v, see 7. c.
d. When the next word begins with a vowel, then H m must
always be written ; thus JJ^JT 'STRlfir becomes 'J^HTVlfh ' he comes
home ' (not Jjf ^imfd).
e. Observe When f^ w or ^m not final is preceded by ^ 6h, the latter becomes
5T *, as IT^ + f = ITS ' a question ;' f%^ + T = f^ ' lustre ' (Pan. vi. 4, 19) ;
+ ftf = TTHf^iT ' I ask frequently.'
CHANGES OF FINAL ^5.
61. Many cases of nouns and many inflections of verbs end
in ^ s, which is changeable to 3T and ^ sh, and is liable to be
represented by Visarga (: , i. e. the sign for a hard breathing, see 8),
or to pass into ^ r (regarded as the corresponding soft letter of the
CHANGES OF FINAL ^ *. 43
hard sibilants and Visarga). As these changes will constantly meet the
student's eye, the following five rules must be carefully studied.
Observe In other grammars these rules are designated 'rules for the changes
of Visarga,' a sibilant not being allowed at the end of a complete word standing
alone (see 40).
In the following pages, however, s is preserved as a final, both in declension and
conjugation, for two reasons : ist, because it is more easily pronounced than a
mere breathing ; zndly, because it keeps in view the resemblance between Sanskrit
and Greek and Latin terminations.
62. FIRST RULE. When does the final sibilant remain un-
rejected? Before H t, ^ 6, and z t, and their aspirates, respectively;
thus, final ^ s before t, th, remains unchanged ; before 6, 6h, passes
into the palatal sibilant SI 3 ; and similarly, before t, th, passes into
the cerebral sibilant
a. Final ^ s is also allowed to remain unchanged before initial ^ s, and to assi-
milate with initial S^s and ^sA*. More commonly, however, it is in these cases
represented by Visarga; see 63.
b. So also, the final ^ s of a root must always remain unchanged before the
terminations si, se; thus ^TR^ + % = $hw ; ^^ + = ^W ', see 304. Jt. &-
c. When an initial J(t is compounded with a sibilant, a preceding final s, instead
of remaining unchanged, may become Visarga as if before a sibilant; e.g.
fn ' Hari grasps the sword-belt.'
d. For exceptions in as, is, MS, see 69.
63. SECOND RULE. When does final ^s pass into Visarga (:)?
Before cF k, ^ p, and their aspirates, and generally (but see '62. a)
before the three sibilants ^ s, 31 s, and ^ sh f.
a. Before a pause, i. e. at the end of a sentence.
6. When an initial sibilant is compounded with another hard consonant, the
preceding final s is often dropped in MSS. ; e. g. '^ft tam^flT or ^^* **'VH
' Hari goes.'
c. Nouns ending in is or us followed by verbs beginning with Jc, p, or their
aspirates, and grammatically connected with these verbs, may optionally substitute
sh for Visarga ; e. g. ^ffc^nctfif or ^rf: qrdfil 'he makes ghee ' (Pan. vin. 3, 44).
64. THIRD RULE. When does final ^r^ as become o ? Before all
soft consonants.
a. Similarly, before short ^ff a, which a is then cut off.
This rule is more properly, but less simply, stated thus. When does final ^ s
* The assimilation of ^ with an_ initial ^ is rare ; but c^MwtfV is an example.
t Examples before initial ^, like WTI^fF, are rare.
G 2
44
blend with a preceding a into the vowel o ? Before all soft consonants final ^ s is
treated as if liquefied into u *.
6. The names of the worlds (bhuvas, mahas, janas, tapas, &c.) change s to r
before soft consonants ; e. g. bhuvar-loka, mahar-loka, &c.
65. FOURTH RULE. When does final ^ s become ^ r? When
preceded by any other vowel but ^ a or ^n a, and before all soft
letters, consonants or vowels.
a. Unless T; r itself be the soft letter following, in which case, to
avoid the conjunction of two r's, final ^ * is dropped, and the vowel
preceding it (if short) is lengthened.
The interchangeableness of s, r, and Visarga is illustrated in some Greek and
Latin words; e.g.flos,floris; genus, generis; labor for labos; sea? = eJ suavis=.
$V, &C.
66. FIFTH RULE. When is final ^ s refected f When preceded
by short ^i , before any other vowel except short *$ a t. NB. The
^T , which then becomes final, opens on the initial vowel without
coalition J.
a. When preceded by long wi a, before any soft letter, consonant
or vowel. NB. If the initial letter be a vowel, the ^n a, which then
becomes final, opens on it without coalition.
b. When preceded by any other vowel but ^? a or ^n a, before
the letter r, as noticed at 65. a.
c. Native grammarians say that final s passes into Visarga, which is then
changed to y ; which y is rejected in accordance with 36, 37.
The above five rules are illustrated in the following table, in
which the nominative cases cfT^ naras, ' a man ;' H1^ nards, * men ;'
|fft3[ haris, ' the god Vishnu ;' frf*J ripus, ' an enemy ;' and ^Hr naus,
' a ship 5 are joined with verbs.
* That is, it is first changed to r, as at 65, and r is then liquefied into a vowel ;
just as I is often changed to u in French. The plural of animal is animaux.
t That is, it blends with a into o, as in 64 ; and o becoming av before any vowel
but a, the t> is rejected by 36. Indian grammarians hold that final s or Visarga
here becomes y, which would also be rejected by 36.
J This is one of the three cases in which a hiatus of two vowels is admissible in
Sanskrit. The three cases are, i. when final s is rejected from as or as (66); 2. when
a complete word, ending in e, is followed by any other vowel but a (see 36);
3. when certain dual terminations, ^ /, "3! u, ^ e, are followed by vowels (sec 38).
In the middle of a word a hiatus is very rare (see 5. 6),
CHANGES OF FINAL H *.
45
i
JJ JJ S g-
=
"
FIRST RULE.
Final sibilant remain
i 333 333 333 333 333
SECOND RULE.
Final ^ s passes into
Visarga.
^ ^ 2?
.OH
o o s.
-r Cb Q* b
lA
u
. g?
f 1
r
8 5d
B
.
9
a
46 CHANGES OF FINAL ^ s.
67. There is one common exception to 62, 63, 64 : i^sas, ' he,' and
^^ eshas, l this/ the nominative case masc. of the pronouns ?T^ tad
and inr^ etad (220, 223), drop the final s before any consonant, hard
or soft; as, *r cR^tfiT sa karoti, 'he does;' *T TSrfff sa ga66hati, 'he
goes ;* Tj^f tT^fTT esha pa6ati, ' this (man) cooks/ But rules 64. a, 66,
and 63. , are observed ; thus, ^ftsftj so 'pi, ' he also ;' ^r ^: * eshafi,
' he himself/ Sometimes (but only tn^ritf to fill up a verse or suit
the metre) sa may blend with a following vowel, as tN: for fl TRJ.
In poetry syas, 'he,' nom. masc. of tyad, may optionally follow the same rule
(Pan. vi. i, 133).
Compare Greek o for Of. Compare also Latin qui for quis, and ille, iste, ipse,
for illus, istus, ipsus. The reason why sa dispenses with the termination s may be
that this termination is itself derived from the pronoun sa.
68. The preceding rules are most frequently applicable to ^s, as
the final of the cases of nouns and inflexions of verbs ; but they
come equally into operation in substantives or adjectives, whose stem
ends in ^re^ as, ^ is, and ^ us ; thus, by 65, ^SJ^ ^T^ takshus
ikshate becomes 'srsnffap 6akshur ikshate, ' the eye sees ;' and ^ra^+
f>T^ takshus + bhis = ^"Bjfi!^ 6akshurbhis, ' by eyes/ Similarly, by 64,
*Tm nTTffr manas jdndti becomes *nft TT*TTflI mano jdndti, ' the mind
knows ' and nT^ + f>T^ manas -f bhis = i&j\frR( manobhis, ' by minds/
Exceptions in ^r^ as, is, T^ us.
69. ^ER^ as at the end of the first member of a compound word retains its
before derivatives of the roots < and JW, and before eRHj ^p*T> tn^T, ^
(see Pan. vm. 3, 46); e.g. Tfn*<: 'causing light,' ^filtSiK 'a blacksmith,'
fHTjfiR 'adoration,' fiPC^BR ' disrespect *,' M*l*!*ilH 'a lover of milk.' The s is
also retained in some other compounds, generally when the second member begins
with ^, ^; as, f^^tMfrt 'lord of day,' ^T-H4jFrf 'lord of speech;' similarly also,
HT^PC ' the sun.' Also before the Taddhita suffixes ^l^vat, f^^vin, and ^fc5 vala;
e. g. it^^c^, TTrf^^ ' possessing light.'
a. Words ending in ^ is, "3$( us, such as *-f^n^ ^rf^^j ^3^> &c-> and the
prefixes 'ftT^, W%^, ^Ti^^, g^, Kic*^, when compounded with words beginning
with W, ^, ^, Tfi, change their final ^ into W (Pan. vm. 3, 41, 45); e. g.
* performing a sacrifice,' ^PM^m 'drinking ghee,' *TJ E5 I'^ ' a bow-maker,'
* In forms of fn<,s the retention of ^s is considered optional (Pap. vm. 3, 42);
e. g.
CHANGES OF FINAL s. 47
'removed,' fa^fioJ 'fruitless/ ^f^^iT 'excluded,' wfe^H 'made evident/
HUIH ' difficult to be drunk,' Tn^^ff ' made manifest.'
b. Nouns ending in ^^ts, T^MS, before the Taddhita suffixes T?T mat, ^71 vat,
>m, "Zf&vala, change the final ^s to ^sA according to 70; e.g. ^if^NTt^,
' possessing splendour,' MTOT^ ' armed with a bow.'
c. Similarly before Taddhita suffixes beginning with 1^ t, as tva, tama, tara,
taya, &c. (see 80), final s of is and MS is changed to sh, but the initial t is then
cerebralized ; thus Wtfif^+i^ becomes WlTffg jyotish-tva, 'brightness.' So
o*fl frtKi jyotish-tama, 'most brilliant.'
d. Similarly ^, liable to be changed to ^ according to 70, is retained before the
suffixes fi, sfi^T, *TTST, and when compounded with the nominal verb <*iifrt ;
as, rftfWi ' splendid,' 15^5 ' glorious,' tTmjhcH ' a little milk,' ^fMHi^ ' a little
ghee,' *cjM(fiT ' he desires sacrifice' (Pan. vin. 3, 39).
70. ^ s, not final, if followed by a vowel or by t, th, n, m, y, v,
or by certain Taddhita suffixes, such as ka, kalpa, &c. (see 69. e?),
passes into ^ sh when preceded by any other vowel but ^T a or ^rr a,
and when preceded by cjr k, or ^ r, or F5 1; thus ^rfiTr + ^ agni + su
becomes ^rfhr| agnistiu, ( in fires ;' ^rtt + "fe karo + si = tfftfa karoshi,
' thou doest ;' ^T^ + *J vdk + su = ^T^ vdkshu, ' in words ;' f%Tt + ftt
bibhar + si = fwf bibharshi, * thou bearest/ See 69 and 69. a.
a. An intervening Anusvara or Visarga or sibilant does not pre-
vent this rule ; e. g. l^lffa, ^f^, "^'^ ( or ^ t l)> ^ T 3 : ^'
b. In accordance with this rule, certain roots and their derivatives beginning
with ^ change their initials to ^ after the prepositions ^ifa, wftf, f^, fT, ""liT,
UfiT, ^rfrT, wg, ^rftl; thus, ^lf>T^ from ^ifa and ^, ^ffl.fM'^from rft. and fH^,
flttii from f^f and ^ST ; and the change may even be preserved though the augment
^BT a intervenes, as in ^^^1^ from "ftra with ftf , ^ftujm^ from WT with
and though the reduplicated syllable of the perfect tense intervene, as
(but not always in either case, as ^SMWIi^, ^npRW').
c. Hence roots beginning with s and followed by a vowel or a dental consonant
are written in the Dhatu-patha as if beginning with sh; e.g. fa*^ (for ftfw),
g (for ^5), T?T (for Wf), WT (for ^fl); and this applies also to the roots ftjR,
c?. Certain roots beginning with s resist all change to sh and axe therefore always
written with s; e.g. ^., *pT, ^5T, ^, w, ihfT, *|, 'f^^. In certain roots the
change is optional, as in ^T^tT, *jfi^, &c.
e. The root ^H*^ changes its initial to 'R after ^5R, as
/. In a few roots the change is optional, as tfft^T^fiT or
or f^^^fff ; and there are cases where s is retained quite exceptionally, e. g.
g. The root ^T^ as, ' to be,' when it drops initial a, leaves the s liable to be
48 CHANGES OF FINAL r.
changed to sh if it be followed by y or a vowel ; e. g.
TngrBffi^ 3 HT|:*rfnT (Pan. vin. 3, 87).
Even in compounds the initial s of the second member of the compound may be
affected by rule 70, especially if a single object is denoted, as in the names ?rfrm3
hari-shena for hari-sena, ^fvftPC. yudhi-shthira for yudhi-sthira ; and in "U'18 agni-
shtha for agni-stha, ' a frying-pan.' So also in ^Tfr*?gfa, Pqqtq^, <p^> &c.
h. In compounds formed with 1^ (rt. ^), the initial becomes ^ where ^ is
changed to a cerebral (?, 'S, or ^). See 182. e.
i. The ^ of the suffix "OTi^ is not changed, as if*'T^lI"r^ ' to consume by fire.'
j. Observe The preposition nis followed by the root tap does not become nish if
repeated action is denoted; e. g. fi^TH/to melt (gold &c.) repeatedly' (Pan. vin.
3, 102); otherwise
CHANGES OF FINAL ^ r.
71. For purposes of Sandhi nearly all words ending in T r may
be regarded as ending in ^ s. Most of the cases in which the
changes of final ^ r differ from those of final ^ * will be found
below in large type.
a. Thus, by 63, Jffif^. !?To5 prdtar kdla becomes TTTff JoEFc? prdtah-kdla, ' the time
of morning;' ^PfT^ JJT antar pura becomes ^RT^T antah-pura, ' the female apart-
ments;' and prdtar sndna becomes ITmJ^Tf prdtah-sndna, 'morning ablution.'
b. But r as the final of a stem, or as a radical letter, remains
unchanged before a sibilant; thus ^ + ^ = ^n| (70); f^H^ + ftf =
ftwfq; ^ij^ + *J = ^J"! (see 203, cf. 62. b); and sometimes before the
hard letter ^p in compounds; as, JrHtfir gir-pati, 'lord of speech'
(also written Jrhtrfif, *ffaqfff); ^fif svar-pati, 'lord of heaven' (also
written ^ntrfjr).
c. After the analogy of 62, OTiT^ 1J prdtar tu becomes Hiit^ prdtas tu; and
ITnnC ^ prdtar 6a becomes UTiT^f prdtai ca.
The transition of r into s before t is exemplified in Latin by gestum from gero,
ustum from uro, &c. On the other hand, r in the middle of words is preserved
before t in Sanskrit, as in kartum, &c.
d. But in opposition to 64 and 66, final ^ ar, unlike ^r^ as,
remains unchanged before any soft letter (consonant or vowel) ; thus
prdtar dsa remains jjTHTn^r prdtar-dsa, ' morning meal ;'
punar ydti remains tpHhfrr punar ydti, ' again he goes ;'
gf^ f^punar ukta remains ^I^U punar-ukta, ( repeated' (cf. nir-ukta,
* described/ for ms-ukta> by 65).
e. After the analogy of 65. a, final ar before initial r drops its own r, and
lengthens the preceding a; as ^ff^ T$$fn punar rakshati becomes TpTI *$fift pund
CHANGES OP FINAL r. 49
rakshati, 'again he preserves.' Analogously, 'fli.'f gi-ratha (i.e. f*T^ T& gir ratha),
epithet of Brihaspati.'
/. Analogously to 69. c, ^JT + WI 6atur+taya becomes "igB4 6atush-taya, 'the
aggregate of four.'
72. Prefixes such as nir and dur must be treated as originally ending in s; see
nis, dus, 69. a.
73. ^ r preceded by a vowel may optionally double a consonant immediately
following; thus ftT^ <fT nir day a may be written either f^l nirdaya or fT^T
nirddaya, 'merciless;' except ^ h and a sibilant followed by a vowel, as in ^T^
71. b; but karshyate may be written karshshyate. In doubling an aspirated letter,
the aspiration of the first is rejected, as ^T^T (for ^STV). 7 A is said to have the
same effect in doubling a consonant immediately following ; thus brahman may be
written brahmman; but for the sake of simplicity it is better to avoid doubling in
both cases, and write always nirdaya and brahman.
a. The doubling of consonants, when they come in contact with others, is con-
stantly allowable in Sanskrit, though not usual in practice. Thus, in any con-
junction of two (or even more) consonants preceded by any vowel, especially if a
semivowel be the last letter in the compound, the first letter, provided it be not
^ or ^, may be doubled (Pan. vm. 4, 47) ; thus ^f may be written for $W, ^^
for TEIcf , ^TMion4u< for ^cqin*P<, but the more simple form is preferable.
b. Again, any one of the first four consonants of any class may be doubled
before the nasal of its own class, and if this takes place the middle consonant is
called the yama of the preceding j thus in kkniti (Pan. i. I, 5) the second k is the
yama or twin letter.
c. It should be noted that by Pan. vin. 4, 65, there is an optional rejection of
one of two homogeneous consonants after any consonant, so that <*lfw may be
written
The following table exhibits the more common combinations of
consonants at one view. In the top line of initial letters the
aspirated consonants have been omitted, because it is a universal
rule, that whatever change takes place before any consonant, the
same holds good before its aspirate.
TABLE OF THE COMMONEST CHANGES OF CONSONANTS.
x/H
I-"*
1 o
O n
< c-
(T) (T>
#***
"^ S s S -
<^ J*> * Jt
<JJ /y ^ q| ,n 3
~fx^J 3 x^l ^"^
g
5
^ x^l
3 "* Jf O
f f S g |
1? ^ 1
* ^ ^
H
a
Jl. H.
If
1
* &
a ^ M
^s /Ac
3 /^!M
"^
a
? ** c ^ ^
Ct a a a
ON o s 8^ ^5
*2 s *
P - a a a
iT
C5 "^ ON ON
aa ss a*a, 5a
ON 88
ON *
a. a N t. ax ^. ax ^> a^
-a
M
J5 "** fr ON'S>"
C*i C^>
as *.!
CM
"^VS
go 8 ON ax
g ~8 ON ^ ON
os a* c
ON
4>.
<Q *Q *Q *Q
**
P K> tJ
a is ex ?!-
ON CO N crx *> *
OJ 00
^
(>o S S' ON a N
fi ** ON ON
<-. "-. P v..
OS- * <Q
"*" oo
CO
*.
y eo ON * O\ co x
P M ki
a . 18 '^ ^*
ON Co wi Co
tv OJ
a-
RW a^
o s a* <c
a- a, a* a*
i
8
Ji- ^
8 4 S . a - 8 ^ t<a *
a
8 8 ' 8 8 ?* 8 8
a*
*^ -a^ ON 'a- ON -a*
ON- S ** ***
o
o- o &
os a^ ^es
3
go e q- ax
*33 3
O S ^^ &j S 4^ ^Q
C*3 OJ
3 3 ? 3 3 P 3 3
-i
* x^ (^ t^
os a* <Q
1
* f 7 ^
8 a ' V;
* i t i
ww
& a ax
o ~
- _^ - <Q
OO
CS
9f a q- a N
o ~
os a. a
a-
go e .g; ax
p 'S** '*"
COx COx 65x
a ex 2?*
Co
go e .s- BX
>j *a* ON '^ ON *a*
Oi C/J
CO Co Co
CO Co Co Co
a-
a- a- a-
8 cn * ^5*
o a^ * ^Q
a- a* a- a a-
SANSKRIT ROOTS AND THE FORMATION OP NOMINAL STEMS. 51
CHAPTER III.
ON SANSKRIT ROOTS AND THE FORMATION OF
NOMINAL STEMS.
BEFORE treating of the declension of Sanskrit nouns (ndman or
sarijna), it is necessary to point out the peculiar method of forming
the stem from the root.
74. Every Sanskrit noun (including substantives, adjectives, pro-
nouns, and numerals) has at least two distinct states prior to the
formation of the nominative case; viz. ist, a root (dhdtu); 2ndly,
a stem (prdtipadika or anga*} formed directly from the root or from
a modification of the root, generally by the addition of a suffix
(pratyaya); which stem becomes a complete word (pada) by the
addition of a case-ending (vibhakti)^.
a. The root is of such importance in Sanskrit that it should be
clearly defined before another step is taken.
A root (dhdtu) is to language what the primitive elements are to
chemistry ; it is that primitive part of a word which, being incapable
of grammatical decomposition, is supposed to contain the primary
meaning antecedent to any addition or modification. When a root
has been developed in any way by the addition of letters or syllables
or by internal change it becomes a stem, which again is subject to
further development by the addition of letters or syllables called
case-endings or inflexions (vibhakti), whether nominal or verbal.
Thus ddna and dadd are stems (the former nominal, the latter verbal)
developed out of the root rfa, but ddna and dadd are not fully
* According to Pan. i. 4, 13, the term anga is used for the stem when speaking
of some suffix (pratyaya) or termination which is required to be added to it,
whereas prdtipadika is a general term for a stem without reference to its suffix.
f The process of forming a complete word (pada), in the case of nouns, may be
shewn, as it were algebraically, thus : Root (dhdtu) + Suffix (pratyaya) = Stem
(prdtipadika); again, Stem (prdtipadika) + Case-ending (vibhakti) = & complete
word (pada); e. g. in the word jan-a-s, ' a person,' jan is the root, a is the suffix,
and s is the masculine termination for the nominative case.
H 2
52
SANSKRIT EOOTS
developed until they have received terminations or inflexions, when
they become complete words (pada); thus ddna-m, ' a gift ;' dadd-ti,
' he gives' (cf. Lat. do-nu-m, Gr. St-Sw-cri).
b. There are in Sanskrit about 2000 roots, and every one of
these conveys some simple idea, conveniently expressed in English
by the sign of the infinitive ' to/ as in ad, ' to eat/ though it must
be noted that the simple root ad only denotes the idea of ' eating/
which appears under different modifications in its derivatives (see
76. a). The following are a few of the commonest roots, with the
leading idea conveyed by each (omitting 'to'):
ad, ' eat.'
r ar6, ' honour/
as, * be.'
dp, ' obtain.'
^ ish, ' wish/
cfiJT kam, ' love.'
^ kri, ' do.'
^re krish, * draw.'
W^ kram, ' go.'
git kri, ( buy.'
jRiI krudh, ' be angry.'
f^ kshi, ' waste away.'
fgp^ kship, * throw/
3<sn khyd, ' relate.'
7TW gam, ' go/
?ff grah, ( seize.'
HT ghrd, ' smell/
^T 6ar, ' go/
f^ 6i, ' collect.'
6int, f think.'
6had, ( cover.'
an, ' produce.'
'conquer.'
iv, ' live/
^TT jnd, ' know.'
ifr^ tan, ' stretch/
tap, ' warm/
tied, ' strike/
tyaj, * quit/
, ' burn/
, ' give/
w;, * shine/
is, 'point out/
^?, ' shine/
^31^ c?n^, ' see/
?r?r Jyw^, ' shine/
, ' run/
dvish, ' hate/
\TT ?M, 'place/
nand, ' rejoice/
wa^, ' perish/
nind, ' blame/
ft wz, * lead /
^^ pa6, * cook/
tT^joo^, '.fall/
^ pad, * go/
qi />a, ' drink/
m joa, ' protect/
ij^pu, ' purify/
JI?F pra6h t 'ask/
bandh, ' bind/
wc?A, ' know/
u, ' speak/
bhaksh, * eat/
, ' shine/
ic?, ' split/
Az, ' fear/
bhuj, ' enjoy/
, ' become/
H, ' bear/
rejoice/
, ' think/
HT md, ' measure/
g^ mu6, ' liberate/
*J| muh, ' be foolish/
J mri, ' die/
TfT y/, ' sacrifice/
*n^ ?/#, ' strive/
ifH yam, ' restrain/
*!T ?/, ' go/
^ yw, 'join/
f* TO 'join/
g^ yudh, ' fight/
tf rah, ' quit/
^ ruh, ' grow/
<?>? /6A, ' obtain/
T^T X va6, ' speak/
^ vad, ' speak/
^ vas, ' dwell/
vah, ' bear/
AND THE FORMATION OF NOMINAL STEMS.
53
vid, ' know/
T v vis, * enter/
vrit, * be/
f^ sans, ' praise/
sak, ' be able/
', 'lie down/
su6, ' grieve/
subh, ' shine/
rw, ' hear/
sah, ( bear/
rfA, ' complete/
m, ' go-
f sry, f create/
creep
skand, ' go/
w, ' praise/
sMa, ' stand/
snd, ' bathe/
spris, ' touch/
smi, ' smile/
R smri, ' remember/
svap, ' sleep/
svri, * sound/
han, ' kill/
has, ' laugh/
Aa, ' quit/
Ari, ' seize/
/jrwA, ' be glad/
c?, ' be glad/
call/
75. A cursory glance at the above list of common roots will serve
to shew that they are all monosyllabic. In other respects they
differ. Some consist of a single vowel only ; some begin with one
or two consonants, and end in a vowel, but none end in either ^r a
or ^JT au; some begin with a vowel, and end in one or two conso-
nants ; and some begin and end with one or two consonants, in-
closing a medial vowel ; so that a root may sometimes consist of
only one letter, as ^ i, 'to go;' and sometimes of four or more, as
^ff skand, ' to move/ Roots consisting of simple letters, such as
^j *> ^ f^T ?^> & c - are probably primitive; and those which
have compound consonants, such as far*5 &c., are in all likelihood
developed out of more primitive forms*. Those with cerebral
letters, such as oj^ ' to roll/ have some of them been formed by
adopting sounds from aboriginal dialects.
cr. The few polysyllabic words recognized as roots have probably resulted from
a constant habit of joining some particular preposition with some particular mono-
syllabic root till it has at length come to be regarded as part of the root ; e. g. in
^TJjT*T sangrdm, to fight,' ~wm l<. avadhir, 'to despise/ the prepositions 'FP^sawi
and ^Tr ava have combined thus with the root. A few other polysyllabic roots are
the result of the constant habit of reduplication ; (as, ^Rji daridrd, to be poor ;'
afFJ jagri, ' to be awake ;' "l<*l*^ fakds, ' to shine ;' ^t vevi, ' to go/ ' pervade ;')
and a few are derived from nouns ; as, ^jiflTX: ' to play/ from ^*TR kumdra, a boy.'
Most of the latter are of the roth class, and may be regarded as nominal verbs (see
288. b).
* Thus IBfU^gfyut (also written scut), 'to drop/ beginning with three conso-
nants, was probably merely developed out of rts. fyu, cyut, a sibilant and dental
having been added (cf. 51, 53, 84. III).
54 SANSKRIT ROOTS
b. 5^ n and ^ s at the beginning of a root are liable, according to 58 and 70, to
be changed to ^ n and ^ sh. Hence these roots are generally represented in
Native Grammars as beginning with Tl^and ^because the Indian system exhibits
that form which may occur under any circumstances (see 70. c. d). But in this
Grammar, the real initials ^ n and H s will be retained.
c. According to Indian grammarians, roots are either uddtta or anuddtta (see
explanation of accentuation at end of Grammar 1 ). Uddtta roots take the inserted
^ i in certain tenses (see 391), anuddtta roots reject this inserted vowel (Pan. vn.
2, 10). Native grammarians attach to roots (either at the beginning or end)
certain symbolical letters or syllables indicative of peculiarities of conjugation,
called anubandhas, appendages' (or technically ^TT it), which have the uddtta
accent on the vowel used as an anubandha, to shew that the verb takes the
Parasmai (243) terminations only (such verbs being then called uddttetah}; or the
anuddtta, to shew that it takes the Atmane only (such verbs being anuddttetah] ; or
the svarita, to shew that it takes both (such verbs being svaritetah). See Panini
i. 3, 12. 72. 78.
The following is a list of Panirii's anubandhas (with one or two added by Vopa-
deva) :
^ST indicates that the past participle suffixes (530, 553, called nishthd in native
grammars) do not take the inserted i, vn. 2, 16. ^ that a nasal is inserted
before the last letter of the root in all the tenses; thus nid-i shews that the
present is ninddmi &c., vn. i, 58. ^ that the Aorist (or 3rd Pret.) is
formed in two ways, either with form I (418) or form II (435); thus ghush-ir
shews that the Aor. is either aghoshisham &c. or aghusham &c., and dris-ir that
the Aor. is either adrdksham or adarsam. ^ that the past participle (530,
553) is formed without i, vn. 2, 14. 7 that the indeclinable participle (555)
may optionally reject i, while the past part, always rejects it, vn. 2, 56,
15. ^ that * may optionally be inserted in the general tenses, vn. 2,
15. ^ that in the Caus. Aor. the radical long vowel must not be shortened,
vn. 4, 2. ^that the vowel may be either lengthened or shortened in
the Caus. Aor. 75 that the Aor. takes form II (435) in the Par.,
111.1,55. ^ that Vriddhi is not admitted in the Aor. Par., vii. 2, 5. ^ft
that the past pass. part, is formed with na instead of ta, vm. 2, 45. W that
a root is anuddtta, i. e. that it rejects the inserted i. ^ that a root is inflected
in the Atm., i. 3, 12. 5^ that a root is inflected in the Par. and Atm.,
* 3f 7 2 - ^ that the past part, has a present signification, in. 2, 187. J
that a noun with the suffix athu may be formed from the root; thus tu-kshu indi-
cates that kshavathu may be formed from kshu, in. 3, 89. 3T that a noun
with the suffix trima may be formed from the root ; thus du-kri shews that kri-
trima may be formed from kri, in. 3, 88. *^that the vowel a must not be
lengthened in forming the Causal, that in the 3rd sing. Aor, pass, (technically
called tin, 475) and indec. part, of repetition (567, technically named namul) the
vowel can be optionally lengthened or shortened, and that nouns of agency in a
(580) can be formed from Causal stems having short radical vowels, vi. 4, 92. 93.
AND THE FORMATION OF NOMINAL STEMS. 55
94. ^ that a noun may be formed from the root by adding the suffix a
(80. I), in. 3, 104.
76. Since every word in Sanskrit, whether substantive, adjective,
verb, or adverb, stands in close filial relationship to its root, the
learner is recommended to commit to memory the commonest roots,
as given at 74. b. He will thus become master of a large family of
words, which are easily remembered when attention is directed to
the leading radical idea running through them all.
a. For example: let him take one of the foregoing roots, budh, 'to know;'
out of it are developed, ist, a set of simple substantives; andly, of simple
adjectives; 3rdly, of simple verbs : e. g. bodha or bodhana, knowledge;' buddhi,
'intellect;' bodhaka, 'an informer;' bauddha, 'a Buddhist;' budha, 'wise;'
buddhimat, 'intellectual;' and the following verbs, bodhati, 'he knows;' budhyate,
it is known;' bodhayati, 'he informs;' bubhutsate pr bubodhishati, 'he wishes to
know;' bobudhyate, 'he knows well.' And the simple idea contained in the root
may be endlessly extended by the prefixing of prepositions ; as, prabodha, ' vigi-
lance ;' prabudhyate, ' he awakes,' &c.
b. Similarly, from the root man, ' to think,' a vast number of derivatives are
developed, throughout all of which the leading radical idea is traceable ; e. g.
ma-ta (i. e. man-\-ta), ' thought,' ' an opinion ;' ma-ti (i. e. man+ti), ' mind ;' mati-
mat, 'mind-possessing;' man-ana, thoughtful;' man-as, 'mind;' manas-vin,
intelligent;' mand, 'devotion;' mand-yu, zealous;' man-ishd, reflection;' mant-
shita, 'desired;' manishin, 'wise;' man-u, 'man;' man-tu, 'an adviser;' man-tri,
'a thinker;' man-tra, 'a sacred text;' mantrin, ' & counsellor;' mantri-tva, 'office
of a minister;' man-man, desire;' manyu, 'courage;' mdnu, 'pride;' mdnana,
'honouring;' mdnava, 'belonging to man,' &c. ; mdnasa, 'mental;' mdnita,
'honoured;' mdnin, 'proud;' mdnusha, 'human;' mtmdnsd (from the Desid.
stem), investigation;' mimansya, 'to be investigated.'
Similarly, after prefixing prepositions (such as anu, abhi, ava, ni, prati, vi, sam,
&c.) to the root, the meaning may be extended and a large number of derivatives
formed; e.g. from anu-man, 'to assent:' anu-mata, 'agreed to;' anu-mati,
assent;' anu-manana, 'assenting.' From ava-man, 'to despise:' ava-mata, des-
pised;' ava-mati, 'disrespect;' ava-mdna and ava-mdnana, 'dishonour;' ava-
mdnin, ' holding in contempt ;' avamdni-td, ' disrespectfulness.'
77. It has been shewn at 74 that a stem (prdtipadika) is an
intermediate state between the root and nominative case the crude
form of the noun, which serves as a kind of stock out of which its
eight cases, beginning with the nominative, are made, as it were, to
grow. In a Greek or Latin dictionary we look for the noun under
the nominative case; but in Sanskrit we look for it under its stem.
Thus, bodha, bodhana, tat, pahtan, bhavat are the stems under
56 SANSKRIT ROOTS
which the nominative cases bodhas, bodhanam, sets, pan6a, bhavdn
are to be sought.
The stem is, in truth, no mere useless grammatical invention.
It is that form of the noun which, with occasional modifications, is
used in the formation of compound words, and in this respect may
be regarded as the most general of cases. And since every Sanskrit
sentence contains more compound words than simple, it may even
be said, that the stem is the form under which the noun most
usually appears,
Similarly, Greek and Latin grammarians might have supposed a root Afy, from
which was drawn out the nouns Ae^f, AeiKOf, \eKTO$, KctTaXoyy, eAAoyo^,
and the verbs Aeyw, KaraXeyw, eXXoyeoo : so also, a root scrib, from which was
derived the nouns scripiio, scriptum, scriptor, scripturaj and the verbs scribo,
perscribo, ascribo : or a root nau, from which would come nauta, navis, nauticus,
navatis, navigo, &c. And a stem Ae< and Ae<KO of Ae<-f and Xe%iKO-$, and
navi of navi-s; which stem is, in fact, the form used in the formation of com-
pound words, as in Xf%tKO-ypa(f)c>-s and nam-ger.
78. It will now be perceived that the consideration of Sanskrit
nouns must divide itself into two heads : ist, the formation of the
stem ; 2ndly, the inflexion or declension of the stem ; that is, the
adaptation of the stem to a common scheme of case-terminations.
a. In fact, the same system applies both to nouns and verbs. As in verbs
(see 248) the formation of a verbal stem from a root precedes the subject of verbal
inflexion or conjugation, so in nouns the method of forming the stem from the
root precedes declension.
b. Moreover, nouns, substantive and adjective, are classified into
separate declensions, according to the finals of their stems, not
according to the finals of their nominative cases. In Greek and
Latin grammars a similar system of classification is now adopted.
c. The final syllable of nominal stems may end in almost any
letter of the alphabet except ^ n, *T n, and ^ y.
Those stems that end in vowels may be conveniently separated
under four classes, each class containing masc., fern., and neuter
nouns ; the I st ending in W a, *TT a, and ^ z ; the 2nd in ^ i ; the
3rd in ^ u ; and the 4th in ^ ri.
Those that end in consonants may also be arranged under four
classes ; the ist, and, and 3rd, ending in H / and ^ d, ^ n, and ^ s,
respectively (compare 44); and the 4th comprising all other final
consonants.
AND THE FORMATION OF NOMINAL STEMS. 57
Primary and Secondary Derivatives.
79. Nominal stems (prdtipadika), formed by means of suffixes
(pratyaya), are of two kinds : i. Primary derivatives formed imme-
diately from a root, or from a modified form of it, by addition of
a Krit-suffi.x (hence called Krid-anta, ' ending in a /h7-suffix/ the
word Krit being an example of a primary derivative) ; under which
head are included some participles formed with aniya, tavya, ya
(which with elima are sometimes called Kritya suffixes) ; as also
words formed with Unddi * suffixes. 2. Secondary derivatives,
formed from the stems of primary derivatives by means of Taddhita
suffixes, and therefore called secondary (for examples see 80. A. B),
Observe It is not intended that the student should commit the following lists
of suffixes to memory, but he is recommended to note carefully the final letters of
the stem under each of the eight classes.
FORMATION OF THE STEMS OF NOUNS.
80. FIRST CLASS. Stems ending in ^ a (m. n.) ; in ^TT a and ^ i (f.)
A. PRIMARY DERIVATIVES, formed from ROOTS by adding the following
Krit suffixes
Observe A list of adverbial suffixes will be found at 718-725, and the parti-
cipial suffixes will be more fully explained 524-582. Feminine suffixes must be
looked for under their corresponding masculine forms. In the examples which
follow, the meaning of roots will not be given when they coincide with that of
their derivatives. Thus when bheda, 'division,' is said to come from bhid, it is
implied that the root bhid means f to divide.' In a few cases the meanings of
roots are omitted when doubtful. From is written fr. ; Root, rt.
I. ^T -a, forming, ist, abstract nouns, generally masculine, after Vriddhi of a
medial radical a and Guna (with some exceptions) of a vowel capable of gunation ;
a final palatal 6 or j being changed to its corresponding guttural k or <?f (cf.
20. c, 24, 25); e.g. bheda, m. division,' fr. bhid; veda, m. 'knowledge,' fr. vid;
* A list of suffixes ' beginning with the suffix un ' (i. e. u, with the indicatory
letter n), so called from the words kdru, vdyu, &c. in the first Sutra being formed
with this suffix. The sense of Unadi derivatives frequently does not agree with
the meaning of the root, and even when it does, usually receives a special signifi-
cation ; e. g. kdru, though it involves the general idea of doing, means especially
an artizan.'
t Forms like pa6a, varja, &c. (from pa6, vrij), generally found at the end of a
compound, retain the palatal ; e. g. kim-paca, rasa-varja, &c.
I
58 SANSKRIT ROOTS
bhava, bhdva, m. 'existence,' fr. l>hu; bhara, fyhdra, m. a load,' fr. bhri, to
bear;' bodha, m. knowledge,' fr. budh; jaya, m. 'conquest,' fr. ji; pdka, m.
cooking,' fr. pa6; yoga, m. 'joining' &c., yuga, n. 'a yoke,' fr. yujs ydga, m. a
sacrifice,' fr. yaj.
Forming, 2ndly, other nouns, substantive and adjective, especially nouns of
agency (fern, d, sometimes '); e.g. plava, 'what swims,' fr. plu; sarpa, 'what
creeps,' fr. srip; deva, 'a god,' fr. div, 'to shine;' tara (fern. /), 'one who goes,'
fr. tar; jana, a man,' fr. jan, 'to produce;' subha, 'beautiful,' fr. subh; kara,
doing,' fr. kri; jaya, 'conquering,' fr. ji; dama, 'subduing,' fr. dam. Cf. Gr.
forms in o = Sk. a; e.g. X04fO-f, Xoyo-$ f (f>opo-$, (f)opo-$, %vyo-V, fpyt-v, &c. :
Lat. sonu-s, deu-s, vivu-s, &c. Words like kara, fara, jaya, plava often occur at
the end of such compounds ; as, bhayan-kara or bhaya-kara (fern, z'), 'fear-causing'
(see 580); arin-dama, 'foe-taming;' (cf. tiriro-8a,f*.o$, veri-dicus, grandi-loquus,
omni-vorus, &c.) When su, ' well,' and dus, ill,' are prefixed to such words, they
take a Passive sense, as in Greek (576. a); e.g. su-kara (fern, generally /), easy
to be done ;' dush-kara (fern, generally /), ' difiicult to be done,' &c. Cf. v-(f>opof,
OV$-(f)OpOf, ^Uf-TO/AOf, &C.
'STF -a, frequently without change of the radical vowel, forming feminine substan-
tives (Pan. in. 3, 103-105); e.g. bhidd, ''splitting,' fr. bhid; kshudhd, 'hunger,'
fr. ksJiudh; mudd, 'joy,' fr. mud, to rejoice;' sprihd, desire,' fr. sprih; lekhd,
'writing,' fr. likh; jard, 'old age,' fr. jn, 'to grow old:' often added to the
desiderative stem (Pan. in. 3, 102); e.g. pipdsd, 'thirst,' fr. Desid. of pd, 'to
drink:' sometimes to the intensive stem; e.g. loluyd, determination to cut,' fr.
Intens. of lu, ' to cut.' Cf. Gr. forms in a, ^ ; e. g. <pop-a, (^vy-Yj, rop.-^,
cnrovo-if] : Lat. toa-a, mol-a.
^-i, forming a large class of feminine nouns, generally corresponding to mascu-
lines in a (see 123); e. g. gop{, 'a herdsman's wife' (see Pan. iv. i, 48); devi, 'a
goddess;' nadi, 'a river;' vriki (nom. is), 'a she-wolf;' sinhf, 'a lioness;' putri,
'a daughter.' Many of such feminines in d and / are not strictly formed with
Krit suffixes, being rather derived from masculines, or formed with Taddhita
suffixes : some words like Indra, ' the god Indra,' have a fern, form for the
goddess ; e. g. Indrdni, ' the wife of Indra.'
II. ^?eR -aka (having six technical names, ^7(, ^, t^ ? ^r, ^?> ^^.)
forming adjectives (fern, akd or ikd) and nouns of agency (see 582. b}, after
Vriddhi of a final vowel and generally of medial a, and Guna of any other vowel ;
e. g. tdp-aka, ' inflammatory,' fr. tap, ' to burn ;' kdr-aka, ' a doer,' fr. kri ; ndy-aka,
'a leader,' fr. n{; nart-aka, '& dancer,' fr. nrit ; sddh-aka (fern, akd or ikd), ' effec-
tive,' fr. sddh; khan-aka, 'a digger,' fr. khan.
Observe The feminine of the agents is usually formed with ikd; e. g. kdrikd,
ndyikd.
III. ^53 -a-tra. See -tra.
IV. ^TT -ana (having nine technical names, ^T, ^^> $^> ^ "&$> ^J1>
), forming, ist, a large class of chiefly neuter substantives after
AND THE FORMATION OF NOMINAL STEMS. 59
Guna of the root; e. g. nay-ana, n. the eye,' fr. ni, 'to guide;' ddna, n. ' a gift,'
fr. dd; sthdna, n. 'place,' fr. sthd, 'to stand;' darp-ana, 'a mirror,' fr. drip, 'to
make proud;' cay-ana, n. 'collection,' fr. 6i; vad-ana, 'the mouth,' fr. vad, 'to
speak ;' say-ana, ' a couch,' fr. &, ' to lie down.'
Forming, 2ndly, nouns of agency (see 582. c) and adjectives (fern, and or am);
as, nart-ana, 'a dancer,' fr. nrit; sobh-ana, 'bright,' fr. subh.
Observe The feminine of the agents is in ant. Cf. opyavo-v, $pTiavo-v,
iKavc-f, TitOavo-f, &c.
V. iflrfl'M -anfya, forming future passive participles (see 570) after Guna of a
radical vowel liable to gunation; e.g. 6ay-aniya, 'to be collected,' fr. ti, to col-
lect.' According to Schleicher -aniya is for -ana-\-ya.
VI. ^TT -'. See page 58.
VII. W3i -dka (fern, dkl), forming a few adjectives and nouns of agency ; e. g.
jalp-dka, ' chattering,' fr. jalp ; bhiksh-dka, m., bhiksh-dki, f. ' a beggar,' fr. bhiksh.
VIII. ^nT -dna (^TR^, '^TRST, ^TR^, ^TR^f), forming, ist, present partici-
ples A'tm. (see 526; cf. -mdna, XXVII); e.g. llh-dna, 'licking,' fr. lih; say-ana,
lying down,' fr. si; cinv-dna, collecting,' fr. di-riu, present stem of 6i.
Forming, 2ndly, perfect participles Atm. (see 554. d); e.g. bubhuj-dna, 'one
who has bent,' fr. bu-bhvj, perfect stem of bhvj, 'to bend ;' dadris-dna, one who
has seen,' fr. da-dris*, perfect stem of dris.
IX. ^JT -i-ta, ^rt<*t -i-tavya. See -ta, -tavya.
X. ^ -Ira, ^5 -ila. See -ra, -la.
XI. ^ -t. See page 58.
XII. "tt -uka (^oF^, ToF^i Jfc'^ ^fi*T, ^^l^), forming a few adjectives
after Guna or Vriddhi of a radical vowel; e. g. varsh*uka, 'rainy,' fr. vrish; kdm-
uka, ' amorous,' fr. kam.
XIII. '3RS -uka, forming adjectives and nouns of agency from intensive stems ;
e.g. vdvad-uka, 'talkative,' fr. Intens. of vad, 'to speak;' ydyaj-uka, 'constantly
sacrificing,' fr. Intens. of yaj, ' to sacrifice.'
XIV. ^*T -enya, forming a kind of future passive participle after either guna-
tion or weakening of the root; e.g. var-enya, 'desirable,' fr. vri, to choose;'
us-enya, to be wished,' fr. vas, to wish.'
XV. ITC -era, forming a few adjectives and substantives ; e. g. pat-era, flying,'
a bird,' fr. pat, 'to fly;' muh-era, ' a fool,' fr. muh.
XVI. ^ -ka, forming a few words ; e. g. 4ush-ka, ' dried up,' fr. sush (see 548) ;
dhd-ka, m. 'a receptacle,' fr. dhd, 'to hold.' Cf. Gr. Oy-KVi : Lat. lo-cu-s,
pau-cu-s. For the Taddhita suffix -ka, see LVI.
XVII. IT -ta, -i-ta, forming past passive participles (see 530 &c.); sometimes
without change of the root ; sometimes with weakening of the root ; sometimes
with rejection of the final nasal of a root ; frequently with insertion of i (which
takes the place of aya in Causals and verbs of the loth class) ; e. g. sru-ta, heard,'
60 SANSKRIT ROOTS
fr. sru; jhd-ta, ' known,' fr.jnd; kri-ta, ' done,' fr. kri; sthi-ta, 'stood,' fr. sthd;
ga-ta, gone,' fr. gam; ta-ta, 'stretched,' fr. tan; pat-i'tn, 'fallen,' fr. pat; grih-
t-ta, 'seized,' fr. grah (inserted lengthened); ved'i-ta, 'made known,' fr. Caus.
. of vid. Cf. Gr. KXv-ro-f) yvw-ro-f, GTO.-TO-S : Lat. da-tu-s, sta-tu-s, (g)no-
tu-s, &c.
XVIII. Tf9? -tavya, -i'tavya, forming future passive participles from the stem
of the first future (see 569)5 e.g. kar-tavya, 'to be done/ fr. kri; dd->tavya, to
be given,' fr. da; sto-tavya, 'to be praised,' fr. stu; <-het*tavya (for 6hed-tavyd) f
to be cut,' fr. dhid; yok-tavya, 'to be joined,' fr. yuj; pak-tavya, 'to be cooked,'
fr. pa6 ; bhav-i-tavya, to be become/ fr. bhu; bodhay-i-tavya, to be made
known,' fr. Caus. of bhu; grah-i-tavya, 'to be seized,' fr. grah. Cf. Gr. partici-
pials in -reo-? (for ref-yo-f), as ^o-re'c-f, fle-reo-?.
XIX. W 'tya, forming future passive participles after roots ending in short
vowels (see 572)} e.g. kri-tya, 'to be done,' fr. kri; i-tya, 'to be gone,' fr. i;
stu-tya, ' to be praised,' ' laudable,' fr. stu; bhri-tya, 'to be borne,' fr. bhri. These
are occasionally used as substantives ; e, g. bhrityd, f. ' maintenance.'
XX. <?f -tra (~trd), -a-tra, -i-tra (for the adverbial suffix tra see 720), forming
(after Guna of a root capable of gunation) nouns denoting some instrument or
organ, generally neuter; e. g. iro-tra, n. ' organ of hearing,' ' ear/ fr. sru; pd-tra,
n. 'a drinking-vessel/ fr. pd; vas-tra, n. 'a garment/ fr. vas, 'to wear;' 6hat-tra,
n. ' an umbrella/ fr. had, ' to cover ;' gd-tra, n. ' a limb/ fr. gd, to go ;' vak-tra,
n. the mouth/ fr. vat, to speak;' ne-tra, n. 'an eye/ fr. m, 'to lead.'
A few are masculine and feminine; e.g. dansh-tra, m. or daysh-trd, f. 'instru-
ment of biting/ 'a tooth/ fr. dans; man-tra, m. 'a holy text,' 'prayer/ fr. man,
'to reflect;' yd-trd, 'provisions (for a journey)/ fr. ya, 'to go;' vara-trd, f. in-
strument of surrounding/ ' a strap/ fr. vri.
Sometimes i is inserted between the root and suffix ; e. g. khan-i-tra, n. 'a spade/
fr. khan, 'to dig}' car-i-tra, n. 'proceedings/ fr. 6ar, 'to go :' and sometimes the
present stem is used ; e. g. krinta-tra, n. ' a plough/ fr. krit, ' to cleave ;' pata-tra,
n. a wing/ fr. pat, 'to fly;' vadha-tra, n. 'a weapon/ fr. vadh, 'to kill.' Cf.
similar Gr. forms in -T/JO-V, -6po-v, &c. ; e. g. V/TT-T^O-V, apo-rpo-v, (BaK-rpc-v,
(3a-dpo-v, p-fj-rpa, (frpd-rpa, Kcipy-Opa: Lat. ras*tru-m, ros-tru-m, ara-tru-m,
plec-tru-m, fulge-tra, &c.
XXI. ?9 -tva (for secondary suffix -tva see LXVlII), forming a kind of future
passive participle (probably an abbreviated form of *tvya, -tavya) after Guna of a
radical vowel capable of gunation j e.g. kar-tva, 'to be done/ fr. kri; je-tva, to
be conquered/ fr. ji; vak-tva, ' to be spoken/ fr. va6; snd-tva, ' fit for ablutions/
fr. snd.
-tvd, forming indeclinable past participles (see 555), appears to be a kind of
instrumental case of a suffix tva (see 555. a), and is either added to the root or to
the same weakened form of the root as the -ta of the past passive participle (see
XVII); e.g. kri-tvd, 'having done/ fr. kri; sthi-tvd, 'having stood/ fr. sthd;
uk-tvd, 'having spoken/ fr. vac, 'to speak:' sometimes an i is inserted; e.g.
AND THE FORMATION OF NOMINAL STEMS. 61
vid-i-tvd, 'having known,' fr. vidj likh~i*tvd or lekh-i-tvd, 'having written,' fr.
likh; 6orayi-tvd, 'having stolen,' fr. 6ur, to steal.'
-tvf, a Vedic form of -tvd (e.g. kri-tvi, having done'), appears to he for tvyd
(which is thought to be for tvayd).
XXII. r^T -tvya t a Vedic abbreviated form of *tavya (see XVIII); e. g. kri-tvya,
'able to perform,' 'effectual,' fr. kri.
XXIII. "H *tha or -a-tha, forming some nouns of either gender; e. g. yu-tha, n.
a herd,' 'flock,' &c., fr. yu, 'to unite;' uk+tha, n. praise,' fr. u, a form of va6,
to speak;' tir-tha, m..n. 'a sacred bathing-place,' fr. tri, 'to cross over;' n{-tha,
m. n. 'guiding,' fr. ni; gam-a-tha, m. ' a traveller,' fr. gam, 'to go;' also u6-atha,
rav-athct) sap*atha, $vas>-atha.
XXIV. T -na, forming (in place of -ta, q.v.) many past passive participles (see
530-540); e.g. bhin-na> 'broken/ fr. bhid; bhag-na, 'broken,' fr. bhanj; an-na,
eaten,' fr. ad; sttr-na, ' spread,' fr. stri*
Forming also a few nouns, generally masculine ; as, yaj-na (57. c), m. ' sacrifice,'
fr. yaj ; yat-rta, m. 'effort,' fr. yat; svap-na, m. 'sleep,' fr. svap; ush*na> m. n.
' heat,' fr. ush, ' to burn.'
Forming also a few feminine nouns in -nd; e. g, ush-nd, ' heat ;' trish-nd,
' thirst,' fr. trish; ydt-rld (57. c), ' a request,' fr. yd6. Cf. Gr. wr-v&-f, VTVJ-VO-$,
0i-vo-$ t &Tp'-vo~v l Lat. som'Tiu-'S, mag-nu-s, ple-mt-s, reg-nu-m.
XXV. i? -ma (HC^) ^^), forming adjectives and a few masculine and neuter
substantives, generally without change of the radical vowel 5 e. g. bhfcma, ' terrible,'
fr. bh{, 'to fear;' tig*ma, 'sharp,' fr. tij (cf. 80. I); idh-ma, m. 'fuel,' fr. indfi,
to burn ;' ghar-ma, m. ' heat,' fr. ghri (after Guna); dhu-ma, m. ' smoke,* fr. dhu;
yug*ma, n. 'a pair/ fr. yuj, 'to join/ Cf. Gr. 0/3-/AOf, 6u*/xo-j-, av-e-jtxo-f :
Lat. fu*mu-s, an-i-mu-s.
XXVI. H^ *mara (^iK.'^f), forming a few adjectives and substantives; e.g.
ghas-mara^ ' voracious,' fr. ghas, ' to devour ; ' admara t ' gluttonous,' fr. ad,
' to eat.'
XXVII. TT*T *mdna (liable to become mdna), added to the stem of the present
tense of the first, fourth, sixth, and tenth classes of verbs Primitive, and of verbs
Causal and Passive (see 526^-528) to form present participles Atm., and to the
stem of the second future tense to form future participles Atm. (see 578); e.g.
bhara*mdna, ' bearing,' fr. bhri; kriya-mdna, ' being made,' fr. Pass, of kri;
bodhaya~mdna, 'informing,' fr. Caus. of budh; ddsya-mdna, 'about to give,' fr.
the stem of the second future of dd. In the Veda mdna is also added (instead of
ana) to the stem of the perfect, to form perfect participles Aim. ; e. g. sasri-mdna
(for sasrdna), fr. sri, 'to go;' {ja^mdna, fr. yaj, 'to sacrifice;' cf. suffix -ana. Cf.
Gr. (^e/JO-^evo-f, ^^o / -/xevo-'S-, &a>ac-/Aevo-f : Lat. alu-mnu-s (for alo-meno-s),
Vertu-mnu-s (for verto-meno-s).
XXVIII. 1 -ya fal^, I^T, ^, H, ^PTi^), forming future passive participles
(see 571-576), adjectives, and substantives, generally after Guna or Vriddhi, and
62 SANSKRIT BOOTS
sometimes other changes of the root (see 571); e.g. te-ya, ' to be gathered,' fr. 6i;
stav-ya or stdv-ya, 'to be praised,' fr. stu; yog-ya and yoj-ya, 'to be joined,' fr.
yuj; guh-ya and goh-ya, ' to be concealed,' fr. guh.
Forming also many neuter abstract substantives ; e. g. vdk-ya, n. speech,'
fr. va6 ; bhog-ya, n. wealth,' corn,' bhoj-ya, n. food,' both fr. bhuj, to
enjoy.'
Forming also feminine substantives in yd; e. g. vid-yd, f. ' knowledge,' fr. vid;
vraj-yd, f. 'wandering about,' fr. vraj; say-yd, f. 'a couch' (for se-yd), fr. si, 'to
lie down;' cf. jd-yd (i. e. jan-yd), 'a wife;' 6hd-yd (i. e. thad-yd), 'shade;' md-yd
(i. e. man-yd], 'illusion.' Cf. Gr. ay-to-f (=ydj-ya-s^, GTvy-io-$ : Lat. gen-iu-s,
in-gen-iu-m, con-jug -iu-m.
For the indeclinable participial suffix ya ("^T 1 ^) see ,1555.
XXIX. T -ra (W^, X^, T, T^, ^), -a-ra, -i-ra (ftBT^), -u-ra, forming ad-
jectives, nouns of agency, &c. ; e.g. dip-ra, 'shining,' fr. dip; kship-ra, 'swift,'
fr. kship, 'to throw;' vand-ra, 'worshipping,' fr. vand; 6hid-ra, 'pierced,' 'a hole'
(neut.), fr. 6hid, 'to cut;' aj-ra, m. 'a plain,' aj-i-ra, active,' 'an area' (neut.),
fr. aj; pat-a-ra, 'flying,' fr. pat: also with i or u inserted; e.g. 6Jiid-i-ra, m. an
axe,' 6hid-u-ra, 'cutting,' fr. 6hid, ' to cut ;' rudh-i-ra, 'red ;' bhid-u-ra, ' splitting,'
fragile,' 'a thunderbolt' (neut.); bhds-ura, 'shining' (=bhds-vara), fr. bhds.
Cf. Gr. Aa/ATT-po'-f, epvQ-po-f, ay-po-$, <f>av-e-pos ' Lat. rub-er (stem ru-lro),
rubra, ay-er, gna-ru-s, pu-ru-s.
XXX. c5 -la ("jfi, ^^), -a-la, -i-la, -u-la, forming adjectives, &c. = -ra, &c.
above; e.g. suk-la (=suk-rd), 'white,' fr. su6, 'to shine;' tar-a-la, 'tremulous,'
fr. trt; an-i-la, 'wind,' fr. an, 'to blow;' harsh-Ti-la, delighted,' fr. hrish. Cf.
Gr. jae-y-aAo-f, ^e/-Ao-f, T/30^-aAo-f, (fiv-fa-v : Lat. sel-la (for sed-la), trem-
ulu-s, &c.
XXXI. "^ -va (lfit.> ^^, ^), forming participles, adjectives, and substantives;
e.g. paJc-va, 'cooked,' fr. pad (regarded as a past passive participle, see 548);
as-va, ' & horse,' fr. an assumed rt. at, 'to be quick;' e-va, 'going,' fr. i; pad-va,
'a road,' fr. pad, 'to go.' Cf. Gr. m-no-e (for iK-Fo-<;): Lat. eq-uu-s, ard-uu-s
(=. urdh-vd), ar-vu-m, ce-vu-m.
XXXII. ^Tl -vara (aiAH,? ^^> ^"^ &c.), forming adjectives, nouns of
agency, &c. (fern, generally {); nas-vara (fern, z'), perishing,' fr. nas, 'to perish;'
is-vara-t 'a ruler,' fr. is; sthd-vara, 'stationary,' fr. sthd, 'to stand.' After roots ,
ending in short vowels or a nasal, t is sometimes inserted ; as, i-t-vara, ' going '
(fern. {), fr. i; ji-t-vara, 'conquering,' fe.ji; ga-t-vara, ' going,' ft. gam.
XXXIII. W -sna (^F9f), forming a few adjectives; e. g. ttk-shna, ' sharp,' fr. tij;
Mak-shna, smooth' (said to be fr. slish).
XXXIV. Other uncommon suffixes (mostly Unadi, see 79. note) forming primary
derivatives of this class are, -anga, e. g. tar-anga (according to some rather
taran-ga), pat-anga ; -anda, e.g. kar-anda, tar-anda; -ata, e.g. dars-ata, pad-ata,
yaj-ata ; -anta, e. g. jay-anta, tar-anta, vas-anta ; -any a, e. g. tur-anya, nabh-anya,
parj-anya; -apa, e.g. ul-apa, ush-apa, mand-apa; -abha, e.g. rish-ablia, gard-abha,
AND THE FORMATION OF NOMINAL STEMS. 63
vrish-abha, sar-abha; -ama, e.g. kal-ama, rus-ama, sar-amd; -amba, e.g. kar-
amba; -asa, e.g. dam-asa, div-asa, man-asa, va6-asa; -asdna, 'being,' pres. part,
of as, 'to be,' e.g. mand-asdna, vridh-asdna; -dnaka, e.g. dhav-dnaka, lav-dnaka;
-dnaka, e.g. bhay -dnaka, say -dnaka; -dyya, e. g. pan-dyya, panay-dyya, mah-dyya;
-dra, e.g. ang-dra, tush-dra; -a/a, e.g. kap-dla, kar-dla, fashrdla; -ika, e.g. krish-
ika, vris-6-ika; -isha (i.e. -isa), e.g. dm-isha, tav-isha, avyath-isha; -ika, e.g.
an-ika, dris-ika, dardar^tka; -ita, e.g. krip-tta; ira, e.g. gabh-ira, sar-ira, hins-
fra; -tsha, e.g. rij-fsha, pur-isha, man-ishd; -utra, e.g. tar-utra, var-utra; -una,
e. g. ar-una, arj-una, yam-und, var-una; -usha, e.g. nah-usha, pur-usha, man-usha;
-ukha, e.g. may-ukha; -utha, e. g. jar-utha, var-utha; -ura, e.g. may-ma; -ula,
e. g. Idng-ula; relima, e. g. pa6-elima, bhid-elima (576. 5); -ora, e. g. kath-ora, sah-
ora; -kara, e.g. push-kara, tas-kara; -trima, e.g. kri-trima, pak-trima (Pan. in.
3, 88); -thaka, e.g. gd-thaka (perhaps for gdtha-kd); -sa, e.g. drap-sa, vrik-sha,
ghran-sa.
B. SECONDARY DERIVATIVES, formed from the NOMINAL STEMS of
primary derivatives,
Preliminary Observations,
a. The final vowels of the nominal stems of primary derivatives are liable to
certain changes before Taddhita suffixes beginning with vowels or y; thus
(i) a, a, i, i are rejected; e.g. 6u6i, 'pure;' saufa, 'purity:' (2) u, u are gunated
into o, which then becomes av; e. g. fr. Manu comes Mdnav-a, ' a descendant of
Manu :' (3) o and au become av and dv according to the general rules of Sandhi;
e. g. from go, ' a cow,' comes gavya, ' relating to cows ;' from nau, ' a ship,' comes
ndvika and ndvya, ' belonging to a ship.'
b. A final n is generally rejected before Taddhita suffixes beginning with con-
sonants ; and both n and its preceding vowel are sometimes rejected before vowels
and y; e.g. yuvan, 'young,' yuva-td or yuvartva, 'youth;' dtrfian, 'self,' dtmya
and atmfya, ' own,' ' personal.' There are, however, many exceptions to the latter
part of this rule; e. g. yauvana, 'youth,' fr. yuvan; rdjanya, 'regal,' fr. rdjan;
dtmanina fr. dtman.
c. It will be found that Taddhita or secondary suffixes often require Vriddhi of
the first syllable of the words to which they are added, as in maula, ' radical,' fr.
mula, 'a root;' sau6a, purity,' fr. s^u6i, 'pure.' Similarly, in the case of deriva-
tives formed from compound words ; e, g. sauhrida, ' friendship,' fr. su-hrid, a
friend :' sometimes a double Vriddhi takes place, as in sauhdrda, ' friendship,' fr.
su-hrid; saub hdgy a, 'good fortune,' fr. su-bhaga, fortunate.'
d. When the initial consonant of a word is compounded with y or v followed
by a or d, as \\dghra, ' a tiger,' svara, ' sound,' the y and v are generally resolved
into iy and uv, thus \mdghra and suvara, and then vriddhied, e. g. vaiydghra,
' relating to a tiger,' sauvara, ' relating to sound ;' so also sva, ' self,' makes sauva,
'relating to self;' svan, 'a dog,' sauvana, 'canine.' Similarly, svasti makes
sauvastika; nydya, naiydyika; sv-as"oa, sauvasvi, &c.
64 SANSKRIT ROOTS
XXXV. ^ -a (fern. /), after Vriddhi of the first syllable, forming abstract
nouns, collectives, patronymics, and adjectives expressing some relationship to
the primitive noun ; e. g. sauca, n. ' purity,' fr. suti, ' pure ;' sauhrida, n. or sau-
hdrda, n. 'friendship,' fr. su-hrid (see Preliminary Obs. e); paurusha, n. ' manliness,'
fr. purusha, ' a man ;' saisava, n, ' childhood,' fr, sisu, ' a child }' kshaitra, n. ' a col-
lection of fields,' fr. kshetra, ' a field;' Vdsishtha, 'a descendant of Vasishtha;'
Mdnava, ' a descendant of Manu,' fr, Manu; Vaishnava, ' a worshipper of Vishnu,'
fr. Vishnu; paurusha, 'manly,' fr. purusha, a man 5' saikata, ' sandy,' fr. sikatd;
ddrava, 'wooden,' fr. ddru, 'wood' (see Preliminary Obs, a); vaiydkarana, 'gram-
matical,' fr. vydkarana, ' grammar ' (see Preliminary Obs, d).
XXXVI. ^n* *aka (f^, ^F, ^, 3^, pf), generally after Vriddhi of the
first syllable, forming adjectives (fern, generally z") and substantives (cf. -ika, -ka};
e.g. aumaka, 'flaxen,' fr. umd, 'flax;' Angaka, 'coming from An-ga;' aushtraka,
coming from camels,' *a quantity of camels' (neut.), fr. ushtra, 'a camel;'
vdtsaka, n. * a number of calves,' fr. vatsa, ' a calf.' The fern, of this suffix is
sometimes ikd, which, however, may be regarded as the fern, of ika.
XXXVII. W3 -dta, as vdtdta, 'talkative,' fr. vd6, 'speech;' similarly, fringdta
fr. sringa.
XXXVIII. Wft -dni, forming feminines from masculine nouns like Indra,
see Indrdni under -/, page 58. (Observe Agni, 'fire,' has a fern, form Agndyt, 'the
goddess of fire.')
XXXIX. ^n*R -dyana (tlfi, ^fi 5 ^, Tfi^, ^R^, " t ^), forming patronymics, &c.,
after Vriddhi of the first syllable ; e. g. Ndrdyana, ' a name of Vishnu,' fr. nara.
XL. ^TT(5 -dla, as vdtdla, ' talkative,' fr, vd6, ' speech.'
XLI. ^i 'ika (fern, iki), forming adjectives and a few collective nouns after
Vriddhi of the first syllable; e.g. dhdrmika, 'religious,' fr. dharma, 'religion;'
vainavika, 'a flute-player,' fr. ve^u; Vaidika, ' Vedic,' fr. Veda; dhnika, 'daily,' fr.
ahan, 'a day;'- naiydyika, 'knowing the Nyaya philosophy,' fr. nydya; dauvdrika,
'a porter,' fr. dvdra; kaiddrika, n. 'a quantity of meadows,' fr. keddra. Cf. Gr.
7roXf[J.-iKd-$, (BaaiX-iKO-<; '. Lat. lell-ieu~s, naut-icu^s, &c.
XLII. ^TI -ita, as phalita, 'having fruit,' fr. phala (the past passive part, of
phal being phulla, 547. b); rathita, 'furnished with a chariot,' fr. ratha. Observe
This may be regarded as a past passive participle suffix added to the stems of
nominal verbs, cf. -ina below.
XLIII. ^*T -ina (^T^), as phalina, 'fruitful,' fr. phala; malina, 'dirty,' fr.
mala; jringina, 'horned,' fr. fringa; rathina, 'having a carriage,' fr. ratha.
XLIV. ^ni -ineya, forming a few patronymics after Vriddhi of the first syl-
lable; e.g. saubhdg ineya, the son of an honoured mother,' fr. su^bhagd.
XLV. 3[*l -iya (fern, d), as agriya, 'foremost,' 'the best part' (neut.), fr.
aara.
XLVI. ^C -ira (fern, a), as medhira, 'intelligent,' fr. medhd, 'intelligence;'
rathira, ' going in a carriage,' fr. ratha (cf. -ra, LXXVIII).
AND THE FORMATION OF NOMINAL STEMS. 65
XLVII. ^c5 -Ha (fern, a), as phenila, 'foamy,' fr. phena, ' foam' (cf. -la, LXXX).
XLVIII. ^W -ishtha (fern, a), forming superlatives, as alpishtha, 'least,' fr.
a/pa, 'little,' which also uses kanishtha fr. rt. kan (see 192-194). Observe
Perhaps this suffix is in most cases rather primary than secondary, being generally
added to the root or modified root, as uru, wide,' forms varishtha fr. vri (see
-tyas, 86. V). Cf. Gr. pey-t(TTO-s, ^-;aTC-f : Lat. juxta for juy-(i)sta, lit. 'most
joined.'
XLIX. ^T -ina (^t, ^Tj, forming adjectives and substantives, as grdmtna,
'rustic,' fr. grama, 'a village;* kulina, 'of good family,' fr. kula; navina, 'new,'
fr. nava; adhvanina, ' a traveller,' fr. adhvan, ' a road ;' anupadind, f. a boot,' fr.
anupada; dsvma, 'being a day's journey for a horse,' fr. asva.
L. ^1 -{ya, forming adjectives, sometimes after Vriddhi of the first syllable of
the stem ; e. g. svdsriya, ' a sister's son,' fr. svasri, ' a sister ;' bhrdtrlya, ' frater-
nal,' fr. bhrdtri ; pdrvatiya or parvatiya, 'mountainous,' fr. parvata; aswiya,
'relating to horses,' 'a number of horses' (neut.), fr. asva; parakfya (fern, a),
belonging to another,' fr. para (in this the final of the stem apparently remains
and k is inserted); saukhiya, ' pleasurable,' fr. sukha.
Forming also possessive pronouns, as madiya, tvadiya, &c. (see 231).
LI. ^ -tra, -ila, only lengthened forms oiira, ila, qq.vv.
LII. <JT -ura, as dantura, ' having long teeth,' fr. danta.
LIII. "W& -ula, as mdtula, ' a maternal uncle,' fr. mdtri.
LIV. "3T3 -ula, as dantula, 'having teeth,' fr. danta; vdtula, 'rheumatic,' 'a
whirlwind ' (masc.), fr. vdta.
LV. TTT -eya (fern. {), forming adjectives and substantives after Vriddhi of the
first syllable; e. g. paurusheya, manly,' fr. purusJia; dgneya, fiery,' fr. agni;
ddseya, ' born of a slave-girl,' fr. ddsi; maheya, ' earthen,' fr. mahi; jndteya, n.
' relationship,' fr. jndti. Cf. Gr. Acovre/o-f , AeoWeo-f : Lat. igneu-s, &c.
LVI. lf ~ka, forming adjectives, collective nouns, and nouns expressing diminu-
tion or depreciation; e. g. Sindhuka, 'belonging to Sindh,' fr. Sindhu; madhuka,
'sweet,' fr. madhu; rdjaka, n. 'a number of kings* or a petty king' (m.), fr.
rdjan; asvaka, 'a hack,' fr. asva, 'a horse.' Sometimes almost redundant, as
madhyamaka (fern, ikd), 'middlemost,' fr. madhyama; bhtru-ka, 'timid,' fr. bhiru;
putraka, 'a son;' bdlaka (fern, ikd), young.' For the Krit suffix -ka, see 80. XVI.
Observe Some of these may equally be regarded as formed with the suffix
-aka, q.v. Cf. also -ika.
LVII. efi^T kalpa (cfc^lQ, regarded by native grammarians as a secondary
suffix (see Pan. v. 3, 67. 68, &c.), denoting ' similitude with inferiority,' or in the
sense of nearly,' 'about;' as, kavi-kalpa, 'a sort of poet;' mrita-kalpa, nearly
dead ;' pacati-kalpam, ' he cooks fairly well.' See Diet, kalpa.
LVIII. THT -tana (fern. {}, forming adjectives from adverbs of time ; e. g. svas-
tana, 'future,' fr. svas, 'to-morrow;' hyas-tana, 'of yesterday,' fr. hyas; prdtas-
tana, ' belonging to the early morning,' ' early morning ' (neut.), fr. prdtar, ' at
K
66 SANSKRIT ROOTS
day-break ;' prdk-tana, ' former,' fr. prdk, ' previously ;' other examples are prdhne-
tana, pratana, nutana, tirantana. Cf. Gr. e7T->je-Tavc- : Lat. cras-tinu-s, diu-tinu-s.
LIX. ITT -tama (n*tHJ, (-tamdm}, forming, ist, the superlative degree, &c. (see
191, 195-197); e. g. punya-tama, 'most holy' (see 191); u66ais-tama, ' very lofty,'
fr. uMais. Sometimes added to pronominal stems (see 236). Cf. -tara, -ma : Lat.
op-timu-s, ul-timu-s, &c.
Forming, 2ndly, ordinals (THT?) ; e. g. vinsati-tama (fern, t ), ' twentieth,' fr.
vinsati, 'twenty' (see 211-213).
Tamdm, derived from the first, is added adverbially; e.g. uttais-tamdm, 'ex-
ceedingly high;' vadati-tamdm, 'he talks incessantly.'
LX. THT -taya, forming adjectives (fern. {} and neuter substantives from nume-
rals; e.g. tri-taya, 'consisting of three,' 'a collection of three' (neut.); 6atush-
taya, 'four-fold,' 'a collection of four,' &c. (neut.), fr. datur, 'four' (see 214).
LXL "ff^-tara (TT^J, forming the comparative degree (see 191, 195-197, 236);
e. g. punya-tara, more holy;' uMais-tara, higher,' fr. u66ais, ' aloft.' Sometimes
added to pronominal stems (see 236). Cf. -tama: Gr. yXvKv-rept-
Tardm, derived from -tara, is added adverbially ; e. g. u66ais-tardm, ' in a higher
degree' (cf. bahu-tardm) ; vadati-tardm, 'he speaks more (than he ought).'
LXII. ITT -td (=. -tva below), forming feminine abstract substantives from
stems of nouns or adjectives; e.g. bahu-td, 'multitude,' fr. bahu, 'many;'
prithu-td, breadth,' fr. prithu, 'broad;' yuva-td, youthfulness,' 'youth,' fr.
yuvan, 'young;' purusha-td, 'manliness,' fr. purusha, 'a man;' deva-td, 'a
divinity.' Cf. Lat. juven-ta, senec-ta, vindic-ta.
LXIII. fiPT -titha (fern. /), forming ordinal adjectives, &c. ; e.g. bahu-titha,
manifold,' fr. bahu; tdvatitha, 'the so-manieth,' fr. tdvat.
LXIV. ifhj -tiya (fern, a), forming ordinals ; e. g. dvi-tiya, ' second ;' tri-tiya,
'third' (see 208).
LXV. (jf -tna, forming adjectives ; e.g. 6ira-tna, 'old,' 'ancient,' fr. 6ira, long;'
other examples are nutna, pratna. Cf. -tana above.
LXVI. W -tya ('W^, W^), forming a few adjectives; e.g. tatra-tya, 'being
there,' fr. tatra; iha-tya, 'being here,' fr. iha. Sometimes with Vriddhi of first
syllable ; e. g. pds6dt-tya, ' subsequent,' fr. pasddt, ' behind.' Similarly, ddkshind-
tya fr. dakshind; pauras-tya fr. puras.
LXVII. ^T -trd, forming a few feminine collective nouns ; e. g. go-trd, ' a herd
of cattle,' fr. go. For the adverbial suffixes -tra, -trd, see 720.
LXVIII, rf -tva (=. -td above, q. v.), forming neuter abstract nouns ; e. g.
bahu-tva, yuva-tva, prithu-tva, deva-tva, &c.
LXIX. Wf -tvana (= -tva}, Vedic, forming neuter abstract nouns ; e. g. mahi-
tvana, 'greatness,' fr. mahi or mahin, 'great' (Vedic); sakhi-tvana, 'friendship,'
fj. sakhi, 'a friend;' vasu-tvana, 'wealth,' fr. vasu, 'rich.'
LXX. <^ daghna (<^TT^), regarded (like dvayasa and mdtra) as a secondary
AND THE FORMATION OF NOMINAL STEMS. 67
suffix (Pan. v. 2, 37), denoting ' height,' ' measure,' &c. ; e. g. uru-daghna (fern. ')
' reaching to the thighs.'
LXXI. ^"JflfHT desiya (<^fl<4^.), regarded (like kalpa, q. v.) as a secondary suffix
(Pan. v. 3, 67), denoting 'about,' 'nearly;' e. g. patu-desiya, 'tolerably clever.'
LXXII. 'gTJ'R dvayasa (^H^), denoting 'height,' 'measure,' &c. (see daghna
above); e.g. uru-dvayasa (fern. /), 'reaching to the thighs.'
LXXIII. T -na (T, T*y , forming adjectives and substantives, sometimes after
Vriddhi of the first syllable ; e. g. purd-na (fern, d or {}, old,' fr. purd, ' formerly ;'
pra-na, 'old,' fr. pra; paunsna (fern. {), 'virile,' 'manhood' (neut.), fr. puns,
'a man;' straina (fern. /), 'womanly,' 'womanhood' (neut.), fr. strt.
LXXIV. f -ma (probably an old superlative suffix, cf. -tama, -ra), forming
ordinals and other adjectives; e.g. pahca-ma, 'fifth;' sapta-ma, seventh' (see
209); madhya-ma, 'middlemost,' fr. madhya, 'middle;' ava-ma, 'undermost,' fr.
ava, ' away ;' para-ma, ' furthest,' fr. para, ' beyond.' Cf. Gr. e/30o-/xo-f : Lat.
septi-mu-s, pri-mu-s, infi-mu-s, sum-mu-s, &c.
LXXV. *HI -may a (jTCpz), forming adjectives (fern, t) denoting 'made of,' 'con-
sisting of;' e.g. loha-maya, 'made of metal,' 'iron,' fr. loha, 'metal;' tejo-maya,
' full of light,' fr. tejas, ' lustre ;' buddhi-maya, ' intellectual.'
LXXVI. m& mdtra (ifT^^), added to words to denote ' measure,' ' height,'
&c. (cf. daghna, dvayasa)', e. g. yava-mdtra (fern, i), of the size of a barleycorn ;'
uru-mdtra, up to the thighs.' See mdtra in Sanskrit-English Dictionary.
LXXVII. ^ -ya (^, If, 3[, ^, ^, TPT, ^fW , SSpT, ^, ^, ^p^, ^Ti^,
Te^> ^r^ } ^j), forming adjectives, patronymics, and neuter abstract substantives,
generally after changes similar to those required by secondary suffixes beginning
with vowels (see Prelim. Obs. a. b. at 80. B); e. g. dhanya, 'wealthy,' fr. dhana,
' wealth ;' rahasya (fern, a), ' secret,' 'a secret' (neut.), fr. rahas, ' secrecy ;' pitrya,
'fatherly,' fr. pitri; ritavya, 'seasonable,' fr. ritu; frequently after Vriddhi of the
first syllable, e.g. saumya (fern, a or mi), 'lunar,' fr. soma, 'the moon;' mddhur-
ya, n. 'sweetness,' fr. madhura, 'sweet;' faur-ya, n. 'theft,' fr. 6ora, 'a thief;'
sauhrid-ya, n. ' friendship,' fr, su-hrid, ' a friend ;' saubhdg-ya, n. ' good fortune,'
fr. su-bhaga (see Prelim. Obs. c); svdm-ya, lordship,' fr. svdmin; vaiydghrya, n.
' the state of a tiger,' fr. vydghra. Sometimes the nasal and preceding vowel are not
rejected; e.g. brahman-ya (fern, a), 'relating to Brahman;' rdjan-ya, 'regal,' fr.
rdjan (see Prelim. Obs. b. d). Cf. Gr. varp-to-s, varp-ia, crwTyp-to-f, auryp-toti
Lat. patr-iu-s, patr-ia, nefar-iu-s, &c. (cf. the primary suffix -ya, 80. XXVIII).
LXXVIII. T -ra (probably an old comparative suffix, cf. -tara, -ma), forming a
few adjectives (fern, a); e.g. madhu-ra, 'sweet,' fr. madhu; asma-ra, 'stony,' fr.
asman; ava-ra, 'inferior,' fr. ava, 'down;' apa-ra, 'posterior,' fr. apa, 'away.'
Cf. Lat. sup-eru-s, sup-er; inf-eru-s, inf-er.
LXXIX. ^T rupa (1W[j, regarded as a secondary suffix giving the sense
'composed of,' 'consisting of,' 'full of,' &c., and sometimes almost redundant;
e. g. satya-nipam vdkyam, ' a speech full of truth,' or simply ' a true speech ;' drya-
K 2
68 SANSKRIT ROOTS
rupa, 'respectable.' Sometimes giving the sense 'good,' 'well,' and even used
with verbs adverbially ; e. g. patu-rupa, ' very clever ;' vaiydkarana-rupa, ' a good
grammarian;' pafati-rupam, 'he cooks well' (Pan. v. 3, 66).
LXXX. 75 -la (fern, a), forming a few adjectives (cf. -i-la); e.g. sri-la, fortu-
nate,' fr. sri; pdnsu-la, 'dusty,' fa.pansu; phena-la, 'foamy,' fr. phena.
LXXXI. ^ -va (probably for -vat, 84. VII), as kesa-va, ' hairy,' fr. kesa.
LXXXII. ^c5 -vala (Wc?^, "ipS^), forming a few adjectives (fern, a) and sub-
stantives; e.g. urjas-vala, 'strong,' fr. urjas; sikhd-vala, crested,' a peacock'
(masc.), fr. sikhd, 'a crest;' dantd-vala, m. an elephant,' fr. danta, a tooth.'
LXXXIII. ^ -vya (*$?(, ^1*0, as pitri-vya, 'a paternal uncle,' fr. pitri, a
father.' Cf. Gr. iraTp-viG-*; : Lat. patr-uu-s.
LXXXIV. TJT -&a, forming a few adjectives (fern, d ) and substantives ; e. g.
loma-sa, 'hairy,' 'a sheep' (masc.), ' a fox' (d, fern.), fr. loman, 'hair.'
LXXXV. IS -sa, forming a few adjectives, sometimes with Vriddhi ; e. g. trina-
sa, grassy,' fr. trina; trdpusha, made of tin,' fr. trapu, 'tin.'
81. SECOND CLASS. Stems ending in ^ i (m. f. n.)
A. PRIMARY DERIVATIVES, formed from ROOTS by adding the following
Krit suffixes
I. ^ -t, forming abstract nouns, nouns of agency of all genders, and adjectives
(with occasional Guna or Vriddhi of the radical vowel); e.g. kavi, m. a poet,' fr.
ku; ahi, m. 'a snake' (%'?> anguis), fr. anh; dhvani, m. sound,' fr. dhvan;
yaj-i, m. 'a worshipper,' fr. yaj ; pesh-i, m. 'a thunderbolt,' fr. pish, to crush ;'
tvish-i, f. ' splendour,' fr. tvish, ' to shine ;' sa6-i, f. friendship,' fr. sa6; krish-i, f.
'ploughing,' fr. krish; lip-i, f. a writing,' fr. lip, 'to smear;' 6hid-i, f. an axe,'
fr. dhid, to cut;' vdr-i, n. water,' fr. vri, 'to surround;' aksh-i, n. an eye,'
fr. aksh ; su6-i, ' pure,' fr. 6u6, ' to be pure ; ' bodh-i, ' knowing,' fr. budh.
Sometimes with reduplication; e.g. jagm-i, 'quick,' fr. gam, 'to go;' jagJin-i,
'slaying,' fr. han. Cf. Gr. KO\I-$, 'ftvva.p.i-s, <TTacr;-c, o^-fj &c. : Lat. ovi-s,
trudi-s, &c.
Often added to dhd, ' to hold,' after various prepositions and prefixes, to form
masculine nouns, the final of the root being dropped ; e. g. ni-dhi, m., vi-dhi, m.,
san-dhi, m. ; one or two are exceptionally fern. (e. g. oshadhi).
II. f?[ -ti (cf. -ni), forming feminine abstract nouns and a few masculines, and
closely related to the -ta of the past pass. part, at So. XVII, being added with
similar changes (except that i is rarely inserted); e. g. 3ru-ti, f. hearing,' fr. sru;
bhu-ti, f. 'existence,' fr. bhu; sthi-ti, f. 'state,' fr. sthdj mati, f. mind,' fr. man;
uk-ti, f. 'speech,' fr. vat, to speak;' pur-ti, 'fulness,' fr. pn, to fill;' dat-ti, f.
' a gift,' fr. dd ; bhit-ti, f. ' a fragment,' fr. bhid, ' to split ' (but past part, bhin-na] ;
6hit-ti, f. 'splitting,' fr. 6hid (but past part, thin-no); vrid-dhi (i.e. vridh + ti), f.
' increase,' fr. vridh; yati, m. 'a sage,' fr. yam, 'to restrain ;' jndti, m. a relation,'
AND THE FORMATION OF NOMINAL STEMS. 69
fr. jhd ; pati, m. 'a husband' (for pdti], fr. pa, 'to protect.' Cf. Gr. U.YJ-TI-^
<f)a-Ti-$, (f>d-ei-c, p.dv-Ti-$, 7TO-vi-$: Lat. ves-ti-s, mes-si-s (for met-ti-s), mor-s
(stem mor-ti), po-ti-s, com-pos (stem com-po-ti).
III. f*T -m, forming feminine abstract nouns (in many respects analogous to
those formed with -ti, so that when the past passive participle ends in -na, q.v., a
noun may generally be formed with -ni), also a few masculines and adjectives ;
as, gld-ni, f. weariness,' fr. glai, to be languid ;' lu-ni, f. cutting,' fr. lu; jir-ni,
f. old age,' fr. jn, ' to grow old ;' hd-ni, f. ' loss,' fr. hd (but past part, hina) ;
agni, m. 'fire,' fr. ang or anj; vah-ni, m. 'fire,' fr. vah, 'to bear;' vrish-ni,
'raining,' 'a ram' (m.), fr. vrish. Cf. Gr. py-vi-f, a"7ia.-vt-fl Lat. ig-ni-s (=Sk.
ag-ni-s), pa-ni-s.
IV. fa -mi, as bhu-mi, f. 'the earth,' fr. bhu, 'to be;' dal-mi, m. 'indra's
thunderbolt,' fr. dal ; ur-mi, m. f. 'a wave ' (perhaps fr. vri) ; ras-mi, m. ' a ray '
(perhaps fr. ras for las). Cf. Gr. <f>y-[JU-$ '. Lat. ver-mi-s.
V. ft-ri, as in anh-ri, angh-ri, as-ri, vank-ri, vadh-ri. Cf. Gr. l^-pl-f.
VI. fa -vi, as in ghrish-vi, jir-vi, sir-vi, jdgri-vi, dddhri-vi.
VII. T% -si, as in dhd-si, pluk-shi, suk-shi.
B. SECONDARY DERIVATIVES, formed from the NOMINAL STEMS of primary
derivatives by adding the following Taddhita suffixes.
(See Prelim. Obs. at 80. B.)
VIII. "wH* -aki, forming a few patronymics after Vriddhi of the first syllable;
e. g. Vaiydsaki, ' a descendant of Vyasa.'
IX. vu4ff -dyani, forming patronymics ; e. g. vdsindyani fr. vdsin (Pan. vi.
X. ^ -f, forming patronymics after Vriddhi of the first syllable; e. g. Daushyanti,
'the son of Dushyanta;' so Ddsarathi, 'a descendant of Das'a-ratha;' Sauvasvi
fr. Sv-asva.
XI. iUfrf -tdti (=: -td), forming Vedic abstract substantives ; e. g. deva-tdti, f.
'divinity,' fr. deva; vasu-tdti, f. wealth,' fr. vasu; sarva-tdti, f. entirety,' fr.
sarva, ' all.' Cf. Gr. <f>t\G-TY]f (i. e. $<Ao'-TjT--), KaKO-rrjg (KaKO-Tt]T-o$) -. Lat.
civi-tas (stem civi-tdt- or civi-tdti-), celeri-tas (stem celeri-tdti-), vetus-tas, &c.
XII. flf -ti, as in yuva-li, ' a young woman,' fern, of yuvan (Pan. iv. i, 77).
82. THIRD CLASS. Stems ending in ^ u (m. f. n.)
A. PRIMARY DERIVATIVES, formed from ROOTS by adding the following
Krit suffixes
I. ^J -athu (wxj'qj, after Guna of a radical vowel ; e. g. kshay-athu, m. ' con-
sumption,' fr. kshi, 'to waste away;' scay-athu, m. 'swelling,' fr. svi; also vep-
athu, vam-athu.
II. ^Tnj -dtu, as jw-dtu, m. f. n. ' life,' &c., fr. jw, ' to h've.'
70 SANSKRIT ROOTS
III. 'SU^ -dru, as sar-dru, 'hurtful,' fr. sri, 'to injure;' vand-dru, 'polite,' fr.
vand, 'to praise.'
IV. ^Tcg -dlu (= -dru above), as sdy-dlu, ' sleepy,' fr. si, 'to lie down;' sprihay-
dlu, ' desirous,' fr. sprih (loth class), 'to desire.'
V. ^(p[ -itnu, forming adjectives &c. from verbal stems of the loth class ; e. g.
gaday-itnu, 'talkative,' fr. gad, 'to speak;' stanay-itnu, m. 'thunder,' fr. stan,
'to sound.'
VI. ^BGT -ishnu (i.e. i-snu) -=.snu, as ksay-ishnu, 'perishing,' fr. kshi; bhav-
ishnu = bhu-shnu, 'becoming,' fr. bhu.
VII. T -M (^, "|, T, 1^, ^HT, ^H!r), forming adjectives (fern, us or vt) and a
few nouns, the radical vowel generally undergoing change ; e. g. prith-u, broad,'
fr. prath, 'to extend;' mrid-u, 'mild,' fr. mrid, 'to crush;' svdd-u, 'sweet,' fr.
svad or svdd; lagh-u, 'light,' fr. langh, 'to spring;' tan-u, 'thin,' fr. tan, 'to
stretch;' ds-u, 'swift;' bandh-u, m. 'a kinsman,' fr. bandh, 'to bind;' bhid-u, m.
a thunderbolt,' fr. bhid, 'to cleave;' kdr-u, m. 'an artisan,' fr. kri, 'to make;'
tan-u, f. the body,' fr. tan; ddr-u, n. 'timber,' fr. dn, 'to split;' madh-u, n.
"honey.' Cf. Gr. &K-v-f, yfi-v-s, irkar-v-s '. Lat. ac-u-s, id-u-s, sudv-i-s (for
suddu-i-s).
Forming also desiderative adjectives (sometimes governing an accusative, see
824) from desiderative stems ; e. g. jigamish-u, ' desirous of going,' fr. jigamisha,
desiderative stem of gam, 'to go:' similarly, didrikshu, 'anxious to see;' jigishu,
'striving to conquer.'
VIII. $ -tu (^, TJ0, forming nouns of agency &c., generally masculine; e.g.
gan-tu, m. a wayfarer,' fr. gam, 'to go;' yd-tu, 'a goer,' &c., 'time,' fr. yd, 'to
go;' bhd-tu, m. 'the sun,' fr. bhd, 'to shine' (cf. bhd-nu); jan-tu, m. 'a creature,'
fr. jan; ri-tu, m. 'a season,' fr. ri, 'to go;' vas-tu, n. 'an object,' also vds-tu, m.n.
' building-ground,' fr. vas, ' to dwell.' Cf. Gr. /Joij-Ti;-^, eS^-rv-f , ae-rv (for
facr-Tf) : Lat. sta-tu-s, vic-tu-s, cur-su-s (for cur-tu-s).
Observe The accusative of this suffix is used to form the infinitive; e.g. ydtum,
'to go :' and in the Rig-veda other cases, as the dative, genitive, are used as in-
finitives ; e. g. ydtave, ydtavai, ydtos (see 458, 459).
IX. J -MM (]j|, j), as gridh-nu, 'eager,' ' greedy, 'ft.gridh, 'to covet;' tras-nu,
' timid,' fr. tras, to tremble ;' su-nu, m. a son,' su-nu or su-nu, f. a daughter,'
fr. su, ' to bring forth ;' bhd-nu, m. ' the sun,' fr. bhd; dhe-nu, f. ' a milk-cow,' fr.
dhe, 'to suck.' Cf. Gr. 6py-vv-f t Xiy-vv-g.
X. 'J -yu, as sundh-yu, 'bright,' 'fire' (m.), fr. sundh, 'to purify;' jan-yu, 'a
creature,' fr. jan; man-yu, 'wrath,' fr. man, 'to think;' also bhuj-yu, das-yu,
mri-t-yu.
XI. ^ -ru, as bht-ru (nom. fern, rus or rus), 'timid,' fr. bhi, ' to fear;' as-ru, ' a
tear' (said to be fr. as).
XII. ^ -snu (cf. -isAnw), as sthd-snu, 'firm,' fr. sthd, 'to stand;' ji-shnu, ' vic-
torious,' fr. ji, 'to conquer;' bhu-shnu, ' being,' fr. bhu.
AND THE FORMATION OF NOMINAL STEMS. 71
B. SECONDARY DERIVATIVES, formed from the NOMINAL STEMS of
primary derivatives by adding the following Taddhita suffixes
XIII. ^ -yu, forming adjectives, frequently in the sense of wishing for,' and a
few nouns; e. g. urnd-yu, 'woollen,' fr. urnd; svar-yu, ' desiring heaven,' fr. scar,
'heaven;' also subham-yu, kam-yu, aham-yu, asma-yu.
XIV. <5 -lu, as kripd-lu, dayd-lu, compassionate,' fr. kripd, day a.
Stems ending in \ i and "31 u (see 1 23).
XV. ^ -i, forming numerous feminine nouns, which will be found under their
corresponding masculine suffixes, see 80. I. &c., 123126. Others, mostly mono-
syllabic, and often formed by taking a naked root to serve as a noun, are, bhi, f.
'fear;' dh{, f. 'understanding;' sri, f. 'prosperity;' stri, f. 'a woman;' Lakshmi,
f. the goddess Lakshmi;' ni, m. f. 'a leader' (whence send-ni, m. 'a general;'
grdma-ni, m. f. ' the chief of a village ').
XVI. "31 -u, forming feminine nouns, which will be found under their corres-
ponding masculine forms, as su-nu, bhi-ru, 82. IX. XI. (see also 125, 126). Others,
sometimes monosyllabic, and formed by taking a naked root to serve as a noun,
are, lu, m. f. 'a reaper;' bhu, f. 'the earth;' Svayam-bhu, m. the Self-existent;'
vadhu, f. 'a wife.'
83. FOURTH CLASS. Stems ending in ^ ri (m. f. n.)
PRIMARY DERIVATIVES, formed from ROOTS by adding the Krit suffix
IT -tri, forming, ist, nouns of agency of three genders, and a kind of future par-
ticiple, the same change of the root being required which takes place in the first
future, and the same euphonic changes of t (see 386 and 581); thus kshep-tri, 'a
thrower,' fr. kship; dd-tri, 'a giver,' fr. dd; bhar-tri, 'a protector,' fr. bhri, 'to
bear;' boddhri, 'aknower,' fr. budh; sodhri, 'patient,' fr. sah, 'to bear;' bhav-i-tri,
'about to become' (fu-turu-s), fr. bhu, 'to become' (Raghu-v. vi. 52).
2ndly, nouns of relationship, masculine and feminine ; in these the vowel of the
root is frequently modified; as, pi-tri, ' a father,' fr. pa, 'to protect;' md-tri, 'a
mother,' fr. md, ' to form,' produce ;' bhrd-tri, ' a brother,' fr. bhri, to support.'
Cf. Gr. oci-ryp, na-TVjp, (j.y-Typ : Lat. da-tor, da-turu-s, pa-ter, ma-ter, fra-ter.
84. FIFTH CLASS. Stems ending in if t and ^ d (m. f. n.)
A. PRIMARY DERIVATIVES, formed from ROOTS by adding the following
Krit suffixes
I. ^STI -at, forming present and future participles Par. from the stems of the
present and the second future tenses respectively (see 524, 525, 578) ; e. g. ad-at,
'eating,' fr. ad; 6inv-at, 'collecting,' fr. ti ; karishy-at, 'about to do,' fr. kri;
72 SANSKRIT ROOTS
dadh-at, 'placing,' fr. dhd. Cf. Gr. <ptp-uv (stem (f)p-GVT-), O-cv-f (stem
OlOciVT-), Ti6-ei-$ (stem Ti6-VT-) : Lat. veJi-ens (stem veh-ent-), i-ens (stem e-unt-).
II. ^T^-iV, forming a few nouns and adjectives; e.g. sar-it, 'a river,' fr. sn,
to flow;' har-it, ' green.'
III. J(-t, frequently added to roots ending in a short vowel, to form nouns of
agency, substantives, and adjectives (often used at the end of compounds) ; e. g.
ji-t, 'conquering,' in surva-jit, 'all-conquering,' fr. ji; kri-t, 'a doer,' in karma-
krit, ' a doer of work,' fr. kri.
Sometimes t is substituted for a final m of a root, generally at the end of a com-
pound ; as, ga-t in adhva-gat, in. ' a traveller/ fr. gam, ' to go.'
IV. This class, besides comprehending a few nouns already ending in d, as
sarad, f. 'autumn;' drisad, f. 'a stone;' kumud, n. 'a lotus,' includes a number
of monosyllabic nouns formed by taking roots ending in t or d, and using them
in their unchanged state as substantives and nouns of agency, the technical suffix
kvip (leaving??) being theoretically added, for which a blank is substituted (see 87);
e.g. tit, f. the mind;' mud, f. joy;' vid, a knower' (in dharma-vid) ; ad, 'an
eater' (in kravydd, 'a flesh-eater'); dyut, f. 'splendour;' pad, m. 'a step.'
Some nouns falling under this class are formed by prefixing prepositions to
roots ending in t or d, or in a short vowel; e.g. sam-pad, f. 'success;' sam-vid,
f. 'an agreement;' vi-dyut, f. 'lightning;' upa-ni-shad, 'a philosophical treatise;'
sam-i-t, 'conflict' (fr. sam-i, 'to go together').
The practice of using roots at the end of compounds prevails also in Greek and
Latin; as in "^ep-viip (-W/3-), /3cy-7rA$f (-irtyy-), &c., arti-fex (-fie-), curni-fex
(-fie-), prce-ses (-sid-), &c. And there is a very remarkable agreement between
Sanskrit and Latin in the practice of adding tto roots ending in short vowels; thus,
corn-it- (comes), 'a goer with;' equ-it- (eques), 'a goer on horseback;' al-it- (ales),
' a goer with wings ;' super-stit- (superstes), ' a stander by,' &c. Greek adds a similar
t to roots with a long final vowel; as, a-yvcar- (ayvcoj), a-Tzrwr- (aTzrctJ?), &c.
B. SECONDARY DERIVATIVES, formed from the NOMINAL STEMS of
primary derivatives by adding the following Taddhita suffixes
V. Tffi^ -tdt, a Vedic suffix (=-tdti, 81. XI); e.g. deva-tdt, f. 'worship;'
satya-tdt, 'truth.'
VI. lif -ma? (*fij*0 ^JiJHj, forming adjectives (fern, att) signifying 'possessed
of,' 'full of,' &c. = -vat below; usually added to stems ending in t, i, or u; e.g.
agni-mat, 'having fire;' iri-mat, 'prosperous;' dhi-mat, 'wise;' ansu-mat, 'radiant;'
yava-mat, 'abounding in barley;' madhu-mat, 'full of honey;' vidyun-mat=vidyut-
vat, 'possessing lightning,' fr. vidyut; jyotish-mat, brilliant,' fr. jyotis, 'light;'
dhanush-mat, ' armed with a bow ' (see 69); artish-mat, ' brilliant ' (69. b).
VII. ^l(^-vat (^jj^, ^rffr), forming, ist, adjectives (fern, ati) signifying ' pos-
sessed of,' &c. ; usually added to stems ending in a, d, or m, and in some other
consonants; e.g. dhana-vat, 'possessed of wealth;' asva-vat, 'having horses;'
vira-vat, 'abounding in heroes;' sikhd-vat, 'crested,' fr. sikhd; vidyd-vat, learned,'
AND THE FORMATION OF NOMINAL STEMS. 73
fr. vidyd, 'knowledge;' raja-vat or rdjan-vat (see 57), 'having a king,' fr. rdjan;
agni-vat=agni-mat, ' having fire ;' kirn-vat, possessed of what ;' pad-vat, ' having
feet,' fr. pad, 'a foot;' vidyut-vat, 'possessing lightning,' fr.vidyut (see under -mat);
tejas-vat, 'brilliant,' fr. tejas, splendour;' bhds-vat, 'shining,' 'the sun' (m.), fr.
bhds, 'light;' srva-vat, 'having a ladle,' fr. sru6. Cf. Gr. forms in -Fei$ (i.e. for
-?), -feaaa (i. e. Fttya = vatiior vatyd), -fev (for Fevr); as, ^api-eis (stem
fvr-), ^aKpvo-eif (stem SaKpvo-FevT-).
Forming, 2ndly, past active participles (see 553) ; e. g. krita-vat, ' one who has
done ;' bhagna-vat, ' one who has broken.'
For the suffix -vat, in td-vat, ' so many,' yd-vat, &c., see 234 ; and for the
adverbial suffix -vat, expressing 'similitude,' see 724.
85. SIXTH CLASS. Stems ending in ^r^an and ^in (m. f. n.)
A. PRIMARY DERIVATIVES, formed from ROOTS by adding the
following Krit suffixes
I. ^I^ -an, forming several nouns, chiefly masculine ; e. g. rdjan, m. a king '
(fern, rdjhi, 'a queen,' 57. c), fr. rdj, 'to govern;' taksh-an, m. 'a carpenter,' fr.
taksh, ' to form by cutting ;' sneh-an, m. ' a friend,' fr. snih, ' to love ;' uksh-an, m.
'a bull,' fr. uksh, to impregnate;' as-an, m. a stone,' fr. as; ud-an, n. water,'
fr. ud or und, ' to wet.' Cf. Gr. K\V$-Q)V, TCKT-OJV (stem re/cr-ov-), etK-wv (stem
C//C-OV-) : Lat. hom-o (stem horn-in-}, asperg-o (stem asperg-in-), pect-en (pec-tin-).
II. ^*^ -in, forming numerous substantives, adjectives, and nouns of agency
(fern, ini); e.g. math-in, m. 'a churning-stick,' fr. math, 'to shake;' path-in, m,
'a path,' fr. path, 'to go' (see 162); kdr-in, m. 'an agent,' fr. kri, 'to do;' dvesh-in,
m. an enemy,' fr. dvish, 'to hate.' Cf. the secondary suffix -in at VI.
III. c^^ -tvan (fern, tvari), see under -van below.
IV. V^ -man (*tfl\, T^T, TfT^), -iman, forming neuter and a few masculine
abstract substantives, and rarely adjectives, often after Guna of the radical vowel
(those in iman being generally masc.) ; e. g. kar-man, n. a deed,' fr. kri, to do ;'
jan-man or jan-iman, n. 'birth,' fr. jan, 'to beget;' ves-man, n. 'a house/ fr. vis,
'to enter;' nd-man, n. (for jnd-man), 'a name,' fr. jnd, 'to know;' far-man, n.
'happiness,' probably fr. sri; pre-man, m. n. 'affection,' fr. prt, 'to please;' ush-
man,m. 'heat,' fr. ush, 'to burn:' also si-man, f. 'a boundary;' as-man, m. 'a
stone ;' 6ush-man, m. ' fire,' ' strength ' (neut.) ; pap-man, m. ' sin.'
Sometimes with insertion of i (and Vedic i), in which case the gender is generally
masculine (cf. the secondary suffix -iman) ; e. g. sar-iman or Ved. sar-iman, m.
'going,' fr. sri, 'to go;' star-iman or Ved. star-tman, m. 'a couch,' fr. stri, 'to
spread;' dhar-iman, m. 'form,' fr. dhri, 'to hold;' har-iman, m. 'time,' fr. Art,
' to seize.' Cf. Gr. an-puv (stem aK-pov-), yvu-puv (stem yvu-fMOv-), itvB-^fjv
(stem 7TV0-/A6V-) : Lat. no-men (stem no-min-), stra-men (stem stra-min-), ag-men,
teg-men, teg-i-men.
V. op^ -van (af*lH.5 ^fiH,), forming substantives, adjectives, and nouns of
L
74 SANSKRIT BOOTS
agency (fern, generally vari; cf. suffix -vara, with which -van appears to be con-
nected); e.g. pad-van, m. 'a way,' fr. pad, 'to go;' mad-van (fern, vari), in-
toxicating,' fr. mad, ' to gladden ;' rik-van (fern, vari), ' praising,' fr. art (or rid};
dris-van, ' one who has seen ' (generally at the end of a comp.), fr. dris; yaj-van
(fern, van), ' sacrificing,' fr. yaj.
When a root ends in a short vowel> t is inserted ; e. g. kri-t-van (fern, vari),
'effecting,' fr. Arty ji-t-van, 'conquering,' fr. ji; i-t-van, 'going,' fr. t.
B. SECONDARY DERIVATIVES, formed from the NOMINAL STEMS of primary
derivatives by adding the following Taddhita suffixes
VI. ^^ -in, forming numerous adjectives of possession, &c. ; e. g. dhan-in,
'wealthy,' fr. dhana, 'wealth;' bal-in, 'strong,' fr. bala, 'strength;' mdl-in,
'wearing a garland,' fr. mala, 'a garland)' vrih-in, 'having rice,' fr. vrihi, 'rice;'
kef-in, 'having hair,' fr. kesa, 'hair;' padm-in, 'abounding in lotuses' (padmini, f.
a quantity of lotuses'), fr. padma, 'a lotus.'
VII. 5^*^ -iman (^Tftrf, ^*if*i^), forming masculine abstract substantives,
mostly from adjectival stems, the finals being generally rejected, and the same
changes being frequently required as before the comparative and superlative
suffixes -tyas, -ishtha (cf. the Krit suffix -man, 85. IV) ; e. g. kdl-iman, blackness,'
fr. kdla, 'black ;' lagh-iman, 'lightness,' fr. laahu, nimble ;' mah-iman, 'greatness,'
fr. mahat; also gar-iman, drdgh-iman, prath-iman, &c. (cf. comparisons, 194).
VIII. f*T^-?nin, forming adjectives of possession (cf. the suffixes -in, -vin, -mat,
-vat)\ e.g. vdg~min, eloquent,' fr. vd6, speech;' go*min, 'possessing herds,' fr.
yo, a cow;' svd-min, ' an owner,' fr. sva, ' self.'
IX. T^^-vin, forming adjectives, generally from stems ending in a or asy e.g.
medhd-vin, 'intellectual;' tejas-vin, 'splendid' (69); srag-vin, 'wearing a gar-
land,' fr. sraj.
86. SEVENTH CLASS.- Stems ending in ^as, ^ is, "3^ us (m.f.n.)
A. PRIMARY DERIVATIVES, formed from ROOTS by adding the
following Krit suffixes
I. WJ -as, forming numerous nouns, mostly neuter, and a few adjectives,
generally after Guna of the root; e g. man-as, n. 'the mind,' fr, man, 'to think :'
similarly formed are nam-as, n. adoration;' tap-as, n. 'penance;' Jam-as, n. ' dark-
ness;' jan-as, 'a race;' sar-as, n. 'water,' fr, sri, 'to go;' 6et-as, n. ' mind,' fr. fit;
srot-as, n. 'stream,' fr. sru, 'to fl^v' (in this case t is inserted); ush~as, f. (nom.
ds) t dawn,' fr. ush (=.vas), 'to shine ;' jar-as, f. ' old age,' fr. jri, ' to grow old '
(171) ; vedh-as (nom. m. f. n. ds, ds, as), 'creating,' ' name of Brahman ' (m.) Cf.
Gr. ycv-of, ptv-os, cv-yev-ys (stem ey-yev-ef-), ei;-/Aev-^? (=su-manas) : Lat.
gen-us (stem gen-es- or gen-er-), scel-us.
II. ^^-ts (= -as above), as hav-is, n. 'ghee,' fr. hu, 'to offer;' also ar6-is,jyot-is,
dyot-is, ro6-is, sot-is, n. 'light,' ' lustre,' fr. arf, jyut, dyut, ruf, su.6, 'to shine.'
AND THE FORMATION OF NOMINAL STEMS. 75
III. *n^ -MS (= -as, 86. I), as 6aksh-us, n. 'an eye,' fr. 6aksh, to see;' also
vap-us, n. body;' tanus, n. ' body ;' dhan-us, n. (m.) a bow;' jan-us, n. birth;'
man-us, m. man.'
IV. ^l-vas, -was (nom. m. f. n. van, ushi, vat), forming perfect participles from
the stem of the reduplicated perfect (see 554); e. g. vivid-vas, 'one who has known,'
fr. vivid (cf. vidvas, 168. e) ; similarly, ten-was, jagm-ivas, &c. (see 168).
B. SECONDARY DERIVATIVES, formed from the NOMINAL STEMS of primary
derivatives by adding the following Taddhita suffixes
V. M^ -.iyas, forming the comparative degree (see 167, 193, 194); e.g. bal-
{yas, stronger,' fr. bala for balin or bala-vat. Observe Perhaps this suffix is in
most cases rather primary than secondary, being generally added to the root or
modified root; as, uru, 'wide,' forms variyas fr. vri (cf. tishtha, 80. XLVIII).
VI. T^ -yas (= -{yas above), as bhu-yas, ' more,' comparative of bahu (see 194) :
also jyd-yas (194) ; nav-yas, Ved. (comparative of nava, ' recent ').
87. EIGHTH CLASS. ^-Sterns ending in any Consonant, except
T^t and ^ d, ^n, ^s (m. f. n.)
Almost any root may be used alone in its naked unchanged state as a nominal
stem, no suffix of any kind being apparently added, but as it is a rule of native
grammarians that no word can be formed without a suffix, they suppose a suffix
technically called kvip (leaving t?), for which a blank is then substituted. Most
naked roots so used, form nouns of agency, especially at the end of compounds.
Those roots which end in t or d, or in a short vowel, having t affixed, have been
already noticed as falling under the fifth class, see 84. III. IV. This eighth class
is intended to comprise all other roots, ending in any consonant ; e.g. bhvj (nom.
bhuk), an eater ;' so, budh (nom. bhut), ' a knower ' (see 44. c) ; spris (nom. sprik),
1 one who touches ;' vis (nom. vit), ' one who enters,' ' a Vais'ya ' (m.), ' a house ' (f.) ;
lih (nom. lit), one who licks;' duh (nom. dhuk), 'one who milks.'
a. Some require modifications; as, prdth (nom. prat), 'an asker,' fr. pradh.
A desiderative stem is sometimes used alone in the same way; e. g. pipaksh (nom.
pipak), ' one who wishes to cook.'
b. Many roots are taken in this way to form substantives ; e. g. yudh, f. (nom.
yut), ' battle ;' kshudh, f. (nom. kshut), ' hunger :' some requiring modifications of
the radical vowel; e.g. vdt, f. (nom. vdk), 'speech,' fr. va6, 'to speak;' pur, f.
(nom. pur), ' a city,' probably fr. pri; ffir, f. (nom. gtr), ' praise,' fr. an.
c. Many roots ending in nasals, when used in this way, especially at the end of
compounds, either reject the nasal, or exchange it for t (see -t, 84. Ill) : gam, 'to
go,' has ga or gat ; jan liasja; han has ha or ohna.
d. There are also a few dissyllabic nouns formed from roots which must be made
to fall under this eighth class ; as, trisknaj (nom. trishnak), ' thirsty ;' asrij, n.
(nom. asrik), blood :' also a few substantives formed by prefixing prepositions
to roots; as, sam-idh (nom. samit), 'fuel.'
L 2
76 DECLENSION; OR INFLEXION OF THE STEMS OF NOUNS.
CHAPTER IV.
DECLENSION ; OR INFLEXION OF THE STEMS OF NOUNS,
SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE.
GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.
88. HAVING explained how the stem of a noun is formed, we
have now to shew how it is inflected.
In the last chapter, nouns, Substantive and Adjective, were ar-
ranged under eight classes, according to the final of their stems
(the first four classes- comprising those ending in vowels, the last
four those ending in consonants). In the present chapter their
declension or inflexion will be exhibited under the same eight
classes. Moreover, as every class comprises Adjectives as well as
Substantives, so the example of masculine, feminine, and neuter
Substantives given under each class will serve as a model for the
declension of masculine, feminine, and neuter Adjectives coming
under the same class.
Gender of Nouns.
89. The noun has three genders, and its gender is, in many
cases, determinable from the termination of its stem. Thus, nearly
all stems in d, i, and those formed with the suffix ti (81. II), are
feminine : most abstract nouns and those denoting an act or instru-
ment, formed with the suffixes ana, tva (80. LXVIII), ya, tra (see
under 80), as, is, us (86), and man (85. IV), are neuter; those
formed with the suffixes na (80. XXIV) and iman (85. VII) are
generally masculine; but those in a, i, u, and ri are not reducible
to rule. The Nominative case is, however, in the first of these
instances a guide to the gender ; as, deva-s, * a deity/ is masculine ;
but phala-m, 'fruit/ neuter. And in other cases the meaning of
the word ; as, pitri, ' a father/ is masculine ; and mdtri, ' a mother/
feminine.
It may be noted also that words denoting gods, mountains, seas,
divisions of time, are generally masculine ; words denoting rivers,
the earth, and night, are usually feminine ; while adjectives and
DECLENSION ; OR INFLEXION OF THE STEMS OF NOUNS. 77
participles, used as abstract nouns, the names of woods, flowers,
fruits, towns, and water, are generally neuter.
Cases of Nouns.
90. In Sanskrit, nearly all the relations between words in a
sentence are expressed by inflexions (vibhakti, Pan. i. 4, 104).
Many prepositions exist, but in Post-Vedic Sanskrit they are not
often used alone in government with cases, their chief use being as
prefixes to verbs and nouns. Hence the necessity for eight cases.
These, as it were, grow out of the stem, and are called, i. Nomina-
tive (prathamd, scil. vibhakti, 'the first case') ; 2. Accusative (dvitiyd,
'the second'); 3. Instrumental (tritiyd, 'the third') ; 4. Dative (6a~
turthi, 'the fourth'); 5. Ablative (pahtami, 'the fifth'); 6. Genitive
(shashtht, 'the sixth') ; 7. Locative (saptami, ' the seventh') ; 8. Vo-
cative (see 92). i. The Nominative is the kartri or 'agent,' but the
agent is not always in the N. case * ; thus in the sentences, ' he did
that,' and ' that was done by me,' the agent in the last sentence is
in the I. case. 2. The Accusative is the karman or 'that acted on,'
but the karman is not always in the Ac. case ; as in f that was done
by me,' where 'that' is the karman, and is in the N. case. 3. The
Instrumental expresses karana, 'instrumentality,' i.e. it denotes the
instrument or agent by which or by whom a thing is done ; as, tena
kritam, ' done by him f.' 4- The Dative is used in the sense sam-
praddna, * giving,' ' delivering over,' &c. 5. The Ablative generally
expresses apdddna, ' taking away,' and is usually translateable by
' from,' and not as in Latin and Greek by ' with,' ' by,' ' in ' (see
812). 6. The Genitive expresses sambandha, 'relationship,' 'con-
nexion J.' 7. The Locative is used in the sense adhikarana, 'location,'
and generally expresses the place or time in which anything is
done; as, Ayodhydydm, 'in Ayodhya;' purva-kdle, 'in former time;'
bhumau, ' on the ground f.' 8. The Vocative is used in the sense
sambuddhi and sambodhana, ' addressing,' ' calling to.'
* These cases will sometimes be denoted by their initial letters. Thus N. will
denote Nominative ; I., Instrumental ; Ac., Accusative ; Ab., Ablative.
t The Instrumental and the Locative cases denote various other relations. See
Syntax, 805, 817.
J The Genitive in Sanskrit generally denotes ' possession,' but is of very exten-
sive application. See Syntax, 815, 816.
78 DECLENSION; OR INFLEXION OF THE STEMS OF NOUNS.
91. According to the Indian system, each of these eight cases
has three numbers, singular (eka~va6ana), dual (dvi-va6ana), and
plural (bahu-va6ana) ; and to each belongs a termination which is
peculiarly its own, serving alike for masculine (pum-lingd), feminine
(stri-linga), and neuter gender (kliva or napunsaka-linga).
Again, according to the native system, some terminations are
technically combined with servile or indicatory letters to indicate
some peculiarity, or to distinguish one from the other, or to enable
Pratyaharas to be formed (see note below). Thus the proper
termination of the Nominative singular is ^ s (expressible by
Visarga : before k, kh, p, ph, and before the sibilants, or at the
end of a sentence, see 63) ; but the technical termination is su,
the letter u being servile *. Similarly, the termination of the Nomi-
native plural is really as, but technically jas, the j being servile.
The two schemes of termination, with and without the servile
letters, are here exhibited. The first, or merely technical scheme,
is given in small type.
Technical Terminations with the
indicatory letters in capitals.
SING. DUAL.
N. ^Jsl7* ^n au
v
Ac. ^T*T am
\ ^
I. ZT Td ni? bhydm
D. T-ZV-e bhydm
Ab. Tftf N-asI bhydm
G. T^IV-as
L. fTIV-i
7?e/ Terminations without
the indicatory letters.
PLURAL.
bhis
SING.
DUAL.
PLUBAL.
S
au
as
am
au
as
a
bhydm
bhis
e
bhydm
bhyas
as
bhydm
bhyas
as os am
i os su
* The servile u may possibly indicate that final s, in certain positions, is liable
to be liquefied into u. The object of the 7 of '^ in the Ac. du. is to enable a
pratydhdra ^ to be formed, denoting the first five inflexions, i. e. the Strong
cases of masculine and feminine nouns (see 135). The terminations for the D.
Ab. G. and L. sing, are called by Panini nitah, ' having n as their it,' to indicate
that they are applicable to the four cases, admitting occasional substitutions ; cf.
the inflexion of mati, dhenu at 112, sri, &c. at 123. The pratydhdra ^{sup is used
to denote all the cases from the N. sing, to the L. pi. Pratyaharas are generally
formed by combining the first member of a series with the final consonant of the
last member, as above (cf. page 14, note b).
DECLENSION; OK INFLEXION OF THE STEMS OF NOUNS. 79
92. The Vocative is held to be a peculiar aspect of the Nomina-
tive, and coincides with the Nom. in the dual and plural. Hence
it is not supposed to have a separate termination of its own. In
the singular it is sometimes identical with the stem, sometimes with
the Nominative. Sometimes, however, it differs from both*.
a. The terminations beginning with vowels will sometimes be
called vowel-terminations; and those beginning with consonants,
including the Nom. sing., consonantal terminations.
Again, those cases which take the vowel-terminations will some-
times be called vowel-cases ; and those which take the consonantal,
consonantal cases.
See also the division into Strong, Middle, and Weak cases at
135. a.
Observe The terminations should be read horizontally^ ue. for
each case in all three numbers ; not perpendicularly, i. e. not for
all the cases of the singular before passing to the dual. Hence
the expression ' sas and all the remaining cases ' must be taken to
mean the Ac. pi. and all the other cases sing, du. and pi., and the
' first five inflexions ' must be taken to denote s, au, as, am, au, or
N. sing. du. pi., Ac. sing. du.
93. Having propounded the above scheme as the general type
of the several case-suffixes in the three numbers, Indian gram-
marians proceed to adapt them to every Substantive and Adjective
in the language, as well as to Pronouns, Numerals, and Participles,
whether masculine, feminine, or neuter.
In fact, their theory is, that there is but one declension in San-
skrit, and that the stem of a noun being given, and the regular
case-terminations being given, the stem is to be joined to those
terminations according to the regular laws of euphonic combination,
as in the following examples of the two stems, ^ nau, f. ' a ship '
(navi, vav), and ^ftj^ harit, m. f. ' green.'
* In the first or commonest class of nouns the masculine stem stands alone in
the Vocative, just as the termination is dropped from the 2nd pers. sing. Impera-
tive Parasmai in the first group of classes in conjugation, see 246.
80 DECLENSION; OR INFLEXION OF THE STEMS OF NOUNS.
94.
Nom.Voc.
SINGULAR.
f^ naus
nau + s
DUAL.
fTT^ ndvau
nau + au. See 37.
PLURAL.
TTT^^ ndvas
nau + as. 37.
Ace.
fTPqpT ndvam
nau + am. 37.
ndvau
ndvas
Inst.
TTWT ndvd
nau -f d. 37.
TJt^TTH naubhydm
nau + bhydm
t^ftrc^ naubhis
nau + bhis
Dat.
jre nave
nau + e. 37.
naubhydm
rf|l^ naubhyas
nau + bhyas
Abl.
Hficj^ ndvas
nau + as. 37.
naubhydm
naubhyas
Gen.
rR^ ndvas
nau +- a*. 37.
fTT?^ ndvos
nau -f- o*. 37.
n^W v ndvdm
nau + dm. 37.
Loc.
vnfa waw
WGM + z. 37.
ndvos
7^ naushu
nau + su. 70.
95.
Nom.
SINGULAR.
Voc. ^ftn harit
harit + s. See 41. 1.
DUAL.
^ft'rn haritau
harit + au. 43. c?.
PLURAL.
^ftjU^ haritas
harit + as. 43. c?.
Ace.
I?fTiT^ haritam
harit + am. 43. d.
haritau
haritas
Inst.
^ftjTT haritd
harit + d. 43. d.
^T&n^haridbhydm
harit + bhydm. 43.
'^(Vfe 1 ^ haridbhis
harit + 6Aw. 43.
Dat.
^rftrff harite
harit + 6.43. d.
haridbhydm
^ftST^ haridbhyas
harit + bhyas. 43.
Abl.
^ft:n^ haritas
harit + as. 43. ^.
haridbhydm
haridbhyas
Gen.
haritas
Ifftlfrt^ haritos
harit + os. 43. rf.
^fftHT*T haritam
harit + dm. 43. c^.
Loc.
^ftfir Aan/z
Aari^ + z. 43. 6?.
haritos
^ft^ haritsu
harit + su. 42.
DECLENSION; OR INFLEXION OF THE STEMS OF NOUNS. 81
96. Unfortunately, however, TT nau, ' a ship/ is nearly the only
noun, ending in a vowel, that joins its stem thus regularly with case-
endings ; and although nouns ending in consonants are numerous,
and nearly as regular as harit, they are far less common than nouns
in a, a, z, i f u, and ri, whose declension requires frequent changes
in the finals, both of stem and terminations.
97. Thus in cl. i of stems ending in a (comprising almost as
many nouns as the other seven classes together ; compare 80 with
8187), n t on ty is the final a of the stem liable to be lengthened
and changed to e, but also the termination ina is substituted for a,
the proper termination of the Inst. sing. masc. ; ya for e of the Dat. ;
t for a* of the Ab. ; sya for as of the Gen. ; n for as of the Ac. pi. ;
ais for bhis of the Inst. pi. And in other nouns changes and sub-
stitutions are required, some of which are determined by the gender.
(Compare the first group of verbal stems at 257. ^.)
The annexed table repeats synoptically the terminations, with
the most usual substitutions, throughout all the classes of nouns.
SINGULAR. DUAL. FLUBAL.
N. ^(m.), if (n.) ^(m.f.),$(f.*n.) ^(m.f.), ; (n.)
AC.W (m.f.), ^* (m.f.n.) *ft(m.f.),$(f*n.) ^,^(m.f.),^*(m.),^(n.)
I. ^rr (m.f.n.), 3[7f* (m.n.) WTR (m.f.n.) fa^ (m.f.n.), ^* (m.n.)
D. (m.f.n.), n* (m.n.) wrR (m.f.n.) wi^ (m.f.n.)
Ab.^(m.f.n.),^(m.f.),^*(m.n.) wrpr (m.f.n.) i^[ (m.f.n.)
G. ^(m.f.n.),^(m.f.),^q*(m.n.) ^fl^ (m.f.n.) ^nT (m.f.n.)
L. ^ (m.f.n.), ^^(f.),^ (m.f.) ^ (m.f.n.) g (m.f.n.)
Obs. i. Those substitutions marked * are mostly restricted to
nouns ending in a, and are therefore especially noticeable. Femi-
nines in a are peculiar in taking the neut. substitution i in du. N.
Ac. V.
Obs. 2. It will be perceived that the Accusative pi. of all masc. nouns in the
first four declensions ends in n, whilst that of all fern, nouns ends in the regular
termination s.
a. Comparing the above terminations with those of Latin and Greek, we may
remark that s enters into the Nom. sing, masc., and m or n into the neuter, in all
three languages. In regard to the Sk. dual au, the original termination was a, as
found in the Vedas ; and a equals the Greek a, &>, and 6. In Nom. pi. masc.
the * appears in many Lat. and Gr. words. In Ac. sing., Sk. agrees with Lat.,
and even with Gr., final [A in Gr. being changed into v. S appears in all three
languages in Ac. pi. ; and when the Sanskrit ends in n, as in the first class of
M
82 DECLENSION ; OB INFLEXION OF THE STEMS OF NOUNS.
i
nouns, this n is probably for ns, since a preceding a is lengthened to compensate
for the rejection of s. Cf. some Vedic Ac. plurals ; cf. also mirovg Ac. pi. in the
Cretic dialect; and Gothic forms, such as balgins, sununsj cf. likewise the r added
in the Veda after the Ac. pi., e. g. q it <j| ritunr anu (Rig-v. I. 49, 3). In Inst. pi.
bhis is preserved in the Lat. nobis, vobis, and Gr. <f>i(v) for (f>t$ (vav-(f>iv = naubhis).
The ais which belongs to Sk. nouns in a is probably a contraction of dbhis, since
in the Vedas ebhis for dbhis is found for ais, as vrikebhis for vrikais, &c. &c. This
ais probably answers to the Latin Dat. and Abl. plural in is, just as bhis and bhyas
answer to the Latin bus. In the Gen. sing, all three languages have preserved
the * (*UM^, nav-is, vr r og for vafog} ; and in the Gen. pi. rfm=Gr. cev and Lat.
urn (TifnT = Tro&oJv, pedurri). In Loc. sing. Sanskrit i is preserved in Lat. and Gr.
in such words as OIKOI, 'at home,' ICT^M?, 'on the Isthmus;' humi, domi, &c. ;
and in the Dative (Pjfj(r = VVKTI, frf^ 1 = now). In Loc. pi. sw = Gr. ffi', e.g.
6vpaai(v), 'at the door;' wpctffi(v), 'at the right time ' (^J=*awr/). Sanskrit
stems in a prefix i to su; so that vrikaishu (29. b) = XvKo7ai. The Voc. sing, in
Gr. is frequently identical with the stem, and the Voc. du. and pi. with the Nom.,
as in Sanskrit; e.g.TroA/nj-f, stem andVoc.TroX/ra ; pyrcap, stem and Voc.pyrop ;
yf, stem and Voc.
98. In the following pages no attempt will be made to explain
how or why particular nouns deviate from the general scheme of
terminations. A division of nouns into eight classes, four ending
in vowels, and four ending in consonants, will be made ; and under
every one of the eight classes a model noun for the masculine,
feminine, and neuter, serving for adjectives as well as substantives,
will be declined in full.
99. But the student must understand, that this division into
eight classes is entirely arbitrary. It does not imply that there
are eight separate declensions in Sanskrit. All that is meant is,
that the final letters of the stems of nouns may be conveniently
arranged under four general heads for vowels, and four for conso-
nants. Indeed, according to native grammarians, there is only one
declension in Sanskrit, all nouns, whatever may be the final of their
stems, being forced to adapt themselves to one common scheme of
nearly similar case-terminations.
100. It is most important to remember, that the formation of
every case in a Sanskrit noun supposes the application of a rule of
Sandhi or * junction;' and that declension in Sanskrit is strictly
'junction/ i. e. not a divergence from an upright line (rectus), but
a joining together of a stem with its terminations.
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS. 83
101. Sometimes, however, before this joining together takes place,
the original final of the stem has to be changed to its Guna or
Vriddhi equivalent (see 27), or even to some other letter (see 41.
II V), so that it will often be necessary to point out in what
manner the inflective stem (anga, see 135. c) varies from the original
stem (prdtipadika) ; and sometimes the original termination of the
scheme will have to be changed, as indicated at 97 ; thus, at 103,
under the Gen. du. sivayos, sive + os denotes, that before the stem
6iva is joined to the termination os, the final letter a is to be changed
to e ; and the reference 36. a. indicates the rule of Sandhi (explained
at 36. a) which must come into operation in joining sive and os to-
gether. Similarly, when the original termination has to be modified,
the termination will be exhibited in its altered form; thus, at 103,
under the Ac. sing., iva + m denotes, that the stem is to be joined
with m, substituted for the original termination am. See the table
at 97.
102. In declining the first model noun siva, the stem with the sign -}-, and
after it the termination will be exhibited under each inflexion, and a reference
will be given to the number of the rule of Sandhi which must come into
operation.
In the other nouns the process of Sandhi will be explained when necessary,
along with the changes of the stem, immediately before the paradigms of declen-
sion, and in the paradigms a transliteration in Italic type will be generally given
immediately under the Sanskrit type.
SECTION I. FIRST FOUR CLASSES OF NOUNS.
Inflexion of Nouns, Substantive and Adjective, whose stems end
in vowels.
FIRST CLASS in ^ a, ^sn a, and ^ z.
This large class corresponds to a common class of Latin and Greek words in us
and Of, urn and ov, a and a, e.g. lupu-s, \VKO-f (=Sk. vrika-s, Nora, of vrika);
donu-m, Owpt-v ; terra, "/.wpa (=dhard) ; and to adjectives like bonus, ayaBog,
e.g. Sk. nava-s, navd, nava-m, 'ne\v,'=Lat. novu-s, nova, novu-m; Gr. veo-f (for
vcfo-f), via, veo-v.
103. Masculine stems in a, like f^ra siva, m. * the god Siva/ or
as an adjective, * prosperous/
M 2
84: INFLEXION OP STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS.
The final of the stem is lengthened in D. Ab. sing., I. D. Ab. du., Ac. G. pi. ;
and changed to e in G. L. du., D. Ab. L. pi. : n is euphonically affixed to the final
in G. pi. Hence the four inflective stems siva, sivd, sive, sivdn.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.
f f$R^ sivas f^rel sivau f^RTC^ sivds
[siva+s siva+au. 86633. siva+as. See 31.
swam, sivau f9T=nT sivdn
Ac.-s x
[siva-\-m siva-\-n
sivena fqcww^sivdbhydm %^ sivais
\siva-\-ina. 32. sivd+lhydm siva+ais. 33.
_ sivdya sivdbhydm
[ sivd-\-ya sive-\-bhyas
J fijT^Trf sivdt sivdbhydm sivebhyas
[sivd-\-t
r J f^R^T sivasya f$N*Fl^ sivayos f^nT*n^ sivdndm
\_siva+sya &ve-\-os. 36. . sivdn+dm
Jf^ sive ivayos f^I^f siveshu
\siva-\-i, 32. sive+su. 70.
J f^n siva %^t sivau f^HT^ sivds
\_siva (s dropped). 92. siva+au. 33. swa+as. 31.
Obs. The Vedic I. sing, may end in d, e.g. sivd for sivena; N. Ac. du. may
end in a, e.g. s'ira for sivau; N. pi. may end in dsas, e.g. sivdsas for sivds; I. pi.
may end in e6Ms, e.g. sivebhis for sivais. Cf. e6Ais, I. pi. of idam, 224.
104. Neuter stems in a, like f$re siva, n. * prosperity/ or as an
adjective, ' prosperous/
The final of the stem is lengthened and assumes n in N. Ac. V. pi.
f fsf^R sivam f^ sive f^Nlff &ivdni
N. Ac. -s ,. v '
Lsza+m. 97. siwa+z. 32. szwa+w+*
The Vocative is f^R swa, f^R ^zue, f^raiftT sivdni; all the other
cases are like the masculine.
105. Feminine stems in d and i, like f$RT siva, f. * the wife of
Srva/ or as an adjective, 'prosperous/ and TI^ nadi, f. 'a river/
Their declension is exhibited side by side that their analogy may
be more easily perceived.
In sivd the final of the stem is changed to e in I. sing., G. L. du.; yd is inserted
in D. Ab. G. L. sing. ; and n in G. pi. Hence the inflective stems sivd, sive. In
nadi the final is changed to y before the vowel-terminations by 34 ; d is in-
serted in D. Ab. G. L. sing. ; and n in G. pi. ; in V. sing, the final of the stem
is shortened.
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS. 85
Junction of stem with termination: N. sing, s rejected; N. du. sivd+{=:sive
by 32; N. pi. swd-\-as = sivds by 31; I. sing. sive + d=tivayd by 36. a; D. sing.
sivayai by 33 ; G. L. du. sive + os = s'ivayos by 36. a. D. sing, nadi
= nadyai by 34 and 33 ; L. pi. nadi + su = nadishu by 70.
SING.
jf^TTT
[Siva
Ac.
sivam
Sive
Sive
Sivds
Sivds
Ab
\ sivay a Sivdbhydm sivdbhis
[Sivdyai Sivdbhydm Sivdbhyas
!
[Sivdyds Sivdbhydm Sivdbhyas
[sivdyds Sivay os Sivdndm
G.
[Sivdydm Sivay os Sivdsu
[f^T^ ftflR %^Tt^
[sive Sive Sivds
nadyau
nadim nadyau
nadyas
T^ffa^
nadis
nadyd nadibhydm nadibhis
nadyai nadibhydm nadibhyas
nadyds nadibhydm nadibhyas
nadyds nadyos
firi*J
V.
nadydm nadyos
nadi nadyau
nadindm
^TJ
nadishu
nadyas
Obs. i. The Vedic I. sing, may be iivd for sivay a ; D. sing, sivai for sivay ai;
N. pi. sivdsas; G. pi. sivdm.
Obs. 2. The Vedic N. pi. of nouns in z' may end in z's, e. g. warfzs for nadyas.
106. Monosyllabic nouns in ^ /, like ^ft f. 'fortune,' H^ f. 'fear,' &c., vary from
nadi in the manner explained at 123.
107. In accordance with 58, such words as IJJT mriga, m. *a deer;'
g^ purusha, m. 'a man; 5 >TT^T bhdryd, f. 'a wife; 3 cpnrt kumdri,
f. 'a girl 3 must be written, in the Inst. sing. m. and the Gen. pi.
m. f., with the cerebral ui n; thus, ipim mrigena, g^Mlff, ^'IIHJR,
^^T^UTH, HT^Firr^, ^TTtfarw. When n is final, as in the Ac. pi. m.,
it remains unchanged.
108. When a feminine noun ending in a forms the last member of a compound
adjective, it is declined like siva for the masc. and neut. Thus fr. vidyd, learning,'
alpa-vidyas (m.), alpa-vidyd (f.), alpa-vidyam (n.), ' possessed of little learning.'
Similarly, a masculine noun takes the fern, and neut. terminations ; and a neut.
noun, the masc. and fern.
a. When roots ending in d, such as pd, ' to drink ' or ' to preserve,' form the
last member of compound words, they assume the terminations at 91 regularly
86 INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS.
for their masculine and feminine, rejecting, however, the final of the stem in Ac.
pi. and remaining Weak or vowel-cases ; thus, *fWm soma-pd, m. f. 'a drinker of
Soma juice;' N. V. -TTC(, -Ttf, - t TT^; Ac. -*IT*, -^, -*&(', I. -"TT, -HTWJTT, &c.j
D. -tl, &c. They form their neuter like that of siva, e. g. neut. N. Ac. V. *ftTO*T,
-^, -""ITffT, &c.
Similarly, fk^HJT ' protector of the universe,' and ^T^TT ' a shell-blower.'
ft Analogously in Rig-veda iv. 9, 4, *"n ' a woman ' is in N. sing. ^Jfl^.
c. Masculine nouns in d, like ^T^T hdhd, m.^_a Gandharva,' not derived from verbal
roots, assume the terminations with the regular euphonic changes, but the Ac. pi.
ends in ^J thus, N. V. ^TfT^, IfnJT, ^T^T^J A. ^i^iH, sT^Ti, ^T^T*^; I.
^rfa^, &c. ; D. ^r^, &c.j Ab. ^r^i^, &c. ; G.
; L. fi^, &c.
d. The Voc. cases of *!! ambd, ^T^T akkd, and ^TWT alia, all signifying mother,'
are ^HU, ^Tl$, ! ?IW, ' O mother !'
e. <JnT m. ' a tooth,' TRT m. ' a month,' ^IT^ m. ' a foot,' ^ m. n. ' soup,' ^TTOJ
n. 'the face,' <|<pl n. 'the heart,' T^^i n. 'water,' ^fHl n. 'the head,' *lfa n. 'flesh,'
f*f^TT f. 'night,' Hlfti<*l f. 'the nose,' \tc\\ f. 'an army,' are declined regularly,
but may substitute ^, **T^, ^, ^^ ^ntt^j ^> ^*l> ^ft^> *^> ^TW,
*"^' ^Tl, m *^ e ^ c ' P^' an( ^ remam i n g cases (see 184). In the neut. nouns, the
Norn. pi. does not admit the same substitute as Ac. pi. Thus, "S^R will be Ac.
pi. ^<*lfVj or 3<*lffK; I. sing. ;*^<*1 or T5T. Again, ^TfflBT in I. du. will be
or ftwiTH; and
109. To understand the importance of studying the declension
of this first class of nouns, the student has only to turn back to
pp. 5768, where the formation of the stems of nouns, substantive
and adjective, which follow this declension, is explained. All mascu-
line and neuter substantives in this list are declined like siva, and
all feminine either like siva or nadi, all the adjectives following the
same three examples for their three genders.
SECOND CLASS in ^ i. THIRD CLASS in ^ u.
The inflexion of the 2nd and 3rd classes of nouns (see 81, 82) is exhibited side
by side, that their analogy may be more readily perceived.
f *
The 2nd answers to Latin and Greek words like tgni-s, turri-s, 7T0A*-f,
mare, fJ.\i ; the 3rd, to words like gradu-s, cornu, j3orpv-$, vftv-f, pedv,
no. Masculine stems in ^ i and 7 u, like ^rfrtT agni, m. {ignis),
'fire;' nJ bhdnu, m. 'the sun.'
The final of the stem is gunated in D. Ab. G. V. sing., N. pi. ; lengthened in
N. Ac. V. du., Ac. G. pi. ; dropped in L. sing., or, according to Panini, changed
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS. 87
to a; n is inserted in I. sing., G. pi. Hence the inflective stems agni, agnf, agne, agn;
bhdnu, bhdnu, bhdno, bhdn; according to some the Locative of bhdnu was originally
bhdnavi (such a form occurring in the Veda), and i being dropped, bhdnav would
become bhdndv (bhdnau).
Junction of stem with termination : V. sing., N. Ac. V. du., case-termination
rejected; N. pi. agne + as =. agnayas by 36. a; D. sing. agne-\-e-=.agnaye, 36. a;
G. L. du. agni-\-os= agnyos, 34; L. pi. agni+su-=.agnishu, 70. Similarly, N. pi.
bhdno + as = bhdnavas, 36. a ; D. sing, bhdno + e = bhdnave, 36. a; G. L. du.
bhdnu-}- os = bhdnvos, 345 L. pi. bhdnu+su=bhdnushu, 70.
N.
Ac.
agnis agni
\ agnim agni
agnin
I.
D.
[agnind agnibhydm agnibhis
Ab.
\agnaye agnibhydm agnibhyas
{^r^n^
agnes agnibhydm agnibhyas
G.
L.
V.
[ agnes agnyos agnindm
[ agnau agnyos agnishu
\agne
agni
agnayas
bhdnus bhdnu
bhdnum bhdnu
bhdnavas
bhdnun
bhdnund bhdnubhydm bhdnubhis
bhdnave bhdnubhydm bhdnubhyas
bhdnos bhdnubhydm bhdnubhyas
bhdnos bhdnvos
bhdnau bhdnvos
bhdno bhdnu
bhdnundm
bhdnushu
TTH^
bhdnavas
in. The Vedic Gen. sing, may be bhdnvas, which form may also serve for the
Nom. and Ac. pi.
112. Feminine stems in ^ z and 7M, like J?fir wz#, f. 'the mind/
and Xfrj dhenu, f. ' a milch cow/
The final of the stem is gunated in D. Ab. G. V. sing., N. pi. j lengthened in
N. Ac. V. du., Ac. G. pi. j dropped in L. sing, (unless the termination be ^H*^);
re is inserted in G. pi. Hence the inflective stems ma/i, ra/, wiatfe, ma/ , dhenu,
dhenu, dheno, dhen.
The junction of stem with termination is generally the same as in the mascu-
lines a^ni and bhdnu. Inst. sing. mafi+a = matyd, 34 ; D. mate-{-e=mataye, 36. a,-
mati-\-d+e=matyai, 33.
88 INFLEXION OP STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS.
PLURAL. SING.
( matis
Ac.
( matim
mati
mati
matis
I.
D.
/ matyd
matibhydm matibhis
or
( matayeortyai matibhydm matibhyas
G.
L.
' | mates or tyds matibhydm matibhyas
\ mates or tyds matyos matindm
( JfiTT or HmW ^^"11
I matau vrtydm matyos matishu. 70.
V.
(mate
mati
matayas
dhenus
dhenum
dhenvd
dhenu dhenavas
dhenu dhenus
dhenubhydm dhenubhis
or
dhenave ornvai dhenubhydm dhenubhyas
dhenos or nvds dhenubhydm dhenubhyas
dhenos or nvds dhenvos dhenundm
dhenau or nvdm dhenvos dhenushu. 70.
dheno
dhenu
dhenavas
With the optional forms in D. Ab. G. L. sing., compare similar forms in the same
cases of nadL
113. The Vedic Nom. pi. may be dhenvas.
114. Neuter stems in 5 i and 7 u, like ^rfr vdri, n. 'water/ and *r>J
madhu, n. 'honey' (pedv).
The stem inserts n before the vowel-terminations, and the final is lengthened in N. Ac.
V. and G. pi. Hence the inflective stems vdri, edri; madhu, madhu.
SING. DUAL. PLURAL.
N. ( ^rft ^ifiusft <H'OfVi
Ac. ( vdri vdrini. 58. vdrini
I.
( vdrind vdribhydm vdribhis
D.
vdrine vdribhydm vdribhy as
Ab.
vdrinas vdribhydm vdribhy as
( vdrinas vdrinos vdrindm.^S.
(varim vdrinos vdrishu. 70.
or
madhund
madhune
madhuni madhuni
madhubhydm madhubhis
madhubhydm madhubhyas
madhunas madhubhydm madhubhyas
madhunas madhunos madhundm
madhunos madhushu. 70.
or
( vdriorvdre vdrini vdrini
115. The Vedic Ac. pi. may be madhu.
madhu or madhomadhuni madhuni
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS. 89
116. Neuter nouns in i and u follow the analogy of nouns in in at 159, except
in G. plur. and V. sing.
. HT*J n. ' summit,' ' ridge,' optionally substitutes ^ in all cases except the first
five inflexions.
117. There are not many substantives declined like agni and vdri (81), but
nouns like mati are numerous (81. II). Moreover, adjectives like su6i, and com-
pound adjectives in i, are declined like agni in masc., like mati in fern., and like
vdri in neut.
118. Again, there are few substantives declined like dhenu and madhu, yet many
simple adjectives like tanu and pipdsu (82), all compound adjectives in u, are de-
clined like bhdnu in the masc., like dhenu in the fern., and like madhu in the neut.
a. Many adjectives in u, however, either optionally or necessarily follow tiadi in
fern. ; as, tanu, 'thin,' makes Nora. fern, either I anus or tanvi ; f^, tender,' makes
Nom. f. ipft mridvf; and T^, ' heavy,' *T^f gurvi : and some optionally lengthen
in the fern. ; as, bhiru, ' timid,' makes fern. ft^v or ft^, declinable like nouns
in u, 125.
119. When feminine nouns in i arid u form the last member of a compound
adjective, they must be declined like agni in masc., and vdri in neut. Thus alpa-
mati, narrow-minded,' in the Ac. plur. masc. would be alpa-matin; fern, alpa-
matis ; neut. alpa-matmi.
Similarly, a masc. or neut. noun, at the end of a comp., may take a fern. form.
a. Although adjectives in i and u are declined like vdri and madhu for the neut.,
yet in the D. Ab. G. L. sing., and in the G. L. du., they may optionally follow
the masculine form ; thus su6i and tanu will be, in D. sing, neut., ^J^T^ or W^ >
FJn or THT^ ; and so with the other cases.
120. ^rftT sakhi, m. 'a friend,' has two stems, fWl^for the Strong cases (see
I 35- ). and Kfa for the others ; thus, N. ^TOT, ?TO1^, *U5TT*l^ ; Ac. *nsr !***,
D. ^f
ns/Mi*< v ; L.
V. ^B^r, ^i*i, tfaii^. Hence it appears that sakhi in some cases
assumes the terminations at 91 more regularly than agni. In the rest it follows
agni.
Obs. The feminine TO^fr, 'a female friend,' is declined like T^.
121. Tfir m. 'a master,' 'lord' (noaig), when not used in a compound word,
follows sakhi at 120 in I. D. Ab. G. L. sing, (thus, I. "tlWT, D. ^, Ab. G. **t,
L. MW) ; in the other cases, agni. But pati is more usually found at the end of
compounds, and then follows agni throughout (thus, >J5lfirTT ' by the lord of the
earth ').
Obs. The feminine of Tjfk is H<gft patnt, declinable like T^.
122. A few neuter nouns, iHU?<i n. ' a bone ' (ooreov), ^uf n. ' an eye ' (oculus,
OKOC), titV'q n. 'a thigh,' ^f>Jn. 'coagulated milk,' drop their final i in I. sing, and
remaining weak or vowel-cases, and are declined in those cases as if derived from
obsolete forms in an, such as 'SW^, &c. (cf. ndman at 152); thus,
N
90 INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS.
' a bone :' N. V. Ac. ^rfef, ^fenft, ^Fftftf ; I. ^TFJT, ^rf^WTTT, &c. ;
D. 'STPf, Hfi4i|miH x , &c. ; Ab. ^4^, &c. ; G. ^H^, ^T^t^, ^{T* ; L.
or ^r^ftr, ^ra*fta[, ^rfaitj.
Hence, ^ftj, ' an eye,' will be in I. sing, vityui; in D. ^n^ST, &c. (see 58).
Nouns ending in ^ i and "& u.
133. Besides the feminines of adjectives and participles, &c.,
declined like nadi at 105 (cf. 80. XI), there are a few common
monosyllabic words in long ^ z (generally roots used as substantives)
primitively feminine, i. e. not derived from masculine substantives
(see 82. XV), whose declension must be noticed separately. They
vary from the declension of t^ (105) by forming the Nom. with ^,
and using the same form for the Voc., and by changing the final i
to iy before the vowel-terminations; thus,
^ft f. * prosperity :' N.V. ^5ft^, fontf, f!R^; Ac. f^PPTj fenCT
I. forn, ^rfan*, ^rtfir^; D. fopj or f^R, ^ftnr, ^ftwrc^; Ab.
fsnrra(, ^ftn*[, ^ftwrc^; G. fera^ or fsnrre^, f^r^frt^, fairw or
L. f^rfti or fsnn'T, fa'ft^, ^t^.
a. Similarly, H^ f. 'fear,' ^ f. 'shame,' and *ft f. 'understanding;' thus, N.V.
*ffc(, fcrfffy $&&(') Ac. falH, &c. ; I. f>Tm, &c. ; D. fra or wf, &c.
6. ^f^ f., ' a woman ' (not being itself a root like the examples above), follows
T^ in N. V. sing., and varies also in other respects ; thus, N. Jsft,
v. %, %rft, %^;; AC. ^fta or %pm x , %^,
^fcn*, ^^; D - %^> ^fNi^, ^N^; Ab.
G. r^^i^, r^*n^, twVn^; L. f^n??, r^^x,
As the last member of a compound adjective, it shortens its final, and in some of
its cases follows agni and mati; e. g.
'S&frtfyjf m. f. n. 'surpassing a woman:' N. masc. -f^p^, -ftPfO, "^^,5 Ac.
-%*T or -%^T, -%P^, ~^fK or -%nW^> I- -%FBT, -'f^ 1 ^, &c. ; D. -^,
&c. ; Ab. -^i^, &c. ; G. -^^, -f^faf, -^tOPT J L. -^, &c. ; V. -^, &c.
The fern, form is like the masc., but Ac. pi. -JJjft^or -f^|^^; I. -f^TT ; D. -f^jfM
or ~^f J Ab. -(tCf^'^or -^pF^, &c. For neut., see 126..;.
124. A few primitively feminine words not monosyllabic, such as c^Bjit 'the
goddess of prosperity,' n*\ 'a lute-string,' "Hrl" 'a boat,' like ^ft, take s in the
Nom. sing., but in other respects follow T?ft; thus, N. c4*ft^, rtB*-MT, c-54^;
Ac. ?5^*ftH, &c. ; V. c4Hj*i.
Obs. Analogously in the Veda ^plft ' a she-wolf (Rig-v. 1. 1 17, 18), and (accord-
ing to some authorities) f^hft ' a lioness,' make N. sing. <J3fc(, f?nrfa[.
But Tu^ f. ' the brilliant (goddess),' as a derivative fern, noun, is N. sing.
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS. 91
1 25. Feminine nouns in long gs u, not monosyllabic, are declined
like primitively feminine nouns of more than one syllable in ^ i, i.e.
like T5^ft , they follow the analogy of nadi except in N. sing., where
* is retained. In the other cases "3! u becomes v, wherever ^ i is
changed to y (see 34) ; thus,
^' a wife :' N. ^^, Wl, ^*fl^; Ac. ^T, *ft, ^^; I.
^nH, ^fo^; D. *is|, qigwT, ^nfwi^; Ab. ^EII
G. *rn^, ^EH^, ^TFT; L. ^srm, ^rsft^, ^5; V.
Similarly, xj^ f. ' a host f TET^ f. ' a mother-in-law.'
a. Again, monosyllabic words in u primitively feminine are de-
clined analogously to ijft f. at 1 23 ; u being changed to uv, wherever
i is changed to iy ; thus,
f. 'the earth :> N.V. ^, ^, $^; Ac. ^*T, ^, >pr^; I.
$f**U D- ^ or ^t, ^nr, >ji^; Ab. ^ or
; G. >pm v or >j^ra, ^F, ij^or )jiTPT; L. >jf^ or ^
Observe that the V. is like the N.
b. Similarly, f. 'the eye-brow' (dtypvs) : N.V. ^T, ^^, ^q^, &c.
126. Roots of one syllable ending in i and u, used as masc. or fern, nouns, follow
the declension of monosyllabic words in { and u, such as ^ft at 123 and >J,at 125.0;
but in the D. Ab. G. L. sing., G. pi., take only the first inflexion ; thus,
^ m. f., ' one who buys/ makes D. flR^ only for m. and f., and eg? m. f., 'a
reaper,' makes D. c^ only for m. and f.
a. The same generally holds good if they have adjectives prefixed to them;
thus, tpOTaft m. f/ the best buyer ' (N. V. -Wfa, -fa*u, -fWFff ', Ac. -f^W, &c.)
b. And when they are compounded with another noun as a dependent term they
generally change their final / and w to y and v, before vowel-terminations, and not
to iy and uv (unless z'and u are preceded by a double consonant, as in *T^gft 'a buyer
of barley'), thus conforming more to the declension of polysyllables ; e.g.
snyft (for TfcJ^i) m. f., ' a water-drinker,' makes N. V. ^rtMl^, -W, - >
Ac. 1rtH^, -W, -TXfQj, I. Hcyn, -^fhTPT, &c. ; D. !c*U|, &c. ; Ab.
&c. ; G. iTH 1 ^, -"oftTf , &c. ; L. ^e-if 1 *! (in opposition to 31), &c.
So also, orrt^m. f. ' a sweeper :' N. V. *fc4^, -1^, ~ T ^; Ac. ^rtM**^, &c. ;
I. <sfrt<T, &c. ; L. ^T5ft^, &c. : ^15 'one who cuts well;' N.V. *J^N*, -w> -^RT .
c. Similarly, ^T>J. m. f. 'a frog,' "^>J,m. 'a thunderbolt,' cjfX*J.m. 'a finger-
nail,' ^f^m. f. ' born again ' (N.V. ^^(^ Ac. -vtT s , &c. ; I. -VT; D. -f ; Ab.
G. -**Nf x , -f^ 1 . But if the sense is limited to a distinct female object, as ' a virgin
widow remarried,' the D. will be -^f ; Ab. G. -^T^J L. ->%^, like ^^)-
d. Similarly also, *nn^ m. 'a general,' SJW'ft m. f. 'the chief of a village;'
but these, like T^, take dm for the termination of the L. sing, even in masc.;
thus, N. V. *liii1(, -"au, -v*m ; Ac. -"anr, &c. ; I. -'^n; L.
N 1
92 INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS.
, &c. This applies also to the simple noun ft m. f. 'a leader,' but the
final becomes iy before vowel-terminations.
e. But ^*l*^ and ?3^ m. ' self-existent,' as a name of Brahma, follow ^ at
125. a, taking only the first inflexions; thus, D. -*J^J Ab. ~^^^ &c.
f. Masculine non-compounds in /and u of more than one syllable, like tfTn m.
who drinks ' or ' cherishes,' 'the sun,' |T]f m. 'a Gandharva,' follow arfoiMl and
126.1, except in Ac. sing, and pi.; thus, N. V. ^TT^, *TW, TT^J Ac.
> 1 T n n, T*fi^; and in L. sing, the final i combines with the i of the termination
into ^(31), not into yij thus, L. sing, tpft (but ^fs^ from f[f[). Again, qirtH*^
m. 'an antelope' (surpassing the wind), as a compound, may follow To5*ft; but
Vopadeva makes Ac. sing, and pi. follow Tffr. When such nouns have a feminine,
the Ac. pi. ends in s ; thus ^TPE m. f., ' tawny,' makes aii^t^ for the Ac. pi. fern.
g. A word like Jfvft f. ' superior understanding ' (formed from the compound
verb IW), when used as a fern, noun, is treated as a polysyllable, and follows
jfrjtft, except in D. Ab., &c., where it takes the second inflexions (D. sing. Tw,
&c.) But when used adjectively, in the sense 'having superior understanding,'
it follows sfO'fl throughout, both for masc. and fern., but may optionally for the
fern, be declined like the fern, substantive. The Voc. fern, may be ini^9[ or nfv.
Two rare nouns, *J^t ' one who loves pleasure ' and ^Jirfr ' one who wishes for a
son,' also follow *Tc*R*l, but in Ab. G. sing, make ^^^> tJ*5*V
h. Monosyllabic nouns primitively feminine (like *ft f., V^ f., ^TT f., at 123,
^f. the eye-brow'), forming the last member of a compound adjective, still follow
the declension of monosyllables, but use the first inflexions only in the D. Ab. G.
L. cases and G. plur. for the masc., and may optionally use them for the fern.;
thus, N. JTrfsfH^ m. f., ' fearless,' is *TTTfnT only in D. sing, m., -fir^ or -ftR in
D. sing. f. So also, ^V^ m. f. ' intelligent,' SRr*ft ni. f. 'having pure thoughts,'
rj[*flf m. f. 'stupid,' tjn m. f. 'having good fortune,' *J^ni. f. 'having beautiful
brows ;' thus, N. V. ^f^, ~^T, -^f ^ j Ac. *J^f^> &c. According to Vopadeva,
the Voc. f. may be ^JW> and this form occurs once in the Bhatti-kavya.
. Words necessarily feminine (nitya-strf-linga), such as kumdri, ' a girl,' Gauri,
'the goddess Gauri,' &c. (not like ?JT*TOt, which may be masc. and fern.), retain
their nadi character (Pan. i. 4, 3), even though they afterwards assume another
sense which makes them masculine. This may happen in a compound, as in
^snreft m. 'a man of many excellences :' N. or^Mtn, -W, -'CT^; V. -fa,
&c.; Ac. -iftiT, -W, -*ft^; I. -*jHT, -*ftTR, &c.; D. -^, &c.; Ab. G. -FH^,
&c. ; L. -WW, &c.
Or in words not compounded, as in "^Rn^t 'a man who acts like a girl,' N. masc.
cfTnft. But these differ in Ac. sing, and pi. (^*n*J*^, $H*4<^). Cf. the name
Qopdla-sarasvati in Sanskrit-English Dictionary.
Also like bahu-reyas{ (but N. sing, will end in ^), ! in rt *n m. f. one who has
surpassed Lakshmi,' Wrlrtttjit m. f. ' deprived of fortune,' ^rflT^^m. f. 'victorious
over hosts ' (N. SHfrf-eHj^, -T^, -'*^; V. -^ ; Ac. -^H, -T^, -^, Ac. pi. f. -^B[;
I. ~^T, -^l TT, &c. ; D. -^, &c. ; Ab. -*^P^, &c.) ; but these three may follow
Vopadeva's declension of ctfiViwt at 126. f.
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS. 93
j. Adjectives ending in z'and u shorten the final vowel for the neuter, and follow
vdri; but in the I. D. Ab. G. and L. cases they may optionally take the masc.
terminations; thus, N. V. sing. neut. Tiffa; I. JTnfWiT or *TiTf>TRT; D.
or TrTftr^, &c. N. V. Ac. sing. Tc5ftr; I. Tc$ftRT or -tqr, &c. N.V. Ac.
I. -$TT or -^T. N. V. Ac. 'f^ivPfl; I. -^TfftRT or -^HRST; D. -"iniftnt or
, &c. N. V. Ac. UTT^f > I- -ftRT or -T?TF.
FOURTH CLASS in ^ ri.
This class answers to QCiTvjp, iraryp, pater, &c. ; ri being equivalent to ar: and
it is remarkable, that ddtdram, ddtdras, &c., bear the same relation to pitaram,
pitaras, &c., that tioTypa, ^GTyptf, Sorypi, &c., bear to Trarepa, irarcpes, Trarept,
&c. Compare also the Latin datoris from dator with patris from pater.
12, 7. Masculine stems in ri, like ^ da^n, m. ' a giver/ and ftr^f
pitri, m. 'a father.' The former is the model of nouns of agency
(83) ; the latter, of nouns of relationship.
In nouns of agency like ddtri the final ri is vriddhied (28), and in nouns of
relationship like pitri (except naptri, ' a grandson,' and svasri, ' a sister ') gunated, in
the Strong cases (see 135) ; but the r of dr and ar is dropped in N. sing., and to
compensate in the last case a is lengthened. In both, the final ri is gunated in
L. V. sing., and ur is substituted for final ri and the initial a of as in Ab. G. sing.
In Ac. G. pi. final ri is lengthened, and assumes n in G. pi. Hence the inflective
stems ddtri, ddtdr, ddtar, ddtri, ddtur j pitri, pitar, pitri, pitur.
Junction of stem with terminations : s is elided at the end of a conjunct conso-
nant after r; hence in Ab. G. ddturs and piturs become ddtur and pitur. See 41. 1.
[ data ddtdrau ddtdras
' \ ddtdram ddtdrau ddtrin
\ddtrd ddtribhydm ddtribhis
\ddtre ddtribhydm ddtribhyas
' \ ddtur ddtribhydm ddtribhyas
^rdUj, <3[n!rn*
\ddtur ddtros ddtrindm. 58.
\ddtari ddtros ddtrishu. 70.
\ ddtar ddtdrau ddtdras
pita pitarau pitaras
pitaram pitarau pitrin
f^TcH ftrrT**n*T "fa^fa^
pitrd pitribhydm pitribhis
ftrifr ft^p^
pitre pitribhydm pitribhyas
PMIJ^.
pitur pitribhydm pitribhyas
pitur pitros pitrindm. 58.
fififft; ftfifj
pitari pitros pitrishu. 70.
pitar pitarau pitaras
94 INFLEXION OP STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS.
128. Pitri seems to be a weakened form ofpdtri, 'a protector' (pa, 'to protect').
The cognate languages have preserved the root in 7raT)jp, pater, father,' &c.
The Latin Jupiter, however, is literally Dyu-pitar, or rather Dyaush-pitar, father
of heaven.' It is clear that stems like ddtri, pitri, &c., originally ended in ar.
a. Tff naptri, ' a grandson ' (thought by some to be derived from na, ' not,' and
pdtri, & protector '), is declined like ^T^ ddtri.
b. There are a few nouns in ri expressing neither relationship nor agency.
T nri, m. a man,' is said to be declined like pitri; thus, N. U na, Ac. *i<.*i ,
*^ -^
I. ^T, D. ^f, Ab. G. J^, &c. But the forms 9T, ^, ^ are seldom, if ever, used.
The following forms certainly occur: N. sing. TT, Ac. TT*T; N. Ac. du. TCT,
I. D. Ab. JTR N , G. L. Tf^; N. pi. Tt^, Ac. ^, D. Ab. Jn^, G. tJIUI*^ or
rftliiH, L. Wg. In the I. D. G. L. sing., the corresponding cases of TC are gene-
rally substituted.
c. "aitT? m., ' a jackal,' must form its Strong cases (except V. sing.) and may form
its Weak cases (135) from Jffa. N. jfan, -Fro, -FR^J Ac. -FtT?R, -FITT, -f^
or -Fc^; I. -?7 or -TpTT, -F*n*T, &c. ; D. -If or -F3", &c. ; Ab. -F^ or -Ft% &c. ;
G. -F^ or -F^, -Iff^ or -jffa(, -F^JTH or -F/TTH ; L. -Fft or -FT, &c.; V. -FL
As the last member of a compound adjective, in the neuter, "3uT alone is used.
d. Nouns like ^^ m. ' a charioteer,' rT m. ' a carpenter,' ^| m., ^V^ m., TtftlJ
m. ' duTerent kinds of priests,' *n3 na. ' a warrior,' of course, follow ddtri. But
*T3Tf m., ' a charioteer,' follows pitri.
129. Feminine stems in ^ ri belong to nouns of relationship,
like main, 'a mother' (from md, 'to create/ 'the producer'); and
only differ from pitri in Ac. pi., which ends in * instead of n;
thus, J?T7T^. Compare fj.tiTrjp } /uLtjrepa, Voc. /jt^re^o.
a. *3*J svasri, ' a sister,' exceptionally follows <JT^ ddtri; but the Ac. pi. is still
*3*T^. The lengthening of the penultimate in the Strong cases is probably caused
by the loss of the t from tri, preserved in the English sister. So soror for sostor.
b. The feminine stem of nouns of agency is formed by adding ^ i
to the final ^f ri ; thus, ^T$ + f , ^T^t ddtri, f. ' a giver ;' and
SK^ff f. 'a doer.' Their inflexion follows nadi at 105.
130. The neuter stem is thus declined : N. Ac. <THJ, ^TT^Uft, ^Tf^fitr; V.
^T^' The rest may conform to vdri at 114, or resemble the masc. ; thus, I.
or ^m<ui, &c. But neuter stems in ^ ri belong generally to nouns of agency or
of relationship, when used at the end of compound adjectives, such as ij^lfij bahu-
ddtri, 'giving much,' or f^^nTT^ dwya-mdtri, agreeing with neuter words like
^jc5^, i. e. 'a family having a divine mother,' or fs*il^[ ' having two mothers '
(compare OtfJ-yrup). Their declension may resemble that of vdri at 114, or con-
form to the masc. in all cases but the N. V. Ac. ; thus, N. Ac. ^TiJ, ^i^^, ^tiffin ',
V. ^T^or^TTT^, &c.; I. ^I^TT or 5fT5TT, &c. ; D.^liJUJ or^T^, &c.; Ab. G.
or ^15^, &c. ; L. ^fijftu or <IHft., &c. N. Ac. -TTJ, -TT^ft, -HTrrftrrj V. -
or -TTif^, &c.; I. -Ml^UI or -TT^T, &c.
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS. 95
Nouns ending in ^ ai, *ft o, ^ au.
131. We may notice here a few monosyllabic nouns in , 1 sft,
and ^, not sufficiently numerous to form separate classes.
132. T rai, m. f. ' substance,' ' wealth ' (Lat. res) : N. V. TT^, T!RT, TFR? ; Ac.
tnw, &c. ; I. tnn, TTTT^, trftr^ (rebus) , D. n^, rrwrfr, ur^; Ab.
&c.; G. TTBf^, <jtfl^, "O*n*; L. nfa, tuffy TTCJ.
133. *ft go, m. f. 'a cow' or 'ox' (bos, /3ovf), 'the earth:' N. V. JTTO,
TT^; Ac. *TTW, *TT^, *TT^; I. *RT, jftwrPT, *ftfTO(; D.*T^, &c.; Ab. jfa^, &c.;
G. jffy T^^, TWTHJ L. ifa (bovi), T^t^, ' J Tty. Compare 17^ with yyv.
a. ifl c?yo, f. 'the sky,' follows *T\', thus, N. V. ?H^, fTT^, l I'C*^; Ac.
TT^; I. 5RT, ^ftwiTT, ?ftfH^; D. 1R, &c. The Vedic N. du. is
134. n nau, f. 'a ship ' (cf. navis, vavf), is declined at 94, taking the termina-
tions with perfect regularity. With the N. pi. ndvas, compare naves, vae$ (vyfi).
The gen. vyos for vaof or vaFo$ = ndvas.
Similarly may be declined *fr m. ' the moon :' N. glaus, gldvau, gldvas, &c.
a. The above nouns sometimes occur at the end of compounds ; as, ^T?T 'rich,'
N. m. f. ^RU*! N , &c. ; ^pO ' having many ships,' N. m. f. 'f^rPH, &c. The
neuter is ^fft nH ', of which the Inst. cases will be wfnUT, ^?^TT> and so
with the other cases : the masc. forms being equally allowable in ^?K throughout,
except in N. Ac. V. sing. du. pi. ; e. g. l^fV<uI or ^|UMI.
b. In the case of go, 'a cow,' the compound seems always formed with gu; e.g.
dvi-gu, us, us, u, ' worth two cows ;' panfa-gu, ' bought with five cows ;' sata-gu,
' possessing a hundred cows.'
SECTION II. LAST FOUR CLASSES OF NOUNS.
Inflexion of Nouns, Substantive and Adjective, whose stems end
in consonants.
135. The last four classes of nouns, though including substantives,
consist chiefly of adjectives, participles, or roots at the end of adjective
compounds. All masc. and fern, nouns under these remaining classes
regularly take the terminations at 9 1 . Neut. nouns take the substi-
tutions at 97 in N. Ac. du. pi.
a. The case-terminations are here repeated with Bopp's division
into Strong, Weaker, and Weakest, as applicable especially to nouns
ending in consonants (though not to all of these even). The Strong
cases will be here denoted by the letter S ; the Weaker, sometimes
called Middle, will be denoted by M ; and the Weakest by w. In
those nouns which distinguish between Strong and Weak cases only,
the Weak will be marked by both M and w.
96 INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
SINGULAR. M. F. N. DUAL. M. F. N. PLURAL. M. F. N.
Nom.Voc.^5(S),(Neut.M) *SW(S), (Neut.w) ^(as (S), (Neut. S)
Ace. *m am (S), (Neut, M) au (S), (Neut. w) as (w), (Neut. S)
Inst. ^na(w) -nm^bhydm (M) fvr^bkis (M)
Dat. ue (w) bhydm (M) fq^bhyas (M)
Abl. ^n^as (w) Ihydm (M) %as (M)
Gen. as (w) ^frt^ o$ (w) ^TTT am (w)
Loc. ^ i (w) o* (w) g su (M)
The Vocative, though identical with the Nom. in the dual and
plural, has sometimes a peculiar form of its own in the singular
(see 92).
b. Panini always considers the Nom. sing. masc. as having the termination s,
which is supposed to retain its effect, though it experiences lopa (cutting off); but
in the N. Ac. Voc. sing. neut. there is luk of the terminations s and am, i. e. these
terminations disappear altogether (Pan. vn. I, 23).
c. The terms anga, pada, bha (the first two of which have also
general meanings, see 74 with note) are applied in a restricted sense
to different forms of the Pratipadika or stem as modified by the
above terminations or by suffixes ; thus, the stem is called anga
before the terminations of the so-called Strong cases or Paninr's
sarva-ndma-sthdna (viz. the Nom. sing. du. pi., Ac. sing, and du.
of masc. and fern, nouns, and the Nom. and Ac. pi. of neuter nouns,
see the above table) ; pada * before the terminations of the Middle
cases (viz. bhydm, bhis, bhyas, and su), as well as before Taddhita
suffixes beginning with any consonant except y (Pan. i. 4, 17);
bha before the terminations of the Weak cases beginning with vowels
(except of course the anga terminations mentioned above), as well
as before Taddhita suffixes beginning with vowels and y (see Pdn.
i. 4, 1 8).
d. A stem is made strong by lengthening the vowel of the last
syllable, or by inserting a nasal, e.g. yuvan, yuvdn; dhanavat, dha-
navant : and made weak by eliminating one or more letters, e. g.
yuvan, yun ; pratyah6, prati6.
e. It should be noted that the Ac. pi., and in neuter nouns the
* Probably so called because the laws of Sandhi which come into operation at
the junction of separate words (pada) in a sentence generally hold good before
the terminations of the Middle cases.
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS. 97
Inst. sing., is generally the guide to the form assumed before the
remaining vowel-terminations.
f. This division of cases has not been noticed before, because it
is of no real importance for stems ending in vowels. That it applies
to stems ending in ri is accounted for by the fact that these originally
ended in ar.
FIFTH CLASS in 7^ t and ^ d.
This class answers to Latin words like comes (stem comit-), eques (stem equit-),
ferens (stem ferent-} ; and to Greek words like %/"? (stem yjapi T-), Kepaf (stem
Kepar-), C\TTI$ (stem eAzr^-), %/>//? (stem %a^evT-).
136. Masculine and feminine stems in IT 1 and 5 d, like ifftlT harit,
m. f. * green 5 (declined at 95), and nftj^sarit, f. 'a river/ and the
compound >|itfa^ dharma-vid, m. f. ' knowing one's duty' (see 84. IV).
Observe The Nom. sing, is properly harits, dharma-vits, but * is rejected by
41. I. The same applies to all nouns ending in consonants. So aiovjf^xv for
aioypovf. Latin and Greek, when the final of the stem refuses to combine with
the s of the Nom., often prefer rejecting the final of the stem; thus, %/" for
jfaptTS, comes for comits ; and in these languages the final consonant frequently
combines with the s of the Nom., as in lex (for leks), </>Aof (for <f)^.OK$ ).
N.V.
Ac.
I.
D.
Ab.
G.
L.
( sarit saritau
[saritam saritau
saritas
saritas
[saritd saridbhydm saridbhis
\ sarite saridbhydm saridbhyas
[saritas saridbhydm saridbhyas
[ saritas saritos
(^ficfw
/ sariti saritos
saritam
saritsu
-vit -vidau
-vidam -vidau
-vidas
-vidas
-vidd -vidbhydm -vidbhis
-vide -vidbhydm -vidbhyas
-vidas -vidbhydm -vidbhyas
-vidas -vidos
-ftfij
-vidi -vidos
-viddm
-vitsu
137. Neuter stems in ^/ and ^ c?, like ^fc^AanV, n. 'green/
dharma-vid, n. * knowing one's duty/ and "fflft kumud, n. ' a lotus.'
These only differ from the masculine and feminine in the N. du. pi., Ac. sing,
du. and pi., the usual neuter terminations ^ /, ^ i (see 97), being required, and
n being inserted before the final of the stem in N. Ac. pi. ; thus,
O
98 INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
N. Ac. V. ^fbr harit, frftfft hariti, ^Tftr harinti ; I. tfftjTT harit d,
?flsS| W^ haridbhydm, &c., like masc. and fern.
N. Ac. V. VHfr^, Wfaft, V^fafcs; I. V*%T, &c.
Similarly, N. Ac. V. ^, $g^, fgf^; I. ^r, &c.
138. All nouns at 84. II-IV. follow ^ft^and >mf^.
139. ^ hrid, n. 'the heart,' is said to be defective in the first five inflexions,
these cases being supplied from hridaya (see 108. e).
140. Possessive adjectives formed with the suffixes "^(-vat (84. VII)
and JT^ -mat (84. VI), like V*Ni^ dhana-vat, ' rich/ and vfar^ dhi-mat,
' wise/ are declined like harit for the masculine ; but in the Strong
cases (see 135. ) n is inserted before the final of the stem.
In N. sing, dhanavdn for dhanavants, ts is rejected by 41. 1, and the final vowel
of the stem lengthened by way of compensation.
N. \rT^T^ dhanavdn *R3*!tt dhanavantau VH4ff^ dhanavantas
Ac. Vra*fn* dhanavantam dhanavantau MT^iT^ dhanavatas
I. VrCrtT dhanavatd, XR3"im dhanavadbhydm, &c., like harit.
V. VT^ dhanavan, &c.
Similarly, >jhn^ ' wise :' N. vtrf^, vt*T^, v)^H^; Ac. MhRnT,
vtftn , ^ftTiT^, &c. ; V. \0*^, &c.
a . Like dhana-vat are declined Past Active Participles, such as ^tT^TT ' one who
has done' (553) ; thus, N. masc. ^w^t*^, ^ifl^m , ^ffqff^, &c.
b. The feminine stems of adjectives like V^Hr^ and ^Tr^, and Participles like
p7Rf^, are formed by adding ^ { to the Weak form of the masc. stem ; as, V*F=Tfft,
*flHfft, ^(mft, declined like f?ft at 105 ; thus, N. VrRfft, VTTOT, VH^Ifl 1 ^, &c.
c. The neuter is like the neut. of harit : N. Ac. V. >TT=nT, V-r<rft, Ml^f^n.
141. Present Participles (524) like TTTfT patat, 'cooking/ and
Future Participles (578) like efifTHn^ karishyat, 'about to do/ are
declined after dhanavat (140), excepting in the N. sing, masc., where
a is not lengthened before n ; thus,
N. V. sing. T^^ pa6an (for pa6ants), and not k^l^ pafdn : N. du. pi. H^fir,
Tl^ff^; Ac. Tj-q^tfl, Tl^tn, q'^w^; I. "T^rTT, &c. Cf. Latin and Greek Par-
ticiples like ferens, ferent-is, ferent-em, &c. ; ^>e^o>v, <f>epovT-o$, (pepovr-a, &c.
. Observe, however, that all reduplicated verbs of the 3rd class and Frequen-
tatives (but not Desideratives) ; a few verbs from polysyllabic roots (75. a), and
some few other verbs such as T^' to eat,' ^TI^ ' to rule ' which reject the nasal
in the 3rd pi. Pres. of the Parasmai-pada, reject it also in the declension of the
Pres. Participle. Hence the Pres. Participle of such verbs is declined like harit,
the N. sing, being identical with the stem ; thus, fr. da, cl. 3, ' to give/ N. V. sing.
du. pi. dadat, dadatau, dadatas; Ac. dadatam, &c. : fr. bhri, cl. 3, 'to bear/ N. V.
sing. du. pi. bibhrat, bibhratau, bibhratas. So also, jdgrat, ' watching ' (fr. jdori'),
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS. 99
sdsat, 'ruling' (fr. sds), jakshat, 'eating' (fr. jaksh}. The rejection of the nasal
is doubtless owing to the encumbrance of the syllable of reduplication.
Obs. i. Quasi-reduplicated verbs of cl. i and Desideratives do not reject the nasal;
e.g. tishthat, fr. st hd, 'to stand,' makes N. sing. du. pi. tishthan, tishthantau, tishthan-
tas,8ic. Similarly, jighrat,fr. ghrd, to smell;' jighrikshat, Desid. ofgrah, 'totake.'
Obs. 2. The reduplicated verbs of cl. 3, &c., mentioned above, optionally reject the
nasal from the N.V. Ac. pi. neut. ; thus, dadati or dadanti,jakshati orjakshanti.
Butjagat, n. 'the world,' is only jaganti in N. Ac. pi.
b. In Present Participles derived from verbs of cl. i, 4, 10, a nasal is inserted
for the feminine stem; thus, ^iT) fr. T^, cl. I (declined like nadi &i 105); and
this nasal is carried through all the inflexions, not merely, as in the masculine,
through the first five. So <;TifiT fr. div, cl. 4 ; and "*!K*rfn fr. 6ur, cl. 10.
Similarly with quasi-reduplicated verbs of cl. i and Desideratives ; e. g. tishthanti,
fr. sthd ; jighranti, fr. ghrd ; jighrikshanti, fr. Desid. of grah (cf. Obs. I. above).
The same conjugational classes also insert a nasal in the N. V. Ac. du. neut. as
well as the pi.; thus, 1 T^, tl^Rrfr, Xp^friT.
In all verbs of cl. 6, in verbs ending in d of the 2nd, and in all Participles of
the 2nd Fut. Parasmai, the insertion of the nasal in the feminine is optional ; thus,
tudati or tudanti, fr. tud, cl. 6 ; ydti or ydnti, fr. yd, cl. 2 ; karishyati or karishyanti,
fr. kri. It is also optional in the N. V. Ac. du. neut., which will resemble the Nom.
sing. fern. ; thus, tudanti or tudati, ydnti or ydti, karishyanti or karishyati.
c. Verbs of cl. 2, 3, 5, 7, 8, 9 follow 140. b. c, and insert no nasal for feminine
nor for N. Ac. V. du. neut. ; although all but cl. 3 assume a nasal in the first five
inflexions in the masculine; thus, adat (fr. ad, cl. 2) ; N. V. masc. adan, adantau,
adantas ; fern, adati: juhvat (fr. hu, cl. 3) ; N. V. masc. juhvat, juhvatau,juhvatas;
fern, juhvati : rundhat (fr. rudh, cl. 7); N. V. masc. rundhan, rundhantau, rundhan-
tas; fern, rundhati. The neut. will be N. Ac. V. adat, adati, adantij juhvat, du.
juhvati, but pl.juhvanti or juhvati (see 141. a).
142. The adjective *n?TT > 'g rea t,' is properly a Pres. Part. fr. T? mah, 'to increase ;'
but its masculine lengthens the a of at before n in the N. Ac. sing., N. V. Ac. du.,
N. V. pi., and neuter in N. V. Ac. pi. ; thus, N. masc. T^l^, *n[T*m,
Ac. *I^WT, H^lilT, *f'ri*^; I. H^ril,&c. ; V. 1T^, H^Iifr, &c.: N. fern.
&c., see 140. a. b : N. V. Ac. neut. 1^, l^rft, *iif*fl.
a. ^Ti^m. f. n. ' great,' WTi^m. f. n. ' moving,' ^J^m. f. ' a deer,' follow Pres.
Participles; e.g. N.V. masc. ^5^, ^^fn,^^TT^[. Fem.^rrffr. Neut. pTi^, &c.
143. The honorific pronoun H^ (said to be for HT^ bhd-vat) follows Vl^
(at 140), making the a of at long in the N. sing. ; thus, >T^T^'your honour,' and
not *R^. The V. is >T^. The fern, is H^rft* see 233.
>T^' being,' Pres. Part, of /to be,' follows of course T^at 141.
144. ^^"TT n. 'the liver' (y7rap,jecur), and T[f3piT n. 'ordure,' may optionally be
declined in Ac. pi. and remaining cases as if their stems were *TcR^ and 3TF^.;
thus, N. V. T^, ^rft, Hejfnl ; Ac. *l^> T$ift, ^cJtfiT or ^BTftT J I. T^ITT or
or T^Wl'T, l^ffi^ or 1^f>T^; D. "3^ or ^91, &c.
O 2,
100 INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
a. A defective noun ^TT is optionally substituted for ^*fT in Ac. pi. and remaining
cases (see 183), and is often used at the end of compounds ; e. g. su-dat, ' having
good teeth,' making N..masc. fern. neut. su-dan, su-dati, su-dat.
145. *Tfi|, 'a foot,' at the end of compounds becomes T?[ in Ac. pi. and remaining
Weakest cases; thus, 'jJTRr, 'having beautiful feet,' makes in masc. N. V. ^pTT<^,
*jtn^, ^^C, AC. *PT^T V , *j*n^l, *p^; I. *p^T, *prom, *pifk^, &c.
The fern, is *p($, like nadt at 105. Neut. N. V. Ac. ^TT^, l^ftf, *pT^-
a. Similarly, Pgmd, but according to Pan. iv. i , 9, the fern, is dvi-padd, if agreeing
with rik, ' a verse ; ' dvi-padf, if agreeing with stri, ' a woman. ' So also fom^ > &c.
SIXTH CLASS in
an and
n.
This class answers to Lat. and Gr. words like sermo (stem sermon-}, homo (stem
homin-), oaiftav (stem Qa.ip.ov-). Latin agrees with Sanskrit in suppressing the n
in N. masc. and fern., but not in neut. ; thus homo is N. of masc. stem homin, the
Stronger vowel o being substituted for i, just as i is substituted for i in Sanskrit ;
but nomen is N. of the neut. stem nomin.
146. Masculine and feminine stems in *&&{ an, of two kinds, A
and B.
A. If an be preceded by m or v at the end of a conjunct conso-
nant, then the model is SH \ rfj^ dtman, m. 'soul/ ' self/
B. But if an be preceded by m or v not conjunct, as in tffar^
stman, f. (sometimes m.) 'a border,' or by any other consonant,
whether conjunct or not, than m or v, as in TT3J^ takshan, m. *a
carpenter/ tTT^ rdjan, m. ' a king/ then the a of an is dropped
in the Ac. pi. and before all the other #owe/-terminations, and the
remaining n is compounded with the preceding consonant.
Obs. In the Loc. sing, this dropping of a is optional.
All nouns ending in an, lengthen the a in the Strong cases (V. sing, excepted) ;
and drop the n before all the consonantal terminations (see 57). The inflective
stem will be dtman, dtman, dtma ; siman, simdn, simn (see above), sima.
Junction of stem with termination : N. sing, n final of stem, and s case-termina-
tion rejected by 57 and 41. 1; V. sing, case-termination rejected.
A.
/,
[ dtmd dtmdnau dtmdnas
N.
Ado
[dtmdnam dtmdnau dtmanas
[ dtmand dtmabhydm dtmabhis
B.
sm
smnau
smnas
simnd simabhydm simabhis
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS. 101
f
\ dtmane dtmabhydm dtmabhyas
[ dtmanas dtmabhydm dtmabhyas
G.
L.
V.
[ dtmanas dtmanos dtmandm
\ dtmani dtmanos dtmasu
'HlrHltfT
\ dtman dtmdnau dtmanas
smne
smnas
smnas
or
simabhydm simabhyas
simabhydm, simabhyas
^ft^y^ fflyi x
simnos simndm
simni or simani simnos simasu
sman
simdnau simdnas
147. Like vjIrHr^ are declined M^'\ yajvan, m. 'a sacrificer' (e.g. N.
*WI 1 1 , *t'^l l n^ 5 Ac. *4jl l*i v , MiillT, *< i^T^( ; I.TffT, &c.); m
m. sin;' ^n^n^asman, m. 'a stone;' <3 *n+{ushman, m. 'the hot season;'
sushman, m. 'fire;' *^ brahman, m. 'the god Brahman;' ^Kn^ adhvan, m. 'a
road;' c *a\ drisvan, m. 'a looker.'
Like VWr^are declined |V?^m. 'head' (I. ^iHT, &c.; L. ^f>I or |wfVf, &c.) ;
m. 'fat'(Ac. pl.tft^^); ^[^m. ' a loom;' wftRt^m. 'lightness '(I. Hf^T,&c.)
148. Similarly, like tflflf^, are declined ?r^^ m. 'a carpenter' and
TI^ m. * a king.'
Obs. In the inflexion of words like takshan, rdjan (which follow the B form siman
in combining m and n), the dental n of the stem being combined with a cerebral or
palatal is changed to the cerebral or palatal nasal respectively. See 57. c, 58.
N ...-,. 1IW
\takshd takshdnau takshdnas
Ac.
\takshnd.ij8. takshabhydm takshabhis
[ takshdnam takshdnau takshnas.$8.
[ takshne takshabhydm takshabhyas
.
[ takshnas takshabhydm takshabhyas
G.
V.
\takshnus takshnos takshndm
\takshni takshnos takshasu
\takshan takshdnau takshdnas
rdjd
rajanau rajanas
rdjdnam rdjdnau rdjnas. 57. c.
rdjhd. 57. c. rdjabhydm rdjabhis
rdjne rdjabhydm rdjabhyas
rdjnas rdjabhydm rdjabhyas
rdjnas rdjnos rdjndm
rjan
rajnos rajasu
TTWHTT ilfM^
rdjdnau rdjdnas
* Or
takshani.
t Or Tnff7 ro/ant.
102 INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
149. Masculine stems in ^, like *fNr^, '<HJ^, 15f^, generally
form their feminines in ^tl (Pan. iv. I, 7); e. g. trtarrfr, l^Btf, *J*?T^,
declined like nadi at 105.
150. When a feminine stem in ^ { is formed from words like Jt\> it follows
the rules at 146. A. B. for the rejection of the a of an; thus, TT$ft rdjni, 'a queen.'
151. When rdjan occurs at the end of a compound, it may be declined like siva
(103); as, N. sing. masc. mahdrdjas; Ac. mahdrdjam, &c. (cf. 778) : but not neces-
sarily, as bahu-rdjan, m. f. n. ' having many kings.' The fern, stem of which may
be bahu-rdjan or bahu-rdjd or bahu-rdjhL
152. Neuter stems in ^ a/i, like cF^ 'an action 5 and n*T^ 'a
name 5 (nomen, 6vofj.a*).
Obs. The retention or rejection of a in an before the Inst. sing, and remaining
vowel-terminations, as well as optionally before the Nom. Ace. du., is determined
by the same rule as in masculines and feminines (146. A. B). They only differ
from masculine nouns in Nom. Voc. and Ace. sing. du. pi.
SING.
DUAL.
karmdni
PLURAL.
SING.
TTT
ndma mni or mani ndmdni
ndmnd ndmabhydm ndmabhis
^ Q \
tjre, &c. / r , ,
, } like siman. 146.
namne, &c. \
^, &c. ) UkNA
t ' <i i 11K.C ii . AC*
namaornamdn,&,c. ]
N. (*i
Ac. ( karma karmani
i ^ ^
T J V
( karmand karmabhydm karmabhis
( ^~' O )
D. \ , ' t like dtman. 146.
( karmane, etc. )
( karma or karman,&c. \
153. Like ^m^ n. are declined ii^ 'birth,' q^*^ 'house,' ^*i^ 'armour,'
'prayer,* 'the Supreme Spirit,' <Hrm^'road,' 1 M*t^' leather,' "5?T^' pretext,'
_ ' a joint.'
Like Hlir^n. are declined ^TT^ ' string,' f!H'^ ' conciliation,' VT*i^ ' mansion,'
; aft'^'sky,' Cl*l\ (for OW^ rohman, from ruTi), 'hair,' H*1\ (also m.) 'love.'
154. When nouns in an, man, and van form the last member of adjective com-
pounds, the feminine may be declined like the masc., or its stem may end in d,
and be declined like sivd; the neuter follows the declension of neuter nouns at
152. Those in an, if they follow the declension of siman and fdjan, may also form
their feminine in t, rejecting the a of an, and be declined like nadi (Pan. iv. i, 28).
155. There are a few anomalous nouns in an, as follow :
i. 'a dog '(cam's, KVUV): N. T5TT, < *ETTfr,^TTC[; Ac.
D.W%, &c.; Ab.
I. SjpTT, WITH,
&c.; G.
* Greek has a tendency to prefix vowels to words beginning with consonants
in the cognate languages. Cf. also nakha, ' nail,' ovv; laghu, 'light,' e
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS. 103
; L. Sj, SJ'fy, ""SPg; V. T$n^, WT, &c. See 135. a. Fern. ^J, &c.
(like nadi at 105).
m. ' a youth,' ' young :' N. $TT, *jWtlT, gqinqj Ac.
nIVn^I*6*^J D. ^,&c.j Ab. ^% Sec.; G.
; L. >jfT, ^i^, S^J; V. g^, *[^Tn, &c. See 135. a. Fern, ^rft (like
nadi} or ^frT (like mati}. Neut. ^Tj *J*ft> H^^' & c>
c. H*H^ m. 'a name of Indra :' N. **rqT, ~<Hfi, -^Ti^ ; Ac. *fv"^Tl*, -'TTU,
*nftt^; I. *nftTT, TWn*T, -^fa*(; D. W$fc, HVNmiH, &c. ; Ab. infa^, &c. ;
G. HVlH^, 'Htft^fy, JnftU*T; L. irftftr, H*(Vi^, H*H*J; V. HM^, &c. Fem.
>nftT^ or *rerrft.
The last may alao be declined like a noun in vat .- N. flMTi*^, -RiT, &c. See 140.
156. ^T^^n., ' a day,' forms its N. Ac. V. sing. fr. ^T^ ahar, and the consonantal
middle cases fr. ^3T^^ ahas; in the other cases it is like ndman ; thus,
N. Ac. v. ^^ (41. 1), ^tjft or ^r^tft, ^T?rf*T ; I.
D. ^, ^twrrfr, ^iw^; Ab. ^^, &c. ; G. ^5
or ^^fn, ^f^^, -^^m or ^T^JTJ. At the beginning of compounds the form is
generally ^T^T, as in ahar-nisam, ' day and night.' At the end of compounds it
may be declined as a masc. ; thus, N, ^IQi^lt^, -^TW, -^TO^; Ac. -^H!!*, &c.;
V. -If^> &c-> or sometimes becomes W^ or ^Tg.
a. f^q^m., 'a day,' lengthens the i in those cases where the a of an is rejected ;
thus, Ao. pi. ?(fcj^; I. ^t]JT, &c.
b. "Sfffa^n., 'the head,' is said to be defective in N. sing. du. and pi. and Ac.
sing, du., these cases being supplied from f$IT^n., or 5ll"M 108. e.
c. *raf*^n., 'the liver,' and ^in^ 'ordure,' are said to be defective in the first
five inflexions, these cases being supplied from yakrit and sakrit respectively,
see 144.
157. ^qf^m., 'the sun,' does not lengthen a of an in N, du. pi., Ac. sing, du.;
thus,
N. ^T^TT, v*i*U!.ir, ^*ro^; Ac. 'w^fTOT, ^NrnT, '5*<u^ ; I. ^ni^i, &c.
a. Similarly, ^f^ ' the sun:' N. ^T, ^WBi, &c. ; Ac. '5? 3(! "f> &c.; but the
Ac. pi., and remaining Weakest cases, may be optionally formed from a stem ^TC;
thus, Ac. pi. ^JH^ or ^^[.
b. Similarly, compounds having -5?*^ as the last member, such as w^\m. 'the
slayer of a Brahman :' N. d<M^I, dfil^T, &c. ; but in Ac. pi. ridW^; I. dttJIT,
clil^^TH, &c. (A becoming gh where the a of han is dropped).
158. ^nf^m. 'a horse,' or m. f. n. 'low,' 'vile,' is declined like nouns in vat
at 140, excepting in N. sing. ; thus, N. ^%T, ^nNn, ^%fT^; Ac. *3ft*i x , &c.;
I. ^r%7TT, ^HiillH, JJ^r^^; V. "^^, &c. If the negative ^H^ precedes,
regular; thus, N. VHVff^l, ^IT^T5n, &c.; Ac. ^hllUH N , &c.; I. pi.
159. Masculine stems in ^in, like vf^ dhanin, m. 'rich/
In N. sing, dhant for dhanins, n and s are rejected (by 57 and 41. 1), and the
vowel lengthened by way of compensation.
104 INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
DUAL.
PLURAL.
dhaninau
dhaninau
vffwiT*T dhanibhydm. 57.
dhanibhydm
dhanibhydm
dhaninas
dhaninas
dhanibhis. 57.
f*TI^ dhanibhyas. 57.
dhanibhyas
dhanishu. 70.
dhaninas
N. Vft dhani
Ac. vftr*FT dhaninam
I. vfij'fl dhanind
D. vff$ dhanine
Ab. *lfH^ dhaninas
G. dhaninas vfcFfa(dhaninos
L. vftrftf dhanini dhaninos
V. \(f*{i[dhanin. 92. vfI ! u dhaninau
Obs. Many adjectives of the forms explained at 85. VI. VIII.
IX. are declined in masc. like >*ftr^; thus, *hnfaf medhdvin, 'intel-
lectual; 5 N. *hjnft, -fe^, -f^n^, c. Also numerous nouns of
agency, like cFrftc^ '-a doer,' at 85. II ; thus, N. wft, ofiTfcniT (58),
Wfi3% &c.
160. The feminine stem of such adjectives and nouns of agency
is formed by adding ^ i to the masc. stem ; as, fr. >lftT^, vfarft f. ;
fr. cnft^, ofiTft^ f. ; declined like nadi at 105 ; thus, N. tiftpfl 1 , -'arf,
-*PR[, &c.
161. The neuter is regular, and is like vdri as far as the Gen. pi. ;
N. Ac. vfa, tfftnft, >Rtfa. But the G. pi. vftRT^, not \|7ft^TH;
V. sing, tlfa or vft^.
162. t|fqr^ in. 'a road,' l?ftl^ m. 'a churning-stick,' and ^*jf^^ m. 'a name
of Indra,' are remarkable as exhibiting both suffixes, an and in, in the same word.
They form their N. V. sing, from the stems M^, WW(, ^p^ ; their other
Strong cases, from the stems M*^, TJ 1 ^, ^^5^; their Ac. pi., and remaining
Weak cases, from the stems T*I, T^T, ^q*; in theu* Middle cases they follow
dhanin regularly ; thus,
AC. tn^n^'f, TT^TT^, ^^-, i. tr^r,
, &c. Similarly, N. V. Hr^I^, &c.; ^^^T^, &c. :
Observe The V. is the same as the N.
, 'having a good road,' is similarly declined for the
, -S*TT , -S*l^, like nadiat 105 ; the neut. is N.Ac.
the rest as the masc.
N. v.
(163),
; D. X
I. T^JT, &c. ; ^^^T, &c.
a. The compound
masc.; the N.fem. is
-tpzft, -TH^nftr, &c.; V.
SEVENTH CLASS in ^d!(as, ^
This class answers to Gr. and Lat. words like ir
163. Masculine and feminine stems in
mas, m. ' the moon.'
, and ~3R(us.
f) f-fOf, genus, scelus, &c.
a*, like ^* 6andra
In N. sing, a* is lengthened to compensate for rejection of the termination
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS. 105
fandramas becomes 6andramo by 64 before the terminations bhydm, bhis, bhyas ;
in L. pi. 6andramas-\-su becomes 6andramahsu by 63, or dandramassu by 62. a.
N. *q*HI tandramds 't|HW tandramasau 'MMU 6andramasas
Ac. H'rJHUH tandramasam 6andramasau 6andramasas
6andramasd
6andramase tandramobhydm <4*3HVuft^ 6andramobhyas
Ab. *l<nH*H^ 6andramasas tandramobhydm 6andramobhyas
G. 6andramasas !*< uV^ 6andramasos 'M^HUIH 6andramasdm
L. *!**( fa tandramasi tandramasos '"I'S'HJTJ 6andramahsu or -^
V. ^5TO tandramas. 92. *!*< tu 6andramasau "^^HU^ 6andramasas
a. Similarly, ^P=BR;^ apsaras, f. *a nymph: 5 N. ^m<i^, &c.
164. Neuter stems in ^3[ a*, like T*!^ manas, n. 'mind 5
These differ from the masc. and fern, in the N. Ac. V. The a of as remains
short in N. sing, after the rejection of the case-termination s, but is lengthened
in N. Ac. V. pi. before inserted Anusvara.
N. Ac. V. Hf^ manas *H<ft manasi *Tri ftl mandnsi
I. HTI manasd, n<4\mw manobhydm, &c., like the masc. and fern.
. Obs. Nearly all simple substantives in as are neuter like manas; but these
neuters, when at the end of compound adjectives, are declinable also in masc. and
fern, like tandramas. Thus mahd-manas, ' magnanimous,' makes in N. (m. f. sing.
du. pi.) mahd-mands, mahd-manasau, mahd-manasas. Similarly, sumanas, well-
intentioned;' durmanas, 'evil-minded' (N. m. f. sumanas, durmands, &c.): cf. i-
^f, m. f., but neut. and stem i/-/xevf, &u<r-jtxevfV derived from
b. Where final as is part of a root and not a suffix, the declension will follow
(Vmsyt^ 'one who devours a mouthful ;' thus, N. V. sing.m.f. fmjiij^; Ac. -jj*^.
N. V. Ac. du. ~U^t, pi. -ijt^; I. -IT^rr, -lffr*n*?, &c. N. V. Ac. neut. -U^,
r. When a root ends in ds, s will be rejected before bh by 66. a ; thus,
, 'brilliant,' makes in I. du. ^em**^.
c. But &3( (fr. ^9[) and f^ (fr. fa[), at the end of compounds, change final
^ to i^ before the consonantal terminations, making N. sing. ^Til and Sefi^; e. g.
^sfUJi^, *TOl5Ti^(see Pan. in. 2, 76; vn. i, 70; viu. 2, 72).
165. Neuter stems in ^^is and '3^tw are declined analogously to imn<mas
at 164, t and u being substituted for a throughout, sh for s (70), tr or ur for o (65) ;
thus,
havis, n. ' ghee :' N. Ac. V. ^fa*^, I?fa>ft, ^^fO* ; I.
fw*^w,'fftn^; Ab. ^fam^, '^f^i*^,^f
x ; L. ^f^ft, ^P'**^^, ^^^ or -"?.
a. 'MW^ taksltus, n. 'the eye:' N. Ac. V. VHM^, ^"^ft> ^^Jft; I.
P
106 INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
D. ^, ^KrwftH,^8rw(; Ab.
G. ^^"% ^ra, TOTO; L. ^Bjfa, ^TJ^, ^j:*J or -taj.
166. Nouns formed with the suffixes is and us are generally neuter. In some
nouns, however, the final sibilant is part of the root itself, and not of a suffix ;
such as ^nf^n^ ds"is, f. ' a blessing ' (fr. rt. ^TI^), and *m m. f. ' an associate ' (fr.
J^). These follow the analogy of masc. and fern, nouns in as (163) in the N. Ac.
cases ; and, moreover, before the consonantal terminations, where the final sibilant
is changed to r, unlike nouns formed with is and MS, lengthen the i and u (compare
nouns in r at 180) ; thus,
N. ^T^fta^, -fjfr^, -%*rt^; Ac. -fifre*, -f^Ptf, -; I. -
-^rtf*!^, &c. ; L. pi. -$fhf or -^Ttej.
N. *nr$, -pfK -^^; AC. -pw, &c. ; I. -pn, -^TT, &c.
a. Nouns formed from Desiderative stems in ish (497), such as fT*rfV^ (for
jigadish), desirous of speaking,' are similarly declined ; thus,
N. V. m. f. P<*|J!<j1^, ~f^, &c. ; I. du. -^wtlH. The N. V. Ac. neut. pi. is
ftrJlf^fa, the nasal being omitted (cf. 181. d).
So f^raft^, ' desirous of doing,' makes N. V. m. f. f^efil^, -clifaT, &c.
b. tjtj 1 ^ well-sounding,' where us is radical, makes N. V. sing. m. f. *J|^>
AC. $pw; N - v - Ac - du - 13^ P 1 - 13^' L W 11 * W^l' I^f^' &c -
N. V. Ac. neut. $W^, ^?ft, *JijftT.
c. Obs. When neuter nouns in is or MS are taken for the last member of com-
pound adjectives, analogy would require them to be declined in masc. and fern.
according to tandramas at 163 ; but, according to the best authorities, the N. sing.
does not lengthen the vowel of the last syllable ; thus, ^rr^rJ^^*^ m. f. n. ' having
lotus eyes,' N. masc. and fern. TrlcS^HJ^, -^Bpu, &c. ; and ^jf^Ttf^ m. f. n.
'having brilliant rays,' N. masc. and fern. SlfqCKV*^, STfaTyP^T, &c.
d. ffa[dos, m. 'an arm,' follows the declension of nouns in is and MS,- but in
Ac. pi., and remaining cases, optionally substitutes doshan for its stem (see 184);
thus, N. V. <jfa(, -T^, -^; Ac. <frW, -"^T, -^ or ~W^; I. <ffaT or
^frwJTH or ^|q*n*T, &c. As a neuter noun it makes in N. Ac. V. ^"^, ^ft,
167. Comparatives formed with the suffix ^R( (yas (192), lengthen the a of as,
and insert n, changeable to Anusvara before s, in N. sing. du. pi., V. du. pi., Ac. sing,
du. masc. ; thus, ^F5fa^ m. f. n., 'more powerful,' makes N. masc. ^1*ii\ (for
, s rejected by 41. A), -TThu, -TfNT^; Ac. -*lfaw, -lf?n, -*<W^; I. -TWT,
, &c., like tandramas at 163. The V. sing, is ^^fa^J du. and pi. like
the Nom.
a. The fern. ^olMtA follows naoY at 105. The neut. *rcj)^ is like manas.
1 68. Perfect Participles, formed with vas (see 554), are similarly declined in the
Strong cases (135. b). But in Ac. pi., and remaining Weak cases, as becomes MsA,
and in the Middle cases vat ; so that there are three forms of the stem, viz. in Wws,
wsA, and vat*; thus,
* Vat is evidently connected with the Greek OT. Compare tutupvat (fr. rt. tup)
with TTv0-(f)oT, and tutupvatsu with TTV</>-O(T)O-*.
INFLEXION OF STEMS OP NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS. 107
(Perf. Part., fr. fa^ 'to know ') : N.
Ac. fafaFTO*, faf^TRff, fafopfq;; I. fafqgm, f^f^STTH, f^f^gfs^; D.
fefa|TO, &c.; v. faf%sr(, fafadi^X &c.
The neuter is N. Ac. FqPq^i^, -g^l", -UTftf; for fern, see d below.
a. When this Participle is formed with ivas instead of vas (see 554), the vowel i
is rejected in the cases where vas becomes ush ; thus,
(fr. T*^' to go ') : N. masc. fOHlr^, &c. ; Ac.
, &c. ; I. *(Jgm, &c. ; V. IfRRr^, fHT, &c.
b. Similarly, ^fT^^ (fr. JT^ ' to stretch') : N. ^fa'*n^, flftf'ffw, &c.; Ac.wfT-
^f*W, ffftrenf^, >T^^, &c. ; V. ^f T^, -^rNtt, &c.
c. But not when the i is part of the root ; thus, fafa^ (fr. fa), f <H TT"<^ (fr.
ft) make in the Ac. pi. fa^a 1 ^, fT^Ht^. ^^^ (fr. ^) makes, of course,
d. The N. fern, of these Participles is formed from ush ; and the N. Ac. neut.
sing. du. pi. from vat, ush, and vas, respectively j thus, N. fern, fqfqetft, &c.,
declined like nadi at 105. Similarly, from the root Incomes ijijijift (cf. TTV<f>v"ia).
Those formed with ivas do not retain i in the feminine ; thus, tenivas makes N.
sing. masc. fern. neut. tenivdn, tenusht*, tenivat.
e. The root "fe?, 'to know,' has an irregular Pres. Part. f%?^ vidvas, used
commonly as an adjective ('learned'), and declined exactly like fqf^S^ above,
leaving out the reduplicated vi; thus, N. mase.f^T^jf^JTOtjf^gi^; V.f^l^,
&c. With reference to 308. a, it may be observed, that as a contracted Perfect
of vid is used as a Present tense, so a contracted Participle of the Perfect is used
as a Present Participle. The fern, is f^Nl, and the neut. faFiJ.
169. ^m., ' a male,' forms its V. sing, from yfa^, and its other Strong cases
( I 35- *) fro g**i^j but Ac. pi., and remaining Weakest cases, from ^; and I.
du., and remaining Middle cases, from y? ; thus,
N. yn^;, yrtiih, g*rf^;; AC. gm*w x , fRT^, g^; I. g
D.i|^, &c. ; Ab. $*% & c .; G. g^, ^f^, ^n* x ; L. ftr, TTO, f ; v.
yn^, &c.
170. <atym m., 'a name of the regent of the planet Sukra,' forms N. sing.
from a stem <J'5Hl(i47). Similarly, J|^^5R^ m. 'a name of Indra,' and
m. 'time.' The other cases are regular; thus, N. du. T$PTOT. But
may be optionally in Voc. sing. 3$H^ or J^H or ^31 l*^.
171. sf^[ f., ' decay ' (7^/Ja?), supplies its consonantal cases (viz. N. V. sing., I.
D. Ab. du. pi., L. pi.) from WH f. Its other cases may be either from Wt^ or
thus, N. sing. TtT; V. wt; Ac. ITTSWt or *W> I- "TtTRT and
, &c.
* There seems, however, difference of opinion as to the rejection of i; and
some grammarians make the feminine tenyushz.
t Since iHl*^ certainly occurs, it may be inferred that the N. Ac. V. du. are
WSTT or IT J N. Ac. V. pi. TTTO^ or ^TO^. These forms are given in the grammar
of I's'vara-dandra Vidya-sagara, p. 51.
P 3
108 INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
EIGHTH CLASS. Stems ending in any consonant except
V ^ d > 1 W > V-
172. This class consists principally of roots used as nouns, either
alone or at the end of compounds, or preceded by prepositions and
adverbial prefixes. Stems ending in c^ t or 3 d, formed in this
manner, are of common occurrence*; but their declension falls under
the fifth class at 136.
With regard to stems ending in other consonants which we place
under the eighth class, the only difficulty in their declension arises
from their euphonic combination with the consonantal terminations.
1 73. Whatever change of the final consonant takes place in Nom.
sing, is preserved before all the consonantal terminations ; provided
only, that before such terminations the rules of Sandhi come into
operation.
174. Before the vowel-terminations the final consonant of the
stem, whatever it may be, is generally preserved. If in some nouns
there is any peculiarity in the formation of the Ac. pi., the same
peculiarity runs through the remaining Weakest or vowel cases.
The terminations themselves undergo no change, but the s of the
Nom. sing, is of course cut off by 41. 1 (see, however, 135. b). There
is generally but one form of declension for both masc. and fern.; the
neuter follows the analogy of other nouns ending in consonants.
175. Stems ending in c(f k, ^ kh, n g, IT g declined.
m. f. ' one who is able ' (in sarva-^ak, ' omnipotent ').
N.V. $ra sak SjTlfT sakau 3Tlffi[ sakas
Ac. SHE* sakam sakau sakas
I. SIc&T sakd ^n^TR sagbhydm ^ifr^ sagbhis
D. Tjrar sake sagbhydm ^I 3 "*^ sagbhyas
Ab. $f4i^ sakas sagbhydm sagbhyas
G. sakas ^f^( sakos $fcMH sakdm
L. ifsfi saki sakos pS sakshu
The neuter is N. Ac. V. '^I'Pj ^T 5 ^, $tfl$> &c. ; the rest like the masc.
a. Similarly, T<5^ ' one who paints ' (in ditra-likh, one who paints a picture ') :
N. V. f?5 (41. II, 41. 1), fc3^ (174), ft*^; Ac. f?5^T, &c.; I.
F*n*, fcsf**?^, &c. -, L. pi. fo'sr.
The neuter is N. Ac. V. fc3, f?JT3% fwf^> &c. ; the rest like the masc.
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS. 109
b. In the same way final *T, T^ are changed to ^T, and when final "9, ^T, ^, H, 7
lose their aspirate form, the aspirate must be transferred to the initial, if that
initial be *T, sT, ^, or ^ (see 44. c).
c. j<tt*rm.f., 'jumping well,' makes N.V. ^10^(41. 1), *JT<?n, &c.; Ac.
c.; L.
(see 70). Neut. N. Ac. V. *JTc, ^<f5ft, fpf-T or (see 176. A)
176. Stems ending in ^ 6, ^ 6h, *t j, Vijh declined.
Final ^is changed to F or 3T; final "3 is changed to 3T, which becomes 7 or
before the consonantal terminations ; final *T to e^ (*l) or ^ (^) ; and final *K
which is rare, to ir or *Tj before the consonantal terminations (41. IV, 92. a).
f. ' speech ' (fr. rt. ^) : N. V. ^Tej? (for vdks, 41 . 1 ; vox, 0$),
(voces, tt*() ; Ac. TT^ (vocem), ^T^, ^T^ (oira$} ; I.
D. ^, ^FWIW, ^Fre[; Ab. 1T^^, ^TTrW, ^rrwj^; G.
T^TH ; L. 3Tfa (oV/), ^T^t^, ?TTS. Compare Latin vox, and Greek
or OTT for F OTT throughout.
Similarly, j^ ' a liberator :' N. V. ^c^, $^T, ^^('
^m. f. 'one who eats:' N.V. $cF, >J^, $1^; Ac. i$W(, &c.; I. pn,
fhr^, & c .
m. f. ' an asker ' (fr. rt. U^) : N. V. TTI7, 3n^T, UT^l^; Ac. UT^nj, &c. ;
I. in^TT, TTT^nH, &c. ; L. pi. H!<!*J
The root >T3^ becomes HT5T (just as vat becomes vd6); e.g. N.V. HT*B m. f. n.
'a sharer.'
a. The neuters are thus formed : N. Ac. V. ^T^T, m^\ ^?f^, &c. (as in ^T9
' speaking well'); *JcJT, ^f\, ^fw, &c. ; TTfiT, HT^, HlP*^, &c.
b. The root ^i^ anf, to go,' preceded by certain prepositions and adverbial
prefixes, forms a few irregular nouns (such as TTT^' eastern'), and is found at
the end of a few compounds after words ending in a ; such as tMj^ ' tending
downwards,' &c. These all reject the nasal in the Ac. pi. and remaining cases
masculine. In Nom. sing, the final ^f 6 being changed to (f &, causes the preceding
nasal to take the guttural form, and the ^ is rejected by 41. 1. In the Ac. pi.,
and remaining Weakest cases, there is a further modification of the stem in the
case of Biq^, &c.
. 'eastern,' 'going before :' N.V. UTT, Ul^T, U|43^; Ac. HI^H,
I. TTT^T, UM!1, Hlf 1 ^; D. HT^, &c.j L. pi. UTS. Similarly,
m. 'southern.'
HN^m. 'western :' N.V. UFT^, Ri<J3n, TTfl^ 3 ^; Ac. Hiqaa*i x , nm^sn, 14 rfl *!*(;
I. Tnrt^T, UWrariH, TTTlf''^; D. Jnrt^, &c. Similarly, 5 H|*^ ' going with,'
fit,' and even ^^^ northern,' which make in Ac. pi., and remaining Weakest
cases, **rt^, ^"H^.
So also, ffc^, ' going everywhere,' forms its Ac. pi., and remaining Weakest
cases, fr. a stem fa^, making Pq*rrt^, &c.
110 INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
Analogously, fil^^ ' going crookedly/ 'an animal,' forms its Weakest cases fr.
a stem CIKS^, making Ac. pi. f7T7,TS^, &c.
The feminine form and the neut. du. of these nouns follow the analogy of the
Ac. pi. ; thus, N. fern. Jtt^ &c., vTWT^ &c., JHrNft &c., ^(Ht &c., U*fi-ft &c.,
firr^ft &c., declined like Tffr.
The neuter is N. Ac. V. UTjr, UT^ll, Tnf%, &c. ; JTW^T, H(fl'*tf, HWf^T, &c.
c. HT^, when it signifies 'worshipping,' retains the nasal, which has become
guttural, throughout ; but 6, which has become k, is rejected before the consonantal
terminations; thus,
N. V. HT^, Uratf, &c. ; Ac. HRP\, &c. ; I. TIT^T, TTT^wnH, &c.
Similarly, "^ 'a curlew:' N. V. *gT, Jji^, &c.; Ac. "Jf^TW, &c.; I. W^T,
*K"l? &c. ; L. pi. f^W or ^ (55. 6).
d. vi *j^ n., 'blood,' is regular; thus, N. Ac. V. ^TCp^T, ^^ift, ^fe, &c.j
but it may optionally take its Ac. pi. and remaining inflexions from a defective
stem, ^W^asanj thus, N. V. pi. 1 3njfi5J; Ac. pi. vUjf'ia or ^^nfT; I. vHJil or
HJ>"wrp^ or T 3TOnr, &c. ; L. vTCjfcf or ^^f*T or ^if^, &c.
e. Nouns formed with the roots ^Hr^'to worship,' TJST'to shine,' f3T 'to rub,*
shine,' tf^'to fry,' cfa^'to wander,' ^[^'to create,' generally change
the final ^to ^ or "^ before the consonantal terminations ; thus,
^"5^ m. 'a worshipper of the gods' (*T^ becoming ^3T) : N. V. sing.
Similarly, TTS^m. 'a ruler :' N. sing. TT7; I. TJ*TT, TT^n*^, &c. So also,
'a cleanser:' N. sing. XjftTj^. So also, f^Wf^m. f. 'splendid:' N. sing.
Similarly, Micar*^ m. ' a religious mendicant ' (^^ becoming i^) : N. sing.
TTfC*tT<. So also, f<imf|[H m. ' the creator of the world :' N. sing. Pq'y^.
But f^T when it precedes KT*^, as in fq*a<r^ m. ' a universal ruler,' becomes
f^TT wherever ^becomes ^ or ^', thus, N. f<4HlKI^, f^5RTU, &c.
^fNn^m., ' a priest ' (^JTJ + ^for Tf3^), is regular : N. V. ^fr^T.
/. vi^Mi'3^ m. ' a kmd of priest,' ' part of a sacrifice,' forms the consonantal
cases from an obsolete stem, *Tirf( > t N. V. sing. du. pi. ^T^nTT^, -4lfi, -^
Ac. -1T3fT, &c. ; I. -^TTWT, -lftwnI, &c. ; L. pi. 'STTOI or ^T:*J.
g. ^TST, 'one who fries,' may take ^5^ for its stem, and make N. V.
>JTH^; Ac. >j'3j|i, &c. Similarly, W^I, 'one who cuts,' makes, according to some,
^7, &c., and not ?T^, &c. ; but others allow vrat.
A. "9i^f.,' strength,' makes N.V. "3!^ (41.1. Obs.),&c.; Ac. "3>^, &c.; I.^RjT,
gjTrpT, &c. At the end of a comp. the neuter is N. Ac. V. urk, urj{, unrji. But in
these cases where a word ends in a conjunct consonant, the first member of which
is r or /, the nasal may be optionally omitted in the plural, so that urji would be
equally correct.
i. ^^, 'lame,' makes N. ^^, WW, JsTyM,; I. pi. ^fW^J L. pi. ^>J.
177. Stems ending in ^th t ^dh declined.
The final aspirate is changed to its unaspirated form before the consonantal
terminations (41. II, 43), but not before the vowel (43. d). !T^m. f. 'one who
tells :' N. V. cR^, eTOT, ^F*J^; Ac. BTC*T, &c. ; I. K^T, P1*^, &c.
So also, 5JVf.' battle:' N.V.^, gvtg^J Ac.^>m,&c.; I. 'gVT, fWW v , &c.
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS. Ill
In the case of WV m. f., 'one who knows,' the initial ^ b becomes Vf b h wherever
the final ^(dh becomes t or d, by 175.6. and 44. c; thus, N.V. jp^, ^$, ^&(',
Ac.^W,&c.; I. TOT, 3SCT*, .fee.; L. pi. $*T.
a. The neuter is N. Ac. V. Ft^, "3tfft, fif^I, &c. ; $Tf , $>ft, ^f^tf , &c.
178. Stems ending in \p, Tfiph, ^b, ^bh declined.
^m. f. ' one who defends :' N. V. *J^, *TTtf, TOl^; Ac. ^JTHT, &c. ; I. TTJT,
*^ &c -
.f. 'one who obtains :' N.V. <3^, c5m, <3*T^; Ac. <5>W, &c.; I. 7WT,
fs*T^, &c. ; L. pi. tS^.
a. The neuter is N. Ac. V. TO^, 3yft, ^jfJ, &c. ; 75^, o5*ft, Wfw, &c.
b. ^H^f. 'water,' declined in the plural only, substitutes t (d) for its final before
bh; thus, N.V. 'WTtl^; Ac.^nj^; I. ^rfe^J D.Ab.^T?^; G. ^nTR ; L.^Tfr.
In the Veda it is sometimes singular.
179. Stems ending in JT m declined.
The final m becomes n before the consonantal terminations. ^IT sam, m. f. ' one
who pacifies :' N. V. ^, $pn, $1^ ; Ac. ^PW, &c. ; I.
&c. ; L. pi. 3F*J.
a. Similarly, H^n^m.f., 'quiet,' makes N.V. *^li{, H^I*U
&c. ; I. U^TWT, J^rnfWni?, &c. ; L. pi. U^iraj or H^llrry. Compare 53. e.
b. The neuter is N. Ac. V. ^, 3I*ft, ^Tfa, &c. ; H^II^, -W"^* -$rrf** &c.
1 80. Stems ending in ^ r and ^ v declined.
If the vowel that precedes final r be t or u, it is lengthened before the conso-
nantal terminations (compare 166) ; and final r, being a radical letter, does not
become Visarga before the s of the Loc. pi. (71. &).
m. f. ' one who goes:' N.V. ^, ^0, ^t^; Ac. ^T?T, &c. ; I. ^TT
, &c. ; L. pi. ^.
^
f. ' a door :' N. V. 'gTT^, 3w, ?TT^, &c.
f^ f. ' speech :' N. V. ift^, fiw, f'R^; Ac. ftR*T, &c. ; I. fTTT,
, &c. ; L. pi. *ft^.
a. The neuter is N. Ac. V. ^, ^t% "^ft, &c. ; *ft^, fht^, flfT, &c.
So also, ^T^ n. ' water :' N. Ac. ^T^, WTCt, ^ift.
b. One irregular noun ending in ^, viz. ^^f. ' the sky,' forms its N. V. sing.
from ?ft (133. a), and becomes ?T in the other consonantal cases; thus,
N. v. sn^, f^l, f^^; AC. f^r, f^, ^T^ L ^F\> TQ**^) &c -
Similarly, ^f<^ m. f. 'having a good sky,' but the neuter is N. Ac. V. *J^,
181. Stems ending in 3fs and ft^sh declined.
The difficulty in these is to determine which stems change their finals to e^ and
which to 3 (see 41. V). In the roots fi^ST, ^ST, JST, ^$3f> and >|9 (the last forming
112 INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
' impudent ') the final becomes F, and in T3T optionally cp or
Otherwise both ^ and ^ at the end of stems pass into T.
fosi m. f . ' one who enters,' or ' a man of the mercantile and agricultural class :'
N.V.'faZ (41. V), fe^, f-451^; Ac. fV$(H, &c. ; I. ftr^TT, feTWTTH, &c. f^3T x f.
'a quarter of the sky:' N. V. f^Sfi (41. V, 24), f^S[IT, f^l^J Ac. f^I 1 ?, &c. ;
I. f^flT, fymiH, &c. f^m. f. 'one who hates:' N. V. f%^ (41. V), %^,
%^J Ac. ffT^T, &c. ; I. iT^Tj %^*n*T, &c. l^m. f. 'one who endures:'
N. V. *[? (41. V), $, *p^; Ac. *PW, &c.; I. pT, J3n*T, &c. ^|3J 'one
who touches :' N. V. ^T^, ^W ^$1^ &c.
The neuters are N. Ac. V. f^T, f^3(ft, f^I, &c.; f^B, f^ft, f^%, &c. ; f%7,
%tf , fefc, &c. ; ^7, ijtf, jft, &c.
a. '5^^^ ' a priest,' in the Veda, makes N. V. sing. j<jsi^, and forms its other
consonantal cases from an obsolete stem, ^<te^ Compare 176. /.
b. ^f^^m.f., Very injurious,' makes N.V. *jf^, ^^^TT , &c. ; Ac. ^f^W^, &c. ;
I. *jftf*IT, ^f^**TW, &c. But nouns ending in ^, preceded by vowels, fall under 163.
c. ftO^, ' a cow-keeper,' makes N. V. *fftlf or 'fUz, 'ftiilSjT, &c.
d. Similarly, nouns from Desiderative stems, like fVma ' desirous of cooking,'
and fae|V5( ' desu-ous of saying,' make N. V. fqM<, fiwvji, &c. ; ft^'efi, f^^Ujr,
&c. (see 1 66. a).
182. Stems ending in f h declined.
In stems beginning with < d, the final aspirate generally becomes ^ k (*{g), in
other stems 7 t \^d), before the consonantal terminations; and in stems whose
initial is ^ d or ^^, the loss of the h, which disappears as a final, is compensated
for by aspirating the initial, which becomes dh or gh wherever final h becomes k (g)
or t (d). See 44. c, 175. b. fc5^ m. f. 'one who licks:' N. V. f?57 (41. Ill),
^; Ac. frtsV &c. ; I. fe^T, fc5?*fll**, &c. ; L. pi.
m.f.' one who milks:' N.V.^,|^,p^; Ac. |^H, &c. ; I.
c.; L. pl.^.
The neuter is N. Ac. V. fc5^, fci^T, fwf^, &c. ; ^F, ^?t, ^f
a. But "5^ m. f., 'injuring,' makes N. IpF or TgS (44. c) ; I.
IjTWrpT, &c. ; L. pi. 1JW or 1J7^. Similarly, ^ m. f. ' infatuating :' N. ^"^ or ^T .
The same option is allowed in f^T? 'one who loves ' and "^? 'one who vomits.'
b. f!i f., ' a kind of metre,' changes its final to k (g) before the consonantal
terminations, like stems beginning with d : N. TfwF, f!i^i, &c.
c. ^T^, 'bearing ' (fr. rt. ^ 'to bear'), changes ^T to "31 u in Ac. pi. and re-
maining Weakest cases (and before the ^ * of the fern.) if the word that precedes
it in the compound ends in a or d; this a or a combining with u into w au (instead
of w o, by 32) ; thus,
HK4n| m. f. 'a burden-bearer:' N. V. masc. ^IWFT *TTOn$Ti, WIWI^;
Ac. WIIXI^H, **!C e ll^i, MlCl^^; I. HK*5i, MK'IITM|l*f, &c. N. fern. >uCf^l, &c.
So HBII m. 'a steer ' and fran 'all-sustaining.' Under other circumstances
ADJECTIVES. 113
the change of vuh to uh is optional ; thus, Tjnfo^T?, ' bearing rice,' makes in Ac.
pi. 311 ^*^ or SITffWIf^.
d. ^Tfl^T^ ra., ' Indra' ('borne by white horses'), may optionally retain ^1 in Ac.
pi. &c. ; and in consonantal cases is declined as if the stem were ^yiHU ; thus,
N. v. ^fiRi^, ^hnn?!, ^hrer*?^; Ac. ^irei^r, ^nr^i^r, ^t^r^ or ^ra^r^;
I. ^fin^T or HiiMI^T, ^rTTtn*, ^JrRtfa^, &c.
e. In jJtl^T^ , ' a name of Indra,' the ^ is changed to ^ wherever ? becomes 7
or ^: N. TJtPn^, TJITHT1T, rj^rarn^; Ac. 3*1*1 *, &c.; I. fJTHTnn, iJCl-
TH^wn*, &c.
/. ^rT^? m., ' an ox ' (for ^r*TfaT? fr. 'wrjt^ ' a cart ' and ^T? ' bearing '), forms
the N.V. sing, from *ttf|"il j the other Strong cases from 1 cTjT?, and the Middle
cases from ^RT5^; thus, N. vH;jl\, ^T*TTT^, an^l^; Ac. ^R^T$?*T,
^R|f^; I. ^^T^T, ^H*SJIH, -wnira^, &c.; L. pi. i|r; V.
There is a feminine form ^TTTF^, but at the end of compounds this word makes
fern. N. sing. ^SrfT^t ; neut. N. V. ^RTi^, 1 3If^^, WT^ff^.
183. T? 'binding,' 'tying,' at the end of compounds, changes the final to TT or
<I, instead of ^ or "5; thus, TTR"? f., ' a shoe,' makes N. V. TTHTiT,
^^T^^; Ac. "STrRf^, &c. ; I. T^T^T, ^MMdl*, &c. ; L. pi.
See 306. b.
Defective Nouns.
184. The following nouns are said to be defective in the first five inflexions, in
which cases they make use of other nouns (see Pan. vi. i, 63): ^SWt^n. (176. d);
^ira^n. (108. e); ^*^ n. (108. e); <ST(m. (108. e); ^fa^ n. m. (i66.rf)
(io8.e); ftnTf. (io8.e); ^ m. (108. e); ^f. (io8.e); JTT^n. (108. e);
(108. e); ^i^n. (144,156.0); ^[m. (io8.e); ^IcR^n. (144, 156.0);
(156.6); ^n. (116. a); ^ n. (io8.e).
185. Examples of nouns defective in other cases are ^*^ n. (156); "sft? m.
(128. c); IR^f. (171).
SECTION III. ADJECTIVES.
1 86. The declension of substantives includes that of adjectives ;
and, as already seen, the three examples of substantives, given under
each class, serve as the model for the three genders of adjectives
falling under the same class. Adjectives may be grouped under
three heads, A, B, C, as follow :
A. Simple adjectives, coming immediately from roots, and not
derived from substantives. These belong chiefly to the first, second,
and third classes of nouns (see 80. A, 81. A, 83. A, 103115).
B. Adjectives formed from substantives by secondary or Taddhita
Q
ADJECTIVES.
suffixes. They belong chiefly to the first, fifth, and sixth classes
of nouns (see 80. B, 84.6, 85.6, 103, 140, 159).
C. Compound adjectives, formed by using roots and substantives
at the end of compounds. These are common under every one of
the eight classes.
187. A. Examples of Simple Adjectives.
$w subha, 'beautiful/ 'good:' masc. and neut. stem jm subha;
fern, stem ^mr subhd.
An example of an adjective of cl. i is here given in full, that the declension of
the masc., fern., and neut. forms may be seen at once and compared with that of
Latin adjectives in us, like bonus, 'good.' The fern, of some of these adjectives
is in /, and then follows nadf at 105. In the succeeding examples only the Nom.
cases sing, will be given.
SINGULAR. DUAL.
FEM.
N.
Ac.
I.
D.
Ab.
G.
L.
V.
N.AC.V.
I. D. Ab.
G. L.
N.V.
Ac.
I.
D. Ab.
G.
L.
PLURAL.
NOM. MASC.
NOM. NEUT.
<{
2.
'dear'
beautiful
* P ure '
' pale '
' good '
ftnn
or
timid
or
105 .
105.
1 25.
T!
Obs. The neuter of adjectives in i and u may in D. Ab. G. L. sing, and G. L.
du. optionally follow the masculine form; thus, D. sing, sutine or sufoye, mridune
or mridave ; Ab. G. sing. utinas or su6es, mridunas or mridos; L. sing, sutini
or sutau, mjiduni or mridau ; G. L. du. sutinos or sufyos, mridunos or mridvos.
See 119.0.
ADJECTIVES. 115
188. B. Examples of Adjectives formed from Substantives.
NOM. MASC.
NOM. FEM.
NOM. NEUT.
f *TTJ^ ' human '
1 >nf*NR ' religious '
' strong '
* prosperous
6. -I 4jfVM ' happy '
.105.
105.
105.
189.
C. Examples of Compound Adjectives.
NOM. MASC. NOM. FEM. NOM. NEUT.
* very learned '
foolish'
* small-bodied'
' very liberal '
' all-conquering '
' well-born '
'deprived of sense'
* piercing the vitals '
190. Examples of some other Compound Adjectives.
'a shell-blower' (108. a).
' ruined' (126. A).
' a sweeper' (126. b).
^ ' having a divine mother' ( 1 30) . f^^HTrfT
' rich ' (134. a).
'having many ships' (134. a).
I.
2.
3- j
4. |
5. j
6. |
7. j
8. | ITH
DEGREES OP COMPARISON.
191. The degrees of comparison are formed in two ways:
ist, by adding to the stem nt tar a ( = Gr. -repo-s) for the com-
parative (see 80. LXI), and THT tama ( = Lat. -timu-s, Gr. -retro-?) for
the superlative (see 80. LIX), both of which suffixes are declined in
m. f. n. like &ubha at 187; thus,
puny a, 'holy,' TJWiTT punya-tara (Nom. m. f. n. as, a, am), 'more holy,'
punya-tama (Nom. m. f. n. as, d, am), 'most holy.' Similarly,
Q 2
116
ADJECTIVES.
navat, 'wealthy,' VHH dhanavat-tara, 'more wealthy,' ^H^IH dhanavat-tama,
'most wealthy.'
a. A final n is rejected; as, \tf^dhanin, 'rich,' tjfrTHT dhani-tara,
'more rich/ vfTfR dhani-tama, 'most rich/
b. fal^, 'wise/ makes feg'rlT, fcgTW. Compare 168. e.
192. 2ndly, by adding ^^ iyas (Nom. m. f. n. -iydn, -iyasi, -iyas,
see declension below, cf. Gr. lav) for the comparative (see 86. V), and
^f ishtha (Nom. m. f. n. -ishthas, -ishtha, -ishtham, declined like subha
at 187, cf. Gr. -KTTO?) for the superlative (see 80. XLVIII).
Obs. The difference in the use of tara, tama, and iyas, ishtha, seems to be
this that tyas and ishtha, being of the nature of primary suffixes, are generally
added to roots or to modifications of roots (the root being sometimes weakened,
sometimes gunated), while tara and tama are of more general application.
a. Note, that while the Sanskrit comparative suffix ends in n and s (iyans) for
the Strong cases, the Greek has adhered to the n throughout (N. iydn=.w>v,
Voc. tyan = {0v); and the Latin has taken the s for its neuter (tyas=ius, neuter
of ior ; s being changed to r, in the masc. and oblique cases). Cf. Sk. aartyas with
Lat. aravius.
193. Before iyas and ishtha, the stem generally disburdens itself
of a final vowel, or of the more weighty suffixes in, vin, vat, mat,
and tri ; thus, ^ft?f^ ' strong/ ^cSfan^ ' more strong/ ^fJ3S ' strongest /
' wicked/ my)*|*( 'more wicked/ tnftr? 'most wicked / H^ 'light/
' lighter/ c^ftre ' lightest ;' mnf^; ' intelligent/ ^tffa^ ' more
intelligent/ J|f>re 'most intelligent/ Similarly, W^ c great/ n^lq^
* greater/ itf^z ' greatest/
a. Compare *sn<{ln\ (N. of svddiyas) from svddu, ' sweet,' with $-iuv from
$vf ; and yir^8f( with Y^-iarog.
The declension of ^rfl^ masc. is here given in full (see 167).
SINGULAR.
N.
Ac.
I.
D.
baliydn
*T baliydnsam
baliyasd
baliyase
baliydnsau
baliydnsau
dnsas
baliyasas
s
Ab. 'fij1v^^ baliyasas
G. baliyasas
L. ^c5^^1ll baliyasi
V.
baliyobhydm
baliyobhydm
baliyasos
baliydnsau
fern, is like nadi(io$), and
baliyobhyas
baliyobhyas
baliyasdm
:^ baliyahsu
c^^f W( baliydnsas
. like manas (1154).
ADJECTIVES.
117
COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE.
194. Besides the rejection of the final, the stem often undergoes
change, as in Greek (cf. e-^Oicov, eyQi <TTO?, fr. e-^Opoi) ; and its place is
sometimes supplied by a substitute (cf. /3eArtW, /3eArrTO?, fr. ayaQ6<i).
The following is a list of the substitutes :
POSITIVE. SUBSTITUTE.
< antika, ' near ' n^ neda (rt.
alpa, ' little ' * 3iT kana (rt.
' uru, ' large ' (tvpv$ ) ^R vara (rt. '
riju, ' straight ' * ^j*1 rija (rt.
^i^I krisa, ' thin,' ' lean ' "3^1 krasa (rt.
fisJU kshipra, ' quick ' TSpT kshepa (rt.
"ET^ kshudra, ' small,' 'mean' ^t^ kshoda (rt.
*T^ ^wrw, ' heavy ' (@apv$) TT ^ara (rt. 'T)
HH tripra, satisfied ' W trapa (rt.
^Nr dirgha, ' long ' "^TO drdgha (rt.
^T rfwra, ' distant ' ^ rff a. (rt. ?)
^T3T dridha, ' firm ' "jj^ dradha (rt. "^
^r<<|<s parivridha, ' eminent ' "^Kflc parivradha
t^prithu, 'broad' (TrAari;?) VRpratha (rt.
JTjTFI^ras'asya, ' good '
ftpT priya, 'dear '
^? 6aAw, ' much,' ' frequent '
^?o$ bahula, ' much '
*T$T bhrisa, ' excessive '
*J"<^ mridu, soft '
^W^ yuvan, 'young ' (juvenis)
*rre ac?Aa, ' firm,' ' thick '
^f vriddha, ' old '
^T^I*. vrinddra, excellent '
fWC sthira, ' firm,' ' stable '
sthula, ' gross,' ' bulky '
sphira, turgid '
hrasva, ' short '
i (rt. ^
(rt. ift)
ia (rt.
(rt.
mrada (rt.
yava (rt. 5
sarfAa (rt.
f ^^ varsha (rt.
*nfw
vrinda
(rt.l
sthava (rt.
sp/ta (rt.
hrasa (rt.
may be also regularly ^?^c^, ^Tf^l ; and ^*J may be *. *rf^, &c.
t In the case of ^H and U the final vowel is not rejected, but combines with iyas
and ishtha agreeably to Sandhi. In T^TT and ^, yas is aflixed in place of iyas.
118 NUMERALS.
195. Tara and tama may be added to substantives; as, fr. TT3T^, 'a king,'
<If(H, &c. ; fr. ?J^j 'pain,' fft^TrlT, &c. If added to a word like Tftl^, 'clarified
butter,' the usual euphonic changes must take place ; thus, Jjftn?^ &c. (70).
These suffixes are also added to inseparable prepositions ; as, "3TT ' up,' TWT
higher,' '3^1 ' highest ' (cf. Lat. ex-timus, in-timus, &c.) ; also to pronominal
stems (236) ; and tama is added to numerals (209, 211).
196. Tard and tama may sometimes be added to feminine stems ending in t
and u (like ^pfr ' a woman,' ^Tcft ' a faithful wife,' ffS^t ' a wise woman '), which
may optionally be retained or shortened ; e. g. ^gjffalTT, JjpftiHU, or f^fcRI, f^ffTT ;
^rfliHI, tfrflrf'HF, or ^fifrPlT, ^TfrTinTT ; f^|^tcT*n or f^fMrtHT (Pan. vi. 3, 44. 45).
But if the feminine be the feminine of a masculine substantive, as WTSnUT of
WranT, the shortening is compulsory, as "SKtffViRT (Pan. vi. 3, 42).
197. Tara and tama may even be added, in conjunction with the syllable ^TTT dm,
to the inflexions of verbs; as, W^ffliTUH 'he talks more than he ought.' See
80. LIX, LXI.
a. Sometimes fyas and tara, ishtha and tama are combined together in the same
word (just as in English we say lesser); thus, ^MWC, 5 H8rt*i; WfiW; nf^gflfl,
&c. : and tara may be even added to ishtha; thus, TC|8fl<.
SECTION IV. NUMERALS.
CARDINALS.
198. The cardinals are, ^cR m. f. n. i, q ; fg m. f. n. 2, ^ ; f^ m. f. n.
3, 3 ; ^HJ^: m. f. n. 4, $ ; tj^ m. f. n. 5, M ; ^n? m. f. n. 6, % ; TOT^ m. f. n.
7,0; ''Bl^m. f. n. 8, b; ^T^ 9, <t;
,^; f^fwf. 20,^0;
^ifiT 21 ; ?if4$rfir 22 ; g^f^^rfiT 23 ; - <^r'45if7f 24 ; TT^fw^tfTT 25 ;
26 ; ^TRf^rfu 27 ; wrf^rfrT 28 ; rRf^^rfu or g5rfa^n^ 29 ;
30; leohf^ii^ 31; 'gifd^ 32; ^^r^5ii^ 33 ; ^5%^ 34>
lf^ 35; N^r^ii^ 36; ^rfff^Tf^ 37; ^Bif^li^ 38; ^fr or
39 ; ^rnft 40 ; 5*^HTft^n 41 ; fF^r^iU^fc^ or
or ^yvaHlf^l 1^43 ; <i^ 5 !ar=nfT^n^44;
45 ; ^T^rnfT^fi^ 46 ; ^TR^rHir^ir^ 4 7 ; ^rpr^RTfr^n^or ^^^fr^rfT^r^ 48 ;
or ^i^vi'^ll^l^ 49 ; M^l^l^ 50 ; <f<*ij^l^r^ 5 T J flT 1 ^!^!^ or
or
59 ; ^f? 60 ; ininrfir 61 ; fgifv or sr^rfi? 62 ; f^^f? or
63 ; ^g:^rf% * 64 ; i^^mf? 65 ; TOWfl? 66 ; ?m^f? 67 ; ^VNf? or
These may also be written T ^MM?, ^^?f?. See 62. a. and 63.
NUMERALS. 119
68 ; rfr^f? or gRrnrfif 69 ; ^TRfff 70 ; ^ofi^vffi 7 1 ; f^nrfir or
72 ; fa tw fa or <^T:FfrT 73 ; ^TJtWffffl 1 74 ; ^^Mwfif 75 ; H^flwffT 76 ;
UMUHfri 77; 4 U5WfrT or VHgT^wfrT 78 ; rHHHfcf or "3ilT^flflT 79 ; W^rVfff
80; ^^fifif 81; ST^ftfiT 82; *T$ftfiT 83; ^T^ftfiT 84; traT^ftflT 85;
ire^ftfiT 86 ; jTHI^flfw 87 ; ^T^ftfiT 88 ; ^T^tfif or -gR^fir 89 ; ^trfa
90; UcM^frf 9 1 ; flTTffiT or 5Hlfrf 92; f^frfrr or d^r^Td 93;
94 ; "q^R^fiT 95 ; mjjNfrf 96 (43-/) ; w?RfiT 97 ; ^rerRfif or
98 ; HcHNfff or dhH^M n. (m.) 99 ; ^fif n. (also m.*) or ^l ^flfiT
100 ; ^oji^m n. loij f^r^IWn. 102; f^TiT 103 ; ^I^nr 104; M^^lri 105;
VT$[tf 106; TTR^llT 107; 'STf^riT 108 ; H^^Jrf 109; ^^HT no;
(nom. sing, n.) or 5IW (nom. du. n.) or ^Tff (nom. du. n.) 200 ;
(nom. sing, n.) or 5ft% ^nTTfrf (nom. pi. n.) 300 ; 'snjtsnw or
(nom. pi. n.) 400 ; xj^iii^or tj^ ^TfnftT 500 ; ^^rff^or ^ ^nnftT 600 ;
and so on up to *T^H n. (also m.) 1000, which is also expressed by
or by ^r ^nfrfH or by ^HTrft f. ; ? ^^ 2000; glftr
3000 ; ^Tt^rft ^^nftEr 4000, &c. f
199. The intervening numbers between 100 and 1000, those be-
tween 1000 and 2000, and so on, may be expressed by compounding
the adjective ^fftjcfi adhika (or occasionally T^n uttara), 'more/ 'plus,'
with the cardinal numbers ; thus 101 is 5C!*^lfW (see above) or JfoRrfv^;
^TiTJT (or occasionally Btet ^HHT ), i. e. ' a hundred plus one/ or com-
pounded thus, 5fofiTfv<*^riH x . Similarly, SffM? ^nT" x or arfWoir^nnT 102 ;
^TITH or ^ifv4^i^ 103 ; ^rsnfv^ ^Tri'T or uviWi. ^rim 107; f^r^ftr-
130 ; twi$i(fVc|i$|iH N 150 (also expressed by ^T^TiTH * one hun-
dred and a hah ') ; *rf|3nqfireife$|d^ 226 ; ^tT^rqftnfif^nr^ 383 ; t^r-
485 ; wrofVranr^nr^ 596 ; ^mNfinp^Tyw^ 666 ;
or itigMrK^^ti*^ 1060 ; tfte^nn^ or H^iirifveiifl^tJ*^ 1600 ;
1666 J.
* I have found ^TiT ^TiTT: ' a hundred hundred ' and ^rff^r?rT: ' seven hundred '
(agreeing with ^TOTI) in the Maha-bharata.
t ^gl^^t5i** x is used in Rig-vedaV. 30, 15 for 4000; and on the same principle
f^^H^ might stand for 3000, and fgr^^J^ for 2000, &c. ; but it is a question
whether these might not also stand for 1004, 1003, 1002 respectively.
J Similarly 2130 may be expressed by flpf 31 <;fti<* <*fq^ fn^i n\ or -^Tlrtf^T or by
using TJT; ; thus, f^^fV^raK^I ri Mi "S ^TfH. Other forms of expressing numerals
are also found; e.g. 21,870 tt^i*lMonr<H^ifiT; JprTi^fet *J5TO ^THflTi ', 109,350
r. According to Pan. vi. 3, 76,
may be prefixed to a number in the sense ' by one not,' ' less by one ;' e. g.
f^rft ' by one not twenty,' ' one less than twenty,' i. e. 19.
120 NUMERALS.
In the same way the adjective "3R ' less/ ' minus/ is often placed
before a cardinal number, to denote one less than that number, ^
'one 5 being either expressed or understood; thus, gRf^rfff or i{<*lv(-
f^rfiT ' twenty minus one ' or ' nineteen * (cf. Lat. undeviginti, i. e. unus
de viginti). And other cardinals, besides ^cR ' one/ are sometimes
prefixed to "3R, to denote that they are to be subtracted from a
following number ; as, Vifcf ^THT or Wt^T^n^ ' a hundrecl less five '
or 'ninety-five/
a. Again, the ordinals are sometimes joined to the cardinals to
express 1 1 1 and upwards ; thus, J?fiT<^f ^nn^ or JJhl<^l^rrC^ 1 1 1 ; il^ty
115; f^sf ^n^ 120; f^f ^nr*^ or fVj tytyri*^ 130; Tranjf snr^ 150;
or f4ii?* 1020.
b. There are single words for the highest numbers ; thus, ^npT n. (also m.) ' ten
thousand ;' ^Tf n. or HTSfT f. or f*f$lT n. (also m.) 'a lac,' ' one hundred thousand '
(^Ml^t*) ; Tl^ff n. (also m.) ' one milh'on ;' wfe f. ' a krore,' ' ten millions ;'
vt^i; m. n. ' one hundred millions ;' *i^ig<; m. n. or t^l n. or ^l^T n. ' one thou-
sand millions ;' ^% n. ' ten thousand millions ;' frt*s!i n. ' one hundred thousand
millions ;' *tmi n. ' a billion ;' ^T^ m. (or *T|TO% n.) 'ten billions ;' ^T^ m. n. or
WJ^ m. 'a hundred bilh'ons ;' H^T^T^ m. n. or ^W 'a thousand billions ;' ^T^T m.
or Tl 'ten thousand billions;' f^T^T^T m. or ^TT m. 'one hundred thousand
billions;' >J*T n. (^n) 'one million billions;' Jr^T^T n. (M^I^H) 'ten million
bilh'ons;' ^rSJif^TOT f. 'one hundred million billions/ *TUS[ifinr]rVone thousand
million billions.'
Note Some variation occurs in some of the above names for high numbers,
according to different authorities.
DECLENSION OF CARDINALS.
R i, fg 2, (duo, Svo), f^ 3 (tres, rpeis, rpia), ^r^. 4 (quatuor],
are dech'ned in three genders.
tteka, *one j (no dual), follows the declension of the pronominals
at 237 ' Nom. m. ^K^ekas; Dat. m. JJSF^R ekasmai; Nom. f. ^sr ekd ;
Dat. f. *f<**^ ekasyai; Nom. n. ^fm ekam; Nom. pi. m. ^ir eke, ' some/
It may take the suffixes tara and tama; thus, eka-tara, 'one of two;'
eka-tama, 'one of many; 5 which also follow the declension of pro-
nominals; see 236, 238.
20 1. fir dvi, 'two' (dual only), is declined as if the stem were
"S dva, like Siva ; thus, N. Ac. V. m. ^ dvau, f. n. if dve; I. D. Ab.
m. f. n. ^TnJT N ; G. L. ^Tfr^.
202. f& tri, 'three '(pi. only), is declined in the masculine like
NUMERALS. 121
the plural of nouns whose stems end in ^ i at no, except in Gen.;
thus, N. V. masc. WW(; Ac. g^; I. fof*^; D. Ab. fw*^; G. WW-
Wf*{ (Ved. gffairR); L. f&v. The feminine forms its cases from a
stem fff^ ; thus, N. Ac. V. fern, fff^; I. flT^fa^; D. Ab. finfw^; G.
; L. flT^. The N. Ac. V. neut. is ^1% ; the rest like masc.
3O 3- ^RSp.6atur, 'four' (plural only), is thus declined : N. V. masc.
(Terrapes, rea-crapes) ; Ac. ^TJI^ ', I. ^Tjffr^ ', D. Ab.
G. ^TJT; L. ^g|. N. Ac. V. fem. <?nre^; I. ^nr^fa^; D. Ab.
wra^; G. ^rrepgr^; L. ^r?R||J. N. Ac. V. neut. ^iFnfic; the rest like
the masculine.
a. In 6atur, shash, pahcan, &c., an augment n is inserted before dm, the termina-
tion of Gen., by Pan. vn. i, 55.
204. tf^t^ pantan, 'five 5 (plural only), is the same for masc., fem.,
and neut. It is declined in I. D. Ab. L. like nouns in an (146).
The Gen. lengthens the penultimate ; thus, N. Ac. V. TO (TTCVTC) ;
I. TOfaq;; D. Ab. TCIH^; G. q^lrm x ; L. "q^.
Like n^^ are declined, *nn^ 'seven 5 (sept em, eTrra), TT^
(novemj, ^P^ 'ten' (decem, Seica), UBT^I*^ 'eleven' (undecim),
'twelve' (duodecimal and all other numerals ending in an, excepting
^JE^ ' eight.'
205. "^ shash, ' six,' is the same for masc., fem., and neut., and
is thus declined: N. Ac.V. -q^; I. ^rf^; D. Ab. Mdn^; G. q^mr
shanndm (43. /]', L. ttQ.
a. Similarly without distinction of gender, ^n?^ ashtan, ' eight : '
N. Ac.V. ^TCT or w (octo, OKTU>); I. wrfa^or ^s?f>T^; D. Ab. ^rFT?^
or ^rewrq;; G. ^T^T^T^; L. 'arercj or ! 5T^.
b. The numerals from M^^ ' five ' to *Tj^^|f^ ' nineteen ' have no
distinction of gender, but agree in number and case with the nouns
to which they are joined; thus, "TOfor n^fa: 'by five women.'
206. All the remaining cardinal numbers, from ^RfqjFlfTT ' nineteen '
to ^rT ' a hundred,' w%& ' a thousand,' and upwards, may be declined
in the singular, even when joined with masculine, feminine, or neuter
nouns in the plural. Those ending in fir ti are feminine, and declined
like *rf?T mati at 112 ; and those in H / are also feminine, and declined
like qfa^sarit at 136; thus, f^lWl $^*h 'by twenty men;'
ace. pi. 'twenty men;' f^nn ^^: 'by thirty men;'
ace. pi. 'thirty men.' ^pr 'a hundred' and ir%& 'a thousand'
and all the higher numbers are declined according to their final
R
122 NUMERALS.
vowels, whether a, a, i, i, or u; thus, ^fW ftfiTC ' a hundred ancestors ;'
$Tfffi^ fag 1 *?: 'from a hundred ancestors;' ^RlfvF^ fifirc: 'a hundred
and one ancestors;' 'f^Qm fqijfa: 'with a thousand ancestors;' irgtf
TCI: ' a million men ; ' gft^J'T 3^h ' with ten million men,' &c.
207. Although these numerals, from sfi*rf^TfW 'nineteen,' when joined with
plural nouns, may be declined in the singular, yet they may take a dual or plural
when used alone and in particular constructions; as, f^Tift 'two twenties ;' fo^lflt
' two thirties ;' f^TTT^ ' many thirties ;' ^pf ' two hundred ;' ^nrrf^f ' hundreds ;'
'thousands;' ' sixty thousand sons,'
The things numbered are often put in the genitive ; thus, ts TT^H O<rtlT*^ ' two
thousand chariots;' ^rniff fT I TTTT'^' seven hundred elephants;' ^
' twenty-one arrows.' See other examples in Syntax at 835.
ORDINALS.
308. The ordinals are, H*R * first ' * (cf. TT/WTO?, primus) ;
' second ' (Sevrepo-s) ; "^iftl ' third ' (tertiu-s) ; which three are all
declined like $iva and &ubha at 187; but the first may optionally
follow sarva at 237 in N. V. pi. m. (ww or UVJHT^) ; and the other
two the pronominals at 237, 238 in D. Ab. L. sing. m. f. n. ; thus,
D. finftqw or fSTrffarni m. n., flfirfa^ or f?Trffan^ f. See also 239.
209. 'qjpj * fourth 't (rerapros) ; T?3* 'fifth;' ^ 'sixth;' HTH?
' seventh' (septimus) ; *srgn ' eighth ;' VT^IT ' ninth' (nonus) ; ^n? * tenth'
(decimus) ; declined like &va and subha for masc. and neut., and
like nodi at 105 for feminine ; thus, Nom. m. "tfrjvj 1 ^, f. ^jjvfif. (In
TT5W &c. the old superlative suffix ma may be noted.)
310. The ordinals from 'eleventh' to 'nineteenth' are formed from
the cardinals by rejecting the final n ; thus, from 4f 3,1^31^ ' eleven,'
d*K^T ' eleventh' (Nom. m. f. n. 1J=KT^T^, -^ft, -^, 103, 105, 104).
211. 'Twentieth,' 'thirtieth,' 'fortieth,' and ' fiftieth' are formed
either by adding the superlative suffix tama (195) to the cardinal, or
by rejecting the final syllable or letter of the cardinal ; as, from
f^TfiT 'twenty/ N$lfaw*T or f^r 'twentieth' (Nom. m. f. n. -^, -jft,
-*mj -$T^;, -^ft, -^, 103, 105, 104). Similarly, f^r^T or f$ ' thir-
tieth/ tj^T^I^H or trar^T ' fiftieth,' &c. The intermediate ordinals
are formed by prefixing the numeral, as in the cardinals ; thus,
or ^cfiN^r ' twenty-first/ &c.
* Other adjectives may be used to express 'first;' as, "srrErt^, -!TT, -
, -H^;; *B*J^, -HT, -zpr x ; ^rf?i^, -m, -^.
t ^Th^, -TIT, -; f> ~^T, -" are also used for 'fourth.'
PRONOUNS. 123
212. The other ordinals, from ' sixtieth ' to 'ninetieth/ are formed
by adding tama ; also by changing ti to ta in the case of another
numeral preceding, but not otherwise ; thus, from ^fe ' sixty/ ^flTcR
'sixtieth/ but *n? for * sixtieth ' can only be used when another
numeral precedes, as i^My or cwfViT*? ' sixty-first/ f^"TO or f^qffirn
* sixty-third ;' from tHfri 'ninety/ H^ffM* 'ninetieth;' but ^TiT for
' ninetieth 5 can only be used when another numeral precedes (see
Pan. v. 2, 58).
213. 'Hundredth' and 'thousandth' are formed by adding tama
to Tjni and *nH, declinable in three genders ; thus, ^IrirtH ' hundredth'
(Nom. m. f. n. ^nffiJ^, -ft, -H^). Similarly, ^yrt*i^, -*ft, -*T^,
' thousandth/
214. The aggregation of two or more numbers is expressed by modifications of
the ordinal numbers ; thus, ^*^'a duad/ ^***i/ a triad,' "iijM*^'the aggregate
of four.*
215. There are a few adverbial numerals; as, JJf it ' once,' flT^' twice/ f<3^
' thrice/ ^5^( ' four times.' r3^ may be added to cardinal numbers, with a
similar signification ; as, H^tyr*^ ' five times.' The neuter of the ordinals may
be used adverbially ; as, H*I*^ ' in the first place.'
For a table of the numerical symbols see page 3.
CHAPTER V.
PRONOUNS.
216. PRONOUNS (sarva-ndman) have no one stem equally appli-
cable to all the cases. In the ist personal pronoun, the stem of
the sing, is practically w ah in Nom., and in the oblique cases 1 ma.
In the 2nd, the stem of the sing, is practically ^ tva or lj tu, while
that of the dual and plural is *j yu. The 3rd has *r sa for the stem
of the Nom. sing., and w ta for the other cases.
217. Nevertheless the form of the pronoun used in derivative and
compound words is regarded by grammarians as expressive of its
most general and comprehensive state, and this in the pronouns of
the first and second persons, corresponds with the Ablative cases,
singular and plural, and in the other pronouns, with the Nominative
and Accusative cases singular neuter.
R 2
124 PRONOUNS.
DECLENSION OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
Obs. In Sanskrit, as in other languages, the general and indefinite character
of the first two personal pronouns is denoted by the fact that no distinction of
gender is admitted. For the same reason, the termination of the Norn, case of
some pronouns is made to resemble the neuter, as the most general state. This
may also be the reason why the 3rd pronoun sa drops the s of the Nom. case
before all consonants. There is no Vocative case.
a 1 8. ^ mad, sing. 'I,' SHW< asmad, pi. 'we.'
N. ^n^aham, ' I ' tTRTR dvdm, * we two ' ^nr vayam, ' we '
Ac. mt(mdm or *n md, ' me' dvdm or ^ nau, ' us two' ^TCRT^ asmdn or ^ nas, ' us '
I. Tm mayd "STTTnarpr dvdbhydm ^nBRlfa^ asmdbhis
D. i^c^mahyam or *T me dvdbhydm or in nau ^srwflT asmabhyam or T&(na
Ab.ifftmat* dvdbhydm ^eniasmat
G. *fT mama or ^ me WT^fr^ dvayos or n nau ^WttR asmdkam or^mjias
L. rfif mayi dvayos ^IWTCJ asmdsu
2,19. r^ tvad, sing. ' thou/ Jpfl^ yushmad, pi. 'you.'
N. RJ? tvam, 'thou' ^PT yuvdm, ' you two' THTJT yuyam, 'you' or 'ye'
Ac. r^R tvdm or i^T /va yuvdm or ^TT x vam ^TT^ yushmdn or ^ va*
I. ^fmtvayd Tgmvqm^yuvdbhydm TjT*r[fa^yushmdbhis
D. jpufttubhyam or IT ^e yuvdbhydm or ^TRvaw ^ *vim*{yushmabhyam or ^
Ab. PTiT /w^ * yuvdbhydm JT**\ yushmat
G. ira tava or ^ /e ^^f^ yuvayos or ^p^vam 51^11^^ yushmdkam or ^v
L. ?!(ftl ^vayi yuvayos *}mi^ yushmdsu
Obs. The alternative forms md, me, nau, &c., have no accent, and cannot be
used at the beginning of sentences, nor before the particles fa, ' and ;' vd, ' or ;'
eva, ' indeed,' &c.
2 20. 71^ tad, 'he," that.'
MASCULINE.
N. ^^sas (usually m sa f), 'he' itf tau, 'they two' w te, 'they,' ' those'
Ac. if^ tarn tau WT^ tan
I. WT tena ifTa^f(tdbhydm tc^tais
* As the stems mad a,nd tvad are generally used in compounds, mat-tas and
tvat-tas more commonly stand for the Ablative; see 719. Similarly, the Ablative
plural may be yushmat-tas, asmat-tas; but these very rarely occur.
f By 67, fl will be the usual form. 5TT usually exists as ?ft, see 64. a.
PRONOUNS.
125
D. ITCH tasmai
Ab. TRRTfl tasmdt
G. TCT tasya
L. Kfw tasmin
tdbhydm
tdbhydm
WT^ tebhyas
tebhyas
Tf*Tf*T teshdm
FEMININE.
N. 5T sd, ' she'
Ac. Tttf^tdm
I. inn taya
D. 7f^| tasyai
Ab. ifWR^ tasyds
G. tasyds
L. fRST*^ tasydm
7T te, 'they two' (fern.)
te
TTPTnr tdbhydm
tdbhydm
tdbhydm
tayos
NEUTER.
ds, 'they '(fern.)
ids
tdbhis
tdbhyas
tdbhyas
tdsdm
tdsu
N. Ac. 'ini ^/, H /e, Frf'T tdni; the rest like the masculine.
a. Observe the resemblance of the Sanskrit personal pronouns to those of the dead
and living cognate languages. Aham or ah is the Greek eyco (^Eolic cyan/), Latin
ego, German ich, English ' I ;' mam or md (the latter being the oldest form found
in the Vedas) equals e/xe, me ; mahyam=mihi; mayi=mei; the mat of the Abl.
sing, and of asmat, yushmat, corresponds to the Latin met in memet, nosmet, &c. :
vayam or va is the English we;' asmdn us; nas=nos; tvam = tu, thou;' tvdm
or tvd=te, 'thee;' tubhyam=tibi; tvayi=tui; y uy am =v [*?, English 'you;'
vas = vos. The 3rd personal pronoun corresponds to the Greek article; thus, tau
= TO>, tam = TOV, tdbhydm = TO<V, TCUV, &c.
DEMONSTRATIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
221. The third personal pronoun TT^ tad, *he/ declined above, is
constantly used in a demonstrative sense, to signify 'that' or 'this.'
a. It is sometimes used emphatically with other pronouns, like ille and ipse ;
thus, WtS^JT 'ille ego? if WTH 'UK nos;' *T ?*H 'ille tu ;' *H WT 'ilia tu;'
ff ^5*\ ' *^* ros * ' " ^^* ' *^ e *P* e * ' *^ ^ni ' irf ipsum.'
222. It is also combined with the relative ya to form another demonstrative
pronoun (rarely used except in the Veda), of which the stem is tyad .- N. ^W( (67),
?tf, W; Ac. 7I*T, &c. Fern. ^TT, ^, WT^, &c. Neut. Wi(, W, Wlftl, &c.
223. By prefixing ^ e to 7T^, another common pronoun is formed,
more proximately demonstrative ; thus,
126
PRONOUNS.
5 etad, ' this.'
MASCULINE.
N. ^?$(eshas(as\i.J!mesha).Jo.
Ac. ^w*^ etam or
I.
D.
G.
L.
etau
enam etau or ^n enau
enena ^TTWTT etdbhydm
etdbhydm
etdbhydm
^rt^ilu etayos or <*tnfU
etayos or
eshd, ^ff ete, JTrTF
or
or
^Tfl",
Ac.
enayos
enayos
; Ac.
or
etebhyas
etebhyas
eteshdm
eteshu
or
or
etasmai
etasmdt
etasya
etasmin
The feminine is N.
inr or ^%, ^fli*^ or
D. JM^M, &c.
The neuter is N.
^rtifT or jiMf, &c.
a. The alternative forms ^*T^, u^fl, **TT*T, &c. are, like those of
the ist and 2nd person, enclitic, and ought not to be used at the
beginning of a sentence. Moreover, they can only be used with
reference to some one or something mentioned in a previous sen-
tence (see Syntax 836).
With etad cf. Lat. iste, ista, istud; etam=zistum, etasya = istius, etat-=istud.
or
224. There is another common demonstrative pronoun, of which
idam, ' this,' the N. neuter, is supposed to represent the most
general state (cf. Lat. is, ea, id), though there are really two stems
the vowels ^ a and ^ i (cf. a-tas, i-tas, 719). The latter serves also as
the stem of certain pronominals, such as
234. b, and 236.
MASCULINE.
N. 'SHW ay am, ' this ' ^jft imau, * these two '
Ac.
I.
D.
Ab.
G.
L.
mam
anena
asmai
asmdt
asya
asmin
mau
T dbhydm
dbhydm
dbhydm
anayos
anayos
See 234,
ime, ' these '
imdn
ebhis*
ebhyas
ebhyas
eshdm
eshu
* This is an example of the old form for the Inst. pi. of masculine nouns of the
first class, common in the Vedas.
PRONOUNS. 127
FEMININE.
N. ^l* iyam f R ime ^n^ imds
Ac. ^TTf imam ime imds
I. ^RTT anayd ^T^TT dbhydm ^nftTO aiAw
D. 'sr^ asyai dbhydm ^TI^ dbhyas
Ab. ^SFTT^ asya* dbhydm dbhyas
G. asyds ^SR^T^ anayos ^miH asaw
L. ^NOT* asydm anayos
NEUTER.
N. Ac. *r ze?am T ime HlfT imdni
225. There is another demonstrative pronoun (rarely used, excepting in Nom.
sing.), of which ^TC[^, 'this' or 'that,' is supposed to represent the most general
state, though the stem is ^HJ amu, and in N. sing. ^TCJ asu. It is thus declined :
Masc. N. ^TOT, ^ff^, ^nft ; Ac. ^pr, ^n^, ^r^; I. ^p
D. ^rg 1 ^, ^n^> wftR( ; Ab. -^Jj 1 *!!^, ^ v n'T, ^nrt*'?^; G.
; L. 'WjfrR^, ^^1^, wfV|. Fern. N. ^nEn, ^1^, ^J(J Ac -
i. ^m, ^fljwr'T, ^B^fir^; D. ^rg^, ^ijwir^, ! ?nj^; Ab.
&c.; G. 4iy{l^, ^g^TT^, ^^5T*T; L. -^ym, ^npft, WJ. Neut. N. Ac.
EELATIVE PRONOUN.
226. The relative is formed by substituting TT y for the initial
letter of the pronoun tad at 220 ; thus,
Tfrf yad, ' who/ ' which.'
MASCULINE.
N. tf^ yas ^ yau ^ ye, 'who' or ' which'
Ac. ^ yam yau ^IT^ ydn
I. Sfa yena ^Tn*T x y dbhydm *fa^ yais
D. ^w yasmai y dbhydm Tfcl^ yebhyas
Ab. TreRTiT yasmdt y dbhydm yebhyas
G. TTC-IT yasya ^nft^ yoyos *frrp^ yeshdm
L. ^fw^ yasmin yayos ^ yeshu
The feminine and neuter follow the fern, and neut. of tat? at 220.
Fern. N. *n yd, ^ ye, in^ yds ; Ac. m^yawz, &c. &c. Neut. N. Ac.
T ye, ^nfti yam' ; the rest like the masculine.
With yas, yd, yat, Sic., cf. Gr. Of, r l} 0, &c., Sk. y corresponding to spiritus asper
in Gr. (see 25).
128 PRONOUNS.
INTERROGATIVE , PRONOUNS.
227. The interrogative differs from the relative in substituting k
instead of y for the initial letter of the pronoun tad at 220 ; and in
making the N. Ac. sing. neut. fal^ instead of Wt(* ', thus, N. masc.
?R(kas, -^ kau, % ke, 'who?' 'which?' 'what?' Ac. q^kam, ' whom?'
&c. N. fern. cfir kd, ^r ke, ^RT^ kds, &c. The N. Ac. neut. are f^w
kirn, ^r ke, SRrftr kdni. Although the real stem of this pronoun is ka,
yet kirn is taken to represent the most general state, and occurs in
a few compounds; such as %H^ * on what account?' 'why?'
a. To the true stem ka may be affixed ti, to form efiTTT kati (quoi), ' how many ?*
The same suffix is added to ta and ya, the proper stems of the third personal
and relative pronouns, to form tati, 'so many' (tot), and yati, 'as many.' These
are thus declined in pi. only :
N. Ac.V. fifcf; I. efifkfa^; Dat. Ab. "SfifTTWR^; G. K?ftirw; L. efifjnj.
Note The Latin quot and tot, which drop the final i, take it again in composi-
tion; as, quotidie, totidem, &c.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
228. The indeclinable suffixes 6id, api, and tana (718), affixed (in
accordance with the rules of Sandhi) to the several cases of the
interrogative pronouns, give them an indefinite signification ; as,
^ kas6id, ' somebody,' ' some one,' * any one,' ' a certain one.'
MASCULINE.
N. "3ifat(^kasdit. 62. wfei^kaudit J?f3i^ kedit, ' some persons '
Ac. fif%lT kuntit. 59. kautit BtftjfT kdns 6it. 53.
I. oh^fai^Aewac&Y efiTTTf^f^ kdbhydh6it ^fifm^kaistit. 62.
D. ^Swfal^kasmaitit - kdbhydhtit ^K^f^t^kebhyasdit
Ab. "n w I P^i r^ kasmdttit. 48. - kdbhydntit - kebhyasdit
G. cFtM T-q n kasyatit '3fi'^\f^ifkayosdit. 62. F"mf%TT keshdndit
L. "Zff&f<%i(Jcasminsdit. 53. - kayoscit ^R^fal^keshudit
Similarly, Fern. Nom. oFTf^, ^rferTf, ofiTf%i^; Ac. cfirf^, &c. : and
Neut. Nom. Ac. fofif^T^' something,' ' anything,' ifffViT, wfrf i5 nr, &c.
229. So also by affixing ^Sfftf; as, Nom. masc. efitsftj (64.0) 'some one,' 'a
certain one,' efiT^fftr, ^T sftl(37, 35); Ac. oRJTftT, &c. ; I.^RTftf, &c. (31);
* Kat (or kad), however (=Latin quod), was the old form, and is, like kirn, found
at the beginning of compounds ; such as kaddid, ' perhaps ; ' kad-artha, ' useless '
('of what use ? ') ; kad-adhvan, ' a bad road ' (' what sort of a road ?').
PRONOUNS. 129
, &c. (37); Ab. SFOTc[q, &c.; G. *RSn, &c.; L. ?RR*rfa, &c. (52).
Norn. fern. cfirfa, &c. ; Ac. KI*Tfa, &c. ; I. SKUlfV, &c. &c. Nora. neut. falTfa
'something,' 'anything,' &c. The sxiffix cana is rarely found, except in Nom.
masc. 3i^JT ' some one,' ' any one ;' and in Nom. neut. f^i^HT ' something.'
230. In the same way interrogative adverbs are made indefinite; thus, from
kati, 'how many?' katicid, a few;' from kadd, when?' kaddfid or kuddcana or
kaddpi, ' at some time ;' from katham, ' how ?' kathandana, ' some how ;' from kva,
' where ?' kvadid or kvdpi, ' somewhere.'
a. 'Whosoever,' 'whatsoever' are expressed by prefixing the relative to the in-
definite; thus, "m ^ftjfT or 1C ^ftsfxi 'whosoever,' *TiT "faf^TT' whatsoever :' or
sometimes to the interrogative; as, ^TT ^FT THHt'T 'by any means whatsoever :'
or sometimes by repeating the relative ; as,
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
231. Possessive pronouns (Pan. iv. 3, 13) are mostly formed by
affixing iya (80. L) to those forms of the personal pronouns, ending
in d y which are used as stems ; thus, fr. T^ ' I,' *^ta madiya, ' mine ;'
fr. 'SPIRIT ' we/ ^KiR<(fa asmadiya, ' our ;' fr. i^ * thou/ H<^M tvadiya,
'thine;' fr. 1R 'he/ TT^hr tadiya, 'his.' Similarly, VR^hl * yours'
(Pan. iv. 2, 115) is formed from bhavad, and not from the regular
stem bhavat (see 233). They are declined like subha at 187: e.g.
Nom. m. M^l^, f. *T^hn, n. *T^hR.
a. Other possessive pronouns differently formed are mdmaka (fern, aki, but
generally ikd) and mdmakina (fern, a), 'mine;' tdvaka (fern, aki) and tdvakma
(fern, d), 'thine;' dsmdka (fern, dki) and dsmdkma (fern, a), 'our;' yaushmdka
(fern, dki) and yaushmdkina (fern, a), 'your.' Mdmaka and those formed with the
suffix ina (80. XLIX) make their feminines in a, and are declined like subha at
187; the others follow siva or subha for masc. and neut., and nadi (105) for fern.
Obs. The genitive case of the personal pronouns is often used as a possessive ;
thus, rf^T "*&', ' his son ;' IT ~^\ ' my daughter.'
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.
232. The oblique cases sing, of ^TTT^ utman, ' soul," self ' (declined
at 146), are used reflexively, in place of the three personal pronouns,
like the Latin ipse.
Thus, dtmdnam (me ipsum) andhdrena hanishydmi, ' I shall kill myself by fasting ;'
dtmdnam (te ipsum) mritavad darsaya, ' show thyself as if dead ;' dtmdnam (se
ipsum) nindati, ' he blames himself.' It is used in the singular, even when it
refers to a plural; as, dtmdnam pummahe, 'we (will) purify ourselves;' abudhair
dtmd paropakaranikritah, foolish people make themselves the tools of others.'
a. The indeclinable pronoun ^fTW^svayam is sometimes joined,
s
130 PRONOUNS.
in the sense of ' self/ to the three personal pronouns ; thus,
' I myself,' &c.
b. ^ sva (suus] is used reflexively, with respect to all three
persons, and may stand for 'my own' (meus), 'thy own' (tuus), 'his
own,' ' our own/ &c. (cf. <7<o?, (r(f)y, cr(f)6v). It often occupies the first
place in a compound, e. g. ^Ppf JTStPfl 'he goes to his own house.'
The Gen. case of u iw^ dtman, or often the simple stem, is used
with the same signification ; as, ^TTrTsft 'Jl? or <iirtfJj TRjfw . It is
used in the singular even when it refers to more than one *. In
the most modern Sanskrit, faT nija is often used in place of ^ and
lj aiTiW^, and from it transferred to Bengali.
^T, in the sense of ' own,' is declined like sarva at 237; as a pro-
nominal the Ab. L. sing. masc. neut. and N. pi. masc. may optionally
follow kubha, at 187 ; thus, N. pi. m. sve or svds in the sense of
*own;' but used substantively in the sense of 'kinsmen' or 'pro-
perty,' sva can only follow $iva or subha (N. pi. m. svds).
c. ^N (f. a), ^"ofifa (f. a), and ^cfi (f. akd or ikd ), declinable like subha,
.sometimes take the place of ^ in the sense of ' own,' 'one's own.'
HONORIFIC OR RESPECTFUL PRONOUN.
233. *T3T^ bhavat, * your Honour,' requiring the 3rd person of the
verb, is declined like dhanavat at 140 ; thus, N. masc. *ni^ bhavdn,
>llffr bhavantau, >Hfl^ bhavantas ; V. T^ ; N. fern. H^fift bhavati,
vr^WT bhavatyau, >RW^ lhavatyas, &c. ; V. >refir. It is constantly
used to denote 'respect,' in place of the 2nd personal pronoun; thus,
' let your Honour go home ' for ' go thou home.'
PRONOUNS OF QUANTITY AND SIMILITUDE.
234. Modifications of the demonstrative, relative, and interroga-
tive pronouns may take the suffix ^iT vat to express ' quantity/ and
y^T drisa, TgQ driksha or ^51^ dris (Nom. masc. neut. drik, fern, drisi) to
express ' similitude/ frequently used as correlative pronouns ; thus,
t\l^t[^tdoat, ii.aar^etdvat, 'so many,' 'so much' (tantus}; m^l\ (quantus) 'as
many/ ' as much' (declined like dhanavat at 140); tn"|^r tddriga or HT^F tddriksha
or TTT^S^ t ddris, 'such like' (tails, T>jA/AfOf); 5rf| ^ etddrisa or ^rfl^9f etddris,
'like this or that/ following subha (187) for masc. and neut. of those ending in
^Tsa and TSf ksha ; and dis, at 181, for masc. and neut. of those in "St s ; and nadi,
* Lassen cites an example (Ramayana II. 64, 28) in which dtman refers to the dual :
Putram dtmanaJfi sprishtvd nipetatuh, 'they two fell down after touching their son.'
PRONOUNS. 131
at 105, for the fern, of all three. Similarly, the correlatives TT^T or qj d Hf or
'as like,' 'how like' (qualis, yXlKOf); ^^f or ^^f or ^SJ^'so like;'
or Sfifr"3r or =fit"^3T ' how like ? ' (qualis ?}
a. Note, that "^T is derived from the root dris, ' to see,' ' appear,' and is in fact
our English 'like,' d being interchangeable with I, and s with k.
b. fanfi^'how much,' and ^Ti^'so much,' are declined like V^RTT (140).
c. A few peculiar pronouns of quantity, some of which are of the nature of
ordinals, are formed with the suffix tha (itha), thought by some to be an old
superlative, or tit ha (80. LXIII) ; e. g. ydvatitha, as, t, am, ' to whatever stage or
degree advanced,' ' how-manieth,' 'as-manieth;' katitha, as, i, am, 'to whatever
degree,' ' how-manieth ;' katitho divasafi, 'what day of the month is it ?' katipaya-
tha, as, i, am, ' advanced to a certain degree.'
PRONOMINALS.
235. There are certain common adjectives, called pronominals ,
which partake of the nature of pronouns, and follow the declension
of tad at 2,2,0; but may also take a vocative case.
236. These are, ^7R ' other ' (but in Veda the neut. may be itaram as well as
itarat, Pan. vii. I, 26, cf. Latin iterum) ; efiflt. ' which of the two ?' (irOTep<j$ for
cjrHT' which of many?' ffiTC' that one of two;' iHW'that one of many;*
'who or which of two;' <tn*( 'who or which of many' (formed by adding
the comparative and superlative suffixes to the various pronominal stems, 195) ;
^"31 'other,' 'another;' *tMii<.*one of two;' and fpn*f 'one of many.' They
are declined like TT^, and make the N. V. Ac. neut. sing, in at ; thus, anyat, itarat,
anyatarat, katarat, katamat, &c. ; but they have a vocative, viz. V. masc. anya,
V. fern, anye, V. neut. anyat, &c. ; the V. du. and plural is like the Nom.
a. With regard to itara, it loses its pronominal declension at the end of Dvandva
compounds, but at the end of Dvandvas (748) it may optionally follow tad in the
Nom. pi. ; e. g. varndsrametards (or -re), ' classes, orders, and others.'
237. There are other pronominals, which make am instead of at
in the N. Ac. neuter. The model of these is ^% sarva, 'all ;' thus,
MASCULINE.
SINGULAB. DUAL. PLURAL.
N. *l%^ sarvas ^rff sarvau ^f sarve
Ac. TH%^ sarvam sarvau ^%T*^ sarvdn
I. ^ftsr sarvena ^f\^[f^sarvdbhydm *l^ sarvais
D. *l%^ sarvasmai sarvdbhydm ^fl^ sarvebhyas
Ab. ^%^RT1T sarvasmdt sarvdbhydm sarvebhyas
G. 4N4-M sarvasya ^^1^ sarvayos flW^T^ sarveshdm
L. ^%f9?f^ sarvasmin sarvayos *nfij sarveshu
V. ^% sarva ^f sarvau ^ sarve
s z
132
PRONOUNS.
N.
Ac.
I.
D.
Ab.
G.
L.
V.
SINGULAR.
sarva
sarvdm
sarvayd
sarvasyai
sarvasyds
sarvasyds
savvasydm
FEMININE.
DUAL.
PLURAI,.
sarvds
sarvds
sarvdbhis
sarvdbhyas
sarvdbhyas
sarvdsdm
>.
sarvdsu
sarvds
N. Ac.
V.
sarvam
sarvn
sarvdm
sarvdbhydm
sarvdbhydm
sarvdbhydm
sarvayos
- sarvayos
sarve
NEUTER.
?nf sarve
sarve
The other cases like the masculine.
238. Like sarva are declined "WI 'both' (properly only found in sing, and pi.,
ubha being used in du. ; the fem. of ubhaya is ubhayf, like nadi] ; f^J 'all ;' *i*rtT
' one of two ' (cKarfpos ) ; ^(^iftf ' one of many ;' TETO meaning ' all,' but not when
it signifies 'equal;' ftn? 'the whole;' W 'other;' TT 'half.' The N. Ac. sing.
neuter of these will end in am, but r^ is optionally r^TT. In N. V. pi. masc. TT is
nHor n**J*l-
t W
Obs. "SW, both' (am&o,. a|U.<pa?), is declined like sarva, but only in du. ; thus,
N. Ac. V. masc. "3W, fem. and neut. "3"*?; I. D. Ab. 3WWRJ G. L. ^H^fft^.
. '5HR 'inferior,' *TC. 'other,' ^HIT 'other,' ^RT 'posterior,' 'west,' T^C
'superior,' 'north,' <ffsjij 'south,' 'right,' ^% 'east,' 'prior,' 1 5T?r^ meaning
either 'outer' or 'inner' (as applied to a garment), ^ 'own' (232), follow sarva,
and optionally subha, at 187, in Abl. Loc. sing. masc. and neut., and Nom. Voc. pi.
masc. ; as, ^rVTSHnf or ^HJUTT, &c. They can only be declined like pronominals
when they denote relative position ; hence dakshindfr (not dakshine) kavayah, 'clever
poets.' Moreover, the pronominal inflexion is optional in certain compounds.
239. JJ5, 'one/ follows sarva, see 200;. f?iffal 'second/ ^KPI 'third/ follow
Jubha (187), and optionally sarva in certain cases, see 208; they make their fem.
in a.
240. 'S?'5J 'a feAv/ ^?V or 'SI^ ' half/ Bfff^^I (fem. d or f) ' several/ ' few/ ' some/
TC^HT ' first/ ^f "last/ ^f (fem. /*), f^rHT (fem. {) ' twofold/ ^t^fil^ (fem. /) ' five-
fold/ and all in -ya and -taya, properly follow siva at 103 ; but may make their
Nom. V. pi. masc. in e; as, ^T^T or W^T^'few/ &c. (see Pan. i. I, 33).
a. ^T'^T'SIj s^JTTTT^, ' one another/ mutual/ make their Nom. Ac. sing. neut.
in am, not at ; and V. in a.
b. In some pronouns the syllable ka or ak is introduced, generally before the
last vowel or syllable, to denote contempt, in the same way that ka is added to
nominal stems; e.g. *T*TRT for TTf 'by me/ <j*tctiifT^ for ^^TlfH^'by yoti/
Similarly, ff^r, fT^f^T, for W$ f ftpB ' all ' (see Pan. v. 3, 71).
VERBS. GENERAL OBSERVATIONS. 133
CHAPTER VI.
VERBS.
GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.
241 . ALTHOUGH the Sanskrit verb (dkhydta, kriyd) offers many
striking and interesting analogies to the Greek, yet our explanations
of its structure are not likely to fall in with the preconceived notions
of the student of Greek grammar.
There are ten tenses and moods (jkdla). Seven of them are of
common occurrence ; viz. i. the Present (technically called ^7 lot,
which, with the other technical names, is applicable also to the
terminations of each tense respectively) ; 2. the Imperfect, some-
times called the First Preterite (<5^ Ian) ; 3 . the Potential or Optative
(fc5^ tin) ', 4. the Imperative (aftT lot) ; 5. the Perfect, sometimes called
the Second Preterite (fc5? lit) ; 6. the First Future (^ lut) ; 7. the
Second Future (c5^ Irit). Three are not so commonly used ; viz.
8. the Aorist, sometimes called the Third Preterite (op- lun) ; 9. the
Precative, also called the Benedictive (^nfijrt f?5^ dsir lin) ; 10. the
Conditional ("c^T Irin). There is also an Infinitive, and several Par-
ticiples. Of these, the Present, the three Past tenses, and the two
Futures belong to the Indicative mood. The Imperative, Potential,
Precative, and Conditional (see 242) are moods susceptible of
various times ; but, as there is only one form for each, it can lead
to no embarrassment to call them tenses, and to arrange them indis-
criminately with the tenses of the Indicative.
The first four tenses, viz. the Present, Imperfect, Potential, and
Imperative, are frequently called Special tenses*, because in these
each of the ten classes of roots has a special structure of its own (as
will be explained at 248).
a. Obs. The ancient Sanskrit of the Veda is more rich in grammatical forms
than the later or classical Sanskrit. There is a Vedic Subjunctive mood, technically
called c*^ let, which comprises under it a Present, Imperfect, and Aorist ; moreover,
the Vedic Potential and Imperative are thought to have distinct forms for various
tenses. The Vedic Infinitive, too, has ten or eleven different forms (see 459. a).
* In the previous editions of this Grammar these tenses were called ' Conjuga-
tional.' I have thought it better to bring the present edition into harmony with
other Grammars by adopting Bopp's designation of ' Special,'
134 VERBS. GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.
242. Although the three past tenses are used without much distinction, yet it
should be observed, that they properly express different degrees of past time.
The Imperfect (anadyatana-bhuta) corresponds in form to the Imperfect of Greek
verbs, and properly has reference to an event done at some time recently past, but
before the current day. It may denote action past and continuing, or it may be
used like the Greek Aorist. The Perfect (paroksha-bhuta) is said to have reference
to an event completely done before the present day at some remote period, unper-
ceived by or out of sight of the narrator ; it answers in form to the Greek Perfect,
but may also be used like the Aorist. The Aorist refers to an event done and past
at some indefinite period, whether before or during the current day ; it corresponds
in form and sense to the Greek ist and 2nd Aorist, and sometimes to the Pluper-
fect *. Again, the two Futures properly express, the First, definite, the Second,
indefinite futurity f: the Second, however, is the most used, and answers to the
Greek Future. The Potential or Optative may generally be rendered in English
by some one of the auxiliaries 'may,' 'can,' 'would,' 'should,' 'ought.' It is
said to denote 'command,' 'direction,' 'expression of wish,' ' enquiry,' 'condition,'
' supposition' (sambhdvana, Pan. in. 3, 161). See Syntax, 879. The Conditional (or
Imperfect of the Future) is occasionally used after the conjunctions yadi and ced,
if:' it has an augment like the Imperfect and Aorist, and ought on that account
to be classed with the tenses of the Indicative (see 891). The Precative or Bene-
dictive is a tense sometimes used in praying and blessing (dsishi). It is a modifi-
cation of the Potential. There is no tense exactly equivalent to the Pluperfect in
Sanskrit, although the form of some Aorists (in a few primitive verbs, and in verbs
of Cl. 10 and Causals) resembles that of the Greek Pluperfect by taking both aug-
ment and reduplication : the sense of this tense, however, may often be expressed
by the Past Indeclinable Participle or by the Past Passive Participle ; as, tasminn
apakrdnte, ' after he had departed.' See Syntax, 840, 899. a.
a. According to some, the form of the Imperfect and Aorist, which remains after
rejecting the augment of these tenses in the Indicative, and which is especially
used after the particles *TT md and *TT f&md sma (see 884. Obs. and 889), ought to
be called the Subjunctive Imperfect and Subjunctive Aorist.
b. The Infinitive generally has an Active, but is capable of a Passive significa-
tion (see Syntax, 867872).
* The fact is, that the three past tenses are not very commonly used to repre-
sent the completeness of an action. This is generally done by employing the Past
Passive Participle with an inst. case ; or by adding vat to the Past Pass. Part., and
combining it with the Present tense of as, ' to be ;' as, uktavdn asmi, ' I have said.'
See Syntax, 897.
t The First Future (lut) is said to be an-adyatane, i. e. to be so far definite as to
denote what will happen at a future period, not in the course of the current day ;
as, ^ TWfSiR ' to-morrow I shall go ' (Pan. m. 3, 15); whereas the Second Future
may refer to immediate futurity ; as, 'WIT OT*feiT& ^ ^T JTftTOTtH 'this very evening
or to-morrow I shall be going.'
VERBS. GENERAL OBSERVATIONS. 135
243. Every tense has three numbers, singular, dual, and plural.
To each tense belong two sets of Active terminations ; one for the
Active voice (properly so called), the other for a kind of Middle or
Reflexive voice. The former of these voices is called by Indian
grammarians Parasmai-pada ('word* directed to another'), because
the action is supposed to be Transitive, or to pass parasmai, * to
another (object) ;' the latter is called Atmane-pada (' word* directed
to one's self), because the action is supposed to refer dtmane, * to
one's self.' This distinction, however, is not always observed, and we
often find both Parasmai and Atmane employed indifferently for
Transitive verbs.
Some verbs, however, are conjugated only in the j^tmane-pada,
especially when they are Intransitive, or when the direct fruit of
the action accrues to the agent (see the distinction of Uddttetah and
Anuddttetafy at 75. c), or when particular prepositions are used ; thus,
Mud and ru6 meaning ' to be pleased,' ' please one's self;' bhuj meaning ' to eat '
(not 'to protect ') ; da, ' to give,' with a prefixed, meaning ' to give to one's self,' ' to
take,' are restricted to the A'tmane-pada. Sometimes, when a verb takes both
Padas, the A'tmane, without altering the idea expressed by the root, may be used
to direct the action in some way towards the agent; thus, patati means 'he cooks,'
\mipa6ate, 'he cooks for himself:' yajati, 'he sacrifices;' yajate, 'he sacrifices for
himself:' namati, ' he bends ;' namate, ' he bends himself :' darsayati (Causal), ' he
shews;' darsayate, he shews himself,' appears:' kdrayati, 'he causes to make;'
kdrayate, 'he causes to be made for himself:' and ydt, 'to ask,' although employing
both Padas, is more commonly used in the A'tmane, because the act of asking
generally tends to the advantage of the asker. (See this subject more fully ex-
plained at 786.)
a. Passive verbs are conjugated in the Atmane-pada. Indeed,
in all the tenses, excepting the first four, the Passive is generally
undistinguishable from the Atmane-pada of the primitive verb.
But in the four Special tenses, viz. the Present, Imperfect, Potential,
and Imperative (unlike the Greek, which exhibits an identity between
the Middle and Passive voices in those tenses), the Sanskrit Passive,
although still employing the Atmane-pada terminations, has a special
* Pada is an inflected word as distinguished from an uninflected root (Pan. i.
4, 14). The term pada has here reference to the scheme of terminations only; so
that in this sense there are only two voices in Sanskrit, and they are often used
indiscriminately. Although the Atmane-pada has occasionally a kind of Middle
signification, yet it cannot be said to correspond entirely to the Greek Middle.
136 VERBS. GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.
structure of its own, common to all verbs, and distinct from the
conjugational form of the Atmane-pada in all but the fourth class*.
Thus the Greek aKwta makes for both the Middle and Passive of those four
tenses, ist sing. aKOVOftai, rjKOVC[j.yv, aKovoip-yv, aKOvov (2nd sing.) But the
Sanskrit sru, ' to hear,' makes for the conjugational form of the Atmane, 3J1F,
^Hljfoj?, ^<jql*{, T3J1P?; while for the Passive it is ^7, ^T^TO, ^^^j "WQ.
244. As in nouns the formation of a nominal stem out of a root
precedes declension, the root generally requiring some change or addi-
tion before the case-terminations can be affixed, so in verbs the forma-
tion of a verbal stem out of a root must precede conjugation. Again,
as in nouns every case has its own proper termination, so in verbs
each of the three persons, in the three numbers of every tense, has
a termination (vibhakti), one for the Parasmai-pada, and one for the
Atmane-pada, which is peculiarly its own. Moreover, as in nouns,
so in verbs, some of the terminations may be combined with servile
or indicatory letters, which serve to aid the memory, by indicating
that where they occur peculiar changes are required in the root.
Thus the three terminations which belong to the ist, 2nd, and 3rd
persons of the Present tense, Parasmai-pada, respectively, are mi, si,
ti ; and these are combined with the letter P (miP, siP, tiP), to
indicate that roots belonging to the second and third groups of
classes (see 258, 259, and 290) must be modified in a particular way,
before these terminations are affixed.
The annexed tables exhibit, ist, the scheme of terminations for
Parasmai and Atmane-pada, with the most useful indicatory letters
(denoted by Roman capitals), in all the tenses, the four Special tenses
being placed first ; 2ndly, the same scheme with the substitutions
required by certain classes of roots (the numerical figures denoting
the classes in which these substitutions occur, see 257).
245. TERMINATIONS OF SPECIAL TENSES.
PARASMAI-PADA. A'TMANE-PADA.
Present tense.
SING. DUAL. PLURAL.
1J e '^ vahe *fi? make
\ -N -s
TS se ^?T'T athe V% dhve
s ^ -\
?T te Wrf ate ^vjf ante
* For this reason we prefer to regard the Passive, not as a Voice, but as a distinct
derivative from the root. See 461. a.
VERBS. TERMINATIONS. 137
Imperfect or First Preterite (requiring the augment a, 251).
2.
3-
i.
2. f^Ai
3-
rfH tarn
TTTT tdm
Tma ^i
Kta
vjr^are IT to,
Potential or Optative,
idma
vahi
dthdm
Tmr*T ydtam
{vahi
{ydthdm
' mahi
JeJJT dhvam
^HiT anta
tmaAt
rT tifa
Imperative.
TPT
tdm
^THITH a'^Aarn m'T dhvam
TERMINATIONS OF GENERAL TENSES.
Perfect or Second Preterite (requiring reduplication, 252).
Tma
athus ^T a se ^TT^ a^Ae
Future or Definite Future.
tdsmas
i . rTTft*? to'smi rtl*j^ tdsvas
2. fTTftl fast TTTOT^^asMas TTl^I tdstha
3. TTT #a TTTU ^araw
(TT? /a'Ae
ITT*S^ tdsvahe
iTJ^j'il tdsdthe
cTPCi
tdsmahe
Second Future or Indefinite Future.
sydvahe
syethe
syafi
sya/a
^1^
syase
sydmahe
^I|ie[ syadhve
^.
^Hrt syante
Aorist or 7%zrrf Preterite (requiring the augment a, 251).
fa ^f^ svahi wf? smaAi
eTR dhvam fe*0
Precative or Benedictive.
i . ^TT^W y asam ^l*a y asva TT9? ydsma
?ftn siya
simahi
siydsthdm
^ft? sisAfa ^ftq r W l H siydstdm
Conditional (requiring the augment a, 251).
^1 sye tHl =! fi$ sydvahi
WffTHsya/am
sydmahi
yadh
^PJT synntn
138
VERBS. TERMINATIONS.
246. The same terminations, with the substitutions required in certain classes.
TERMINATIONS OF SPECIAL TENSES.
PABASMAI-PADA. ATMANE-PADA.
Present tense.
PERS. SING.
1. miP
2. siP
3- P
DUAL. PLURAL.
vas mas
thus tha
tas
nti i, 4, 6, 10.
(2).
BUI I*.
{i i, 4, 6, 10. f
2,3,7; 5,8,9. I
DUAL.
vahe
PLURAL.
mane
se
te
\ithe 1,4,6,10.
1 -j o^fle
Ia/Ae 2 ,3,7;5,8,9. L
{2/61,4,6,10. fwfei,4,6,io.
ate 2,3,7; 5,8.9- l-afc 2,3,755,8,9.
An initial s, as in si, se, &c., is liable to become sh by 70.
Imperfect or First Preterite (requiring the augment a, 251).
I'm i, 4 , 6, 10. v '-..I
W 2 , 3 , 7;5 ,8, 9 .l raM.,,4,6,,.. |
/am /a
/a*w
n 1,4,6,10.
aw 2, 7; 5, 8, 9.
thds
dhvam
ta
\itdm 1,4,6,10. Jfttai,4,6,io.
La^awi 2,3,7; 589' ' <rfa2 37i5At!
Potential or Optative.
In i, 4, 6, jo.
I.
2. w
3. it
I. yarn
3.
3.
yus
2, 3, 7; 5,8,9.
yava ydma
ydtam ydta
ydtdm yus
In all the classes.
1. zya
2. #M*
I. dntP
i, 4,6,10; 5, 8.
^2,3; 5,9.
dhi (dhi) 2,3,7.
after ana 9.
2.
amaP
ta
Imperative.
aiP
/aw i
b
tntu 1,4,6,10.
,7; 5,8,9.
3 (2).
iydthdm
iydtdm
dvahaiP
imahi
idhvam
iran
dmahaiP
sva
tdm
4,6,io. \ ,
, , 1 dhvam
L aMawi 2,3,7; 5,8,9. L
J itdm i, 4,6, 10. J ntdm i , 4, 6, 10.
I dtdm 2, 3, 7; 5, 8, 9. 1 atdm 2,3,7; 5.8,9-
VERBS. TERMINATIONS.
139
In cl. 9, hi is dropped after dna, substituted for the conjugations] ni of the 2nd
sing. Impv., Parasmai, in the case of roots ending in consonants. A form TfTff tat
(cf. Latin to, Greek TO>) may be substituted for hi and tu, and even for ta, to imply
benediction, chiefly used in the Vedas.
TERMINATIONS OF GENERAL TENSES.
Perfect or Second Preterite (requiring reduplication, 252).
1. aP *iva
2. it ha or thai? athus
3. aP atus
a
us
e
*ishe
i. tdsmi
tdsvas
tdsmas
take
2. tdsi
tdsthas
tdstha
tdse
3-td
tdrau
tdras
td
*ivahe *imahe
at he *idhve or *i$hve
ate ire
* Only eight roots, viz. sru, stu, dru, sru, kri, bhri, sri, vri, reject the initial
* from the terminations marked with * ; and of these eight all but vri (meaning
to cover') necessarily reject it also in the 2nd sing. Parasmai. See 369372.
First Future or Definite Future.
tdsvahe tdsmahe
tdsdthe tddhve
tdrau tdras
Many roots prefix to the above terminations; thus, I. itdsmi, 2. itasi, &c.
?T^ lengthens this i ; ^ vri and all roots in long ri optionally do so.
Second Future or Indefinite Future.
sydvahe sydmahe
syethe syadhve
syete syante
Many roots prefix i to the above terminations; thus, i. ishydmi (70), 2. ishyasi,
&c. IT% lengthens this i ; ^ and all roots in long ri optionally do so.
Aorist or Third Preterite (requiring the augment a, 251).
FORM I. Regular terminations of the scheme.
i. sydmi
sydvas
sydmas
sye
2. syasi
syathas
syatha
syase
3. syati
syatas
syanti
syate
i.sam sva sma
2. sis stamortam staorta
.sit stdmortdm sus
si svahi smahi
sthdsorthds sdthdm dhvam
sta or ta sdtdm sata
^T dhvam is used for dhvam after any other vowel but a or a, or after ^ $ imme-
diately preceding.
The same terminations with * prefixed, except in 2nd and 3rd sing.,
where initial s is rejected.
ishvahi ishmahi
ishdthdm idhvam
ishdtdm ishata
^^{idhvam may be used for idhvam when a semivowel or h immediately precedes.
<JT^ lengthens the i throughout ; ^ and all roots in long r{ optionally do so in Atm.
T <Z
i.isham
ishva
ishma
ishi
2. IS
ishtam
ishta
ishthds
3. it
ishtdm
ishus
ishta
14:0 VERBS. TEKMINATIONS.
FORM II. Terminations resembling those of the Imperfect.
1. am ava orva ama or ma
2. as or s atam or tarn ata or ta
3. at or t atdm or tdm an or its
e or i dvahi amain
athds ethdm or dthdm adhvam
ata etdm or dtdm anta or ata
Precative or Benedictive.
i.yasam yasva yasma
2. yds ydstam ydsta
3. ydi ydstdm ydsus
siya sivahi simahi
sishthds siydsthdm sidhvam
sishta siydstdm siran
sye sydvahi sydmahi
syathds syethdm syadhvam
syata syetdm syanta
Many roots prefix * to the Atmane, but not to the Parasmai, of the above ; thus,
i. ishiya, &c. U? lengthens the i in this tense also, but no other root can do so.
iftel^sidhvam is used for Tfts^T sidhvam after any other vowel but a or a, and
optionally after the prefixed i, when immediately preceded by a semivowel or h
(see 442).
Conditional (requiring the augment a, 251).
1. syam sydva sydma
2. syas syatam syata
3. syat syatam syan
Many roots prefix i to the above terminations throughout; thus, i. ishyam, 2.
ishyas, &c. Jf^ lengthens this i; ^ and all roots in long n optionally do so.
247. Those terminations which are marked with P will be called
the P terminations. They are technically designated Pit (i. e. having
P for their z/), and are as follow :
Present, Parasmai, i, 2, 3 sing. Impf., Par., i, 2, 3 sing. Impv., Par., i, 3 sing.,
i du., i pi. ; Atm., i sing., I du., i pi. In these, however, the P is indicatory only
with reference to certain classes of roots (see 244), but in Per/., Par., the indicatory
P in i, 2, 3 sing, applies to all the classes.
Obs. Instead of NaP, thaP, NaP (which are from Vopa-deva), Panini gives
NaL, thriL, NaL ; and this L, like the P, has reference to accent.
a. Sometimes, however, it will be convenient to adopt Bopp's
expression, * Strong forms/ hi speaking of the form assumed by the
stem before the P terminations, these terminations being themselves
called Weak.
b. In fact the P or Pit terminations are an-uddtta, 'unaccented ;' and when these
are added, the stem on which the accent falls is called Strong. In other cases the
accent is on the terminations, and the stem is then Weak and unaccented.
c. The terminations of the first four or Special tenses are called by Panini sdrva-
dhdtuka, 'belonging to the full form of the verbal stem,' which name is also applied
. to suffixes like sdna6 (i. e. -ana), fatri (i. e. -at), having an indicatory s (but not to
Vikaranas like sap, &c.) The term drdhadhdluka, ' belonging to the half or shorter
VERBS. TERMINATIONS. 141
form of the verbal stem,' is given to the terminations of the Perfect (lit), and Pre-
cative (dsir lin), as well as to certain distinctive additions to the root before the
terminations of the remaining four tenses (such as tds and sya in the Futures and
Conditional, s in the Aorist, yds and siy in the Precative), and therefore practically
to the terminations of all the six General tenses.
d. If we examine these terminations, we shall find that they are composed of
two distinct elements, one marking person, number, and voice ; the other, mood
and tense. The terminations in which the former element prevails may be called
simple, and belong to the Present, Imperfect, Imperative, Perfect, and 2nd form
of the Aorist ; those which include the second may be called compound, and are
peculiar to the other tenses. Thus the terminations of the Potential consist of i
or t or yd as characterizing the mood, and of am, s, t, va, lam, turn, &c., as marking
person, number, and voice. So, also, in the 2nd Future the syllable sya prefixed
to all the terminations, characterizes the Future tense, while the mi, si, ti, vas, thas,
tas, &c., mark person, number, and voice. If, then, such initial parts of every
termination as mark mood or tense were left out, an examination of the remaining
parts would shew that the Present and Imperfect are the prototypes of the termina-
tions of all the other tenses, that is to say, that the formation of the terminations
of every other tense may be referred back to one or other of these two. The Present
tense may in this way be connected with the two Futures. These three tenses agree
in shewing a certain fulness of form, which is wanting in most of those connected
with the Imperfect. The terminations of the Perfect, however, partake of the cha-
racter of both the Present and Imperfect. In the A'tmane-pada they very closely
resemble the Present. Many of them exhibit the same fulness as that tense, while
some of the other terminations of the Perfect shew even more lightness than those
of the Imperfect *. It should be observed, too, that the terminations of the Im-
perative, though evidently connected with the Imperfect, are in some instances
even more full than those of the Present.
e. Although comparative grammarians have bestowed much labour on investi-
gating the origin of Sanskrit verbal terminations, the only point that may be
asserted with probability is, that they stand in a certain relationship to the pro-
nominal stems ma, tva, sa, ta. The m of the first persons is related to the stem ma
(mad, 218) ; the t, th, sv, s, of the second persons, to the stem tva of the second
personal pronoun (Gr. ere) ; and the t, of the third person, to the stem ta. We may
also observe a community of character between the termination nti of the 3rd pi.
and the plural of neuter nouns like dhanavat (dhanavanti). But whether the v in
the dual is related to a pronominal stem va occurring in d-vdm, va-yam , whether
the s of the dual and plural terminations is the result of blending different pro-
nominal stems (e. g. vas=va-si, mas=ma-si, ' I and thou ') ; whether the termi-
nations of the A'tmane-pada are formed from those of the Parasmai-pada by guna-
tion or by composition of the latter with other stems, these are questions which
* Comparative grammar, however, has established that these terminations are
to be referred to the same, source as the fuller ones.
1 42 VERBS. TERMINATIONS.
cannot be determined with actual certainty. The subject, however, is fully and ably
discussed in Schleicher's Compendium of Comparative Grammar, 268-286.
/. Whatever the exact state of the case may be, the student may aid his memory
by noting that the letter m generally enters into the ist sing. Par. ; s into the 2nd
sing. Par. and Atm. ; and t into the 3rd sing. du. and pi. Par. and Atm. of all the
tenses. Moreover, that the letter v occurs in the ist du., m in the ist pi. of all
the tenses, and dhv in every 2nd pi. Atmane. In the Impf. and Pot. Atm., and in
the Perf. Par., th is admitted, instead of s, into the and sing. ; and in the 2nd pi.
of the last tense, th has been dropped, owing to the influence of the heavy redupli-
cation. For the same reason the m and t are dropped in the ist and 3rd sing. Perf.
Observe also When the ist du. Par. is vas, the and and 3rd end in as (except the
3rd du. ist Put.), and the ist pi. is mas. When the ist du. Par. is va, the 2nd
and 3rd end in tarn, tdm (except in the Perf.), and the ist pi. in ma. When the ist
du. Atm. is vahe, the ist pi. is make, and the last letter of the remaining termina-
tions is generally e. When the ist du. Atm. is vahi, the 2nd and 3rd end in dm:
the ist pi. is maid, and the 2nd pi. is dhvam.
g. The frequent occurrence of m in the ist sing., of s in the 2nd, of t in the 3rd,
of mas and ma in the ist pi., of ta in the 2nd pi., and of ant in the 3rd pi., suggests
a comparison with the Gr. and Lat. verb. We may remark, that m, the characteristic
of the ist per. sing., is suppressed in the Pres. Indie. Act. of all Gr. verbs except
those in [Jit (asmi=tfjii, Dor. [*(*.! for eoyx/, daddmi = $'i$<i>l*.i), and also in Lat.
verbs (except sum and inquam) ; but u and o answer to the Sk. a of bhardmi=<f>fpw,
fero. In the Gr. Middle and Passive, the fJi-t, which originally belonged to all
Active verbs, becomes pctt ; while the Sanskrit, on the other hand, here suppresses
the m, and has e for at ; bhare (for Mara-me)=</>e/30jua/. In the Impf., Gr. has v
for Sk. and Lat. mute m, because ft. is not allowed to be final in Greek ; atarpam^z
Tpirov, adaddm = Qio<6V, astrinavam tVTOpvvv, avaham-=.vehebam. Gr. has /Xf
in the ist sing. Opt. ; and in verbs in /&, v takes the place of the mute m of Sk.
and Lat. ; tlma, bhareyam=<f>(poip,i, feram ; dadydm^OlOoiyv, dem ; tishtheyam=
iGTaiyv, stem. In the Gr. First Aorist, m is suppressed, so that Sanskrit adiksham
(Aor.)=e&6/; but not in the and Aor., so that addm='f$Q)V. In the Perf., Sk. a
=Gr. a, tutopa=TTV<f>a. In the Gr. Middle and Passive Futures, m is retained,
but not in the Active ; ddsydmi=. Owtrct), dekshydmi = 0ii;ci) > ddsye=. 0<a<rofJ.ai. As
to the ist per. pi., Sk. mas of the Pres. is jtxev (for [J-ff) in Gr., and mus in Lat. ;
tarpd-masTfp'Tro-fJ'W, sarpd-mas^epnt-fAtv, serpi-mus; dad-masOiOO-pev, da-
mns; tishthd-mas=lO'Ta-[J.ev, sta-mus. The Atmane mahe answers to Gr. /xe&x;
dad-mahe=.owO-p.9a. As to the other tenses, in Impf. ist pi. abhard-ma=e<f> po-
pe v, fereba-mus ; avahd-ma veheba-mus; adad-ma = Oi$0-fMV' ) abhard-mahi-=.
In the Pot. ist p\.bhare-ma=(f>poi-fJ.V (-[*$), fera-mus; dadydma=
^.e?), demus; dad(-mahi=$J)Oi-t*.()a. In 2nd Put. ddsyd-mas=$va'0-
/txev, dekshyd-mas=.Oti^Q-/J-V. In 2nd pers. sing. Act., the characteristic s has been
preserved in all three languages ; thus, in the Present, Sk. asi (for original assi)=
e<r<7/, es ; dadd-si = $i$Wf, das; bhara-si = <f>pi$, fers; vahasivehis. In the
Atmane, Sk. se (for sa i, by 32) answers exactly to Gr. ?cu of verbs in fJ-t (tishtha-
VERBS. TERMINATIONS. 143
se=t<rra-(rai). In other Gr. verbs, cr has been rejected, and cat contracted into fj,
something in the way of Sk. (rvnry for rvTrre-aai). In 2nd du. thas=Gr. rov,
and in 2nd pi. tha = re and tis ; bhara-thas=<f}pe-TOV', tishtha-tha = terra-re,
sta-tis ; bhara-tha=(f>epf-T,fer-tis. In 2nd pi. Atm. bhara-dhve=(f>fp-(7d. As
V
to the other tenses, in the 2nd sing. Impf. atarpas=erepir($, avahas=vehebas, Sic.
So also, tam=rov, adat-tam=ebfto-rov, ta=re, adat-ta=ewo-re. In A'tm. thds
is found for sds in 2nd sing. Impf. and Pot.; hence abhara-thds=e<f)(pe-o-Q, adat-
thds = e/&o-<70, dad-ithds =. $t $-Gt (o") o. In 2nd sing. Pot. tishthes = KTTOtnjf, stes ;
dadyds=$iooiy$,des; vahes=zvehas ; bhares=z<pepot$,feras: in 2nd du. bhare-tam=
<f>pot-rov: \n2nd.pLtishtheta=i<rraiv)Tf,stetis; dadydta^tftotyretdetis; bhareta
^=(f>epoiT ) feratis. In 2nd sing. Impv. hi and dhi answer to Gr. Ot. Dhi was originally
universal in Sk. (see 291), as in Gr. verbs in [At ', e-dhi=i<7-Qi, vid-dhi = i<7-di,
de-hi Qi$o-6i, fru-dhi=iK\ii-di. Many verbs drop the termination hi both in
Gr. and Sk. ; as, HTL= </>e/3e, and compare btiKW with 6inu, &c. In 2nd du. Impv.
tam=rov, and ta=rf. In Impv. A'tm. sa=the old form cro ; bhara-sva=(f>ep-<ro
(old form of </>e'/?ou); dat-sva=^i^o-cro ; dthdm = ecr6ov, &c. In Perf. the tha of
the 2nd sing. = Latin sti; dad-itha = dedi-sti, tasthi-tha = steti-sti, tutodi-tha=.
tutudi-sti. In the Aor. arfas=eba>f, avdkshis = vexisti. In the 3rd pers. sing.
Active, Gr. has dropped the characteristic t (except in eo"n=Sk. asti, Lat. est) ;
bharati=<f>fpf(r)i,fert; vahati=zvehit. Verbs in /A/ have changed t to s; daddti-=.
(for $I$OI)TI). In Atm. bharate=.(f)ptTai. In Impf. avahat = vehebat,
= f(f>prQ. In Pot. bharet=(f>epoi, dadydt=^^ot^. In Impv. bhara-tu
or bhara-tdt=(f>pe-TW,fer-to, In Perf. tutopa=Trv(pe. In Aor. avdksMt=vexit,
adikshata=e$e%aTO. As to 3rd pi., in the above tenses, bharanti=:<f>epov<7i,ferunt;
vahanti=vehunt ; bharante=.<pepovrat ; dadatiOtOoiHTl J tisht hunt i=stant ; bha-
} bharantu=ferunto; abharan fipepov
248. The terminations exhibited in the preceding tables are sup-
posed to be applicable to all verbs, whether Primitive or Derivative :
and as in nouns, so in verbs, the theory of Indian grammarians is,
that before these terminations can be affixed, a stem must be de-
veloped out of a root, according to certain rules which vary for the
first four tenses in ten different ways, according as a root belongs
to one or other of ten classes. Accordingly, ten special rules are
propounded for forming verbal stems out of roots in the first four
tenses, which are therefore called the four Special tenses ; while all
verbs are arranged under ten classes, according to the form of the
stem required by one or other of these rules. In the other tenses
there is one general rule for forming the stem, applicable to all verbs
of whatever class, and these tenses are therefore called General.
144 VERBS. TEN CONJUGATIONAL RULES FOR FORMING
Hence the ten classes of roots are sometimes regarded as following
one or other of ten conjugations; and the four tenses, which alone
are affected by these conjugational rules (viz. the Present, Imperfect,
Potential, and Imperative), are sometimes called the conjugational
tenses. It is evident, however, that all Sanskrit roots, of whatever
class, follow one general conjugation for the majority of the tenses
of the Primitive verb, although they require a special formation of
stem depending on the class of each root for four of the tenses.
249. We begin by giving a brief summary of the ten rules for the
forming the stem of the four Special tenses in the ten classes of roots,
according to the Indian order of the ten classes.
Obs. Native grammarians distinguish the ten classes of verbs by the name of
the first root in their lists ; e. g. cl. i. Bhv-ddi, i. e. Bhu, &c., or the class of roots
beginning with bhu. Similarly, cl. 2. Ad-ddi ; cl. 3. Juhoty-ddi (i. e. the Hu class) ;
cl. 4. Div-ddi; cl. 5. Sv-ddi (i.e. the Su class); cl. 6. Tud-ddi; cl. 7. Rudh-ddi;
cl. 8. Tan-ddi ; cl. 9. Kry-ddi (i. e. the Kri class) ; cl. 10. Cur-ddi.
Cl. i. Gunate the vowel of the root (unless it be ^i a, or a long
vowel not final, or a short vowel followed by a double consonant,
28) before every termination of the four Special tenses, and affix
^ a lengthened to ^TT a before initial m* and v to the root thus
gunated.
The accent is on the vowel of the root, unless it be thrown on the augment.
Cl. 2. Gunate the vowel of the root (if capable of Guna, as in
the last) before those terminations only which are marked with P
in the scheme at 246. Before all the other terminations the original
vowel of the root must be retained.
The accent rests on the vowel of the root, but only when the P terminations are
added. In other cases it rests on the first vowel of the Non-P terminations.
Cl. 3. Reduplicate the initial consonant and vowel (see 252) of
the root, and gunate the radical but not the reduplicated vowel
before the P terminations only, as in cl. a.
The accent rests on the first syllable of the stem before the Non-P terminations,
and before the P terminations beginning with a vowel.
Cl. 4. Affix *( ya lengthened to in yd before initial m* and v
to the root, the vowel of which is generally left unchanged.
The accent is on the vowel of the root, not on the ya (cf. 461).
* But not before m final, the termination of the ist sing. Impf. Parasmai.
THE STEM IN THE FOUR SPECIAL TENSES. 145
Cl. 5. Affix TJ nu to the root, and gunate this nu into no before
the P terminations only.
In this class, as well as in cl. 8 and 9, the accent is on the inserted Vikarana
(250. b) before the P terminations, and in other cases it rests on the first vowel
of the Non-P terminations.
Cl. 6. Affix ^ a lengthened to ^TT d before initial m* and v to
the root, which in other respects generally remains unchanged.
The absence of gunation of the radical vowel results from the accent being on
the Vikarana a (250. 6).
Cl. 7. Insert tj na between the vowel and final consonant of
the root before the P terminations, and ^ n before the other termi-
nations.
Observe the peculiarity of this conjugation that the conjugational na or n is
inserted into the middle of the root, and not affixed.
The accent is on the inserted na before the P terminations ; in other cases it
rests on the Non-P terminations.
Cl. 8. Affix g 1 u to the root, and gunate this u into o before the
P terminations only.
Obs. As nine out of the ten roots in this class end in n or re, cl. 8 will resemble
cl. 5.
Cl. 9. Affix tn nd to the root before the P terminations ; ft ni
before all the others, except those beginning with vowels, where only
r^ n is affixed.
Cl. 10. Gunate the radical vowel (if capable of Guna) throughout
all the persons of all the tenses, and affix ^nr aya lengthened to
1 3nn aya before initial m* and v to the root thus gunated.
The accent rests on the first vowel of the inserted aya.
250. It will appear, from a cursory examination of the above
rules, that the object of nearly all of them is to insert either a
vowel sometimes alone, sometimes preceded by y or n or a letter
of some kind between the modified root and the terminations. The
ist, 4th, 6th, and loth agree in requiring that the vowel, which is
immediately to precede the terminations, shall be a or a. The snd,
3rd, and 7th agree in inserting no vowel between the final of the
root and the terminations. The 5th, 8th, and 9th agree in interposing
either w, a, or i after the letter n.
a. Any letters or syllables required to be inserted by the above
* But not before m final, the termination of the ist sing. Impf. Parasmai.
U
146 VERBS. THE AUGMENT.
ten rules, are inserted only in the four Special tenses (except only
in the case of cl. 10). In the other six tenses the stem is formed
according to one general rule for all roots of whatever class, whence
their name of General tenses. But in these also, some letter or
syllable has to be inserted (the only exception being in the Perfect).
b. This inserted conjugational vowel, consonant, or syllable is usually called the
vikarana. Panini's technical names for the ten insertions between the modified root
and terminations under each of the ten classes, in regular order, are sap, sapo luk,
s"lu, syan, snu, sa, snam, u, snd, ni6 ; the last, however, does not strictly contain the
vikarana, the real insertion in cl. 10 (and in Causals) being ay a (represented by
the i of ni6). The above Vikaranas (with ni6) hold good before Krit sufilxes con-
taining an indicatory s (such as satri or 6dna6, see 247. c). In Passives and Neuters
the insertion is technically called yak (leaving ya), to distinguish it from the Vika-
rana syan of cl. 4. With regard to the six General tenses, the Perfect has strictly
no vikarana (the almost universally inserted i of it being called an augment). But
in verbs belonging to cl. 10, in Derivative verbs (such as Causals), and in a few
Primitive verbs like iksh, the syllable dm is added to the verbal stem. With regard
to the other General tenses the Agama it (or inserted i) is by no means universally
interposed, but certain letters or syllables are regarded as additions to the root
distinct from the terminations; that in the ist Future is technically called tdsi
(=.tds) ; that in the 2nd Future and Conditional is sya ; that in the Aorist is called
6li (for which either si6 or ksa or 6an or an or tin are always substituted) ; that
in the Precative is ydsut (= yds) for Par., and siyut (= siy] for Atm. ; that in the
Vedic Let is called sip.
THE AGAMA OR AUGMENT "W a.
351. In classical Sanskrit (but not always in Vedic) the augment
^T a (called dgama, * increase ') is prefixed to the stems of the Imper-
fect, Aorist, and Conditional tenses, and when the stem begins with
^T a or ^n a, the augment blends with these vowels into ^rr a by 31.
(So in Gr. e and e become tj in yyeipov, &c.)
a. But when the augment a is prefixed to stems beginning with
the vowels % i, T u, and ^ ri (short or long), it blends with them
into ^ az, ^ au, ^nr dr (against 32, which would require the result
to be e, o, ar).
Thus the stem ^5 i66ha (fr. rt. ish, 'to wish') in 3rd sing. Impf. becomes ^oafl
ai66hat ; the stem "3!^ uha becomes w^TT auhata (Impf. Atm.); the stem ^IH
ridhno becomes ^JTHTlI drdhnot ; the stem '5nT3' okha becomes vTi^n aukhat.
b. When a root is compounded with one or more prepositions,
the augment is placed between the preposition or prepositions and
VERBS. REDUPLICATION. 147
the root, e. g. anv-atishtham (fr. anu-sthd), upa-sam-aharat (fr. upa-
sam-hri).
When ^s is prefixed to the root ^ kri, after certain prepositions (see 53. c), the
augment is placed before the s, e. g. sam-askarot.
Obs. The augment a is thought by some to have been originally a kind of
demonstrative particle denoting past time (probably connected with the stem a of
the demonstrative pronoun idam, see 224), while the separable particle sma (thought
to be an abbreviation of another demonstrative pronominal stem sa-ma), also de-
noting past time, and often discharging the function of the augment a (see 878),
has remained a detached particle.
REDUPLICATION.
252. After explaining the augment it will be convenient to specify
the rules of reduplication (abhydsa), as these have to be applied in
the Special tenses of Primitive verbs of cl. 3, in the Perfect tense of
all Primitive verbs, in the Aorist of a few Primitive verbs, and of
verbs of cl. 10, and of some Nominals (521), as well as in Desidera-
tives and in Frequentatives.
In reduplication the initial consonant and first vowel of a root
are doubled, as in lilip fr. rt. lip, dadaridrd fr. daridrd. There are,
however, special rules, as follow:
i st, as to consonants, thus :
a. A corresponding unaspirated letter is substituted for an aspirate, as ^ d for
V dh, in dadhd fr. dhd. (So in Gr., T is repeated for 6, as Ovw, refivKa, &c.)
6. The hard palatal ^ 6 is substituted for the hard gutturals F it or ^ kh, as in
takhan fr. khan ; and the soft palatal ^j for the soft gutturals *T g, "H gh, or 7 h,
as in jay am fr. gam, jay has fr. ghas, juhu fr. hu.
Obs, "^^han, 'to kill,' and f^ hi, 'to go,' substitute "9 gh for ? h when redu-
plicated ; as, jaghan fr. han.
c. If a root begin with a double consonant, the first consonant only or its sub-
stitute is repeated ; as, ^ c for T5T ksh, in cikship fr. kship ; ^ s for f*\sy, in sasyand
fr. syand; "^j for "? hr, in jahras fr. hras.
But if with a double consonant whose first is a sibilant, and whose second is
hard, the second or its substitute is reduplicated ; as, ^ 6 for ^ sk, as in faskand
fr. skand; J(t for 'W sth, as in tasthd ft. sthd; \p for **T sp, as mpaspris fr. sprig.
2ndly, as to vowels, thus :
d. A short vowel is repeated for a long, and diphthongal sounds are represented
by their second element j e. g. ^T a is reduplicated for ^3TI a , ^ i for \i, ^ ri, ^ri,
U e, and ^ a i ; "3 u for "3! u, w o, and W au. .
Obs. In certain cases ^ i is also repeated for a and o, as being a lighter vowel,
and dyut, 'to shine,' makes didyut for dudyut.
U 2
148 PRIMITIVE AND DERIVATIVE VERBS.
e. In fact it may be observed, that when a long vowel causes too great weight
in the radical syllable, it is generally lightened in the reduplicated syllable.
/. When a form has once been reduplicated, it is never reduplicated again in
forming other Derivatives from it (see 517. a); and when roots which have to be
reduplicated have any changed form, this modified form is taken in the redupli-
cation ; thus, ^*| smri, ' to remember,' being changed to ^9|^ in the Desiderative,
the vowel of the root does not appear in the reduplication
VERBS PRIMITIVE, PASSIVE, CAUSAL, DESIDERATIVE, &C.
353. In conjugating a verb, then, two things have to be done :
ist, to form the stem from the root according to ten rules for four
of the tenses, and one general rule for the other six ; 2ndly, to join
the stem so formed with the terminations, according to the regular
rules of Sandhi or euphonic conjugation. As yet, however, we have
only given a general explanation of the formation of the verbal stem
of the Simple or Primitive verb under the ten classes of roots.
There are four other kinds of verbs deducible from all roots,
whatever be their class.
254. In fact, every Sanskrit root serves as a kind of stock out
of which the inflective stems of five kinds of verbs may be evolved :
i. of a Primitive, Transitive or Intransitive ; 2. of a Passive ; 3. of a
Causal, having often a Causal and often merely a Transitive signifi-
cation ; 4. of a Desiderative, giving a sense of wishing to the root ;
and 5. of a Frequentative (or Intensive), implying repetition, or
heightening the idea contained in the root (see, however, 507).
255. The first, or Primitive verb, is formed from the root, accord-
ing to the ten different rules, already given, for the formation of the
stem in the first four tenses.
The second, or Passive, is formed according to the rule for the
change of the root, required by the 4th class ; viz. the addition of
ya in the first four tenses.
The third, or Causal, is formed according to the rule for the
change of the root required by the loth class ; viz. the addition of
aya to the root in all the tenses excepting the Aorist.
The fourth, or Desiderative, is formed by the addition of sa or
isha, the root also undergoing reduplication.
The fifth, or Frequentative, is formed like the Passive, according
to the rule required by cl. 4, and is, in fact, a reduplicated passive
verb. It may also be formed analogously to the rule for cl. 3.
FORMATION OF THE STEM OF PRIMITIVE VERBS. 149
Thus, if we take the root ^>T subh, conveying the idea of ' shining ' from this
are developed, ist, the Primitive verbal stem, sobha, 'to shine;' 2ndly, the Passive,
subhya, to be bright;' 3rdly, the Causal, sobhaya, to cause to shine' or ' illuminate;'
4thly, the Desiderative, susobhisha, ' to desire to shine ;' 5thly, the Frequentative
or Intensive, sosubhya or sosubh, to shine very brightly.'
a. And as every root is the source of five different kinds of Derivative verbs, so
there are secondary Derivative verbs developed out of nouns called Nominal verbs.
An explanation of these will be found after Frequentatives at 518.
256. The subject of verbs, therefore, as of nouns, will divide itself
into two heads :
A. The formation of the stem ; ist of Primitive, 2ndly of Passive,
3rdly of Causal, 4thly of Desiderative, 5thly of Frequentative verbs ;
with their respective Participles.
B. The exhibition of the stem, united to its terminations, under
each of the five forms of verbs consecutively.
PRIMITIVE VERBS.
FORMATION OF THE STEM OF THE FIRST FOUR TENSES, IN THE
TEN CLASSES.
A brief summary of the ten rules for the formation of the stem
of the four Special tenses viz. the Present, Imperfect, Potential,
and Imperative in the ten classes of roots, has already been given
at 249. These ten rules may be collected into three groups, which
form three distinct general conjugations, as follow :
257. GROUP I. Conjugation I. This (like the declension of the
first class of nouns whose stems end in a and a) is by far the most
important, as comprising roots of the ist, 4th, 6th, and loth classes,
which agree in making their stems end in a (liable to be lengthened
to a). These also resemble each other in taking substitutions for
some of the terminations, after the analogy of the stems of nouns
ending in a and a at 97. (See the substitutions indicated in the
table at 246.)
Note Of about 2000 roots belonging to the Sanskrit language, nearly 1300
belong to this ist conjugation. Besides which, every root in the language may
take a Passive and Causal form, and so be conjugated as if it belonged to the 4th
and loth classes.
258. GROUP II. Conjugation II. This comprises verbs of the 2nd,
3rd, and 7th classes, which agree in affixing the regular terminations
150 VERBS. GROUP I. FORMATION OP STEM.
(at 246) to the final letter of the root, without the intervention of a
vowel, after the analogy of the last four classes of nouns whose stems
end in consonants.
359. GROUP III, Conjugation III, comprising verbs of the 5th,
8th, and 9th classes, also affixes the regular terminations (at 246) to
the root ; but after the intervention of either u, a, or i, preceded by
the consonant n.
260. In comparing Sanskrit verbs with Greek and Latin, it might be shewn
that group I, comprising the ist, 4th, 6th, and loth classes, answers to the Gr.
ist conjugation in o>, the conjugational ^T a being represented in Gr. by o or
(tarpdmas=Tfp'ffOfJ.fv ) tarpatha=TfpTTT(); and although the Gr. ist conjugation
contains more subdivisions than the first group in Sk., yet the inflexion of these
subdivisions is similar. As to the Sk. loth class, however, it appears to correspond
to Gr. verbs in a( and /#, which, like the loth, are generally found in company
with other verbs from the same root ; thus, KaOaptfo, ' I make pure ' (KaOaipa],
<7Tevc0, ' I groan ' (CTTCVOJ), where corresponds to ^T y, as in ea and *TW 'barley.'
To this class also may be referred verbs in aw, ft>, oca ; thus pdraydmi = Trepaw,
where the y has been dropped, and the two a's combined. Lat. verbs in io, like
audio &c., seem to be related to the Sk. 4th class, as well as to the loth j thus
cupio answers to kupydmi; and the of audiebam answers to the ay a of the loth,
just as in Prakrit aya is contracted into T? e. The second and third groups of
classes in Sk. (viz. the 2nd, 3rd, 7th, 5th, 8th, and pth) answer to Gr. verbs in /*/ ;
thus emi cl. 2=e//x/, daddmi cl. 3=0; OvfJLt. Class 7, however, has no exact parallel
in Gr., but many Gr. and Lat. verbs resemble it in inserting a nasal into the middle
of the root ; see 342. a. The 5th and 8th classes answer to Gr. verbs like oeiK-vv-fAt,
evy-vti-jou, which agree in inserting vv between the root and termination ; in Gr.
the vowel v is lengthened before certain terminations, just as u is gunated into o
in Sk. ; thus strinomi = (rropvvfj.1, strinoshi = (rropvvf, strinoti = <rropvv(ri (for
ffTo'pvvri), strinumas = &TOpvv[Ji.ev (for <TTOpvv[J.$), &c. The pth class answers to
Gr. verbs in v (vyf) ; thus krindmi = TrepotjOW (irepvqiJ.1), krmvmas = Trepvapev.
Cf. also Lat. forms in ni ; thus sternimus=. Sk. strinimas, fr. stri, cl. 9.
GROUP I. FORMATION OF STEM IN ROOTS OF CLASSES I, 4, 6, IO.
261. CLASS i (containing about 1000 Primitive verbs). Rule for
the formation of the stem in the four Special tenses.
Gunate the vowel of the root (except when debarred by 28) before
every termination of all the four tenses, and affix the vowel *s a to
the root so gunated. Remember, that this ^r a is lengthened into
^rr a before the initial m and v of a termination, but not when m is
final, as in the ist sing. Impf.
262. Thus, fr. root *%V budh, 'to know,' is formed the stem "*fal bodha, lengthened
VERBS. - GROUP I. FORMATION OF STEM. 151
into T1*n b odhd before m and v (Pres. i.* bodhd+mi==.^p$lfabodhdmi, bodka+si=.
"^TVfftr bodhasi, bodha+ti=.^h^^K bodhati; Du. I. bodhd+vas =^lVT^ bodhdvas,
&c. ; Atm. Pres. bodha+i ="*(&( bodhe by 32, bodka+se='%\'m3bodhase, &c.) See
table at 583.
263. Similarly, fr. ftf ji, ' to conquer ' (see 590), comes the stem HT jay a (i. e*
je-\-a, see 36. a), liable to be lengthened into ^C^f\jayd, as explained above ; fr. *ft
ni, 'to lead,' the stems nay a and nay a; fr. ^bhu, 'to be' (</>fW, Lat./), the stems
(i.e. 6^o+a, 36. a) and bhavd (Pres. i. HWlfa bhavdmi; 2. Vftfa bhavasi,
, &c., see 584) ; fr. ^^srip, ' to creep,' the stems SHI sarpa and sarpd (see 27);
fr. e|^A;Zrtp, 'to fashion,' the stems nM kalpa and kalpd.
Obs. Bhu/to be' or 'to become,' is one of the commonest verbs in the language,
and like as, 'to be,' at 584, 327, is sometimes used as an auxiliary. Bhu is conjugated
in full at 585.
264. The stem of the Imperfect has the augment ^? a prefixed by
251 (Impf. i. abodha + m = 'sr^hlT abodham, 2. abodha + s = ^refa*^
abodhas, &c.)
265. In the Potential the final a of the stem blends with the initial
i of the termination into e by 32 (Pot. i. bodha + iyam = Tfthpr bo-
dheyani). So also in the Pres. Atm. ("^^ &c.) See table at 583.
266. In the Imperative the termination is rejected in the 2nd sing.
(Impv. i. bodha + a/w = ^fanfT bodhdni, 2. ?frv bodha, 3. bodha + tu
bodhatu).
267. Roots like T^'to cook,' TST^to beg,' a^'to live' (603), cannot change
their radical vowels (see 27. a, 28), but, as before, affix ^T a, liable to be lengthened
to ^T o . (Pres. i. trerftr &c. ; Pres. Atm. i. ftr% &c. ; Pres. i. rt^TfH &c.)
268. Some roots ending in the Vriddhi ^ at cannot be gunated, but suJGFer the
usual change of Sandhi before ^ a and ^TT d by 37 ; as, from ?i ' to sing,' y to be
weary,' ^fAtm. 'to preserve f/ ^ 'to meditate,' g 'to fade,' are formed the stems
gdya, gldya, trdya, dhydya, mldya. See 595. a. b.
269. Some roots of cl. i form their stems in the first four tenses by a change
peculiar to themselves, which change is of course discarded in the other tenses ;
thus, from WT sthd, ' to stand'(587), TJT^Aro', 'to smell' (588),^T'to drink' (589), >
**n 'to blow,' ^T 'to repeat' or 'think over,' come thfl^ bases) fin? tishtha,
jighra, nT^ 1 piva, VT dhama, TT mana, the final a being, as before, h'able to be
lengthened.
a. It should be noted that WT sthd and ITT ghrd are properly reduplicated verbs
of cl. 3 at 330. The reduplicated stem, by 252, would be tasthd, jaghrd : but as
the reduplication is irregular, and the radical a gives way to the conjugational a,
* i. stands for ist person singular; Du. i.for ist dualj PI. i.for ist plural, &c.
f A form <^Tfl?, as well as diMa> is found in Epic poetry for the 2nd sing.
Impv. of this root.
152 VERBS. GROUP I. FORMATION OP STEM.
grammarians place these roots under cl. i. The Greek iGTYjfJit, on the other hand,
has not shortened its radical vowel in the singular.
270. Again, ^31 'to see/ TR 'to go/ 1* 'to restrain,' ^'to go,' ^ 'to sink,'
51^ (Atm. in Special tenses, Par. in others) 'to fall,' 'to perish,' form their stems
TnpT pasya, T5J ga6tha, *T33; ya66ha, ^jRJ ri66ha, Wt% szda, TtftH siya.- (Pies. I.
*l$*nfT pasydmi, &c.)
a. According to Panini (vn. 3, 78), <3[T ' to give ' may sometimes substitute the
stem 1x3 yaMha ; and 3J ' to go,' the stem VR dhdva.
b. ^ 'to conceal' forms J T^; ffc^'to spit/lfa; *JT 'to cleanse,' TT^f : (Pres. I.
JT^Tfa &C.)
e. WT'to step,' ^nT^'to tire,' ^H (with ^TT) 'to rinse the mouth,' lengthen their
medial vowels, but the first only in Parasmai : (Pres. i. "SHUTf*! &c., but A'tm. WH.)
d. <pf^'to bite,' T^T 'to colour,' ^T^'to adhere/ ^"^'to embrace/ drop their
nasals : (Pres. i. <^Ttfa &c., T!TTf>T &c.)
e. *T^ A'tm. to yawn ' makes its stem *T**T, and even cW Atm. ' to receive '
sometimes becomes ^*>T in Epic poetry.
271. F*T Atm. ' to love ' forms its stem after the analogy of cl. 10 (Pres. i .
&c.), and some other roots add dya ; thus, fr. ^^' to protect/ TnTfTQgopdya; fr. ^J^
' to fumigate/ ^fPI ', fr. f%^ ' to go/ fiani J fr. ^TO Atm. (meaning ' to praise/
not 'to wager'), ^TOHIJ fr. "T^Atm. 'to praise/ t^UI.
a. ^* Atm. 'to play/ like all roots containing ir and ur compounded with
another consonant, lengthens the vowel (Pres. i. F^ &c.)
273. CLASS 4 (containing about 130 Primitive verbs). Rule for
the formation of the stem in the four Special tenses.
Affix i ya to the root. The vowel of the root is not gunated,
and generally remains unchanged. Remember, that the inserted
1 ya is liable to become *n yd before an initial m and v of the
terminations (but not before the m of the ist sing. Impf. Par.), as
in cl. i at 261.
273. Thus, fr. TtPJ^sidh, ' to succeed/ is formed the stem ftnfl sidhya (Pres. i.
sidhyd+mi= (V*Mtfa sidhydmi, 2. ftnflfa sidhyasi, &c. ; Impf. asidhya+m = ^ffa-
IfllT asidhyam, &c. ; Pot. i. sidhya-+-iyam=fa*t(TF{sidhyeyam, 2. 'ftTHT^ sidhyes,
&c. ; Impv. i . sidhya + dni =ftu*nfT sidhydni, &c. Pres. Atm. i. sidhya -f i =ffWl
sidhye, sidhya-}-se=:i' *4*l sidhyase, &c.) See 616.
274. Similarly, fr. TT md, 'to measure/ the stem TTO may a (Pres. I. Atm. may a
+* = Til mdye, &c.); ft.f^{Jcship, 'to throw/ f^fQI kshipya; fr.^Tffnrit, 'to dance/
TO nritya; fr. T^ d{, 'to fly/ Tfa (My a (Pres. Atm. i. Tfa).
275. Roots ending in am and iv, and one in ad, lengthen the vowel; as, fr.
div, 'to play/ <fNcj divya; fr. VW^bhram (also cl. i), 'to wander/ 13*1 bhrdmya ;
fr. *T^ mad, 'to be mad/ TTIT mddya. Similarly, "sRT (also cl. i) 'to step/ TSJfT ' to
endure/ ff!^ ' to grow weary/ 7H^ ' to be afflicted/ <^T ' to be tamed / but bhram
may optionally form Wf bhramya.
VERBS. GROUP I. FORMATION OF STEM. 153
276. If a root contain a nasal it is generally rejected; as, from STSI 'to fall,'
*iynbhrasya; from Z35T 'to colour,' Taf ; n^'to be born' makes Wnijaya (Pres.
I. A'tm. WHT), lengthening the vowel, to compensate for the loss of n.
a. Roots ending in ^ft o drop this o before the conjugational ya ; thus, W so, 'to
end,' makes its stem sya. Similarly, "Sft ' to cut,' $n ' to sharpen,' <^ ' to divide.'
277. The following are anomalous. From "if 'to grow old,' "^ft^jirya: fr. ^V
'to pierce,' f^Xt vidhya (cf. 472) ; fr. f*T^ ' to be viscid,' H?T medya.
Obs. Although this class includes only 130 Primitive verbs (generally Intran-
sitive in signification), yet every one of the 2000 roots in the language may have
a Passive form which follows the A'tmane-pada of this class, differing from it only
in the position of the accent, see 461.
278. CLASS 6 (containing about 140 Primitive verbs). Rule for
the formation of the stem in the four Special tenses.
Affix the vowel ^sr a to the root, which is not gunated, and in
other respects generally remains unchanged. Remember, that the
inserted ^8 a becomes ^TT a before an initial m and v of the termina-
tions of the four tenses (but not before the m of the ist sing. Impf.),
as in cl. i and 4 at 261 and 272.
279. Thus, fr. f%F{kship, 'to throw,' comes the stem fTSpl kshipa (Pres. i. kshipd
-f-'=fT5nnf*T kshipdmi, 2. kshipa + si = ftSJ^fof kshipasi ; Pot. I. kshipa +iy am =
ft^qq*l kshipeyam, &c. A'tm. Pres. i. kshipa + i= fsj *T kshipe ; see 635).
Similarly, fr. 1J^ tud, 'to strike,' TJ<J tuda; ft. f^S^dis, ' to point out,' f^T disa.
280. Roots in ^ i, "3 u or ^5 u, ^ ri and ^ rt, generally change those vowels
into ^T iy, T3f uv, ffQriy, and ^T ir respectively; as, fr. ft, 'to go,' comes the
stem ft^I riya ; fr. J ' to praise,' *J^ nuva ; fr. ^' to agitate,' >J^ dhuva ; fr. f ' to
die,' ftni mriya (626) ; fr. cF kri, ' to scatter,' fFT kira (627).
a. *I ' to swallow ' makes either f*R or fhc5.
281. A considerable number of roots of the sixth class, ending in consonants,
insert a nasal before the final consonant in the four tenses ; as, fr. *j^, ' to let go,'
comes the stem J|^T muhda ; fr. f^^' to anoint,' ft5**l limpa ; fr. ^Tfl ' to cut,'
krinta; fr. ft?^'to sprinkle,' ftttsinfa; fr. t^'to break,' ^WT lumpa; fr.
'to form,' ftt^T. Similarly, f^ ' to find/ f^ 'to trouble.'
282. The following are anomalous. From 3^, 'to wish,' comes the stem ^<5 i66ha ;
fr. TT^ 'to ask,' ^5 priUha; fr. ^'to fry,' ^53ff bhrijja ; fr. ^aT^'to deceive,'
f%^ vida; fr. ^^5 'to cut,' ^& vrisfa. Cf. 472.
a. The roots ^Rf and ^fif are sometimes regarded as falling under this class ; see
their stems at 270.
283. CLASS 10 (containing a few Primitive verbs, all Causals, and
some Nominal verbs, see 521). Rule for forming the stem in the
four Special tenses.
Gunate the vowel of the root throughout every person of all the
154 VERBS. - GROUP I. FORMATION OF STEM.
four tenses (except when debarred by 28), and affix "sur ay a to the
root so gunated. This ^5R aya becomes ^nn ayd before initial m and
v of the terminations of the four tenses, but not before m of the ist
sing. Impf.
284. Thus, from ^T 6ur, ' to steal,' is formed the stem ^fal toraya (Pres. i.
^^tW toraydmi, 2. doraya + si^^f^f^ forayasi, &c. ; Impf. I.
m =^I^frWT atorayam, &c., see 638; Pot. i. 6ora,ya -\- iyam =.^\\JVWf\
torayeyam; Impv. I. 6oraya + dni =^<*nf*a toraydni, &c., see 58).
285. Roots ending in vowels generally take Vriddhi instead of Guna (481) ; as, fr.
ift ' to please,' TTR^ pray ay a (cf. 485. a) ; fr. >| ' to hold,' VTCT dhdraya. But ^ ' to
choose ' makes ^T varaya. This last, however, is generally regarded as a Causal.
286. Roots containing the vowel 'S a before a single consonant generally lengthen
this vowel; as, fr. ?f^ to swallow,' TJlHHgrdsaya : but not before a conjunct con-
sonant; as, fr. ^n? ' to mark,' ^^T; fr. ^^ 'to punish,' T*l$5ft.
a. The following, however, do not lengthen the medial a, though followed by a
single consonant : R^'to say' (h'q*() ; *RT' to count ;' ^TO'tosin;' ^^' to tie;'
<C^ to arrange ;' 17 A'tm. in the sense of ' to surround ;' tS ' to scream ;' ^ff ' to
wound;' ^T^and^r^in the sense of 'to be lax or weak;' T^'to quit;' *J^ A'tm.
'to go;' T^ 'to sound;' 5^, ^^, ^f^j 'to sound;' ^fp^ 'to count' (also
lengthened in Epic poetry); ^T*T'to spend;' and others less common.
287. Wtt, 'to celebrate,' 'to praise,' makes oFtTHT kirtaya (Pres. '<*l^^ff*T).
288. A few roots with a medial ^ ri retain that vowel unchanged ; as, from 5?J?
'to desire,' *j^<4 ; ^H 'to search,' 'J'HI; ^ 'to bear,' >J^I (more commonly
*^)> 7f ^tm. 'to take,' *l%3 (also ?H^) ; ^'to pity,' *11; but ^T 'to
wipe' takes Vriddhi (TT!^). Some of these may be regarded as nominals.
a. The following also do not gunate then* medial vowels : ^S" ' to make happy,'
*p ' to bind,' ^JT ' to become manifest,' ^W or ^TTTT ' to consult.'
b. A few roots of more than one syllable (see 75. a) are said to belong to cl. 10,
viz. *WT3T 'to worship,' 'SRV^ 'to despise,' ^SJTH/to fight,' <f*n^ or fiHTf5 'to
play,' THT^'to search,' feSTlf 'to imitate,' fVfn^'to put on,' flS i^ ' to invite,'
^t^tc9, f^<tc^, f^Wtc^, H^l<^, ' to swing,' I^Jf^ or 1^*^ or =IV^c^ ' to cut off.*
These and a few monosyllabic roots of cl. 10, such as ^TS^' to divide,' ^T*I ' to ask,'
' to mix,' ^TS ' to mark,' *J<if ' to make water,' 3^ ' to thread,' Tl*^ ' to fan,'
' to perforate,' $T3^ ' to sound,' and others less common, can, according to
Borne grammarians, form their stems optionally with dpaya ; thus, ^SfST may make
in Pres. i.
289. It has been shewn that every root may have a Causal form,
which follows the rule of conjugation of cl. 10. Indeed, it may be
owing to the fact that there are a number of Active Primitive verbs
not Causal in their signification, but conjugated like Causals, that a
VERBS. - GROUPS II AND III. FORMATION OF STEM. 155
loth class has arisen distinct from the Causal. In verbs of this class
the Causal form will generally be identical with the Primitive.
Again, as some verbs really Causal in their signification are re-
garded as belonging to cl. 10, there will often be a difficulty in
determining whether a verb be a Primitive verb of this class, or a
Causal verb. Hence the consideration of cl. 10 must to a great
extent be mixed up with that of the Causal form of the root. See
the special changes applicable to Causals at 483-488.
a. Observe, that all verbs, whether Primitive or Causal, which
belong to cl. 10, have this great peculiarity, viz. that the conjugational
ay a is carried throughout all the tenses of the verb, General as well
as Special, except only the Aorist and the Precative, Parasmai-pada.
For this reason the formation of the stem of the General tenses of
verbs of cl. 10 will not be explained under the head of the General
tenses (at 363), but will fall under Causal verbs.
b. Many verbs of cl. 10 are also conjugated in other classes; and many may be
regarded as Nominal verbs.
GROUPS II AND III. FORMATION OF STEM IN ROOTS OF CLASSES
2, 3, 7, AND CLASSES 5, 8, 9.
Preliminary Observations.
290. The formation of the stems of verbs of groups II and III
presents more difficulties than that of group I, containing the ist,
4th, 6th, and loth classes. In group I the verbal stem, although
varying slightly in each class, preserves the form assumed in the
singular before all the terminations of every Special tense ; but in
the last two groups the stem is liable to variation in the various
persons and numbers of most of the tenses, such variation being
denoted by the letter P and other indicatory letters of the scheme
at 246.
a. The object of the P is to shew, that fulness or strength of form is imparted
to the root before these weak terminations (see 247. b) ; thus ^ i, cl. 2, 'to go,' is
in the Pres, sing, emi, eshi, eti ; in du. was, ithas, itas ; in pi. imas, &c. : just as
in Gr. e/you, e<, ei<rt, ITOV, "TOV, */xev, &c. : cf. also 0*?^*' (for <aou
/, <f>arov, <f>ardv, $a/Aev, (pare, </>a<7/. So again, stri, ' to strew,' is in Pres.
sing, strinomi, strinoshi, strinoti ; in du. strinuvas, strinuthas, strinutas ; in pi.
strinumas, &c. : just as in Gr. aropvtifjii, aropvv?, vropwat, aropvvTW,
X 2
156 VEKBS. GROUPS II AND III. FORMATION OP STEM.
<7TOpvvfJ.V } &c. Similarly, kri, 'to buy,' is in Pres. sing, krmdmi, Mndsi, Mndti ;
in du. &c. Mmvas, Jcrintthas, krtmtas, krinimas, &c., the d being heavier than {.
Cf. vepvafjii (TrepVYjfJu), Trepvaf, Trepvari, Trepvarov, -nepvarov, &c. The P after
the terminations of the first three persons of the Impv., Parasmai and Atmane,
indicates that even before these heavy terminations the stem must be full. When
a root ending in a consonant is long by nature or position, no additional strength
is necessary, and no Guna is then possible (see 28) ; but in place of Guna, the
stem sometimes remains unmutilated before the light terminations, while mutilation
takes place before the heavy. The same holds good in roots ending in dj thus da
and dhd suppress their final vowels before strong terminations, and preserve them
before weak ; see 335, 336. Similarly, as, to be,' which by 28 cannot be gunated,
drops its initial vowel before the strong terminations, retaining it before the weak ;
see 327, and compare 324.
291. Another source of difficulty is, that in group II (containing
the 2nd, 3rd, and 7th classes) the verbal stem generally ends in a
consonant. This group of verbal stems, therefore, will resemble the
last four classes of nominal stems ; and the combination of the final
consonant of a stem with the initial t, th, dh, or s, of a termination
in the Special tenses of these three classes requires a knowledge of
the laws of Sandhi already given, as well as of others about to be
explained.
292. With regard to the terminations, a reference to the table at
246 will shew that the last two groups take the regular terminations
of the scheme, with few substitutions. But in the 3rd pi. Present
and Imperative, ^tmane-pada, the nasal is rejected in all six classes ;
and in the 3rd class, owing to the burden occasioned by reduplication,
the nasal is also rejected in the 3rd pi. of the Parasmai-pada in these
two tenses ; this class also takes us for an in the 3rd pi. Impf.
293. Moreover, roots ending in consonants, of the 2nd and 3rd, and all roots of
the 7th, and the root ^ hu of the 3rd class, take dhi (the Greek 61) for hi in the
2nd sing. Impv.* (see 246) ; and roots ending in vowels, of the 5th, and all roots
of the 8th, and roots ending in consonants of the pth class, resemble the first
group of classes at 257, in rejecting this termination hi altogether.
294. Again, roots ending in consonants reject the terminations s and t of the
2nd and 3rd sing. Impf. by 41. 1, changing the final of the root? if a soft consonant,
to an unaspirated hard ; and in other respects changing a final consonant, as indi-
cated at 41.! IV. In roots ending in TT, "ST, ^, >J, the 3rd person rejects the
* Dhi was originally the only form. Hence in the Vedas ^jftl (KXvQi) ; and in
the Maha-bharata ^PTT^fVl. Dhi then passed into hi, as dhita passed into hita,
and bliumi into the Latin humus.
VERBS. - RULES OP SANDHI. 157
termination t regularly, and ends therefore in simple IT ; the 2nd person optionally
rejects either the termination s, and ends therefore in t, or the final dental of the
root, and ends then in s, see 308.
295. The following new rules of Sandhi will also apply in forming the Special
tenses of the Parasmai-Frequentative (see 514), and in forming the stem of the
General tenses of all Primitive verbs (except those of cl. 10), and in some of the
Participles ; for although in most roots ending in consonants the vowel ^i (see 391)
is inserted before the terminations of these tenses, yet a large class of common
roots reject this inserted vowel, leaving the final of the stem to coalesce with the
initial consonant of the termination. It will be convenient, therefore, to introduce
by anticipation examples from the General tenses and Participles.
EUPHONIC JUNCTION OF CERTAIN VERBAL STEMS WITH
TERMINATIONS AND SUFFIXES.
Combination of final *3 c, "^ eh, f j, *15.jh, with TT t, ^1 th, *I dh, H s.
296. Final ^ 6 and *tj\ before TT t, ^th, V dh, and ^s, are changed
to OF k (cf. 41. IV), the o^ k blending with ^ s into TO ksh by 70, and
becoming TT g before dh ; thus, va6 + ti=. vakti ; va6 + thas = vakthas ;
va6 + si = vakshi ; mo6 + sydmi = mokshydmi ; mu6 + to, = mukta ;
tyaj + ta = tyakta ; tyaj + sydmi = tyakshydmi. The same applies to
final W.jh, but this is not likely to occur.
a. Similarly, final ^ 6h before s ; as, pra6h + sydmi =prakshydmi.
297. But a final ^ 6h and *{j sometimes become ^ sh before H t,
and t^tf, x^ th y then become ^, ^; thus, *IT^'-M = nft ; JW 4-
. Similarly, a final *{j may be changed to ? 4 before v^dh, which
then becomes <? dh.
b. ^nrT * to fry, 5 *P55^ ' to be immersed,' and w^ * to cut,' reject
their last consonant, and the first two are treated as if ending in sf,
the last as if ending in 51. See 632, 633, 630.
Combination of final \i dh, w bh, with 7^ t, "iff th, ^ s.
298. Final V dh and vt bh, before c^/ and ^th, are changed, the one
to ^ ?, the other to ^ 6, and both t and th then become V dh ; thus,
rundh with tas or thas becomes equally "?\*gw runddhas ; labh + tdhe
= 75^1^ labdhdhe ; bodh + tdhe = ^TR[.
A similar rule applies to final "Ef gh, which must be changed to T g t but this is
not likely to occur.
a. When final il dh is preceded by a conjunct ^ n, as in rundh,
then the final dh, which has become d (before t and th changed to
158 VERBS. RULES OF SANDHI.
dh), may optionally be rejected; so that rundh + tas
rundh + tarn = ^HH or ^w (Pan. viu. 4, 65).
b. On the same principle r[T!3^is written for q^SG^from TJ^T (674).
c. Similarly roots ending in IT t and ^ d may reject these letters before th, t, and
dhi, when n immediately precedes, hence firn may be written for m^, wtf^for
fa^, fafal for fafe
299. Final v ^A and vt bh, before ^ s, are changed by 44, the one
to TT t, the other to \p; thus, ^Tini runadh + fa se becomes ^fitl
runatsi; sedh + sydmi = setsydmi ; labh + sye = lapsye (cf. 41. II).
a. If the initial of the syllable containing the final aspirate be g,
d, b, or <#, then the aspirate, which has been rejected in the final, is
thrown back on the initial ; as, ^ta bodh + 13 sye = vrfair bhotsye ; ^J
dadh + sva = dhatsva : and in the case of ^M the same applies before
t and th, against 298. See 44. c, 336, 664. Cf. Ope^/oo from TjOe^co.
b. The aspiration is also thrown back on the initial, when final dh
is changed to d, before the terminations dhve and dhvam. See 336, 664.
Combinations of final "5T s, ^ sh, ^s, with i(i, ^Tth, ^s, vdh.
300. Final 3T , before j^t and i{th, becomes ^sh; and the
take the cerebral form 7,7; thus, ^si + te = ^; ^31^+ thds =
301. Similarly, final ~^sh, before T^t and ^i th, requires the change
of T^ t } ^ th, to ^, ^ ; thus, lr^ + ti = irffc ; and fir^ + thas = %S^.
302. Final 3l x s or ^ A, before T^S, is changed to cjr k by 41. V, the
^ 5 then becoming ^ sh by 70 ; thus, ^31 + sz = gf^ ; 1*1 + si =
a. Final "^ksh is also changed to eff k; as, qT5f + ^ =
303. Final 3T s or ^ *^, before TI dh, is changed to ^ d } the
becoming ^ ?A by 5pjt thus, finr + c?Az = fg^fz. Similarly,
dhvam = fk^T . A final *{j may also follow this rule ; 866632,651.
a. Final Tff ksh also becomes ^(?, A: being dropped; as, ^BT + i^T = ^^.
304. Final ^s is changed to i^/ before TT ^ in the 3rd sing. Impf.
(the termination t being rejected), and before V dh, is either dropped
or changed to ^ d; thus, 6akds + dhi = either ^firfv 6akddhi or ^ofiT%
6akdddhi ; ^T^ + dhi = ^rrfo ; ff ^ + dhi = f^f?*i or f^fcg, see 658, 673.
a. Final ^ s before ^ s is changed to T^ t ; as, vas + sydmi = vat-
sydmi. So optionally in 2nd sing. Impf. of $TT^, asds +s = asdts =
a&dt (or asds).
b. But not in the case of final s preceded by a or d before si and se.
VERBS. RULES OF SANDHI. 159
Combination of final ^h with j(t, ^th, ^s, vdh.
305. In roots beginning with ^ d, like ^ duh, l to milk/ final f h
is treated as if it were ^gh, and is changed to *T# before j^t and xr th,
and both / and th then become V dh ; thus, ^ duh + tas or thas
becomes equally g 7 ^ dugdhas ; ^? dah + tdsmi = dagdhdsmi.
But ?f + ta = "H^" dridha.
Note In root rff the final h is treated as if it were v dh, and
becomes % d, after which t and /A both become dh. See 624.
a. But if a root begin with any other letter than <? d or *{n, then
its final f h is dropped, and both the ^ / and ^T /A of the termination
become ^ dh. Moreover, to compensate for the rejection of the final
h, a radical vowel (except ri), if not gunated, is lengthened, and in the
roots *re sah and ^r? vah, ' to bear/ changed to o ; as, ijf + ta = ^ ;
ta = ^<? ; + ti = wfe /e</Az ; t + tdsmi = ftelftR ; + td
Obs. But 7^ + ta = Tjf , and ^r 4- ta = ^& (Pan. vi. 3,11 1).
b. "5^ ' to injure/ ^ * to be foolish/ fw ' to love/ ^pr 'to vomit/
optionally follow either 305 or 305. a.
306. Final f h, before ^ s, follows the analogy of final ST x s and
u sh, and is changed to ^ k t which blends with ^ s into "ET ksh ;
thus, ^f leh with si becomes ^ft^ ; ^te + sydmi = Cl^lfH. Similarly,
in Latin, final h becomes k before s ; as, veksit (vexit) from veho.
a. And if the initial of the syllable ending in ^ h be ^ d, n^ ^^
or^d (the two latter, however, are not likely to occur), then the final
f h is still changed to o^ k before s ; but the initial ^ d and *r g are
aspirated according to the analogy of 44. c ; thus, ^Vf doh + si =
Vtfo? ; ^ <?A + sydmi = v^nftr ; ^pr aguh + *am = *rcrefT.
b. In root Tf nah final f A is treated as if it were dh, and becomes
^ before ^ s. Compare 183, and see 624.
c. In roots beginning with ^ d, like 57 duh and f<*7 dih, final ^ h
becomes *T g before dh ; i. e. before the dhi of the 2nd sing. Impera-
tive, and before the terminations dhve and dhvam (see 306. d] ;
thus, ^? duh + dhi = Hfhj dugdhi. And in a root beginning with n,
like Tf wA, final h becomes d before these terminations.
But if the root begin with any other letter than ^ d or ^ n, then
final f h is dropped, and the v dh of the termination becomes ^ dh,
the radical vowel (except ^j ri} being lengthened ; thus, f& lih + dhi
160 VERBS. GROUP II. FORMATION OF STEM.
lih + dhvam = Ffi^T. An option, however, is allowed in the
case of the roots at 305. b.
d. And 306. a. applies before dhve and dhvam, when final f h be-
comes T^r or is dropped, although not before dhi of the Imperative; thus,
duh + dhve == IJTI dhugdhve ; and aguh + dhvam = ^T^ff aghudhvam.
e. Obs. If a root end in 7 h, this final h becomes cir k in the 2nd
and 3rd sing. Impf. of roots beginning with <* d (the personal termina-
tions s and t being dropped). In all other roots the final f h becomes
<? / (41. III). In both cases the changed ? throws back an aspiration
on the first consonant of the root in accordance with 306. a.
GROUP II. CONJUGATION II.
307. CLASS 2 (containing about 70 Primitive verbs). Rule for
forming the stem in the four Special tenses.
Gunate the vowel of the root (except when debarred by 28) in
the strong forms, or before those terminations only which are marked
with P in the scheme at 246. Before all the other terminations the
original vowel of the root must be retained. No vowel is inter-
posed between the root and the terminations. (Cf. Gr. verbs like
elfjiiy <pr]iu.l, &c. See 290. a.)
308. Thus, from f%^ vid, 'to know' (Gr. fiQw, IOQV, Lat. video), is formed the
stem of the singular Present ved (i. ved-\-mi = ^\%( vedmi, &c.), and the stem of
the dual and plural vid (Du. i. vid-{-vas=:T^'S^vidvas, &c. ; PL i. vid -\-mas
f^RT vidmas, &c.) So also the stem of the Impf. aved and avid (i. aved-}- am =
avedam, 2. aved -f- *' = ovet or aves hy 41. 1. and 294); the stem of the Pot. vid
(i. wd+yrfm=f^ffTT vidydm, &c.) ; and the stem of the Impv. ved and vid (i.ved
-{-dni=veddni, 2. vid-\-dhi=viddhi 293, ved+tuvettu ; Du. i. ved-\-dva=veddva,
&c. *) See the table at 583.
a. A contracted form of the Perfect of vid (365) is sometimes used for the Pre-
sent; thus, Sing, veda, vettha, vedaj Du. vidva, vidathus, vidatus ; PI. vidma,
vida, vidus; see 168. e. Cf. Gr. ol^a (for Foitia) fr. rt. Fi$ (e^), also used with
a Present signification j and Lat. vidi, vidisti, &c. Cf. also the Present vidmas
with Jfyxev (JV/xev), vittha with <We, and viddhi with *<rQt. Cf. also old English
' to wit.'
309. Similarly, from fk 1 ?, 'to hate,' come the stems dvesh and dvish (Pres. i.
Du. i. fin^, &c. ; see 657).
* The Impv. of vid is optionally formed with the syllable dm and the auxiliary
verb kri (cf. 385); thus, Sing. 3. f^fcF^IJ or fa<} IIJTl^ (Pan. in. i, 41). And
this root may optionally insert r in the 3rd pi. A'tm. of the Pres., Impf., and Impv. ;
thus, f^TT or frif , ^rf^TT or ^rfTlf , faqwTH or
VERBS. GROUP II. FORMATION OF STEM. 161
310. So also, from ^i, 'to go,' come the stems e and i (Pres. i. Jjf*T emi (=
2. Sft by 70, 3. ^fff; PL i. ^na(, </xev, see 645).
a. TPj'to awake' makes, in the same vfay,jdgar andjogrri (Pres. 1. 1TPTf>l, &c.;
Du. i. TPJ^; PL 3. "3n?rfr ; Impf. 2, 3. fl'STT'l^ or (nin: ; Du. 3.
PI. 3. ^nrPT^^; Pot. i. TI^^IH N ; impv. 3. wi|; PL 3. nir5)-
Obs. Roots of cl. 2, having more than one syllable (such as ITPJ above,
to be poor,' ^?3iT^' to shine,' all formed by reduplication), as well as TflT^ ' to rule '
(perhaps contracted from a reduplicated ^T$R^), and P^ 'to eat' (perhaps for
*l*rt(), resemble the reduplicated verbs of cl. 3 in rejecting the nasal from the
3rd pi. Pres. and Impv. Parasmai, and taking us for an in 3rd pi. Impf. Moreover,
a few roots like f^ and fg*( above, as well as some in d, like IT ' to go ' and Tl
'to protect,' optionally take MS for an in Impf., before which a final d is dropped.
311. The preposition wftf adhi, 'over,' prefixed to the root ^ i, 'to go,' gives
the sense of 'to read' (A'tmane-pada only) : ^ then becomes iy (compare 123) and
blends with adhi into Jj*fli adhiy before the vowel-terminations of the Pres., Impf.,
and Pot. Before the consonantal terminations it becomes ^nft adhi. (Hence Pres.
1. ^I>ft^, 2. ^TV^, 3. '3T\ftff ; Du. i. 'SWfa^, &c. ; PL 3. ^nffaft; Impf. i. adhi+
a+iy+i=^nflftr by 251. a, 2. ^wfar^, 3. ^izin 1 ; Du. i. ^rafaff , 2. ^niifrrnzrR,
&c. ; Pot. i. JtVlfrf, ^JVNfan^, &c. ; Impv. i. adhi + e + ai =^f HIV by 36.0,
2. ^nrto, &c.)
a. The preposition ^!T a is prefixed to the root ^ i, according to the usual rules
of Sandhi, and gives the sense of ' to come ;' thus, Pres. ^ftf,
&c.j Impf. ^TRH, ^, &c. ; Pot. 'FUTT, ^n^, &c.; Impv.
&c. Again, the prep. ^TO apa prefixed gives the sense of 'to go away;' thus, Pres.
^mf*?, &c. : and the prep. ^R gives the sense of 'to know ;' as, Pres. ^nrfa.
312. So also other roots in ^t and TM or II M change these vowels to iy and uv
(cf. 123, 125. a) before the vowel-terminations; as, fr. ^ vi, 'to go,' come ve, vt,
and viy (Pres. i.^fa,&c. ; Du. i.^fa^; PL 3. f^lfrfT) *. Similarly, JT, ' to bring
forth' (Aim. only), makes in Pres. Sing. Du. PL 3. ^TfT, tJUrt, ^TT J and in Impv.
Sing. Du. PL i. *J%, ^^1^ , tj^l^, Guna being suppressed.
313. ^ stu and ^ nu, ' to praise ;' ^ yu, ' to join,' ' to mix ;' and ^\ ru, ' to sound,'
follow 312, but take Vriddhi instead of Guna before the consonantal P termina-
tions f. Hence the stems WT stau, ^ stu, and ^irR stuv ; see 648. Before the
vowel P terminations both Vriddhi and Guna are generally (but not always) sup-
pressed, and uv substituted, as in ^at 312. Note, that these roots may optionally
insert an ^ i before the consonantal P terminations ; and before this vowel Guna,
not Vriddhi, is required. According to some authorities, however, i is inserted
before all the consonantal terminations ; and, according to others, before all the
consonants, except y, v, or m, not followed by an indicatory P.
314. "iT, 'to speak,' can never take Vriddhi, like the roots at 313; but inserts
* According to some the 3rd pi. Impf. of is ^Rl^ as well as
t That is, the terminations marked with P, which begin with consonants.
Y
162 VERBS. GROUP II. FORMATION OF STEM.
an ^ i after Guna in the places where those roots optionally insert it, viz. before
the consonantal P terminations. Hence the stems bram, bru, bruv. See 649.
a. Before the vowel P terminations Guna is not suppressed, excepting in the ist
sing. Impf., which may be either ^W^T or W9^H.
315. Tfft, 'to lie down' (Atm. only), gunates the radical vowel before all the
terminations, and inserts r in the 3rd pi. Pres., Impf., and Impv., after the analogy
of the 3rd pi. Pot. See 646.
316. "9WJJ, 'to cover,' takes either Vriddhi or Guna of the final u before the
consonantal P terminations, except before the 2nd and 3rd sing, of the Impf.,
where Guna only is admissible. Before the vowel-terminations it follows 312, but
Guna is retained before the vowel P terminations, excepting in the ist sing. Impf.
Hence the stems urnau, urno, tirnu, and urnuv (Pres. Par. i. "SWITTm or "^WHIT*?;
Du.i. *^M^J PI. 3. ;jHJrqfjT, see 310. Obs. ; Impf. i. 'STntfaWor Wut^by 251. a,
2. ^ffaaf^, &c.; Pot. i. '3raj*n^; Impv. S. i. ^BJNrf*?, 3. ^TTIJ or ^SSffiJ.
Pres. Atm. 3. 3H|iT, ^w|^TrT, "3i^Tf).
317. TH'to go,' m 'to protect,' ^ 'to eat' (edo), 'STR^'to sit,' Atm., and other
roots having a or a for their vowels, cannot be changed, but are themselves the
inflective stems (Pres. i. *H yd-\-mi:=ydmi, see 644; ^T^ ad-\-mi=admi, 2. ad+si
=a/*i, 3. ad-\-ti=.atti j Du. 3. ad-\-tas=.attas, &c., see 652). With atti compare
Lat. edit.
a. ^TR{ 'to sit' is similar; thus ds-\-e=:dse, ds + se = dsse, ds + te=dste. The
final of as is dropped before dh, hence PI. 2. ^TTSSI ddhve, &c.
b. ^1^'to eat,' before the terminations of the 2nd and 3rd sing. Imperfect,
inserts the vowel ^T a by special rule, see 652 ; and some other roots of this class
require peculiar changes, as follows :
318. ^ft^T daridrd, 'to be poor,' follows 310. Obs., making its stem daridri before
the consonantal terminations not marked with P, and daridr before ati, us, atu
(Pres. S. Du. PI. 3. ^fic^TfrT, ^f^fjTn^, ^"5^ J Impf. i. ^fiC^T^j PI- 3- ^~
fc?^; Pot. 3. ^fVf$*n^; Impv. i.^ft^rftsr; Du. i.^fit^iq; Pi. 3. ^ft^nj).
319. ~tfti\ didhi, ' to shine' (Atm.), and ^^ 'to go ' (Atm.), change their final to
y, and not to iy, before the vowel-terminations (compare 312) ; but in the Potential
the final i coalesces with the /of the terminations (Pres. Sing. i. <^Uf; <^*f ; PI. 3.
^fa^H; %*TW: Pot. i.c(Wfa, &c.)
320. "3^va6, 'to speak,' changes its final palatal to a guttural before all the
hard consonantal terminations, in conformity with 176; but not before the soft
(except dh). It is defective in the 3rd pi. Present and Imperative, where its place
must be supplied by t^at 314, 649. Hence the stems va6 and vak. See 650.
321. ijftmrij, 'to cleanse,' is vriddhied in strong forms, and optionally before
the vowel-terminations having no P. Hence the stems mdrj and mrij. See 651.
322. ^ rud, 'to weep,' besides the usual Guna change before the P terminations,
inserts the vowel ^ i before all the consonantal terminations except y, and optionally
a or i in the 2nd and 3rd sing. Impf. Hence rodi, rudi, rud. See 653.
a. 13^ 'to sleep,' ^^ and ^!*^'to breathe,' and If^'to eat,' are similar, but
VERBS. GROUP II. FORMATION OP STEM. 163
without Guna. The last conforms to 310. Obs. In the Epic poems, forms like
*3T*nftr are found as well as ^faftr, while in the Veda other roots (besides the
above five) insert i (as ^ffrfafH, ^fafif, *jfr7f?T, ^frfff, &c.) See Pan. vn. 2, 76. 34.
323. ^ han, 'to kill,' makes its stem $J ha before t or th (by 57.0); \ghn
before anti, an, antu ; and *t ja before f^. The last change is to avoid the
proximity of two aspirates. See 654, and compare 252. b. Obs.
324. "371 vas, 'to desire,' 'to choose,' suppresses the a, and changes v to u before
the terminations which have no P (see 290. a) ; and "W5I us becomes ^T5 ush before
t and th by 300. See 656.
325. s^td, 'to praise ' (Atm.), not gunated by 28, inserts the vowel ^ t between
the root and the terminations of the 2nd person , "^f, *3, and l^*T : Pres. I. ^
2. f f?^, 3. f| (see 48. b. Obs.) ; Du. i. f^^ ; PI. 2. $fer ; Impf. 3. $%, &c. ;
Pot. i. $Tfa, &c. ; Impv. i. ^t, 2. $f%^, 3. $P*^ P1 - 2 - ^f**^.
a. Similarly, ^3T is, 'to rule' (Atm. only) : Pres. i. ^T, 2. f fi$P*, 3. ty by 300 ;
Impf. 3. JH?, &c. ; Impv. 3. ^FPT, &c.
326. ^T5F 6aksh, 'to speak ' (Atm.), drops the penultimate k before all consonantal
terminations, except those beginning with m or v (Pres. i. ^q , 2. ^^+ = ^nsf
3. ^?, &c., see 302.0, 303. a; Impf. 3. ^-^g ; Pot. 3. ^HSffa). Katyayana con-
siders W$(l the original root, whence is formed leTT > the latter being substituted
for ^T5T in the General tenses.
327. ^K^ as, ' to be' (Parasmai only), a very useful auxiliary verb, follows 290. o,
and rejects its initial a, except before the P terminations. The 2nd pers. sing. Pres.
is ^rftc for ^Tfw. The Impf. has the character of an Aor., and retains the initial
a throughout, and inserts \{ before the s and t of the 2nd and 3rd sing. ; see 584.
The 2nd sing. Impv. substitutes e for as, and takes the termination dhi. This root
is found in the Atmane-pada, with the prepositions vi and ati, when the Present
is Sing. ^fiT%, %, -^ ; Du. -^%, -^T^, -tTW, -W?, -&l, -^ j Pot. ^fimliJ,
&c. (Pan. vni. 3, 87). See 584.
328. ^TT^ sa's, 'to rule,' in Parasmai (but not in Atmane), changes its vowel to
^ i before the consonantal terminations having no P, except that of the 2nd sing.
Impv. Before that and all vowel-terminations, as well as in the strong forms, the
vowel of the root remains unchanged ; and, after i, ^ becomes ^ by 70. Hence
the stems ^TT^ and f^R. See 658.
329. ^!T^, 'to shine,' is Pres. i.^filfVt, 2. ^efilfw, 3. ^^iftrf; Du. i. ^*T-
PL 3. ^afiT^fTT (310. Obs.) ; Impf. i.^PPBTCW, 2. iSH<#l^or -fi<*l 1^(294),
Du. i. 'w^nira; Pi. 3. ^r^<i^; Pot. i. ^efci^i'T; Impv. i.
2. ^rarfv or ^firfir (304), 3. M<*I*^; DU. i. : fiii^n^, 2. ^^srenr;
PL 3. ^hl^.
330. ^ duh, ' to milk,' and ftf^ lih, ' to lick,' form their stems as explained at
305, 306. They are conjugated at 660, 66 1.
331. CLASS 3 (containing about 20 Primitive verbs). Rule for
forming the stem in the four Special tenses.
Y 2,
164 VERBS. GROUP II. FORMATION OF STEM.
Reduplicate the initial consonant and vowel of the root, and
gunate the vowel of the radical syllable before the P terminations
only, as in cL 2.
Obs. -This class resembles the 2nd in interposing no vowel be-
tween the root and terminations. It is the only class that necessarily
rejects the nasal in 3rd pi. Pres. and Impv. Parasmai (see 292), and
takes us for an in 3rd pi. Impf. Parasmai, before which us Guna is
generally required. See 292294.
332. Thus, from *| bhri, 'to bear' ((f>fpw,fero), is formed the stem of the Present
singular f^H^ bibhar (i. bibhar+mi=f*(Vffo), and the stem of the dual and plural
ftybibhri (Du. i. bibhri+vas=fer*$^1(i PL i. bibhri-\-mas=f^^(' ) PI. 3. bibhri
+ati=fa$fii l t by 34 and 292). See the table at 583.
a. Note, that bibharti bears the same relation to bibhrimas that fert does to
ferimus, and vult to rolumus.
333. Similarly, from >ft bht/to fear,' come the two stems bibhe and bibhi; from
^ hu, to sacrifice,' the two stems juho and juhu. The former of these roots may
optionally shorten the radical vowel before a consonant, when not gunated. See
666. The latter may optionally reject its final before vas and mas, and is the only
root ending in a vowel which takes dhi for hi in the 2nd sing. Impv. See 662.
a. fft, 'to be ashamed,' is like *ft, but changes its final ^ to ^T iy before the
vowel-terminations, in conformity with 123. See 666. a.
334. ^T ri, 'to go,' is the only verb in this class that begins with a vowel.
It substitutes iy for ri in the reduplication, and makes its stems ^fTl iyar and
^ iyri (Pres. Sing. Du. PI. 3. ^fff, ^ri^, ^jfir ; Impf. i. $ *H*(, 2. 5?^,
3. ^C; Du. 3. ^Ajril'T; Pot. 3. ^TTfi^; Impv. i. ^Rlftl).
335. <fT da, ' to give ' (OtocofJU, do), drops its final a before all excepting the P
terminations. Hence the stems dadd and dad. It becomes ^ de before the hi of
the Impv. See 663.
336. VT dhd, ' to place ' (TiQyfJu), is similar. Hence the stems dadhd and dadh ;
but dadh becomes ViT before t, th, and s; and dhad before dhve and dhvam by
299. a. b ; and dhe before the hi of the Impv. See 664.
337. ^T hd, 'to abandon,' changes its final a to ^ i before the consonantal
.terminations not marked with P, and drops the final altogether before the vowel-
terminations, and before y of the Potential. Hence the stems jahd, jaht, jah.
Before hi of the Impv. the stem is optionally jahd, jaht, or jahi. According to
some authorities, SRffr may be shortened into lf^ in Pres., Impf., and Impv.
See 665.
338. TT md, 'to measure' (Atm.), and ^T hd, 'to go ' (A'tm.), make their stems
'foft mimi and Pri^l jihf before the consonantal terminations not marked with P.
Before the vowel-terminations their stems are mim andjih (Sing. Du. PL 3. fn^lrt,
ftT?Tif , ftr^W ; Impf. 3. ^PaT^Iri J Impv. 3. fsfiffafR). See TT at 664. a.
339- *f*[jan, ' to produce ' (Parasmai-pada), rejects the final nasal (see 57. a),
VERBS. GROUP II. FORMATION OP STEM. 165
and lengthens the radical a before t and th and hi, and optionally before y. Before
consonantal terminations beginning with m or v the radical jan remains, but before
vowel-terminations not marked with P the medial a is dropped, and the nasal
combining with j becomes palatal (compare the declension of rdjan at 148).
Hence the three stems jajan, jajd, andjajn. See 666. b.
340. >T^ bhas, 'to eat,' 'to shine,' like jan, rejects the radical a before the
vowel-terminations not marked with P ; and bh coalescing with s becomes p by
44 (Pres. S. Du. PI. 3. ^"Hf^T, ^TCcT^, ^rfw). The same contraction takes
place before terminations beginning with IT, TO, but the final s is then dropped,
and the usual rules of Sandhi applied ; thus, "^>T + iTR r*tr*T by 298.
341. ftHT'to purify,' fasr'to shake,' fe^'to separate' (identified with vij),
and ftf 1 ^ ' to pervade,' ' to penetrate,' gunate the reduplicated syllable before all
the terminations, and forbid the usual Guna of the radical syllable before termina-
tions beginning with vowels, as in the ist sing. Impf. and the ist sing. du. pi.
Impv. (Pres. i.^ff^R, 2.^T%fi5f, 3.^f%; Du. i.^fH'i^, &C*.; PI. i.% fa **?*(,
3. ^f-TWftf; Impf. i. '3RfVrnT, 2 . VH^cjf, & c . . pi. 3. 4l^r*r*it(, &c.; Impv.
i. fftf'TTf'T; Du. i. ^frf5fre; PI. i.
342. CLASS 7 (containing about 24 Primitive verbs). Rule for
forming the stem in the four Special tenses.
Insert ^ na (changeable to ?n na after ri &c. by 58) between the
vowel and final consonant* of the root before the P terminations,
and ^ n (changeable to T, *T, TJT, a, or Anusvaraf, according to the
consonant immediately succeeding) before all the other terminations.
Obs. This class resembles the and and 3rd in interposing no vowel
between the final consonant of the root and the terminations.
a. The insertion of nasals is common in other roots besides those of the 7th class
(cf. 270. d, 281, 487. b), and cf. certain Greek and Latin roots ; as, paQ, f*av6av(o ;
Aa/3, A/x/3ai/o>; Qty, Qiyydva; scid, scindo; fid,findo; tag, tango; liq, linquo,
&c. See 260.
343. Thus, from fa^ bhid, * to divide/ ' to break,' is formed the
stem of the Present tense singular fTT^ bhinad, and the stem of the
dual and plural far^ bhind, changeable to bhinat and bhint by 46
( i . bhinad + mi = fTTfa, 3. bhinad +ti = f*Rf% ; Du. i . bhind + vas =
, 3. bhind + tas fa??n^ or fif^ (298. c) ; PI. 3. bhind + anti =
See the table at 583.
344. Similarly, from ^ rudh, 'to hinder/ the two stems ^BT^
runadh and ^w rundh, changeable to runat, runad, and rund (i.
* All the roots in this class end in consonants.
t The change to Anusvara will take place before sibilants and |T. See 6. a.
166 VERBS. GROUP III. FORMATION OF STEM.
runadh + mi J^nrftfl, 2. runadh + si = J^jrfw, 3. runadh + ti =
Du. 3. rundh + tas = ^vfqj ; see 671. So also, from f^, 'to grind,*
the two stems fqT and fifa (Pres. 3. fq^ + fir = ftTrfi? ; Impv. 2.
ftl ftrpf^T or
345. Observe Roots ending in "i(jt and <? d may reject these letters before th, t,
and dhi, when n immediately precedes ; see 298. . b. c.
346. >JT ' to eat,' ^3f ' to join,' f^^ ' to distinguish,' conform to 296. Hence,
from bhuj come bhunaj and bhuhj, changeable to bhunak and bhunk ; see
668. a.
347. *TW'to break,' '3T5J 'to anoint,' "ST^tf 'to moisten,' ^1 'to kindle,'
f^T ' to injure,' IRr or iT5^ ' to contract,' fall under this class ; but the nasal be-
longing to the root takes the place of the conjugational nasal, and becomes T na
in the strong forms. Hence, from bhanj come the two stems bhanaj and bhanj,
changeable to bhanak and bhank ; from und come unad and und (Pres. 3. unatti,
-mil us, undanti; Impf. i. aunadam, 2. aunas, 3. aunat ; Du. 3. auntdm, &c.) See
669, 668, 673. Similarly, from ^**f Pres. i. indhe, 2. intse, 3. inddhe; PI. 3. in-
dhate , Impf. 2. ainddhds, 3. ainddha; Impv. I. inadhai, &c.
348. rf?, 'to strike,' 'to kill,' inserts *u instead of If before all the consonantal P
terminations (Pan. vn. 3, 92), but not before those beginning with vowels. See 674.
GROUP III. CONJUGATION III.
349. CLASS 5 (containing about 30 Primitive verbs). Rule for
forming the stem in the four Special tenses.
Add j nu (changeable to *j by 58) to the root, which must be
gunated into tft no (changeable to Wt) before the P terminations
(290. a) *. Roots ending in consonants add nuv, instead of nu, to the
root before the vowel-terminations. Roots ending in vowels may
drop the u of nu before initial v and m (not marked with P), and
always reject the termination hi of the Imperative. See 293.
350. Thus, from fa 6i, ' to gather,' are formed the stems 6ino and cinu (Pres. i.
cino+mi=f^ftf7, &'wo+j=f^ftfo by 70; Du. I. tinu+ vas=^^^(ot^^(t
PL i. &'nu+nuz*=f^JlT^ or PI*M^, 3. tinu + anti = fa r<=f ffl by 34 ; Impv. i. tino
+am=f^rRTfT by 36. a, 2. fTJ tinu by 291). See the table at 583.
351. Similarly, fr. 5 du, 'to burn,' come duno, dunu, and dunuv ; fr. ^Tn^o;p, 'to
obtain,' come dpno, dpnu, and dpnuv, see 6815 fr. rpj/to satisfy,' tripno, tripnu,
and tripnnv, see 618.
* The change of nu to no before the P terminations is represented in Gr. by the
lengthening of v before certain terminations, as in %tvy-vv-[j.i, ^eiK-vv-p.1, but
See 260.
VERBS. GROUP III. FORMATION OF STEM. 167
352. W sru, 'to hear' (sometimes placed under the ist class), substitutes T|J sri
for the root, and makes its stems srino and srinu. See 676.
a. <*^'to deceive,' *5^and W**^'to support,' ^jJW^'to stop,' and Jj^^'to
astonish,' reject their nasals in favour of the conjugational nu ; thus, dabhnu,
skabhnu, &c.
353. CLASS 8 (containing 10 Primitive verbs). Rule for forming
the stem in the four Special tenses.
Add "3 u to the root, which must be gunated into ^ft o before the
P terminations (see 290. a).
Note Only ten roots are generally given in this class, and nine of these end
in ^n or ^ra,- hence the addition of u and o will have the same apparent effect
as the addition of nu and no in cl. 5.
354. Thus, from T&^tan, 'to stretch,' are formed the stems tano and tanu (Pres.
i. <ano-fmi=ilftf' : r, 2. t ano + si= rt tVfa by 70; Du. I. /araM+as=if^^or rt'^J
PL I. tanu + mas =HtJ*ffi[ or fT**^; Impv. i. t ano -f am = rt 1 l i Pf by 36. a, 2. TTJ
/awu, see 293). Cf. Gr. rdvvfj.1, Ta.vvp.ev.
a. The root W^ san, ' to give/ optionally rejects its n, and lengthens the radical
a before the y of the Potential; thus, Wn^sanydm or \m*\^sdydm, 8cc.
b. When the vowel of a root is capable of Guna, it may optionally take it ; thus
the stem of ^TIT ' to go ' may be either ^pjj or ^fl| ( i . ^TCinfiT or ^pjftftl).
355. One root in this class, J kri, * to do/ ' to make/ is by far
the most common and useful in the language. This root gunates
the radical vowel ri, as well as the conjugational u, before the P
terminations. Before the other terminations it changes the radical
ri to ur. The rejection of the conjugational u before initial m (not
marked with P) and v, which is allowable in the 5th class, is in this
verb compulsory, and is, moreover, required before initial y. Hence
the three stems karo, kuru, and kur. See 682.
356. CLASS 9 (containing about 52 Primitive verbs). Rule for
forming the stem in the four Special tenses.
Add fT nd to the root before the P terminations ; ft ni before all
the others, except those beginning with vowels, where only ^ n is
added (see 290. a).
Obs. "iTT, tf, and r^ are changeable to TUT, ^% and *^, by 58.
357. Thus, from ^ yu, 'to join/ are formed the three stems yund, yum, and yun
(Pres. i. yMna'-f-?ni=*pTTf'T; Du. i.yunt+t>as=^l^^[J PL
JHT, 3. yzm+anft'=^TfiT'. Pres. Atm. i. ywn+e=^'Tj Impv.
2. yn/+Ai=*pftff , &c.)
a. Obs. Roots ending in consonants substitute ana for their
168 VERBS. GROUP III. FORMATION OP STEM.
conjugational sign in and sing. Impv., and reject the termination hi;
e. g. W%1*1 * eat thou/ from ^31 ' to eat ;' tpusr ' nourish thou/ from
tj'S ; "Spron ' shake thou/ from "spr, &c. See 696, 698, 694.
358. ^ 'to go,' 5ft 'to go,' c?ft 'to go,' 'to choose,' WT 'to choose,' c5^ 'to ad-
here/ ^ 'to fear,' 'to bear,' T5/t 'to destroy,' ^'to shake,' ^'to purify' (583), cj
'to cut' (691), ^'to go,' "BR 'to hurt,' -^'to sound,' *T 'to grow old,' ? 'to split,'
^T 'to lead,' T'to fill,' >^'to bear,' 'to blame,' J 'to kill,' *[or ^'to choose,' 3T
'to injure,' ^3" 'to spread,' *? or ^R 1 or W or Tf to hurt,' shorten the radical vowel
in forming their stems; thus, from ^ to purify' come the stems puna, punt, and
pun ; see the table at 583.
a. "aft 'to buy,' V\ 'to love,' ^ft 'to cook,' ^ or ^ f 'to sound,' ^ 'to hurt,' do
not shorten their vowels. See 689, 690.
359- ^^> ** take,' becomes f?, and makes its stems ^%ii, ^%fl^ and 3 J^n.
See 699.
a. aRJT, 'to grow old,' becomes ftl, and makes its stems jind, jin{, and jin.
360. ^y, ?T*^> "T^j T5*Tj ^*^T, and ^cfT reject the radical nasal in favour
of the conjugational ; thus, from bandh are formed the three stems badhnd, badhni,
and badhn. See 692, 693, 695.
361. ?TT 'to know,' in the same way, rejects its nasal in favour of the conjuga-
tional, and makes its stems jdnd, jtini, and jdn. See 688.
362. ^^ N , 'to appear as a spectre,' is said to make its stems khaund, Jchaum, and
khaun.
PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE FIRST NINE CLASSES IN
THE SIX GENERAL TENSES.
363. The general rules for the formation of the stem in the Per-
fect, ist and and Futures, Aorist, Precative, and Conditional, apply
to all verbs of the first nine classes indiscriminately ; see 250. a.
The loth class alone carries its conjugational characteristic into most
of the General tenses ; for this reason the consideration of its last
tenses falls most conveniently under Causal verbs. See 289. a.
Reduplicated Perfect (Second Preterite).
Terminations repeated from 346.
PARASMAI. ATMANE.
a (au)
*iva
*ima
e
*ivahe
*imahe
itha or tha
athus
a
*ishe
dthe
*idhve or *idhve
a (au)
atus
us
e
ate
ire
t li however, may optionally shorten it.
VERBS. REDUPLICATED PERFECT. FORMATION OF STEM. 169
364. Rule for forming the stem in verbs of the first nine classes.
In the first place, with regard to reduplication, if a root begin
with a consonant, double the initial consonant, with its vowel, accord-
ing to the rules given at 252 (but a is reduplicated for a radical a,
a, ri, ri, Iri, and even for radical e, ai, o, if final ; i for i, i, e ; u for
u, u, o) ; e. g.
From TJ^pat, ' to cook,' papa6; fr. TfT^ydd, ' to ask,' yaydi; ft. ^f kri, ' to do,'
fakri ; fr. "JIT nrit, 'to dance,' nanrit ; fr. TT tri, 'to cross,' tatri ' ; fr. "*j*{klrip, 'to
be able,' taklrip fr. ^ me, ' to cbange,' mame ; fr. ^ gai, ' to sing,' jagai ; fr. *ft so,
' to finish,' saso ; fr. ftf^sieZA, ' to accomplish,' sishidh (70) ; fr. Wfr^jYp, ' to live,'
jijfo; fr. ^T^*e, 'to serve,' sishev; fr.'Zdru, 'to run,' dudru; fr. "^pu, 'to purify,'
pupu; fr. ^ftbudh, 'to know,' bubudh fr. 5t^f lob, 'to see,' lulok ; fr. fi?R smi,
'to smile,' sishmi; fr. ^TTsfAa, 'to stand,' tasthd.
a. And if it begin with a vowel, double the initial vowel; e.g. fr.
^TC^ as, 'to be/ comes a as = '%nR( as by 31 ; fr. WF^dp, 'to obtain/
a dp = dp; fr. ^ is h, 'to wish/ i ish=.ish (see 31).
b. In the second place, with regard to changes of the radical
vowel, if the root end in a consonant, gunate* the vowel of the
radical syllable, if capable of Guna (see 28), in ist, 2nd, and 3rd
sing. Par. ; but leave the vowel unchanged before all other termina-
tions, both Par. and Atm.
c. If the root end in a simple consonant, preceded by short a,
this a is lengthened optionally in ist and necessarily in 3rd sing. ;
and before the other terminations it is either left unchanged, or is
liable to become e (see 375. a).
d. If the root end in a vowel, vriddhi the vowel of the radical
syllable in ist and 3rd sing. Par.f, and gunate it in 2nd sing.
(optionally in ist sing.) Before all other terminations, Parasmai
and Atmane, the root must revert to its original form, but the
terminations must be affixed according to euphonic rules J.
365. Thus, fr. ^>I budh, cl. i, comes the stem of the sing. Parasmai
* The gunation of the vowel is indicated by the P of *P^> f^, JJJ^, in the
singular terminations. See scheme at 245.
f Vriddhi is indicated by the ^ of TET^naP. See scheme at 245.
J Greek affords many examples of verbs which suffer a kind of Guna or Vriddhi
change in the Perfect ; but this change is not confined to the singular, as in
Sanskrit. Compare AeXo;wa (fr. Ae/7rco, c\tnw), TrevotQa (fr. we^cw, 7rt6ov),
>a (fr. Tpe<w), Tf^UlM (fr. T/!%>u), &c.
z
170 VERBS. REDUPLICATED PERFECT. FORMATION OF STEM.
and the stem of the rest of the tense "Q^ftbubudh (i. bubodh -\-a=bubodha, 2. bubodh
+ it ha = bubodhitha, 3. bubodh + a = bubodha ; Du. i . bubudh + iva =. bubudhiva,
2. bubudh -\- athus=.bubudhathus, &c. Kim. i. bubudh + e = bubudhe, &c.)
Similarly, fr. f%<| wid, cl. 2, 'to know,' come the two stems f^^ vived and
fafa<T vivid (i. 3. viveda; Du. i. vividiva ; PL I. vividima, &c. *)
From Xpf, 'to cook,' the two stems ^JTT^/mpaV and TTF9 papa6 (i. papdda or
papa6a, ^.papd6a, &c.)
366. Again, fr. c An, to do' (see 684), comes the stem of the ist and 3rd sing.
Par. ^T^ 6akdr (252. b), the stem of the 2nd sing, ''tt'^.fakar (which is optionally
the stem of the ist sing, also), and the stem of the rest of the tense ^^ fakri
(i. 6akdr -\-a-fakdra (or 6akard), 2. 6akar-\-tha=6akartha, 3. fakdr -\- a=.6akdra ;
Du. i. fakri -\-va-6akriva (369), 2. 6akri-\-athus=fakrathus by 34. Atm. I. (fair*
+e=.fakre; PL 2. <fA;n4-rfAe=:^^'. See 684).
a. Observe The roots enumerated at 390. a. reject Guna in the
2nd sing. ; thus, ft^ makes i. 3. fror, but 2. f%f^fT^. So ^f or ^
*to cry' makes i. ^R1^ or ^R, 2. "^^^"1.
367. We have seen at 364. a. that if a root, ending in a single
consonant, begin with a vowel, this vowel is repeated, and the two
similar vowels blend into one long one by 31. But when an initial
i or u is gunated in the sing. Par., then the reduplicated i becomes
iy before e t and the reduplicated u becomes uv before o ; thus, fr.
^ish, 'to wish/ come the two stems iyesh and ish (i. 3. ^*R; Du.
i. ^ft^; see 637) ; and fr. gr^ ukh, ' to move,' uvokh and ukh (i. 3.
^te; Du. i. "gift^).
0. The same holds good in the root f ', ' to go/ which makes
the reduplicated syllable iy before the Vriddhi and Guna of the sing.
In the remainder of the tense the stem becomes iy (cf. 375. e), which
is reduplicated into iy (i. 3. ^THT, 2. ^rf^R or ^ta; Du. i. ^f*re).
But when the prep, adhi is prefixed, the Perf. is formed as if from
ffd, Aim. only (Sing. Du. PI. 3. adhijage, -jagdte, -jagire).
b. And if a root begin with *S( a, and end in a double consonant,
or begin with ^ ri and end in a single consonant, the reduplicated
syllable is ^n^ an ; thus, fr. ^i^t x art, ' to worship/ comes the stem
^TR^ dnar6 (1.3. ^TR 1 ^) ; fr. ^V ridh, ' to flourish/ comes 'STRv dnardh
(1.3. ^TRV; Du. i. ^n^ftn?, &c.)
* One Greek root agrees very remarkably with the Sanskrit in restricting Guna
to the singular, viz. FiO (iO(o), 'to know* (= Sk. vid above); thus, oi$a, oieOa,
cl 8e ; Jo-Toy, /O-TOV ; ivptv, /ore, /Vaa/. Rt. vid has a contracted Perf. used for
the Present, which agrees exactly with oloa, ; thus, veda, vettha, &c. See 308. a.
VERBS. REDUPLICATED PERFECT. FORMATION OF STEM. 171
c. ^TS^A'tm. 'to pervade,' although ending in a single consonant SI, follows the
last rule (1.3. ^TT*n(T).
368. Obs. In the Perfect the ist and 3rd sing. Par. and Ktm.
have the same termination, and are generally identical in form ; but
when Vriddhi of a final vowel is required in both, then there is
optionally Guna in the first ; and when a medial a is lengthened,
this a may optionally remain unchanged in the first ; thus ^i ' to do '
may be in i st sing, either ^ofin; or ^R, and TJ^ * to cook ' may be
tnTT^ or xnre in ist sing. ; but in 3rd sing, they can only make
^cfiTt and mu^.
369. By referring back to the scheme at 363, 246, it will be seen
that all the terminations of this tense (except optionally the and sing.
Par.) begin with vowels. Those which begin with i are all (except
the 3rd pi. Atm.) distinguished by the mark *, because eight roots
only in the language (viz. ^ * to do t/ ^ * to bear/ ^ ' to go/ ^ ' to
surround/ ^j ' to hear/ ^[ * to praise/ jj ' to run/ j| sru, ' to flow ')
necessarily reject the i from these terminations.
Some roots, however, optionally reject i from these terminations, see T5W 371.
Eejection of i from itha (2nd sing. Perfect., Parasmai).
370. The above eight roots (except ^ vri when it means * to cover/
and except ^ kri, * to do/ when compounded with the prep, sam t)
also reject i from the and sing. Parasmai.
a. Moreover, the and sing. Parasmai is formed with tha instead of
itha after roots ending in ^r ri (except after the root ^ ri itself, and
^ vri and fpj jdgri, which only allow itha ; thus, dritha, vavaritha,
jdgaritha ; and except ^ at 5) ;
b. and optionally with tha or itha after the root ^ svri^to sound*
(sasvartha or sasvaritha) ;
c. and optionally with tha or itha after roots ending in ^n a, e
(except ^ vye, which allows only itha), and after roots in 5* ai, 'Wfr o,
%i,$i,^u, and the root ^'to shake' (except those indicated at 392,
as necessarily inserting i in the Futures &c. ; e. g. fa, which makes
Sisrayitha only, and so also most roots in "31 t?) ;
d. and optionally with tha or itha after those roots enumerated at
t But f ' to do,' if ^ is inserted after a preposition, as in IT^i, does not reject i,
and follows 374. k ; thus, 2. |fasfT*?.
Z 2
1 72 VERBS. REDUPLICATED PERFECT. FORMATION OF STEM.
400-414, which have a medial a, and which reject i either necessarily
or optionally from the Futures &c. (e.g. ^TF, sekitha or sasaktha ;
B|T , 6akshamitha or takshantha, &c.) ; but not ^ and Tl^, which
can only make dditha, jaghasitha ;
e. and optionally with tha or itha after most of the roots enume-
rated at 415, as optionally inserting i in the Futures &c. :
f. but all other roots, which necessarily take i, and even most of
those (having no medial a) at 400414 which necessarily reject i in
the Futures &c., must take itha only in the 2nd sing, of the Perfect ;
thus TJ^ is ffterfa tottdsi in the and sing, ist Future, but ipfrf^I tuto-
ditha in the 2nd sing. Perfect (Du. i. tutudiva). Some few of these,
however, are allowed the alternative of tha, as ^p^ * to create ' makes
tltinHvf or *T ; ^si ' to 'see/ ^f$l or ^53 ; both these roots requiring
the radical ri to be changed to T ra, instead of gunated, when tha
is used.
g. IT^ 'to dip* and TS^ 'to perish,' which belong to 370. d, insert
a nasal when tha is used ; thus, HHPnfui or inhra, ^f^ni or tFTff.
h. ^ ' to be satisfied ' and "arc ' to be proud/ which belong to
370. e, either gunate the radical ri or change it to * ra when tha
is used (ifir or wgTT or drift? vj).
Obs. When tha is affixed to roots ending in consonants, the
rules of Sandhi (296-306) must be applied.
Optional rejection of i, in certain cases, from the dual and remaining
terminations (of the Perfect, Parasmai and jftmane, marked with *).
371. The roots enumerated at 415, as optionally rejecting or in-
serting i in the Futures &c., may optionally reject it also from the
dual and remaining terminations of the Perfect marked with * in
the table at 363 ; thus Tjp^ makes ^HjfHcf or MHf<H> 'MBfU or ^BjfaM,
^V5ff*H*! or -Milj^H^ ; but the forms with the inserted i are the most
usual, and all other roots, even those which necessarily reject i from
the Futures &c. (except the eight enumerated at 369), must take i in
the dual and remaining terminations of the Perfect marked with *.
Observe The i is never rejected from the 3rd pi. Atmane, except
in the Veda.
Substitution of ^ for ui (znd pi. Perfect, Atmane).
372. ^ dhve is used instead of si dhve by the eight roots at 369,
VERBS. REDUPLICATED PERFECT. FORMATION OF STEM. 173
also in certain cases by the roots mentioned at 371. The usual rules
of Sandhi must then be observed, as in T3T? from spgr.
a. ^ for ^ST may be optionally used by other roots when a semi-
vowel or h immediately precedes, as c(f%I or -f^ from <3, fafafafcf
or -fn| from stf.
Anomalies in forming the stem of the Perfect.
373. Roots ending in ^Tf d (as <fT da, 'to give ;' VT dhd, 'to place ;' *TT yd, 'to go ;'
WT sthd, ' to stand ') drop the d before all the terminations except the tha of the
2nd sing., and substitute ^u au for the terminations of the ist and 3rd sing. Parasmai.
Hence, from ^\dd comes the stem ^dad( 1.3.^1, 2. <^f\VIor(qI*i; Du.
A'tm. i. 3. ^", 2. ^f^, &c. See 663).
a. qfVjl 'to be poor' makes i. 3. <^fX$T; Du. 3. ^{VjiJ^; PL 3.
or more properly takes the periphrastic form of Perfect. See 385.
b. aZTT 'to grow old' has a reduplicated stem fViTqi (i. 3. f stuff, 2. f or
ftrHsni; Du. i. f*i(Vqq). Similarly, an uncommon root T*n A'tm. 'to instruct'
makes 1.3. ffTtf.
c. TT ' to throw,' *ft ' to destroy,' ' to perish,' must be treated in the sing, as if
they ended in d; and ^t cl. 9, 'to obtain,' may optionally be so treated; thus,
Sing. i. *WT, 2. unt^J or Tf*T*I, 3. Tm J Du. i. fMfw|'(. But <^t is i. 7J?5T or
fcSc*!*!, 2. (ScSTO or pjfVjxf or f<5?^T or fei'eifrw ', Du. i. fcjfdH.
d. Most roots ending in the diphthongs ^ e (except 55", ^", ^T, ^, &c., see e.f),
^ ai, ^n o, follow 373, and form their Perfect as if they ended in a; thus, ^ cl. i,
' to drink,' ist and 3rd sing. 7*>n, 2. ^tV*I or JVTO, Du. i. ^tV^ ; ^ cl. I, 'to sing,'
1. 3. PTT, 2. 'STfT'I or PTTO; cl. I, 'to fade,' i. 3. f^; $ft cl. 4, 'to sharpen,'
1.3. W^
e. But 3f ' to call' forms its stem as if from |T, see 595 (i. 3. JH, &c.)
/. ^ Atm. 'to pity,' 'to protect,' makes its stem digi (i. 3. f^M, 2. f^(*Mf, &c.)
g. ^I'to cover' makes vivydy, vivyay, and vivy (1.3. fa**!!*!, 2. rq^f-H'*!; Du. i.
f%^lf*TO or f^*t^, &c.)
h. ^T ' to weave ' forms its stems as if from vd or vav or vay (1.3. ^T or T=Tr*7,
2. ^fVT or fMl"4 or "3^f^T; Du. i. ^f^H or '*P1V or ^Rf^, &c. Atm. i. 3. ^
or "3!^ or "3!^, &c.)
*. "^ Atm. ' to be fat ' makes regularly ^T, "Tf^TM, &c. ; but the root TT*T,
meaning the same, and often identified with "QT, makes PMM, f^fl 1 ^, &c.
374. If a root end in ^ t or ^ t, this vowel does not blend with the initial i of
the terminations in du. pi. Parasmai, sing. du. pi. A'tmane, but is changed to y, in
opposition to 31 ; thus, from fa 6i, cl. 5, ' to collect,' come the stems 6i6ai, 6i6e,
and cici, changeable to 6i6dy, ti6ay, and 6i6y (i. 3. &6dya, 2. 6i6ayitha or 6i6etha;
Du. i . fWfH^ cifyiva, 2. tifyathus by 34. Atm. i. 3. 6i6ye. See the table at 583).
Obs. fa may also substitute faBT*T for fa^T*T and fa^R for
174 VERBS. REDUPLICATED PERFECT. FORMATION OF STEM.
a. Similarly, rftni', 'to lead' (i. 3. nindya ; Du. i. ninyiva. Atm. i. ninye, &c.);
and c5T U (Du. I. lilyiva; A'tm. i. lilye).
b. f^ji, ' to conquer,' makes its stem f*ff*T, as if from gi (i. 3. f*I*Tni J Du. i.
frfnr^, &c. See 590).
c. f% hi, 'to go,' ' to send,' makes fwfa, as if from ghi (1.3. 11^1*4).
d. tf Atm. 'to sink,' ' to decay,' makes its stem f^(ta throughout! thus, i. 3.
f^fft, 2. f^ftftre, &c.
e. But roots ending in \i or ^ {, and having a double initial consonant, change
t or (to ^ iy before all terminations, except those of the sing. Parasmai; hence,
from f^f cl. i, 'to resort to,' come the three stems sisrai, sisre, and &sriy (i. 3.
f$l'WI, 2. f^l^fa^; Du. i. f$lP5lfV<*, &c.) So "aft cl. 9, 'to buy' (i. 3. fasRtq,
2. f^3ifMV| or f^yjil; Du. i. "farfafa^, &c. See 689).
/. f*5f svi, ' to swell,' like 2^" at 373. e, forms its stem as if from ^, but only op-
tionally ; thus, i. 3. fVHJm or 3131 N, 2. f$P3T or fV'Mf*!^ or Tjreffa or ^mfatf.
g. And all roots ending in 7 u or ^1 u change u or u to '3^w before the termina-
tions of the du. and pi. Parasmai and the whole Atmane (except of course ^, ^
jT, ^, in the persons marked with * at 246; and except ^J/to be,' see t. below) ;
thus, fr. ^dhu, ' to shake,' come the stems dudhau, dudho, and dudhuv (1.3. ^^T^,
2. |[Vfa*I or ^ft^l; Du. i. ^f^. A'tm. i. 3. ^^). Similarly, ^ u, Atm. 'to
sound,' makes I. 3. "3!^, 2. "3if%*T.
h. But ^ makes i. 3. ^pfR, 2. ^^fV?l; Du. I. ^J^> 2. ^^^^t^. A'tm. i. 3.
^pjj^; and similarly, ^, "5, and ^ sru.
t. *J^'to be ' is anomalous, and makes its stem "3^J? throughout; see 585, 586.
So ^' to bring forth' makes in the .Veda *H4.
j. <S*tJ ' to cover ' (although properly requiring the periphrastic form of Perfect,
see 385) is reduplicated into "35^^ . In the 2nd sing, it may reject Guna ;
thus, ^1^*?^^ or ^^f^xf, 3rd sing. awiriN; Du. i.
K- 3-
k. Roots ending in ^ ri, preceded by a double consonant, and most roots in long
"^ ri, instead of retaining this vowel and changing it to r by 364. d, gunate it into
ar in the 2nd sing., and throughout the whole tense, except the ist and 3rd sing.
(and even in the ist there may be optionally Guna by 368) ; e. g. *& smri, 'to re-
member,' i. sasmdra or sasmara, 2. sasmartha, 3. sasmdra ; Du. I. sasmariva, &c.
Atm. i. 3. sasmare.
I. But >| dhri, 'to hold,' not being preceded by a double consonant, makes regu-
larly i. sing. DU. PL ^nt, ^ftnr, ^ftm.
m. *J ' to fill,' 3T ' to injure,' and <T to rend,' may optionally retain n, changeable
to r; thus, Du; *mfVt or HPR^.
n. ^ ri, ' to go,' takes Vriddhi, and makes its stem ^STIT; dr throughout ; thus,
i. 3. ^R, 2. *ufci ; Du. i. ^rrfic^.
o. | Atm. ' to die,' although properly Atmane, is Parasmxi in Perfect ; thus,
i. 3. *HTR, 2.
VERBS. REDUPLICATED PERFECT. FORMATION OF STEM. 175
p. rPJ 'to awake,' which properly takes the periphrastic form of Perfect
( TT1 M*a <*!*;, see 385), may also take the reduplicated form, and may optionally
drop the reduplicated syllable; thus, I. 3. TnTFin; or *TPTTT, 2. 3l'H1 J lfXv| or
TTnft^I (370. a).
q. *T 'to swallow' may optionally change Tto ^; thus, PTRor TJneJ.
r. Tf 'to pass' follows 375.0, as if it were cTT.; thus, i. 3. TTTTTT, 2.
Du. i. Ifftw.
s. 'Sf 'to grow old' optionally follows 375.0 (3. rTTT, 2. *f*f(Xv| or ^
Du. 3. *fHjJ^ or <n*jj^).
375. We have already seen, at 364, that roots beginning with any consonant
and ending with a single consonant, and enclosing short ^5T a, lengthen this vowel
in the 3rd sing, and optionally in the ist; as, fr. T^paJ, 'to cook,' ifm*3 papdt;
fr. tyaj, 'to quit,' tatydj (i. 3. tatydja, 2. tatyajitha or tatyaktha; Du. I. tatya-
jiva, &c.)
a. Moreover, before itha and in du. and pi. Parasmai, and all persons of the
A'tmane, if the initial as well as the final consonant of the root be single, and if
the root does not begin with ^ v, and does not require a substituted consonant in
the reduplication, the reduplication is suppressed, and, to compensate for this, the
'ST a is changed to ^ e * ; thus, from pad come the stems WF^papdd, papa6, and
H^ \ pe6 (\.papd6a or papaya, z.petitha orpapaktha by 296, frpapafa; Du. i.petiva.
Atm. i. 3. pete, &c.) Similarly, from <9>T labh, cl. i, Atm. 'to obtain' (cf. Aa/x-
(3a.u(D, eAa/3cv), the stem 7JH lebh throughout (lebhe, lebhishe, lebhe, lebhivahe, &c.)
So T? nali, 'to bind,' makes i. nandha or nanaha, 2. nehitha or nanaddha by 305,
3. nandha; Du. I. nehiva, &c. A'tm. nehe, &c.
Similarly, T3^ nas, 'to perish,' I. nandsa or nanafa, 2. nesitha or nananshthu
(Tn?), 3. nandsa, &c. : see 620, 370. g.
b. Roots that require a substituted consonant in the reduplication are excepted
from 375. a (but not VR^bhaj and Tfit^ phal, see g. below) ; thus, *Rff 'to speak '
makes i. 3. "^HTO; Du. i. "SRftire.
c. ^'to speak,' ^ 'to say,' ^'to sow,' ^31 'to wish,' ^'to dwell,' ^
'to carry,' beginning with v, are also excepted. These require that the redupli-
cated syllable be "3u, or the corresponding vowel of the semivowel, and also change
va of the root to ^ u before every termination, except those of the sing. Parasmai,
the two M'S blending into one long ^ u; thus, fr. "3^vad, 'to speak,' come the
two stems T^T^wracf and "3?^ u6 (i.uvdda or uvata, 2. uvatitha or uvaktha, 3. uvdto;
Du. 3. ufatus ; PL 3. u6us).
Obs. This change of a semivowel to its corresponding vowel is called Sampra-
sarana by native grammarians (Pan. i. i, 45).
d. '3% vah, ' to carry,' changes the radical vowel to ^n o before tha (see 305. a),
optionally substituted for itha (i. 3. ^l^, 2. ^q C^t or <r*fl<e). Compare 424.
Obs. ^JT vam, 'to vomit,' is excepted from 375. c (thus, 3. vavdma, vavamatus,
* Bopp deduces forms like petiva, from papativa, by supposing that the second
p is suppressed, the two a's combined into a, and d weakened into e.
176 VERBS. REDUPLICATED PERFECT. FORMATION OF STEM.
vavamus, Pan. vi. 4, 126) ; it may also, according to Vopadeva, follow 375. a (3. va-
vdma, vematus, remus).
e. q*^ yaj, to sacrifice,' is excepted from 375. a, and follows the analogy of
375. c (i. 3. iydja ; Du. 3. yatus , PI. 3. ijus) : the 2nd sing, is ^F ftr*T or ^Hf by
297; A'tmane i. 3. ^T, 2. *^T9, see 597. Yej is allowed optionally in the weak
forms, and optionally in 2nd sing., especially in the Veda.
/. 3T^ 'to injure' and ^ Atm. 'to give' are excepted from 375.0
g. T^'to honour,' ^P^'to loosen,' ?P(/to be ashamed,' "3!?$ ' to bear fruit,'
necessarily conform to 375.0, although properly excepted (thus, HfHI, *rfT^,
&c.) The following conform to 375.0. optionally : TROT 'to go,' ^*^'to sound,'
(according to some) *jT^'to sound,' WT 'to wander,' ^'to vomit,' and (accord-
ing to some) W^and ^P^'to sound,' 3^ 'to tremble' (thus, ^Tfiftpzi or TfiftlRT,
TTRiftiR or tfiftUR, &c.)
A. The following also conform optionally to 375.0.- y ^ ' to tie,' ^IrVI 'to
loosen,' <JT 'to deceive;' and, when they do so, drop their nasals (thus, T?lfvr*r
or i}f(f, fJJ-^ or d^)-
t. The following, although their radical vowel is long, also conform optionally
to 375. a : TT5^, WF^ Atm., ^T3T, and $fT3I, all meaning ' to shine ' (lAjfH or
VR, &c.)
j. ^TV, when it signifies 'to injure,' necessarily conforms to 375.0 (2. T^^HI;
Du. i. tfaf, 3- Tvg^;; Pi. 3 .>^;).
k. Tt ' to pass ' follows 375. a, and J ' to grow old ' may do so. See 374. r. s.
376. *1*T gam, 'to go,' ^f^jan, 'to be born,' 1&{khan, 'to dig,' and ^^Afl,
' to kill ' (which last forms its Perfect as if from TTf^ ghan), drop the medial a
before all the terminations, except those of the sing. Par. (cf. the declension of
rdjan at 148). Hence, gam makes in sing. du. pi. 3. jagdma, jagmatus, jagmus ;
jan makes jajdna,jajnatus, jajnus ; khan makes fakhdna, fakhnatus, fakhnus; and
han makes I. ^.jaghdna,jaghnatus,jaghnus, z.jaghanitha orjaghantha.
377. "m^ghas, 'to eat,' is analogous, making jaghdsa,jakshatus,jakshus; Du. i.
jakshiva. See 44 and 70. And in the Veda some other roots follow this analogy ;
thus, t^' to fall' Orftnr&c.); Tl^'to stretch' (ilf^&c.); >T^'to eat'C^Rf&c.)
378. VS^'to adhere,' *<r^'to embrace,' and ^S^'to bite,' can optionally drop
their nasals in du. pi. Parasmai and all the Atmane; thus, mrfiTW or ^f^=i,
^^"^ or ^TW^.
379. TV 'to perish' and ^f Atm. 'to yawn' may insert a nasal before vowel-
terminations (TTV, Trf*WI or T3^T ; Du. i . TTf*R or TW, see 37 1 : 1.3. i*i*?).
380. JJ5^ 4 to clean' makes its stem *RT5I in sing. Parasmai, and may do so be-
fore the remaining terminations (1.3. ^im, 2. fmf'i'M or WT^; Du. i. TTlfsfa
or HjfVq or H^af , see 651).
381. Tf%ipra6h, 'to ask,' makes its stem *(Ht5* (becoming MH^ before a vowel
* This rests on Siddhanta-kaum. 134. Some grammarians make the stem in
du. and pi. &c.
VERBS. PERIPHRASTIC PERFECT. 177
by 51) throughout; see 631. tR*T bhrajj, cl. 6, 'to fry,' makes either
*?^T55I throughout. See 632.
a. ^f^ 'to go' gunates the radical vowel throughout; thus, i. 3.
2. 'SITtTfiN; Du. I. ^TRfifa. Stew^
382. W^svap, 'to sleep,' makes its bases ^^l^and ^J^.- See 655.
a. nrW or T?fa 'to spit' may substitute J^t for 7 t in the reduplication; thus,
I. 3. folR or finN, fcrta or fjnrta.
383. ''SI'*! ' to pierce,' ^^ ' to encompass,' to deceive,' ^T*I Atm. ' to be pained,'
make their reduplicated syllable vi ; and the first two roots change vya to vi before
all the terminations, except the sing. Parasmai; thus, from vyadh comes sing.
du. pi. 3. fw^W, "faf^Tipt, "fafe^; Atm. f^f^, &c. : from vya6, fa^CT^,
fafa^TJ^, f^fT*J*[: from vyath, f^CR, f^^TIn, f^Mfv|'t. See 615 and 629.
a. ^Ti^cl. i. Atm., 'to shine,' makes its reduplicated syllable di (i. 3. didyute).
384. yj^ ffrah, cl. 9, ' to take,' makes its stem T?Tfif and 'T'J^ (S. Du. PI. 3.
*TCJ T ^> ** J K(i*l> *^f*0* But sin g- 2 - *T?T^^' See 699.
a. n? to conceal' lengthens its radical vowel instead of gunating it in the sing.
Parasmai, SJJJ^, sprff^, &c.
b. ''ST? ah, 'to say' (only used in Perf.), is defective in sing. du. pi. i. and pi. 2,
and forms 2nd sing, from ^H^ (2. ^rn*I, 3. ^TT^; Du. 2. ^IT^J^, 3. ^155^;
PI. 3. ^).
c. "^'to say' has no Perfect of its own, but substitutes either that of ^^(375. c)
or the above forms from ^T?. Again, ^Trf 'to eat' has a Perfect of its own, but
may substitute that of TJ^ 377. Similarly, ^T5f 'to drive' (ago) may substitute
that of Th
Periphrastic Perfect.
385. Roots which begin with a vowel, long by nature or position
(except the vowel ^rr, as in ^n^ ' to obtain,' 364. a, and in ^sn^3 ' to
stretch ;' and roots having an initial *& before two consonants, 367. b),
and all roots of more than one syllable (except gwjj'/o cover,' 374./;
and except optionally TPJ ' to awake,' 3J4-P, and ^fr^T * to be poor'
373. a), form their Perfects by adding ^TW dm to the root or stem
(which generally gunates its last vowel if ending in z, u, ri, short or
long), and affixing the Perfect of one of the auxiliary verbs, ^re^ as,
' to be ;' ^ bhu, ' to be ;' ^ kri, ' to do.'
a. This dm may be regarded as the ace. case of a feminine abstract
noun formed from the verbal stem. With ^eRn; it becomes ^n^RiR
or ^rNoRn; by 59. Thus, $sr, 'to rule/ makes ist and 3rd sing.
f^rwre or ffcniPJ^ or ^rni'WT: the last might be translated 'he
made ruling/ and in the former cases the ace. may be taken ad-
verbially. So also, ^iTC(, * to shine/ makes ^<*iT^RiT^ f he made
shining/
A a
178 VERBS. FIRST AND SECOND FUTURE. FORMATION OF STEM.
Obs. The stem with dm may sometimes be separated from the auxiliary verb;
e.g. 7T TTinri JliJHH ^TPR 'first he caused him to fall' (Raghu-v. ix. 61), and
jra^nri *ft ^p ^JTR (Raghu-v. xm. 36).
b. When the Atmane inflexion has to be employed, ^ only is
used; thus, f? .tm., Ho praise/ makes ist and 3rd sing. ^TRHfi
' he made praising or praised/
c. Roots of cl. 10 also form their Perfect in this way, the syllable
dm blending with the final a of the stem ; thus, from ^ tur, cl. 10,
* to steal/ 6oraydmdsa, ' I have or he has stolen/
d. Also all Derivative verbs, such as Causals, Desideratives, and
Frequentatives. See 490, 504, 513, 516.
e. Also the roots ^H^ay, 'to go;' <^T day, A'tm. 'to pity;' ^TR^as, A'tm. 'to
sit;' BR^/fca, 'to cough,' 'to shine' (^iT^l^f jfi &c.); see Pan. m. i, 37. 35.
And optionally the roots >Tt bhz, cl. 3, ' to fear ' (feTni or famiT^*R) ; "$ firt,
cl. 3, ' to be ashamed ' (PngiM or f*l*u^<*lT) ; *| bhri, cl. 3, ' to bear ' (^*TTC1 or
f^Htl^<*R) J ^ hu, cl. 3, 'to sacrifice' (^?lW or 5J^H<5rlill) ; f^ vid, cl. 2, 'to
know ' (fa^ or fV^l=a<*iT:) ; ^ ush, cl. i, ' to burn ' ('3<jfa or ^NW<*R).
/. The roots ff*T Atm., ^T^, ^5-j ^^5 1 ^> ^j whose peculiarity of conjuga-
tional form is explained at 271, and ^T^Atm. 'to blame,' may optionally employ a
Periphrastic Perfect, not derived from the root, but from the conjugational stem ;
thus, ^oR^ or <*J*ifli^rat, ^ J ft 1 T or ilmM[^<iT, ^5 or ^jHiMl^r<*iT, fefenj or
, ''TO or *TOT*n^r3iTT (according to Vopa-deva tpUT^Tra'ai), ^*T or
or
g. Observe Stems endmg in i, u, or ri, short or long, are generally gunated
before dm; but <^>ft 'to shine' and Wt 'to go' make tftWRTai, ^^I^^i, &c.
386 First and Second Future.
Terminations of First Future repeated from 246.
PARASMAI. ATM AN E.
tdsmi tdsvas tdsmas
tdsi tdsthas tdstha
td tdrau tdras
Terminations of Second ]
sydmi sydvas sydmas
syasi syathas syatha
syati syatas syanti
tdhe tdsvahe tdsmahe
tdse tdsdthe tddhve
td tdrau tdras
future repeated from 246.
sye sydvahe sydmahe
syase syethe syadhve
syate syete syante
Obs. The First Future results from the union of the Nom. case of the noun
of agency (formed with the suffix TJ tri, see 83) with the Present tense of the verb
s, 'to be;' thus, taking ^TJ dtitri, 'a giver' (declined at 127), and combining
VERBS. FIRST AND SECOND FUTURE. FORMATION OF STEM. 179
its Norn, case with vtU<H asmi and ^ he, we have ddtdsmi and ddtdhe, ' I am a giver,'
identical with the ist pers. sing. Par. and A'tm. of the ist Fut., ' I will give.' So
also ddtdsi and ddtdse, 'thou art a giver,' or 'thou wilt give.' In the ist and 2nd
persons du. and pi. the sing, of the noun is joined with the du. and pi. of the
auxiliary. In the 3rd pers. the auxiliary is omitted, and the 3rd sing. du. and pi.
of the ist Fut. in both voices is then identical with the Norn, case sing. du. and
pi. of the noun of agency; thus, data, a giver,' or ' he will give ;' ddtdrau, 'two
givers,' or 'they two will give,' &c. *
Hence this tense is sometimes called the Periphrastic Future.
387. The terminations of the Second Future appear also to be derived from the
verb ^H^ joined, as in forming the Passive and 4th class, with the y of root *TT ' to
go,' just as in English we often express the Future tense by the phrase ' I am going.'
388. Rule for forming the stem in verbs of the first nine classes.
Gunate the vowel of the root (except as debarred at 28, and
except in certain roots of cl. 6, noted at 390, 390. a) throughout
all the persons of both First and Second Future ; and in all roots
ending in consonants (except those enumerated at 400414), and in
a few ending in vowels (enumerated at 392), insert the vowel ^ i
between the root so gunated, and the terminations.
389. Thus, from fw ji, cl. I, 'to conquer,' comes the stem ^ je (ist Fut. je+
tdsmi=*1Trtfi&, &c. ; A'tm. je+ take =^rTT^. 2nd FvA.je+sydmi=*(Vnfil, &c. ;
A'tm. je+sye = T*r, by 70). Similarly, from ^J sru, cl. 5, 'to hear,' comes the stem
^ sro (ist Fut. 6ro -f- tdsmi =T5ft'ff [fw , &c. ; 2nd Fut. sro + sy ami =W\ M I fa , &c.)
a. So also, from [>! budh, cl. I, 'to know,' comes the stem ^rfv bodhi (ist Fut.
bodhi+ tdsmi =^tfvrili\H, &c. ; A'tm. bodhi+tdhe=^fait\^. 2nd Fut. bodhi+
sydmi rzTtfVoTI fa, &c. ; A'tm. bodhi-\-sye=^\f^f(}.
390. The roots ending in ^M and "3S u of cl. 6, forbidding Guna, are of or "^ ' to
call out,' *T or ^'to void excrement,' Vor^'to be firm,' J or j^'to praise,' ^'to
shake.' These generally change their final u to uv ; thus, ^fTcfT^ &c. from ^,
but ^HT% &c. from ^ ; TTf^inf^R &c. from *T, but ^pTTf^R &c. from *J.
a. The roots ending in consonants of cl. 6, not gunated, are ^^ to contract,*
^R^'to sound,' ^ 'to make crooked,' XT? 'to resist,' ^7 or "S3 'to cut,' ^T 'to
quarrel,' ^T 'to break,' $7 'to embrace,' ^T or ^ or ^ ' to pound,' ?<F7 'to burst
in pieces,' c^ 'to roll,' "^^ 'to play,' JK3 or "5^ 'to be immersed,' ^T, ^^, "^T,
^' H^' ^i ^> ^T> ^> *ffi> a11 meaning 'to cover,' ^ 'to guard,' ^5 'to
hinder,' ff ' to bind,' ^5 ' to strike,' ^5 ' to emit,' cf^ ' to adhere,' J? ' to collect,'
f^'to throw,' n^ Atm. ' to make effort,' "^ ' to cut,' ^^ or ?^c5 'to vibrate,'
1J^ ' to be firm,' ' to go,' e? ' to eat,' nearly all uncommon as verbs. To these
must be added f^H cl. 7, ' to tremble.'
* The future signification inherent in the noun of agency data, seems implied
in Latin by the relation of dator to daturus.
A a 2
180 VERBS. FIRST AND SECOND FUTURE. FORMATION OF STEM!
b. ^Hg 'to cover' may either gunate its final or change it to uv (^Mllf^rflfw or
^nnf^Tfrf^R, ^5tfffV l TTf'T or ^rfjfa^nfa).
c. tfhft Kim. 'to shine,' ~^f\ Atm. 'to go,' drop their finals before the inserted i
(^ftfin? &c.) Similarly, ^fr^T 'to be poor' (^flf^rtlf^R &c., ^ftf^tnfo &c.)
d. Roots in 5? e, T ai, ^u o, change their finals to a; thus, 3^ ' to call '
e. frf 'to throw,' *ft 'to perish,' and fffr Atm. 'to decay,' must change, and
' to obtain' may 'optionally change their finals to a (Jffinf^R, TTOTTfa, &c. ;
&c. ; c3infUf or c5T7TrftH, &c. j ^BTTft or rilWfft, &c.) Compare 373. c.
f. Roots containing the vowel ri, as ^^ to creep,' >JST^ to handle,' ^JST to
touch,' |i^ 'to draw,' are generally gunated, but may optionally change the vowel
ri to ra ; thus, ^TSTTf^R or ^TTTTftR &c., ^T^lfJT or ^STmtTTfa &c.
g. Reversing this principle, VT55T ' to fry ' may make either yiTTftiR or *T?Tf5(;R &c. ?
^^nfiT or vrethfa &c.
h. The alternative is not allowed when i is inserted ; thus, H^ to be satisfied *
makes WHlftR or ^Tnftff, but only iTf*hTTfl3R. Similarly, ?^' to be proud.'
i. ^5T 'to let go,' 'to create,' and "?3T 'to see,' necessarily change ri to raj thus,
t*sifW, y^nftr, &c.; "5?rftR> "^^rrfiT, &c.
j. ^T 'to rub,' 'to clean,' takes Vriddhi instead of Guna (TTf^inftR or *rn?lft?R).
k, T^'to be immersed,' and T5^'to perish' when it rejects i, insert a nasal;
thus, iwfw, f^nf*r, &c. ; !? if^r, Jt^iftT, &c. ; but rf^finfcR &c., rrf^ronfT &c,
I. 'SFH Atm., ^, ^5_, fa^, TTO, ^, ^T^, at 385.7, may optionally carry
their peculiar conjugational form into the Futures (fifa?TT^ or =fiT*rftnTT^,
or jftfarrrftflr or ifttnftnnfw, f^f^irirw or f^r^rfwrfw, ^fffwr^ or
TTT!, &c.)
m. ^TS 'to conceal ' lengthens its vowel when i is inserted. See 415. m.
n. *%(*{ 'to be,' ^and ^"8^'to speak,' have no Futures of their own, and sub-
stitute those of ^, ^^, and ^TT respectively ; ^T5 'to eat' may optionally substitute
the Futures of TJ^, and ^T3T ' to drive ' of Tt (^TflTTnftR or ^rfTftjR &c.) Cf. 384. c.
o. The rules at 296-306 must, of course, be applied to the two Futures ; thus,
f?^ ' to tie' makes Tiwrf*? &c. See 306. b.
Observe The above rules apply generally to the Aorist, Precative (Atmane),
and Conditional, as well as to the two Futures.
RULES FOR INSERTION OR REJECTION OF ^ i IN THE LAST
FIVE TENSES AND DESIDERATIVE.
391. These rules do not apply to form II of the Aorist at 435, nor
to the Parasmai of the Precative at 442, which can never insert i.
a. The insertion of the vowel i (called an dgama or 'augment/
and technically styled it] before the terminations of the General
tenses constitutes one of the most important and intricate subjects
VERBS. RULES FOR INSERTION OR REJECTION OF ^ i. 181
of Sanskrit Grammar. The manifest object of this inserted i which
can never be gunated or vriddhied, but may occasionally be lengthened
into i is to take the place of the conjugational vowel, and prevent
the coalition of consonants. Hence it is evident that roots ending
in vowels do not properly require the inserted i. Nevertheless, even
these roots often insert it ; and if it were always inserted after roots
ending in consonants, there would be no difficulty in forming the
last five tenses of the Sanskrit verb.
Unfortunately, however, its insertion is forbidden in about one
hundred roots ending in consonants, and the combination of the
final radical consonant with the initial t and s of the terminations will
require a knowledge of the rules already laid down at 296306.
We now proceed to enumerate, ist, with regard to roots ending
in vowels ; 2ndly, with regard to roots ending in consonants : A. those
inserting i ; B. those rejecting i ; C. those optionally inserting or
rejecting i. As, however, it is more important to direct attention
to those roots (whether ending in vowels or consonants) which reject
i, the paragraphs under B. will be printed in large type.
Obs. In the following lists of roots the 3rd sing, will sometimes be given
between brackets, and the roots will be arranged generally in the order of their
final vowels and consonants.
Note that if the ist Future reject ^ i, it is generally rejected in form I of Aorist,
in Atmane-pada of Precative, in Conditional, Infinitive, Past Passive Participle,
Indeclinable Past Participle, Future Participle formed with the suffix tavya, and
noun of agency formed with the suffix tri; and often (though not invariably)
decides the formation of the Desiderative form of the root by s instead of ish.
So that the learner may always look to the ist Future as his guide. For example,
taking the root kship, 'to throw,' and finding the ist Fut. to be ksheptdsmi, he
knows that i is rejected. Therefore he understands why it is that the 2nd Fut. is
kshepsydmi ; Aor. akshaipsam; Atmane of Precative, foAzpsiya , Con&.akshepsyamj.
Infin. ksheptum ; Past Pass. Part, kshipta; Indecl. Part, kshiptvd ; Fut. Part.
ksheptavya; noun of agency, ksheptri; Desid. 6ikshipsdmi. On the other hand,
taking root yd6, 'to ask,' and finding the ist Fut. to be ydtitd, he knows that *
is inserted, and therefore the same parts of the verb will be ydtishydmi, aydci-
sham, yd&shtya, aydtishyam, ydtitum, ydtita, ydtitvd, ydditavya, ydtitri, yiydtishdmi,
respectively.
A. Roots ending in Vowels inserting ^i (except as indicated at 391).
392. Five in ^ i and f {, viz. fa ' to resort to ' (^fftfiTT, ^rftTOfil), f^T ' to swell,'
3^ ' to fly,' $ft ' to lie down,' ftR ' to smile' (in Desid. alone).
. Six in 7 M, viz. T 'to sneeze,' T5JGJ 'to sharpen,' J 'to praise,' $ 'to join,'
182 VERBS. RULES FOR INSERTION OR REJECTION OF ^z.
?j 'to sound,' Wsrew, 'to drip ' (the last only when Parasmai ; when inflected in Atm.,
it may reject i).
Obs. ^ ' to praise,' and 1g ' to pour out,' in the Aorist Parasmai.
b. All in ^1 u, as ^' to be' (HfVffT, ^f^^ffa), except ^and ^ (which optionally
reject i), and except in the Desiderative. See 395, 395.0.
c. All in short ^ ri, in the 2nd Future and Conditional, &c., but not in the
1st Future, as 'to do' (^ftTBrflT, but fiiTT).
d. Two in short ^ ri (viz. ^ ' to choose ' and TPJ ' to awake ') also in ist Future
OriTrTT, srftTqfrT, ^TnrfTHT, &c.)
e. All in long ^r/, as TT 'to pass' (iffon, TTfr^rfrT).
393. Observe ^ ' to choose,' and all roots in long "^n, may optionally lengthen
the inserted i, except in Aorist Parasmai and Precative Atmane (TftiTT or
or ^rbqfff, friTITT or "crtfaT, &c.) See 627, note *.
B. Roots ending in Vowels rejecting ^ i.
394. All in *srr a, as ^T ' to give 5 fcnn, ^T^T%).
a. Nearly all in ^ i and ^ z, as fif ' to conquer/ rft to lead' (nn,
r, &c.)
b. Nearly all in short T , as ^ ' to hear 5 (^ftTTT, ^tqfiT).
c. Those in long "35 u generally in the Desiderative only.
d. All in short ^ ri (except =[) in the ist Future only, as ^i 'to
do' (SFHT, but SFftTirfrr). See 392. c.
e. All in ^ e, ^ ai, ^ o. See 390. d.
C. Roots ending in Vowels optionally inserting or rejecting ^ i, either
in all the last five tenses and Desiderative, or in certain of these
forms only.
395- ^ or ^ cl - 2 ' 4' -^ tm - <to orin g forth' (*ft!TT or *lfaWT, Wt"OfiT or 'CfTSIff).
a. ^'to shake' (>lf?rTT or V^ITT, vf%"Blflf or V^"Olfrr, &c., but * must be inserted
in Aor. Par., see 430), ^' to purify,' optionally in Desid. only (^f^> ftwf^Atm.)
b. Tq Atm. 'to grow fat ' (flTlTT and "OTlftlTTT, ^tT^q^ and ^mfoWn; but neces-
sarily inserts * in Desid.)
c. ^f 'to go,' ^ or ^T 'to spread,' 'to cover,' and ^ 'to sound,' all in ist Fut.,
and the latter two optionally in Desid. also (^HlT, ^STfTcTT or (?)
or
or
396. ^fCJT ' to be poor ' optionally in Desid.
397. All roots in long ^ ri optionally in Desid., as "i makes finff^fif or
rft^fiT.
398. f%, *J, ^, ^, optionally in Desiderative. Compare 392.
VERBS. RULES FOR INSERTION OR REJECTION OP ^ '. 183
A. Hoots ending in Consonants inserting ^ i.
399. As a general rule, all roots ending in I? M, *T g, "^gh, Vfijh, Zt, ^ th, "3d,
^ dh, Tl^n, T^t, "V^th, "^ph, "^b, *I y, ^ r, c?S I, \v ; thus, fcS^'to write' makes
JSfWT, ^f^QTfiT, &c. ; "^T ' to leap ' makes ^femfT, qTR?TOlffT.
a. Zff 'to take' lengthens the inserted i in all the last five tenses, except Prec.
Parasmai (*|^1clT, SUTfarfw), see 699. It rejects i in Desid.
B. Roots ending in Consonants rejecting ^ i.
Obs. The rules at 296306 must in all cases be applied. When a number is
given after a root, it indicates that the root only rejects i if conjugated in the class
to which the number refers. When a number is given between brackets, this refers
to the rule under which the root is conjugated.
400. One in ojr k. ^ 5. 'to be able 5 (^rar, ^r^lfa 679).
401. Six in ^ 6. tf^ s ' to cook 5 (mrr, t^ifrf) ; ^* ' to speak 5 (650) ;
fb 7- 'to make empty 5 (\^T, \^rflT); ftr^ 7. 3. 'to separate ;' ftre
c to sprinkle;' i-p^'to loosen' (628).
402. One in ^ 6h. ur^* 'to ask 5 (TUT, IT^lfiT 631).
403. Fifteen in *{j. m^'to quit 5 (596); Hr 'to honour; 5 *nr 'to
sacrifice 5 (597) ; ~^S(\ 6. 'to fry 5 (632) ; JH5T 'to be immersed 5 (633) ;
W^ ' to break 5 (669) ; t^ ' to colour, 5 ' to be attached ; 5 *rg^ ' to adhere 5
(597* ) > ^^ 'to embrace ; 5 ftp^ 'to cleanse 5 (%^>T, ^rfff) ; fr^t 3. 'to
tremble 5 (^3r, &c.); ^6.'to bend, 5 7. 'to enjoy 5 (668.0) ; ^'to join 5
(670) ; ^ 'to break 5 (rteT, &c.) ; ^ ' to create, 5 'to let go 5 (625).
404. One in i^ /. ^ ' to be, 5 ' to turn/ but only in 2nd Fut.
Par., Cond. Par., Aor. Par., Desid. Par. (This root is generally
A r tm. and inserts i, 598.)
405. Fourteen in ^ d. ^ ' to eat 5 (652) ; T^ ' to go 5 (xnn, ^Wm) ;
5T^ 'to perish; 5 ^ 'to sink; 5 ^f?? i. Parasmai, 'to leap; 5 ^<r 'to
void excrement; 5 f^ 'to be troubled 5 (wWT, &c.) ; f$3 'to cut 5
(667) ; fa^ 'to break 5 (583) ; ftr^ 7. 'to reason, 5 4. 'to be, 5 'to exist, 5
6. 'to find; 5 fe? 4. 'to sweat;' ^ 'to pound 5 (sfter, TftWffw); TJ^
*to strike 5 (634); ^ 'to impel. 5
406. Thirteen in -^dh. g^ 'to bind 5 (692) ; ajV 'to pierce 5 (615) ;
TT^'to accomplish 5 (TJST, UWfiff) ; *rm 5. 'to accomplish ; 5 ftr^4- ' to be
accomplished ' (6 1 6) ; jjv ' to be angry 5 (wt^r, atwfif) ; "^ru ' to be hungry ; 5
* H 1 ^ inserts i in the Desiderative.
t y^ optionally inserts i in the Desiderative.
J When f^S^belongs to cl. 7, it takes t ; as, fafTHT, f^fTBlfif. See 390. a.
184 VERBS. RULES FOR INSERTION OR REJECTION OF
"SHI 4. Kim. 'to be aware' (614)*; g^Atm. 'to fight;' ^ro 'to obstruct'
(671) ; ^p ' to be pure ;' ^ 'to increase/ only in 2nd Fut. Par., Cond.
Par., Aor. Par. ; ^pi ' to break wind/ only in 2nd Fut. Par., Cond.
Par., Aor. Par. (both these last insert * throughout the ^tmane).
407. Two in r^n. ^4. Aim. ( to think' (617) ; ^'to kill' (654),
but the last takes i in 2nd Fut. and Conditional.
408. Eleven in t^p. if^'to burn' (rfffT, TTt^crfw); ^'to sow ;' 31
"to curse;' ^^'to sleep' (655) ; ^^n^'to obtain' (681); fo^'to throw'
(635); fin(.Atm.'to distil;' for*/ to anoint;' ^'to touch' (^trn,
^TRTfir) ; c^6. 'to break' (rftwT, <55^qfir) ; ^ to creep' (390.7).
409. Three in *{bh. *pr 'to He with carnally' (*WT, T^fw) ; I?T
Aim. ' to desire' (with *n ' to begin/ 601. a) ; o5* Kim. ' to obtain '
(001)-
410. Five in i^m. 71H ' to go' (602), but takes i in 2nd Fut. and
Cond.; TH*to bend' (FiTT, f^rfrr) ; ^'to restrain;' *H Kim. * to
sport;' "ar^/to walk' in the Atmane (wrTf, it&ni).
411. Ten in ^s. ^3T X 'to bite' (^, 3^fa) ; f^r x 6. 'to point out'
(583) ; fasr ' to enter' fim, ^jfir) ; fb^ ' to hurt ;' f?5^ ' to become
small ;' ^ST s ' to cry out' (-jfiter, ^t^rfir) ; ^3T s 6. 'to hurt ;' -pr i. ' to
see' (390. z, 604, -5^1, J^lfff) ; ^W ' to handle' (39O./) ; ^sr 6. ' to
touch' (390. /, 636, Frtr, ws^ffr).
412. Eleven m\sh. fi^'to shine' ($&[, ^rfir) ; fe^'to hate'
(657); fxr^7. 'to pound;' f^'to pervade;' %^ 7. 'to distinguish'
(672) ; f^ 4. ' to embrace' (301, 302) ; ^ 4. ' to be satisfied'
^4. 'to be sinful;' ^4. 'to be nourished f ' (xrter,
. ' to become dry' (^T, sftelfff) ; ^ ' to draw' (39O./, 606).
413. Two in ^s. Tre^ 'to eat' (wr, idwfrf); ^ i. 'to dwell'
(607) J.
414. Eight in ^ h. ^ to burn' (610) ; 7^ 'to tie' (624);
'to carry' (611) ; f^ 'to anoint' (659) ; fi^r 'to make water'
305. a, ^f?r) ; f&^ 2. 'to lick' (661) ; ff 2. 'to milk' (660) || ;
* to ascend'
* When ^V belongs to cl. i, it inserts i.
t When ^belongs to cl. 9, it takes i
J Except in the Past Pass, and Indecl. Participles Tf^TT and dfMHI (607).
cl. 2. Atm. 'to put on/ 'to wear,' inserts i
II f^ cl. i, ' to afflict/ inserts a (^tf^HT, &c.)
VERBS. KULES FOR INSERTION OR REJECTION OF ^ . 185
C. Roots ending in Consonants optionally inserting or rejecting ^ i,
either in all the last five tenses and Desiderative, or in certain
of these forms only.
Obs. When no tenses or forms are specified, the option applies to all except
to form II of the Aorist and the Precative Parasmai, which can never insert i.
415. Two in ^ 6. TC%( or 7T^ 7. ' to contract ;' "9^ ' to cut ' (630).
a. Three in ^y. ^IfJ 7. ' to anoint ' (668, but necessarily inserts i in Desid.) ;
*J*^ to clean' (390. j, 651); SHS^'to fry' (optionally in Desid. only, necessarily
rejects i in other forms).
b. Four in l(t. TH f to fall' (optionally in Desid. only; necessarily inserts i in
Futures and Cond., and rejects it in Aor.) ; Tf 6. 'to cut' (optionally in 2nd Fut.,
Cond., and Desid.; necessarily inserts i in ist Fut. and Aor.); ^cl 'to kill' (op-
tionally in 2nd Fut., Cond., and Desid. ; necessarily inserts i in ist Fut. and Aor.) ;
JT^'to dance' (optionally in 2nd Fut. and Desid., necessarily inserts i in ist Fut.
and Aor.)
c. Four in ^ d. W^ ' to flow ' (optionally in all forms except 2nd Fut. and
Cond. Par., and Desid. Par., where i is necessarily rejected); TlfKI 'to be wet,'
^ ' to shine,' and !fc 'to injure ' (the last two optionally in all forms except ist
Fut., which necessarily inserts i).
d. Three in >I dh. T^'to perish;' ftlV i. 'to restrain;' ^JV'to prosper' (the
last optionally in Desid. only, necessarily inserts i in other forms, see 680).
e. Two in ^ n. 7H^ ' to stretch ' and *J^ ' to honour ' (both optionally in Desid.
only, necessarily insert i in other forms, see 583).
/. Fivein^j?. <?p^' to be ashamed;' ; jj^i. 'to defend;' ^^4. 'to be satisfied '
(6 1 8) ; >; 3[ t (.4. 'to be proud ;' fE^'to be capable' (when it rejects i, it is Parasmai
only).
g. Two in >T bh. <*^4. 'to desire ' (optionally in ist Fut., necessarily inserts i
in other forms *) ; <fW ' to deceive' (optionally in Desid. only, f^for^fff or fVr^rfW
or MpTTrT, necessarily inserts i in other forms).
h. One in *Tm. T5f*^i. 4. 'to bear' (TJfftntT or \sj nt I , ^f*TOrt, -ft, or HfJbM H , -ft).
i. All in 3r iv (but only optionally in Desid.); as, fi^'to play,' flf^'to spit,'
o sew.'
j. Two in T{y . ^T^' to honour ;' "Otni or tmi*^ ' to be fat ' (but both necessarily
insert i in Desid., compare 395. b}.
k. Three in 51 ^^5. Atm. ' to pervade f ' (but necessarily inserts i in Desid.,
see 681. a) ; TS^ 4. 'to perish' (see 390. k, and 620) ; flfiSI^. 'to torment' (697).
/. Seven in "^sh. ^TEI 'to pervade ;' IH^' to form by cutting,' 'to carve' (ffffefffT
or inn, "ffftfBlfiT or rt^fif, &c.); i^TST'to create;' ''^with ftf^'to extract'
(otherwise necessarily inserts i) ; ^ 6. ' to wish' (637) ; f*.\' to injure ;' ^"^ i. 'to
* Except the Aorist, following form II at 435.
t ^TFJ cl. 9, 'to eat,' inserts i.
sb
186 VERBS. AORIST. FORMATION OF STEM.
injure' (the last three optionally in ist Fut., but necessarily insert i in other
forms).
m. Twelve in ^ h. T!^ Atm. 'to bear ' (optionally in ist Fut. only, necessarily
inserts * in other forms, see 611. a) ; ^T? ' to gamble' (^[%'in or ^Jlei, &c.) ; TT^
'to penetrate;' *TI^ 'to measure' (*nf^TT or *TT<?T, &c.); fa^ snih, 'to love'
(^ffin or WVT or ^TT, &c.); ^| snuh, 'to love,' 'to vomit;' ^ 'to be per-
plexed' (612); >pf 'to conceal' CTf^HT or *ftTT, Jlf^'Qlf^ or v\tt*4fif, see 306.0,
390. m) ; ^ ' to seek to injure ' (623) ; ^ 6. 7. or ^ 6. ' to kill ' (674) ; ^ or W|
' to raise ;' **T^ or W^ 6. ' to kill.'
Aorist (Third Preterite).
This complex and multiform tense, the most troublesome and
intricate in the whole Sanskrit verb, but fortunately less used in
classical Sanskrit than the other past tenses, is not so much one
tense, as an aggregation of several, all more or less allied to each
other, and all bearing a manifest resemblance to the Imperfect.
416. Grammarians assert that there are seven different varieties
of the Sanskrit Aorist, four of which correspond more or less to the
Greek ist Aorist, and three to the and Aorist, but we shall endeavour
to shew that all these varieties may be included under two distinct
forms of terminations given in the table at 246, and again below,
and at 435.
417. Form I is subdivided like the terminations of all the last
five tenses into (A) those which reject i, and (B) those which assume
it ; A belongs to many of those roots at 394, 400414, which
reject i ; B to most of those at 392, 399, which insert it : but in the
latter case the initial s becomes sh by 70, and in the 2nd and 3rd sing,
the initial * is rejected, the i blending with the i, which then becomes
the initial of those terminations. Moreover, in the case of roots
which insert i the stem is formed according to rules different from
those which apply in the case of roots which reject i.
a. Form II at 435 resembles the terminations of the Imperfect,
and belongs, in the first place, to some of those roots rejecting i,
whose stems in the Imperfect present some important variation from
the root (see 436) ; in the second, to certain of the roots rejecting i,
which end in 3^3, \sh, or ^ h, and which have i, u, or ri, for
their radical vowel (see 439) ; in the third, to verbs of cl. 10 and
Causals.
VERBS. AORIST. FORMATION OP STEM. 187
FORM I.
418. The terminations are here repeated from 246.
A. Terminations without ^ i.
PARASMAI. ATMANE.
i. sam sva sma
2,. sis stam \tam\ sta [to]
3. sit stdm [tarn] sus
si svahi smahi
sthds [thds~\ sdthdm dhvam or dhvam
sta [to] sdtdm sata
B. Terminations with ^ i.
PARASMAI. ATMANE.
1. isham ishva ishma
2. is ishtam ishta
3. it ishtam ishus
ishi ishvahi ishmahi
ishthds ishdthdm idhvam or idhvam
ishta ishdtdm ishata
419. Observe The brackets in the A terminations indicate the rejection of initial
s from those terminations in which it is compounded with t and th, if the stem ends
in any consonant except a nasal or semivowel, or in any short vowel such as a, i, ,
or ri. Observe also, that initial s is liable to become sh by 70, in which case a
following t or th is cerebralized. The substitution of dhvam for dhvam and
idhvam for idhvam, in certain cases, is explained in the table at 246.
420. General rule for forming the stem for those verbs of the
first nine classes which reject *(i and so take the A terminations.
Obs. i. The augment ^Ta must always be prefixed, as in the Imperfect; but it
will be shewn in the Syntax at 889, that when the Aorist is used as a prohibitive
Imperative, after the particle md or ma sma, the augment is then rejected. See
242. a.
Obs. 2. When a root begins with the vowels ^ i, T , or ^ ri, short or long, the
augment is prefixed in accordance with 251.0.
In Paras mai, if a root end in either a vowel or a consonant,
vriddhi the radical vowel before all the terminations.
In Atmane, if a root end in ^ i, ^i, f u, or ^i w, gunate the
radical vowel ; if in ^ ri or any consonant, leave the vowel unchanged
before all the terminations. Final consonants must be joined to the
A terminations according to the rules propounded at 296306.
a. Thus, from rft 'to lead' come the two stems anai for Parasmai and ane for
Atmane (anai+sam = 4 iiM*^by 70; Atm. ane + si =^3 fa, ane+sthds=*i(nB\*{,
&c.)
b. From ^i cl. 8, ' to make,' come the two stems akdr for Parasmai and akri for
Atmane (akdr + sam =^T3sfo{ by 70, &c. ; Atm. akri+si=^$fa by 70, akri +
*Ms=^nfran^by 419, aArri+<a=^r^T, &c.) See 682.
Similarly, *| cl. 3, 'to bear.' See the table at 583,
B b 2
188 VERBS. AORIST. FORMATION OF STEM.
c. So, from Tpf^ to join' come the two stems ayauj for Parasmai and ayuj for
(Par. ayauj -f- sum = ^9*fT ijf H by 296, ayauj + sva = vi < i e? , ayauj+tam =
by 419 ; Atm. ayM/+si=^T|flgf by 296, ayw;-H&a<s=^JWT^, ayuj+ta
. From <^^cl. 7, to hinder,' the stems araudh and arM^A (Par. araudh-}-sam=
by 299, Du. arawdA+s0a=^Ptfr*3, arattdA+tam^^TTTlf*^; Atm. arudh+
^S^(, &c.)
e. Similarly, from T^ to cook' come the stems apd6 and opacf (apdc+sam =
W4iji N by 296; Atm. pa<H-si=^Rf^, a/?(f+/Ms= 1 5mHir^, &c.)
/. From ^ 'to burn' (610), the stems addh and adah ( addh +sam= ^fMT^T^ by
306.0, adaA-Kwi=^fP>l^by 305; Atm. adah+si^Vf^ by 306.0, adah+
thds=^T*n$(, &c.)
421. By referring to 391. b. it will be easy to understand that most roots in i, i,
short u, and short ri, take the A terminations. Most of those in d, e, ai, o, do so
in the Atmane, and a few of those in a also in the Parasmai.
a. ^ or ^ to spread ' takes either A or B ; and in Atmane when it takes A,
changes ri to ir. See 678.
b. ^ or ^ to choose,' ' to cover,' changes its vowel to ur, under the same circum-
stances. See 675.
c. Roots in e, ai, o, change these vowels to a as in the other General tenses ;
thus, from ^ 'to cover,' ^^nfw^ &c. (see 433), ^paRTftr &c. Similarly, f*T, T%
<ft, and optionally c5^, see 390. e (^TlilT^&c., ^Wrfiff &c.)
d. ^T 'to give' (see 663), VI 'to place' (see 664), WT 'to stand' (see 587), ^
'to protect,' ^ 'to drink' (if in Atm.), ^t or <fT 'to cut' (if in Atm.), change their
finals in the Atmane to i (^rf^fa, ^^^1^419, ^rf^lT, ^Tf^^f^; 2nd pi. ! 3?f^'*T).
In Parasmai they follow 438.
e. *TT used for ^ 'to go,' with ^lf>J prefixed, signifying 'to go over,' 'to read'
(Atmane only), changes its final to z'(^?wftfa, -jffan^, -iT?, &c.)
/. ^ Atm. 'to cry out,' *j'to void excrement,' and ^ 'to be firm,' all cl. 6,
preserve their vowels unchanged (^I^ft 1 , &c. ; 'ST^JT^, ^T^rf , &c. ; ^T ; (J t T J T, &c.) ;
1J may also make ^IIT'R^, and *J may also make ^njfa^W, but the latter root is
then generally regarded as *.
422. The following roots of those rejecting i, enumerated at 400-414, take the
A terminations only, both for Par. or Atm. : T^; WSJ W^, >J^, >
Atm., pT, ^, ^; ^ Atm., f^ Atm.,
4. Atm., ; ^ 4.
a. The following take in Par. either the A terminations of form I or optionally
form II ; but in Atm. usually the A form of I, sometimes form II : f^^, ^^3*
fr^ fa^3> ^^> ft^ f*f Tg$> ^ v x ^> ^Sl> *F(j f \-
b. The following take in Par. only form II ; but in Atm. the A form of I, or
sometimes the B form of I : ^fF (Atm. doubtful), ftf^T, g^, f%^ 6. 'to find' (Atm.
doubtful), 4. 7. (only Atm.), ^, ^, fpt^,
VERBS. - AORIST. FORMATION OF STEM. 189
424. i; "^V with the B terminations is generally used for Par., but ^rHT occurs
in Epic poetry), W^, fo^, c^, ^, *TH, *R(.
423. The following of those inserting or rejecting i, enumerated at 415, take either
the A or B terminations : 7f^ or 1T^, cT3T, JpT, W5 generally Atm. only, ftni,
W{,Atm., JTC^, ^[T^Atm., ^, ^r^(the last three in Par. take also form II), T!JT
generally Atm. (may also follow form II in Par.), WJ (or "Of) Atm., ^T3
424. The rules at 296-306 must in all cases be applied, as well as the special
rules applicable to certain roots in forming the Futures at 390 and 390. a-o ; thus,
^"3f makes vj'ausf^ by 297. b (see 630) ; 1^ makes ^Hi^ 1 *^ by 390. k (see 633) ;
T31 V in Atm., 'iMf^ or ^Rfiflfo; 15T, ^raTS?* or ^I>TT^*r, Wffcj or ^WfT3| by
390. g ; ipT , v*ii^*i x by 390.7 (also Wrf^hw ) ; rf^, ?Hi|lrillT by 306. b.
a. ^ Atm. 'to go,' "^Atm. 'to awake,' T^ Atm. 'to be born,' may form
their 3rd sing, as if they were Passive verbs (see 475) ; thus, ^nnf^, Du. 3. ^TT-
WT1TR ; ^nftftj (or optionally ^3), Du. 3. ^rHIrilH; ^ST5TfT (or optionally
b. Roots ending in ^ and T must change these letters to Anusvara before s, and
becomes 5^ before SSJ; thus, T^ makes 'SUTftl, ^TWl^, ^J*iW (or if in cl. 8.
, or by c. below ^Wft) ; ^p? makes ^TOffa &c., Du. 2. ^TJ^pS^*?.
(generally Par.) drops its nasal before the Atmane terminations (^ftr,
, &c. ; initial s being rejected according to 419).
*T*T does so optionally (^*iftl or ^TTtftr, ^TTf^n^ or ^f*nn^, &c.)
c. Roots in *^ and T!^of cl. 8, which properly take the B terminations, are allowed
an option of dropping the nasal in 2nd and 3rd sing. Atm., in which case initial s
is rejected (419); e. g. H^ makes 3. ^rif*i8 or ^Tini (Pan. n. 4, 79).
d. Similarly, ^T^ makes 3. ^TBjftfJI? or WEpT; and "^!T, ^TTftrN? or ^TTT?.
e. *^ ' to give ' is allowed the option of lengthening the a, when n is dropped ;
thus, Sing. 2. *i<fWT*l or ^TflfHBI^, 3. ^reTTrT or ^HflfHtf . Compare 354. a, 339
(Pan. ii. 4, 79).
/. The nasal of ^31 'to bite' becomes "^ before S and W before ^f; thus,
i^t^'H, Du. 2. ^reH; Atm. i. ^f^j Du. 2. VH^^fid^. See 303.
425. ^ 'to carry' (see 611) changes its radical vowel to ^ft o before those
terminations which reject an initial s by 305. a; thus, avdksham, acdkshis, avdkshit
(Lat. vexit), avdkshva, avodham, Sec. ; Atm. avakshi (Lat. vexi), avodhds, avodha.
a. T& Atm., 'to bear,' generally takes the B terminations (asahishi, Sec.}, though
the form -srtiW is also given for the 3rd sing.
426. T^ 'to tie,' 'to fasten,' makes andtsam, andtsis, andtstt, andtsva, andddham,
&c.; and Atm. anatsi, anaddhds, &c., by 306. b (compare 183).
a. 'W^ ' to dwell' (see 607) makes avdtsam, &c., by 304. a.
427. General rule for forming the stem for those verbs of the
first nine classes which assume i, and so take the B terminations
at 418.
190 VERBS. AORIST. FORMATION OF STEM.
a. If a root end in the vowels \i,\ i, ~3 u> tK u, ^j ri, ^ n, vriddhi
those vowels in the Parasmai before all the terminations, and gimate
them in the Atmane.
Thus, from ^ ' to purify ' come the two stems apau for Parasmai and apo for
Atmane (/}aM+i+sam:=^nnf^iT N by 37, <zpaw+*4-&==Wfrlftfta(j apau+i+tt
WrNhj, &c. ; Atm. apo+i-f si=^njfefa, &c., by 36), see 583.
From H cl. i, 'to cross,' comes the stem atdr for Parasmai (atdr-{-i-\-sam =
^sfinftw, &c.)
So, from 'StVto lie down' comes ^ifofa, ^iftTST^, &c.; but roots ending
in any other vowel than u and long n more frequently take the A terminations, as
they generally reject i.
b. If a root end in a single consonant, gunate the radical vowel
in both Parasmai and Atmane (except as debarred at 28, and except
in the roots enumerated at 390. a).
Thus, "[>* budh, cl. i/to know,' makes its stem abodh (abodhisham, &c.) See 583.
it, 'to be,' makes avart (avartishi, &c.)
, 'to increase,' makes aidh (aidhishi, &c., 251.5). See 600.
428.' A medial a in roots ending in ^ and <^ is lengthened in
Parasmai, but not in Atmane.
Thus, ^ 'to go' makes ^T^rfcWTj *&% 'to blaze,' ^TT^lPc^Mfl. The roots
^ 'to speak' and '3^ 'to go' also lengthen the a in Parasmai (^T^rf^JTj but
not in Atmane ^Rf^ft &c.)
a. But those in T, H, 'Z never lengthen the a in Parasmai; thus, ^T*^ 'to
sound' makes ^^nfiTWN The following roots also are debarred from lengthening
the a .- ^re, ^m , T^, ?jn, ^n, ^T^T, ^TT, ^, ^Z, T^!T, ^, W(, V% *T^,
^7, ^V, "^T^, ^^. One or two do so optionally; as, ^H!^and f? 'to sound.'
429. Observe, that as the majority of Sanskrit verbs assume i,
it follows that rule 427. a* b. will be more universally applicable than
rule 420, especially as the former applies to the Aorist of Intensives,
Desideratives, and Nominals, as well as to that of simple verbs.
430. The special rules for the two Futures at 390. a-o will of course hold good
for the Aorist ; thus the roots enumerated at 390 and 390. a (^^ &c.) forbid
Guna; and *, >jj 1, |^ generally change their finals to uv (^T^if%^ &c.,
^inf^*^&c.); but when iTjs written H it makes ^TTR*^ &c., see 421. /, and ^
may also make ^Tmf^'R^, and J^, ?FTTfw^^.
a. "3n| makes ^T^Tf^RH or ^n*lff%^or ^H^f^MH&c., and in Atmane ^
or ^RT^f^f^.
b. According to 390. c. ?ftvt, s^ft, and ^fr^T drop their finals
^ftf^^T , &c. ; see also 433).
431. In the Atmane, ^ 'to choose,' 'to cover,' and all roots in long "Qrt, such
VERBS. AORIST. FORMATION OF STEM. 191
as ^cf ' to spread,' may optionally lengthen the inserted i ; thus, ^rtfij"*! or
&c., ^l^rflf 1 ! or 'SrcartfS J but in Parasmai only ^f^TfTTI^, Wsfl ft. V*{.
432. f*% 'to swell' and ^TT'j'to awake' take Guna instead of Vriddhi
&c., see also 440. a; ^HH'TftW &c.)
a. yj^ according to 399. a. makes **i4$ H*^, and by 390. m. *T^ makes
The latter also conforms to 439 and 439. 6. See 609.
6. f^ ' to kill' forms its Aorist froni "3V (W^ftTW &c.), but see 422. 6.
433. Many roots in ^ffT a, T?. e, w o, and i? ai, with three in *^m, viz. Tff^yam,
T&^ram, T^nam, assume i, but in the Parasmai insert s before it; final e, o, and
ai, being changed to ^IT a; thus, from TT ' to go' comes ^T^rfflM*^, &c. (see 644) ;
from Ijft ' to sharpen,' vi^nfw^, &c. ; from ^ ' to restrain,' Wrfaw , &c.
'^fC^I ' to be poor ' makes adaridrisham or adaridrdsisham, &c.
434. In the A'tmane these roots reject the i and the s which precedes it, and
follow 418 ; thus, from *TT ' to measure' comes ii*ufa, &c. (see 664. a) ; from ^
' to cover,' SH<J4|fH (see 421. e) ; from T^' to sport,' 'Sltfa, ^rt^TT^, ^R^T, &c.
FORM II.
435. Resembling the Imperfect.
PARASMAI. ATMANE.
1 . am dva [va] dma [ma]
2. as [5] atam [tarn] ata \ta~\
3. at \_f\ at dm [/am] an \us\
e [z] dvahi dmahi
athds ethdm [dthdm] adhvam
ata etdm \dtdm\ anta
436. No confusion arises from the similarity which this form bears to the Im-
perfect, as in all cases where the above terminations are used for the Aorist, the
Imperfect presents some difference in the form of its stem ; thus, ^T^'to go' makes
aga6cham for its Impf., agamam for its Aor. (see 602) ; f>T^ 'to break' makes abhi-
nadam for its Impf., abhidam for its Aor. (see 583). So again, cl. 6, which alone
can shew a perfect identity of root and stem, never makes use of this form for its
Aorist, unless by some special rule the stem of its Imperfect is made to differ from
the root; thus, fH^'to smear' (cf. aAe<$ft?), which makes alipam in Aor., is
alimpam in its Impf.; see 281. (So in Gr., cf. Impf. (Xetirov with 2nd Aor.
eA<7rov ; eAa/xjSavov with e\a(3ov ; e$afj.vrjv with &a/A0v, &c.)
Obs. This form of the Sanskrit Aorist corresponds to Gr. 2nd Aor. (cf. asthdm,
asthds, asthdt, with e<7T^v, eoriyf, etrrij), and the first form is more or less analo-
gous to the ist Aor. The substitution of i for e, and dthdm, dtdm, for ethdm, etdm,
in Atm. of form II, is confined to a class of roots mentioned at 439.
437. Rule for forming the stem in verbs of the first nine classes.
Prefix the augment, and as a general rule attach the terminations
directly to the root.
Thus, in agamam &c., abhidam &c., see 436. So also, T3? x ' to perish ' makes
TOT5l*T N (also vH^i>T, see 441, 424).
a. Observe, however, that most of the roots which follow this form in Par.,
192 VERBS. AORIST. FORMATION OF STEM.
follow form I at 418 in Atm. j thus, fa? 'to break' makes abhitsi, &c., in Atm.;
see the table at 583 : similarly, f3<i[ 'to cut,' see 667. And a few roots, which are
properly restricted to Atm., have a Parasmai Aorist of this 2nd form ; thus, ^j^
Atm. 'to shine,' 'to be pleasing,' makes Par. arucam, as well as Atm. arotishi.
b. One or two roots in ^IT d, ^ i, and T? e reject their finals ; and one or two in
1J ri and ^ n gunate these vowels before the above terminations ; thus, ^TT ' to
tell' makes ^BTC^n^&c., ^*T &c. ; fsa 'to swell,' ^P8*T N ,' 3f 'to call' makes
(see 595) j ^ 'to go,' ^renc*T x ; ^J 'to go,' ^TTT?^; ^'to grow old,' ^T
c. Tg${ 'to see' gunates its vowel (^^fl, see 604).
d. Penultimate nasals are generally dropped ; thus, ^cT*^ ' to stop'
FT^ 'to distil,' ^TO^Tj ^i*5 'to mount,' ^na^; STST^to fall,'
e. A form ^HSf^occurs in the Veda, from TR^'to eat,' the medial a being dropped.
438. In the Parasmai certain roots ending in long *<rr a and u e con-
form still more closely to the terminations of the Imperfect, rejecting
the initial vowel, as indicated by the brackets in the table at 435.
In the 3rd pi. they take us for an.
Thus, ^T cl. 3, 'to give,' makes addm, adds, addt, addva, &c. ; 3rd pi. adus, see
663. So also, >IT cl. 3, ' to place,' makes adhdm, &c., 664 ; and 9IT cl. r, ' to stand,'
makes asthdm, &c., 587.
a. Similarly, ^cl. i, 'to be,' except ist sing, and 3rd pi. (^J5*T, ^J^, ^T^,
^T^, &c. ; but 3rd pi. ^*J5^, see 585).
b. Observe, however, that some roots in , like yd, ' to go,' follow 433.
c. And some roots in 1J e and ^u o, which follow 433, optionally follow 438 ; in
which case e and o are changed as before to d; thus, Vfdhe, cl. i, 'to drink,' makes
either adhdsisham &c., or adhdm &c., also adadham, see 440. a ; ^ft so, cl. 4, ' to
come to an end,' makes either asdsisham or asdm, see 613.
d. In the Atmane-pada, roots like ^T, VT, ^JT, ^", V, <ft follow 421. d.
e. ^ 'to go' makes its Aorist from a root TTJ thus, ay dm, agds, &c.
Note Adaddm, Impf. of da, ' to give,' bears the same relation to its Aor. addm
that efl/oa>y does to eoow. So also the relation of adhdm (Aor. of dhd, ' to place ')
to adadham (Impf.) corresponds to that of fQyv to (TtQyv. Cf. also abhavas and
abhus with (pv 6f and e<^>yf .
439. Certain roots ending in SI s, "^ sh, 7 h, enclosing a medial i,
u, or ri, form their Aorists according to form II at 435 ; but
whenever confusion is likely to arise between the Imperfect and
Aorist, * is prefixed to the terminations, before which sibilant the
final of the root becomes k by 303 and 306.
Thus, f^ST^ to point out,' the Impf. of which is "Slf^n^, makes ^Slf^H &c. in
Aor. (cf. Gr. ist Aor. eOe/^a). Similarly, ^\ cl. 2, 'to hate,' makes adviksham
&c., 657 ; ?? cl. 2, ' to milk,' makes ^T*|T5ffl adhuksham &c., by 306. a. See 660.
a. This class of roots substitutes i for e, and dthdm, dtdm, for ethdm, etdm, in
VERBS. PRECATIVE. FORMATION OF STEM. 193
Atmane terminations ; thus, adikshi, adikshathds, adikshata, adikshdvahi, adikshd-
thdm, &c. ; 3rd pi. adikshanta.
b. A few roots in ? h (viz. ic4^, f^j T T? 3 <^T) optionally in the Atmane reject
the initial a from the terminations of the 2nd and 3rd sing., ist du., and and pi. ;
thus, fc3^ may make ^TfcSfW > ^c9^3"T^, ^To5te; Du. i. ^f?55ff^ ; PI. 2. ^c5^*T,
66 1 : and ^Tf 'to milk,' ^snjflSf, ^TVTI^, &c. See 661, 659, 609, 660.
c. According to some authorities, a few roots (e. g. Tjp^, "^^, *J^) which gene-
rally follow form I, A, in Atmane, may optionally conform to form II, taking the
terminations i, dthdm, dtdm, rejecting initial a and a from the other terminations,
and taking ata for anta ; thus, atripi, atripthds, atripta, atripvahi, &c.
440. Causal verbs and verbs of cl. 10 make use of form II, but
the stem assumes both reduplication and augment (as in the Greek
Pluperfect); thus, ^v cl. i, 'to know/ makes in the Causal Aorist
^Itl^l' &c. This will be explained at 493.
a. A few Primitive verbs besides those of cl. 10 take a reduplicated
stem, analogous to Causals (see 492).
Thus, foj ' to resort to' makes ^rf^lfoRH &c. ; f^T 'to swell' makes ^fsif^RTH
(also '3POT and ^f&foW N , see 432, 437. b) ; "$ cl. i, 'to run,' '^J^^*?; ^ ' to flow,'
^^^*\' V 'to drink,' ^I^IT; BH ' to love,' 'ST^iT, &c. This last is defective
when it belongs to cl. I, having no Special tenses; but when it belongs to cl. 10
(Pres. cfiUT^, &c.) its Aorist is ^^cfi^.
441. The following Primitive verbs take a contracted form of reduplicated stem :
^^cl. 2, 'to speak,' makes ^ITN*T avofam (from ^TTT^H for sjqq'-qfl 650) J Tr^
cl. i, 'to fall,' ^5Ttnra (from ^TtmTTR; compare Gr. CTTITTTOV); ^11^ cl. 2, 'to rule/
^rf^reiT (from ^Tf^I^T^W, but the Atmane follows 427; see 658); ^P^ cl. 4, 'to
throw,' ^TTWI (from ^TT*ra*T , contracted into ^TrWH for v<iitt*f 304. , whence by
transposition ^rppr*T v ) ; TT^T cl. 4, ' to perish,' ^nfcfl'T (from ^TT^^f
See 620, 436.
Precative or Benedictive.
Terminations of Precative repeated from 246.
PARASMAI. ATMANE.
yasam yasva yasma
yds ydstam ydsta
ydt ydstam ydsus
siya sivahi simahi
sishthds siydsthdm sidhvam or sidhvam
sishta siydstdm siran
442. The terminations of this tense resemble those of the Potential in the scheme
at 245. In 2nd and 3rd sing, they are identical. In the other persons of the
Parasmai a sibilant is inserted, and in some of the Atmane, both prefixed and
inserted. In 2nd pi. Atm. sidhvam is used for s(dhvam when immediately preceded
by any other vowel but a or a, and optionally isMdhvam for isMdhvam when imme-
diately preceded by a semivowel or A. The only difference between the Potential
C C
194 VERBS. PRECATIVE. FORMATION OF STEM.
and Precative of verbs of the 2nd and 3rd groups, at 290, will often be that the
Potential will have the conjugational characteristic; thus, bhid, cl. 7, 'to break,'
will be bhindydt in Pot., and bhidydt in Prec. (Compare the Optative of the Gr.
Aor. tioiyv with Optative of the Present <&o/>jv.)
443. Rule for forming the stem in verbs of the first nine classes.
In Parasmai, as a general rule, either leave the root unchanged
before the y of the terminations, or make such changes as are
required in the Passive (see 465472), or by the conjugational rule
of the 4th class, and never insert i.
In Atmane, as a general rule, prefix i to the terminations in those
roots ending in consonants or vowels which take i in the Futures
(see 392, 399), and before this i gunate the radical vowel. Gunate it
also in the Atmane in some roots ending in vowels which reject i :
but if a root end in a consonant, and reject i, the radical vowel is
generally left unchanged in the Atmane, as well as Parasmai.
444. Thus, from *J,cl. i, 'to be,' come the stem of the Parasmai bhu, and the
stem of the A'tmane bhavi, by 36. a (bhu + ydsam = *^?lrtW &c., bhavi + sty a =
Hfatfta by 70).
445. Frequently, as already observed, before the y of the
Parasmai terminations, the root is liable to changes analogous to
those which take place before the y of cl. 4 at 272, and the y of
Passive verbs at 465 ; and not unfrequently it undergoes changes
similar to those of the Perfect at 373, &c., as follows:
446. A final ^TT a is changed to JJ e in Par., but remains unchanged in A'tm.,
as before the s of the 2nd Future terminations ; thus, ^T cl. 3, ' to give,' makes
^T^HT &c. for Par., but ^THfa &c. for A'tm. ; TT 'to drink ' makes tfaTSW &c.
a. But TlfT ' to become old ' makes 'ST^IT^T &c., and ^ftfci ' to be poor ' drops
its final even in Parasmai (^ft^T*!*, ^fXftj^fa, &c.) Compare 390. c.
447. Final ^ i and ^ u are lengthened in Par., as before the y of Passives, and
gunated in A'tm., as before the s of the 2nd Future; thus, fa 'to gather' makes
^ttrra*T &c., ^^fa &c. ; and ? ' to sacrifice ' makes |>*n N &c., iiffafta &c.
a. When ^ 'to go' is preceded by a preposition, it is not lengthened (^PEW
&c. ; otherwise f x *TUW).
b. <ffafi and ^Tt drop their finals as at 390. c (^fv^fat &c.)
448. Final *$ri is changed to ftlri in Parasmai, but retained in A'tmane; thus,
^i 'to do' makes falTO* &c., and ^"^fa &c. After a double consonant ri is
gunated in Parasmai, as well as before inserted is thus, ^5T 'to spread' makes
?sf*imH &c., ^pfta &c., or ^rforfa? &c.
a. It is also gunated in ^T ri, ' to go,' and f PJ ' to awake ' (^ntWT, WTT^TWT, &c.)
b. 'to cover,' 'to choose,' makes f^TTor ^^RW, ^T or ^frtffa or
VERBS. PRECATIVE. FORMATION OF STEM. 395
449. Final ^ ri is changed to f^C ir in both voices, but is gunated before
inserted i in A'tmane ; thus, TTcl. i, 'to cross,' makes rffanw &c., flltfifa &c., or
fTft^fa &c., or Tnrt^l & c .
a. One root, ''J cl. 10, ' to fill,' makes ^*hw &c. Compare 448. a.
450. Of roots in T? e, V ' to drink' makes *nTWT &c. (which is also the Precative
of VT 'to hold') ; ^ ' to protect,' ^^TTWT.
a. But 2f 'to call' makes |I*n*^ &c., and <^i*i"l'M &c. ; ^1 'to cover' makes
^fan*n? &c., and *m*lfa &c. ; and ^ ' to weave' makes "3*U*T &c., and ^T^fa &c.
Compare 465. c.
451. Final ^ ai and 'ST o are often treated like final a at 446 ; thus M 'to sing'
makes J i*u*i x &c. ; ^ 'to waste' and TEH 'to destroy' make W*nWT; ^ 'to cut,'
like <fT ' to give' and ^"' to protect,' makes ^ITCW. But sometimes they are changed
to d; thus, ^ 'to preserve' makes ^1*0^ &c. ; ^ 'to purify' makes ^PTWT; w
' to think ' either VIT^I^H^ or WmOTT ; y ' to be weary ' either ^TRTRn^or *3PITCW.
452. As already stated, if a root end in a consonant, there is no change in
Parasmai, except the usual changes before y ; moreover, unlike the 2nd Future,
there is no Guna in A'tmane, unless the root take i; the other changes in A'tmane
are similar to those applicable before the s of the 2nd Future terminations (390. o) ;
thus, 27 'to milk' makes g?n*^&c., and Vjsjlq &c., by 306.0; %^'to hate'
makes fm*CT &c., and f?TSfta &c., by 302; and ^^'to know' makes ^I*TH
&c., and Ttfwfa &c. See 443.
a. Roots of the loth class, however, retain Guna in Par., as well as in A'tm.,
rejecting the conjugational ay a in Par. only ; see under Causals (495).
453. According to the usual changes in cl. 4 and in Passives, roots ending in a
double consonant, of which the first member is a nasal, generally reject the nasal ;
thus, *T^T bhanj, cl. 7, makes bhajydsam, &c. Compare 469.
a. So again, according to 472, Tf? ' to take' makes in Par. 'J^n**^ &c. ; JT^ ' to
ask,' IJ^WUW &c. ; >JH^ ' to fry,' *p5*TT5T (632) ; JT^ ' to cut,' ^W**T (636) ;
^J^'to pierce,' f^UJT^J^; sq^'to deceive,' f^TWT; ^TF^ 'to teach,' f^l'^rRT'T
&c. In the Atmane they are regular.
b. So again, ^i and T w before r and v are lengthened; thus, |<^'to sound'
makes <*^l*i v ; and f$3 ' to play,' ^NTW^. Compare 466.
454- 'W^'to speak,' =T^ 'to say,' ^.'to sow,' ^5T x 'to wish,' ^' to dwell,' ^
' to carry,' and *3"^' to sleep,' substitute T w for ^ va in Par., and *T^ ' to sacrifice '
substitutes i for ya ; thus, ^tUm*^, T[wii^*i, ^i*<i*^, &c. ; cf. 47 1 . In the Atmane
they are regular ; as, 'qlifl^l from ^7 ; ^l^lfl from THT.
a. T^, ^5T, and *T^ conform to 470 ; thus, sTSTPH^or aiiHTfl*^&c. ; cf. 424. e.
Observe In addition to these rules, the other special changes
which take place before the s of the 2nd Future terminations,
noted at 390 and 390. a o, will apply to the Atmane of the Preca-
tive ; thus, ^f or 3? at 390 makes ^fiTT or ^ffajfai ; >T5^ at 390. g.
c c a
196 VERBS. INFINITIVE. FORMATION OF STEM.
makes >J 1 Effaj or vrffij; c&* at 390. /. makes firoftrthi or ofiffRfa; and
Jin may be T'onWT or Tftiu*ziHW even in Parasmai.
O v * O X
Conditional.
Terminations of Conditional repeated from 246.
PARASMAI.
ATMANE.
sydva
sydma
sye
sydvahi
sydmahi
syatam
syata
syathds
syethdm
syadhvam
syatdm
syan
syata
syetdm
syanta
455. Observe, that this tense bears the same relation to the 2nd Future that the
Imperfect does to the Present. In its form it is half an Imperfect, half a 2nd
Future. It resembles the Imperfect in prefixing the augment ^ a to the stem
(see 251), and in the latter part of its terminations : it resembles the 2nd Future
in the first part of its terminations in gunating the radical vowel, in inserting
5f i in exactly those roots in which the Future inserts i, and in the other changes
of the stem.
456. The Conditional is most easily formed from the 2nd Future
(388415) by prefixing the augment a and changing sydmi (shy ami]
into syam (shy am) ; e. g. karishydmi, akarishyam.
457. Thus, "^V cl. i, 'to know,' makes ^nfrftrsiH &c. ; gf 'to milk' makes
VSHfilS^ &c. (see 414 and 306. a); fg^'to hate,' ^I'^TR &c. (see 412); ^ 'to
conceal,' ^Tf^TB^or ^TXTT^PR (415. m); *n^'to be immersed,' ^)*f ajf^ (390. k).
a. The augment will be prefixed to roots beginning with vowels according to the
rules given at 251 ; thus, "3KJT ' to cover' makes ^Ttgf^'SlJTor ^TH&ftTBW, cf. 390. 6.
b. ^ ' to go,' with ^ifv prefixed (meaning ' to read '), may optionally form its
Conditional from the root TT (^Hfl^ or ^wtf'ST, see 421. e).
Infinitive.
458. The termination of the Infinitive is ip turn ( = the turn of the
Latin Supine). It is used as a verbal noun with the force of
the accusative or dative case.
Obs. The suffix turn is probably the accusative of the suffix tu (see 82. VIII),
of which other cases are used as Infinitives in the Veda.
459. Rule for forming the stem in verbs of the ten classes.
The stem of the Infinitive is identical with the stem of the First
Future, and where one inserts 5 i, the other does. also; thus, budh,
cl. i, 'to know/ makes ^fvrgJT bodhitum ; f^^kship, cl. 6, 'to throw/
makes "iffpf ksheptum. Moreover, all the rules for the change of the
root before the t of the Future terminations apply equally before the
PASSIVE VERBS. - FORMATION OF STEM. 197
/ of the Infinitive. Hence, by substituting urn for the final a of the
3rd pers. sing, of the ist Future, the Infinitive is at once obtained.
Thus, STliT, Sn*"* 5 UST, HT**; *fteT, *ft<|T ; ^i^ftfiTT, ^TCjftltJJT. So also, ^
makes ^^ \ ^, ^<|* or ^V^H or ^f^T ; ^T, f fag*. See 388-415.
a. In the Veda, Infinitives are also formed by the suffixes TT%, ife, HR^, ??T, %,
^nj, 'SH^, ^l^, F, ^, ^1^, which are really cases of verbal nouns (see 867. a. b).
b. The following examples will shew how remarkably the Sanskrit Infinitive
answers to the Latin Supine. S. WliJ*^ ' to stand,' L. statum ; S. ^Tg*T ' to give,'
L. datum; S. Ml 5*1 'to drink,' L. potum ; S. TW 'to go,' L. itum; S. ^icfiJH 'to
strew,' L. stratum ; S. ^^T*^ ' to anoint,' L. unctum ; S. sfftr^T ' to beget,'
L. genitum ; S. *<f friiji^ 'to sound,' L. sonitum ; S. ^THT 'to go,' L. serptum;
S. ^faiji 'to vomit,' L. vomitum.
DERIVATIVE VERBS.
460. Having explained the formation of the verbal stem in the ten
classes of Primitive verbs, we come next to the four kinds of Deriva-
tive verbs, viz. Passives, Causals, Desideratives, and Frequentatives.
PASSIVE VERBS.
461. Every root in every one of the ten classes may take a Passive
form, conjugated as an A'tmane-pada verb of cl. 4, the only difference
being in the accent, which in Passives falls on the inserted ya, whereas
in the Atmane of Primitive verbs of cl. 4, it falls on the radical
syllable.
a. It has already been remarked, that the Passive may be regarded as a distinct
derivative from the root, formed on one invariable principle, without any necessary
community with the conjugational structure of the Active verb. Thus the root
bhid, cl. 7, to divide,' makes bhinatti or bhintte, 'he divides;' dvish, cl. 2, 'to
hate,' makes dveshti or dvishte, 'he hates;' but the Passive of both is formed
according to one invariable rule, by the simple insertion of ya, without reference
to the conjugational form of the Active ; thus, bhidyate, ' he is divided ;' dvishyate,
' he is hated.' See 243. a.
b. In fact, a Passive verb is really nothing but a root conjugated according to
the rule for cl. 4 restricted to the A'tmane-pada : and to say that every root may
take a Passive form, is to say that roots of classes i, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10
may all belong to cl. 4, when they receive a Passive sense : so that if a root be
already of cl. 4, its Passive is frequently identical in form with its own Atmane-
pada (the only difference being in the accent).
c. It might even be suspected, that the occasional assumption of an Intransitive
signification and a Parasmai-pada inflexion by a Passive verb, was the cause which
gave rise to a 4th class of Primitive verbs as distinct from the Passive. Instances
198 PASSIVE VERBS. FORMATION OF STEM.
are certainly found of Passive verbs taking Parasmai-pada terminations, and some
Passive verbs (e. g. jay ate, he is born,' fr. rt. jan ; puryate, ' he is filled,' fr. pn;
and tapyate, 'he is heated,' fr. tap) are regarded by native grammarians as Atmane
verbs of cl. 4 *. Again, many roots appear in class 4 as Intransitive verbs, which
also appear in some one of the other nine as Transitive. For example, yuj, 'to
join,' when used in a Transitive sense, is conjugated either in cl. 7, or in the
Causal; when in an Intransitive, in cl. 4. So also, push, 'to nourish;' kshubh,
'to agitate;' klis, 'to vex;' sidh, 'to accomplish f.'
d. There are said to be three kinds of Passive verbs.
I. The Passive, properly so called (karman); as, from If^, (JSPf 'he is struck '
(i. e. 'by another'), where the verb implies that the person or thing spoken of
suffers some action from another person or thing ; e. g. ^n^Tt T^fff T*TT ' rice is
cooked by me.'
II. An Impersonal Passive (bhdva), generally formed from an Intransitive verb,
and only occurring in the 3rd singular; JTTiT 'it is gone;' JWiT 'it is danced;'
T^TW 'it is cooked ' or ' cooking goes on,' where the verb itself implies neither person
nor thing as either acting or suffering, but simply expresses a state or condition.
III. A Reflexive Passive (karma-kartri, 'object-agent' or ' object-containing-
agent'), where there is no object as distinct from the subject of the verb, or, in
other words, where the subject is both agent and object, as in ^Jt^'tJ T^IW ' rice
is cooked ;' U aTTOH 1 ' he is born,' &c. In these latter, if a vowel immediately
precedes the characteristic y, the accent may fall on the radical syllable, as in cl. 4.
They may also, in some cases, make use of the Atmane-pada of the Active, and
drop the y altogether; thus to express 'he is adorned by himself,' it would be
right to use *J^n ' he adorns himself.'
Obs. According to Panini the Passive verb is merely an Atmane verb with the
Vikarana yak in the four tenses, and karman merely expresses one idea of the
Passive. The object is expressed by the termination of the Passive in such a case
as 'the house is built by me,' where the object of the agent me, viz. house, is
expressed by the terminations of the Passive. But no agent might be mentioned,
as simply ' the house is built,' in which case it would be a bhdva, not a karman.
462. Passive verbs take the regular ./^tmane-pada terminations at
246, making use of the substitutions required in cl. 4.
In the Aorist they take either the A or B terminations of form I at 418, according
as the root may admit the inserted ^ or not; but they require that in 3rd sing.
of both forms the termination be ^ i in place of sta and ishta (see 475).
* The Passive not unfrequently takes the terminations of the Parasmai-pada in
Epic poetry ; e. g. thidyet for dhidyeta, ' it may be cut ;' mokshyasi for mokshyase,
' thou shalt be liberated ;' adrisyat, ' he was seen.'
t The forms given for the Aorists of such verbs as pad, 'to go,' budh, to
know ' (which are said to be Atmane verbs of cl. 4), could only belong to Passive
verbs. The forms given by Westergaard are, apddi, ubodhi. See 475-
PASSIVE VERBS. FORMATION OF STEM. 199
Special Tenses.
463. Rule for the formation of the stem in the four Special tenses,
A'tmane-pada, of roots of the first nine classes.
Affix Tf ya* lengthened to *n yd before initial m and v to the
root, the vowel of which is not gunated, and often remains unchanged.
(Compare the rule for cl. 4 at 249 and 272.)
464. Thus, from *J.cl. i, ' to be,' comes the stem *JTJ bhuya (Pres. bhuya+ i=>|TT,
bhuy a +se =**&[, &c.; Impf. aftMz/a+i=^I>j5, &c.; Pot. bhuya-{-{ya=*jTjft, &c.;
Impv. &Mya+ai=^J5?, &c.); from ^ cl. 6, 'to strike,' comes tudya (Pres. tudya
+i=3*T, &c.)
465. The root, however, often undergoes changes, which are generally analogous
to those of cl. 4 and the Precative Parasmai-pada (see 275 and 445); but a final d
is not changed to e as in the Precative.
Six roots in ^1 d, and one or two in 1? e, *? ai, and ^ft o, change their final
vowels to ^ {; thus, <J1 'to give,' ^ 'to protect,' and (ft 'to cut,' make Pres. <^fr,
^frW, ^fafl, &c. So also, VT ' to place' (ycd sing. Vfa^) ; ^Tf ' to stand,' *H ' to
measure,' TT 'to drink,' and ^T 'to quit;' y 'to drink' (3rd sing. VfafiT 1 , &c.);
^ 'to sing' (iffaffi) ; *ft 'to destroy' (tffajTT).
Obs. i. ^T cl. 2, 'to bind,' makes <^Rn, as it is not a ghu and does not come
under Pan. vi. 4, 66.
Obs. 2. |TT to go ' (oJidn) makes hdyate, though ^T to quit ' (ohdk) makes hiyate.
a. But other roots in ^TT a remain unchanged ; and most others in ai and o are
changed to d; thus, ^TT 'to tell' makes 3rd sing. WHTiT; and $TT 'to know,'
STT^; IT 'to protect,' Tnifl; ^ 'to meditate,' W3W; ?[ft 'to sharpen,'
b. ^fl.^1, ^^hf^, and ^^ drop their final vowels as at 390. c (<^foSI n
&c.); and rtH 'to become old' makes i. Wfaff. Cf. 446. a.
c. Og'to call,' ^ 'to weave,' ^? 'to cover,' make their stems |f*T, ^H|, and
(3rd sing. f^?). Compare 450. a.
466. Final ^ i or T u are lengthened, as also a medial i or M before v or r; thus,
from frf, ?, f^, ^, come ffa, JTJ, ^^, ^. See 447 and 453. b.
a. But f^[ 'to swell' makes 3rd sing. ^TITT} and ^jft 'to lie down,' ^l4rt.
467. Final ^ ri becomes f^ ri, but if preceded by a double consonant is gunated ;
thus, j makes 3. f^HT ; ^, fS'^lri ; but 9J, W^TT. Cf. 448.
a. The roots ^ (3rd sing, ^nhf) and WPJ are also gunated. Cf. 448. a.
468. Final ^n becomes f^ ir ; thus, S ' to scatter ' makes 3. <*1^fl J but ^J ' to
C.*v
fill,' ^TT. See 449 and 449. a.
* This ya is probably derived from yd, 'to go,' just as the Causal aya is derived
from i, 'to go.' It is certain that in Bengali and Hindi the Passive is formed
with the root yd. Cf. Latin amatum iri, &c. See 481.
200 PASSIVE VERBS. FORMATION OF STEM.
469. Roots ending in a double consonant, of which the first is a nasal, usually
reject the nasal; as, from ^f^, ^P^, *T^, come the stems 3*Q, &c. (^fl, &c.)
a. The roots at 390. 1. carry their peculiarities into the Passive (R^fiT or shl^F,
JpTfl or jftaTOW, fqaHW or fTaJFOITr, ^TWIT or ^JTTfazfiT).
470. afJ^ 'to produce,' lsf^ 'to dig,' K*^ 'to stretch,' ^ 'to give,' optionally
reject the final nasal, and lengthen the preceding a; thus, sTTOT or n*nfr, &c.
471. ^^'to speak,' ^ 'to say,' ^J/to sow,' ^"St 'to wish,' ^'to dwell,' ^|
'to bear,' *3^'to sleep,' TJ^'to sacrifice,' change the semivowels ^, *T into their
corresponding vowels and accordingly make their stems T^T, "3^1, "3*3, "^T^j
TT, ^?T, ?pl, ^W respectively, (T3ffi , &c.)
Obs. This change of a semivowel into its corresponding vowel is technically
called Samprasarana.
472. Similarly, ?J^' to take,' TT3 ' to ask,' >T5s^'to fry,' 3^ 'to deceive,' SJV' to
pierce,' sPJ^'to cut,' make their stems *J^I, ^J^T, *J^5?T, f%^R, f^VCf, ^ST respec-
tively, CJ^IW, &c.)
a. vB^ 'to reason ' shortens its vowel after prepositions (<J<5lrt ; otherwise "3illff).
b. "3T5^ forms its Passive from ^; ^^ from ^J ^^ from ^J "^from ^^;
and ^53" from WT.
c. 'JIl 'to rule' makes its Passive stem
General Tenses. Perfect of Passives.
473. The stem of this tense in the Passive verb is identical with that of all
Primitive verbs, in all ten classes. The stems, therefore, as formed at 364-384,
will serve equally well for the Perfect of the Passive, provided only that they
be restricted to the Atmane-pada inflexion ; thus, ^^1, *NTj &c.
a. When the Periphrastic Perfect has to be employed (see 385) the auxiliaries
^PR and *J.may be used in the A'tmane, as well as ^i. Compare 385. 6.
First and Second Future of Passives.
474. In these and the remaining tenses no variation generally occurs from the
stems of the same tenses in the Primitive, A'tmane, unless the root end in a vowel.
In that case the insertion of ^ i may take place in the Passive, although prohibited
in the Primitive, provided the final vowel of the root be first vriddhied ; thus, from
f% ci, cl. 5, 'to gather,' may come the stem of the ist and 2nd Put. Pass. 6dyi
(tdyitdhe &c., tdyishye &c.), although the stem of the same tenses in the Primitive
is (e (tetdhe &c., teshye &c.) Similarly, from ? hu and ^ji kri may come hdvi and
kdri (hdvitdhe, kdritdhe), although the stems in the Primitive are ho and kar.
a. In like manner ^ i may be inserted when the root ends in long ^T a, or in T? e,
l?ai, ^5no, changeable to ^ITa, provided that, instead of Vriddhi (which is impossible),
y be interposed between the final d and inserted i ; thus, from ^T da, 'to give,' may
come the stem of the Put. Pass, ddyi (ddyitdhe &c.), although the stem of the same
tenses in the Primitive is da (ddtdhe &c.)j from 3^ hve, 'to call,' may come hvdyi
PASSIVE VERBS. - FORMATION OP STEM. 201
' &c.), although the stem in the Primitive is hvd. But in all these cases
the stem of the Primitive may be taken for that of the Passive, so that tetdhe or
(dyitdhe may equally stand for the ist Fut. Pass. ; and similarly with the others.
b. In the case of roots ending in consonants, the stem of the two Futures in the
Passive will be identical with that of the same tenses in the Primitive verb, the in-
flexion being that of the Atmane. 73F ' to see,' however, in the Passive, may be
^f^fTI^ , cff^f, as well as "%gl^ , Tg%$ ', and ^ ' to kill ' may be ^Ilf*ffll5, "*nfiTBI>
as well as ^*flis, ^f^wf; and TJ 'to take' may be HT%fn^, ?Tlfi^> as well as
c. In verbs of cl. 10 and Causals, deviation from the Atmane form of the Primi-
tive may take place in these and the succeeding tenses. See 496.
Aorist of Passives.
475. In this tense, also, variation from the Primitive may occur when the root
ends in a vowel. For in that case the insertion of ^ i may take place, although
forbidden in the Primitive verb, provided the final of the root be vriddhied ; thus,
from fa ti may come the stem of the Aor. Pass, addyi (a6dyishi &c., 427), although
the stem in the Atmane of the Primitive is a6e (ateshi &c., 420). So also, from
? hu and ^ Art may come ahdvi and akdri (ahdvishi, akdrishi, 427), although the
stems in the Atmane of the Primitive are aho and dkri (ahoshi, akrishi, 420). Again,
i may be inserted when the root ends in Ipng ^IT a, or in 1J e, < at, ^U o, changeable;
to ^TT a, provided that y be interposed between final d and inserted i ; thus, from <?T
' to give,' ^ ' to protect,' ^ 'to purify/ <^ ' to cut,' may come addyi (addyishi &c.),
although the stems hi the Atmane of the Primitives are different (as adishi &c.)
But in all these cases it is permitted to take the stem of the Primitive for that of
the Passive (so that the Passive of ti may be either addyishi or ateshi), except in the
3rc? pers. sing., where the terminations ishta and sta being rejected, the stem, as
formed by Vriddhi and the inserted i, must stand alone ; thus, a6dyi, it was"
gathered;' ahdvi, 'it was sacrificed;' akdri, 'it was done;' addyi, ' it was given,"
'protected,' 'purified,' 'cut.'
a. Sometimes the usual form of the Aorist Atmane is employed throughout (see'
461. III). This is the case whenever the sense is that of a Reflexive Passive, not of
the real Passive; thus, ^TT 'to tell' hi the 3rd sing. Aor. Pass, is ^usmfa, but in
the sense of a Reflexive Passive ^TWff j far ' to resort to ' makes ist sing. Aor. Pass.
, but Reflexive ^rfrjffosnfr; and ^B^' to love' makes 3rd sing. Aor. Pass.
oBTftT, but Reflexive ^J^cR^.
b. If the root end in a consonant, the stem of the Aorist Passive will always be
identical with that of the Atmane of the Primitive, except in the 3rd sing., where.
^ t being substituted for the terminations ishta and sta of form I at 418, generally
requires before it the lengthening of a medial a (if not already long by position),
and the Guna of any other short medial vowel*. Hence, from tan, to stretch,'
* A medial vowel, long by nature or position, remains unchanged (by 28), and
in one or two cases even a short vowel ; as, asami for asdmi,
Dd
202 PASSIVE VERBS. - FORMATION OF STEM.
1st, 2nd, and 3rd sing, atanishi, atanishthds, atdni; from kship, 'to throw,' akshipsi,
akshipthds, akshepi; from vid, 'to know,' avedishi, avedishthds, avedi, &c.
c. The lengthening of a medial a, however, is hy no means universal ; and there
are other exceptions in the 3rd sing., as follows :
Nearly all roots ending in am forbid the lengthening of the vowel in the 3rd sing. ;
thus, ^Tarfir from W{ ' to walk ;' 4lffa from ^[ ' to bear ;' ^T^lft from ^ ' to
be calm' (but in the sense of 'to observe,' ^n$nfa).
d. Similarly, 'W^ftl from ^TV and ^lTfa from H^. The former may optionally
substitute ^VlHff from ^.
e. J^and *J^ lengthen their vowels (^Wlf^, ^I'lf^).
/. The roots at 390. /. will have two forms, ^Sfifa or ^JRlf*?, ^T*ftfa or
: or ^rf^aiTftr, &c.
I>J 'to perish,' T>T 'to yawn,' *?T 'to desire,' insert nasals
. Similarly, o5*T 'to receive,' when it has a preposition (e.g.
and optionally when it has none (^7$ft* or ^5TfT, Pan. vn. i, 69).
A. HT^'to break' may drop its nasal, in which case the medial a is lengthened
i. ^3 ' to clothe ' may either retain the e or change it to i or * (^^fe or
or ^tfr).
j. \ to go ' substitutes TT, and optionally does so when adhi is prefixed in the
sense of ' to read ' (^WTTfo or ^TWTTftl).
k. ^j'to blame' makes Wifffa or
Precative (or Benedictive) and Conditional of Passives.
476. In these tenses the same variation is permitted in the case of roots ending
in vowels as in the Aorist ; that is, the insertion of ^ i is allowed, provided that,
before it, Vriddhi take place in a final vowel capable of such a change, and y be
interposed after final d; thus, from fa< may come the stems 6dyi and atdyi (tdyishiya,
addyishye) ; from ? hu, hdvi and ahdvi ; from 3 kri, kdri and akdri ; from ^T dd,
ddyi and addyi. But 6esh{ya, ateshye, hoshiya, ahoshye, &c., the forms belonging
to the A'tmane of the Primitive verb, are equally admissible in the Passive.
Passive Infinitive.
477. There is no Passive Infinitive in Sanskrit distinct in form from the Active.
The suffix turn, however, is capable of a Passive sense, when joined with certain
verbs, especially with the Passive of ^IW sak, 'to be able.' It is also used passively,
in connection with the Participles drabdha, nirupita, yukta, &c. See Syntax, 869.
Passive verbs from roots of the loth class.
478. In forming a Passive verb from roots of cl. 10, although the conjugational
WT is rejected in the first four tenses, yet the other conjugational changes of the
root are retained before the suffix ya; thus, from ^ cl. 10, 'to steal,' comes the
CAUSAL VERBS. FORMATION OF STEM. 203
stem vorya ('sfff). In the Perfect ''SHT is retained (see 473. a), and in the other
General tenses the stem may deviate from the A'tmane form of the Primitive by
the optional rejection or assumption of ^HJ, especially in the Aorist. See Causal
Passives at 496.
CAUSAL VERBS.
479. Every root in every one of the ten classes may take a Causal
form, which is conjugated as a verb of the loth class ; and which is
not only employed to give a Causal sense to a Primitive verb, but
also a Transitive sense to an Intransitive verb ; see 289.
Thus, the Primitive verb bodhati, ' he knows' (from root budh, cl. i), becomes in
the Causal ^hnrfff bodhayati, ' he causes to know,' ' he informs ;' and the Intransi-
tive verb kshubhyati, ' he shakes,' ' is shaken' (from kshubh, cl. 4), becomes T5jta*Tnf
'he shakes' (transitively).
a. This form may sometimes imply other analogous senses.
Thus, hdrayati, 'he allows to take;' ndsayati,'lie suffers to perish;' abhisheca-
yati, ' he permits himself to be inaugurated ;' kshamayati, ' he asks to be forgiven ;'
' allow yourself to be inaugurated.'
Obs. To say that every root may take a Causal form, is equivalent to saying
that roots of the first nine classes may all belong to the loth, when they take a
Causal sense; and that if a root be originally of the loth class, no distinct form
for its Causal is necessary, the Primitive verb and the Causal being in that case
identical (see 289). Possibly the occasional employment of a Causal verb in a
Transitive, rather than a Causal sense, was the reason for creating a loth class of
Primitive verbs. Certainly the subject of conjugation would be simplified if the
addition of aya to the root were considered in all cases as the mark of a Causal
verb ; especially as aya is not the sign of a separate conjugation, in the way of any
other conjugational Vikarana (see 250. b) ; for it is retained in most of the other
tenses of the verb, not only in the first four, just as the Desiderative ish is retained.
480. As to the terminations of Causal verbs, they are the same as
those of the scheme at 246 ; and the same substitutions are required
in the first four tenses as in classes i, 4, 6, and 10.
Special Tenses.
481. General rule for forming the stem in the four Special tense*
of roots of the ten classes.
If a root end in a vowel, vriddhi that vowel ; if in a consonant,
gunate the radical vowel before all the terminations, and affix ^BHl aya *
* This may be derived from root ^ i, ' to go,' just as the Passive ya is supposed
to be derived from root yd. See 463, note *.
D d 2
204 CAUSAL VERBS. FORMATION OF STEM.
(changeable to ayd before initial m and v, but not before simple m)
to the root so vriddhied or gunated.
482. Thus, from fi 'to lead' comes the stem TT*TO by 37 (Pres. ndyayd+mi =
TrnmftT, ndyaya + si='*RTmfa &c. ; Impf. andyaya + m=^tfiF&{ & c . ; p o t.
nay ay a + iy am = rj i q *< q*^ & c . ; Impv. noyya+a7u='^nnnf?r &c. A'tm. Pres.
ayaya-H==Tnni&c. In Epic poetry a doubtful form ^TTWfo is found). Simi-
larly, from 3JT 'to lie down' comes ^TTTT say ay a ($||4|4||fr &c.) ; from ^bhtt, 'to
be,' comes HT^ bhdvaya (*R*nfa &c.) ; and from ^ ' to do' and cK ' to scatter'
the stem eRTOT kdraya.
But from p^' to know' comes the gunated '3\Wbodhaya (^vnnftr) ; and from
JJ^cl. i, 'to creep,' the gunated *riN sarpaya.
Obs. WJ(J to celebrate,' and other verbs of the loth class, will take the changes
already explained at 285-289.
483. Roots ending in ^TT d, or in ^ e, % ai, ^ o, changeable to ^TT a, cannot be
vriddhied, but frequently insert \p between the root and the suffix aya ; thus, ^T
' to give,' ^ 'to love,' and eft 'to cut,' all make <Jim<lfa ddpaydmi, &c. ; ^ 'to drink/
>H*nnf>T dhdpaydmi, &c. ; ^ ' to sing,' TTHnnfiT gdpaydmi, &c. See 484.
a. So also other roots in d insert^, except *H cl. i, ' to drink,' which inserts 1 y
(*n<4ir*i & c .) ; and TIT cl. 2, 'to preserve,' which inserts c5 / (MIc^^lfH &c.) ; and
^T cl. 2, in the sense of 'to agitate,' which inserts T CWT5T*nf*T &c.)
b. So also other roots in ai insert p, but most others in e and o insert y; thus,
^ ' to call' makes c^Kimfo &c. Similarly, ^ ' to weave,' ^J ' to put on.' ^ft ' to
sharpen ' makes ^hM^lftr &c. Similarly, "sft ' to cut,' fft ' to destroy.'
484. ^T 'to know,' ^TT or % 'to stew,' ^T 'to bathe,' and *| ' to languish,' may
optionally shorten the d, the last two only when not joined with prepositions ;
thus, suH-mfa &c., or sfmjlft &c. ; nTTTTrf'T &c., or 'JM^lfa &c. (but with tlft
only, ^ftTTtnnfH). ^ ' to waste away ' makes only T^rnftT.
485. Some roots in t, {, ri, also insert p, after changing the final vowel to d;
thus, fT 'to conquer' makes ^mMifn &c. Similarly, fa 'to throw,' Wt 'to
perish,' Jfft 'to buy' (*TT*nnf>T, jfiltj^jft?, &c.)
a. ft<R ' to smile ' makes WnTOTfa &c., and 9TTq^ &c.
b. 'Nr 'to collect' has four forms ; i. -qm^ifH &c., 2. ^iltlTft? &c., 3. ^nHTlf'T
&c., 4. ^Ererft &c.
c. >rt cl. 3, 'to fear,' has three forms ; i. ^IM^lft? &c., 2. >TnPT &c., Atm. only,
3. >fN^ &c., Atm. only.
rf. ^ cl, 2, 'to go,' makes "wm^nftr &c., especially with the preposition ^ifv
* over,' ^ectm^mf'T ' I cause to go over,' ' I teach.'
e. Three roots insert n; ctft cl. 4, 'to embrace,' 'to adhere,' making (with prep.
ftf in the sense of 'to dissolve') -c^fpnfa &c., as well as -c5"nnnfa, -e^HRTft,
and -WI(5*TfnT &c. ; in some senses, however, o5TTmfH only can be used : ift cl. g,
'to please,' makes irtumrft (also Jliwfa) ; and ^cl. 5 and 9, ' to shake,' ^jTTTfo
486. "^t cl. 3, ' to be ashamed,' T? ' to flow,' ^ ' to choose,' and ^ cl. i, ' to go,'
insert p after gunation ; thus, l*nf*T &c., ^T^TTfiT &c.
CAUSAL VERBS. FORMATION OF STEM. 205
. ^t and tf and ^ft^T (see 390.0) drop their finals
^fr^^Tfi?, &c.)
b. STPJ 'to awake,' W in the sense of 'to long for,' cl. 4, 'to grow old,' ST in the
sense of 'to fear,' ""T 'to lead,' take Guna (*(|JK4|rf>T). But <T 'to tear,' ^Kqifa.
c. *T ' to swallow ' makes *IK^ffa or TT^nftr.
487. Roots ending in single consonants, enclosing a medial ^ a, generally
lengthen the a; thus, TT^cl. i, 'to cook,' makes tTT^nfa &c. There are, however,
many exceptions; thus, 5^ 'to be sick,' n*^ 'to hasten,' &c., do not lengthen
the vowel. In 1?^ ' to blaze,' and some others, the lengthening is optional.
a. Roots in m generally do not lengthen the a- thus, *T^cl. I, 'to go,' makes
'iiMifa &c. ; ^i^ ' to be weary,' $fl\ <nfo &c. Some, however, optionally do so ;
as, ^ ' to bend,' &c. One or two always lengthen the a ; as, cR^ ' to love ' makes
or
6. The roots TV, *T*r, **, and c5>? (see 475.0) insert nasals (T^nnf* &c.)
488. Other anomalies. ^ 'to grow' makes O'fnftT or rfrTTlfa;
'to sound, '^twfa; |^'to be corrupt,' |^nftr; ^'to kill,' TffinjTf*T ;
'to fall,' 'to perish,' STTrPITfo; ?^ 'to quiver,' 4*W<.qifa or I^I^Tfi
'to increase,' ^fiT^mfT; T?ntl 'to shake' as the earth, Vflmmfa &c.; ^'to
rub,' mtmfT (390.^) ; ^ ' to conceal,' ^^TfT (390. m).
a. The roots *TT^, f^, ^, TRrr, Tj^, ^, a t 390. /, wiU have two forms
&c., see 390. 1).
b- ftr^'to be finished' makes its Causal either ^TTtnnfa or, with reference to
sacred rites, iftnnfo ; ^ ' to fry ' either y-rrt^lftr or X^JJlfr ; but the last form
may be from ^^.
c. ^T 'to clothe' makes ffT^rfa; T^in the sense of 'to hunt,' THITfa.
Obs. The Causal of verbs of cl. 10 will be identical with the Primitive ; see 289.
The Causals of Causals will also be identical with the Causals themselves.
General Tenses.
489. The changes of the root required to form the stem of the
Special tenses are continued in the General. Moreover, aya is re-
tained in all these tenses, except the Aorist and except the Precative,
Parasmai ; but the last a of aya is dropped before the inserted 2[ i,
which is invariably assumed in all other General tenses.
Perfect qf Causals.
490. This tense must be of the Periphrastic form, as explained at
385; that is, w^aw added to the Causal stem is prefixed to the
Perfect of one of the three auxiliary verbs, ^ c to be/ / to be,' or <y
'to do; J thus, 'to know 5 makes in Causal Perfect ^wq^K or
206 CAUSAL VERBS. FORMATION OP STEM.
or ^hnn^pj?. ^ makes in Caus. Perf. 3rd pi.
' they extinguished 5 (Raghu-v. vn. 45).
First and Second future of Causals.
491. In these tenses the inserted ^ i is invariably assumed between
the stem, as formed in the Special tenses, and the usual terminations ;
thus, >j makes ^tvftfinfe? &c., ^tvftranfr &c.
Aorist of Causals and verbs of cl. 10.
492. The terminations are those of form II at 435. In the
formation of the stem of this tense, the suffix ay is rejected ; but any
other change that may take place in the Special tenses, such as the
insertion of p or y, is preserved. The stem is a reduplicated form
of this change, and to this reduplication the augment ^ a is prefixed.
Thus, taking the stems bodkay sndjdpay (Causal stems of ludh, to know,' and
ji, 'to conquer'), and rejecting ay, we have bodh and jap; and from these are
formed the stems of the Aorist abubudh and ajyap (^^P&{ abubudham &c.,
^13^ abubudhe &c., vrfflim^ ajijapam &c., ^Trfcrxf ajtjape &c., cf. the Greek
Pluperfect).
493. The rule for this reduplication is as follows: The initial
consonant of the root, with its vowel, is reduplicated, and the redu-
plicated consonant follows the rules given at 252 ; but the redupli-
cation of the vowel is peculiar.
Reduplication of the vowel of the initial consonant in the* Causal Aorist.
a. Causal stems, after rejecting ay, will generally end in ay, dv, dr, or a consonant
preceded by a, d, e, o, or or. The usual reduplicated vowel for all these, except o,
is ^ i. But 7 u is reduplicated for o, and sometimes also for dv. The rule is, that
either the reduplicated or stem syllable must be long either by nature or position ;
and in general the reduplicated vowel i or u is made long, and, to compensate for
this, the long vowel of the Causal stem shortened, or, if it be Guna, changed to its
corresponding short vowel ; thus, the Causal stem nay (from *n, rejecting ay) makes
the stem of the Aorist aninay (^f*i1t*<*^ anmayam &c.); the Causal stem bhdv
(from *JJ makes abibhav C3TTfa^R[ &c.) ; the Causal stem kdr (from eji), adtkar ;
gam (from JT*^), ajtgam; pd6 (from ^T^), apipac; pal (from TF), apipal; ved (from
ft^), avfvid. But bodh (from "^pf), abubudh; and sdv (from ^J), asushav.
b. Sometimes the reduplicated vowel is only long by position before two conso-
nants, the radical vowel being still made short ; as, srdv (from ^J) makes asisrav or
asufrav; drdv (from "5), adudrav or adidrav; ^THT, abibhraj (also ababhrdj).
c. Sometimes the reduplicated vowel remains short, whilst the vowel of the
Causal stem, which must be long either by nature or position, remains unchanged ;
CAUSAL VERBS. - FORMATION OF STEAL 207
thus, the Causal stem jiv (from fta) may make ^ffr^ (also ^8 ftftr? ) ; tint,
aiitint; kalp, atikalp. In such cases a is generally reduplicated for a or a; as,
laksh makes alalaksh; ydc, ayayd6; vart (from vrii), avavart, &c.
d. Obs. If the stem has ar, dr, ir, al (from radical ri, ri, or Iri), these are either
left unchanged or ar, dr, ir may be changed to ^ ri, and al to "^ Iri ; thus, vart
(from ^TT ) may make avivrit as well as avavart ; kirt (from ^r^) either atikirt or
atikrit, &c.
e. The following are other examples, some of which are anomalous : from pay
(Caus. of pa, 'to drink'), wfiwi^&c.; fromsthdp (Caus.of sthd, 'to stand'), ^rfif-
ffc^&c.; fromghrdp (Caus. ofghrd,'to smell'), ^fsTfini^&c., and ^ffinixn^&c. ;
from adhydp (Caus. of i, 'to go,' with adhi), wmfbro^ &c.; from 6esht (Caus. of
tesht, 'to make effort'), ST^B^ or '3rf%^B^; from hvdy (Caus. of Jive,' to call'),
WSjjTR^ or ^nj^^; from tvar (Caus. of tvar, 'to hasten'), vinrm*^; from star
(Caus. of stri or strf, 'to spread'), ^Tdwt^ or ^rfrt^r<*^; from ddr (Caus. of dri,
'to tear'), ^fi^T^; from dyot (Caus. of dyut, 'to shine'), ^f^T!^; from svdy
(Caus. of svi, 'to swell'), ^^JJO^ or 5Hf$Ia(*^; from smdr (Caus. of smri, 'to
remember'), ^TOfFR*^; from soap (Caus. of ^T^'to sleep'), ^^R*^ ', from kath
(cl. 10, 'to tell'), ^I'^*^ or *JiWl<*M*tJ from TOST (cl. 10, 'to count'),
or ^?*ft'TO^ J from prath (Caus. of TT^ ' to spread '),
Reduplication of an initial vowel in the Causal Aorist.
494. Roots beginning with vowels, and ending with single consonants, form their
Causal Aorists by a peculiar reduplication of the root (after rejecting ^PI). The
rule is that not only the initial vowel, as in the Perfect at 364. a, but the final
consonant also be reduplicated. In fact, the whole root is doubled, as it would
be if it began with a consonant, and ended with a vowel ; the consonant is redu-
plicated according to the rules at 252, but the second vowel is generally jj i.
This i (which probably results from a weakening of a) takes the place of the stem
vowel, which then becomes the initial of the reduplicated syllable, and combines
with the augment ^T a, according to 251. a; thus, ;R? to infer' makes the stem of
its Causal Aorist "3!%^ ujih ; and with 'W prefixed, WffW^: ( wftr^ ' I caused to
infer '). So also, ^STl^ cl. 5, ' to obtain,' makes fllPMM^ ' I caused to obtain ;' ^?
cl. 2, 'to praise,' makes ^fT?*^ 'I caused to praise.' Cf. Gr. 2nd Aor. yyaytv
from ayw, and (apopov from opwpt.1.
a. If a root end in a conjunct consonant, the first member of which is a nasal
or r, this nasal or r is rejected from the final, but not from the reduplicated letter ;
thus, ^T^ ' to be worthy' makes Wfnj^ ' I caused to be worthy,' ' I honoured ;'
so iRv, Causal stem from ^>J^'to prosper,' makes ^rrf^V^ ' I caused to prosper;'
and '7*^ 'to moisten' makes 1 uT<^*^ ' I caused to moisten.'
b. But when the first member of the compound is any other letter, then the cor-
responding consonant to this first member of the compound is reduplicated by
252. c; thus, ^T ' to see' makes j f 1 *!^*^ aitiksham, ' I caused to see ;' ^TT ' to go *
makes ^TTfaa^ ' I caused to go.'
208 CAUSAL A r ERBS. FORMATION OF STEM.
c. Roots consisting of a single vowel, form their Causal Aorists from the Causal
stem (after rejecting ay a] ; thus, the root ^T ' to go ' makes its Causal stem arp, ' to
deliver over;' and its Causal Aorist wfa'W ' I caused to deliver.'
d. "3!^ ' to cover ' makes its Causal Aorist 'i5ti<ujii ; ^Ttf cl. 10, ' to be blind,'
and "35^ cl. 10, 'to diminish,' WT*TJT.
e. When the consonant which follows the initial vowel has another vowel after
it, this vowel must appear in the reduplication ; thus, from ^T^vt^ cl. 10, ' to des-
pise,' comes the Aorist
Precative (or Benedictive) and Conditional of Causals.
495. The stem of the Causal Precative ^tmane, and of the
Causal Conditional in both voices, does not differ from that of the
General tenses ; but the last a of aya is dropped before the inserted
^ i, which is always assumed. In the Precative Parasmai both
aya and i are rejected, but any other change of the root is retained ;
thus, ^1 'to know 5 makes in Caus. Free, bodhydsam &c., bodha-
yishiya &c. ; in Cond., abodhayishyam &c., abodhayishye &c.
Infinitive of Calais.
a. The Infinitive may be most easily formed from the 3rd sing.
ist Future, as explained at 459 ; thus, from yi comes f)vifi|rtl ' he
will cause to know/ ^ffrvftnj* ' to cause to know. 5
Passive of Causals.
496. In forming a Passive verb from a Causal stem, the Causal
suffix ^ni is rejected, but the other Causal changes of the root are
retained before the Passive suffix ya.
Thus, from Caus. stem Mmfl pat ay a (from m^'to fall') comes the Pass. TW
pdtya, making ist sing. tn 'i am made to fall,' 3rd sing. TTWiT 'he is made to
fall.' Similarly, WT 'to stand' makes **fm<4frT 'he causes to stand,' *n*MtT 'he
is caused to stand;' and ^Tt 'to know' makes stR^fit 'he causes to know,' and
sT^TH 1 'he is caused to know,' 'he is informed.'
a. In the General tenses, the stem of all the tenses, excepting the
Perfect, may vary from the Atmane form by the optional rejection
of the conjugational ^ni. But in the Perfect, the Atmane of the
usual form with dm and the auxiliaries (490, 385) is admitted for
the Passive. In the Aorist, the usual reduplicated form (492) gives
place to the Atmane form which belongs to those verbs of the first
nine classes which assume i.
DES1DERATIVE VERBS. - FORMATION OF STEM. 209;
Thus, from TTTIT, the Causal stem of ^ ' to be,' come the Passive Perfect
or VTTWn^ or HTWW^; ist Put. HT^fqTIT^ or mfarTRT ; 2nd Fut.
or Wfa'SI ; Aor. 1 3Wreftrfa or ^THTlVfa, 3rd sing, ^Wlfa ; Prec. HTC-
or TTfat[fa ; Cond. ^WT3fin>I or ^WTfTOT.
b. Similarly, from "^tVT, Causal stem of "3V ' to know,' come Passive Perfect
^TOTT^R &c. ' I have been caused to know;' ist Fut. ^faftfintr or ^rfrfvin^ &c.
'I shall be caused to know;' 2nd Fut. ^vftTBl or "^tf^TO &c. ; Aor.
or ^Rtfvfc ' I have been caused to know,' 2. ^T^vrftrgl^ or
3. "Sl^tfv & c .
c. So also, from $FR*T, Causal stem of ^T*^ to cease,' come the Passive Perfect
5Pnn^^5 or 3T*t*TWT^ &c. ' I have been caused to cease,' &c.; ist Fut. ^Rfmn^
or ^ifRTTT^ ', 2nd Fut. ^prftnt? or ^T^TO ; Aor. Jty**fafa or TH^lfHfV, 3rd sing.
'STUTm ; Prec. ^nTfl^^f &c. : and the radical a may be optionally lengthened ;
thus, ist Fut. ^THftfiTT^ or TflTOftnTRT &c.
d. So also, ^rejftl or ^SI^Tf^, 3rd sing. Aor., from Causal of T3|.
Obs. Even t5(, ^^, JK^, and some other roots which end in a double conso-
nant, may optionally lengthen the medial a ; thus, Aor. 3rd sing. ^eKistf or
Desiderative of Causals.
497. When Causals and verbs of cl. 10 take a Desiderative form
(see 498), they retain ay, and are all formed with isha ; thus, UTiTOTfk
' I cause to fall ' makes ftmnrftr^nftr ' I desire to cause to fall ;'
^T'^nf*? 'I cause to sleep 3 makes ^^TTftrmfT 'I desire to cause tq
sleep ;' ^T cl. 10, ' to steal/ makes '^fafjrerft? * I wish to steal/
a. The Desiderative stem of the Causal of ^TCft, ' to go over,' is either wwnflf
Tfn^ or ^rfvftnimf'W ; of the Causal of ^ ' to call,' ^fl^f^^ (as if from ^TWI) ;
of the Causal of $fT ' to know/ sffal (or regularly fji^rMf^X or
Causal of f^ ' to swell,' W^IT^fl^ (or regularly f^I^
DESIDERATIVE VERBS.
498. Every root in the ten classes may take a Desiderative form*
a. Although this form of the root is not often used, in classical composition, in
its character of a verb, yet nouns and participles derived from the Desiderative stem
are not uncommon (see 80. 1, and 82. VII). Moreover, there are certain Primitive
roots which take a Desiderative form, without yielding a Desiderative sense ; and
these, as equivalent to Primitive verbs (amongst which they are generally classed),
may occur in classical Sanskrit ; e. g. jugups, 'to blame/ from "*{gup; fikits, 'to
pure/ from f^n^foY,- titiksh, 'to bear,' from fft*{tij; tftni^mmdjis, 'to reason/
from TJ^man; bibhats, ' to abhor/ from "3T*^or T^.
E e
DESIDEBATIVE VERBS. FORMATION OF STEM.
499. Desideratives take the terminations at 346, with the substi-
tutions required in classes i, 4, 6, and 10; and their inflexion,
either in Parasmai or Atmane, is generally determined by the practice
of the Primitive verb.
Thus, root ^|V budh, cl. i, 'to know,' taking both inflexions in the Primitive,
may take both in the Desiderative (bubodhishdmi &c., or bubodhishe &c., I desire
to know'); and c?*T labh, 'to obtain,' taking only the A'tmane in the Primitive,
may take only the A'tmane in the Desiderative (llpse &c., ' I desire to obtain').
500. Rule for forming the stem in the four Special tenses.
Reduplicate the initial consonant and vowel of the root, and gene-
rally, though not invariably, if the Primitive verb inserts 5j i (see
392415), affix ^"9 ish or in a few roots ^*r (see 393) ; if it rejects i,
then simply ^ s, changeable to t( sh (by 70 ; see, however, f\ to the
root so reduplicated. The vowel a is then added, as in classes i, 4,
6, and 10; and, agreeably to the rule in those classes, this a becomes a
before terminations beginning with m and v (but not before simple m).
a. Thus, from f%fi{kship, 'to throw,' comes the stem cikshipsa (tikshipsd-\-mi-=.
f^frSpHlfa tikshipsdmi &c., 'I desire to throw'); but from f^ vid, 'to know,'
taking inserted i, comes vividisha (vividishd+mi=T3f3ft%mfa vividishdmi &c. In
Atm. the stem is vivitsa).
b. Some roots, however, which reject the inserted i in other forms,
assume it in the Desiderative, and vice versa. Some, again, allow an
option ; thus, ^' to be' makes ftr^ft^ &c. or fN^riilfa &c. See the
lists at 392-415.
c. The reduplication of the consonant is in conformity with the rules at 252 ;
that of the vowel belonging to the initial consonant follows the analogy of Causal
Aorists at 493; that is, the vowel 3(i is reduplicated for a, d, i, /, ri, n, Iri, e, or ai;
but the vowel ^ u for u, u, and o; and also for the a of av or dv preceded by any
Consonant except j, a labial or a semivowel; thus, fr. t|^ 'to cook' comes Desid.
stem pipaksha by 296; fr. TTT3 'to ask/ yiyd6isJia; fr. TfN 'to live,' jijivisha ;
fr. "^5^ 'to see/ didriksha ; fr. ^T^ 'to serve/ sisevisha ; fr. ^ 'to sing/ jigdsa ;
fr. $TT 'to know/ jijndsa (yiyvuaKU); but fr. ^^ 'to join' comes yuyuksha ; fr.
^ 'to purify/ pupdsha; fr. J>^ cl. 4, 'to know/ ^JW bubhutsa, see 299. a;
fr. TRT!, Causal stem of ^ 'to praise/ nundvayisha; fr. M'll*?, Causal stem of ^
'to purify/ pipdvayisha.
d. And if the root begin with a vowel the reduplication still follows the analogy
of the same tense at 494; thus, from ^31 comes ^?f^I3I; and with isha added,
1%%^. Similarly, from ^ comes arjiJiisha; from "S^ 1 , ujihisha ; from f^T,
itikshisha ; from T^, undidisha ; see 494.
DESJDERATIVE VERBS. - FORMATION OF STEM. 211
Obs. In reduplication the vowel t takes the place of a, as being lighter ; see
252. d. Obs. It is probably the result of a weakening of a.
e. In Desiderative stems formed from the Causals of ^ ' to fall,' ^T ' to run,' ^
* &>' "5 * l ea P>' ^J ' to hear,' ^ 'to distil,' and ^ ' to flow,' a or a may be repre-
sented by either u or i; thus, the Causal of ^J makes f*l d| H ftlM or ^J-d|llftR.
/. Observe When the inserted s becomes sh by 70, the initial ^of a root will
not be affected by the vowel of the reduplicated syllable ; thus, sic; makes sisiksha,
not sishiksha ; and sev makes sisevisha. Except, however, ^, which makes
and except the Desid. of Causals, as ftnhlftre fr. Caus. of
501. When a root takes the inserted i or i (393), and forms its
Desiderative with isha or isha, then the final ^ n is gunated.
Thus, Tf ' to cross ' makes titarisha or tltartsha (also tlttrsha, see 502).
a. Moreover, initial and medial i, , ri are often, but not always,
gunated if followed by a single consonant.
Thus, "3^'to go' makes otikhisha; ^ 'to wish,' eshishisha; f^'to play,'
didevisha; Tif 'to dance,' ninartisha: but fa<| 'to know,' vividisha.
b. An option, as to Guna, is however generally allowed to medial i and u; thus,
^^ to rejoice' makes either mumodisha or mumudisha; igft 'to become moist*
either ciklidisha or dikledisha ; but roots in iv (e. g. siv) are peculiar, see 502. 6.
c. ^ *to go* and "3" 'to sound/ having no consonant, reduplicate
the characteristic letter of the Desiderative with i ; thus, ^fro (used
with the prepositions adhi and pratt), so 3fifa^.
502. When a root rejects i and forms its Desiderative with
*T sa, this sa, if affixed to roots ending in vowels, has the effect of
lengthening a final ^ i or "3" u ; of changing e, ^ z, ^ft o, to ^n d ;
^ ri or ^ ri to ^T tr, or after a labial to "3R ur.
ITius, from f^ comes 6i6(sha; from ^, susrusJia ; from f , cikirsha; from M,
jigdsa; fromTT, tittrsha; from^I, pupursha ; hom^bubhurska; from *{, mumursha.
a. When it is affixed to roots ending in consonants, the radical
vowel generally remains unchanged, but the final consonant combines
with the initial sibilant, in accordance with the rules at 296.
As, from ^V comes yuyutsa (299); from ^ comes didhaksha (306. or); from ^,
dndhuksha ; from *J3^, bubhuksha.
b. A medial long n becomes tr, and final tr becomes yu or is gunated ; thus,
from W^ comes tikirtay isha ; from ftr^, susyusha or sisevisha.
c. Many of the special rules for forming the stem in the last five tenses at
390. a-o apply to the Desiderative; thus the roots at 390. . generally forbid
Guna (cukucisha &c.)
d. So ^F5^ makes bibhraksha or bibharksha or bibhrajjisha or bibharjisha (390. ff);
and I5^, mimanksha and ninattksha (390. k); T?, mnatsa (390. o);
E e 2
212 DESIDERATIVE VERBS. FORMATION OF STEM.
didaridrisha (390. c, but makes also didaridrdsa] ; F^, tikamisha or tikdmayisha j
*'H^ jugopisha or jugopdyisha orjugupsa (390. /).
503. The following is an alphabetical list of other Desiderative stems, some of
them anomalous: 'Slfrfe 1 ^ fr. *8Z 'to wander;' ^T%f^ fr. ^ 'to transgress;'
fr. ^ 'to go;' f"*T fr. ^Tt^'to obtain;' ^ct (or regularly ^srf^ftre) fr.
'to prosper;' ^falftre or fftqf*re fr. t^'to envy;' ^||5 or ^flsbrfa^ or
fel? (390. 6) fr. "3H& 'to cover;' f^lifa (or regularly f%^fa) fr. fa 'to col-
lect;' fimf* (or regularly ftrnfsR) fr. T^'to go;' ftprfcW (or regularly fiT^TfT^)
fr. *T ' to swallow ' (cf. 375. 9) ; f*PTfa fr. f W ' to conquer ;' fsfVrH fr. TR^ ' to eat '
(used as Desid. of ^); fnrf* fr. ?^'to kill;' fwtfta fr. % 'to send;' frf^
fr. ?Tf 'to take;' ^fJR fr. % 'to call;' tar* (or regularly frTrTftre) f r . f(^ 'to
stretch ;' fiTfffi fr. ife 'to kill ;' f^W fr. ^T ' to give,' ^ ' to love,' and <ffr ' to cut ;'
fr. 7 ' to respect ;' f^ft^ or f^ta or f^^ fr. ? ' to tear;' f^ElflTR or
i fr. ^'to shine;' f^lft:^ fr. ^ ' to hold ;' |^ (or regularly f^fTO) fr.
' to play ;' fifiS fr. VT ' to place ' and ^ ' to drink ;' f>3TO or tfNr (or f^fTO)
fr. ^>T 'to deceive;' ftw (or ^fiT^) fr. tr^'to fall' and H^ 'to go;' f^^^
or tpgp f r . ^ 'to purify;' fTTjf^^r fr. WS 'to ask;' f^f^ or ^jt fr. ^ 'to
bear ;' f*TW fr. HT ' to measure,' fa ' to throw,' *ft ' to perish,' and T ' to change ;'
fsTflTfrN or fi^JT^ fr. f^'to rub;' *ft^ fr. *J^(in the sense of 'desiring release
from mundane existence,' otherwise ^[^f); frnifaw or ^^ fr. ^ 'to join;' ftT*T
fr. TTV ' to accomplish ;' ft 1 * fr. tT ' to take ;' fc5^T fr. HH ' to obtain ;' f^ft$
or f^tfa or ^^ fr. ^ ' to choose ;' f^sT^f fr. "3^' to cut ;' f^T^ fr. ^Tc^ 'to be
able;' f$P5lftre (or f^I^^f) fr. fa 'to have recourse to;' ftnn* (or f**fT' l I) fr.
*5^ ' to obtain,' ' to give ;' ftiwftni fr. f?7 ' to smile ;' ftf^ft 1 * (or *J^fb fr. ^
*to sound;' *J1P" fr- ^^'to sleep.'
General Tenses of Desideratives.
504. The Perfect must be of the Periphrastic form as explained at 385 ; that is,
WfT dm added to the Desiderative stem, as already formed, with sa, isha, or isha
(500), is prefixed to the Perfect of one of the auxiliaries kri, as, or bhu (see 385) ;
thus, from pipaksha (root pad, 'to cook') comes the Perfect pipakshdnfakdra. ' I
wished to cook ;' from bubodhisha (root budh, to know') comes bubodhishdndakdra,
fiubodhishdmdsa, bubodhishdmbabhuva, ' I wished to know.'
a. In all the remaining tenses it is a universal rule, that inserted i be assumed
after the Desiderative stem, whether formed by sa or isha, except in the Precative
Parasmai; thus, from pad comes ist Fut. pipakshitdsmi &c. ; and Fut. pipakshi-
shydmi &c. ; Aor. apipakshisham &c. (form I, B, at 418); Prec. Par. pipakshydsam
&c. ; Atm. pipakshishtya &c. ; Cond. apipakshishyam &c. So also, taking vividish
(formed with isha from vid, 'to know'), the ist Fut. is vividishitdsmi ; 2nd Fut.
vividishishydmi ; Aor. avividishisham &c. Similarly, from bubodhisha, ist Fut.
bubodhishitdsmi &c. ; 2nd Fut. bubodhishishydmi ; Aor. abubodhisfiisham Sic..
FREQUENTATIVE VERBS. FORMATION OF STEM. 213
b. The Infinitive may be formed regularly from the ist Future; thus, from
bubodhishitd, 'he will wish to know,' comes bubodhishitum, 'to wish to know.'
Passive of Desideratives.
505. Desideratives may take a Passive form by adding ya to the Desiderative
stem after rejecting final a; thus, from bubodhisha comes bubodhishye/l am wished
to know,' &c. The General tenses will not vary from the Active Atmane-pada
form of Desiderative except in the Aor. 3rd sing., which will be abubodhishi instead
of abubodhishishta.
Causal of Desideratives.
506. Desiderative verbs may take a Causal form ; thus, dudyushdmi, ' I desire to
play' (from div}, makes in Caus. dudyushaydmi, ' I cause to desire to play,' &c.
FREQUENTATIVE OR INTENSIVE VERBS.
507. Most roots may take a Frequentative form, except poly-
syllabic roots, and except those of cl. 10, and except certain roots
beginning with vowels.
<^ f **.* ^.
Obs. "3TOJ to cover,' however, has forms ^ilfjjl and 3Ki[|j. Some few roots
also beginning with vowels take the Atmane form of Frequentative ; see examples
at 511.0. b, 681. a.
a. The Frequentative form is even less common in classical composition than
the Desiderative. In the Pres. Part., however, and in nouns, it not unfrequently
appears (see 80. VI). It either expresses repetition or gives intensity to the radical
idea; thus, fr. <ffa(/to shine' comes the Frequent, stem dedipya (Pres. 3rd sing.
dedipyate, 'it shines brightly'), and the Pres. Part, dedtpyamdna, 'shining brightly :'
so also, fr. '$pT 'to be beautiful,' sosubhya and sosubhyamdna; fr. ^^ to weep,'
rorudya and rorudyamdna.
508. There are two kinds of Frequentative verb, the one a redu-
plicated Atmane-pada verb, with ya affixed, conforming, like Intran-
sitive and Passive verbs, to the conjugation of cl. 4, and usually,
though not always, yielding an Intransitive signification ; the other
a reduplicated Parasmai-pada verb, following the conjugation of cl. 3.
The latter is less common in classical Sanskrit than the former, and
will therefore be considered last*.
a. The terminations for the first form of Frequentative will be
those of the Atmane at 246, with the usual substitutions required
for the 4th class of verbs. For the second form they will be the
regular Parasmai-pada terminations of the scheme at 246.
* Intensive or Frequentative forms are found in Greek, such as Ttctnta.XX<e,
dfy or (J.ai[j.dv, Tra(j.(f)aiv<v, a
214: FREQUENTATIVE VERBS. - FORMATION OF STEM.
A'TMANE-PADA FREQUENTATIVES, FORMED BY REDUPLICATION AND
ADDING ya.
509. Rule for forming the stem in the four Special tenses.
Reduplicate the initial consonant and vowel of the Passive stem
according to the rules for reduplicating consonants at 252, and
gunate the reduplicated vowel (if capable of Guna), whether it be
a long or short vowel.
Thus, from the Passive stem <^fa (of dd, 'to give') comes the Frequent, stem
dediya (Pres. i. dedya+i=^fa, 2. dedtya-\-se=z\^\T& &c.) ; fr. ffa (Pass, of
hd, ' to quit ') comes jehfya (jehiye &c.) ; fr. ^tTfar (of ^rT ' to spread ') comes testirya
(also tdstarya); fr. ^ (of "^ 'to purify'), popuya; fr. f%!T (of f%^ 'to know'),
vevidya; fr. "^fl (of ^T ' to know'), bobudhya (Pres. "sfrj**!, ^fcTWW, "^teWiT, &c.)
The conjugation of all four tenses corresponds exactly to that of the Passive.
510. As to the reduplication of the vowel, if the Passive stem contain a medial
^? a, long d is substituted ; thus, pdpafya frompafya; sdsmarya from smarya.
a. If it contain a medial ^TT d, T? e, or ^ft o, the same are reduplicated ; as, yd-
ydfya from ydtya; seshevya from sevya; lolofya from lotya.
b. If it contain a medial ^jT ri, then ^R^ art* is substituted in the reduplication ;
as, <jO"$3'Mfrom drisya; M0*^^*(from sprisya, &c. ; ^T^Sffro
from ^Rjf . Similarly, alt is substituted for "^ Iri, in "SF 11 ^ making
511. If a Passive stem has ft ri before ya, this ft ri becomes T^ 1 r/in the Fre-
quentative stem ; as, ^TSTtl from flST (Passive of ^f 'to do ').
a. If the stem begin with ^T a, as in ^CaJ atya (from ^TZ ' to wander'), the initial
at is repeated, and the radical a lengthened; thus, ^<i!^j atdtya (3rd sing.
VJ<JldaJri). Similarly, ^TT^ from ^TSI 'to pervade.'
b. ^ ri, to go,' makes its stem 'SJT.TM ardrya.
512. If the Passive stem contain a nasal after short a, this nasal generally appears
in the reduplicated syllable, and is treated as final *Tm; thus, fr. *TH 'to go' comes
Tjj-WJ ' to walk crookedly ;' fr, WT ' to wander,' ^*WT ; fr. 'SfU^' to kill,' ^ff^PT.
a. The Passive stems WOJ, aW, ^?T, and some others formed from roots con-
taining nasals (as <f5*T, *n*T), may insert nasals, instead of lengthening the vowel
in the reduplication ; thus, l %(**, *ra'*T, ^*^?T, &c.
b. Anomalous forms. ^ 'to go' (making ''TO) inserts *ft n{; thus, 'T'T^Ra.
Similarly, ^'to fall,' *R( or ^'to go,' ^'to fall,' F^'to drop,' ^ 'to
fall,' ^3^ 'to go,' "3^ 'to deceive' CT^tJW, ^rrtw^l, W*
, ^rt^R?r, &c.) ^ 'to go' makes 'T^.
'to kill' makes W^; TTT 'to smell,' Wl^T ; **TT 'to blow,'
&c.) ; T ' to swallow,'
This seems to support the idea that the original Guna of ri is ari. See 29. b.
FREQUENTATIVE VERBS.- FORMATION OF STEM. 215
General Tenses of Atmane-pada Frequentatives.
513. In these tenses Frequentatives follow the analogy of Passives, and reject the
suffix f ya. Since, however, the stem of the Perfect is formed by affixing '5TIH dm (as
usual in all polysyllabic forms, see 385), and since, in all the other tenses, inserted i
is assumed, a coalition of vowels might arise were it not allowed to retain y in all
cases in which a vowel immediately precedes that letter * ; thus, from ^'fal is
formed the Perfect ist sing. ^ r Un5M5 &c., rejecting ya; but from rf<ffa cornea
^<J^*U<*a*fc &c., retaining y. Similarly in the other tenses : ist Fut. dedipitdhe,
dediyitdhe, &c. ; 2nd Fut. dedipishye, dedtyishye, &c. ; Aor. adedtpishi, adediyishi,
Sic. ; Prec. dedipishiya, dediyishiya, &c. ; Cond. adedipishye, adediyishye, &c. In
the 3rd sing, of the Aor. ^ i is not allowed to take the place of the regular termina-
tions, as in the Passive form.
a. The Infinitive, as formed in the usual manner (459), will be dedipitum, &c.
PARASMAI-PADA FREQUENTATIVES.
514. Rule for forming the stem in the four Special tenses. The stem is here
also formed by a reduplication similar to that of Atmane-pada Frequentatives ;
not, however, from the Passive, but from the root; thus, from root Tf^pad comes
pdpa6; fr. f^ vid comes vevid; fr. ""3^ comes daridrU ; fr. ^ comes farikri.
a. But in the Parasmai form of Frequentative, wft ari and ^T ar as well as ^TT^ 1
art may be reduplicated for the vowel ^f ri; so that "?3I may make <^0 cai or
<jfT<pn or ^51 ) and ^, ^T^ or "i(Vep or ^^ (Pan. vn. 4, 92).
Similarly, jl^may make ^eJtjj^or ^fojjp^or T^jf 1 ^-
b. Again, in roots ending in long "^ rf, d is reduplicated for ^ n, and this d is
retained even when n becomes ir; thus, ^ kn, 'to scatter,' makes i. 6dkarmi;
PI. 3. 6dkirati. Similarly, from TT 'to cross' come tdtarmi and tdtirati,
c. In the Special tenses Parasmai, these Frequentatives follow the conjugation of
cl. 3, and in accordance with the rules for the 2nd and 3rd class (307, 331), the
radical vowel is gunated before the P terminations of the scheme at 246. Hence,
from vid come the two stems veved and vevid (Pres. vevedmi, vevetsi, vevetti; du.
vevidvas, &c. ; Impf. avevedam, avevet, avevet, avevidva, &c. ; 3rd pi. avevidus;
Pot. vevidydm, &c. ; Impv. veveddni, veviddhi, vevettu, veveddva, vevittam, &c.)
d. Again, the stem will vary in accordance with the rules of combination at 296-
306, as in ^V budh (Pres. bobodhmi, bobhotsi, boboddhi, bobndhvas, &c. ; see 298).
So also, cf? vah makes in 3rd sing. ^T*J\fV vdvodhi (see 305. a) j 5?! makes
(35); lf makes TTT% (305 note); ^ makes ^"jtfe or ^H^frv; and
^^tfe or irGClfrv (305. 6).
e. And in further analogy to cl. 2 (313, 314) long / is often optionally inserted
* In Passives this coalition of vowels is avoided by the change of a final vowel
to Vriddhi, as of 6i to 6dy, of hu to hdv, and of kri to kdr; and by the change of
final d to dy, as of da to day ; see 474.
216 FREQUENTATIVE VERBS. FORMATION OF STEM.
before the consonantal P terminations (Pres. vevedimi, vevedtshi, vevedtti; du.
vevidvas, &c. ; Impf. avevedam, avevedis, avevedit, avevidva, &c. ; Impv. veveddni,
veviddhi, veveditu).
515. Lastly, when the root ends in a vowel, the usual changes take place of t
and i to y or iy ; of u and u to uv; and of ri to r (see 312) : as in the roots *ft bhi,
i^bhu, " kri (Pres. ist sing, bebhemi, bobhomi, tarkarmi; 3rd pi. bebhyati, bobhu-
vati, darkrati).
a. Observe Many of the anomalous formations explained under A'tmane-pada
Frequentatives must be understood as belonging also to the Parasmai-pada ; thus,
^ (512.6) makes in Parasmai Vftaftr, "TTffafw, ^PTfajfe, &c. ; and so with
the other roots at 512.6.
b. ^T 'to kill,' *T 'to swallow' (512.0), and some others have a separate
Parasmai-pada form (stiff**!, sflTR j the last identical with Pres. of
General Tenses of Parasmai-pada Frequentatives.
516. The Perfect follows the usual rule for polysyllabic roots (385), and affixes
dm with the auxiliaries; thus, from ^V budh, 'to know,' comes bobudhdmdsa,
bobudhdmbabhuva, bobudhdMakdra ; from fe^ vid, 'to know,' comes veviddmdsa.
Guna of a final and sometimes of a penultimate vowel is required before dm ; thus,
bobhu (from >JJ becomes bobhavdmdsa. So also, ^W makes vdvartdmdsa. In the
other tenses, excepting the Precative, inserted i is invariably assumed ; and before
this inserted i some roots are said to forbid the usual Guna change of the radical
vowel in the ist Fut. &c. ; thus, budh is said to make bobudhitdsmi ; bht, 'to fear,'
bebhyitdsmi, &c. (374) ; 2nd Fut. bobudhishydmi, bebhyishydmi, &c. ; Aor. abobu-
dhisham, abebhdyisham, &c. ; Prec. bobudhydsam, bebhiydsam, &c. ; Cond. abobu-
dhishyam, abebhyishyam, &c. The rejection of Guna from the radical syllable,
however, admits of question; thus, bhu, 'to be,' makes, according to the best
authorities, bobhavitdsmi, &c.
a. The Infinitive will be formed in the usual way from the ist Fut., see 513. a.
Passive, Causal, Desiderative, and Desiderative Causal form
of Frequentatives.
<
517. Frequentatives are capable of all these forms. The Passive, when the root
ends hi a consonant, will be identical with the A'tmane-pada Frequentative formed
by reduplication and the sumx ya; thus, fr. Frequent, stem totuda, 'to strike often,*
comes totudye, ' I am struck often;' but fr. loluya (lu,'to cut'), loluijye, &c. Again,
fr. totuda comes totudaydmi, ' I cause to strike often ;' totudishdmi, ' I desire to
strike often ;' totudayishdmi, ' I desire to cause to strike often.'
a. The ya of the Atmane-pada Frequentative if preceded by a consonant is
rejected; but not if preceded by a vowel; thus, loluya, Frequentative stem of lu,
'to cut,' makes loluyishdmi, ' I desire to cut often.' See 252. /.
NOMINAL VERBS. FORMATION OF STEM. 217
NOMINAL VERBS, OR VERBS DERIVED FROM NOUNS.
518. These are formed by adding certain suffixes to the stem of
nouns. They are not in very common use, but, theoretically, there
is no limit to their formation. They might be classed according to
their meaning; viz. ist, Transitive Nominals, yielding the sense of
performing, practising, making or using the thing or quality expressed
by the noun ; 2nd, Intransitive Nominals, giving a sense of behaving
like, becoming like, acting like the person or thing expressed by the
noun ; 3rd, Desiderative Nominals, yielding the sense of wishing
for the thing expressed by the noun. It will be more convenient,
however, to arrange them under five heads, according to the suffixes
by which they are formed, as follows :
519. ist, Those formed by affixing ^r a (changeable to a before
a syllable beginning with m and v) to a nominal stem, after Guna
of its final vowel (if capable of Guna). When the stem ends in a, this
vowel takes the place of the suffix a. A final a absorbs the suffix.
Obs. The terminations of Nominals will be those of the scheme at 246, both for
Par. and Atm., requiring the substitutions of the ist, 4th, 6th, and loth classes.
a. Thus, from f^H ' Krishna,' Pres. i. ^WTfa ' I act like Krishna,' 2.
3. ^iHnfrf , &c. So, from Sfifa ' a poet,' Pres. i. oRsRTfa ' I act the poet,' 2.
*fc. ; and from ftij 'a father,' Pres. i. fmFClfa ' I act like a father,' 2.
3. ftfiRfff; Atm. Pres. i. foUT, &c. : from *TT<3T 'a garland,' Pres. i.
2. sncsrfa, 3. TraifiT; impf. i. ^r*nc3T^, 2. 'swrFJi^, &c. ; Pot. Trai^, &c. :
from ^ ' own,' Pres. 3. wfiT ' he acts like himself.' Sometimes a final i or u is
not gunated; as, from efife ' a poet,' Pres. oR^nfa, efi^jfa, &c. (Pan. vn. 4, 39).
Words ending in nasals preserve the nasals, and lengthen the preceding vowels ;
as, TTSfTTffT ' he acts like a king,' TTsftrfw ' it serves as a road,' ^TOfff 'he acts
like this.'
520. zndly, Those formed by affixing if y a to a nominal stem.
a. If a word end in a consonant, ya is generally affixed without change ; as,
from ^T^' a word,' t|t*(fff ' he wishes for words ;' from fij^ ' heaven,' fi^orfTT ' he
wishes for heaven ' (or, according to some, ^faffr) ; from TTtT^ ' penance,' TTm^TTT
'he does penance;' from FT^ ' reverence,' TT^lfTf ' he does reverence.' Final
n is dropped, and the next rule then applied; thus, from 113^' a king,' Pres.
tnffaTfa, Pot. TIfrt*l^; from vf^'rich,' VlrfanflT, & c .
b. A final ^r a or wr a is generally changed to ^ i ; final ^ i or 7 u
lengthened ; final ^ ri changed to t^ ri; ^ft o to av ; ^ au to dv.
Thus, from ^ 'a son,' Pres. i. $<st*4lfa 'I desire a son,' 2. ij^qfa, &c. ;
from nfTT ' a husband,' Pres. i. mft*nf*T ' I desire a husband,' &c. So also, from
TTiJ ' a mother' comes *n^fanf*T, &c.
Ff
218 NOMINAL VERBS. FORMATION OF STEM.
c. This form of Nominal has not always a Desiderative meaning. The following
are examples of other meanings, some of which properly belong to the next form :
Jn*TR[Nfa 'he fancies himself in a palace ;' oR^fafir ' he acts like a poet ;' cF^Tflf
or -IT 'he scratches;' f^tlfiT or -7T 'he sins' or 'he is angry;' faWWfi 'he acts
the part of a friend ;' gsffaffrT "$T|n^ ' he treats the pupil as a son ;' f^pnrfw %'f 1 ^
' he treats the Brahman as if he were Vishnu ;' frTC^f frT ' he vanishes ;' T^ffrf ' he
seeks cows' (from *ft 'a cow').
d. In the sense of ' behaving like,' ' acting like,' ' doing like,' a final ^31 a is
generally lengthened, a final ^TT d retained, and a final ^w, f(s, or T{t dropped;
thus, from trftuff ' a wise man/ Pres. i. qftgri'l*! ' I act the part of a wise man,'
2. *jf<ssrtTw, 3. tfftjjffTtrW, &c. ; from "5H 'a tree,' Pres. i. "5^1^? &c. ; from
SfT^ a noise,' Pres. ^t^tfl ' I am noisy ;' from TTf^ ' a king,' Pres. i. THTni, &c. ;
from T*TT^ ' sorrowful,' Pres. TTTTO, &c.; from ^?*^ < great,' Pres. ^T^, &c.
e. This Nominal is sometimes found with a Transitive sense, especially when
derived from nouns expressive of colour ; as, from ^*5t ' black,' ^WTOn or -TiT 'he
blackens :' and sometimes in the Parasmai with an Intransitive sense; as, from T5f?T
' crooked,' faf^PTfiT ' it is crooked ;' from cfTfl ' a slave,' ^TOTTfcT ' he is a slave.'
It corresponds to Greek Desiderative Denominatives in iota, as Qava.na.fa &c.
521. 3rdly, Those formed by affixing ^ni ay a to a nominal stem.
This form is similar to that of Causals and verbs of the loth class,
with which it is sometimes confounded. Like them it has generally
an Active sense. A final vowel must be dropped before ay a ; and if
the nominal stem have more than one syllable, and end in a consonant,
both the consonant and its preceding vowel must be dropped.
a. Thus, from ^^f ' cloth,' Pres. i.^^nft? ' I clothe,' 2. ^3"qftr, 3.
&c. ; from ^^ ' armour,' Pres. i. 'MNlfa 'I put on armour,' &c. ; from
' authority,' WtflwTTfa 1 ' I propose as authority ;' from 5ET5^ ' a garland,'
* I crown ;' from "HZ ' a jar,' "^llfiff ' I make a jar ' or ' I call it a jar,' &c.
b. In further analogy to Causals, \p is .sometimes inserted between the stem
and aya, especially if the noun be monosyllabic, and end in a. Before this ^p,
Vriddhi ia required ; thus, from T3" ' own,' Pres. ^m^rfl ' I make my own/
There are one or two examples of dissyllabic nouns; thus, from ^HrT true,'
, &c. ; and from ^TO ' substance,' '^Ttnnfa, &c.
c. If the stem be monosyllabic, and end in a consonant, Guna may take place ;
as, from "3^1 ' hunger,' T3^V*df*T.
d. Whatever modifications adjectives undergo before the suffixes iyas and ishtha
at 194, the same generally take place before aya ; thus, from tfte ' long,' ^ra^Trft?
' I lengthen ;' from ^f% fi ' near,' n<pnfo ' I make near,' &c.
e. This form of Nominal is sometimes Intransitive, as fK*{frt ' he delays ' (from
'far 'long'). According to Bopp, Greek Denominatives in ao>, ea>, oa>, iC,w cor-
respond to this form ; as,
PRESENT PARTICIPLES; PARASMAI-PADA. 219
522. 4thly, Those formed by affixing ^ sya or ^f^r asya to a
nominal stem, giving it the form of a Future tense, generally with the
sense of * desiring/ ' longing for/
a. Thus, fr. Tffc ' milk,' Pres. i. T!ffa3*nf*T ' I desire milk,' 2. ISfUfufa, &c. ;
fir. ^ ' a bull,' ^RSfrr ' (the cow) desires the bull ;' fr. **fVj ' curds,' ^WR-mfo
' I desire curds,' &c. Cf. Greek Desideratives in <7*o>.
523. 5thly, Those formed by affixing cfimi kdmya (derived from
Icam, *to desire') to a nominal stem; as, from "^ 'a son/ Pres. i.
T^fohinjlfiT * I desire a son,' 2. g^<|W|ftr, 3. 3^iTWjnT, &c. ; from Tqi^
* fame/ ^l^iwjlfH ' I desire fame.'
a. The General tenses of these Nominals will be formed analogously
to those of other verbs ; thus, from *3tfa ' I act like self comes
Perf. *njH; from ^JTRTTfa ' I play like a boy' comes Aor.
&c. A long vowel in the stem generally remains unchanged, and is
not shortened ; thus, nrrfqifa (from JTTHT * a garland') makes 4UWT<3fl.
So also, wfafalin 'he will wish for fuel' (Guna being omitted),
fulfil * he will wish for a son.'
b. Nominal verbs may take Passive, Causal, Desiderative, and
Frequentative forms. The Causal of those formed with aya will be
identical with the Primitive Nominal ; thus, ^r*hnf*T 'I put on armour'
or ' I cause to put on armour.' In reduplicating for the Desiderative
or Frequentative, sometimes the last syllable is repeated, sometimes
the first ; thus, W%S*( ' to scratch' makes its Desiderative stem fljf?j|ftf-
ftre, and jgfa 'to treat as a son' makes g^^tftm or tj^ftrftre. Accord-
ing to some, the middle syllable may be reduplicated ; thus,
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT PARTICIPLES ; PARASMAI-PADA. - FORMATION OF STEM.
524. Present Participles are the only Participles the formation of
which is connected with the conjugational class of the verb. The
stem in the Parasmai may be most easily formed by dropping the
final i of the 3rd pers. pi. Pres. Par. and rejecting the nasal in certain
cases (see 141. , 84. I); e.g.
From H^far pa6anti, ' they cook ' (3rd pi. Pres. of *J^, cl. i), comes *!&1{pafat,
'cooking;' fr. nfiT ghnanti, 'they kill' (3rd pi. of han, cL 2), comes Tfi^ghnat,
'killing;' fr. *rfcf santi, 'they are' (3rd pi. of a*, cl. 2, 'to be'), cornea 'ffT^faf,
'being;' fr. TTf^T yanti, 'they go' (3rd pi. of ^, cl. 2), tfj^yat, 'going;' fir.
F f 2
220 PRESENT PARTICIPLES; A'TMANE-PADA.
ydnti, 'they go' (3rd pi. of TT, cl. 2), ITrf ydt ; fr. ^JSffW juhvati, 'they sacrifice'
(3rd pi. of hu, cl. 3), *J<*pT juhvat fr. ^mf'ff nrityanti, 'they dance,' cl. 4,
^WT^wr%a ; fr. f^ffo tinvanti, ' they gather,' cl. 5, f^Ti^ 6invat ; fr. WTJTWfnT
dpnuvanti, ' they obtain, ' cl. 5, 'STTTT^ff dpnuvat ; fr. "ffi P?T tudanti, ' they strike, ' cl. 6,
tudat ; fr. ^uf^fT rundhanti, 'they hinder,' cl. 7, rundhat ; fr. ^^fffT kurvanti,
' they do,' cl. 8, kurvat ; fr. ^"Tf^T punanti, 'they purify/ cl. 9, punat.
525. The same holds good in Derivative and Nominal verbs ; e. g.
From Caus. ^ftnTPtr they cause to know ' (479) comes ^WfiT ' causing to
know;' fr. Desid. r^ftrefnT (499) comes ^ftf>reT^ f desiring to know;' fr. f^Wfa
(503) comes f^Wfl ' desiring to give ;' fr. Frequent, ^fTSprfir comes ^ff^fTrT 'throw-
ing frequently ;' from the Nominal ^TQItf'fl 1 ' they act like Krishna,' ^WfT ' acting
like Krishna;' fr. iT'T^rfnr 'they do penance,' cTTWrf 'doing penance.'
a. In corroboration of the remark made at 461. c, that the Passive verb appears
in a few rare instances to assume a Parasmai-pada inflexion, and that many of the
Intransitive verbs placed under cl. 4 might be regarded (except for the accent) as
examples of this form of the Passive, it is certain that a Parasmai-pada Present
Participle derivable from a Passive stem is occasionally found ; thus, "^pCRT ' being
seen,' from the Passive stem "SHPI drisya ; '^ffani ' being gathered,' from ^fa tiya
(Passive stem of <&).
b. The inflexion of Parasmai-pada Present Participles is explained
at 141. The first five or strong inflexions (see 135. a) of this parti-
ciple in nine conjugational classes retain the nasal, shewing that the
stem in all the classes, except the third, and a few other verbs (141. a),
ends in ant as well as in at. The Parasmai-pada Frequentative, as
conforming to the conjugational rule for cl. 3, also rejects the nasal.
Obs. In the cognate languages the n is preserved throughout. Cf. Sk. bharan,
bharantam (fr. bhri), with (ftepcav, fapovra, ferentem also, bharantau (Ved. bha-
rantd) with fapovre ; bharantas with <f)tpovT$, ferentes , bharatas with (bepovraf ;
Gen. sing, bharatas with (bepovrof, ferentis. So also, Sk. vahan, vahantam, with
Lat. vehens, vehentem ,- and san, santam (fr. as, 'to be'), with Lat. -sens of ab-setts,
pros-sens. Cf. also the strong stem strinvant- with
PRESENT PARTICIPLES ; A'TMANE-PADA. - FORMATION OF STEM.
t
526. The stem is formed by substituting JTT^T mdna for ^ nte, the
termination of the 3rd pi. Pres. Atm. of verbs of the ist, 4th, 6th, and
loth classes, and Derivative verbs (see 527, 528, below); and by-
substituting ^nff ana for w ate, the termination of the 3rd pi. Pres.
. of verbs of the other classes (see 246) ; e. g.
Fromtf^if pa6ante(c\. i) comes *4-*w\t pacamdna, 'cooking;' fr.flf8ff(sAa, cl.i),
' standing ;' fr. tq7ff (cl. 4), ^WTR ; fr. fo5WT^ (lip, cl. 6),
PAST PASSIVE PARTICIPLES. 221
. But from ^H bruvate (*^cl. 2), giKU bruvdna (58); fr. f^JIri (^ with ftT
cl. 2), f^rar* ; fr. ^VH (dhd, cl. 3), ^VR ; fr. fcnsnr (cl. 5), fMM ; fr. g^ff (cl. 7),
f^r* ; fr. f t^ (cl. 8), ftrn ; fr. ^pnr (cl. 9 ), *prR. Root ^iq; cl. 2, ' to sit,'
makes ^TT*ftT for ^TTCTR ; and $ft cl. 2 is ih^ in 3rd pi. (see 315), but SPTR in
Pres. Part.
Obs. The real suffix for the Pres. Part. A'tm. is mdna, of which ana is probably
an abbreviation. Cf. Gr. -/xcvo- in (f>cpd-[Ji.VG-fbhara-mdna (58).
527. Verbs of class 10 and Causals substitute iTR mdna; as, fr.
bodhayante comes ^V>HWT bodhayamdna : but occasionally
ana ; as, fr. ^$N^, ^$^Tf ; fr. V^fr, ^TIT*T ; fr. f^dn^
fr. 3TW, S*nrR.
528. Passives, Desideratives, Frequentatives, &c. substitute
mdna for the Atmane ; thus, from fasn^ 'they are made' comes
f^wrrer 'being made' (58); from <ffaFff * they are given/ ^HHTT 'being
given;' from the Desiderative f^W^ 'they desire to give,'
'desiring to give;' from fsiuiw^i e they desire to kill,'
' desiring to kill ;' from the Frequentative T^p>in?r ' they know
repeatedly,' Tf^iqTnrr ' knowing repeatedly.'
529. The inflexion of Pres. Participles ^tmane follows that of
adjectives at 187 ; as, N. sing. m. f. n.
PAST PARTICIPLES.
PAST PASSIVE PARTICIPLES. FORMATION OP STEM.
530. This is the most common and useful of all Participles. In
general the stem is formed by adding TT ta directly to roots ending
in vowels, and to most roots ending in consonants ; as, fr. *n yd, ' to
go,' UTIT ydta, 'gone;' fr. ff 'to conquer,' fsnf 'conquered;' fr. tffr
' to lead,' ^TT ' led ;' fr. fq^kship, ' to throw,' foy* kshipta, ' thrown ;'
fr. f 'to do,' ^ 'done' (see 80. XVII).
a. But if the root end in ^r rz, by adding T w, changeable to TDf na
(58); as, fr. "^ kri, 'to scatter,' G^ kirna, 'scattered,' see 534.
531. Some roots in ^TT a, f i, and "3! u, some in ^ ai preceded by
two consonants, with some of those in ^ d, TC r, v{j, one in ^ g (H^T),
and one or two in ^f 6, "3 6h (see 541, 544), also take na instead of
ta ; see 80. XXIV, 532, 536, 540, &c.
532. Roots ending in vowels do not generally admit inserted ^ i
in this Participle, even when they admit it in the Futures (392,
395, &c.), but attach ta or na directly to the root; as, fr. trr 'to
222 PAST PASSIVE PARTICIPLES.
protect/ unr ; fr, fat ' to resort to/ f^nr ; fr. ^j * to hear/ TJJTT ; $/ to
become/ JJH; ^ 'to do/ ^tif; TIT 'to smell/ TITO (58); "ft 'to fly/
Tta ; ^ ' to decay/ ^fa ; *rt ' to perish/ *ft TT ; ojV to embrace/ c5tT ;
jft ' to be ashamed/ frfarr ; T5 ' to cut/ c|R ; g ' to be afflicted/ gT ;
fsg ' to swell/ ^.
a. But when they do retain i, gunation of the final vowel is
required as in the Future ; thus, $ft ' to lie down 5 makes ^ifoTT ; and
t 'to purify/ xjf^nr (also tp); and TPJ 'to awake/ srmfbf.
533. In certain cases the final vowel of the root is changed ; thus, some roots in
^Tf d change d to i before ta ; as, from WT sthd, ' to stand,' fWJT sthita , from flfT
' to measure,' mcT ', from ^TT^[T 'to be poor,' t^ftTTpT.
a. VT 'to place' becomes f^Ttf ; <JT 'to give,' ^t.
Obs. When prepositions are prefixed to datta, the initial da may be rejected;
thus, dtta for ddatta, 'taken;' pratta for pradatta, bestowed;' vydttaiorvyddatta,
expanded;' nttta for nidatta, given away;' partita for paridatta, 'delivered
over;' sutta for sudatta, well given,' the i and u being lengthened.
b. tlT 'to drink' makes "tftfT ; but ^T 'to quit,' ?ffa; and ytfl 'to grow old,'
"5rtr; ^r'to go,' ^T*T.
c. Some roots in d take both na and ta ; as, fr. TH *to smell,' TTI^ and lffiT ', fr. ^T
'to blow/ with prep. f^IT, fT%nH and Pn^rrt ; fr. ^IT (or ^5T) ' to cook,' ^TRT or f^W.
534. Roots in ^ n' change n to r before na, which passes into TJI na by 58 ; as,
from W 'to pass,' irt5 'passed.' But when a labial precedes, n becomes ur; as,
from ^ or ^T, ^ or ^ ' full,' ' filled.'
535. The root-V dhe, 'to suck,' forms tfhf ', 3f hve, 'to call,' ^?TJ ^ ve, 'to
weave,' Tff ', ^ t?ye, ' to cover,' ^Vff J T ' to barter,' f*fiT.
536. Roots in if ai generally change ai to d before na or ta ; as, from *5 mlai,
' to fade,' *?3TT mldna ; from ^ ' to meditate,' WTiT (in the Veda >fhf) ; from ^ ' to
purify,' ^TiT J from ^ * to rescue,' 9T<U or WT^" 5 from "^ ' to grow fat/ WT, &c.
a. But fr. M 'to sing,' jftiT ; fr. % 'to waste,' frfa ; fr. "J| 'to waste,' T^T7, see
548; fr. ZR 'to coagulate,' ^jtw or ^ftT or ^TPT; & "*f 'to accumulate,' <WT*T,
(with U) ^cftw or ^ffa.
537. Of the four or five roots in ^n o, ^ft 'to destroy' makes f-FHT (as also
fa 'to bind'); ^ft 'to sharpen,' f^fif or ^ITTT; ^t 'to tie,' f^ K ', "2ft 'to cut,'
"SJTIT and fSHT ', 3*ffr ' to instruct,' Wtw.
538. Those roots ending in consonants which take the inserted i
in the last five tenses (399), generally take this vowel also in the
Past Pass. Part., but not invariably (see 542) ; and when i is assumed,
ta is generally affixed, and not na ; as, from rn^pat, 'to fall/ xifrnr
patita, 'fallen.'
a. ^ i, ^r w, or ^ ri preceding the final consonant of a root may
PAST PASSIVE PARTICIPLES. 223
occasionally take Guna, especially if the Participle be used imper-
sonally ; as, fr. f^ 'to sweat/ ^?r or fenr; fr. fi^ 'to be
unctuous/ W^w or f^r ; fr. ^ * to shine/ sftfinr or srfinr ; fr. ip ' to
bear/ nf^rf ; fr. |T* ' to sprinkle/ p. See Syntax, 895.
b. Jf^ 'to take' lengthens the inserted i, making <T^hr. See
399. a.
539. Roots ending in consonants which reject the inserted i in
the last five tenses (400-415), generally reject it in the Past Pass.
Part. They must be combined with ta, agreeably to the rules
of Sandhi at 296, &c. Whatever change, therefore, the final con-
sonant undergoes before the termination id of the ist Fut. (see
400415), the same will often be preserved before the ta of the
Past Part. ; so that, in many cases, the form of this Participle
resembles that of the 3rd sing, ist Fut, provided the final a be
shortened, and the vowel of the root preserved unaltered ; thus,
taking some of the roots at 400-415; jpv (3HKT), 5HB; ftw
T35; , ai; JT, ?; il and i
(415. TO); fi*f, ntr; f^, fipv; fo^, fwv; ^f, ^7; 5f,
^ or gnj (415. OT )j |f, ^V; ^, ^ (415- )
540. Most roots ending in ^ d, forbidding the inserted ^ t (405), take na instead
of ta, and are combined with na, agreeably to 47 ; as, fr. ^ ' to go,' T^ ; fr. f^
' to find,' f^ (also f%W) ; fr. ^ 'to impel/ ^ (also JW) ; fr. ft?^ 'to break,'
fr. ^ 'to sit,' 'to sink/ "Qft, with fa, f^W (70, 58); fr. TJ^ 'to pound/
fr. "StS ' to play,' ' to vomit,' ^T ; fr. ^ ' to eat,' 'ST^ (unless F>I be substituted).
|fT^ ' to rejoice' makes |pf .
541. Roots ending in ^<f or "5^ j of course change these letters to k before ta;
see examples at 539. Similarly, those which take na, change 6 and j to g before
na; as, fr. T*f 'to be ashamed,' T*"T 'naked;' fr. feT 'to tremble,' fe*Tj fr.
^T 'to break,' ^^!T; fr. **hA 'to thunder,' *^4j; fr. ^T^ 'to move' (in some
senses), ^H3i. So, fr. T5^'to be immersed,' rejecting one>, *Ff; from <9^'to
be ashamed,' c5^T (as well as f5f55f(T). cSH 'to adhere' also makes H 7 *!. But
Whri ' to forget,' t*j^^ ; ?"3 ' to be crooked,' ^Sf.
542. Some roots which admit i necessarily or optionally in one or both of the
Futures, reject it in this participle ; thus, >pf ' to be bold' makes ^. According
to Pan. vn. 2. 24, ^T ' to move ' makes ^W arnna after the prepositions sam, ni, and
vi, and in every other case ^iff If ardita, so that after d prefixed, it becomes ^ITf^if
224 PAST PASSIVE PARTICIPLES.
' pained ' is thought by some to be rita, fr. rt. n, with prep, d prefixed, and
by others is regarded as an anomalous form of rt. ard; by native grammarians a
form ^IW artta is referred to rt. ^f*0 ', "T ' to make firm,' 1H? ; ^S ' to extol,' ^ ;
*T^ ' to be mad,' W3 ; ?(fr^' to shine,' <ffaT ; TSI ' to perish,' ^ff ; 'g'S ' to faint/ ^W
as well as *jffriT ; 5"^ 'to speak barbarously,' ffH? as well as ^raffi; *J^' to
dance,' T^> TIT 'to strive,' Tf3.
543. If in forming the Passive stem (471), the v or y contained in a root is
changed to its semivowel u or i, the same change takes place in the Past Pass.
Part.; as, fr. "3^va6, 'to say,' "^jHukta; fr. W^' to speak,' vTf^Tf; fr. ^JT^ to wish,'
TfijTiT; fr. ^ 'to dwell,' ^ftflf ; fr. WJ/to sow,' TJT; fr. ^ 'to carry,' '352' (with
H, WS, 38. n); fr. ^T^'to sleep,' ^R', fr. *I^'to sacrifice,' ^?.
Obs. This change of a semivowel to its corresponding vowel is called Sampra-
sarana by native grammarians (Pan. I. I, 45).
a. Some roots change ^ with a preceding or following vowel into "3S ', as, Tft.
'to be feverish,' a|^; i^'to hasten,' TITtf; f^['to dry,' ^1T; ^T^'to protect/
3uTj ^'to bind/ J1T.
b. Some roots ending in "^also substitute ^ for "^; as, f^T 'to play/ ^W and
Uf (the former only in the sense of 'to gamble'); fi^'to sew/ ^TTJ fsf^or
"Sft^'to spit/ "^Tj ftR or Ti^'to spit/ WrT.
544. Some other changes which take place in forming the Passive stem (472)
are preserved before ta; thus, fr. ^fTI^'to rule/ fijH?; fr. ^V 'to pierce/ f^;
fr. *l^' to deceive/ fefaiT; fr. W5iT ' to fry/ f? ', fr. IT^ ' to ask/ ^j fr. fTS^ to
cut/ i^rcr (58).
a. When a root ends in a conjunct consonant, of which the first is a nasal, this
nasal is generally rejected before ta; as, fr. "3"^ 'to bind/ "3"5J fr. \JTST 'to fall/
; fr.l4^'tofall,'rer; fr. ^ ' to move' and ^' to anoint/ ^H; fr.^'to
adhere/ *T3i ; fr. T^' to colour/ tH ; fr. 3^' to kindle/ ^TJ fr. ^^ ' to be wet/
^ or TW; fr. ^T'? ' to flow/ 5I^; fr. ^5<f ' to ascend/ ^Gft', fr. ''5W 'to stop/
WW; fr. HT *to stop/ WV; fr. 3^ 'to deceive/ ^W; fr. H^'to break/
fr. ^31 'to bite/ <Jlf; fr. iT^'to contract/ ff3i.
b. But not if 3[ i is inserted; as, fr. ^!5T 'to break/ ^fftSJrlj" fr. JK*
(except T^ 'to churn/ making *rfaiT; and <!J^I 'to tie/ SyfTZfiT).
545. Many roots ending in ^ m, ^ n, or TO reject these nasals before tu if i is
not inserted; as, 1*^$ram, 'to go/ i\ftgata; TF^yam, 'to restrain/ TJftyata; T^ to
sport/ TH; Iff^'to stretch/ tfiT ; ^'to kill/ ^rf; !^'to bend/ fif; H^'to
think/ Tff ; "^!T ' to hurt/ ^fff : but *B&{ ' to breathe ' and ^1*( ' to go ' make ^TPtf
(the latter also ^TftfiT) ; and ^^ 'to sound/ 5^f1rf (also ^TRT with prep.)
a. 1 5ft^'to be born' makes TT1TJ and ^^'to dig/ ^TTIT; ^'to give/ WTiT;
medial a being lengthened.
546. Those roots ending in "^m, of the 4th class, which lengthen a medial a
before the conjugational suffix ya, also lengthen it before ta, changing m to n as
in the Futures ; thus, fr. "35^ ' to step/ WRT ; fr. ^ ' to wander/ tiTPif ; fr. ^1^ ' to
PAST PASSIVE PARTICIPLES. 225
be appeased,' STRT; fr. <^'to tame,' ^TRT (also ?[ffrf); fr. 'S^ 'to be patient,'
^JT*tf; fr. li^ 'to be sad,' fSTnT.
a. Similarly, ^ ' to vomit,' TF?T ; ^[ 'to love,' efipffj ^^ ' to eat/ ^RT.
547. From 5Eq>ni' to swell 'is formed ^FCfihf; fr. ^TT^'to shake/'CSffil; fr. f^'to
be putrid,' *JTT; from "3i^'to weave/ "30T; fr. UTR 'to be fat,' tfa (with ^Tt and
JT, -WT); fr. ^H* 'to stink,' ^51T.
a. ^or TR 'to make effort' forms TOt; IJ^'to kill,' like J3T 'to hasten,' ^T;
*|^ ' to bind or tie' makes *J5$ ; VT^' to wash,' VriT.
b. TR? ' to open ' makes ^W (Pan. vm. 2, 55) ; and "9^ ' to eat,' WV (fr. f^I).
Obs. From the above examples it appears that sometimes several roots have
the same form of Past Pass. Part. The following may also be noted : '5^' to stink '
and ^' to purify ' make ^cT ; TT ' to measure ' and H ' to barter,' foiT ; ^3^' to wipe,'
13^ 'to touch,' and *J^'to sprinkle,' all make ? (*|^'to bear' making *if*trt by
Pan. i. 2, 20) ; Sfa^ ' to recite ' and $TC( ' to kill,' ^RcT ; ^IT^ ' to rule ' and fifl^ ' to
distinguish,' f^I?J ^t 'to destroy' and fa 'to tie,' fttjf. On the other hand,
^5^'to enjoy' makes >|!i; but ^51 'to bend,' ^tf.
548. The following, though regarded as Participles by native grammarians, are
more properly adjectives : TSfi, fr. if^pat, ' to cook ;' ^^P, fr. ^1 ' to dry ;' T^^,
fr. "S^'to be drunk;' ^T, fr. ^31^' to grow thin;' T5fW, fr. "^ 'to waste.'
549. In forming the Past Pass. Part, of Causals, the Causal suffix
^ij aya is rejected, but the inserted ^ i is always assumed ; as, fr.
oURS, Causal of ^i 'to make/ comes cBrftTT kdrita, 'caused to be made;'
fr. wnrq, Causal of WT ' to stand/ wrftnr sthdpita, 'placed ;' fr. ^imm
(^ with wr), ^ixqipcjrf ' increased/ ' refreshed/
550. In adding TT ta to a Desiderative or Frequentative stem, the
inserted ^ i is assumed, final a of the stem being dropped ; and in
the case of roots ending in consonants, final ya being dropped ; as,
fr. ftrtn* 'to desire to drink 5 comes frrerftnr; fr- f^^t 'to desire
to do/ fa'otffiiiT ; fr. ^H ' to desire to obtain/ ^fmrl, &c. ; fr. c5Tc|^
* to cut often/ c5tp|ftriT ; fr. ^f>??r * to break frequently/ %faf^ir.
551. W ta with i is added to nominal stems, final a being dropped ;
as, fr. f^iftra 'loose/ ffrfmfViii 'loosened/ fr. ftra 'crooked/ ftfftnr
' curved/ These may be regarded as Past Passive Participles of the
Transitive Nominal verbs f^ifaoniflT, ftreRfa (521). So again, from
' to do reverence' comes twftiiif or
Obs. Moreover, as na sometimes takes the place of ta, so ina is added to some
nouns instead of ita; e.g. Tf?3T 'soiled/ fr. Tc3 'dirt;' ^jfW" (5) 'horned/
from Spp ' a horn.' See 80. XLIII.
a. Corresponding forms in Latin are barbatus, alatus, cordatus, turritus, &c. j
and in Greek, o/x^>aAcyTOj-, Kpowros, afAwroV, &c.
226 PAST ACTIVE PARTICIPLES.
552. The inflexion of Past Passive Participles follows that of
adjectives at 187 ; thus exhibiting a perfect similarity to the
declension of Latin participles in tus ; thus, "spn krita, Nom. sing.
masc. fern. neut. "^1&(, ^WT, ^H^.
. The resemblance between Sanskrit Past Passive Participles in ta, Latin Par-
ticiples in tu-s, and Greek verbals in ro-f, may be seen in the following examples :
Sk. jndta-s = La.t. (g}notu-s (ignotus), yvuTO-$; Sk. datta-s=l>&i. datus, OOTO$ ',
6ruta-s=clutus, K\vro-g ; bhuta-s-=(f>vro-g ; yukta-s=junctu-s, %tvKTO-$ ', labdha-s
\v)TTTO-s; pita-sTiOT (>-?', bhrita-s=<f>epTo'-s', dishta-s=dictu-s,$tKTO-$. And,
like Sanskrit, Latin often inserts an i, as in domitu-s (=Sk. damita-s), monitu-s, &c.
This is not the case in Greek, but f is inserted in forms like /xevero-f, fpirfTO-$.
There are also examples of Latin and Greek formations in nu-s and vo-$, corres-
ponding to the Sanskrit participle in na; thus, plenu-s (=.purna-s), magnu-s (cf. Sk.
rt. mah), dignu-s (cf. Sk. dis, dik, Gr. &e<tf) ; and <TTvyvG-$, oreyvG-f, ae/xvo'-f, &c.
PAST ACTIVE PARTICIPLES.
These are of two kinds : A. those derived from the Past Passive
, Participle ; B. those belonging to the Reduplicated Perfect. The
former frequently supply the place of a Perfect tense Active (see 897).
553. A. The stem of these Participles is formed by adding ^jt vat
to that of the Past Passive Participle ; e. g.
From ^iff' made, '^TTWT^' having made,' 'who or what has made;' fr.^ni' burnt,'
<V^f^' having burnt ;' fr. ^J ' said,' <J^>e(i^' having said ;' fr. fyft 'broken,'
' having broken ;' fr. ^ITftrt ' placed,' WTfarf^ ' having placed,' &c.
a. For the declension of these Participles see 140. a. b. c.
554. B. In these Participles, either R^0as or ^t^l( ivas is generally added to the
stem of the Reduplicated Perfect, as formed in the dual and plural. Vas is added
when the stem in the dual and plural (as it appears in its unchanged form before
the terminations are added) consists of more than one syllable ; thus, from fakri
(root kri, to do'), fakrivas; from 6i6i (374), ticivas; from nanrit (364, compare
45. a), nanritvas; from sasmar (374. k), sasmarvas.
a. And ivas is added when the stem in the dual and plural consists of one
syllable only; as, from ten (375. a), tenivas; from ghas (377), jakshivas.
Obs. Certain roots are said optionally to form this Perf. Part, with ivas or vat,
whether the stem in dual and plural consists of one syllable or two (see Pan. vn.
2, 68) ; e. g. fr. gam (376), jagmivas or jaganvas; fr. han, jaghnivas or jaghanvas;
fr. vid, cl. 6, 'to find,' vividvas or vividivas; fr. pi/, vivi&as or vivisivas; fr. dris,
dadrisvas or dadri&vas.
b. When vas is affixed, it will be necessary to restore to its original state the
final of a root ending in i, i, u, u, or ri, if changed before the terminations of the
du. and pi. to y, v, r, iy, uv, or uv; thus, f%f sri, changed by 374. e. to &sriy,
becomes f^tPsir^; J(fr, changed to tikriy, becomes f%j$*f*^ tikrfoas; ^, changed
PAST INDECLINABLE PARTICIPLES. 227
^7 374- 9- to dudhuv, becomes ^5^ dudhuvas ; *J_, changed by 374. '. to babhuv,
becomes ^*J5^ babhuvas. In declension, the 3rd pers. pi. with its termination us
is the form of the stem in the weakest cases (135.0), and in the fern, final * becoming
sh by 70 ; e. g. 3rd pl.jagmus, l.jagmushd; 3rd pi. tenus, I. tenushd, &c. See 168.
c. Roots which take the Periphrastic Perfect (see 385) form the Participles of
this tense by adding the Perfect Participles of Icri, bhu, and as, to dm; thus, from
6ur, cl. 10, 6oraydm-babhuvas, 6oraydh-6akrivas, 6oraydm-dsivas.
d. There is an A'tmane-pada Participle of the Reduplicated Perfect most easily
formed by changing ire, the termination of the 3rd pi., into dna; thus, vividdna,
tifydna, jagmdna. See 526. a; and cf. Greek Perf. Part, in jtx,evo (reTUjU^evof =
tutupdna).
e. The Parasmai-pada form of these Participles is inflected at 168. Those of the
A'tmane-pada follow the inflexion of adjectives like subha at 187.
PAST INDECLINABLE PARTICIPLES.
555. These are of the nature of Gerunds, as * carrying on the
action of the verb/ They fall under two heads : ist, as formed by
affixing isci tvd to uncompounded roots ; as, fr. ^ bhu, ' to be/ JJJ^T
bhutvd, 'having been' (see 80. XXI): andly, as formed by affixing
*T ya to roots compounded with prepositions or other adverbial pre-
fixes ; thus, fr. ^^ anubhu, ' to perceive/ ^nj^ anubhuya, ' having
perceived ; ' fr. *rwt sajjibhu, ' to become ready/ ti-rif)>3 sajjibhuya,
'having become ready/ The sense involved in them is generally
expressed by the English ' when/ ' after/ ' having/ or ' by ;' thus,
W!^ ^i3T tat kritvd, ' when he had done that/ ' after he had done
that/ 'having done that/ 'by doing that/ See Syntax, 898.
a. The suffix tvd of this participle is thought by some to be the instrumental
case of a suffix tva (see 80. XXI). The Indeclinable Participle has certainly much
of the character of an instrumental case (see Syntax, 901).
Obs. In the Veda WR, RT*f, pjlnor r^t are sometimes used for FfT.
Indeclinable Participles formed with tva from uncompounded roots.
556. When the root stands alone and uncompounded, the Inde-
clinable Participle is formed with ?^T tvd.
This suffix is closely allied to the H ta of the Past Passive Parti-
ciple at 531, so that the rules for the affixing of it ta to the root
generally apply also to the Indeclinable suffix RT tvd, and the forma-
tion of one Participle then involves that of the other.
Thus, r*^ kshipta, 'thrown,' fapsri kshiptvd, 'having thrown;' efiT'done' (rt. ^),
' having done ;' feliT (rt. **TT), ftvjril ; "|T? (rt. fS^), "<fT ; ^W (rt. ^T), ^T ',
G g 2
228 PAST INDECLINABLE PARTICIPLES.
(rt. w{), WH^T ; 3pftw(rt. *Tf), 'jfsi; ^*r?T (rt.
(rt. ^), TliT; ^ (rt. pj), f^T ; ^ (rt. ^), -3Sf T; % (rt. VI),
(rt. TR{), P13T; Trf (rt. 1^545), 7 Tr^T.
a. Where i is inserted, there is generally gunation of final i, i, u,
u, and of final "^ ri and of medial ^ n ; and optional gunation of
medial i, u (except as debarred by 38).
Thus, Slfirai fr. ^ft ; XjfarTT (also ^i^T) fr. ^; SffrHl or "flOril fr. *
or tSftsTrSTT fr. fc5^; ?jfffi^T or ^frfifn^T fr. ST?^; |fai3T or Tf^T fr. fS.
b. But from f^, ^f^RT and STRT; from ftr^ x , ilfwr^T and
So fV^ &c. The root 1TPJ makes aTTrrfcr^T (53 2 - ft ) j an( ^ initial i, u\
before single consonants, must be gunated ; as, ^tr makes TjftRT.
c. The roots in the list at 390. a. do not admit Guna ; thus, ftr5T x
can make only f^ftn^T.
d. When there are two forms of the Passive Participle, there is often only one of
the Indeclinable ; thus, p^ makes |U and rffjfnr, but only *TfiTi^T ; c555T,
and rtfWfl, but only c^f^rfi^T ; and, vice versa, ^ (543) only ^falT, but
and ^yr; ^, TRfe, but frf^RT and *f^T; J^, ^, but *nfWreIT and J^T. So,
some roots in nasals optionally insert i: 7T^, rfi^T or wfT5^T; "^W, "^r^T or
^filTr^T; ^, ^iP^rr or ^fWT; W^, ^STn^T or < am^T or "aiftTr^T; ^, TfTi^T
or ^frlHI.
e. The penultimate nasal, which is rejected before ta (544. a), is optionally so
rejected before tvd in T^, *T^, ^T^, Tf^ or fT^, and ^1^; thus, from T^ comes
TB, but till or TW; from ^T^, ^Tf^fT^T, ^!5T or ^TW-
/. njT and T5^ optionally insert nasals ; *TW or TW *TfT or f^T, 390. k.
g. Some few roots necessarily retain their nasals ; thus, ^R^ makes ^sh'rtl ; and
W^, ^Tn^T or ^Tf^r^T.
557. The only important variation from the Past Passive Participle occurs in
those roots, at 531. a, which take na for ta. The change of rz'to fr and ur (534)
is preserved (unless i be inserted), but tvd never becomes nvd; thus, '5T, ftw,
but aifVnrt (or W<liii) ; from if, fft^, but iftrfT ; from TJ, ^?F, but Tj^T ; from
f%^, f2[W, but fSR^T J from VT^, >TTrf , but HW or >1W (556. e) ; from ^T, ^>W,
but tj^Jil ; from ^TT, ^tT, but f^RT ' having quitted ' (not distinguishable in form
from f^r^T ' having placed,' root VT).
558. Observe, moreover, that verbs of cl. 10 and Causals, which reject the
characteristic ay a before the ita of the Past Pass. Part., retain ay before itvd; thus,
WrfrnTmadeto stand' (fr. Caus. stem WR*l), but WTir-MH I 'having made to stand ;'
f%fcni 'thought' (fr. f^nT cl. 10, 'to think'), but fenTftfi^T 'having thought.'
a. All Derivative verbs of course assume i, and form their Indeclinable Participles
analogously to Causals ; thus, ^Wtfvfar^T (fr. Desid. of Tt^), and ^^fajgi (fr.
Freq. of '^V). In regard to the A'tmane Frequentatives, 75Vc3fcfi3T is formed fr.
T, and ^Ifar^T fr.^rffan (ya in the latter being preceded by a consonant).
PAST INDECLINABLE PARTICIPLES. 229
b. There are one or two instances of compounded roots formed with tvd; thus,
^T*JWfi3T (fr. Tfl), Ramay. i. 2, 20; also -J<ni<j^ni, Ramay. I. 74, 23. Especially i
the case of Causals ; as,
c. When ^T a, 'not,' is prefixed, tvd is always used; as, ^Hcjir=ll 'not having
done,' 'without having done;' ^fi^T 'not having given.'
Indeclinable Participles formed with y&from compounded roots.
559- When a root is compounded with a preposition or any
indeclinable prefix (except ^r a, 'not, 3 see 558. c), the Indeclinable
Participle is formed by affixing if ya, and the rules for annexing it to
the root are some of them analogous to those which prevail in other
cases in which ya is affixed ; see the rules for forming the Special
tenses in cl. 4 (272), for Passives (461), and for the Precative (443).
560. But if a root end in a short vowel, instead of lengthening
this vowel, IT t is interposed ; as, fr. 'srrf^r dsri, * to take refuge' (rt. fei
with ^T), ^nfam dsritya, ' having taken refuge ; } fr. fffftj (rt. fa with
; fr. TOJ, Trsrai ; from tf^i (rt. ^ with ^;), tf^w ; fr. fa:^,
The lengthening of the radical vowel by coalition does not
prevent this rule ; as, fr. ^nft ati (rt. ^ with ^ifw), ^Trffal atitya.
a. TPJ 'to awake' gunates its final as in T55TT 7 T^J and foj 'to
destroy,' * to waste,' lengthens its final as in ireffa, T*reffal.
561. If a root end in long ^TT a, ^ i, or "31 u, no change generally
takes place ; as, fr. f^T, f%fra ; fr. TTaft, T^"ai^ ; fr. fw^, fa>f?l.
a. If it end in long ^ ri, this vowel becomes zr, and after labial
letters ur ; thus, fr. ^r^cir, ^T^ftt ' having scattered ;' fr. 1 ?rn} (root
TI ' to fill'), ^H^JJ (compare 534).
562. Final diphthongs pass into ^TT a; as, fr. *lft??, "Tfic^IT^ (also
fr. ^rfH^, ^rftrwiT^ ; fr. ^*ft, ^r^fliii.
a. But 3^ with ^TF makes ^H^T- In Epic poetry, *ft with ^R makes
b. ftr ' to throw,' *ft ' to kill,' J?T ' to measure,' and 1 ' to harter,' all make -JTHT .
Similarly, ^ 'to decay,' -<^PI ', but <^t 'to adhere,' -751*1 or -c5fa (see 390. e),
fta and 3ft conform to the rule for the Passive (~^f > ~^TOl), ^rM^i*M ' having
reclined upon,' Kirat. I, 38.
563. A penultimate nasal is generally rejected, as in Passives (see 469) ; as, fr.
*W5i N samdsahj, TOTraiT samusajya ; fr. JTR^I, Wf&( (used adverbially in the
sense 'violently').
a. Some few roots retain the nasal ; thus, vii^ij makes 'SU^i^j ; and
b. <?** ' to acquu-e' may insert a nasal after the prepositions ^TT and T*J ', thus,
e****! &c. (otherwise -<9l).
564. If a root end in a consonant the general rule is, that no change takes place ;
230 PAST INDECLINABLE PARTICIPLES.
as, from fTft^ nikship, faffe^T nikshipya j from UT^ (root ^H^ with IT),
from ^fal (root ^ with f%), ^ft^?.
a. But roots in ^ or ^T, preceded by i or u, lengthen these vowels, as in
from f^W, fr*^5 from f*^.
b. Four roots in ^^( J T T (, T*^, 1^, t^) optionally reject the nasal, and interpose
t between the final a and ya; as, from frpl*^, fPTW or fT^T. The roots f^j
*T^, TT^, ^, "SJ7JT, fTSfffr, *?W, !T, ^ff, ^f always reject the nasal; as, from
e. J^T, ST^, and ^t^ optionally reject the ^j but instead of interposing t,
lengthen the final a, as in Passives (see 470) ; thus, from Tr^^, ^r^(\M (or "3TJ3T).
565. The changes which take place in certain roots before the ya of the Passive
(471, 472) are preserved before ya; as, from f*^ 1 ^, "apl ', from fa^, ^JT ', from
, liter J from ^J^j ^*JF > from ^%% ^1^ J from ^nTT^, ^TJ^aS ; from
if^fl; and so with all the roots at 471, 472.
a. The roots at 390. Z. have two forms ; thus, from Tp^comes -mitl and-Hi, &c
b. There are one or two instances in which an uncompounded root takes T ', as,
'having reverenced,' Manu i. 4; vn. 145: Maha-bh. iii. 8017. T^I 'having
resided,' Nala v. 41 (from ^); ^t ' having taken,' Astra-s'iksha 21.
566. In affixing IT ya to the stems of Causal verbs of cl. 10, and the 3rd class of
Nominals (521), the characteristic ^HT is generally rejected; as, fr. TT^tVT prabo-
dhaya, W*frmprabodhya ; fr. IKTRIT, TTFTR ', fr . ^Tf^TT, ^T^^ ; fr. f^^T^, f^^T^.
a. It is, however, retained when the root ends in a single consonant and encloses
short a; thus, fq<i<u*H 'having calculated' (T5T with fw)j ^TB{^T 'having
imagined' (fic^ with ^TT); fl^xjoi 'having narrated' (fi^ with ^P^) : and also
sometimes in other cases; e.g. HH1*M 'having conducted,' Raghu-v. xiv. 45.
b. The final a of Frequentative stems is of course dropped, and the final ya of
both Frequentatives and Nominals, if preceded by a consonant ; as, from
comes -c9^rtM ', from ^*l, -sftWI ; from THR-Pf, -
Adverbial Indeclinable Participle.
567. There is another Indeclinable Participle yielding the same sense as those
formed with tvd and ya, but of rare occurrence. It is equivalent to the accusative
case of a noun derived from a root, used adverbially ; and is formed by adding
^T^ am to the root, before which suffix changes of the radical vowel take place,
similar to those required before the Causal suffix ^^(481) or before the 3rd sing.
Aorist Passive (see 475); thus, from ?ft n{, 'to lead,' "Vff(ndyam, 'having led;'
from "TT 'to drink,' tlTTT^ ' having drunk ;' from ^", ^T^J from T^, tJT'q^; from
fT5f^, TSp^ ; from '^'^ ' to kill,' viff*^. It often occupies the last place in a com-
pound ; as in the expression ^^sVlfl^ 'having totally exterminated ;' and in the
following passage from Bhatti-k. ii. n :
The descendant of Kakutstha, smiling softly, repeatedly bending down the
FUTURE PASSIVE PARTICIPLES. 231
creepers, would pluck the blossoms ; descending to the streams, would sip (the
waters) ; seating himself on some variegated rock, would recline in admiration (of
the scene).' Compare also S'akuntala, Act V, verse 131, ^I^VBflf sRf^if WM^T
repeatedly throwing up her arms she began to weep.' Other examples are
11*1 l[l 5*^ 'mentioning by name,' and lT^4f(^*^ 'taking alive.'
a. These Participles generally imply repetition of the action, as above, and in this
sense are themselves often repeated ; as, ddyam, ddyam, ' having repeatedly given.'
FUTURE PASSIVE PARTICIPLES.
568. These are gerundive in their character, and may be called
verbal adjectives. They may be classed under three heads : ist, as
formed with the suffix ing tavya (80. XVIII); 2ndly, as formed with
iH^fa aniya (80. V); 3rdly, as formed with *i ya (80. XXVIII).
These suffixes yield a sense corresponding to the Latin Fut. Pass.
Part, in dus, and the English able and idle, and most commonly
denote 'obligation 5 or ' propriety 3 and 'fitness.'
a. In some of the. Latin formations with tivus, the Passive sense is preserved, as
in captivus, nativus, coctivus. Cf. Sk. ddtavya with dativus (dandus), OOTCOf ;
yoktavya with (con]junctwus (jungendus) ; janitavya with genitwvs (gignendus) ;
dhdtavya with hereof, &c.
Future Passive Participles formed with inq (80. XVIII).
569. These may be formed by substituting inq tavya for TTT td,
the termination of the 3rd pers. sing, of the ist Future; e. g.
From T!pn ksheptd, ' he will throw,' BfHM ksheptavya, ' to be thrown ;' WT ' he
will do,' MN| 'to be done;' fr. *ffViTT 'he will be,' Hfad**4 'about to be;' fr.
^f^WT, ^f^fi^T (see 390. a); fr. fafaiTT, fafWrf^T.
Obs. In the case of those roots ending in consonants which
reject i, whatever changes take place before ta, the same take place
before tavya } and the special rules at 390. a o will equally apply to
this suffix.
Thus, T*&R, rt?MI (relinquendus) ; U
^T ; ^ftTT, ^f^^T ; IffiT!n or ^infanT, fiP*in<M or
; Tff T or flifsfflt, Hll^ or HlPdHyi ; and from Causal
from Desid. ^tfvftin, ^^ivfKrt^ ; from Frequentative
from ^twrf^lTT, ^rf^flaT. See the rules at 388, 390, 491, 505, 513, 516.
Future Passive Participles formed with ^Rfa (80. V).
570. This suffix is added directly to the root, and generally with-
out other change than gunation (if Guna is admissible).
232 FUTURE PASSIVE PARTICIPLES.
Thus, fr. f% <ti, 'to gather/ ^TCTfa tayaniya, 'to be gathered/ fr.
fr. f , ^mtV (58); fr. fc5^, WTJRfa; fr. ^V, sfrjrffal; fr.
fr. f ^ x , ^JWrffa ; fr. ^ (cl. 10), ^ftufhl : but J^, m^fa ; JT|,
^ffeinfhl ; cF^, cfrirtf if and ^5Tnffal ; nt^, nfrnrfa and nfanq^rfa, &c. See
390..;. Z.m.
a. A final diphthong is changed to ^n a, which blends with the
initial a of aniya ; as, from wt, WRfa ; from TT, Trr?fta.
b. The roots at 390, 390. a. of course forbid Guna ; thus, oj?^frl
from f *r ; *pnffai from TT, &c.
c. As to Derivative verbs, aya is rejected from a Causal stem, and
a from the stems of other Derivative verbs, and ya, if a consonant
precedes.
Thus, Sftvnffa from the Causal stem ^hni; T3ftfvwfa from the Desid.
; also *rt$?TTta, ^fBSpmfNj fr. the Frequentatives ^J?l, ^f^ni; and
or TTWffa fr. the Nominal
Future Passive Participles formed with % (So. XXVIII).
571. Before this suffix, as before all others beginning with y,
certain changes of final vowels become necessary.
a. If a root end in ^n a, or in ^ e, ^ ai, ^ft o, changeable to ^T a,
this vowel becomes ij e (compare 446) ; e. g.
From TT ma, ' to measure,' *HI meya, ' to be measured,' ' measurable / fr. ^ hd,
' to quit,' ^f heya; fr. ^ dhyai, 'to meditate,' *ZTO dhyeya; fr. M 'to be weary,'
*J*J ; fr. ^T ' to give,' ^ ' to pity,' and ^t ' to cut/ ^J.
b. If in ^ i, ^ z, "3 1 u, or "3! w, these vowels are gunated ; e. g.
From f^ ti, ^R 6eya (in the Veda ^TOI with "3TT); but ft with ^, -ft^f.
But the Guna ^ o is changed to av, and sometimes ^ e to ay,
before ya (as if before a vowel) ; thus, from >, H^l ; from ff ' to
conquer/ aTQT ; from ^ ' to buy/ "asm ; from ft| ' to destroy/ Tspzr.
And the Guna ^ft o passes into dv before y, especially when it is
intended to lay emphasis on the meaning; as, from ^j, wai; from
3T, 3IT^I; from ^, m|. But ^'to shake 3 makes ^CT.
c. If in ^f ri or ^ n, these vowels are vriddhied ; e. g.
From ^ 'to do/ cFnJ ; from ^ ' to support/ HT*t (also *|7T, see 572); fr. ^ ' to
choose/ ^nl (also ^W).
c?. The roots at 390. c. drop their finals (^tifl, ^fT3l).
572. Sometimes if a root end in a short vowel no change takes place, but t is
interposed, after the analogy of the Indeclinable Participle formed with ya at 560 ;
FUTURE PASSIVE PARTICIPLES. 233
so that the stem of the Future Participle is often not distinguishable from the
Indeclinable; thus, from fWj'i, 'to conquer,' f^TJjitya (&\8ojeya), 'conquerable;'
from ^ stu, ' to praise,' ^7T stutya, ' laudable ;' from ^ kri, ' to do,' ^pq kritya
(as well as ^iTO), 'practicable;' from ^ 'to go,' ^T 'to be gone;' from ^TT? 'to
honour,' vfl^iq 'to be honoured.'
573. If a root end in a single consonant with a medial a, the latter may be
vriddhied ; as, fr. ITf grab, ' to take,' ?JT^I grdhya fr. ^' to be ashamed,' cfTO ',
fr. W^ 'to love,' ^iTWr : but not always; as, fr. $T^T, ^pm; fr. ^, ^l; fr. ^V,
"^WJ ; fr. *Ti^, *W : and not if the final is a labial (except cf^, T^, HH.) ; as, fr.
*T*(, Jmi ; fr. ^, ^TO J fr. <9H ' to receive, 5 <5T (and c5*l). The root *T^ ' to
be mad' makes *TRT after prepositions, but otherwise TU. Similarly, *T<I and ^T.
The root HIT ' to serve ' makes *T5ir and HT 1 *? (see 574).
a. If with a medial ^ t or ^M, these are generally gunated ; as, from *f3T, HtrZT j
from f<3?, "t^t' } but SJ 1 ^, BT I and sometimes only optionally ; as, ^ makes J T^I
as well as *?t?I J and |7, g^T and ^t?T.
b. If with a medial ^ ri, no change generally takes place ; as, fr. ^JW ?
fr. "^ST, ^^1 J fr. ^5^, faT (after ^R and ^, HT^) ; fr. ^5^, f^ 1 (also
but fr. ^W, ^1 or ^W.
c. The roots at 390, 390. a. are, as usual, debarred from Guna ; thus, ^R, &c.
574. A final ^<f may sometimes be changed to cF k, and final T/ to *T ^, when
the Past Passive Participle rejects i; as, from ^^ pat, ^\^( pdkya and ^n^fpddya:
from ^J 1 ^, <J\*i or *pT. When the final is unchanged, as in pdtya, the obligation
implied is said to be more absolute; but the two forms may have distinct meanings;
thus, bfiojya (fr. bhuj] means to be eaten,' but bhogya, 'to be enjoyed;' vdfya (fr.
vat] means 'proper to be said,' but vdkya, 'that which is actually to be said.'
a. Again, iqixq (fr. W*^) is used after the prepositions f^f and IT, otherwise TTT 7 ^.
Similarly, trn?T (fr. ^pTJ after fa and IT, and *R*T or *TT5*T (fr. ^) after the same
prepositions.
b. Other anomalous changes may take place, some of which are similar to those
before the ya of Passives; thus, fr. 7J^, *J^I as well as *J1^I (472); fr. ^, 7ST
(471, also TO); fr.^, ^5^(471); fr. srre^, f^ns (472.0); fr.^'todig,'i^nr; fr.
'to praise,' ^TW or ^f^T ; fr. tf^ ' to fry,' HrSf or tfrSf ,' fr. ^
c. The roots beginning with *J^at 390. 1. have two forms; thus, *nfor
575. Many of these Participles are used as substantives ; thus, W1WT n. ' speech ;'
n. ' food ;' *t"n f. ' a harlot ;' ^IT f. ' sacrifice ;' ^1 n. ' a ditch ;' TCT f.
' a wife,' fr. ^J ' to support,' &c.
576. The suffix ya may be added to Desiderative, Frequentative, and Nominal
stems in the same way as aniya (570); thus, ^^ftrai, ?I$?nf , ^fospiT, 11x^91. So
also, from 3^o5 ' a pestle,' *|*r^T 'to be pounded with a pestle.'
a. *8 a added to a root after gunation (if Guna is possible) gives
the sense of a Future Passive Participle when in composition with
H h
or
234 PARTICIPLES OF THE SECOND FUTURE.
*T, ?j^, and f*fi^; as, *JORT 'easy to be done/ g 16 ^ 'difficult to be
done/ g^ar ' difficult to be crossed.' See 80. I.
b. Again, a suffix ^fc5H added to a few roots has the same force
as the suffixes of the Future Passive Participle ; e. g. ti^fpjH * fit to
ripen 5 or * to be cooked/ fn^f?5*T ' to be broken/
577. The inflexion of Future Passive Participles follows that of
adjectives at 187; thus, cfiflsq 'to be done;' N. sing. m. f. n. karta-
vyas, -a, -am. Similarly, karaniyas, -a, -am; and kdryas, -a, -am.
PARTICIPLES OF THE SECOND FUTURE. FORMATION OF STEM.
578. These are not common. They are of two kinds, either Parasmai-pada or
A'tmane-pada ; and, like Present Participles, are most easily formed by changing
^frfT anti, the termination of the 3rd pi. of the 2nd Fut., into ^TiT at, for the
Par. ; and by changing 'SHiT ante into 'SWR 1 amdna, for the Atm. ; thus, from WfT~
"Olftr karishyanti and cfifiLI'd karishyante, 'they will do,' come ft(Vq r^ karishyat
and fcf<Jq*i mi karishyamdna (58), 'about to do;' from the Passive 2nd Fut. "^!?W
'they will be said' comes IK*(*II*U ' about to be said ' (see 84. 1. and 80. XXVII).
a. In their inflexion (see 141), as well as in their formation, they resemble
Present Participles ; see 524 and 526.
Obs. Cf. Greek in
PARTICIPIAL NOUNS OF AGENCY.
579. These have been already incidentally noticed at 80, 83, 84, 85,
87. As, however, they partake of the nature of Participles, and are
often used as Participles (see Syntax, 909911), a fuller explanation
of them is here given. They may be classed under three heads : ist,
as formed from the root ; andly, as formed from the same stem as
the ist Future; 3rdly, as formed from the root by changes similar
to those which form the Causal stem.
580. The stem of the first class is often identical with the root
itself; that is, the unchanged root is frequently used at the end of
compounds as a nqun of agency, / being added if it ends in a short
Vowel ; see examples at 84. III. and 87.
a. Another common noun of agency is formed from the root by
affixing ^ a (as in the first group of conjugational classes at 257),
before which a, Guna, and rarely Vriddhi, of a final vowel is required ;
as, from f^ji, 'to conquer/ "vfn jaya, 'conquering.' Medial vowels
are generally unchanged ; as, from ^ vad, ' to say/ ^ vada, ' saying ;'
from ij^ tud, ' to vex/ g^ tuda, ' vexing' (see 80. I).
b. And final SST a, ^^ am, or 'ST^ an are dropped ; as, from ^r
PARTICIPIAL NOUNS OF AGENCY. 235
da, 'to give,' ^ da, 'giving;' from i\f(gam, 'to go,' T[ ga, 'going;'
from *F{ jan, ' to be born,' ^ ja, ' being born.' Their declension
follows that of adjectives at 187.
581. The stem of the second class (see 83) may be always inferred
from the 3rd pers. sing, of the ist Fut. of Primitive verbs, the vowel
^ ri being substituted for the final vowel a, the nominative case being
therefore identical with the 3rd pers. sing, of that tense (see 386).
Thus, >f^I bhoktd, 'he will eat,' J^ bhoktri, 'an eater;' ^fet 'he will fight,'
' a fighter ;' Mlf^ifl ' he will ask,' Tff^rJ ' an asker ;' ^ffel ' he will bear,'
^u3" 'a bearer,' &c. They are inflected at 127.
582. The stem of the third class is formed in three ways.
a. By adding ^ in to the root (see 85. II), before which suffix
changes take place similar to those required before the Causal suffix
aya (481,482, 483); as, fromeji, ^Tft^Mnw, 'a doer ;' from ^(488),
tllfri^ ahdtin, ' a killer ;' from ^ft, ^nftl^ * a sleeper :' y being inserted
after roots in a (483); as, from m, *nfil^ 'a drinker;' from ^T,
^TftF[ day in, ' a giver.' They are inflected at 159.
b. By adding 'srsfi aka to the root (see 80. II), before which suffix
changes take place analogous to those before the Causal aya (481,
482, 483) ; as, fr. ^, GRT^R kdraka, 'a. doer,' ' doing;' fr. 'ft, tTHnR
ndyaka, ' a leader,' * leading ; ' fr. IT?, ?n*r<* grdhaka ; fr. ftv, ^TVli ; fr.
^r(, VH4i; fr. |W, ^^B; fr. W^, Wtt; fr. ^T^, i*^<; fr. ^H, ^TTTT^i.
c. By adding wf ana to some few roots ending in consonants
(see 80. IV), after changes similar to those required in forming the
Causal stem; as, fr. ^, cjv<f nandana, ' rejoicing;' fr. <*^, ^^jr
* vitiating;' fr. sro, ^ftVT 'cleansuig.'
The inflexion of the last two follows that of adjectives at 187.
EXAMPLES OF INFLECTED VERBS.
583. The following tables give a synopsis of the inflexion of the
Primitive forms of the ten roots: w^budh, cl. i, 'to know;' ip^nrit,
cl. 4, 'to dance;' f^st dis, cl. 6, 'to point out;' gif yuj, cl. 10, 'to
unite;' fsr<f vid, cl 2, 'to know ;' *J bhri, cl. 3, 'to bear;' fa^ bhid,
cl. 7, 'to break ;' fa 6i, cl. 5, ' to gather ;' ^ tan, cl. 8, ' to stretch ;'
^ pu, cl. 9, ' to purify : ' classes I, 4, 6, and 10 ; 2, 3, and 7 ; and 5,
7, and 9, being grouped together as at 257259. Then the Passive
forms of these ten roots are given, followed by the Present tense of the
Causal, Desiderative, and Frequentative forms, and the Participles.
H h 2
236
o
I I
H
o
o
(23
o
co
CO
O
H
fe
O
CO
CQ
H
hH
S
2
-
-
Q a
5* a *
1 X | '&
-0 8 ^3 Sr>
* 1
^ rS ^
& rfS <5
Il|
lA^I
4) Si
**^ *
8 Q
J
3
K
B 53 53
5 ^ , .
o e. '2 S 4
o a "a s>>
,11
-C) "O
1 I ^
*8I
Xs -is Si,
1
V 53 v e V S*
1 i 1 *
^ 'C. ^ 'S
i* a ^3 s
-S1
?* * ":
ft <5 <S
S S ^2
a a S
s 5 ,
IB
XS
a
S
C
<
Q
Q a
* 5* a c*
^ 'C. ^ '5
"0 8 " &>
!ii
g i<5 i-CS
1 1
III,
<u _
'w XS
* 3
M ^
S s
a a e
-S* v -^
1 . s s*
"0 a "e a>
r.11
e - o
1 1
l^tj.
1
C
X
e
*4
v e HS ^
B-ffS-it 1
^ . * S>
-o a "a s
T. "
& f 1
* r* "*^
NO *O
1 i 1
I^Jj
*
a
&
a HI
5 -^ *
^ *n. ^ -s>
>0 S 13 5
^a
-C - 8
.S ?2 ^
& -o o
a v
1 1
HJ -S sa.
e>
a e ,
: -^ e a*
o 'C ^3 '5*
8_i5L2
. *\
S ^2 '^
& "<S iCS
SS *"
2 i*
J 1 i
x> 5 a,
.'
e IL
J -^ ^
^ '. >S S
-o a "a s
t, "8
*!
^ -C ^
1 a *
SB*
^ -2 a.
M 4>
a
3 J * fr
!>S ^o Q Q
o '. ^3 S
-o a "a s>
t -ts
e a
^ ^
& <> O
& s ,
a a *
53 S
x> a,
' 'a '^
8 ti
J
<
&
e a
a* v I*
*C. ^g S
<S 8 13 3
*r"
* 8
tt ^ ^
i. <; <;
Il|
1^1,
4
v >e v
| S*a .*
^ 'C. ^S S>
<s a ts s>
3r2
^H =2 ^S
s- -0 -d
3 *g
a a g
US 5 1,
S
M Q "-
J -^ a S^
^ 'C. ^ 'S
-0 8 ^3 &
Jl
v> r-O S
* * <!
s> o -o
i i X
S S
x a.
H
5
x 4
o S
2
a H
1 -t i 1
<5 8 IS S>
'S *.
' 8
.s 3
SS fO -0
ts v
8
45 ^ 1,
3
i
H
4
S
-
v a ^e V -L
-S -a ^
H 'C. -S 'S>
-0 8 *3 &>
2. ^
s S 3
S> "0 <5
11^
S s
HJ 5 a,
<n
&
S
53 a
| a i 4
^ "C. * '&
^> 8 *e s
a a
- .g
"S ^S "
o o V S
II I
,
i
e S,
^ -^
^ 'C. ^2 S>
--. = S i.
e ^3
* ^j a
"S ^ ^
- -a -a
*
o o v g
Sis
HJ -2 a,
z ?
^
v a VQ ^
B 1> ^ jf
^ "C. ^ '&
8 'XJ &>
. ts
C 53
S
QJ * **s:
i. -^ -C:
o o v
111
US -2 1,
S
p<
o
2
t3 -IS v <s '&
iii$2
* vd 6
a 'C. ^
S ><s f<s
cq eq
eJ co ^-
v - J 1 s
O H ft,
o 06 o\
CN
2 *
vo ^?
t--
T *?
w r!
+ .S g
5 g ;
^
2 -** 8
bD
C
"a
O *"* Pi
Jl
5
S 2 'S
+ ^
- I U
"s U
<5 S
a + -
a S o
B S
o jo
e3
+
- - s
m Q>
3 1
"88
Jil e
s ^ -
2ll
H?
*
ill
irt
1 -,
8 !9' S
m <*^ 00
fll
i .11 2
_C *=
O ^
o
, T3
53 el
>
O
R
O
CO
* S * -
O S-. -~ 0"
^ >
ill
s> -> -o
53 63 53
III
53 63 5F
a 2
a e
PLURAL.
63 63 5
! -g a ^
^ ' * 'S
o e *e >>
a a <s a
'C. "
^11
S ^s -o
ts 53 e .
1 1 ^
111
. 63 63 6T
1
3 '-1 ^e 1
1 T. ^ '&
fs s ^ z
e 53 e e
i*3
e -o -o
63 63
s "S
S 8 S
S a
*v * BI
53 63 6F
i
63
S
4
Q
4 , >
^ 'C. * S>
8 8 ^ 8"
w -
5 |
2a * "*S
SS 1<S -O
63 53 53
1 1 S
H? <8 &
53 63 5?*
-1 1
V 63
ti
E
%
DUAL.
41 -I e 1*
1 T. J 'S
- a "e s
63 a 53 e
S^ t3
S S J
S e
i s
1 i,
53 63 6T
| 1
v
4
v v V =L
| >^ *
^ '. -1 'S>
o a "e ;>
a e 53 es
c. TS
" I
rs '!
S <5 -O
53 53 63
111
63 63 6?
S
63
6
a a 5.
: -^ e *
^ '. ^ '&
<3 8 "53 Sr
a e e
"r*
* a
ts ^
"O
63 63 63
4 1 1
63 63 5F
_63
d
ta
m
e 2
-g 1 e i*
IS '. -^ 'o
o e * si
e e e
'. *,
s
* !i '^
"e "
i i "s
111
63 63 If
1
1 * 1
1 ^ l
o 53 a c
i. "3
sS-l
S> -O "0
63 63 63
S a
s S
1|,
63 63 67
'
e e ^
5* e e*
1 'C. ^2 'S
^S S t5 J,
a ss o e
*
1 a
^ s |
* (? i<S
^ <i -0
e
1 8
ll 1
e g 1
PLURAL.
e Is
5 v *
^ ' ^ S
-0 a ts s
e e
- * j
-;s ";
e> <s NO
63 63 63
J 11
-2 sa,
63 63 6?
v e ' v ,
fS ^59 .1
^ -c. * s
^ s "ts &>
e e c s
n
B *O lA
63 63 63
Ill
63 6S 63^
6
e e
1 ? .1 1
-0 e ts s
e e e
'?
- s
^ ?2 ^
-O <5
63 63 63
1 1
^5 -2 a,
63 53 6T
a
v .2
PADA.
DUAL.
I * 1
I I' 5 t
o e e a
'C -to
4r K
. ^
ij ~s -
63 63 63
ii v
III,
.63 63 63*
1 I
IASMAI-
X J ^ ^
^ -S 4 v e a
^ '. J 'S
-o a ts .
c c
c.
- a
^3 o IS
* "*:
~ <s -a
63 63 63
ill
III,
6S 63 63^
g
&
. 53
* i 4
-^_ H^ S , ^
^ T. ^ S>
<s 8 " ;
53 53 53 53
e w
8S 8
H^j ..fS ' **
^ ^ -S
-o -o
63 63
111
63 63 5? 1
*
CS
53 53 S*
S -^ ^
^ -s. ^ s
-<5 S ^ &>
53 53 53 53
e "S
-a a
55 ^s -
S) -<S -O
63 63 63
1 a ^
l||
63 63 63^
S 53 *
as 5 ^
^ '. ^ S
S " S
53 53 63 63
*. "3
63 63
"*s a
^ 3
a o
63 63 53
i I v s
1 1 1
es es eF
< i
ROOT.
^ |- % >
cq Z, Q KH
ts 'C. ^
U* -*s
^ cq pq
- J v s
O Bs ft,
6\
6 06
th
*> r^
M * NO 6
r cc r-
*h co c\
T *?
( <H
5
238
EH
fc
W
EH
O
-
i>*i
1 is g
S. 13
3 |"l
g> -O O
| 1
i_l_i
a
Q
v|S
d
1
&
a
K
e e 2
S ^v -^
H '. v ;3 S
. S 13 S
> is
^ <s a
Ig r ^
& -O -O
III
S
<3
i
J I 4 Q i*
1 1- 9 'g
^11
S> ~Q fO
111
>
v
^*
|
1 * 1
H '. * '
i-O 8 13 3
J, 13
-<s a
r r2 ^
S> -C5 ~a
111
v s
V B
x "e
.5>4
s*
* i
5
| * >
1 I $ g
s. 13
534
-- -c -^
111
1
3
v-
^
^
e
S 1* j? .t
1 T. -2 5*
8 "IS 3
i. 13
^l-l
S> i<5 -O
111
*
>
a
v
!*...&
1 1- g
V 13
a 3 3
S <5 F-O
III
<3
<
tS
1
e <s 2
fS -S 4 e ^
^ '. ^ 'S
^ a ts &j
S. 13
13 S J
w "SJ
& <5 i<S
111
^
| * 1
I I' 1 'g
S. 13
a 1 -1
S> <5 <S
III
e
.s>
s
S S3
1 -s* v .>
1 '. ^ S>
<s a ts &>
*1
rs rs ^
i_- <5 -3
J 1 1
m
1 &
j
3
M
s
K
IL
| ^ a i 4
^ 'C. ^ S
-0 8 13 5
|'1
5 ^
S> <5 <5
III
5 1
* >i
e ,
! ^ v -^
^ 'C. ^ S
-0 S ^3 &>
'C. 13
^ a
3 S
"O <S
* S v ~
ll I
Q
e V S
a v e
s s
a Is
S -g* *
1 'C. ^g S
< e is s>
"C. 13
S J
.5 "<S
fQ
1 11
S 5 a,
. 1
-2 ^
>>
2 3
Q a
2
J 1
-S 4 e .
^ '. ^ S
>o e " a>>
2. is
raS'l
-O <5
1 11
^S -2 a,
s i
5 1
e* *
<
*
M
<!
a 1
S 5* B ^
^ -c. ^ s
^s a 'ts s>
S3
13 O 12
9 *it **t
& "O Q
S ^2
a s S
j_|
Q
1
&
M
<
PH
a e E,
| 5
^ '. ^ S
<s a is s
g. 13
-a a
13 jO -^
S "S o
s s
a 8
1-21,
HO
to
w S>>
i
DO
5 2, B |
*>S HMO V G .
o ** ^.ff. ***^
o i-. ^ S
.<5 a is s->
T. is
13 S -|
o * "**-
S> ^Q -O
1 1 1
.* i
B e 5
:S -g 4 a e*
1 '$ 9 'g
-.i'l
c* (* "*;
55"^^
III
^1
s 1,
H
O
^ I- % 'I
a; fe; P ^
^ -c. a
S CJ -!J
^ cq cq
g
^s is
O S OH
6\
O CO
^ t^
W Tt \0 O
N CO !>
in oo o\
T ?
^ <s
C
r^H
3
J3
-g
S
e
=
% C
^2
O
I-H
E-t
* J 1 *
g * ^so "g^ "Q *Q
2 1 1
^ * -S a.
v g v s
"a "B
PLURAL.
"Ci 5: ^; ^-j ^ f^
^ S S """
'2 e e
^52 S K 5*
<s x> S a,
g
1
B e > *
.8 C B V g
e
B
B e 4 !>
;? '7* V CO *S^ 'tS "-O
O *- ^ '~ **
1 1
S % -S S,
1 |
tk
m
DUAL.
B C 4 V.
" ' vef '^ T3 <5
o k *3 o .
<s a "B ^ -o
3 I 1 5
-o -8 -2 a.
1 |
%
1
Hit |i
1 V 2
^S a a g
o '*8 -2 a,
g
B B -j.
*^ **^ ?* W^ i*^
^ *?* v o "S^ *** *^
o k. ^ o* 9 *v
i^O S s3 >i & *O
1 4 i I
"O HJ ** a,
1
CJ
,^* *** +* W^ * i^*
^3 ?* V CQ *??* **** "Q
f*O S S$ > & *Q
i HI
-s HS -w a,
o
B &
Z ">
*
1 J 1 1
s3 ** v co "5-i v3 f*o
o ** * o QJ s
<i S: ^ >j & ^o
a V B
J Its
S 'I S a,
'B
B 2 *
^S ^ Q ^c*
3 *r* v ^ *^i *t3 *Q
O *-. ^ O -j '-
8 g fi
S J I 1
<s ^S -S a.
a 3 a
8 IB
PLURAL.
4 ! 1 5
^ '. ^ S> .s rS
ro 8 "e >> & "O
1 11^
c
1 - s. -1 'I* "8 sa
C 8 T3 5>> JS "O
1 i ri
-C s
1*0 *c *w a<
c
v g
w B ._,
S <8 -2 a.
1
PADA.
DUAL.
B B - ?
fS -^ s e . 4
j JP 3 g | ||
. 8 *
S 'I 5 1,
1
ASMA1-
* ^S '& 1 ^
1 III
1
K
PH
O & ^ ^J *
rfs 8 ^s 5> e <
1 i i '
rfS -5 e
<s S -S a,
s
i
a e &> 'E
a * 5 "S 1 ^H ?*
rfS 8" ''S S ' <
fe" * *
1 1 1 I
* ^H-
'S * v * 'S> "B -C
O *~. &3 C ^ -
HS 8 ^ >i c
B ft Vs
'- J 1
wa 8 a,
1
i
1 2. 5 > 'J
f % Q ^ U a
!' 1 *o 1
ON
O 06
M
M ^ vc n <
l^ V-1 QO C\
?
240
-
O
O
O
-
1 1 1 1
V. "8
1 1 1
tl 1
"*
*> J-
-j
~ -o
m ^
-*> s
2 Jo
FLUBAL.
it it
*
'. r
tl 1
**
if ^
* "53
2
A -^
** ^
"** * *-
*^ SS *^ ^^
$ *3 * &
*O SS "53 ^
1 S'l
&
.- a |
"* *
.S >H d
v O
S 5 53 P
SL <s r^
&.
I
1'I3I
8 'xs &>
- rs
* "e ^2
I
i
S 4
I; 1 .
1 gl
HANE-PJ
DUAL.
1 1 1 *
o 8 "e 5
^ !l
|3|
8
ft>
'S
Sfi ^ -2'
1 l\
>
111!
*
'J* "S
ll'l
D
1
1 "
~ &
& 'Z
%-%%
* <0 CO
'S - <a
* .* "*~
*O S 5>*
'
|
>
iff ** it
* 5 "
o r
J *>
v 'S c
CJ
5
CO
ii-ji
-Cl S tS &s
*
^ -i* 3
1 a.
n
* 3
v> a <n
e -H M
* *l
itil
* * ^
*8 -S a,
* * %
%3%
3 ~ 9
<o <u JA
I '!' !! *
w S
sJ i^Q* ;^
3- s
tl 1
,
ft -^ ^
^ J C
^ >, "
I % 8
ca.
PLURAL.
J '! 13 t 4
*2 S "S 'S
S S
.":
* t \
-2 a.
a
'3 t
1 *i
M & e
liii
*S e ts ?
B * 3
| | r|
1
tl t
1 I
*
g *,
6 -c* g
<U SJ J3
4-3 ^-*
00 '^
S to *e O 4
|||
til
"a
^ %
* in &
ra oo a
a a
e8 u %
a) jg
DUAL.
J|||
^ * 3
1 J 1
|
|
'" r3
,u oS
3 <o
15
ri^
IASMAI-1
1 1 3 1
S ^53 3
^ "*' ^
^ p 1
8 4S a.
B .
8 E
8 "S a>
f||-3
S v
i t r;
p5
Hi!
-o e 'e >,
ill
fit
e
a> 5*
** 'O
" o 2
T3 08
0) B _
S +
1
^ *- *
"a '5*
*
|||
'^5 5 a,
ll
^ v M -
JB 3 fr
^ "S
-s | S
3 S <a
i 4-
1 | "S e*
3 ' I 3 'S 1
S "* "O
^ e s
V^ ^ 55^
a
1 . 1
^ o 4 t!
J3 ^-
2 o -
i
-S
8 '. "2 >
t^ 3 pq
S VN,
* Q f3
^0 ^ ft,
t + i
M vS2 1
w | o
C ^ 8.
w * VO
n ro r-
vC OO &\
-11
ft
fc
O
O
O
09
2
<u rri
s
3
a
<u v
'&
IS o,
g
^ %}
^ ^ -2
*>
-^ c
E-l
05 -S
'S -S
S "e a
a
.5
1
55 53 53
t 9 09
09 09 09
NS C 63
-es -ej <s
CO 09 09
s
cJ
.S
-
JS-,
g
d
y-
V
"c
1
*&
1
M
s* * *
\3 5S "
&i ?*} ^a
i-ss ; i-sj
09 CO 09
09
- 53
x "S ^
09 09 09
S s S I
v 63 53
09 09 09
-s
*
forms 6A
ij
**
to
~
*
\
STEM.
! ' ** . '
O 53 4J O* S *CJ p-58 ^j tj
1
H
j "H. la 'S*
TS 'S. a
nq ^ Q ^
H^. K5 pq "O r~
ft.
K
4 \o o
W CO t^* IO 00
6\
CO .5 CO
1
g
B
a
ft> 5,
e
"* a
^ i
55 v.
<D
1 to
"3 ^
-e *
"Q 08 cu
-5 5
^
.5
i
^o v a *t3
^e
^53 HS ^CS
03 ^o
E
rQ
a*
5 .st
03 O ^
V
s
CU
o
1
09
53 s
8 e *
^
^ 00
H
o
o
s
^53 V 53 H3
1
t^ C3
1 1 1
* IJ
1
Ji^
r
1
*
I
"* * -a?
'o B 8
-<S C "S3
I
1 1
%J *
cu 63
-<s xj 4S
i
1 "S -3
s-
'S-
~ a
fi ( ^ . Q
S tq
ap O E^
f?
M 4 so
d
CO
t^- ifl 00
Os
-
I 1
242
AORIST OR THIRD PRETERITE.
i i
o
a"
a
I
1
H
1
P4
si
B
o
I 1
"** "^
** *"
I s s i
"* * > s*a -5 fc '"C SJ
<* S CJ S B V C ^ X B C 53
ce'o v e'e" V cs^s5
^2
e c j
00 t -V t O t*
*9 Jl 8 c* 3 * **
^ ^ ^ i:f 1 f i 1 1
vo o ^"cociSgcO
%
A
O
1
i
K
53 V CS ]r^ ^ M
oa ^ *** "*"* '** ^" eT ^
o"* a o wS^^v^r
vo LS^ C ^ 'Ss S^^S^S
c "8 5' J *'e3S ^' : 2 2
'S. -S. l^^grfi'TS''^ 1 ^
eotoco 09*505 c ''^3 t ''|t^-l353 C ^
"^ "^ r3 "^ C8 -2
ill 1 1 i * 1 } 'i 3 1 1
* "fr~ *j
., .. , ^ r *. <& S i \E e
f 4- t 1 i * r I 1
1 1 H : s* h a* h s *j s
| a e> 4 s cs -^ i| - 03 cS ^ ^5
Q a B Pn-<(M-i'*'1PH^(-H'^
' "' 4^ - * 'S. 8
s ^' f^ '** i2 2
>H ^- pj co ii oo ON
243
1
s
j f 8
H
S % &
* '&>
*
1
e 1 J "I* If "i 31 * '1 'i
g
^ v * ' -* ]
J Q g B
"S
5' i-s 1 ^s
3 pq V Ex ft,
m
>-H * so O C* (
^ t^ ic 06 6\
.
S3 *e *^
I
v
s :s - -j
" v V S ^e 5 S
i!
r*C* CS
**^ 1-*
5i *5 ^ S *^3 S l>
ri
1
Jl* ^ -^
^> ^^ ^i ^i ^> ^i as cs
*GZ -Cr "r *c "<S f<* r\
O*O*O OQCQCO C * e ***"fl3 *^
.-^
^3 "
"**
*^ _g
o
a
i
1
S s -2 B g
-2 v J l^a^"
ii
V 5363^ ^SS^SS^^^S
H
i i
3
if 1* 'S
eoeoog "ajOQCo "^ ^
O
5S
S ' t ^ 'i *^ -s -8
O
"> &SS $,
S3 * 53 53 525353 535353
^ * ? "s
|
~ ? ^ 2 >M e* *9 8
S J- '* i* . ej "8J 53 V S
cq 2; Q tH fx pq pq **o E-< ft<
w^sod cot>- tnoooN
(H ta o
K a ** ro
C ^O m ON
B
llJit
H
_
e <u 53
v g g ^ * v> ^
H
9
"
'S ^2 !iS e t?^ <s
EH
5J ^" ^Q'
63 V 5S ^ "* ^ l * a F Q-;
\$* \S *&
vS \^^ \?^ V? N^ \^* ^ "t* ^~~l 5"
3
5
c5 eo aj
? 11 "1 " S'?t1
^
* <* "Si *
-
PQ
EH
1C
IB" V ?* 'S
^ b >J * "53 *- s S
o
|
|
a o v 1 a 2
^>
B5
v v Cg
v v v i ^63 ^ ^53
^j
^
a
M
' *"" ""* *^* *"* "* *"*
S
'
PS
1
2 '! ^ ? 3 i 1 ^ 1 N i,
PM
""** '? ^2 SS
i
s J~ -5 w s* JB -<a' -3 v - .53 v s
pq 2; C> Ui U Pq sq O S ft.
M ^ SO O " CO t^* *O OO O\
I 1 2
244
H
O
O
S
ts
3
cq
CO
CO
EH
fc
EH
O
-
-1 V S
is * 3
41 B B V "B v
s i
ill
frl
^ <S <S vg ^ vg*
- 5 4s
a*
1
1 > 8. S,
Eg .> s> s s -P
g "S ^22 *o* c fS
B
^S <2 a,
** <, * "e
^;
' -2 '* Tl - 4p M!*!
8 v
o
o
(q ^ Q ^ tx Bp oq
^b E-" OH
PS
^ M- VO O CO t~-
H
IO 00 O\
Pk
O
ffl
H
EH
O
9
3
B V B S
& i*cj K B
g 8
H
H $ * 3
* -"S 'w
* a
*
# *
.
^ V ^ w N e* ^ G V B ^ v ^ -it
1
^s -c; > 3 ^S. 5. ^ ^. ^ * -S 4 ^ i^ 4 ? IL cs x e
*>S r>S **^ H4 5&\ 55^ "^ <^ ^*^ ^^ F o O B B ^* *^ ^L ^L
O O *cr, *>tr* "<?*s **^ TS T*< " ** t|W "* ^L ^L S S ^"^ ^
as t. S. -2 ^ S> 5 1 . -2 MS --a rs -<s v^ \g> B
*o ^o s a ^s ^3 ?&^ ?&* ?i & 1*0 ^o 1*0 t*o x^ xj s*i i^ a* a.1
BBBBBBBB BBBBBB BBBBB^B^
1
f^ fe;' Q t^
"s* '*53
^ "--.
S KI ^
8
^0 EH 0^
M Tj- \O O
W CO t^*
IO OO O\
Q
x
J
PH
-S
"Q
fl
S
."**
^
"s' "!
B V S
OQ
fe; Q S
S
CQ a?
*O H OH
"
4 vo o
n
to r^-
1C OO O\
245
X
-2
Q
2
'O
10
ft,
0\
* 9>
to
EH
" ,S S
j V B e
r*J o J 5) $
^S ^J Q v ^
1 3
1
^ 1 1
*s
a
8fc* 'O
h
i
W
CO ., O
ftg
'-s ^ > ;c **
O
o
"e ** o$ -S. ^5 ^ U
o ts QJ o^ B v >4
*Q $ ~^r c&k C^ *O *O
t 1
^
a,
EH
O
2
*^3 ^te "S* ''^S ** ***
L -w --^ ^;
(| ^' Q ^ U Bq Bq
a
^; t2
O CH
X
M <* vo o eo *>
M
TO OO
ON
I
*
s
1
246
&
ft
fc
O
|
a 1
"S v a
53 53 ^ ^
" E M
53 ^ ^
S ^s e
03 qj 55
53 y 53 cu 5t
NS 53 53
B ^ ^
5*> &j ^^ ?&
- i-ss -<s ~e
CO Co
CO CO Co X
CO CO CO
5>i ,<
s
^5
*s
jj
ft S
O ti
53 53 1
...
CO *Ci ^5
o
5>>
"53 v.
-d ^
53 63
^ -S, ^^53
co Cr cS *S
"53 >> S> i-
^ ^> " v
" 53 "si 53 1
i 1 1
y '^* ' 3H -*s'
-SS ^- ^ V S
es
VO O M CO
M
t~ 1C OO O\
1
*"
Pq
R
!^'-3~c as sS r '^^^ 53^ S^-'S^ 02
^tJ^cSOi^fl 'S'^B^^^SSS'*^
SS -^^Pci ^fiSe-'wa''^ oy 1 ^
, co .^cp^s 1 '' Sv 53"ia 1 ^,*^
i
I'slcsllt* ISIilltllll
fl
M
. . i
X ffi
e*
*** "** ^ "
"illllll tl'l
a
1
- k 1 J
^S 53 ^S
*! "
s ***
x l A 1 A
V 53 S S> B
o\ 5s
* 1
1C
o
v3 ift. *->
o* o
5 ' * g g> . '
| I i if 1 1
"Q &^ O c> Q
53 53 63 53 53 63
"to *
53 53 "e *
v '
-<J
" V 3 '* "
B5 fe;' Q ^ ^ P
C. S 8
- 63 V S
5 PQ % O EH 0^
4 \d 6 N
^O J^ 1O 00 O\
CO
247
1 00 1
oo q
~ %
i
to ,. v G
1 *
O o **"
1
41 <u S ,B
** ^ _1* fc * *, f-2
M ttB *
* J s &
8 ^ J J
* e *J * *
*
2. |L *> *> * *B V B^ V
53 ^ *
1
^ ^ " B V 3 e ^ v5> x2* i-;? 1 -S 1
1 1 i i I* y X X 3 3
* |> | e NS
8 ^8 "e ^ g^ JA,
Qs Qj t* M O O
Xi o *, -s si, a,
IJ
O
O
4 !5 H 1*1 S 5 f
..c N s
H
.
HI TJ- vo o N co r-
IO OO C\
*.. "i i r< nl -T-l
"B p^ m s-^. **
X .- g B ' |^ -g g
g "T? G B 3 j^
^^ ^*a &) ^0
Z 5 dx " "3
i 1 S $ B * t *
-*a oo O\ -r O
^ S -Ja ^ J
I1 8 1^., i s l
^^^BisiB
Sil^^flila
9 4f:f<*if1,4.JI
s f J 1 :| |
f fr! 1 1^!
i i 1 i j
.
-5 1
U
55 4) ~
J B ^ **
^j
s U
K 5
2 3 a
<1
e g 8
B v
H
* '8 '^* * -v, - *
-i 8
*
"**
go
* -X- B V B *
^3e v B *''f s *B V B
3'f'i'l;L3*l v e'S'i
^ ^ -2 -2 J J |> | -2 -2
I 5 i i 1 1 *i 'i 1 i i J J
^-oee^ts^g 4 B s !S
5 3 *v* 1"- L-~ "~ -^ ' ~~ ~~ *
S >e S * ^. ^ & &s>>o
* B H5
o> <f> B NS " " -2 -2
,T2 .IS >*><&&
II 58 i 1 8, .S,
* * * * 2 S
-a -c -C x^ -S -C a, a,
fH
O
o
1 | g J g
^ .=:
Pq V E^ ft,
M * VO O N CO
t^- XO 00 O\
a 3
1
"
^
B * W "XS "B
"B B V B 9
8 4 >S
-^ -; -c -c
*
B *8
-S ^ - i v ^
< > -2 S a, a.
*
<t
oq
^
E2
oo*
248
/.
m
-
pn
ii
o
t(
El
D PUT. ATMANE
OB PASSIVE.
odhishyamdna
artishyamdna
ekshyamdna
a
|
a
I
Si
e
a
*
1
harishyamdna
hetsyamdna
a
f
1
t
a
f
g
a
f
2
53
a
a
e
a
T3
SM
g
c
"O
Xo
Si,
2D FUT.
PABASMAI.
bodhishyat
nartishyat
1
yojayishyat
t
a
t
"a
bharishyat
a
i-C5
t
a
t
a
f
2
S,
K *
(S
a
a
E-l 00
9
O
a
'.
a
a
a
t
-0
f
a
t
a
t
N3
e
t
S,
Q
^
a
a*
If
^
a
e
e
>g
a
a
v^
e
^
E
3
Cr
?
^s
a
53
^>
c
a
a
*C*
^
E
^3
5j
a
a
S 2
J
^
g
*B
|
a*
a
"^3
Ik
&
"O
x
to
Si,
a
H .
&>
e
^
<3
>
a
a
p
a
e
P to
EH GO
jj
I
|
a
J
Si
r
1
a
a
r
a
!*<
5
C
s
a
5
a
"<8
a
1
g
18
a
'w
M
&
>o
o
XJ
a.
Hg
1
-a
x a
"1
^
Xi
xs
-^
to
&
5?
r^
5i
j^
E
v
1
1
^
'I
i
J-
'31
1
ts
1
~o
a
"a
h
i
"O
*S
Si,
1 a
bubudhdna
a
j
I
a
didiMna
1
vividdna
babhrdna
bibhiddna
e
i
J
a
a
I
1
V)
EH M
a
J
2
<jo
g
f
Q
;8
2
S
">
CO
&, 2
PS j
^ PH
1
8
O
1
a
1
.a
'
"CS
3
a
e
S
t
to
E
O -u
< H
5
buddhava
nrittavat
nartitava
dishtavat
j
viditavat
bhritavat
bhinnava
1
tatavat
"a
6
a
I
H
a
8
e -S
a
e
a
a
9
nl
? 1
s
: "st
1
'C.
.8
a
e
_a
pi
iC
a' s
s
i>
&
"O
S
'
a
a.
e
N
e
a
PEES.
PASSIVE.
t
f
8
f
nrityamdn
difyamdna
a
S 1
5M
a
e
f
bhriyamdn
bhidyamdn
a
1
tanyamdna
puyamdna
a
<s
PEES.
ATMANE.
bodhamdn
i
a
M
1
disamdna
a
1
i
bibhrdna
bhinddna
1
tanvdna
e
1
. a
~j i.
Ed <j
g 5
"a
1
"CS
"a
1
1
e
1
"a
E
-S
1
e*
a
a
a
"a
1
o
o
1
1
q
2J
^
1'
1
"0
1
35
m
~
4
vo
o
M
N
CO
*^
V)
oo
CN
oi
S
-fi
>c
1
c
V
a,
g
J
T3
a
s
I
^
o.
1
p.
N3
s
s^
o
.
*
a
"O
CONJUGATION OP THE YEKB ^ a*, ' TO BE/ 249
PARASMAI-PADA (see 327).
584. Although this root belongs to cl. 2, its inflexion is exhibited here, both
because it is sometimes used as an auxiliary, and because it is desirable to study
its inflexion together with that of the other substantive verb *^bhu, ' to be ' (585),
which supplies many of the tenses in which "SR^ is defective. Two other roots are
sometimes employed as substantive verbs, with the sense ' to be/ viz. WT cl. i, 'to
stand ' (see 269, 587), and ^IT^ cl. 2, ' to sit' (see 317. a). Indeed, the root ^l^ as,
here inflected, is probably only an abbreviation of ^TT^ as.
The cognate languages have two roots similar to the Sanskrit for the substantive
verb to be.' Cf. <f>i> and e<7 in Greek, es (sum) and/a (fui) in Latin ; and observe
how the different parts of the Sanskrit verbs correspond to the Greek and Latin ;
thus, asmi, asi, asti; e/xp, coW, ear/; sum, es, est. Cf. also santi with sunt;
dstam, dstdm, with yvrov, >?OT>JV ; dsma, dsta, dsan, with ^/xcv, ^crre, ^aav, &c.
Present, ' I am.' Potential, ' I may be/ &c.
PERS. SING. DUAL. PLURAL.
ist,
^1^ sthas W stha
3rd, ^li% asti W* stas ^rf^T santi
SING. DUAL. PLUBAL.
sydva **ciH sydma
sydtam <*flff sydt a
Imperfect, * I was/ Imperative, ' Let me be/
sam vii*<f dsva ^THcR a'sma
dsis
asarai ^nfR asdva vj^i*! asdma
astu WT* s#rfm ^f santu
Perfect *, * I have been/ &c.
PARASMAI. ATMANE.
dse I (Vt q 5 dsivahe SH t f*i 5 dsimahe
dsdthe ^nftraf dsidhve
Obs. ^The root as, 'to be,' has no Derivative forms, and only two Participles,
viz. ^Ti^saf, Pres. Par., SJT^T sa'na, Pres. A'tm. (see 524, 526). The Special tenses
have an A'tmane-pada, which is not used unless the root is compounded with
prepositions. In this Pada 7 h is substituted for the root in ist sing. Pres., and
^s is dropped before dh in 2nd pi.; thus, Pres. he, se, ste; stake, sdthe, sate:
smahe, dhve, sate: Impf. dsi, dsthds, dsta; dsvahi, dsdthdm, dsdtdm; dsmahi, ddhvam,
dsata: Pot. s{ya, sithds, sita; stvahi, siydthdm, siydtdm; simahi, sfdhvam, siran:
Impv. asai, sva, stdm; asdvahai,sdthdm,sdtdm; asdmahni,dhvam,satdm: 866327.
* The Perfect of as is not used by itself, but is employed in forming the Perfect
of Causals and some other verbs, see 385, 490 ; in which case the Atmane may be
used. The other tenses of as are wanting, and are supplied from bhu at 585.-
K k
INFLEXION OP THE STEM OF VERBS.
GROUP I. CLASS I.
EXAMPLES OF PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE FIRST CLASS,
EXPLAINED AT 261.
585. Root v^bhu. Infin. ^faj^ bhavitum, 'to be' or 'become.'
PARASMAI-PADA. Present Tense, ' I am' or ' I become.'
SING. DUAL. PLUBAL.
bhavdmi Hqiq^ bhavdvas Hu*i^r bhavdmas
Hqvt^ bhavathas HTT bhavatha
PEB8.
ISt,
2nd,
3rd,
avas
bhavati
^W^H^ abhavam
WT^T abhavas
Wf^ abhavat
HTf^ bhaveyam
bhaves
>T^TI^ bhavatas
Imperfect, 'I was.'
abhavdva
abhavatam
abhavatam
Hffn bhavanti
Potential, ' I may be.'
bhaveva
avetam
bhavetdm
Imperative, * Let me be.'
bhavdni HTR 1 bhavdva
bhava VRTT*^ bhavatam
bhavatu H^nr*^ bhavatam
Perfect, ' I have been,' ' I was.'
babhuva "^jf^ babhuviva
babhuvitha ^OWiaW babhuvathus
bhavema
bhaveta
bhaveyus
bhavdma
bhavatu
bhavantu
babhuvima
babhuva
"3*j$ babhuva
^^S59*l babhuvatus
"^S^( babhuvus
First Future, ' I shall or will be.'
bhavitdsmi ^P<Tifl*5ft^ bhavitdsvas
bhavitdsi >?f^lTT^I^ bhavitdsthas
bhavitd lfcraTM bhavitdrau
bhavitdsmas
bhavitdstha
bhavitdras
Second Future, * I shall or will be.'
bhavishydmi ^f'l'm^^ bhavishydvas Hf^^TR^ bhavishydmas
bhavishyasi ^Pq^M^t^ bhavishyathas ifVitSf bhavishyatha
bhavishyati HlVtMrt^ bhavishyatas HrJM|frf bhavishyanti
CONJUGATION OP VERBS. GROUP I. CLASS I. 251
Aorist, 'I was' or ' had been/ &c.
abhuvam ^^ abhuva ^TJJH abhuma
^T^ abhus ^*Jj^ abhutam *r$Jf abhuta
abhutam
Precative or Benedictive, * May I be/
bMydsam >J*il^ bhuydsva *J*Tn3R bhuydsma
bhuydstam ^-HIW bhuydsta
bhuydstam
Conditional, (If) * I should be/
abhavishyam ^wf^^n^ 1 abhavishydva ^wf^qro abhavishydma
abhavishyas ^W%nr^ abhavishyatam ^Mf^"Bnf abhavishyata
abhavishyatam wfew|'{ abhavishyan
586. ATMANE-PADA. Present Tense, * I am/ &c.
H^ 6Aae H5TR? bhavdvahe *mw\ bhavdmahe
bhavase >?%^ bhavethe >f^5^ bhavadhve
bhavate Hqflf bhavete *T^?T bhavante
Imperfect, * I was. 5
abhave W^l^fif: abhavdvahi ^W^THf^ abhavdmahi
abhavathds ^M^^TW abhavethdm 'SM^SelH abhavadhvam
abhavata ^MTrTT abhavetdm 'W^T^jf abhavanta
Potential, * I may be/ &c.
bhaveya >?Wf% bhavevahi W^ff^ bhavemahi
bhavethds H^^n^TP^ bhaveydthdm JT^Ifl^ bhavedhvam
bhaveta >f^IITin^ bhaveydtdm H^^ bhaveran
Imperative, ' Let me be.'
bhavai HTR^ bhavdvahai H^fT*^ bhavdmahai
bhavasva H^ 1 ^!^ bhavethdm Hi*s|*^ bhavadhvam
bhavatdm H^iTf bhavetdm
Perfect, ' I have been/ ' I was/ &c.
babhuve ^}T*t*t^ babhuvivahe ^jf^Hi babhuvimahe
babhuvishe Wgim babhuvdthe 3*$f3&l (%) babhuvidhve
babhuvdte ^^j^ babh&ire
K k 2
252 CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP I. CLASS I.
First Future, ' I shall or will be/ &c.
bkavitdhe *Tf%7Tn3% bhavitdsvahe vrfTfflW^ bhavitdsmahe
bhavitdse HfalTPHTM bhavitdsdthe HftTiTT^ bhavitddhve
bhavitd VTiVfllU bhavitdrau Tf<crrK^ bhavitdras
Second Future, * I shall or will be/ &c.
>Tfar bhavishye >?flIN^ bhavishydvahe >Tf=rflH^ bhavishydmahe
bhavishyase kfVwixf bhavishyethe ttf^^t&t bhavishyadhve
bhavishyate *Tf^5trf bhavishyete Hfq^Ht bhavishyante
Aorist, 'I was* or 'had been/ &c.
abhavishi ^wfr^ll? abhavishvahi ^Mfcjmf^ abhavishmahi
abhavishthds '^wfam'tflH abhavishdthdm WTfaKW (<p^) abhavidhvam
abhavishta ^wf^TUT^ abhavishdtdm ^Mf^^ff abhavishata
Precative or Benedictive, ' I wish I may be/
a TffM)e|fi5 bhavisMvahi ^f^tTf^ bhavisMmahi
bhavisMsJitJids >rfl fl M I wi** v bhavishtydsthdm Vff^^tlP^(^^) bhavisMdhvam
bhavishfahta *rfMl<4ltcfl^ bhavishiydstdm Hf^f^T^ bhavishiran
Conditional, (If) ' I should be/ &c.
abhavishye ^THhrwii*!!^ abhavishydvahi ^wftr'il*rfl5 abhavishydmahi
abhavishyathds ^wfawfall^ abhavishyethdm ^THf^tqjgjf abhavishyadhvam
abhavishyata ^wf^^inf^ abhivishyetdm ^SWfJ' l *('ff abhavishyanta
Passive (461), Pres. ^, >j^, &c.; ^4or. 3rc? ww^. (475) ^wrfa.
Causal (479), Pre. JTR^rftr, nmftr, &c.; ^4or. (492) ^SRtn^, &c.
Desiderative form of Causal (497) f^rrefreTfa, &c. Desiderative
(498), Pra?. ^>J5TftT, f^ftr, &c. Frequentative (507), Pro?, w^,
^t>fVrT or wfar^fT*. Participles, Pre*. H^ (524) ; P*^ Pa**. )jjfr
(531); Part Iwrfec/. ^T (55^), -U (559); ^- -Pa**- >^Tf^ (569),
wto (570), >"^r or >^ (571).
Obs. The following examples are given in the order of their final letters.
587. Root ^n (special stem fro, 269, 269. a). 7/j/! *vj|g^ * to
stand.' Par. and Atm. Pre*. frrerfir, froftr, fTTFfiT ;
Atm. fn^, fjre%, fdrf ;
Tflf^, 'Hrria^, &C. Atm. ^rflTF, &C.
?^, &c. Atm. finni,
, &c. /mpv. fireTfT, fir?, f7r?g ; fnirr4, &c. Atm. fill,
, &c. Per/". TT^ (373), fffw?i or
* These Derivative verbs will be inflected at full at 703, 705, 706, 707.
CONJUGATION OP VERBS. GROUP I. CLASS I. 253
, TH?J, ^- A'tm.
Put. ^THTrw, ^inniiT, &c.
A'tm. wnrrt , WMiti, &c. 2c? .PW. tmi^ifa, wr^rfir, wn*ifrf, &c.
Atm. ^IT^, wi^u, mu-MTT, &c. Aor. (438) srprr^, ^>w*(, ^nwii^;
- A'tm. (438.6?, 421.6?)
. Prec. w^nfl 1 *^, Wiir^, &c. A'tm.
&c. Cond. ^rwr^CT^, ^IWIW^, &c. A'tm. ^STWI^, ^r?\j||j|^, &c.
Pass., Pres. ^ft?[ (465) ; Aor. yd sing, ^r^nftr. Caus., Pres. wm-
, -^; Aor. ^TfF%^, ^rfrffiff^. Des. friamifir, &c. Freq. TOtv or
or rTTWTftr. Part., Pres. 1wi^(i4i. Obs. i); Past Pass, fpnr;
Past Indecl. f^FSTT, -WPT, -TO ; Put. Pass, ^zffinn, WPfhr, wq.
588. Root m (special stem fnr, 269). Inf. TTTipJ ' to smell/
Par. Pres. fwsrrft, ftnrftr, &c. Impf. ^rftnr^, ^rftnra[, &c. Pot.
w^, &c. /mpv. ftnnfisr (58), ftnr, &c. Per/! *r^ (373),
or nm, rw ; fftR, TJT^, nr^; *fftnr, ra, wg^. i
r, &c. 2nd Fut. mwif'T, Tn^ifti, &c. ^4or. (438)
, wimr, ^r^. Or by 433,
. Prec. Trranr^, mi^, &c. Or m*^, &c. Cond.
, &c. Pass., Pres. 1TR (465. a) ; Aor. yd sing, ^nnftr. Caus.,
; Aor. ^rfiUM^ or ^Hirfsm 1 ^. Des. fsmnnf*?. Freq.
or ^iPH. Part., Pres. fafi^; P*^ Pa5*. mw or uro ;
Past Indecl. TITraiT, -TTR ; Fut. Pass. Mlridj, Tmtft^T, WT.
589. Root TTT (special stem fire, 269). //". m^ ' to drink.' Par.
Pres. fwfa, ftreftr, &c. Imj9/. ^rfw^, ^rftl^;, &c. Pot.
, &c. Im/w. fM^ifn, ftre, &c. Per/". (373) T Hff, ^fq| or
''rf're, ^^^, "T 1 ^ ; "T^m, mi, mj^. i*^ Fut. Tnrrfer, "Tunftr, &c.
Fut. TTT^nfr, m^r, &c. ^for. (438) ^TTT^, wn^, ^rn^; ^?TIT^,
rtniT, ^?TTTIT, ^^. Prec. ^n^, ^HT^, &c. Co we?.
, &c. Pass., Pres. iffo (465) ; Aor. yd sing.
(475). Caus., Pres. qm^ifn, -^ ; Aor. ^jxrhP^ (493. e). Des.
Freq. mft^, "miffa or tnmfR. Part., Pre*. ftm^; Pa*^ Pfl*5. T^iT (533. ^) ;
Indecl. 'crtr^T, -TTO; PM^. Pa**. tnTi^T, mftI, *R.
590. Root f*f (special stem nT, 263). 7w/*. %g^ ' to conquer.' Par.*
* fT is not generally used in the A'tmane, excepting with the prepositions vi or
para. See 786.
254 CONJUGATION OF VEEBS. GROUP I. CLASS I.
Pres.
. Impf.
. Pot.
J. Per/, f if iTHT (368, 3 74. 6), ftprfira 1 or f 5J7TO, f *? JTTO ; ftffr^ (374),
Fut. ^nrftR, ^TTT%, %HT ;
ill, ^ _ _C
. 2nd Fut. W^TTO,
WOTO, ^^iftf. Aor.
(420),
. Free,
. Cond.
ff, 'sr^tii^. Pass., Pres. afft, &c. ; Aor.
yd sing. ''Hinf'T. Caus., Pres. 'sntrmf'T : Aor. ^rsftsni^. Des. ftnft^rfH .
Freq. HHl*, ^^fn or ^nftfr. Part, Pres. ipn^; Past Pass, fwif;
Past Indecl. ftTRT, -ftrm; Fut. Pass. ^inqr r Wrafa, ^5 or fiTW or nI
(571, 572).
a. Like ff may be conjugated rt. Inf. ?hp^ * to lead.' But the
Causal is tTRTnfir; Caus., Aor. ^nrfapn^; Des. F^jftmfa. In Epic
poetry the Perfect is sometimes tfmmu for frpTHT, and the 2nd Fut.
TjfamifH for %tqif*i (especially when preceded by the prep. wr).
591. Root far (special stem wn). Inf. wg^ f to smile/ Xtm.
Pres. ^R^, WET^, &c. Jmjo/*. ^^nr, ^f9?*|vjf^, &c. Pot.
&c. Impv. 9^, wra", &c. Per/. (374. e) ftfTR*
or -
ist Fut. WOT%, T^HTO, &c. 2nd Fut. &$, ^^, &c. Aor.
Free. FTEftir, &c. Cond. 'ywu^, &c. Pass., Pres. ^ftq ; ^4or. 3rc? sing.
siwifl. Caus., Pre^. ^RTTiTfiT or wmmfn ; ^4or. ^rftnini^ or
Des. rwH|^. Freq. ^*ift, ^^fk or ^nf^ftT. Part., Pres.
Past Pass, ftmr; Past Indecl. Pmni, -fww ; .F^. Paw.
592. Root "5 (special stem $%). Inf. ^^ 'to run.' Par. Pre*.
f^r. Im/?/.
(58), "5^, &c.
(3^9), fF^: (374-^7),
. 2nd Fut. TjfrRITfa, ^iftr, &c. Aor.
* When is prefixed, the Perfect is f^ft?fw against 70
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP 1. CLASS I. 255
(440- ),
Prec. MT*^, "5^1'^, &c. Cowef. <('^u|^. Pass.,
Pres. ITI ; Aor. yrd sing. ^rjrfa. Caus., Pres. N4ufq ; ^or. agfr'^
or ^ff- Des. gtfflfa. Freq. ^5^> ^jtf** or ^Ttfa. Part.,
Pres. "5; Past Pass, ^ff ; Past Indecl. ^T, -^w ; Fut. Pass.
'5T g * or IE*!'
. Like may be conjugated ^ (sometimes written ^). Jn/V
to flow.'
593. Root 3 (special stem *r^). Inf. %fa * to seize,' * to take/
Par. and Atm. Pres. ^TTfo. Atm. ^, ?T^, ^JT ; ^LN^, &c. Impf-
&c. Pot. ^bl^. Atm. ^, ^.vii^, &c. Impv. ^rj% (58), ^, &c.
A'tm. -^, ^^, &c. Perf. ^TT, ^ (370. a),
or rfgf , ^rff^. ist Fut. ^1%. ^tm. ^ll|, ^T^, &c.
ind Fut. ^ftTqrfr. Atm. ^ft^, ^fb^, &c. Aor.
Prec. f^ura^. ^itm. ^yfa, $*fi81^, &c. Cond. TS^ftW^. Atm.
, &c. Pass., Pres. fg^i; Aor. yd sing.
Caus., Pres. ^TtrnftT, -^ ; Aor. ^fl^{. Des. ftf^frftr, -If. Freq.
^fjjit, sT^T^fl or i?O^OfT or Ttfi^ijlf*! or fvt^f^ or fft- or irffH.
Part, Pres. ^0^; Pass. f^THTO; Past Pass. ^Tf; Past Indecl. ^T,
-fW ; Fut. Pass. ^T, ^tW^hT, ^T.
594. Root 59T (special stem ^RT). /^ ^1*1 * * remember.' Par.
and ^tm. Pres. FTtlft. ^tm. ^TT. Impf. 'STPR^, W<^, &c.
Atm. ^swt. Pot. T&%T&{. Kim. W^T, &c. Impv. wrf% (58).
, &c. Perf' flWIt, HW^ (37- a )j
. Atm. *m,
or -ft^", ?W?fi. ist Fut. Wrflfw.
Atm. ^RHT^. ind Fut. wfJLilf*< . Atm. wft^. Aor. ^PPmi^, &c.
(see 5 at 593). Atm. ^refffa, *^v||^ (see 5 at 593). Prec.
Atm. ^pfar or wf^H. Cond. ^wfii^. Atm. ^rwf^. Pass.,
W^; yior. 3rrf siw^. ^Rrft. Caus., Pres. ViK^TfH , -*J; Aor.
Des. ^f5. Freq. tuwtf, wrwfH or mfHtflftr. Part., Pres. wrj^; Past
Pass. ?HTT ; Past Indecl. ^TRT, -9|W ; J'W. Pa**. Fl^'cr, m^nifa, WT.
595. Root % (special stem 5^1). Inf. <$\#\ 'to call.' Par. and
Atm. Pres. snuftr. Atm. 3^. Impf. sn^*!*^ &c. Atm.
256 CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP 1. CLASS I.
Pot. ^Tk*^ Atm. 3^ir. Impv. 3^rfa. A'tm. 5^. Per/. (373. )
ifav| or *5fhl 3 ^T?r
Aim. ^, 3|fVre
or -fa, *J|f^T. i*/ Fut. dfTHTftT. Atm. ^nn|. 2wd Fut.
. (438. c)
Or 'w^'Tf^ (434),
^1^154^, ^?3^i^nr. free.
Xtm. ^s^. Pass.
(465. c); ^(or. 3rc? *m^. ^ifq or shifts or ^isp 1 or ^qrrer. 2nd Fut.
^T^Tff or 3^Tf*rsi7f (474. a). Caus., Pres. 3fR^fn (483. b) ; ^4or. *n{^.
Des. ^f^rfir, ^f^. Freq. 'sfJf^, ^rf*T or aft^ftr. Part., Pres.
SpfiT ; Pass. ^MHH ; Past Pass, ^ff ; Past Indecl. ^RT, -^T ; Fut.
Pass. 3TTi!^r, <^l'll^, %^T.
a. T{ (special stem TTR, 368), Inf. imp c to sing/ follows the analogy
of %, the final diphthong being changed to a before ah 1 terminations
beginning with t or s. Pres. TFRrfa. Impf. ^PTPtR, &c. Pot.
THiuftj. Per/. (373. d) IT^j ^if'T'Er or PTR, P^ ; WfTW,
; ^rftw, wr, 5i^. i*# Fut. innfw. 2wc? FM/. Tn^nftr. Aor.
(433) ^Tlf^H^, ^TTral^, ^TTnftc^; ^RTfa^, ^THTftl^'T
. Prec. ^nw (451). Cond. ^
Pass. Tfh^ (465) ; Aor. yd sing. ^Frfa. Caus., Pres. *nwf*T (483) ;
Aor. ^mtntpr. Des. fsTimnfiT. Freq. ^l^, sTFrfa or iTFTTftr. Part.,
Pre. *TT*Ti^; Pa**. jfttfTR ; Pa*/ Pass, jftrr ; Pa*/ IndecL jftr^T, -TR ;
Fw/. Pa**. TtiT^T, TR^T, ^11.
b. Like T^ may be conjugated ^ 'to be weary ;' ^ ' to meditate ;'
f^ 'to fade;' and all other roots in ai (see 268).
c. Root tj^ (special stem ire). Inf. TT^TH ' to cook/ Par. and Atm.
Pre*. t^rfa. Atm. tj^. Impf. ^re^, ^T^^, &c. j^tm. ^S[T|^.
Pot. ire*TT, ^^(, &c. Xtm. tren. Impv. trgrfVf, tR, &c. Xtm. q4.
Per/. MMM or tixre, m\<M or ^f^l (370. c?),
ist Fut. q^iTftR. A'tm. ^^1. 2nd Fut.
. (420. e) 'snrrej*, ^rtrr^^, ^miHflf^;
. Atm. ^rxrf^, ^tjoFvn^
ITSBIJT, ^nrsfir. Prec.
Cond. nqHH. Aim. ^Ttj^. Pass., Pres. xpq ; Impf.
Aor. yrd sing. ^xnf^. Caus., Pres. qr^nnfa, HT^^ ; Aor.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP I. CLASS I. 257
Des. ftfrrejlfa, fturgf. Freq. TTtrar, T TRfo7 or TirT^ftr. Part., Pres.
; A'tm. TnmrJT ; Pass.TFWW, Past Pass. V% (548) ; Past IndecL
l, -Tar ; Fut. Pass, XT^T, tj^Rfa, KTT^T or XJPR (574).
d. Root trr^ (special stem tn^). Inf. ^nf^[ ' to ask/ Par. and
Atm. Pres. tn^Tft. ^tm. ifre. Impf. 4i*4^, ^nir^, &c. Atm.
. Pot. TIT^T^, *n^, &c. ^tm. in^. Impv. *rnsrifa, irre, &c.
. Perf. *nrr^, wrf^, *nrre;
Atm. 'H^H, Tiin
wf^. ist Fut. inf^inftR. Atm.
2nd Fut. ^nf^anftr. ^tm. *nfa*i. Aor. (427)
Xtm.
. Prec. MWW*. Aim.
. Pass., Pres. >n^. Caus., Pres.
Des. fiRTfsnnfiT, -^. Freq. Ulill'eii, TniTf^T (yrd sing.
. Part., Pres. ifr^; Atm. zn'giTR; Past Pass. ^nf^iT ; Past
Indecl. tiif^WT; -fw#. Pass. ^nf^Tf^l, Tn^R^hr, zrraT.
e. Root ^^ (special stem ^ftl). Inf. sftf^fijft c to grieve.' Par.
(Ep. rarely ^tm.) Pres. ^fr^rfa. Impf. ^fN^, ^T^fl^, &c. Pot.
, &c. 7mj9v. TffanfJT, ^ft^, &c. Perf.
2nd Fut. ^ftf^anfff. ^4or. (437.
Prec. n^ii^^. Cond. SH^itf^^^. Pass., Pres. 'n^ ; Aor. yrd sing.
r. Caus., Pres. ^iN^nf'T; ^lor. t ^^^- Des. ^jfa^ifa or
. Freq. ^fl^, 1 S[f^f^ ($rd sing, yfttffa). Part., Pres.
; Pass. ^SJJTR; Past Pass. ^f^H and ^ftf^TT; Past Indecl.
or ^ftf^i^T, -^E( ; Fut. Pass. 5ftf?fiT*q, 3[rH^rhT, ^ft^T.
596. Root iqr. Inf. d$^ ' to abandon/ * to quit/ Par.
^Fnfi^, ^nqir^, &c. Po/. ?m^.
&c. Perf. Trurnr, TTwftre or HW*^ (370. a 7 ), WWTH;
Trosr?^; ir?irr, TTWIT, rfijj^. is/ Fut. iq^in^r. awe?
Aor. (422, 296) ^nmsp^, ^Twial)^, ^rurreffa^; ^TIMI
^WfT^f, ^fiqru, Mjmw^. Prec. Aa<|lfl^. Cond. 'Sfiqu^, &c. Pass.,
Pres. miw ; Aor. yd sing, ^nmftr. Caus,, Pres. wrwrrrft; Aor. ^rfrf-
Des. finqT^lftr. Freq. HTW^, ifiwfw or fTTWftf*T. Part., Pres.
Pass, w^; Pas/ Indecl. HfiiRT, -WIT; ^</. Pass.
(573)-
Ll
258 CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP I. CLASS I.
597. Root an^. Inf. Tj&t^ ' to sacrifice,' ' to worship.' Par. and
Aim. Pres. Trsnfo. ^tm. n^. Impf. ^rqf^, 'snnr^, &c. Kim. ^nm.
Pot. H*m(. Kim. ifa. Impv. xnuftr, ^HT, &c. Kim. nil. Per/ 1 .
(375- ) *> ^ftni or ^ftni or ^r? (297),
. ist Fut. T&tfm (403). Atm. TOT^- 2nd Fut.
(403). Kim. TTB^. ,4or. (422) ssmuij*
. Kim.
. Free.
Xtm. TJ^T(. Cond. ^nr^i^. ^tm. ^R^. Pass., Pres. ^i*r (471);
Impf. ^^ (251. a) ; Aor. yrd sing, 'snrrfo. Caus., Pres.
Aor. >*\3[q*\*\. Des. foVHjifa, -%. Freq. ^l?!^, ^nif^R or
Part., Pres. ^T5f^; Kim. *H*iM ; P55. ^mn ; P5/ Pas. ^? ; Past
Indecl. ^r, -^rif ; Fut. Pass. tn?T, -Miffl*T, ^n?T or 7n?r .
a. Root ^ (special stem wsf, 270. d). Inf. W^\ ' to adhere.' Par.
Pres. *rnfa*.
, &c. 2w<? Pw#. *i*Hlfa, &c. Aor. ^r^T^^, -^^(, -"^fh^;
HT^; ^T^f^r, SSSM, ^r^fw^. Prec. ^n?n^, &c.
Cond. ^wia^r*^, &c. Pass., Pres. ^T. Caus., Pres. y^lfn; ^4or.
. Des. f%H^rftr, &c. Freq. THraw, TTTOf^T. Part., Pre*.
; Pa**. 'U^HM ; Past Pass. ^R ; Past Indecl. W&X or ^liT, -WyQ ;
^. Pass, tfwar, yd1^, ^"T or irsq.
b. Root ^T^ (special stem sfrif) . Jw/". aVfHiJ*^ ' to shine.' Atm. (and
Par. in Aor.) Pres. sfiff. Impf. ^ren^. Pot. Jstift. Impv. ?ft^. Perf.
(3^3- a )> -fin*, -H ; f^^rri 1 ^, -ilT^, -1TTH ; F^^frfHf , -flW, -fift.
Fut. ^fririi^. 2nd Fut. sKfiro. Aor. ^reftfirf^,
n^, -rHmwi^j -fir^rf^, -fni^[, -ITRTT. Par.
; -ITR, -WIT^, rfril*^; -efT*?, -WIT, -ifi^. Prec. iftfjT^ftT.
T. Pass., Pres. ^w; ^4or. yd sing, ^reftfrr. Caus., Pre*.
; Aor. ^rf^^lfT. Des. f^fjfw^ or f^ftf?r^. Freq. ^W, ^tflfrfT
or ^arflfiT. Part., Pres. sftfnTT*T ; Past Pass. ^firiT or srtfwiT ; Past
Indecl. ^frtHI or ^fki^T, -^W ; jPw/. Pa**, ^nfrirt
c. Root^. Inf. nfiT^T * to fall.' Par. Pres.
Pot. TffiinT. Jmjw. qinfR. Perf. WH or qx^ (368),
* The final .;' is sometimes incorrectly doubled (Pres.
&c.); but the root must not, therefore, be confounded with an uncommon root
VE5T, meaning 'to go,' 'to move,' also cl. i, and making tinUfT; &c.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP I. CLASS I. 259
; qfim, w, qp(. ist Put. qfinrrfa?. 2nd Put.
Aor. ^rqrm (441), ^MH*(, ^mi^; ^?tnn^, ^nnriM v , ^nnnn^;
Prec. Twnw. Cond. ^mfTTow. Pass., Pres.
TJiq; /m/?/". ^rqw; Aor. yd sing. ^nfff. Caus., Pre*. tfinnfsRr, tiTnj
and tjnnnfa, tffinfr ; Aor. ^TtrtaffJT. Des. fqqfiimftl or fqwrfr. Freq.
or TnTtarrfrfa. Part., Pres. iTif^; Pass.
. trfHir; Past Indecl. qflfi^T, -*nT ; Fut. Pass.
or trw.
598. Root ^ (special stem ^rf). /w/ 1 . ^fHgT ' to be/ * to exist/
Kim. (and optionally Par. in 2nd Fut., Aor., and Cond., when it
rejects i). Pres. Tff. /mp/. ^R^'. Po/. qini. Im/?t7. ^. Per/".
ist Fut.
, -ftnr, -fff^w. Par.
, -WIT'T, -ITiTP^; -WTH, -iHT, -H^. Prec. ^fff^Nf.
or ^st*r. Pass., Pres. ^w. Caus., Pres. ^?hnf*T;
or ^R^f JT. Des. fcrefjRi or (V<JrHlfa. Freq. "^rr
or ^t^Ftfir. Part., Pres. ^tTR ; Past Pass. ^ ; Past Indecl. qfffr
or ^T, -^w; Fut. Pass. ^ffflT^T, 'qfrfN, ^W.
599. Root ^. /w/ 1 . ^f^T 'to speak/ Par. Pres. ^rfa. Impf.
, &c. Po/. ^^ /m^v. ^iftr. Per/! (375. c)
f?T^, "3!^^^, 31^^'^ ; "gif^r, "3>^, Jig^. i*^ Fut.
, &c. 2nd Fut. qf^anfi?, ^f^arftj, &c. Aor. (428)
. Prec. 7&WH, '<f?TR(, &c. Oow^. ^?^f^orT 5 ^raft^ai^, &c. Pass.,
Pre*. ^ (47i)> -dor. yrd sing. ^Rif^. Caus., Pres. qi^JJlfr ; -4or.
- ^^1'(^ x . Des. f^^f^rfT, -^f. Freq. wnrd, ^NP^H or ^r^ftr. Part.,
Pres. 'q^; Pa**. ^|HM ; Past Pass, ^f^ir (543) ; Past Indecl. ^FIT,
-TU; Fut. Pass. ^TI*T, ^fhr, qrer or TST.
a. Root ?RJ (special stem wt%, 270). //". ^T 'to sink.' Par.
Pre*. ^lt^Tf*T. Impf. iH"l<}H. Pot. ?rt^PT. /m/w. ^ft^rftT. Per/,
^T' (375- e ) r "Wi "T^ ; irf^ ^g^> ^3^ ; ^ f ^> ^ 5
ist Fut. winfat. 2nd Fut. tfWTfa. Aor. ^fl<M (436, 437),
T^IHT, ^iti^ifi^; 1 ?w^w, ^?^TT, ^w^. Prec.
. Pass., Pre*. ^fg 1 ; ^4or. 3rc? *m^. ^wf^. Caus., Pre*.
; Aor. ^r^q^. Des. ftmitufr. Freq. m^Era 1 , ^i^Oa or
f. Part., Pre*. ^1^; Pa*^ Pas*. ^^ (540); Past Indecl.
; Fut. Pass. *TW*T, *^fl*l, ^re.
L 1 2
260 CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP I. CLASS I.
b. Root ^V (special stem ^0). Inf. ^fjj* ' to increase.'
(and Par. in Fut., Cond., and Aor.) Pres. ^v. Impf.
&c. Pot. ^v*r. Impv. %, ^*Nr, &c. Pevf. nj>T,
^ftrat, ?^jw, ^JVTW; ^ftml, *n|fa&*, ^fvt. ist Fut.
Par. ^f$iTT%. 2wd .Ftt. siftro. Par. ^ifa.
Par.
^V^. Prec. ^fv^ft^. Cbwrf. ^T^fw. Par. ^RW^, ^TWW^, &c.
Pass., Pres. ^ufr ; Impf. ^wi ; Aor. yd sing. ^Trfv. Caus., Pres.
fyr^ and ^rw^^. Des. f^v^, fojwrfa. Freq.
or ^ihpftfir. Part., Pres. ^RPT ; Pass. ^m^T ; Past
Pass, ^s ; Past Indecl. ^fvi^T, fi(T, -^ ; J'wf . Pa*. sdhfta, ^fvn^T, ^T.
600. Root irw. /^/*. ^f> 'to increase/ *to flourish/ Aim.
Pres. u^, ^^, &c. Impf.
, &c. Per/. (385)
iff; ^rra^t, ?JVT^|, ^n^frst. ist Fut.
2nd Fut. ufatft. Aor. ^fvf^ (427.*, 251), ^ftre%
^; ^fij^rf^, ^fvrr^, ^fv^u. Free.
(251). Pass. THfl; ^4or. 3rc? *in^r. iH\r. Caus., Pres.
. ^v^ (494). Des. uf^\R (500. b). Part., Pres.
Pass. TjfifiT ; Pfl^ I/z^ec/. uf\J3T, -1J1 ; -Fw/. P*. ^fVrRT,
a. Root in^. 7/j/". TTRT^'to burn.' Par. and Aim. Pres.
Xtm. (Ti?. Impf. WT^. Atm. ^Irf^. Pot.
r, n^, &c. Atm. TT^. Perf. inrrDr or TTITT, mr^ or
. ist Fut. TrwiftR, &c, &tm. wmt, &c.
(Ep. also frftranfir). Atm. rrt^. Aor. ^Him
. Atm.
Prec. dmmH. ^itm. Tptfhl. Cbwc?. ^Tfit^qJT. j^tm. 1 5nn. Pass.,
Pres. cTO; /m/?/". ^nm; ^4or. yd sing, ^rmftr. Caus., Pre.
?rnm ; Aor. 'fl Hi Him, ^TTftrr^. Des. finr^riffr, finr 1 ^. Freq. mn
or TTTTHfifa. Part., Pres. mn^; Kim. Trw^T ; Pfl55. rTOIHR ; Past
Pass. TCH', Past Indecl. 7T7TT, -FOi; -F^^. P*. iTTnq, TTtpft^T, 1TO.
601. Root 3$>T N (270. e). Iw/. c5W^ ' to take.' Atm. Pre*. 75^,
. Po/.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP I. CLASS I. 261
. Impv. C?M
. Per/. &* (375. a),
3rf&. ist Fut. esant (409), Tjanft, ojan, &c.
(299), cAiUU), &c. ^4or. ^Tc3fS (420, 299), ^?5WT^ (298),
. Prec.
f, &c. Cond. ^pjwf, &c. Pass., Pres.
Aor. ^Tc5f^r, ^r<?an^ 3 ^f5Tf (475) or ^r<9f?, &c. Caus., Pres.
?ITftf , &c. ; Aor, ^f5o4**W. Des. fc5^ (503)- Freq.
Part., Pres. tSHWR ; P*^ Pass. cSV ; Past Indecl.
. Like <5>T is conjugated T*? (with prep, ^n), ^TRW^ ' to begin/
602. Root Ji^ (special stem *ra[, 270). Inf. *\*$*\ 'to go/ Par.
Pres. JT33[Tfa, Trafa, 7 Ta[f7T; TSTR^, 'l-cdivi^, T35iT^; 'iTdUH*^
r. Impf. ^ina.^, ^rn^ara[, &c. Pot. Ji^^, ira^, &c.
r, &c. Perf. (376) WITT, rifavj or STTWI, WTTT ;
, &c. Aor. (436)
; ^TT'TT'T, ^I^TTcT, ^TTT^. Free.
Cond. WT\$\T*P{. Pass., Pres. *TWf; -4or. 3rc? *zw^. ^jnifa. Caus.,
Pres. w^lfH ; Aor. T)'IH^. Des. faTTftr^Tft?. Freq. T^^,
or H^lfir; see 709. Part., Pres. TraiT^; P/ Pa**. TTTT;
Indecl. TTr^T, - T TT, -TTW (563. a, 560) ; Fut. Pass. *l*A<n, i\n<i\H,
a. Root tT^. /w/! "T 7 ^ ' to bend/ Par. and Ktm. (' to bow one's
self'). Pres. fTmftr. Atm. rf^. Impf. ^I^R^. Atm. 1 ?nfH. Pot.
tWT*{. Atm. tT^. /wpw. fTmfT. Aim. t$. Perf. (375. a)
or cp^r tfr|^ or
Fut. TpinftR. Atm. Hdi^. 2wdf Fut. rfenfa. Atm. ?f^.
(, vsuf^l^; ^n
. Atm. ^nfftr,
. Prec. tfMiiw^. Atm. t^Tr. Cond.
^. Aim. ^R^. Pass., Pre*. ffT^ ; Impf. ^?^ ; ^4or. yd sing.
or ^STfTTftr. Caus. HH'mfa or HiH^flftf; Aor. ^tf^H'*^ or
Des. ftffi^lifiT. Freq. H-M*^, H-^Hlftr or rwf^T. Part., Pres.
Aim. 7THHT T ; Pa**. HWJHM ; Past Pass. TTIT ; Past Indecl. TC^T, -
or -tTW; -F^^. Pass. t*Han, tWrfhr, Him or ^T"T.
d. Root ^. In/. ^PpjiJ^ 'to move/ Par. Pre*. "srarftr. Impf.
(?, &c. Per/. ^^Tc5 or
262 CONJUGATION OP VERBS. GROUP I. CLASS I.
2nd Fut. ^ftTBTTfa. Aor. ^
, -FT*; ^r^Tfcyw, -fen?, -f<5 Free.
Cond. ^T^ftyai'T. Pass., Pres. *r&. Caus., Pres. ^c^nftr or
Des. f^ffjxnfa. Freq. ^i^tjj, ^n^f^T. Part., Pres. ^<3^; Past
Pass, ^if&a', Past Indecl. ^fsji^T, -^T; .Fw*. Pa**. ^fc3rr*T,
603. Root srfa. /w/l sftfajjir'to live.' Par. Pres. Sffarfa.
. Pot. wtTmr. J^i;. ifNTftr, 5ft^, &c.
Fut. ^r^Kifw. ind Fut. sftf^qrfH. Aor. ii(ir<NK^, *nffafh(,
. Prec.
. Cond. ^JWtfq"n^. Pass., Pre. r^[; Aor. yd sing,
Caus., Pres. sffaxnfa ; ^4or. ^rfW'TH'li or ^nrtfsre^. Des. fin
Freq. W3rHT. Part., Pres. ^ft; Past Pass. irtfaiTj Past Indecl.
. Root VR. /w/". VTf^jm ' to run, 5 ' to wash.' Par. and A
Pres. \IHtfa. Atm. vr^. Imp/. ^TVT^. At
. Impv. vr^rf^. ^tm. vrl. Per/.
Atm. vrfaHT^r. 2nd Fut. >JTf^ < nfT. Atm. vrfw^. Aor.
, -fw, ^rorfaisrf^, &c. Prec. vr^mr^. Atm.
Cond. ^vrf^or^. ^tm. ^vrf^^. Pass., Pres. >n^. Caus.,
VTWfa; Aor. ^^f(. Des. f^vrf^^rf7, -^. Freq. ^TOT^. Part.,
Pres. vn*n{, VT^rT^; Past Pass. vrf^Tf, ^ff ('washed') ; Past Indecl.
VTf^WT or ^WT; Fut. Pass. VTftnTO, MT^lhT, VT^I.
604. Root "^st (special stem x^pr, 270). Inf. |^ 'to see.' Par.
Pres. Tj^qrff , ^^ftl, tnfirfTf ; M^ilN^, ^9^^, t^rnr^; M^*J|<^, tr^^T,
1 . Imp/, ^srti^i^, ^TT^I^, ^rti^Tr^; ^jt^rra 1 , &c. Pot. ^^rnr,
&c. Im/?t?. il^tnffT, ^T^I, ^1^; ti^n^, &c.
or ^? (370. /)
(437. c)
. Or ^r^T^r (420, 390.7),
^ JIH*{, ^TJTF, ^fT^^' Prec. '^i<r<UH. Cond.
Pass., Pre*. 'cp^ ; Aor. yd sing. ^f^. Caus., Pres. ^ijrf'T ; Aor.
or ^^^; see 703. Des. f^f%. Freq.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP I. CLASS I. 263
Part., Pres. TI^T^; Past Pass. ~$v; Past Indecl. ^T*T, -'$W, Put,
Pass. "5FST, ^fhT, '$$3.
605. Root ^sr. Inf. $ftTg* ' to see.' Kim. Pres. fsf . Impf.
^ (251). Pot. spT. Impv. $${. Perf. %qi^a, &c. (385, and
compare at 600). ist Fut. ^Ptsjrfif. 2nd Fut. ^fofaK Aor.
(251),
. Free. $f^fhr, &c. Cond. S*fo^. Pass.
Aor. yd sing. jjfof. Caus., Pres. ^UjJllP*; Aor. $f^fi (494). Des.
^falfBSpi (500. b). Part., Pres. fttjHUU ; Pas Pass. ffsfrr; Pas*
Indecl. $PHfrM, -f^T; FM^. P*. ^ft^rai, fTB^fhl, f^T.
606. Root ^* (special stem fif ). J/z/". ?fi|^ or JK&H *to draw/
' to drag/ Par. and Atm. Pre*. eRfrfa. Atm. o|^f. Jm/j/l I *M^.
Aim. ^ni5tf. Po/. efi^"^. Atm. cinsfa. Jwpv. qitrftr. Atm. ^t.
Perf.
. ist Fut. -sfifrftR. ^tm. ^trf or ffsi%. 2nd Fut.
or "Si^nfiT. Aim. ofi^f or gre^. Aor. ^
^TcBTi^, ^^RTfeT^ ; *Ji<*l*r, ^nBlf , a<*HM^. Or
&c. Or ^r^i^
eJiHj^. Atm. ^i^ift^, ^i^f^n^ or 'sjejigi^, ^3<sjiH|ff or
or teji(r^, ^eji^i^TH, ^i^i|TiTTT x ; ^^811*1^ or
or ssjiid ^^tff or ^r^igf H . Prec. <uj|tiH. ^itm.
Cond. ^H'cfiH^R or Hj|iVi^?. Atm. ^*^[ or ^?rf^f. Pass., Pres. c^
Aor. yd sing. ^ofifR. Caus., Pres. 4M^lPH ; Aor. ^efcMJTor ^rft<jyH.
Des. fq^Tftr, -%. Freq. Ttf^vr, ^^^fif^ or Hf^Piu. Part.,
Pres. B^; Past Pass. ^?; Past Indecl. ^tfT, -^T; Fut. Pass.
or "t(&*l, ciwiffai, ^raj.
a. Root HT^. Inf. nrfarp 'to speak/ ^tm. Pres. wnr. Impf.
. Pot. HT^T. Impv. HT^. Perf. ^>TT^, -sRTftre, W^; ?>nf^?,
mftw^, -ft?4, -f^t. 15^ i^M^. mfainf. 2nd Fut.
. ^wrfcft, -fwi^, -ft? ; ^wrf^wfij, -ftiw^, -fM^irfin ;
a'T, -ft^ir. Prec. mftNN. Oowc?. ^wrfW. Pass.,
Pres. HT"^; ^4or. 3^ sing. WTTfo. Caus. m^tnf*! ; Aor.
and 1 ?Ntvi^. Des. fsprrfrnl. Freq. TWTW, ^THTf^ (yd sing,
Part., Pres. HmHUU ; Pas/ Pass. HrftfiT ; Past Indecl.
Fut. Pass.
* This root is also conjugated in cl. 6 : Pres. ^TRTfa, &c. ; Pot. $H*(*^, &c.
264 CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP I. CLASS I.
b. Root ^"5T. Inf. cfvsjijJJT ' to preserve/ ' to defend. 7 Par. Pres.
Impf. *rc^r. Pot. usjq^. Impv. T^T% (58), t^, &c. Perf.
. 2nd Fut.
, ^nrftpnr; ^dV^, ^rcftsn?, ^nfujM^. Prec. T^HWT. Cond.
. Pass., Pres. T^. Caus., Pres. T^nff, &c. ; Aor.
Des. rufHfmfa, &c. Freq. <K3, <Kf\s*{. Part., Pre
Past Pass. Tf^TT Pa5/ Indecl. ffi^^n, -T^i; J^M/. P*.
607. Root ^G(. Inf. ^5*T 'to dwell.' Par. Pres. ^nfiT. Impf.
. Pot. <RN*L //wpv. ^ifn, ^T, &c. PCT/. T^T^r (368),
lfT ; irf^, "3iW^[, yMiJ^; ^ff^T, "$m, "35^. 1st Fut.
A =1 1*9 1 fa (304. a), .^or. vS<^lrH N (304. a, 426. a),
f^TT^, xsm^*T, ^iqiwl^; ^^IVW, ^HTW, ^^Tw^. Free,
Cond. ssHi**^ (304. a). Pass., Pre*. T^ (471) ; -^or. 3^6? 5zw^r.
Caus., Pres. ^iw^lfn, -^ ; -4or. ^^1 <<*(. Des. f^wrfir (304. a).
Freq. 4N44, ^TqfftR or ^T^ftfH. Part., Pres. ^^; Past Pass.
(with f^, T?) ; Pa*/ Indecl. Tf^RT, -TH? (565) ; Fw/. Pa^.
608. Root ^rf. Inf. ^rf%^ 'to deserve/ Par. Pres.
. Pot. ^"^. I?w/)t;. ^fiftsr (58). Perf. (367.
ist Fut. ^ffTTTf^T. znd Fut. ^rfftqiftr. Aor.
wrff 1 ^, sif|a^, ^rff^T^; 'suff^, ^nft?, ^rrff^. Prec.
Cond. ^rrftrq^. Pass., Pre. ^^; ^4or. 3rc? sing. ^rrff. Caus.,
^^ifH, -^ ; Aor. xHlfA^ (494). Des. ^rf^f^mfa, &c. (500. d). Part.,
Pres. 'sfl; P5/ Pfl55. ^rff 7T ; Past Indecl. ^rffRT, -^ ; Fut. Pass.
609. Root n? (special stem i?, 270. b). Inf. JjffTj^ or *\\\ ' to
hide/ Par. and ^itm. Pre*. ^Tfa. Atm. i^. /?/>/*. ^T 3 ]^.
Xtm. ^r^. Po/. 'T^'W. ^tm. JTlN. Impv. n^TrVr. A'tm. JT|.
(384- ) W^ 9 or ^^ (35-) ^1^; 1^J% or
^ or W ^5^ ^J!^- A/tm -
or T^, &c. 15^ Fut. (415. m) irf^ifrfieR or 'fteifw (305.0).
Aim. Jjftril^ or jfteT%. 2nd Fut. JTf^anfi? or litajJirH. Atm.
or Tft^. Aor. ^irf^'H, ^njl^, ^?^5^
;. Or 'W^^ (306. a),
"^^Hfri, ^T^ 1 ^. Atm.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP I. CLASS I. 265
, &c. Or ^rofqr (439. b), ^ttjvji^ or ^JjdTq, ^^TT or
or 3|f^, ^^ 7 * ^nwi; ^rmf ^s or ^
r. Free. n^TT*^. Atm. Jlf^hl or ^fa (306. a). Cond.
or 'srcfh^. Atm. ^mff^ or ^nfteST. Pass., Pres. ^ ; Aor. yrd sing.
^J%. Caus., Pres. 3J^nft; ^4or. ^'J^. Des. J^rfa, -%. Freq.
*fypfr, WWfrftr (srrf s%. ifrftfe) or sffrj^fa. Part., Pres. JT^; Past
Pass. ir<* (305. a) ; Past Indecl. i|f^F*T or JTtri or ^jf^RT, -^T?T; FM/.
Pass. Jjf^rn*! or afte^T, 'T^ffl^, *T?i or jft^T (573. fl).
610. Root ^. I/j/". ^7^ * to burn.' Par. Pres. ^rfff. Impf.
^^. -Po^. ^f^, &c. Impv. ^lff, ^f, &c.
(375. a) or <^j (305), ^T^; ^f^, ^^S(, ^g
ist Fut. ^ryrfw. 2nd Put. v^nfT (306. a). Aor. ^rcm^ (422),
Prec. ^m*^. Cond. ^rv^t^. Pass., Pre. ^ ; Aor. yrd sing.
Caus., Pres. ^infa, -^; ^4or. *nfcf>{. Des. f^v^rftr (502.0).
Freq. ^^, ^[ftr or ^^Iftr (3rrf sing, ^frv or ^T^^). Part.,
Pres. ^T; Pa/ Pa**. ^TV; Past Indecl.
6 1 1. Root 3f. Inf. =ft<pj 'to carry/ Par. and Atm. Pres.
5itm. ^. Impf. ^?w*n^. Atm. iH*!. Pot. ^^. Atm.
\. Impv. ^riftr, ^?, &c. Atm. ^r. Perf. (375. c) T^nj (368),
"3TJJ, 3ifiM, "35*1 ; "3if^^5, <JuTp?, '35?TT?T ; ^f^?^, ^Jtf^l^ Or TRl^ra", "35T^T!.
15^ Fut. fl"<SlftiH. Atm. Tl<ii^. 2nd Fut. iV!*nftT. Atm. ^^51. Aor.
(425) *s?rqr
Atm.
srft^^, '5?^^rr. Prec. 4'4II4'^. Atm. ^f^ii. Cond.
Atm. ^ms<i. Pass., Pre*. (471) '3^; Impf. ^rfe (251.0); Aor. yrd
sing, vsjcnf^. Caus., Pre. ^r^ift, -^; Aor. ^'f1i^. Des. fmB|iff,
-%. Freq. "gT^, WT^f?r (3rc? sing. ^TTrf?; cf. 425). Part., Pres.
; Atm. ^HTT; Pass. "3WTT*T ; Past Pass. "&', Past Indecl. "3^7,
?T (565) ; FM^. Pass. Tte^T, ^[^^T, Tra.
a. *Tf , Inf. ^Vg"^ or Tffftrip * to bear,' is Atm. only, and, like vah, makes
&c. in ist Fut. : but in this tense optionally, and in the other
General tenses necessarily inserts i; thus, ist Fut. TRfjrm%; 2nd Fut.
^tf^oj Aor. ^rarf^fa ; Prec. Jjf^TRfa ; Cond. ^iflfjrsi. The Perf. is ^%
(375- a )> ^1^> ^ c - Part., Fut. Pass, srte^r or ^f^H^T, ^nrrrta, ^r?i (573).
The other tenses are like the Atm. of vah; thus, Pres. ^, &c.
M m
266
CONJUGATION OP VEEBS. GROUP I. CLASS IV.
EXAMPLES OF PRIMITIVE VEEBS OF THE FOURTH CLASS,
EXPLAINED AT 272.
612. Root gf muh. Infin. *ftf^p^ mohitum, 'to be troubled.'
PARASMAI-PADA. Present Tense, ' I am troubled/
muhydmi
muhyasi
muhyati
amuhyam
amuhyat
muhydmas
muhyatha
muhyanti
muhydvas
muhyathas
muhyatas
Imperfect, * I was troubled.'
amuhydva wj 131*1 amuhydma
amuhyatam '^J'slrt amuhyata
amuhyatdm vjia^ amuhyan
muhyeyam
^QR( muhyes
muhyet
muhydni
muhya
Potential, 'I may be troubled.'
muhyeva *j^f*< muhyema
-\
muhyetam g^frt muhyeta
muhyetam *&^*Q*\ muhyeyus
Imperative, ' Let me be troubled.'
' muhydva j^u*i muhydma
muhyatam 5^ff muhyata
muhyatam *J?l*ff muhyantu
mumoha
mumohitha *
mumoha
Perfect, ( I have been troubled.'
1 mumuhiva ^^ mumuhima
mumuhathus
mumuhatus
mumuha
mumuhus
First Future^, ' I shall or will be troubled.'
r<@R mohitdsmi 'Hr^nitat^ mohitdsvas 'nf^lTT^R^ mohitdsmas
mohitdsi 'df^WI**^ mohitdsthas ^f^iii*** mohitdstha
mohitd *ftf^!Tm mohitdrau ^tf^T^( mohitdras
Second Future fj * I shall or will be troubled.'
mohishydmi 'ff%'On^ mohishydvas *Tt%'HIT*l^ mohishydmas
mohishyasi iftf^UIVf^ mohishyathas lftfi$*R'i| mohishyatha
*nf?fflT mohishyati 'nf^^tit^ mohishyatas *TtfVW{(V mohishyanti
* Or yT (305. a) or ynf (305).
t The ist and 2nd Futxires may optionally reject the inserted i; see 415. w.
CONJUGATION OF VEEBS. GROUP I. CLASS IV. 267
Aorist (435), 'I became troubled/
amuham "Sfg^T^T amuhdva iJIJ^TH amuhdma
amuhas ^g^ff*^ amuhatam ?HJ^H[ amuhata
amuhatam
Precative or Benedictive, ' May I be troubled/
muhydsam g^ji*s muhydsva J?4lW muhydsma
muhyds J*4Ufl*^ muhydstam g^lW muhydsta
muhydt ^?TTH1^ muhydstam ^l*j^ muhydsus
Conditional, * I should be troubled/
nfiJ'Ei^ amohishyam ^rmf^BTR amohishydva ^Hnf^OfTT amohishydma
^ amohishyas ^nnf^mij 1 *^ amohishyatam ^nuf^'^rif amohishyata
amohishyat ^T*ii ($: w< if i*T amohishyatam ^HIT^ M^ amohishyan
Pass., Pre*. ^; ^4or. 3^ wngr. ^nftf^. Caus., Pre*.
or gjjGgmfr or ijijjifT. Freq.
or ftftfrv, 305). Part., Pre*.
(35- a ) or 5^ ; -Po*^ Indecl. frf^T or gf^r^T or ^TJ^T or
. Pa**. J^ffirsi or
OTHEE EXAMPLES OP CL. 4 IN THE ORDER OP THEIR PINAL LETTERS.
613. Root *ft (special stem 531, 276. a). Inf. *inj^ 'to finish*
(with prepositions vi and ava, 'to determine/ 'to strive'). Par.
Pres. :snf*T. Imp/. 'ST^q^. Pot. W^. Imjav. ^tnfT. Per/". (373. d)
or *TCTR, ^rw; ^rfti^, ^nff^^, ^nrp[;
TTufFT. 2nd Fut. ^n^qrfir. ^4or. (438. c)
; ^rcrra, I ^WTH^, ^"Hnn^; ^raw, ^T^niT, ^r^. Or ^^if*m*^ (433),
iT ; ^^rrftr^ 1 , ^renftn?*^, ^r^rrftreT^; ^r^ifw, ^iff,
Prec. ^irra^. Cond. ^miWi^. Pass., Pres. *ft*r; Aor.
yrd sing, ^srorfa. Caus., Pres. ^R'mf'T ; Aor. wftw^. Des.
?rrf*T. Freq. iNft, ^n%fr, ^i^im. Part., Pres. m\, Past Pass,
Past Indecl. ftn^T, -VTTT ; Fut. Pass. THTH^T, n1*l, ^T.
614. Root ^v (special stem ^m). Inf. ^\^\ ' to perceive */ Atm.
Pres. ^fl. Impf.^r^xt. Pot. p*ni. /wipw. ^. Per/. T^; see
the tables at 583. ist Fut. wter%. 2wc? Fut. vftm (299. ).
(420, 299. ) ^jfw, ^?'^5F^, Wpf or w^tfv (424. a) ;
f^, ^^ff^ (299. b), ^?>JTRIT. Prec. gwfa. Cond.
. For the other forms, see ^v at 583.
is also conjugated in the ist class. See the tables at 583.
M m 2
268 CONJUGATION OP VEEBS. GROUP I. CLASS IV.
615. Root sq-^ (special stem fqtiT, 277). Inf. tqgp^ ' to pierce. 5
Par. Pres. f%wfa. Impf. ^rfavn^. Pot. f^n^^. Impv.
Perf. (383) -fosnv, fwfa*r or fttgsr , f^mi ; f^rf\n, faftnn
;; fofafan, frf^V, f^rfa^. ist Fut. *r^Tfw (298)- 3wc? Fut.
(299). -^or. (420) 'St^qTW^, ^fsjiwft^, 'il^lriflf^;
waiT^ (419, 298), <3ran3T^ ; ^n*ir*R, ^^n^r, tramt^. Free.
Cond. ^sq-jt*!*^. Pass., Pres. f^vr ; Aor. yrd sing. ^ranfVl. Caus.,
Pres. 'aTTWfa ; ^or. ^rfa*rvi^. Des. C^cqifa. Freq.
Part., Pre*. f^wi^; Past Pass, fsrg; Past Indecl. f^
Pa**, ^r^r, ^nnfta, ^w or ni.
616. Root f^( (special stem ftfiq, 273). Inf. i^F^'to succeed/
Par. Pres. ftrmTfiT. Imp/. ^ri%iq^. Po/.
Perf. fHW, ftr^fv^i or "ftr^, "ft-pre;
f^f^fvm, ftrfav, ftrN^. ist Fut. ^^rftR (298)*. znd Fut. in
(299) *. Aor. 'srfijre^*, ^ftrv^;, ^n
^rftni^. Prec. f^unw^. Cond. SHI**J*^. Pass., Pres.
sing. ^fv. Caus., Pre*. ^>nnf*f or *rwnfT; Aor.
. Des. ftrfqwrfir. Freq. ^fw, ^^ft*T. Part., Pres.
Pa*. fti^; Past Indecl. -ftrgTT or ^fvi^T or
617. Root *Tr[t (special stem *T^l). JTw/". TjJ 1 ^ 'to think,' 'to
imagine.' Atm. Pres. Jfsi. Jmjo/! ^nf^. Pot. *rajir.
Per/ 1 . ^ (375. a), ^f?fq, ^; ^ftra|, ^m, fl^TW;
. ist Fut. *Rnt- 2nd Fut.ti^f. Aor. (424.
**r. Pass., Pre*. fW; -4or. 3rc? *m^. ^nRifff. Caus.,
Pre*. JTRITfa ; Aor. *%*f\vfrlT{. Des. fT*re or jftirra or fTrf^. Freq.
T*TO, Hwrf^r. Part., Pre*. ITSTRTT; Past Pass. *?TT; Past Indecl.
iTr^n, -HW; Fw/. Pa**. *nH*T, ?Hfl^, HT'ST.
a. aT^, Inf. SffffiJ^ 'to be born,' makes Pre*. wft; /mjo/ 1 . ^f3fr^,
&c. ; Pot. TT^T ; Impv. ITT^. But these may be regarded as coming
from Passive of jan, cl. 3. See 667. 6> k C &-
618. Root ^t (special stem TJTII). Jw/! TT^ or g^ or
* When fav belongs to cl. I, it optionally inserts 3^i;
or VTOTTfT, ^Wv or
t The root T^ is rarely conjugated in cl. 8, A'tmane (see 684), when the Aorist
is ^nrf'Tfar, wrfa&rt^ or ^w^n^, ^wf^ or ^TTTT, &c. See 424. 6.
J Also conjugated in cl. 5, Par. '^^ftfiT? &c.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. - GROUP I. CLASS IV.
269
, &C. Or
Cond.
or
or
' to be satisfied/ Par. Pres. rjuilfa. Impf. ^jguji^. Pot.
Impv. ^wrfar. Per/. Win}, inrftN or HfT^ or rf^r*!, ifini ; Hrt.fM* or
H ? tr ^l' T'W 5 JTfTqJT or Tnpr, fl^T, TfiJ^- is/ JFW. (390.7) riHlfw or
^nfw or irftjrilfw (390. A). 2/M/ .Fw/. n^Slfa or ^XRnfa or dfMUJlfa, &c.
Aor. (420) ^niw
Or
&C. Or
Prec.
. Pass., Pres. Tpq; Aor. yd sing. wfq. Caus., Pres.
; -4 or. ^nfl^^ or Wfl^. Des. PrtiJHrirM orfadmif*! or
Freq. riOiJui, inrtnf 1 ^ or ffffrwfT. Part., Pres. 1^(\ Past Pass. ^R ;
Past Indecl. rpjT, -!% ; Fut. Pass. friNr, nwl^l, TfQ.
619. Root 31^ (special stem ^n^T, 275). Inf. $|fHr^ 'to be
appeased.' Par. Pres. ^TTJ^Tf'T. Impf. ^I^fW^. Pot.
Impv. 5J|Jir?T. Per/*. $T$n*T (^68), %fTI (375. a),
Fut.
Or
Cond. ^r^ififH^. Pass., Pres. 3TWJ;
Caus., Pres. $|Hmfn ; ^4or. ^T^ft^lH*^. Des.
, &c. Prec.
sing. ^r$rf*T or
[fHmfa. Freq. 7T
(yd sing. ^rf^r). Part., Pres. ^|*^!^; Past Pass, ^ipff ; Past
Indecl. ^TTn^T or ^rfJTRT, -^T**?; FM^ Pfl5*. ^iPHd-'M, 5IHfl^, $TT*r.
620. Root tT5^ (special stem ^*l). Jw/ 1 . Hf^IiJ^ or 7f|^ ' to perish/
Po/.
Par. Pres.
. Impf.
. Impv.
' a )
or
or TR* (375. a),
or
Fut.
or
or
(390. A:). 2/iC?
or ^^ifH. Aor. (437)
. Or
, &c. (437, 441). Prec. fT^rn^. Cond. -^^m^ &c. or ^nr^T^.
Pass., Pres. r^ ; Aor. yd sing. ^RTf5T. Caus., Pres. *n^nnf*T ; Aor.
Des.
or
. Freq.
. Part., Pre*. ^^; Pa*^ P*5. 'q?; Pa*^ Indecl.
or T^T, -^-q; Fut. Pass. ^f$ni*r, T^pfhr, -^T^T.
621- Root TJ^* (special stem ipi). Jw/ 1 . qi^ c to be nourished,'
f to grow fat/ Par. Pres. ipnfo. JTm^o/! ^yui*^. Pot.
Per/, gift*, ^f^I, gift*; ggf^, g^N^,
. Aor. (436)
This root is also conjugated in the pth class. See 698.
270 CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP I. CLASS IV.
Prec. ipira>^. Cond. 3?tft^. Pass., Pre*. ipl ;
Caus., Pres. tfrnrrfa ; Aor. Wg*<^. Des. gxftfinrrfa or ggftniTfa or
gg^Tf*. Freq. tftip&, T^ftf^T. Part., Pres. ^\' } Past Pass. gs ;
Pa*/ Indecl. ijfT, -gi; JW. P<m. tfte*j, xfhnafa, *fror.
622. Root 'S^ (special stem ^r). Ira/". ^rftfipj * to throw/ Par.
Pres. ^Wlfn, &c. Im/?/. ^ITO^. Pot. ^reni^. Impv. ^nftr. Per/".
; STT(IR, SHHI^, m^; ^if^ir, ^TTF, ^n^. ist Fut.
. awe? PM^. ^ftranfa. Aor. (44i)'5n^r j i
. Prec.
Pass., Pre*. ^?^ ; Aor. yd sing, ^rrftr. Caus., Pres. ^iT*nnfT ; Aor.
^ftr^H. Des. ^rfaftreifH. Part., Pres. ^TWiT ; Past Pass,
Indecl. ^fttr^T or ^^R^T, -^TO; Pw^. P55. ^ftra^T, ^HR^hl
623. Root ~$^ (special stem "pi). Inf. ~$FT$\ or ^tf^T ' to injure/
' to bear malice/ Par. Pres. "pHf*. Impf. ^srpiH. Pot.
Impv. -pnftr. Perf. |^?, f^f^T or |^m or
fl^lJ ^" fp f|P/ Ist Fut -
or ^f^lfTftR, &c. 2nc? Pw/. ift^nfT (306. a) or
. Prec. 7.^1 1 ^IH, &c. Cond. ^rift^T (306. a) or ^r^f^JH. Pass.,
Pres. "5^ ; Aor. yd sing. ^"jtf^. Caus., Pres. jt^Tlfil ;
Des. |^tf^MrfH or I'^r^mfH or gljujifH (306. a). Freq.
(yrd sing, ^tfrv or ^Vjtfe, 514. d). Part., Pres. "pl^; Past Pass.
; Past Indecl. ^ISIT or TSf^Rl or ^f^r^T, - ; Fut. Pass. ^Vvar,
624. Root Tf (special stem ra). Inf. TT^ ' to tie/ ' to bind/ * to
fasten/ Par. and Aim. Pres. f?nfT. Aim. *&. Impf.
Aim. ^n^. Po#. H'^^ x . ^tm. Tf^rr. Iwv. -^nftr. A'tm.
Perf. TfriT^ or TT^, ^TT or
or -if, %f^. ist Fut. tTgrfsr. Aim. flT^. 2nd Fut. (306. b]
. Aor. (426) ^Tlril^, WfllRft
. Atm. ^frrf
. Prec. rT^IT. A'tm.
r. Cond. T*\i\&\\. Aim. '3RW. Pass., Pres. ^ ; Aor. yd siny.
. Caus., Pre*. Tn^^nft?; -4or. ^HlH^. Des.
Freq. fT^, rnrftr (3/*rf m^. TTrfir)- Part., Pres.
Indecl. T -|^r
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP I. CLASS VI. 271
EXAMPLES OF PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE SIXTH CLASS,
EXPLAINED AT 278.
625. Root ^ srij. Infin. Sf^ srashtum, ' to create, 5 ' to let go.'
PARASMAI-PADA only.
Present Tense, ' I create/
srijdmi JJTT^ srijdvas ^tl*l^ srijdmas
srijasi *3FR( srijathas l 1 ^ srijatha
srijati ^*Tif^ srijatas ^'ff'if srijanti
Imperfect, ' I was creating/ or ' I created.'
asrijam ^RJWR asrijdva ^^srw asrijdma
asrijas ^*" 1 *l asrijatam ij*in asrijata
am/af 'Mtj 1 n l*^ asrijatam ^^^asrijan
Potential, ' I may create.'
srijeyam Jj^^ srijeva '^'TT srijema
sri/es *J^t*^ srijetam
Imperative, ' Let me create.'
w ^"T^ srijdva ^"TTH srijdma
snj'o *J*f i^ srijatam ^*^ srijata
srijatu ?J1rtl*^ srijatdm ^n*tj srijantu
Perfect, ' I created/ or ' I have created.'
sasarja ^Pi^ sasrijiva ^^fii sasrijima
sasarjitha or * *tj* 1 '3*\ sasrijathus ^*T sasrija
sasarja * H 3**SH sasrijatus ^*J5J^ sasrijus
First Future, * I shall or will create.'
srashtdsmi (399. *') tf8l*3t^ srashtdsvas tieiw*^ srashtdsmas
srashtdsi t*8l*M^ srashtdsthas tJgl'w srashtdstha
srashtd 8lU srashtdrau ti8K*( srashtdras
Second Future, ' I shall or will create.'
tcttjufo srakshydmi tivj*(i f^ srakshydvas t* *^I*i ^ sralcshydmas
srakshyasi t!Vi*|VJ^ srakshyathas w&n srakshyatha
srakshyati tiw*4n^ srakshyatas tivj^Pif srakshyanti
* As to sasrashtha, see 370, /.
272
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP I. CLASS VI.
asrdksham
asrdkshis
asrdksMt
Aorist, ' I created/
asrdkshva
asrdshtam
asrdshtam
asrdkshma
asrdshta
asrdkshus
Precative or Benedictive, ' May I create/
srijydsam
srij yds
asrakshyam
asrakshyas
^t* <i n asrakshyat
Pass., Pre*.
or
srysva
srijydstam
^ TM i w I *^ srijydstam
Conditional, ' I should create.'
asrakshydva
asrakshyatam
("^ asrakshyatam
srijydsma
srijydsta
snjydsus
Des.
asrakshydma
asrakshyata
^tittHI, asrakshyan
Caus., Pre,f. ^^infiT;
Freq. ^rc^^ 1 . Part.,
IndecL
OTHER EXAMPLES OF CL. 6 IN THE ORDER OF THEIR FINAL LETTERS.
626. Root J (special stem fezi, 280). J/z/". JT|^ 'to die. 5 j^tm. in
Special tenses, also in ^4or. and Prec.; Par. in others. Pre*.
. Per/.
or -
Aor.
Free. f^t^I. Cond. ^
Caus., Pres. TTtTTftT
- or *rtf- or
Fut.
, -sfjHiffi*^ ;
Pass., Pre. f^; -4or. $rd sing.
ftTT^. Des. g^trftr (502). Freq.
Part., Pres. faiWTCJ; P*^ Paw. jir;
Past Indecl. IJJ^T, -^W ; Fut. Pass. T^T, Twhl, TT.
627. Root cff (special stem fw*., 280). 7/z/ 1 . ^ft^'T or cirffcj^ 'to
scatter.' Par. Pre*. fanofa. Impf. ^rftir^H. Po/. fefi\ii*T. Impv.
Per/". (374. A:) M<*I*:, ^^rfni, ^^!K; ^^ift^, ^F^^, ^^^1^;
Fut. (393) ^ftjnf^R or ^r^^hnfER. znd Fut.
(393) "Kftwrftr or cipfraiTfiT, &c. Aor. ^TaRrft^, ^ofii^^, ^nfiRl
?fiTft?, ^r^Tft^^[. Prec.
Pass., Pres. ctfzf ; ^4or. 3^ s
or
Caus., Pre*.
Des.
Freq.
With regard to 393, 501, F and *T are not allowed the option oiisha.
CONJUGATION OP VERBS. GROUP I. CLASS VI. 273
Part., Pres. feFti^; Past Pass. gfH? (530. a); Past Indecl.
; Fut. Pass, afifbnr or ^inq, ^FWta, ^rnK
628. Root g^ (special stem g^, 281). Inf. 'ffaT^ 'to loose/ 'to
let go.' Par. and Kim. Pres. ij^ifa. Aim. gir. Impf.
Aim. Wpir. Pot. i3H*{. Aim. g^ifaj. Impv. g^nfT. Atm.
Per/. g*ita,
Atm.
ist Fut. irl^jTftH. Aim.
. (436) ^g^,
. Aim.
. Prec. g^rra^. Atm. g^fN (452).
Cond. *J*nHtf^. Atm. ^jfivyf. Pass., Pres. g^ ; ^4or. 3/v/ m^. ^fjfrf%.
Caus., Pre*. ift^JTfa; Aor. ijg^. Des. gg^tfT, -T3f, 'fl^' (503).
Freq. Ag^, iffoftf** (yd sing. ifM^R). Part., Pre*. g^; Pew/ Pa**.
gu; Past Indecl. gw, -g^T; PM^. Pass. *flrfisi, jft^ft^T, *ft^T.
629. Root g^ (special stem f^q, 282). Iw/. rf*i^ 'to deceive/
Par. Pres. fa^rfa. /WJD/". ^rfr^. Pot. f^hj^. Jmpv.
Per/. (383) firaro, f^qfro, f^T^; f^f^r^, f^fr^^;,
ftf^frw, f^fr^, f^fT^. ist Fut. qf*niTftR. 2w? PM/.
Aor. (428) ^^rf 1 ^^, ^raj^l^, &c., or ^infg^;, &c. Prec.
Cond. ^arf^ai^. Pass., Pre*. faf ; -4or. 3rc? in^. ^nfe. Caus.,
Pres. 'tn^'mf'? ; -^or. ^rfsRT^. Des. f^q-f^^rfiT. Freq. %fa^fr, ^l^f^T
or ^w^ftftr. Part., Pres. faq^; Pas# Pa*. f^f%ff; Pa*^ Indecl.
ftrf^r^r, -f^r; P/. Pa**. i(Vd*T, f^^fhr, ^n^r.
630. Root w^ (special stem ^J, 282). Inf. wfelj^ ' to cut.' Par.
Pres. ^Jlfa. Iw/?/! ^1^3^. Pot. ^*iW(. Impv. ^lfT. Perf.
^^fts^i or ^?re, ^"a^g ; ^aftw or ^-3^ (371)* ^ro'*PO ^^^g
or ^5T^T, ^r^JJ, <4s<^. i*/ PM/. (415) ?rf<gTnfoT or rfaifw. 2nd Fut.
crfTg^nfiT or sr^rrfir. Aor. ^srfosR^, ^^^t^;, ^a^g s ii^; ^?rftj^, &c.,
see 427. Or %Nduj|*| (423), yHdiqffcfc ^srm^i^; 'Ssn^, ^rars^ (297)*
5<l*{, ^TsTT?, ^f^T^;. Prec. ^an^. Cond ^prf^^ or
Pass., Pres. ^s^ (47 2); Aor. yrd sing, ^rerftj (475- ^)-
Caus., Pre*. ?na^nf*T; Aor. ^fasTS^. Des. f^prf^^nftT or fcaqifo.
Freq. ^t^T, 40^^. Part., Pres. ^y^; Past Pass. ^S (544,
58); Past Indecl. wfaWT, -^ (565) ; PM/. Pa**. ?rfta5raT or
a. Root fa^ (special stem ftrg, 281). Iw/ 1 . ^T^'to sprinkle.' Par.
and ^tm. Pre*. ftrarfir. ^tm. ftrir. Impf. ^f^. Atm.
N n
274 CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP I. CLASS VI.
Pot. fa^*l*^ Aim. fti^Tf. Impv. fa^iPn. Aim. fti^. Per/
ftrafersi, ftnN; fafqfqsr, faftnr^;, -^nPU ftrfafe*, ftrf^^,
Aim. faftre, ftffafa^, fafa^ ; ftffcfoil, &c. ist Fut.
&c. Atm. ifiiT^. 2nd Fut.
or
free. ftnrra^. Aim. fHBfl'Jj. Cowc?. ^^1^. Atm. ^i^^. Pass.,
Pre*. ftr^. Caus., Pre*. ^^^ifti; Aor. ^Tfrtf^^^. Des.
-T5J. Freq. ^fir^, %%fsj?. Part, Pres.
ftnR; Pa*/ Iwrfec/. ftr^iT, -ftra?; Fut. Pass.
631. Root u^ (special stem ijs, 282). Jw/ 1 . H|^ 'to ask.' Par.
Pres. ijsarfl (51). /m^o/". ^tj^sa^. Po/. TJ^T^. ./wz/w. tj^anftf. Per/1
(381) Tnrea, 'Mn4i or XIIT?, in^s;; trirfs^r
2nd Fut.
Cond. ^nr^I^. Pass., Pre*. ij^a (472); Aor. yd sing.
Caus., Pre*. ira^nfH; Aor. ^njins^. Des. fq^rs^rfti.
Freq. TTThj^R, *Tmf?T. Part., Pre*. ^J^f^; Past Pass, ij?; Past
Indecl. ijfT, -*JW (565); Fut. Pass. ire^T, H^aTfta, TTSq.
632. Root HTST or *j*3^ (special stem vpSf). Inf. |^ or >?|^ 'to fry.'
Par. and -Aitm. Pre*. vrwrfT. ^tm. p5T. Imjo/l ^^sr^. Atm. 1 ?r^W.
Po/. ^WT^. Atm. ^fW'I. Im/?v. ^nfff. ^tm. *f^. Per/. (381)
or ^>re, ^>T5^; w^f^rw, ^rffsr^;, ^^sr}^; ^^fwr,
Or ^T5t, ^Hf^I or ^nt, ^>TT^; ^wfriN, &c. Atm.
, &c. Or ^H^p, q^rf^, &c. ist Fut. >mfi5R or
Atm. ?T? or ntr^. 2nd Fut. tf^rTfa or >T^TrT. Kim. ^T or
Aor. ^TT^, ^T3X, ^T^T^
Or ^wrsf^. Atm. ^fj
. Or
nrstrT. Prec. ^THn^nr. Atm.
or Hsffa. Cowc?. 'Sf^rafnT or ^SW^JT. Atm. ^r>3^ or ^M^f.
Pass., Pres. f*5*i (472). Caus., Pres. ti'-niqifo; Aor. ^?^r*Jl5n? or
.' Des. ftr^rfr, -^, or f^H^rftf , -% ; or f^^fw^rftr, -^, or
r, -^, &c. Freq. rrh|Tjzr, ^TfT5*I (yd sing, smrffe). Part.,
Pre*. ^Wf^J Pa*t Pass, ijs; Past Indecl. ^fT, -*J5^; Fut. Pass. \JF^(
or nfsq, >T5t?fh? or *-T55nft^, Hw^ or r5?T.
633. Root *T5^ or *rc^ (special stem ifi^). Inf. *w^ 'to be
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP I. CLASS VI. 275
immersed/ 'to sink.' Par. Pres. JTWTfa. Impf. ^H-rrlH. Pot.
. Impv. Hwrff . Per/, mrsn, *nrfrjni or JHTcw, war ; *wf5R,
H-nm^; HHfTrfH, *W*if, HHTJJ^. 1st Fut. q^nff&l. 2nd Fut.
. Aor. (424) ^RT^JT, '^IHTS^, 'THHinffa^; ^wir^r, <3raJ3ri, 'wiiifiPT;
, ^wfai, imij^. Free. q^lOT. CoraoT. 4j*lvi*(*^. Pass., Pres.
. Caus., Pres. H-nimfH ; -<4or. ^THH-niH. Des. fJR^rrfiT. Freq.
fwR (yd sing. TRfe). Part., Pres. HWi^; Pas/ Pas*. H'TT ;
Past Indecl. IW, HW, -TrjiT; Fut. Pass, tf^rar, Jranftl, Trjif.
634. Root TJ^. //i/". ift^T 'to strike/ 'to hurt/ Par. and Atm.
Pres. TJ^rfa. Atm. g^. Impf. ^l^'T. Atm. ^rg^ 1 . Pot. g^^H. Atm.
g^-^. Jmj9V. g^rf*T. Atm. g^. Per/,
ist Fut. TfterfsT. Atm.
. Atm. iftW. ^O^*. v NriirH,
. Xtm.
Prec.
^tm. -31^(452). Cond. ^ni^nT. ^tm. ^nftfl^. Pass., Pres. g^; Aor.
yrd sing. w^f^. Caus., Pres. ift^nfT ; Aor. wg^K. Des. ggfflTftr,
-W. Freq. Tf^, wtiftftT (yd sing. fftwtf%). Part., Pres. jj^; Past
Pass, g^; Ps^ Indecl. ij^T, -"g?T; PM/. Pass, wtw^l, ift^^l,
635. Root ft^. Inf.'^wrt^ to throw.' Par. and^tm. Pres.
Atm. f85p. Jm/?/. ^rf^t^. j^tm. 1 5rfr^. Po^. fjM*l*t N . Atm.
Impv. fsjtnftn. ^itm. ft^. Pe?y. f^^tJ, f^^f^v
; f^f^ftw, f^f^pr, f^^g^. Atm.
. ist Fut. -RTftR. Atm. ^HTt. 2nd Fut. ^imifn. Atm.
. Aor. TM ^ S R*
. Kim.
faj !'<** f^, ^rfj^wr, ^fvymrf. Prec. fvsjuimir, &c. Atm.
zp-'m*. Ktm.^f^m. Pass., Pres. f^ ; Aor. yd
sing, ^riffo. Caus., Pres. TSpmrfa; Aor. ^aP^ftSf'?'?. Des. fafrsfmif*?,
-^. Freq. ^f^, %%fT (710, 43. e). Part., Pres. ft|^; Pas^ Pass.
f85fn ; Past Indecl. ffVjT, -f^I ; Fut. Pass.
a. Root fasr /w/. %^ ' to enter.' Par. Pres.
&c. Impf. ^ff^5l*f, '5ifV$|^, &c. Pot. f<i^ii|H, f^T^, &c. Impv.
t, &c. Per/.
, f^rf^T, fsff^. is/ Fut. steTfw. 2W0 1 PM^. Mfem(H. Aor.
N n 2
276
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GEOUP I. CLASS X.
. Cond. ^NISI*L Pass., Pres. f^i; Aor. yd sing. ^R%.
Caus., Pres. ^RTfa ; Aor. ^T^fa^T*. Des. fafa^rfa. Freq. ^f%^,
^f^R (yd sing. ^^ff). Part., Pres. f%^; Past Pass, f^f; Past
Indecl. f^fT, -fr$TT; Fut. Pass. ^v*q, ^nfta, W^tl.
636. RootF?5T x . Inf. wf* OF *inrT ' to touch.' Par. Pres. W
H. Po/. ^T^fai?. /mpv. W^Tlftf. Perf.
or
or fRtt^lfa . Aor.
Or
, &c. Or W*HJ*^, ^iwuf^, va^MHj 1 ^; ^rw^p^, ^T^
. Prec. JRTSHF^fl. Cond.
or
w. Pass., Pres. ^r^^; Aor. yd sing. ^wf^. Caus., Pres.
^
or ^ifq^q^t^. Des. fy*MflfH. Freq. ^0*j^,
tnfl^rf^ or qOwfyf. Part., Pres. W^; Past Pass, ^q?; Past
Indecl. ^JfT, -*fTT > -^^ J*. wfJ or B1g<*4, HJ^T^^f, ^T'-
637. Root ^(special stem ^55, 382). Inf. ^ftnjJ^or T& ' to wish.'
Par. Pres. ^srfa. Im/?/. ^a?T. Pot. ^T^. Impv. ^rf^T. Perf.
(367) %*m, ^f^q, ^; ^ftnr, t^^, t 1 ^; f^w t^> $3^- Ist
^f^ffTftR or ^T%i. 2nd Fut. ^rw^irPM. -^or. ij
^fwr, i*ftn?T^; ^f^RT, ^ftre, ^fq^5[. Prec. ^oinw. Cond. ^
Pass., Pres. ^; Aor. yd sing. ^fq. Caus., Pres. i^
^fqqw. Des. irffrftnnfa. Part., Pres. ^53^; Past Pass,
Indecl. T or f^i^T, -T Pt^. Pass. ^S*T or
EXAMPLES OF PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE TENTH CLASS,
EXPLAINED AT 283.
638. Root ^r 6ur. Infin. ^ft^fngH 6orayitum, ' to steal/
PARASMAI-PADA. ATMANE-PADA.
Present Tense., 'I steal.'
Imperfect, ' I was stealing/ or ' I stole/
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP I. CLASS X. 277
Potential, ' I may steal/
^"k^ ^WiTFj; 4U'frgq t
^k^nr
^i<:4*rmT*^
^Wi^
Imperative, * Let me steal/
Perfect, ' I stole/ or ' I have stolen/
First Future, ' I shall or will steal/
Second Future, ' I shall or will steal/
*fW*
Aorist, ' I stole/
Precative or Benedictive, * May I steal/
Conditional, ' I should steal/
278 CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP I. CLASS X.
639. Pass., Pres. ^^; Aor. yd sing. ^ftft:. Caus. same as the
Primitive verb. Des.'sprtTftreTfa. Part., Pres. "Efter?^ Past Pass.
or ^ftfor; Past Indecl. ^ftefar^T; Put. Pass. *rfcf(fiT*T,
OTHER EXAMPLES OF CL. IO IN THE ORDER OF THEIR FINAL LETTERS.
640. Root IT or Tt (stem tjTTl). Inf. ^cftfij*^ 'to fill */ Par. Pres.
^nftr. Impf. wjjcq^. Pot. Ol*r*^. Impv. ^cmftjr. Perf.
ist Put. ^ftfinfiER. 2nd Jut. Xj^fTTHnfa. Aor. ^gT^. Prec.
Cond. ^yjLPMU(*^. Pass., Pres. tjpf; ^4or. 37*6? sm^. ^^ft or
Caus. like the Primitive. Des. g^rfjrerft. Part, Pres. ^ft(; Past
Pass. TJ^ or ^ftiT or Tjjr ; Past Indecl, ^fai^T or ^jtr, -^ ; -FW. Pass.
641. Root f*n^ (stem f^ni). /w/. f^^f^l^ ' to think/ Par.
Pres. fq^nrrfw. Impf. ^rf^if^. Pot. fqTfpfa^. Impv. f^TnTf^.
Perf. f^RnrraTO. ist Fut. f^^rftnrrfFT. awe? Fw#. f^jrfq^nffr. Aor.
^rf^f^im. Prec. r^i*llH. Cond. s srf^irftrnT. Pass., Pr
Caus. like the Primitive. Des. faf%'irftraTfa. Part., Pres.
Aim. f^RnrR (527) ; Past Pass. frfafif ; Past Indecl.
642. Root ^r (stem ^r?hl). Inf. ^^nijjfl (with prep, n, ur,
*to ask/ 'to seek/ Atm. Pre*. ^r*R. Impf. ^T^^f. Po#.
Impv. ^r^. Per/! ^^m^^i. i# Fut. ^QfaaT?r. awe? Fw/.
^for. ^nf^^, 'srrfF'znn^, &c. Prec. ^HH'wfa. Cond. ^rr^ftr^. Pass.,
Pre5. ''ssf. Caus. like the Primitive. Des. Mlfrivfrifniftr, ~^ Part.,
Pres. ^HR (527) ; Past Pass, ^fvl'd ; Pa/ Indecl.
643. Root gw (stem grcni). Iw/. ^fitifrigji ' to say/ * to tell/ Par.
Pres. cfivjmfa. Impf. ^cjr^niH. Po. ebviT)^. Impv. B^RTfT. Perf.
<*iVii(IMW. i*^ -Fw^. fiW^n!TftR. 2 we? Fut. cBrafafTTfT. -^or. ^T^^R^
or ^^1<*|*^. Prec. oirzqnriT. Co/zc?. Vf<*viftra(iT. Pass, cjr^, &c. Caus.
like the Primitive. Des. p^efrmftreTftT. Part., Pres. ^r^r^; Past
Pass, ohfvjri ; Past Indecl. ^HuHI, -cirnzr (566. a) ; Fut. Pass, c
a. Root -^ (stem tfttni). Inf. xft^ftr^' to proclaim/ Par. Pres.
. Impf. xMiTlM^H. Pot. T^MMH^. Jmjoi;. Tft^nfiir (58). Per/.
* This root forms its stem n\<.*tpdraya from "*{, and 1 JT?T pur ay a from ^; but
the meaning of qKllfa is rather 'to fulfil,' 'to accomplish,' 'to get through.'
The Caus. of *J pri, cl. 3, is also TTTtlTfa ' to carry over,' ' to accomplish.'
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP II. CLASS II. 279
. ist Fut. TJfannftEr. 2nd Put. Tfaftrerfo. dor.
Free. ^fain^w. Cond. ^nrfaftroi>T. Pass., Pres. 'tti ; Aor. yd sing.
. Caus. like the Primitive. Des. spftMfrmft. Part, Pres.
; Past Pass. qlfari ; Past Indecl. iTiMfarfl, -TtN; Fut. Pass.
b. Root *TT5T (stem *repr). //", HUjfarJH 'to eat,' 'to devour.' Par.
Pres. >reprrfa. Impf. ^wspnr. Pot. W5pnnT. Impv. ^TEHnftor. Per/1
Hminm. is* Fut.
Prec. H^fTWt. (7owe?. ^wsfftwr . Pass., Pres. vrasr. Des.
Part., Pre. >T^n^; Past Pass. >?ftfir ; Past Indecl.
^. Pa**.
EXAMPLES OF PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE SECOND CLASS,
EXPLAINED AT 307.
644. Root in yd. Infin. *nipj ydtum, 645. Root ^ (3 l o)> Infin.
'to go.'
PABASMAI-PADA only.
Present, ' I go.'
yai TTTT^ ydthas
ya^i TTin^ ya/as
Imperfect, ' I was going,' or ' I went.'
ay dm ^^TR 1 aydva ^^11*1 aydma
ay as ^mTtP^ aydtam ^STTIT aya/a
aya7 ^f^TWl*^ aydtdm -smir^ aya'n *
Potential, ' I may go.'
yaya-s
y aydtam *ft^Tff ydydta
Imperative, ' Let me go.'
yani TJT^ ya'pa TR ydma
ydhi ITin^ ya/om TT1T yrffa
yo/w ^Trtl*^ ydtdm TPff yaw/w
, ' to go/
For 5 with adhi, a, &c., see 311.
Present, ' I go.'
ewu f ^^ *P flS
esA* ^T^ ithas
f eft ^H^i/as
Imperfect, ' 1 was going,' or ' I went.'
Tayam (37) ^^0*00(251.0) f&aima
-. ^\_ ^
^ ais (33) ^?f^ aitam ^ff atfa
^ ait fiU*^ aite'm WP^ ayan J
Potential, ' I may go.'
^m*^ tyan ^TT^ tyara ^4lf iydma
^H'^tya'/am ^1iT iydta
Imperative, Let me go.'
oyant WTTW ayaca WTW aydma
f At ^rH^ iVam ^W ita
efu ^ni*^ tVam 1!J yan/M
ayus (see 310. Obs.)
t This root is also of the ist class, making 'Snnf'T, ^J^ft<, &c., in Pres. tense.
J Foster gives '^\. See Panini (vi. 4. 81), and compare Laghu-kaum. 608.
280
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP II. CLASS II.
Per/. *PU (373),
istFut.
Put. ntmf*i,
&c. 2nd
&c. Cond.
&c. Pass., Pres. TTO, &c.; Aor. yd sing.
^nnftl. Caus., Pres. ^imilfH, &c.;
Aor. VM4l*iq*^, &c. Des. fmilUlfa.
Freq. ^rtHlW, *TRTftT or ^'WfH (yd
sing. URtfff or TnHVr). Part., Pres.
*rn^(2Vbm. case ^T^); Past Pass. ITU;
Pas* Indecl. TTr^T, -^R; Fa/. Pass.
Per/.
(367. a),
lSw. 2nd Put.
. (438. e)
; -<| 8l'l l ll,'eillif* N ,
. Prec. ^*rt*t,, &c. (see
447. a). Cond. ;M*I. Pass., Pres.
f^; is* Fu/. Tn% or ^TraWR (474);
2nd Put. ^Sf or ^?l(*4< ', Aor. yd sing.
^infa or 4UI|tiif or ^JlftRlT. Caus.,
Pres. ^H'^lffl (from ^TW at 602) or ^T3-
or ^T^nnf'T; Aor. 'StWtJWT or
or 33TfmW x (with adhi prefixed,
493. e). Des. ftFTfHmfT
(from T*T at 602) or ^fRmft, -^. Part.,
Pres. ^ (Nom. *1*^); Pas* Pass. ^?T;
Pasf Indecl. ^RTT, -^WJ Fut. Pass.
a. Like TT may be conjugated *TT ' to shine :' Pres.
, &c.
; Per/. "^H; ist Fut.
OTHER EXAMPLES OF CL. 2 IN THE ORDER OF THEIR FINAL LETTERS.
5
646. Root $ft (special stem 31, 315). Inf. ^(fqgH 'to lie down,
< to sleep.' Atm. Pres. ym, ^, $ff (K ecrai) ; jfc^,
//xe0a), 3W, 3ITW. Impf. HH^ifi
. Pot.
. Perf.
or -
ist Fut.
. 2nd Fut. ^iftl'Bi. Aor.
or -
. Prec. ^if^iVir. (7onc?. ^rf^ 1 ^. Pass., Pre*. 31^; Aor. yd
sing. ^ifa. Caus., Pres. ^irmjlfa; ^for. ^H^il^l^H. Des. f^T^lftlM.
Freq. ^IT^T^, ilfTfT or ^nftf^. Part., Pre. ^i^TR (526. a) ; Past Pass.
jrftnr ; Past Indecl $rfar*T, -ym ; Fut. Pass. ^fTnT^, ^TirfTn, ^ni.
647. Root H or *J (special stems ^and ^, see 312). Inf.
or N^ * to bring forth.' Atm. Pre*. ^, ^, ^ ;
CONJUGATION OP VERBS. GROUP II. CLASS II. 281'
. Pot. *pffa. Impv. igk (Pan. vii. 3, 88),i
. Per/. ^,
ist Put. ;stan? or *faiTlf . 2nd Put. *V$ or *F4$. Aor.
. Or ^reftfo, ^*fttfi^, ^reifa? ',
f. Free, ^fafaf or ^?r^Mt*T. Cond. WffHi? or
. Pass., Pres. ^; Aor. yd sing, ^reifa. Caus., Pres.
Des. ^mfH, -^. Freq. ^Vf^f, f^M^fH or
Part., Pres. *prT ; Pa*^ Pa**. *jw or ^TT or ^ ; Past Indecl. ^&\ or
^. Pa**. *faTO or 5fff^nr, ^^ftl, ^rpq or TOT.
648. Root *rj (special stems ^ or wft, ^ and ^^, see 313). Inf.
' to praise.' Par. and Atm. Pres. ^fii or w^lfa, ^ft or
or W^lfH ; ^^ or *r|Tfa^*, ^^ or ^^J^*, ^H^ or
or t^Owi*, ^ or ^^5r*, ^fif. Aim. or
or ^p^*; ^p| or ^Th^*, ^TT^, ^^ra ; H or * or
*, *tj^H . Impf. i**s^\ or *ren ^ren^ or
or ^re|^, ^n^ 1 ?!^ or ^^^rH*^, w^iir^ or
or W^rfa*, ^ff or ^rTtw, ^'l. Atm. ^Tf^, WVIT or
or 'T ; ^<4? or <n^cjr, W^^T^IT^, *^IT^; ^WHf or
or *reTta* ^TT. Pot. IT or
Atm. *tj<fl^. Impv. ^^rftf or w^rftf, ^f^ or ^-flfis*, ^5 or
<fi*, ^w or ^^tinr, ^iTTi or ^pftnr*T; wmn, ^r or
Kim. ^ETW i^ or ^ifti^*, ^TTR or ^ftnTH ; WIH
or ^sftW x *, ^ITTH. Per/. (369) ^FR, ^1, gR ; iff ^,
. Kim.. ^jfV^. ^or. (427. a)
h^; ^^ctifk
Kim.
. Prec. ^rw^. Aim. Wl^l. Cond.
Atm. ^jw^. Pass., Pres. *&', Aor. yd sing, vawiff. Caus., Pre*.
^TRinffl ; Aor. ^f^JT. Des. j^mftf, -^. Freq. lftf*l, TTt^tf^. Part.,
Pres. *fj; Past Pass. ^; Pa*/ Indecl. ^T, -^Wj J'w/. Pa**.
or 1^ or ^TST.
649. Root "^ (special stems "3^1, ^, "^, see 314). Inf.
* Some authorities reject these forms.
o o
282 CONJUGATION OP VERBS. GROUP II. CLASS II.
(borrowed from ^at 650) 'to say,' 'to speak/ Par. and Aim. Pres.
gNlfn, wftfn*, Wtfif*; ^rat;, ^^*, ^"T*; *i!% ^> 3*%*.
A'tm. ^, ^, *7T ; ^5!, g*i^, ^nw ; ^, *, ^. //>/. ^ra^ or
(314. a),
. Pot. ^l*i, d^m, &c.
Impv. -amftir (58), ^5,
The other tenses and forms are borrowed from ^f ; as, Per/.
&c. ; ist Fut. MDirf^T, &c. ; see ^^ at 650. But the Pres. participles
are ^?^ and IpTO.
650. Root ^[ (320). Inf. ^r^ ' to say,' * to speak.' Par. In the
General tenses Atm. also. Pres. wfor, ^rf^, ^rfB ; ^^,
^T^, ^W, ylfif (borrowed from "^ at 649). Impf.
(294), ^?^ (294); ^T^^, *c|i*^,
Pot. ^m^, ^ran^, I^MII^, &c. Impv.
ii^; ^r^TT, ^i, ^^ (borrowed from ^). Per/ 1 . (375. c) ^CJH,
or gqr<f, ^r^i^; "3rf^R, ^^r^, "^r^rg^; '^ff^T, "3>^, "^^. -^tm.
grW,^; gtf^l, -gi^ro, -3WTW ; -grf^Ht, grfw, I 3if^. ist Fut.
ftq. Xtm. ^nf . awe? Fut. m^iPH. Atm. ^^. ^4or. (441)
Atm.
T. Prec. ^T^ll^. ^tm. w^N. Cond. ^^a^^. Aim.
. Pass., Pres. ^Jj (47 1) ; Aor. yd sing. ^nfa. Caus., Pres. ^r^-
; Aor. ssefU^. Des. f^^rfT, -T^. Freq. ^r^'-ai, cjHf-oi. Part.,
Pres. "ff^i(j Aim. Tr*ttni (borrowed from ^ at 649) ; Past Pass. ^ ;
Past Indecl. ^w, -Tai ; Fut. Pass, ^jsg, sr^rta, ^T^f or ?m.
651. Root ^(special stems *n^ and ^, 321). Inf. Trf^ or *nf^rj*(
' to wipe,' ' to rub,' ' to clean.' Par. Pres. nf^, *rrf^ (296), nft (297) ;
^f^> ) ?^'[> 1^5 J*fl^, *p?, TT^f'ir or JJ*rfnf. Impf.
(294), WIT^ ; *fjsf, ^F^, ^njBI^ ; tjijiH, ^njl?, iiMT^ or
qwR(, &c. Impv. HMifn, ^Tftr (303), Tif ; TT^r
$S, HMiJ or j|^. Per/! *WTt, 1<irAv( or inrrt (370. e),
or innfsN *<*! or TfT^, *<sf or WJM HftfT or
* For ttese forms are sometimes substituted and sing, 'tefir^, 3rd sing.
and du. wit? 3^, 3rd du. ^1^^; 3rd pi. Vdi^j all from the Perfect of a
defective root *T^, with a Present signification.
t According to some, the 3rd pi. of the Imperfect is also wanting.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP II. CLASS II. 283
or i&nS, HJJ^ or swrg^. ist Fut. ntrfa or
(415. a). 2nd Fut. *TIH*hfa or *nfwsnf*T. Aor. ^IHHSJ*
'HI?T(; *HH5+)r, ^wrt, 'swuS^. Or
r, &c. Free. *j^m^. Cond. wng*i^ or
Pass., Pres. ij^ ; Aor. yd sing. ^mrf^. Caus., Pres. Hl^lfH ; Aor.
or *JJtft<jiW. Des. foHTTSJlfa or faijKJlfa or ftwrfsfarfir. Freq.
5*r, Htt- or Jrftr or HHTftff (yd sing, -mff ). Part., Pres. n^; Past
Pass, ij?; Pa*tf Indecl. JjfT or Hlf^HI, -^T; JPw^. Pass. n!*l or
TlfWiT^, TTWrhl, WTJ or ^RJ.
652. Root ^ (317). JV. 'W^T *to eat/ Par. Pres. wftr, ^rfw,
(3 1 7. i),
r. Impv.
. Perf.
. ^4or. 1 ?nj^i (borrowed from root
iVflrfTT ; ^TTRTPT, ^nww, ^JH^. Prec. ^NTPPW. Cond.
H N . Pass., Pre*. ^rer ; ^or. 3rc? 5m^r. ^rrf^. Caus., Pre*.
Aor. ^Tif^H. Des. ftnTWlfir (borrowed from ^). Part., Pre*.
Past Pass. SFV; Pa/ Indecl. lfn; Pw/. P*5. ^^*q, ^^tflu,
653. Root ^ (special stems ^, ^tfi?, ^f^, ^5, see 322).
T ' to weep.' Par. Pres. Ttf^ffc, ttf^ft, ttf^ ;
, ^f^^I, ^fJfT. Jwija/l ^Xt^, W^t^ or
(Pan. vii. 3, 98, 99);
Pot. ^?n^. Impv.
i* Fut. ^f^inftR. znd Fut.
Aor. vs^>
Or
Prec. ^ir*^. Cond. 'flClfi'm^. Pass.,
Pres. ^31 ; Aor. yrd sing. wctft[. Caus., Pre. ^^nfT ; ^4or.
Des. ^^f^rftr. Freq. xt^il', ^ctftj (yd sing, ^ttfa) or
Part., Pres. ^r^; Past Pass. ^f^TT; Past Indecl.
Pass, ttf^iraj, ^tfti, tNr.
654. Root ^* (special stems f^, ^, w, and f, see 323). Inf.
* to strike/ * to kill/ Par. Pres. ^fiw, f ftr,
* It must be borne in mind (with reference to 323) that han only loses its nasal
before t and th, if not marked with P. When the prep. Wr d is prefixed, this root
may take the Atmane, in which case the 3rd sing. Pres. will be
O o 2
'284 CONJUGATION OP VEEBS. GROUP II. CLASS II.
^ST, irftr. Imp/. ^^, 1 *^, ^^ (294) ;
*, &c. /ipv.
, ^U,^. Perf. *nTR(376), inrf^J or
j ^rfar, sra, TOJ^. i** -fta. iJinlw. 2nd Put.
. (432. b) ^snrftnn?, ^roft^, ^nnr^;
. Prec.imm*. Cond. vffrapr. Pass., Pre*.
; Per/ 1 , irir (473) ; -^or. 3r? sing, wtrrfa (or 'sr^fv, borrowed from
or MlfHrtl^; 2nd Fut. ^ftftff or TTtf^. Caus.,
Pres. VMMlfir ; ^for. ^rsfhfiR. Des. fH^i^lfH. Freq. ^ifi*I or *iffM,
T or ^^p*l or 9i^ff)fH ; see 708. Part., Pres. in^; Past Pass. ^TT ;
Indecl. fRT, -^w; JPtt/. Pa*5. f?n*r, fTnfhi, -mw.
655. Root ^t^ (special stems ^r^ and wfa, 322. ). //! ^5^ * to
sleep/ Par. Pres. ^ffqfa, ^ffrifa, ^Wir ; ^fi^, ^fr^, farft( ;
ff. Iwz//. ^*rfV*(, ^H*<lM^ or SHyit^, vi*sm^ or
, &c. (see ^ at 653). Pot. ymi^. Impv. ^mftr,
, <si f Tg ; ^mw, ^f^in^, *sjfaiu*^; ^TTTT, ^firf, *si^'ir. Per/".
(382) ^m, ^^fq^ or ^^i, gvrnr ; f^ft
Fut.
. Cond. ^r^t^p^. Pass., Pres. *pqr (471); Aor.ydsing.
. Caus., Pre*. 4<rm^lf>T ; -^or. ^g^, &c. Des. ^^^TTftr.
Freq. ^^, ^rr^f^T or fll^q)(H. Part., Pres. ^^; Past Pass. ^R ;
Past Indecl. gwr, -grq ; Fut. Pass. ^HM, ^Tj7fhT, ^mr.
656. Root ^ (special stems ^ST and g^T, 324). Inf. 4f$|g^ * to
wish/ Par. Pres. ^ftfir, ^fty (302), *fr (3)> "W(> "5^, ^^;
1 ?rez (294), ^R7; ^g (251. a),
Po/. 7^41^, <f^J^, &c. Impv*
(303), ^|; ^rnr, -5^, -??TT N ; ^rm, TF,
(375- c ) ^*i9r, iqfy*!, <Rm ; "a
1st Fut. ^%iTTftR. 2WC? Iw/. tfP$|UJ|f<. ^or. ^^Tf^JMH,
3ft^, &c. ; or ^M^m*^, -^ft^, -^ftaj, &c. ; see 427. Prec.
Cond. W^r^iuiH. Pass., Pre*. ^TI (471); ^4or. 3^ 5m^. ^Rifjfl or
i. Caus., Pres. qityJJlfr ; -4or. ^<^c(5(H s . Des. f^f^rf*?. Freq.
or ^R^ftfJT. Part., Pre*. T^; Pa*/ Pass,
;. Pa*.
. * It must be borne in mind (with reference to 323) that han only loses its nasal
before t and.fA, if not marked with P.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP n. CLASS n. 285
, 657. Root fe^ (special stems f^ and 3^, 309). /w/".^^' to hate.'
Par. and ^tm. Pres. iff*?, ^fiBjf (302), %ffc (301) ;
$ 9 ff^rr. Impf. sHg M^, ^7 (294),
or ^rfgTJ^. At
. Pot.
Perf. f?jt^,
. Atm. r^fg^, f^firf^, r<r^M ; r^r^fM^, f^rsm<*i,
. I* Jtoklfilftpr. Atm. ^nf. 2nd Put.
. (439) 'srf^ng
Atm. (439. a)
Prec. ng(l'f. Atm.
Cond. ^ira?n^. Atm. <4(^^r. Pass., Pres. f"Bl, &c.; ^4or. 3^ sing.
^Hiffa. Caus., Pre5. ir^TfiT: Aor. sif^feM^. Des. f<Pf afifn, -"%.
Freq. ^feui, ^if'W or ^ir^fiT. Part., Pre. f^^; P*^ Pa*5. fsr? ;
Pa*^ Indecl. fiyr, -fira; Fw/. Pfl*. lnl, iwt^T, irT.
o. Root ^. Jw/". ^ftfip^ *to wear/ 'to put on (as clothes, &c.)'
Atm. Pres. ^, ^w (62. 6), ^ ; ^^, Ml^, ^FTnl' ; ^Rf, ^ or ^
(304), 9R^. Im/?/.
or ^RP^, ^^ETiT. Pot. ^rfa. /7?ipv. ^. Per/ 1 .
, &c. i*/ Fw<. c<rin ru^, and Fut. ^ftro. ^4or. SH^fa
, &c. Prec.
Cond. vjHfaiq. Pass., Pre*. cj^. Caus., Pres. cTT^ITft? or -^. Des.
. Freq. ^Nuj, ^Rfw. Part., Pres. wm^T; P*/ Pa**,
Indecl. wftn^r, -^CT; ^FW. Pa**. MfH<A|, 4fl*l, ^T^I.
658. Root $rr^ (special stems ^n^ and f^r^, see 328). Inf.
^to rule/ 'to punish/ Par. (With ^<n *to bless/ Atm.) Pre*. -
f^l^^, f^Tef^, f^l?^; f^l 1 *^, f$F?, ^ii^Pir (3io.Obs.)
. b), ^IT^ 1 ; ^TT^f ,^TRn^, ^TWT^; 51 1 W^, ^TT^ or fT(&l (304),
or ^r$nq; (294^ 34- a \ "^n\ (34) ;
^P^fF, vjjli^. Atm. ^nftr, &c.
Pot. r^iuri^. Kim. ^rnrta. Impv. ^nmftr, ^nfv (304),
51 aim ; ^i^iPH^, 9 9 1^1 ^ ^5HH4H' ^I^I^H, $i$im, wi^. Xtm.
, &c. it Fut. isinftnnftR. Atm. qnfadQ. 2nd Fut.
. (441)
286 CONJUGATION OP VERBS. GROUP II. CLASS II.
. Prec. fsnrran. Atm. llftfiftM. Cond. nftnR*. Atm.
. Pass., Pres. fq&fajz. c) ; Aor. yd sing. ^r$nfa. Caus.,
Pres. ^THIUlfa ; Aor. ^mm^. Des. fsi^nf^rerfa. Freq. ^f^T^T,
3ll$nftR or snsiuflfT. Part., Pres. $rrei^ (141. a); Past Pass, f$r?;
Past Indecl. Sllfaril or f^iyr, -f^n*?; Fut. Pass. ]5TTftnT^T, $n*nfta, f^HT.
659. Root f^; (special stems f^f and ^r). Jw/". i^np^'to anoint/
' to smear/ Par. and ^tm. Pres. ^fa, vtfq (306. a), ^f*V (305) ;
(306. rf), fi^TT. Imj9/. ^^, ^M^ (294),
. Pot. fc^IT^, f^JT^, &c. ^Ltm. f^^hr. Impv.
, f^v, f^5 -^tm. ^%, fwr^,
. Per/, f^,
or -i",
. ist Fut. ^TVlf^T. Atm. ^nn^. 2nd Fut.
. Aor. (439)
rfw^fcf, ^rf\i^[. ^tm. (439. b) ^rf^f^, ^fvvsfyi^ or
or ^rf^rv; wfvHfNf^ or ^if^5|f^, ^rfvTSfTO
, SHfwVSfi^ or ^rfvroi^, ^rfv^nf. Prec.
. Cond. 'sr^l^. ^tm. ^31. Pass., Pres. f^; Aor.
$rd sing. sj^p. Caus., Pres. ^mf*f ; Aor. TX$fo$i{. Des.
-^. Freq. ^f^, ^ftl (yd sing. ^^v). Part., Pre*.
Pass, f^ni ; Pa^ Indecl. f^r&n, -f%& ; jPw/.
660. Root ^ (special stems |^ and ^;). Inf. ^nj*{ * to milk.'
Par. and .Aitm. Pres. ^ftr, vtf^ (306. a), ^frv (305) ; <pr^, f 7 ^,
r. Atm. g|, ^, gn| ; ^5^, |^ } |^K ; |^,
(306. d), %&. Impf. ^^, T&fr^ (294),
- Xtm. ^f^
^^, ^f^> Pot. ^n^, I^TT^, &c.
Atm. g^hj. Jm^v. ^ITftT, gfHi (306. c), ^^ ;
(306. c?), |^WT^. Per/, g^,
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP II. CLASS III. 287
. ist Jut.
. 2,nd Fut. vi^lfa. ^tm. vt^. Aor. (439)
^^;. Kim.
(439. b] ^fty, ^HfVJl^ or 4lgJt|l4l, ^5pf or 'a|ry ^ngvijNfig or ^3f?
or ^\plnT, W^^nT. Prec.
. Kim. ^sfhr. Cond. ^vt^PT. Atm. ^nft^. Pass., Pre*.
; Aor. yd sing. '3fq[tfigr. Caus., Pre*. ^inftT ; ^4or. ^^^*T. Des.
T, -if. Freq. ^|^, ^Hir (3^? *m^r. ^tfni). Part.,
Paw. |ry; Past Indecl. ,^n, -pi; Pw/. Pass,
or pr (573. a).
661. Root fe5?; (special stems fpj^r and Bf). /w/*. ^|H 'to lick.'
Par. and ^itm. Pres. (329) ^ftr, ^ftj (306), &fe (305. a) ;
(305. a), c^)d^; f<3Sl^, f^fe, frt^rfl . Atm. fe^, f?5^,
(294),
T. Pot. fcJ^n^, frt^l^, &c. Kim. ftSTfa. Impv.
(306.0), ^^; 'rA^l^f, Wtfe*^, t5l?T^; ^^IT, tfte, r4^*a.
(306.0),
; frtfrif^H,
. Atm. fwfc?^, fcjOfiSf^, &c. l
Fut. fiVHIlfH. Atm. eSTQT. ^4or. (439)
-V5|rti^; -^Tf, -"Bpr, -^f^. ^tm. (439.
or ^(yt^ 1 ; ^TfH^T^f^ or wfcadl'f
or ssMl^*^ ^frtHfni 1 . Prec.
Ktm. (Vjisffaf, &c. Cond. SHrftt*!*^. ^Ltm. ^^, &c. Pass.,
^; Aor. yd sing, ^r&fijf. Caus., Pres. ^Mifa ; -4or. VMrtl
Des. rc4fc4VS|ir*i, -^. Freq. cfc4gr, rtcjfa (3rc? *zw^. rtrtfd). Part.,
Pre*. fc5; ^tm. Prt^H ; Pa** Pa**, cite; Pa*/ Indecl.
EXAMPLES OF PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE THIRD CLASS,
EXPLAINED AT 331.
662. Root g hu (333). Infin. $\$\ hotum, ' to sacrifice/
PARASMAI-PADA. Present Tense, ' I sacrifice/
juhomi ^<mjuhuvas or
uhoti Jfjuhutas Pfl juhvati
288 CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP II. CLASS III.
Imperfect, 'I was sacrificing.'
ajuhavam ^Tif^ ajuhuva ^^SJJ** ajuhuma
ajuhos >MJ^II^ ajuhutam ^^Jf^ qjuhuta
fl/ttAof *j^ n l\ ajuhutam WQ^-^ajuhavus (331. Obs.)
Potential, * I may sacrifice.'
juhuydm j c 4 J f juhuydva
SJ| Mini *^juhuydtdm
Imperative, * Let me sacrifice.'
T juhavdni *%3T3 juhavdva.
Per/- ($74- ff) W^> ^^11 or
, &c -5 see 3 8 5- e - Ist
Fut. ^Hifw. 2wc? -Fw#. ^luiifH . Aor.
sa^lsi^, ^a^gi*^; ^s^nJT, '5^?, ^r|^. Prec. '^cmtL Cond.
Pass., Pres. ^[; ^4or. 3rc? sing, ^nrrfa. Caus., Pre*. fT^rrfT; Aor.
m^^. Des. ^f^lfH. Freq. Wtf$, Wt^T or WtfrtfiT. Part.,
Pres. v$3&(; Past Pass. |7T ; Past Indecl. |Fn, -|m ; Fut, Pass
q or
OTHEE EXAMPLES OF CL. 3 IN THE ORDEE OP THEIE FINAL LETTEES.
663. Root ^T (special stems ^T, ^, see 335). Inf. ^TrJH 'to give.'
Par. and ^tm. Pres.
(331. Obs.)
. Po/.
. Per/ 1 . (373) ^, ^f^ or
H^ ^;
. Atm.
2nd Fut. ^r^MlfH. ^tm. ^T^. Aor. (438)
^tm. (438. d)
r. Prec.
. Atm. ^roN. Cowrf. ^rei*T. Atm. ^l^. Pass., Pre*.
Aor. yrd sing, ^rftf, see 700. Caus., Pres. ^TTmfo (483) ; Aor
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP II. CLASS III. 289
. Des. (503) f^TTfa, f^W. Freq. ^Hl, ^rfa or
Part., Pres. ^1^(141. a); Atm. ^R; Past Pass. ^c ; Past Indecl.
^WT, -^m; Fut. Pass. ^Tff*l, ^fta, ^.
664. Root VT (special stems ^VT, ^v, see 336). Inf. VTTJ^ ' to place.'
Par. and Atm. Pres. ^vrfa, cfVTftr, ^Vlfff ; ^% Vr^; (299. a),
(299. a); %u&
f (299. b),
, ^^(299. 6),
Impv.
A'tm. ^, ^fw, &c. ist Fut. mmfw. Atm. \rnn%, &c. 2wrf Fut.
. (438) 'w^, yra
tm. (438. d)
^^rf^, ^rfv^, ^rftj^ir. Prec.
Atm. vrafa. Cb/zc?. ^rvTFI^;. ^tm. ^TVT^. Pass., Pres.
^^. mftfiTT^ or VTffT^ ; ^4or. 37*6? *m^. ^rvrft(. Caus., Pre*.
Aor. *r$W(. Des. f\n*nfa (503). Freq. ^V^, ^TVlfiT or
Part., Pre*. ^mi (141. a); ^tm. ^VR; Past Pass, f^ir; Past Indecl.
f?r^T, -vnr; Fut. Pass. vTiro, vr^, v^i.
a. Root JTT (special steins farfr, f*n^, see 338). /w/". *rrg^ *to
measure.' Xim. Pres. f&,
, fannr. Impf.
. Pot.
, &C. Impv. ftT
nn^. Perf- *w, Tftr^, *T
Fut. irrer. -4or. (434)
f. Prec. ?T*ftT. Cone?. 'SfJTTO. Pass., Pres. fft ; Aor. yd sing.
. Caus., Pres. ^^Hlftr ; ^4or. ^flH q*^. Des. fjnwrftr, -T^ (503).
Freq. HH!^, mnfiR or JTRftr. Part., Pres. ftpRTR; Pas^ Pass. f*fiT;
Past Indecl. fr?5T, -ifR ; PM^. Pass. Hiri^4, nftl, HT.
665. Root ^T (special stems IT^T, *F&, W^, see 337). Inf. '^ItJ*^ * to
quit/ Par. Pres. ir^TftT, T^Tftr, W^TflT ; TfN^ (or rf^% see Pan.
vi. 4, 116), i^)v|^ (or iffl^;), (^1rt^ (or rff7R[) ; s*i^)*i^ (or fff*ra(),
(or 'SfffTqr), v[%fit. Impf. ^Hn*T^, ^>Tfl^, ^iffTi^; vni^hr (or
(or 'vH^f^rt*^), ^lal^tin^ (or SJlf^T^) ; ^IT^I (or ^T-
pp
290 CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP II. CLASS III.
(or ^nrf%ir), ^nrf^. Pot. w?rr^, ^n^, &c. Impv.
(or *Tf^f^) or ^rf^, -5^13 ; *r^re, ^1^ ( r ^ffi*0 ^tin^ (or
(or rffw), w^ij. Perf. w^, ^f^r or mro, ^ ;
Sfff*, STf, 5T|^. is/ .FW. fffllfo. 2nd Fut.
. (433) 'snnftn^, 'w^wt^, 'si^Ttfh^; *iir<H
^rftre, ^rfa^. Free. t^ra^. Cond.
Pass., Pres. *fft; Aor. yrd sing. ^^rfa. Caus., Pres. ^nnnftT; ^4 or.
. Des. f^nnfir. Freq. ^ft, *n^\ftt or ^ntftr. Part., Pres.
. a); Pa^ Pa**, fhr; P<w 7/z^ec/. f^T, -^nr; Pw/. Pas*.
666. Root *rt (special stems f%H, fwt, f^fT, see 333). Iw/. Hcft ' to
fear.' Par. Pres. fswftr, f^irf^, fawfir ; fwN^ or f^rft?
or ftrfiro(, f^fbra[ or frfHH^ ; f^ftT^ or f^rfiW^, f^ft^ or
(34). Imp/. wf^H^, 'srf^^;, ^f^^; ^f?>ft^ or ^f^5r
or ^rf^fvnr^, ^rf^vfhn^ or ^if^fHrn^; ^rf^^ or wf^fmr,
or ! rfgf*irr, ^rf%vr^ (331. Obs.) Pot. f^Hl^rr^ or f^fircr?^, &c. Impv.
vftf^ or fHsrftrff , f^ ; fswiir^, f^hr^ or f^nr^, f5M%
or frfcffTt; fwnH, f^ftl or f^f>Tir, f%ig (34). Per/! (374)
ftrr or fwq, i^m^ ; f^fore, f^i^, f^ri^ ; f^f
. Or f^H<ii<4diiT (385. e). ist Fut. Hinf^. awfl? Fut.
Prec. >rtTrn3W x . Cond. ^wm*. Pass., Pres. vfft ; A or. yd sing.
Caus., Pres. nmmfo or -^, or r^ or >ft^ Aor. ^R^WffT or ^hrtin or
\ \
^Ttfir^T. Des. f^rft^rfn. Freq. wft or ^Hfii or Shnftftr. Part.,
Pres. f^n^(i4i. a); Past Pass. >ftii; Past Indecl. *ften, ->ft^; Fut.
Pass. HHr, H*Hlq, >N.
a. Root ^t (special stems fy|%, f^Tlt, fTfl^j see 333. a). Inf.
'to be ashamed/ Par. Pres. f5fgfT, fTlffa, ff gfrf ;
(123. ). Impf.
. Obs.) Pot. Hd^l^lH. Imp v. f ^ ^ M I HtBT ,
^^H, f*nfhr, frf^ig. Perf.
or ftn^r, fwiro; fwfr^R (374- e),
^ Fut. g'fflfw.
'^T|^, -W(, -WTHJ ^1^, -?, -^. Prec.
r. Co/z?. ^nrwr. Pass., Pres. ^1^ ; Aor. yrd sing. n^if?i.
Caus., Pres. flxRTfa ; J.or. ^1%%^. Des. i%nt^TfT . Freq.
or ^^ftf^. Part., Pres. f3Tfl*r^ (141. a) ;
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP II. CLASS VII. 291
Pass, jffatf or jfhf ; Past Indecl. jrtr^T ; Fut. Pass, fr l&i, jHI-
b. Root afq[ (special stems *TT^, W3TT, TsT, see 339). Inf.
produce/ Par. Pres.
. Pot.
or
or
. 2nd Fut.
. ^or.
, &c. Or ^nrf-T^T, &c. ; see 418. B. Prec.
or niiTO^. Cond. ^rrf^^T. Pass., Pres. n^ (cf. 617. a) or
4or. 3rc? *m^. ^nrfa. Caus., Pres. f H*(lftT ; -4or. ^RfhRH.
Des. fTHff^. Freq. nTT^ or T^^, raf"T. Part., Pres. 31^(141. a) ;
Pass. ffiT, ^rffnr; P*/ Indecl. wf?fi3T, -ir^r, -^Tni;
EXAMPLES OF PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE SEVENTH CLASS,
EXPLAINED AT 342.
667. Root f^ 6hid. Infin. "3^ thettum, ' to cut.'
PARASMAI-PADA. Present Tense, * I cut.'
thinadmi fftr^j^ thindvas . (: ^ rhindmas
fhinatsi f^-V|^ thinthas (345) fs^rxj 6hintTta (345)
6hinatti f^tf^ 6hintas (345) fis^for 6hindanti
Imperfect, ' I was cutting,' or * I cut.'
a66hinadam (51) ^PTs^'-'g 1 a66hindva ^Tfdl*l a66hindma
(294) ufa.H*^a<#&ifam (345)
aMhintdm (345)
(294)
Potential, ' I may cut.'
1 dhindydva
Chindydtam
dtdm
6hindydm
dhindyds
6hindydt
Imperative, * Let me cut.'
T thinaddni fs[f^T^ fhinaddva
dhinddhi (or 6Undhi, 345) f^tf*^ thintam (345)
6hinattu ^*A\*{ 6hintdm (345)
P p 2
a66hinta (345)
atihindan
(Mndydma
fhindydta
thindyus
dhinaddma
(345)
292 CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP II. CLASS VII.
Perf. f*rsn* (51),
Or
. Prec. fgtiran. Cond.
XTMANE-PADA. Present Tense, * I cut.'
chinde * f^Vg^ thindvahe P^^fl^ dhindmahe
chintse f(t^r^ 6hinddtJie f^r^ thinddhve
z'nfe (345) f^JT^TW 6hinddte fg[^rt thindate
Imperfect, ' I was cutting,' or ' I cut.'
a66hindi (51) ^?ra. ; 'f^ aMhindvahi ^fraar^l^ adchindmahi
atchinddthdm ^fTSS^Sft aMhinddhvum
a66hinta (345) ^f^r^TTrn^ a66hinddtdm ^\*f3Jt a66hindata
Potential, * I may cut.'
6hindfya T&*^3T%_ 6hindivahi f^T^mM5 fhindimahi
chindtthds i^'r^M 1^1*1 chindiydthdm hst^TS^^ chindtdhvam
6hindita T^^l4lcil*^ thindtydtdm \.*$\<<{ thindtran
Imperative, ' Let me cut.'
I'/iititiflni T'StT5'T^? dhinaddvahai f^f*T^'TH? thinaddmahai
thintsva i^^ixii*^ thinddthdm g^g*^ thlnddhvam
6hintdm (345) fi^^Irtl*^ dhinddtdm fsi'^ril*^ thindatdm
Perf. fqf^-, firfarf^, fafa^; f^facf^t, fqftac
# -iPM/. -inn^- 2 we? FM/.
f^,
. Prec. fgr^rhr. Cbwc?. ^Qu^i. Pass., Pre*.
rf^. Caus., Pre. %^inf*r ; ^or. vfwfta^r. Des.
, -w. Freq. ^nsau, ^^f?I. Part., Pre*. fsF^Tf; Atm.
Indecl. f^^i, -f%?r; FM^. Pass.
OTHER EXAMPLES OF CL. 7 IN THE ORDER OF THEIR FINAL LETTERS.
668. Root ^r^ (special stems ^r?nT, ^r^, see 347). Jra
anoint,' ' to make clear.' Par. Pres. ^rfi%T, ^T^rf^ (296),
TMIH, ^TR^ (294),
. Po^. ^i^nw. Impv.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP II. CLASS VII. 293
. Perf.
or
ist Fut. ^^rf^R or ^T%rn%r. 2nd Fut. ^nfa or
. Aor. ^nf^*, wgfa^, ^rrgffy wf^"^,&c., see 418.8. Free.
(453). Cond. ^TT^W or ^ITf^m. Pass., Pres. ^r=Rl (469);
Aor. yd sing. ^rrf^. Caus., Pres. ^T^TTTfifl ; Aor. -^ifyai*!. Des. ^rf^-
. Part., Pres. 'ST^; Past Pass, *r^ ; Past Indecl. *rf^r=rr or
or 'aw, -^n*T ; Pw/. Pass. ?Htfi4 or ^r^rf^, >Hy*fta, ^rsq 1 or ^bir.
a. Root ^3^ (special stems ^rpT, >J^, 346). Inf. ^t^T*^ ' to eat,'
'to enjoy.' Par. and Kim. Pres. ifrffw, ^prf
f- A/tm - ^ ^^ *j
. Impf. ^^HT^, ^pr^ (294),
. Atm. ^f
T. Pot. n. Aim.
. Atm.
. Per/.
i*^ Fut. >rtwftR. Atm. >^wt. 2nd Fut.
Atm. >r. Aor. ^nrn
. Atm.
^^unr, ^r^frf. Prec. ^mwr. Aim.
Cond. ^wtem. Ktm. wrh^. Pass., Pre5. >p*i ; Aor. yrd sing,
Caus., Pres. vitsnnf'T, -^r; Aor. ^"JJW X . Des. "^^pf^T, -^. Freq.
. Part., Pres. J^T^; Aim. >JWT; P*^ P**. J^i;
Indecl. gw, -JW ; PM^. Pa*5. >rtiraT, *rtnfhT, ^rtrq 1 or >ftiT (574).
669. Root >T^ (special stems HT5^, vr^, 347). In/". ^TT ' to break.'
Par. Pres. xitf**, WTfgf, H^Tfl! ; HW^, H^W^, *1T^; W^, >ToPT,
MfoF (294),
. Pot. H
or
*/ Fut. *m?m. 2nd Fut.
>i<<if*i. ^4or. WTfT^, -'^^, -"^i^; ^WN^,
^?mi!, ^MTTp;. Prec. HTMIU*^ (453). Cow?. 'SJT^r^. Pass., Pres.
(469) ; Aor. yrd sing. < ?wriiT. Caus., Pres.
Des. f^RBjiftr. Freq. ^^, ^fer. Part., Pre*. ^; Po*^ Pa**.
or W9fl, -*yQ; Fut. Pass. H^*T, H^H!^, H5?T.
670. Root g^ (special stems ^nr, g^, see 346). Inf. ifHn? 'to
294 CONJUGATION OP VERBS. GROUP II. CLASS VII.
join,' 'to unite.' Par. and Aim. Pres. *Rfor, $?Tf^, & c - '> like ^f*,
668. a. Atm. z^, g^, &c. Impf. snpnn{, ^^^ (294),
sf, &c. Kim. *BijF&, ^njewrc^ &c. Po/. ^HTTT. Atm.
gviinfr, f faf, *pff ; ^TTW, &c. Atm. 3*^, *j^r, gfSRm, &c.
Perf. Tjfi*1, ^*flPivi, ipto ; gtjftnr, &c. ; like >jf , 668. a. Kim. g^p.
ist Fut. *nl$TffcT. Kim. infant. ind Fut. tft^nftf. A'tm.
Aor. ^rsn? -r -"sn -TR -nm, -^nrnr; -^w, -rw, -r^. Or
, &c. Aim.
&c. Free. ^^I^IH. ^tm. <J^N. Cbwc?. 'snft^i^. Atm.
Pass., Pres. "^^ ; Aor. yd sing. "snftfaT, see 702. Caus., Pres.
^rrfH ; -4or. ^^1^. Des. ^T^rfiT, -is?. Freq. ^3^", ifhftfiw. Part.,
Pres. g^; ^tm. ^T^T ; Past Pass. ^ ; Past Indecl. gw, -^HT ;
Fut. Pass. *fhfiai, irt^Pfhr, *fr* or -faq (574, 574. a).
671. Root ^V (special stems ^DV, ^W, 344). Inf. TfeT * to hinder.'
Par. and ^tm. Pres.
* ^^T%. Kim. ^, ^W, *
. Impf. ^r^jrv^, ^i^n^ or ^i^Tn^ (294),
(294); VI^KI, ^?^5g^*, 'ans^T**; ^r^wr, ^^^*, ^r^y^. Atm.
. Pot.
Perf.
. Atm. ^^, ,
i* Fut. dsrfw. Kim. 'd^T?. 2nd Fut.
Atm. t^W. Aor. *^M*{, -^, -MT^; -HH, -WJ, -VfT^ ; -VW, -
Or ^I
. Atm.
. Prec. ^im*^. Atm. ^fN. Cond.
Atm. ^ittat}. Part., Pres. ^^; Aor. yd sing, ^srrtf^. Caus., Pres.
tftRTfa; Aor. 4^<f^. Des. Ij^rMlPn, -w. Freq. d^ifl, dttfT.
Part., Pres. "$pfl(j Atm. '^^M ; Past Pass, ^j ; Pa*^ Indecl. ^T,
-^|; FM/. Pass. tte^T, 3wftn, -fat.
672. Root fijprs (special stems %?R, f?f^). Inf. $(&*( 'to distinguish,'
* to separate,' ' to leave remaining.' Par. Pres. f^Rf 1 ^, fi[lfrWj f^Rffi? j
f^^;, f?f^, ^[f^; f^t 1 ^, f^r? , f^ftr. Imp/. vf^R^, ^f^R^ (294),
^"^ may be written for ^5^. Similarly, ^j^U for ^^, &c. See 298. a.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP II. CLASS VH. 295
; ^f^pw, ^fjrz, ^f^fu^. Pot. fjfpn^.
, fjftfe or f^iftss (303, compare 345),
, f$TF, f^fw. Per/.
-^TT, -^. Prec. %tijT^. Cond. ^r%p{. Pass., Pres. f^ ; Aor.
yd sing. ^$f^. Caus., Pre*. ^mrftr ; ^4o?-. v^fH^ra^. Des.
Freq. ^r%w, $^fJT. Part., Pres. f^f^; Pa*/ Pass. %?;
Indecl. %fT, -f^HT ; -F/. Pa*5. ^fK^r, ^twfar, ^tq.
673. Root f^ (special stems P^rf^, f^). /w/". ff ftr^ 'to injure.'
Par. Pres. f^Hftw, f^ffw*, f^Hftd ; f^^^, ff^T^, HjW^;
rftr. /m/?/ 1 . ^rf^^f^, r^H^ or ?lf^T^ (294, 304. a),
^, ur^'*^, ^sfir^n^ ; ^f?w, ^rf^cT, ^if?^. Pot. f?^n*^. Impv.
f^fKgr or f^tr (304), f^r^ ; fsn=perr=r, f^r^, P^wi*^ ; f^r^TH,
cT, fi^^Pff. Perf. frf?^, faff?ftri, ftrf^r ; ftrf^ftr^, ftrf?^ 1 ^, frff *fij^;
firf^, f'Tff^. i*/ Fut. ff
Aor. ^ff^
ftnu, 'srf^fR?, ^ffftn|^. Prec. ff^n^. Cbwa 1 . ^rf^ftrsj^. Pass.,
Pres. ff^ ; ^4or. yrd sing, ^rf^ir. Caus., Pre*. fi^Hnftr; Aor. ^rfir-
f^WT. Des. fsrffiiTtrrfa. Freq. ^f^, wffftR. Part., Pres. f^Vf^;
Past Pass, fiffaw; Past Indecl. f^ftn^T, -ff^; Fut. Pass, f^f^ri^,
674. Root -^ (special stems T^, ^r|, ^, see 348). Inf. wft^T or
Ji ' to injure/ * to kill.' Par. Pres. ^ifrfsr, ^infof (306), ^rfe (305. a) ;
, ^5^ (298. b); i3R(, ^, ^^if. /mj9/*. ^<ll*T, ^n^TS
(294), ^ij*!jT; 's?^, ^T'IJIHH, -nijiWTH; ^?r, ^^w, ^njf^. Pot.
ipv. ^TirfTf^T, ^ftj^ (see 306. c), "g^r^ ; g*o^T
, 7f^, ^^ff- Per/! wirf , ifffff 1 ^ or inrf, ifirf;
rf^f^FT, ff^, TT^|^. I*/ Fut. irftirrftR or flflPw. 2WO 7 Fut.
or if^rfj?. ^4or. ^TTrFtvr, -^T^, -^fi^; -ff'KT, -ff?*T, -ffFR;
-S5RT, -^. Prec. ij^im N . Cond. ^nrff^IH or ^riy^H. Pass., Pres. %$;
Aor. yd sing. wff. Caus., Pre*. l&rf* ; Aor. ^nnr^ or
Des. fiTffft*rrfa or fTT^^rfiT. Freq. WT^^, ircfafir (3rrf m^.
Part., Pres. TJjn^; Pa/ Pas*. (305. a) Tpf; Past Indecl. irf|Fn or TJ^T,
-r; PM/. Pa**, flf!^ or ufaj, wf^TT, r.
* Final ^ s preceded by a or a remains unchanged before the terminations si
and se; see 62. b.
296
CONJUGATION OP VERBS. GROUP HI. CLASS V.
EXAMPLES OF PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE FIFTH CLASS,
EXPLAINED AT 349.
675. Root ^ vri. In fin. ^f^[ varitum or wfrj* varitum, ' to cover,'
* to enclose/ * to surround/ ' to choose *.'
Note, that the conjugational j nu becomes JJJ nu after 3 vri by 58.
PARASMAI-PADA. Present Tense, ' I cover.'
vrinomi l^^H vrinuvas f
vrinoshi
vrinoti
^fiS*&( vrinuthas ^fi** vrinutha
^3^ vrinutas ^pTfar vrinvanti
Imperfect, * I was covering/ or * I covered.'
avrnavam
avrinos
avrinot
vrinuydm
vrinuyds
avrinuva
J^l. avrinutam
\ avrinutdm
Potential, ' I may cover.'
vrinuydva
vrinuydtam
vrinavdni
Imperative, * Let me cover.'
vrinavdva
vnnutam
vrinotu ^Hl^ vrinutdm
Perf. (369) ^TK, ^^ (Vedic) or ^rfbl (see 370),
^*r, ^r, ^w^ or ^^^1[. is/ .Fw/. (392.
(393). 2c? jFw/. ^TWfR or <u1mifa (393).
aminuma \\
avrinuta
avrinvan
vrinuydma
vrinuydta
vrinuyus
vrinavdma
vrinuta
vrinvantu
or
. Prec. far*n*W or ^TW (448. b). Cond. ^T^fbTH or
ATMANE-PADA. Present Tense, ' I cover.'
vrinve ^l^. vrinuvahe * * ^"3^ vrinumahe 1 1
vrinushe ^TFTT^T vrinvdthe ^3^ vrinudhve
vrinute ^iiqirt vrinvdte ^^^ vrinvatc
* In the sense of to choose,' this root generally follows cl. 9; thus, Pres.
Unfa, 1*nrfa, ^Tfir; ^ift^, &c. See 686.
t Or ^^( vrinvas. J Or ^*W^ vrinmas. Or >ii<|<H avrinva.
Or ^a^tT avrinma.
IT ^ ri is sometimes written with long r in which case 374. k may be applied.
** Or 'J<| c ^ vrinvahe. ft Or ^TH^ vrinmahe.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP III. CLASS V.
Imperfect, ' I was covering,' or ' I covered.'
297
avnnvi
avrinuthds
avrinuta
vrinv{ya
vrinvtthds
vrinvita
vrinavai
vrinushva
vrinutdm
avrinuvahi *
avrinvdthdm
'Wj<! e Hifl*^ avrinvdtdm
Potential, ' I may cover.'
vrinvwahi
vrinvfydthdm
vnnviydtdm
avrinumahi t
^T^JJel^ avrinudhvam
avrinvata
Imperative, ' Let me cover.'
vrinavdvahai
vrinvdthdm
vrinvatdm
Perf. ^ (369) or
or
or
vrinvimahi
vrinvfdhvam
vrinvtran
vrinavdmahai
^JJlsW vrinudhvam
vrinvatdm
or
or -
Or
, &c.
or
or
Or
Or
(44 8 - *) Cond.
sing, ^ift. Caus., Pr
Des. frefrjnfiT or -
or -$, I^Tftr or -^ (503). Freq. ^t^ (511) or
Part., Pres. ^TF?^; ^tm. TTT; Past Pass, ff; Past Indecl.
or
. Pass., Pres. f?ra ;
or -if, or TTTTnfT or -^ ; Aor.
OTHER EXAMPLES OF CL. 5 IN THE ORDER OF THEIR FINAL LETTERS.
676. Root ^J$ (special stems ^J?jrt, ^p?J, see 352). Inf. ^ftij*^ 'to
hear.' Par. Pres. ^Ttftf'T,, rftff? TrftfiT q or
or
or
Pot.
. Per/". (369)
- Ist
Aor.
* Or ^?Ff*r avrinvahi. t Or ^TOf^ avrinmahi.
J ^ is sometimes written with long n, in which case 374. k may be applied.
This root is placed by Indian grammarians under the ist class.
aq
298 CONJUGATION OP VERBS. GROUP III. CLASS V.
Free. ^Aim*^. Cond. ^psta^. Pass., Pres. ^r; Aor.
yd sing. ^rwfo. Caus., Pres. TSRJiTfa ; A or. ^f^rsi^ or ^sr
Des. Spni. Freq. SMWl, sfoftfa or ^fter^fa. Part., Pres.
Past Pass, spr; Past Indecl. ^RT, -^W; ^W. Pcm.
677. Root ^* (special stems ipffr, ^g). 7rc/. >rf%3^ or tffip^ * to
shake/ 'to agitate. 5 Par. and Kim. Pres.
or T* 1 T J W or
Imp/, wpf^, ^?f^, ^fh^; ^3^ or ^^, ^3
or JT ^TT . ^tm. n^ ^f ^5 "H^ or
. Pot.
Aim.
- Per f- (374- ^) fVR, fvf^i or
or -f, $f*- lsf Fut -
or tnf5R. -tm. vf^iTT or vftnf . 2nd Fut. ^fVnfH or
Aim. vf^ or vtw. Aor* ^rvrf^w, ^rvR^^,
f^r, ^nnfes, ^vrf^^. Or
, -wm; 'snfhff, ^nft
yf^T^Tw^ -^rnT ;
r. Or ^nftf^, ^rvftsT^, ^nft?; ^ivt^f
tWif. Prec. ^5T*W. ^tm. vf^w)T or \fNfai. Cond.
or ^nft"Hl*T. Atm. '^nrfr 1 ^ or ^rvt 1 ^. Pass., Pres. ^5;
sing. ^wrfa. Caus., Pre*. ^nnftr or VT^lf*? ; Aor. ^HH or
. Des. f^?TftT, -^. Freq. ^5, ^hftfrr or ^Tv^fTT. Part.,
Pres. ^t^; Atm. ^WTT ; Past Pass. ^ or ^ff ; Past Indecl. ^r,
-^5 ; Fut. Pass, yf^fnq or v>fnqr, V^fhr, Ml^ or \F*.
a. Like ^may be conjugated *J 'to press out Soma juice/ which
in native grammars is the model of the 5th class ; thus, Pres. *Jftft,
&c. The two Futures reject i ; ist Fut. TffnrTfe?, &c.
678. Root ^ or ist (special stems wuft, ^j). Inf. wfic^ or
This root may also be >JTtfa &c., and also in the pth class ; Pres.
T, ^TTffI ; ^"ft^^j &c. ; see 686 : and in the 6th (JfTTfo 280). In the
latter case the Aor. is ^njfVn*^, &c. j see 430.
f This root may also be conjugated as a verb of the pth class; thus, Pres.
, &c. See 686.
CONJUGATION OP VERBS. - GROUP III. CLASS V. 299
or wf*^ 'to spread/ 'to cover/ Par. and Xtm. Pres.
&c. ; like ^ at 675. j^tm. *^F, ^p, &c. Impf. ^?Hijr^. Kim.
^iw%. Pot. *^pn*i. Kim. ^pjfta. Impv. ^jrerftr. Xtm.
Perf. (352. c, 374. ) HWK, w, tf^rn:; irerfbr,
. Kim. rrere, frerft$, I^CK ; T^rfic
or -|-, irerfiS:. ist Fut. ^rftinf^R or ^arfaTfw or
Kim. ^rfbnt or ^nrtint or wfit. 2nd Fut. ^rfc-cnftr or
Kim. ^rftw or wtf'nr. Aor. ^cTif^^, -^N[, -^; ^reniTE^, &c. ; see
675. Or ^rsrrii^, -'ff^, -^P^; iwiM, -f^, -ti^; ^rwr^, -t, -'|^.
Kim. ^fdrf^ or ^artf^ or ^ra^fa or ^ngftft. Prec. ^nire^ or wt^re^.
Kim. ^\T^ or wfT^Tf or ^ft^TT. Cowc?. ^H?riTtq^ or ^rerft'Hl^;. Kim.
^rerfiw or ^wO'Br. Pass., Pres. (467) ^r^f; Aor. $rd sing.
Caus., Pres. ^n^nftr ; ^4or. ^frfW or -iJriW. Des.
or fTreR^^rfH, -^; or fVrcfHbfiT, -^. Freq. Trrer^ or H^cftSf, TTT^fH or
inQ^crfil. Part., Pres. M<HI{J Atm. WWR ; Past Pass. ^H or
(534) ; Past Indecl.. ^r^T, -Ht^, -^m ; Fw#. Pass. ^fbni or
or rrtT, ^^Trfhl, ^n^.
679. Root ^TF* (special stems ^r^, ^, SRJj^)- Inf. ^^* to be
able/ Par. Pres.
. Pot. ^TRT^. Impv.
. Perf.
or ^HFT, 51311* ; iifcra, %^
Fut. srarfw. 2w? Fw#. ^r^nfT. Aor.
. Or ^r$rfjre
flWB[. Prec.
Pass., Pres. ^r^ ; -^or. 3^ sing, ^^rrfcu. Caus., Pre*. ^rrlf^rrftT; Aor.
. Des. r^5lf<*mrH or f^lfT, -%t (53) Freq.
or ^n^RtVftT. Part., Pres. \\d^\ Kim.
Indecl. ^ruT, -$n*r; -R^. Pa
680. Root ^V (special stems ^>ft, ^,
prosper/ 'to flourish/ 'to increase. 5 Par. Pres.
. (351. )
* ^I^ is also conjugated in the 4th class, Parasmai and A'tmane (Pres.
&c., ^"w); but it may then be regarded as a Passive verb. See 461. b.
t This form of the Des. generally means 'to learn/ and is said by some to come
from a root ^T^
Q q a
300 CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP III. CLASS V.
; wjN,
Pot. ^pr^. Impv.
. Perf. ^nfv,
ist Put.
. Or ^n^, -v^, -<h^; -VT^, &c.
Cond. ^Hin5i^. Pass., Pre*. ^Tfl; Aor. yd sinff.^nfq. Caus.,
; Aor. ^ff^. Des. ^?f^fvmfH or ^wrfl (503). Part., Pres.
; Past Pass. ^ ; Pa/ Indecl. ^f^RT or r, -^i ; Fut. Pass.
681. Root ^TT^ (special stems wsft, ^Tff, ^TTTT^). Iw/". WST*^ * to
obtain/ Par. Pres.
T. Impf.
. Pot.
- Perf. ^nti,
^. ist Fut.
. 2nd Fut. ^m-u'ifa. Aor. ^rf?^, wre^, wncn^; ^TR'R, ^r^H*(j
^?rrnn^. Cond. wreq*j. Pass.,
; ^4or. yd sing. ^frr. Caus., Pre*. ^SR'mf*! ; -4or. ^nfqrj^.
Des. (503) ^HnfH. Part., Pre*. ''sm^; Pa^ Pas*, ^mr; Pa^ Indecl.
^TTRT, -^rroi; PM/. Pa**. ^STTHII, ^iqvft^i, ^n 1 ^.
a. Root ^S^J (special stems ?SFS\, ^?^, ^T^w). Inf. ^?f$np^ or
*to obtain/ 'to enjoy/ 'to pervade.' Kino.. Pres.
. Impf.
, WSRTT. Pot.
. Impv. ^nsa,
"sr^cn^. Perf. (367. e) ^TT^, ^n^rf^ or
or 41 M^ (37 I )j WT^IT^, ^TTTW^J ^fRf^R^ or
or ^nr ^rr^fft. is* Fut. ^r%in% or
ind Fut. ^r%^ or ^i^. Aor.
, ^rrepr. Or
. Prec.
or 1 3T^fa. Cond. ^1%^ or ^n^. Pass., Pres. ^q^ ; Aor.
yd sing. ^nf^T. Caus., Pres. ^rr$r*nfT ; Aor. ^T%5rH. Des. ^r%%%.
Freq. ^n^ (511. a). Part, Pres. "snpn^T; Past Pass. 'Slf^rw or
'w; Past Indecl. ^{%rn or ^syr, -^rgrq; Fut. Pass. ^?f$nnq or
CONJUGATION OP VERBS. GROUP III. CLASS VIII.
301
EXAMPLES OF PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE EIGHTH CLASS,
EXPLAINED AT 353.
683. Root 3ji kri. Infin. ofiJT kartum, 'to do' (355).
PARASMAI-PADA. Present Tense, ' I do/
karomi ^jjt ^* kurvas ^^* kurmas
karoshi $^*R( kuruthas ^^ kurutha
kurutas qPff * kurvanti
kurydm
^fUT^ kuryds
^^TiT kurydt
Imperfect, * I was doing/ or * I did/
akaravam ^?^% akurva (73) S!'^*i akurma (73)
akaros -sj^^ j(^ akurutam ^=5<>ri akuruta
akurutam vi^q^ akurvan
kurydma
kurydta
^f^ fcwryws
Potential, * I may do/ &c.
urydva
kurydtdm
karotu
fakdra (368)
fakartha
cakdra
kartdsmi
kartdsi
Imperative, * Let me do,' &c.
karavdva FT^TT karavdma
kurutam gi^ri kuruta
kurvantu
fakrima
Perfect, ( I did/ or ' I have done/
6akriva
cakrathus
cakratus
First Future, ' I will do/
kartdsvas
kartdsthas
kartdrau
Second Future, ' I shall do/
karishydmi oBT^fiq^ karishydvas 1
karishyasi eftfi.'H'q^ karishyathas
karishyati ^ftrnrH karishyatas
kartdsmas
kartdstha
artdras
karishydmat
karishyatha
karishyanti
for
&c., would be equally correct ; see 73. An obsolete form
is found in Epic poetry.
302
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP III. CLASS VIII.
akdrsham
akdrshis
akdrshma
akdrshta
akdrshus
Aorist, ' I did/
akdrshva
akdrshtam
^TKTih^ akdrshtam
Precative or Benedictive, * May I do/
kriydsam f*ti*4l*5l kriydsva fmrW? kriydsma
kriydstam fwinsi kriydsta
'stdm
kriydsus
Conditional, ' I should do.'
akarishyam vj onr<.^4R akarishydva HHslift.'MFH akarishydma
akarishyas ^air<,^n^ akarishyatam ^ajrf^nT akarishyata
akarishyat <*ft.mn*^ akarishyatam ^H<+fJLU|c^ akarishyan
683. ATMANE-PADA. Present Tense, ' I do.'
(73) ^^ kurvahe ^^ kurmahe
kurushe ^TRT kurvdthe ^^^ kurudhve
kurute ^^m kurvdtc W^Tt kurvate
Imperfect, ' I was doing/ or ' I did/
akurvi (73) ^^^f^ akurvahi ^TS^f^ akurmahi
sj^^it^ akuruthds
akuruta
kurvtya
kurvtthds
kurvita
karavai
kurushva
^"^^t^rn^ akurvdthdm
'N'^^Tefl*^ akurvdtdm
Potential, ' I may do/,
^qfal^ kurvwahi
^T*<ix4[*^ kurviydthdm
PT kurmydtdm
Imperative, * Let me do/
karavdvahai
kurvdthdm
kurvdtdm
akurudhvam
akurvata
kurvimahi
kurvidhvam
kurviran
karavdmahai
kurudhvam
kurvatdm
takrishe
Perfect, ' I did,' or ' I have done/
dakrivahe "^fT^ {alcrimahe
6akrdthe '**'<$ dakridhve
dakrdte ^f"5R takrire
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP III. CLASS VIII. 303
kartdhe
kartdse
kartd
First Future, * I will do/
kartdsvahe ofi^T^R^ kartdsmahe
kartdsdthe firfTJ2[ kartddhve
artdras
karishye
nf<<M<1 karishyase
FftW?T karishyate
akrishi
^"^TT^ akrithds
fi^TTT kartdrau
Second Future, * I shall do.*
<*f<.4 1 q ^ karishydvahe
karishyethe
karishyete
Aorist, * I did.'
akrishvahi
akrishdthdm
*T akrishdtdm
^ karishydmake
karishyadhve
karishyante
krisMya
^krisM
krisMshta
akarishye
akrishmahi
akridhvam
^cjiMrl akrishata
Precative or Benedictive, ' May I do/
krishwahi ^m^flf^ krisMmahi
TH krishiydsthdm
T krishiydstdm
Conditional, ' I should do/
f^ akarishydvahi
krishiran
r^ akarishydmahi
akarishyata
Pass., Pre*.
or ^^B or
VIT. 4, 92). Part., Pre*. ^ft 1 ^; Atm.
Indecl. fi^T, -W; Pw^. Paw.
vt^rT^KTr akarishyetdm inlVMfl akarishyanta
(701). Caus., Pre*.
Des. f^Ft%fT, -^ (502). Freq. ^afft,
or ^^Ofa or ^ftcRtffa or ^cjf^fH (Pan.
Past Pass, w
684. Only nine other roots are generally given in this class. Of these the
commonest is K^'to stretch,' conjugated at 583. The others are, ^Trr'to go,'
'Sptf^ and f8n^ ' to kill ' or ' to hurt,' "^^ ' to shine,' ^TT ' to eat grass,' 1^ ' to
imagine,' Atm. ; ^*^ 'to ask,' ^JJ 'to give.' As these end in nasals, their
conjugation resembles that of verbs of cl. 5 at 675 ; thus
685. Root T^rn (special stems Tspift, ^Pj). -fw/"' HjlVg^ * to kill,'
*to hurt/ Par. and Aim. Pres. tpfifa, T^srHTT, T^nfliTT; T5(^^, &c.
Atm. ^^, ^*$3, &c.' Impf. ^reprj^, ^T^TO^, &c.
^tm. Tppfa. Impv. ^51^1^. Atm.
. Atm.
304 CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP III. CLASS IX.
. ist Fut.
. Aor.
. 2nd Fut.
(424. c),
, -fW, -fin^. Kim.. ^refftrrfa, ^Kjf*UHI^ or
i? or 'tjofir; wT5ffto^f*r, -"fawiT^, -ftsj*ucu*(j
. Prec. nmm*. Atm. TfcRfcr. Cond.
. Pass., Prt-5. T^iw ; ^4o*. yd sing. SHKjifty. Caus., Pre.
; Aor. ^NHJ^^. Des. P^HSfn^MTfT, -^. Freq. ^Kj^M, ^BjPiiH.
Part., Pres. HI'tH'i^; Atm. ^?jsriti; Pa*/ Pa**. E^pT; Pa*# Indecl.
or TftsWT -TW J^w/. Pa**.
EXAMPLES OF PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE NINTH CLASS,
EXPLAINED AT 356.
686. Root -5 yu. Infin. Tfwg^ yavitum, ' to join,' * to mix/
PABASMAI-PADA. Present Tense, ( I join/
yundmi ^rft^^ yunfoas ^il*l^ yunfmas
si ^"<f! ^ yunithas ^*^^ yunitha
yundti ^flfft^ yunitas gnffl yunanti
Imperfect, ' I was joining/ or * I joined/
oyundm
ayunds
yuniydm
yunfyds
yuniydt
ayuniva
ayunitam
H ayunttdm
Potential, ' I may join/
^'H'Tr^ yunfydva
yuniydtam
yuniydtdm
ayunima
ayunita
ayunan
yuniydma
yuniydta
'J'Tlf'T yundni
yunfhi
yundtu
Perf.
Imperative, ' Let me join/
yundva
yunitam
^ *OlTR yunttdm
or giffa,
or
^'HT yundma
^tiir yuntta
^^ yunantu
, -f^?, -
Prec.
Cono 1 .
* Some authorities give M^rtiPw &c. as the only form. See Laghu-kaum. 724.
.'
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP III. CLASS IX.
687. ATMANE-PADA. Present Tense, 'I join.'
yune *}*ft^ yunivahe ^vftH^ yunimahe
yunishe 5*TTO yundthe $*tf &T yunidhve
, *^ , -s
yumte ^ilrr yunate H'T'^ yunate
305
Imperfect, * I was joining/ or ' I joined/
ayuni
ayuntihds
a
ayunwahi
dm
ayundtdm
ayummahi
5*JT^ ayumdhvam
ayunata
yuniya
yunai
yunishva
yunitdm
Potential, * I may join.'
yuntoahi ^*fl*n^ yunimahi
kdm ^rfTl^T^ yumdhvam
HT yuniydtdm ^ fl ^ yuniran
yundmahai
T yun{dhvam
yunatdm
Imperative, * Let me join.'
yundvahai
yundthdm
yundtdm
or -
Prec.
Cbwc?. ^nrfaaT. Pass., Pre*.
nrrfe. Caus., Pre. ^rRTnfT
or finifnrTftT. Freq. ^ft^, ^^fT or
; Past Pass, gw; Pa*^ Indecl.
or ^i?cf.
or -
/ JFW.
^nfhre^. Des.
. Part., Pres.
"gw ; Fut. Pass.
OTHER EXAMPLES OF CL. 9 IN THE ORDER OF THEIR FINAL LETTERS.
688. Root in (special stems WRT, TTft, WI^, 361). Z/j/*. $rnj^ ' to
know.' Par. and Atm. Pres. TRTfl, n^nfff, WRlfff;
. Ktm.
. Impf.
. Atm.
. Pot.
. (373) ^ ^^ or
. Atm. ir^, wf^, w? ;
Fut. ^rnnfw. 2nd Fut
. Aor. (433)
R r
306 CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP III. CLASS IX.
, -fare, -f^l^- Atoa.
Prec. ifaTfl^ or sTTqra^. Kim. $rrrifa. Cond. ^$rF5F^. Aim.
Pass., Pres. (465. ) $mr ; Perf. m^ (473) ; ist Fut. $TTflT^ or $rrftnrr?
(474) ; 2nd Fut. $|rn3T or $rrfrrai ; Aor. yrd sing. ^rrfa. Caus., Pres.
or ^wfr ; ^4or. ^rfiTW^. Des. ftrgro (-^nfT, Epic). Freq.
n^nf*T or niifT. Part., Pres. STT^; ^tm. TtT^nf ; Past Pass.
Indecl. ^Ti^T, -?m; J^w/. P55. STTrrai, ?TT^T, ^T.
689. Root ^ (special stems jftijjT, atTjft, -aftm, 358. a), /w/. ^g^ ' to
buy/ Par. and ^tm. Pres. -&mfo, ^^ftr, "ajStwrflT
. Kim. jft^f, ^hjft
Impf.
Kim.
. Pot. lAnihnH. Kim. aW^. Impv.
Kim. "a^tar, ^hift 1 ^, "at^nTTrn^; "afNcR^, wNfTWT, afNrnn'T;
Perf. (374. e) fq^nr, fimfijvi or
; f^fisfim, Wnw,
, frfanrre, -IT^; f^rfafim%, f^f^ftf^ or -^,
JPW/. wriifa. Kim. inrrt. 2c? -^/. ^t^rfiT. Kim.
ft^; ^*^, -HI, -TH^J ^llw, -F, -^.
Atm. ^rfTi, -i^, -IT ; I 5ransr%, -TRT^TH, -wnrR ; ^^^f^, ^f^'r, vs^iMii.
Prec. ^t^TWT. Kim. ifrffa. Cowc?. trarapr. j^tm. 'sram. Pass.,
Pres. jfiw; Aor. yd sing. ^rwfa. Caus., Pres. aTWfa; Aor. ^fq-gnw.
Des. f^Jt^rfH, -^. Freq. ^ft^, ^rfi? or ^STftfr. Part., Pres.
wsfri(', Kim. sf^TT; Past Pass, jffa; Past Indecl. -afh^T, -?SN;
Fw/. Pas*, ^ff^i, fhM^iflir, ^w.
690. Like ?ft is H^ 'to please/ Pres. ift^irrf'T; Atm. irt^. Caus.,
Pres. ifNnnftT or HT^nnf'T ; Aor. ^rfxrerp^ or ^rfqjftTO^*. Des. fircrtaifrT.
Freq. ^ift^.
691. c5 (special stems ^n, 7^{\ e^, 358), 'to cut/ follows t,
*to purify,' at 583; thus, Pres. cgHlfo ; Atm. ?3%. Pot.
. Per/". t$<4N; Atm.
692. Root ^-sv (special stems ^TMT, ?jrt, ^). Iw/*. 5n5*( * to bind/
* Forster gives ^mo*; Westergaard,
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. GROUP III. CLASS IX. 307
Par.
r. Impf.
. Pot. ^tffan*^. Impv. Tjnftr, ^nT (357. a), THTTJ ;
wm, *nfhr, snnff. Per/! *nr*f , -snrf^re or ?-s&3 or
(298. a), ^
is/ FM. ^dlfw. 2nd Fut. HWlfH (299. a). v4or. ^r>n^r^ (299. a),
^WT Wt^, 'SW I f rtft i^; ^MTr^, ^^I'S'i,) ^^TT?^!*^; ^WPrW, ^RFST, ^>?Tn^.
Prec. ^nflnnir. Cond. ^THn^^. Pass., Pres. (469) ^i^. Caus., Pre*.
-^^^. Des. f^T7wrf?T (299. a). Freq. ^T^fl, ^Rftwr,
r. Part., Pres. "3W; Pa*/ P**. ^g; Pa*/ Indecl. "T, -^rwi;
693. Root ?p*i (special stems yj^, ?j^t, n^, 360). In/ 1 ,
* to string/ ' to tie.' Par. Pre*. IT^rf
, n^ftff. Imj9/.
(257- ), ?T^rg ; ?r^, ?rjh!^, -in^; IJ^UT, ?pjt?r, u^j. P^r/. (375. A)
, iJtrf^TJi or ijfvivr, T?J^|* ; sfJfftvN or q'fviw, iy-|Vj^ or
or ^^p( ; siyfr^ or ^f^T*T, *IU'V or ?fr , H^<-^ or
i*/ Fut. ?ffr^nTTftR. 2wo* FM/. ^PrVitinfiT. Aor. ^2jft*IW, -^ft^,
&c. Prec. JjujitiM. Cbwo*. ^Ryfpzroni. Pass., Pres. (469) ip^. Caus.,
Pre*. ?pvnnf*T; ^4or. ^iiRf^iw. Des. ftT^fr^mfir. Freq. n?T^,
. Part., Pre*. ?T^; Pa*/ Pa5. nfw; Past Indecl.
or Jlf^fi^T, -TFQ ; FM/. Pa**. ?jf?^fiT^I, 3F*nft*l, IF 3 !-
a. Like qwi is conjugated TRW * to loosen/ *r^ * to churn.*
694. Root TSprt (special stems TSTtfT, "^ft, ^l}- Inf. ^tfirg^ *to
agitate.' Par. Pre*. ^rftr, ^pn
T. Impf. ^rspjr^,
r^j^. Pot. wvtan^. Impv. wviftr,
(357- a , 5 8 ) ^wg ; Tjjvre, ^iftii^, -irm; ^nr, wvftH, w&x. Per/.
. 2nd Fut.
Or ^TS>TJT, ->r^, -^; -m^, ->nw, -wiw; ->im, ->?rr, -H^.
Cfeno*. ^reftfTOTJ?. Pass., Pre*. "^^; Aor. yd sing, sreftfa. Caus.,
; -<4or. 'ar^wmr. Des. '^tfvr^Tfr or ^jftoifa. Freq.
* Some authorities give the option of *iif|X4 in the ist and 3rd of the Perf.
Compare 339.
f Also cl. 4, Intransitive, 'to be agitated;' Pres. TJTHnfa, 612.
R r 2
308 CONJUGATION OP VERBS. GROUP III. CLASS IX.
, ^fasftf>T (yd sing, 'sft^fti). Part., Pres. ^f^; Past Pass.
or Bffor ; Past Indecl. "Sp^T or wfiw, -"ST*! ; Fut. Pass.
(58), ^>I.
695. Root ^pw* (special stems WVT, *Ttft, WV, 360). Inf.
'to stop/ 'to support/ Par. Pres. ^reifa; like TSH, 694.
. Po/. scwfan^. Impv. wtfTfrr, *T*R (357. a),
, -TTT^; STOW, ^Ttffa, WVJ. Per/1 WGF*H
Fut.
, &c. Or
wn^;. Cond.
. Pass., Pre. ^w. Caus., Pres. ^r?tnfiT ; ^4or. WiTCrPW^.
Des. firerfT^TfI. Freq. WTCW, inwTftr or Trrei'flf'T. Part., Pres.
; Past Pass. WW, Past Indecl. ^cTWT or ^rfwn^r; Fut. Pass.
696. Root ^f$rt (special stems ^P^T, ^Cfft, ^P3). Inf. ^[f^f( 'to
eat.' Par. Pres. 'sparft
^^i^, ^rrffa, ^r^fTfT. Impf.
-ITT'?; NHiylr,wP5rhr, ^iw^. Pot. ^^t^rw. Impv. ^^^,^^11^(35 7. a),
, -rn*r; '^T^TJT, ^f^fT, ^^^. Per/,
. ist Fut.
2nd Fut. ^r%Bnfa. Aor.
^nf^iFR; ^Tf^r^, ^T%F, ^if^r^^. Prec. ^Tire*(. Cond.
Pass., Pres. 'Br^. Caus., Pre*. 'srqnnfo ; Aor. ^if^^nr. Des.
f^r^Tftr. Freq. ^n^ (5U- a). Part., Pres. wg^; Pas/ Pass,
Past Indecl. ^r%iqT, -sr^; FM/. Pass, ^f^nr^i, ^^T^ft^, ^rr^.
697. Root fligi (special stems f^PST, first, %S). J^/*. ^if^IiJH or
' to harass/ Par. Pres. flTOTfa ; like ^T5?, 696. Impf. ^r
, -irw ;
, &c. Perf. f^^r, f^irf^ni or
or fifing (371),
or faf^*, f^f^l, f^fir^;. ist Fut. lifrTTTfw or |i?TftR. 2nd Fut.
or ^iVi*4irH. Aor. ^^^
-f^T^. Or
(439). Prec. fi^^T^m. Cond. viiif^I^ or
. Pass., Pres. fpi^l ; Aor. yrd sing, ^rirf^r. Caus., Pres. i^TiTfa ;
Aor. ^f^f^lH. Des. f^rfiif^mfT or f^f^r^nfi? or f^firglTfT. Freq.
* This root also follows cl. 5 ; thus, Pres. ^cPtft?. See 675.
t This is a different root from ^?5T cl. 5. See 682.
CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VERBS. 309
. Part.,Pre*.flP^; Past Pass, fpre or fpif^nT; Pastlndecl.
flifT or fnf^fi^T, -f^l ; Put. Pass. Iff^nT^ or
698. Root ip (special stems xjani,
nourish/ Par. Pr<?*. ijwfa, gwrftr,
nftr. Impf.
gwta, ^janbr, ^guji^. Pot.
Impv. gnrrTftr, ^TUT (357. a), pmg ; 5
. For the rest, see $^ cl. 4 at 621.
699. Root q| (special stems TJ^JT, sy^t, ^, 359 ; see 399. a).
' to take/ Par. and Atm. Pres. f^
- A/tm -
- Per f- (384)
or -i 1 , njfT. i*^ Put. ^riife
(399. a), ^itm. ^^WTf . 2nrf J^w^. i|^1u|irT. Atm. ?I^HT. Aor
. Pass., Pres. arg 1 ; Perf.*pf%; ist Put.
or HTTTr; 2w< M. ?T or ?rTf; ^or. 3rc sng,
$rd pi. ^rir^^T or s?nf^7T. Caus., Pres. HT^Tnftr; Aor.
Des. fif^^TfiT, --^ (503). Freq. 'srcfrjir, WT?rf?r (3rrf sing. lUOTfe) or
(711). Part., Pres. Jj^rjj ^tm. '^IH; Pa*^ P5*.
^. Pa**.
EXAMPLES OF PASSIVE VERBS, EXPLAINED AT 461.
700. Root ^T da (465). Infin. ^npr datum, ' to be given/
Present Tense, * I am given/
^ft rfiye ^tJT 1 ^ dtydvahe ^*l*i^ dtydmahe
3ffa dtyase ^^"^ diyethe ?ft^IKI dtyadhve
^HRl diyate ^*ftl diyete tfWft dtyante
310 CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VERBS.
Imperfect, ' I was given.'
'BR|T*nwf?> adiydvahi ^rffafRfilf adtydmahi
tyathds ^KftiTOT*^ adiyethdm ^nffa&El^ adtyadhvam
adiyata ^IcfTWn^ adiyetdm ^J^^Inr adiyanta
Potential, ' I may be given.'
diyeya <JTM^T% dfyevahi <^fawnf dtyemahi
diyethds ^ i^MlMf*^ diyeydthdm ^T^IS^'T dtyedhvam
diyeta ^**mn\*{ diyeydtdm ^1*1^ dfyeran
Imperative, ' Let me be given.'
tj TM rfiyai v^^% diydvahai ^TTH^ dtydmahai
diyasva ?f ll^Tn^ diyethdm ^tl**!^ diyadhvam
diyatdm <^l*lill*^ diyetdm ^1*1*111*^ diyantdm
Perfect, ' I have been given.'
^T^'^? dadivahe ^f^Hi dadimahe
dadishe ^^l^ daddthe ^"^^ dadidhve
^Irt daddte ^^1 dadire
First Future, ' I shall be given.'
I" ^TTn^ ddtdhe or ^nrT^^ ddtdsvahe ^fTrfTOT^ ddtdsmahe, &c.
[ ^TfTBT^ ddyitdhe <;i(VclH3i; ddyitdsvahe ^if^rtTW^ ddyitdsmahe, &c.
Second Future, * I shall be given.'
f ^T^ rfasye or ^!**{mi? ddsydvahe ^T^TH^ ddsydmahe, &c.
L ^rr*4M ddyishye ^Tf*i<mf^ ddyishydvahe ^if'T'HI'R^ ddyishydmahe, &c.
Aorist, ' I was given.'
f ^sf^fa adishi or ^ff^^f^ adishvahi ^Tfq f f^ adishmahi
addyishi ^^iftr^f^ addyishvahi ^I^Tft?' l ?Tf^ addyishmahi
adithds or ^ff^WTqTR' adishdthdm ^sf^T adidhvam
addyishthds
\ ^ff^MllTT^ adishdtdm ^rff^TT adishata
yi, it was given,' <
[ ^TT^Wnn^ addyishdtdm *s^Tr*l^iT addyishata
Prec. %m^H or ^rftrefa, &c. (7onc?. ^T^ or
701. Root ^ Are (467). Infin. B|^ kartum, * to be made' or * done.'
Present Tense, ' I am made.' Imperfect, ' I was made.'
CONJUGATION OP CAUSAL VERBS.
Potential, * I may be made/
Perfect.
Imperative, ' Let me be made/
First Future.
8ING.
or
or
! it was done'
Prec. wtrfa or
or
! Second Fut.
Aorist.
DUAL.
or
or
, &c.
,&c.
, &c.
or
Cond.
PLURAL.
or
or
or
702. Example of a Passive from a root ending in a consonant :
Root *pr yuj. Infin. 'ft^r^ yoktum, * to be fitting/
Pres. ^, ^j^ } fWHj &c. Imp/, ^njw, ^s*|i|l^, ^^nr, &c.
Pot. gsifa. Impv. ^, fW^, ^THT^, &c. Perf. %%$, ^fn^,
&c. ist Fut. ^RT?,'Tt^5TO, 1 f^!T, &c. 2wc? .Fw/. ^f^, iiV^i%, &c.
, &c. Prec.
EXAMPLE OF CAUSAL VEKBS, EXPLAINED AT 479.
703. Root ^ bhu. Infin. >?Hr*liJ*^ bhdvayitum, ' to cause to be.'
PARASMAI-PADA. ATMANK-PADA.
Present Tense, * I cause to be/
Imperfect, * I was causing to be/ or ' I caused/ &c.
Potential, ' I may cause to be/
312
CONJUGATION OF CAUSAL VERBS.
Imperative, ' Let me cause to be/
Perfect, f I caused to be.'
First Future, * I will cause to be/
Second Future, ' I shall or will cause to be.'
Aorist, * I caused to be/
Precative or Benedictive, ( May I cause to be/
Conditional, * I should cause to be/
704. After this model, and after the model of Primitive verbs of
cl. 10 at 638, may be conjugated all Causal verbs.
EXAMPLES OF DESIDERATIVE VERBS, EXPLAINED AT 498.
705. Root ^ bhu. Infin. ^*jf^TJ^ bubhushitum, * to wish to be/
PARASMAI-PADA. A'TMANE-PADA.
Present Tense, ' I wish to be/
CONJUGATION OF DESIDERATIVE VERBS. 313
Imperfect, ' I was wishing to be/ or * I wished/ &c.
Potential, ' I may wish to be.'
Imperative, ' Let me wish to be/
, * I wished to be/
First Future, ' I will wish to be/
Second Future, * I will or shall wish to be/
Aorist, * I wished to be/
Precative or Benedictive, ' May I wish to be/
Conditional, ' I should wish to be/
* Or
s s
814 CONJUGATION OF FREQUENTATIVE OR INTENSIVE VERBS.
EXAMPLES OF FREQUENTATIVE OR INTENSIVE VERBS,
EXPLAINED AT 507.
706. Root ^ bhv. Infin. ^t^jfq^ bobhuyitum, ' to be repeatedly/
A'TMANE-PADA FORM (509).
Present Tense, 'I am repeatedly/
Imperfect, * I was frequently/
Potential, * I may be frequently/
Imperative, ' Let me be frequently/
Perfect, ' I was frequently/
First Future, * I will be frequently/
Second Future, ' I will or shall be frequently/
^pq|
^jf^uul
^^ftr*^
Aorist, * I was frequently/
or -
CONJUGATION OF FREQUENTATIVE OR INTENSIVE VERBS. 315
Precative or Benedietive, ' May I be frequently/
or -
Conditional, 'I should be frequently.'
707. PARASMAI-PADA FORM (514)-
Present Tense, 'I am frequently/
or
or
or
or
Imperfect, * I was frequently.'
Potential, ' I may be frequently.'
Imperative, * May I be frequently.'
or
Perfect, ' I was frequently.'
, &c.
or or or
or ^> ^*f<4l or ^)jf^^ ^^T or
or ^^^l *^ or
or or ^j "^ or
First Future, * I will be frequently.'
S S 2
316 CONJUGATION OF FREQUENTATIVE OR INTENSIVE VERBS.
Second Future, ' I will or shall be frequently.'
Aorist, * I was frequently.'
or or or
Precative or Benedictive, * May I be frequently.'
Conditional, * I should be frequently.'
708. Root ^ * to kill' (323, 654). Parasmai form of Frequenta-
tive, * to kill repeatedly.' Pres. iflffaT or ^-vftftr, T^% or ^-{Ire,
"ST^f'ir or f^ft1PfT; T^^^, ai^-vj^, ^^; *I 1 ^ I T^, T'^I, "STfpTfiT or
shrfifT. Impf. ^HTf *1^, ^Tilipi; or ^T3T|Mfl^, ^Tf^ or Wnp!fy ^T'ST^'W,
T^. Pot. ^^an*^. Impv.
or >npftlj; ^rn^, "STITT 1 ^, -TTR; ^^tTTT, "JTifW,
or 7TT5. Perf. "STlpTTg^ or ^TI^4IT, &c. &c.
709. Root ITT 'to go' (602, 270). Parasmai form of Frequenta-
tive, ' to go frequently.' Pres. Wgff* or ijj4flftf, T^fH O r iTl'ftf^,
sT^f'tr or IflpftfTT; ^^H^, *T^^, 'TITT^; 'Tl^^, T^ "Tl^nT or
^rnrfrT. Impf. WT^H?T X , ^^W^ or ^riri^ri^;, ^'TW'l or
^n^fl'T, -iTT*T; ^HsJ-'H, ^T'Tl^, ^^^^ or
Impv. W^TTfJT, T^%, i^"H or ^rfFftiJ ; i^-HN
*fWil, Wjpn$ or ifrfij. Perf. TWTT^)J^ or ^^HI^*K, &c. &c.
710. Root f^R/ to throw' (635). Parasmai form of Frequentative.
Pres. ^fJT or ^P^trH^, ^P^r or ^f^xftf^, ^fa or
r, ^fs^rfw. Impf.
INDECLINABLE WORDS. - ADVERBS. 317
or ^t, ^SHITS or
. Pot. ^f^pan^, &c. Impv.
or rgpj ; spire, ^f^w^, -TTT^ ; ^Hsprm, ^f%
Perf. ^funii#>jcT or ^f^tn^nrrT, &c. &c.
711. Root tt ' to take' (699, 359). Parasmai form of Frequenta-
tive. Pres. srnrfa or *TTl7^f*T, STTOfsy (306. ) or mretftr,
(35- a ) or *Tf?nftfr ; ii j |^^, ^i j |<j^, ii'i
Impf. ^IaTT?Tf^, ^TnTI7 (3^ ) or ^STTinfta^ ^"51151^ or
^nTTT|^ (331. Obs.) Pot.
or
, &c. &c.
CHAPTER VII.
INDECLINABLE WORDS.
712. THERE are in Sanskrit a number of words used as nouns
having only one inflexion, which may be classed among indeclinables;
e. g. TH5T*^ ' setting/ ' decline ;' ^rftcf * what exists,' * existence ;' ^7
'the sacred syllable Om;' ^1*^* satisfaction,' 'food;' rfR^' reverence;'
' non-existence ;' '^'f^' or ^f^ ' the fortnight of the moon's wane ;'
r: ' sky ;' ^ ' earth ;' ^ ' ease ;' H^ c a year ;' ffi or ^ the
fortnight of the moon's increase;' ^VT an exclamation used on
making oblations to the spirits of the dead; ^t. 'heaven;' ^ftar
' salutation' (see Gana Svarddi to Pan. i. i, 37). Others will be
mentioned at 713717.
ADVERBS.
a. Adverbs (nipdta), like nouns and verbs, may be divided into
simple and compound. The latter are treated of in the next Chapter
on Compound Words. Simple adverbs may be classified under
four heads: ist, those formed from the cases of nouns and obsolete
words ; 2ndly, other adverbs of less obvious derivation ; 3rdly,
adverbial suffixes ; 4thly, adverbial prefixes.
Formed from the Cases of Nouns and Obsolete Words.
713. The Accusative neuter of many adjectives;
As, *r!I^' truly;' *T?'much;' tfhr^, fspT^, 'quickly ;' ^W^' fitly;'
318 INDECLINABLE WORDS. ADVERBS.
'near;' V^ 'certainly;' c3t[ ' lightly ;' IVU*^, ^"RTf?^, -Hld*^, ^51^, 'exceed-
ingly;' *aq3l*^ 'certainly;' f*fFPJ 'constantly;' f^T^ 'for a long while;'
' strongly ;' $3^ ' again,' ' repeatedly ' ( 194) ; %W<9^ ' only,' ' merely ;'
'very well.'
. The Ace. neuter of certain pronouns ; as, TTff' therefore,' 'then;' Tr^' where-
fore,' 'when,' 'since;' TTRT^ ' so long,' 'so soon;' ^NiJ/as long as,' 'as soon as;'
b. The Ace. neuter of certain substantives and obsolete words ; as, t^^ ' secretly ; '
'willingly;' ^TJ^ 'of one's own accord,' 'of one's self,' 'spontaneously;'
'by name,' 'that is to say;' ^lt ^R*^ 'repeatedly;' fat*^ 'long ago;'
'pleasantly;' l**Jrt*^ 'now;' ?1W*{ 'by night' (noctu); *TTC*^ 'in the
evening' (this last may be an ind. part, of so, ' to finish').
714. The Instrumental of nouns, pronouns, and obsolete words;
As, V^fef 'virtuously;' <jfgnTR 'to the right,' 'southwards;' 7^i.*!J 'north-
wards;' STfrtiomu 'without;' TW^ 'above,' 'aloud;' T^N[' below;' $R^ or
^m^f^[ 'slowly;' fTf 'therefore;' *R 'wherefore;' ^TnTTI or ^sjf*;^ 'without,'
' except ;' ''E^*! ' instantly ;' T^TII ' for a long time ;' ^if'Ttm ' in a short time ;'
'entirely;' f^l'byday;' f^WT ' fortunately ;' ^^T, ^T^^IT, ' quickly ;'
w;' fq^iMT 'in the air;' ^tT' formerly;' TSfTT' on the ground '
a. The Dative case more rarely ;
As, fatTO 'for a long time ;' faTTl^TO ' for a period of many nights;'
' for the sake of.'
715. The Ablative case of nouns, pronouns, and obsolete words ;
As, "Tc!71I ' forcibly ;' ^T?T 'joyfully ;' ^TH ' at a distance ;' 7WTH 'there^
fore;' cB^TT^' wherefore ?' "sjcu^rtl^' without cause,' 'unexpectedly;' TSRTi^'from
the north; 5 f^tT^'for a long time;' T$T1^ ' afterwards ;' Ifr^ITr^'at that
instant;' ^WJtTn^'from all quarters.'
716. The Locative case of nouns and obsolete words;
As, TTGn 'at night;' ^ 'far off;' TWTif 'in the morning;' TTT^U 'in the
forenoon;' wkn 'suitably;' ^T^ 'in front;' ^^i^ 'at once;' ^TTf^ 'instantly;'
'except;' ^TifT 'within;' rff^W 'towards the south;' *l*fof or ^Tira 'near;'
' in private ; y T*Jlg ' in the evening ;' ^m ' by reason of.' ^
Other Adverbs and Particles of less obvious Derivation.
717. Of affirmation. - JT'^,^^,fo|i<9,1JW,^rg ! ,' indeed;' ^T^f^ff^' certainly.'
a. Of negation. ~-rf, ft, Tf?, 'not.' TT, *TT 9? are prohibitive; as, HT "^^,
IT ^RT 1 ^, ' do not.' See 889.
b. Of interrogation. f%^, f^ fifWrf, "% } H^j fF5> ^*^> 'whether?'
INDECLINABLE WORDS. ADVERBS. 319
c. Of comparison. - ^ ' like ;' ^^, ^M*^, ' so ;' feR-ji<- ' how much rather ;'
(ifCT + *T^) ' in like manner.'
c?. Of quantity. - ^firfa 'exceedingly;' f^ 'a little' (cf. 726.6).
e. Of manner. - ^fa, ^^, 'so,' 'thus;' $*T^ 'again;' BIH^ 'for the most
part;' TTTT 'variously;' ^^ 'separately;' Jj^T, fn^T, 'falsely;' ^TT, IJVT,
' in vain ;' >( 'enough ;' *RfrflT, ^TT$J (cf. a>*yf ), ' quickly ;' ij^lft^ ' silently ;'
fif^n^ ' reciprocally,' 'together.'
/. Of time. - ^r?r 'to-day,' 'now;' ^3^ 'to-morrow;' ^re[ 'yesterday;'
'the day after to-morrow;' ^TOlftT'now;' IJ^T 'formerly;' $*3^, ^I^Ui^,
f, 'before;' ^TR^ 'at once;' *RI^ 'instantly;' TTW 'after death' (lit.
'having departed'); ^T^ 'afterwards;' TTiJ 'ever;' T WTiJ ' never ;' ^JS^,
HT'S^j 'another day,' 'next day;' ^H^n^'once;' ^TCl^, ^T^, 5f^[ 'again
and again,' ' repeatedly.'
Obs. JS? is used with a Present tense to denote past time. See 251. b, 878.
g. Of place. - ^ ' here ;' !R ' where ?' 4f^ ' without.'
h. Of doubt. - fecT, fafW^, ^ftRTT, TiT, drfl^l, ^ffT^ fe^, ^H^ fe?,
'perhaps,' &c.
t. ^rfV? 'even,' ^^ 'indeed,' ^ 'just,' are placed after words to modify their
sense, or for emphatic affirmation. ^, f*^, "9 are similarly used in the Veda.
Observe Some of the above are properly conjunctions ; see 727.
Adverbial Suffixes.
718. f^ 6id, ^sfti api, and ^tf tana may form indefinite adverbs
of time and place, when affixed to interrogative adverbs ;
As, from F^T 'when?' ^T^TP?^, W^rfT, and eS^l^ft, 'sometimes;' from
and Hi 'where?' ^<atVd, ^WTfa, Hf^, lUFfa, 'somewhere;' from
'whence?' ^ITf^^ and ^iPSfT 'from somewhere;' from BfiT 'how many?'
' a few ;' from Bf^| ' when ?' Fftf^ ' at some time ;' from ofi^ ' how ?'
r, <*<n a a'T, ' somehow or other,' ' with some difficulty.' Compare 228, 230.
a. ^rfa following a word, generally signifies ' even,' but after numerals, ' all,' as
pRtsft ' all three ;' ^f sfq ' all together.'
719. TT^ tas may be added to the stem of any noun, and to some
pronouns, to form adverbs ;
As, from ^^", *l^ff^ ' with effort ;' from ^rrf^, ^if^n^ ' from the beginning ;'
from K (the proper stem of the pronoun TFQ, TTK^ 'thence,' 'then,' 'thereupon,'
'therefore:' similarly, ^lirt^ ' whence,' 'since,' 'because;' '^fif^, ^!T^, ^HJtTC^j
'hence,' 'hereupon.'
Obs. In affixing tas to pronouns, the stem W is used for TH?, ^? for ^TT7 ^ for
a. This suffix usually gives the sense of the preposition 'from,' and is often
320 INDECLINABLE WORDS. ADVERBS.
equivalent to the ablative case; as in TW^ 'from me;' Rf^^[ 'from thee*;"
fq^fT^ 'from a father;' JfloJiT^ 'from an enemy.'
b. But it is sometimes vaguely employed to express other relations ; as, ''jFITCr
' behind the back ;' 'BRTi?^ 'to another place,' ' elsewhere;' UWrT^ ' in the first
place;' ^fl^crfTC^ 'here and there,' 'hither and thither;' ^HntlT^ 'on all sides;'
' in the neighbourhood ;' ^UT^, ^Jijrt^> ' in front ;' ^ffTin^ ' near to;'
' in pomp or state.'
c. Willis a suffix which generally denotes ' place' or ' direction ;' as, from ^Hl^,
'WVHd 1 1^ ' downwards ;' from ^Tqft; (which becomes "3T|f^), T^ftm^' above ' (cf.
84. V).
720. ^ tra, forming adverbs of place with a locative sense from
stems of pronouns, adjectives, &c. ;
As, 'STS ' here ;' iTW ' there ;' "^& ' where ?' H& ' where ;' *J%W ' everywhere ;'
^"nXft 'in another place;' *Jl(f 'in one place;' lij^ 'in many places;' ^3
' there,' ' in the next world.'
a. <31 trd; as, \q&l ' among the gods ;' i^M(ai ' among men' (Pan. v. 4, 56);
jc*( ' amongst many.'
721. "*n thd and *P^ tham, forming adverbs of manner ;
As, "JHTI 'so,' 'in like manner;' TJFR 'as ;' *T^n ' in every way,' 'by all means ;'
iNVUVU ' otherwise ;' cfctl^ ' how ?' ^("M*^ ' thus.'
722. ^T dd, f^ rhi, rffa^ nim, forming adverbs of time from pro-
nouns, &c. ;
As, TT^T 'then 1 ;' ^T'when;' cp^r'when?' TJcli^T 'once;' fTR^l ' constantly ;'
^I%^T, ^T, 'always;' TTff, ff^lft*^, 'then;' ^TH^'now.'
723. VT dhd, forming adverbs of distribution from numerals ;
As, ^afiVT ' in one way ;' f&tl ' in two ways ;' i^tVT ' in six ways ;' $nTVT ' in a
hundred ways ;' < M^tsi*n ' in a thousand ways ;' ^?VT or '3TT^WT ' in many ways.'
a. ^rR^ signifying 'times,' is added to l^fj 'five,' and other numerals, as
explained at 215. ^^"ifj 'once,' may be a corruption of ^ejiR^ ('this time');
and only ^ is added to flT, f^sf , and dropped after ^Tj^ ' four times.'
724. ?if vat (technically called vati) may be added to any nominal
stem to form adverbs of comparison or similitude (see 922) ;
As, from *T*f, fl^NlT 'like the sun;' from ^f, ^^TT 'as before.' It may be
used in connexion with a word in the Accusative case.
a. This suffix often expresses 'according to;' as, "fafv^T^ 'according to rule;'
' according to need.' It may also be added to adverbs ; as,
'truly' (exactly as it took place).
* These are the forms generally used for the Ablative case of the personal pro-
nouns, the proper Ablative cases TIT, i^TT being rarely used.
INDECLINABLE WORDS. CONJUNCTIONS. 321
725. 31^ sas, forming adverbs of quantity, &c. ;
As, T^I^ 'abundantly;' ^T^T^I^ 'in small quantities;' *J%$K( 'wholly;'
' singly;' ^nHTf^I^ 'by hundreds and thousands;' "aW^' by degrees;'
' principally ;' XIT^JT^ ' foot by foot ;' flT^ ' two by two ;' fe^ ' by
threes;' SHV^I^ 'in great numbers ;' ^SJT$l^' syllable by syllable;' TTT^33^'in
BO many ways ;' *fn^i^ ' how many at a time ?'
a. tiii^is added to nouns in connexion with the roots ^, TT^, and >J,, to denote
a complete change to the condition of the thing signified by the noun ; as, ^rf*T-
*TTi^ ' to the state of fire.' See 789, and cf. 70. i.
Adverbial Prefixes.
726. ^r a, prefixed to nouns and even to participles with a priva-
tive or negative force, corresponding to the Greek a, the Latin in y
and the English in, im, un; as, from ^m 'possible/ %r$i7!
'impossible; 5 from **ffl\ 'touching' (pres. part.), <r<H4$lf^ 'not
touching ;' frdm ^?*T ' having done' (indecl. part.), ^a^WT ' not having
done/ When a word begins with a vowel, w^ is euphonically
substituted ; as, from *RT ' end,' -eH*d ' endless.'
a. ^fir ati t ' excessively,' ' very ;' as, wfriH^^ ' very great.'
b. ^rr a, implying ' diminution ;' as, ^TTin^ ' somewhat pale.'
f^ is prefixed with the same sense ; as, ^^^n ' slightly warm.'
c. C&T kd or Tsp ku, prefixed to words to imply 'disparagement;'
as, qTTg^rc 'a coward;' c$^tj 'deformed.'
d. ^ dus (or ^ dur), prefixed to imply 'badly' or 'with difficulty;'
as, jpspTT 'badly done' (see 72); <j*b& 'not easily broken.' It is
opposed to *j, and corresponds to the Greek Svcr-.
e. ff^ nis (or f^ nir) and f% m are prefixed to nouns like ^t a
with a privative or negative sense; as, fsnh* 'powerless;' ftTR<9
'without fruit' (see 72); (V^fyj-f 'unarmed:' but not to participles.
f. *J su, prefixed to imply 'well,' 'easily;' as, *j^nr 'well done;'
*JHST ' easily broken.' In this sense it is opposed to |^, and cor-
responds to the Greek ev. It is also used for ^fir, to imply ' very,'
' excessively ;' as, *Jfi?T^ ' very great.'
CONJUNCTIONS.
Copulative.
727. ^ 6a, 'and,' 'also,' corresponding to the Latin que and not
to et. It can never, therefore, stand as the first word in a sentence,
but follows the word of which it is the copulative, ^hr (^ ^), ' also,'
is a common combination.
T t
322 INDECLINABLE WORDS. PREPOSITIONS.
a. Tff ' and/ * also,' is sometimes copulative. Sometimes it
implies doubt or interrogation.
b. THTT ' so/ ' thus/ ' in like manner' (see 721), is not unfrequently
used for ^r, in the sense of ' also ;' and like ^ is then generally
placed after the word which it connects with another.
c. ^TCf ' now/ ' and/ ^r*ft ' then/ are inceptive, being frequently
used at the commencement of sentences or narratives. ^r*T is often
opposed to ^fir, which marks the close of a story or chapter.
d. f^, * for/ is a causal conjunction ; like ^ it is always placed
after its word, and never admitted to the first place in a sentence.
e. Tff^, ^, both meaning * if/ are conditional conjunctions.
/. W1R( 'upon that/ 'then' (719), 1R( 'then/ *rav, fa*3, *WW,
*TC^, ^iftnr, ' again/ ' moreover/ are all copulatives, used very com-
monly in narration.
*
Disjunctive.
738. ^T vd, ' or' (like -ve in Latin), is always placed after its word,
being never admitted to the first place in a sentence.
a. ij, fcjrar, ' but ;' the former is placed after its word.
b. H^PH 'although;' iTMlfn 'nevertheless/ 'yet,' sometimes used as a cor-
relative to the last; ^tii, f^f ^T, 'or else;' T ^T 'or not;' if^ ^T 'whether,'
whether or no.'
c. 'M^i may also be used to correct or qualify a previous thought, when it is
equivalent to f but no,' ' yet/ ' however.'
d. 13R, ^, ij, % are expletives, often used in poetry to fill up the verse.
PREPOSITIONS.
729. There are about twenty prepositions (see 783), but in later
Sanskrit they are generally prefixes, qualifying the sense of verbs
(and then called upasarga) or of verbal derivatives (and then called
ffati). About ten may be used separately or detached in govern-
ment with the cases of nouns (and then called karma-prava6aniya) ;
e. g. wr, nf?r, ^nj, ^ifa, ^rfv, ^rfa, nfr, 'snr, vftr, and -sir ; but of these
the first three only are commonly found as separable particles in
classical Sanskrit.
730. WT a, generally signifying ' as far as/ ' up to/ ' until/ with
Abl. ; as, ^sri *nf5Ti^ ' as far as the ocean ;' *$"[ *?ffa^ ' up to Manu ;'
' as far as the wrist ;' ^IT f? 1 ^ ' till death ;' ^IT
' till the completion of his vow :' and rarely with Ace.; as,
ffirfaB[ ' for a hundred births.'
INDECLINABLE WORDS. PREPOSITIONS. 323
a. ^n a may sometimes express ' from ;' as, ^rr 'JcSTTT ' from the
beginning;' ^rr TTzm^hTT?^ ' from the first sight; 5 rr *1**H^ 'from
birth/
b. It may also be compounded with a word in the Accusative neuter
forming with it an Avyayi-bhava (see 760); thus, wkfo5*^ 'as far
as the girdle' (where *UW^ is for HWrfl^).
c. Tlfir prati, generally a postposition, signifying ' at,' ' with regard
to,' * to,' ' towards,' ' against,' with Ace. ; as, TT^T ufa ' at the Ganges ;'
WT nftr ' with regard to justice ;' ^l^ nfiT ' against an enemy ;' *rf Ufa
' as far as regards me.' When denoting ' in the place of,' it governs
the Ablative.
d. t?7j * after,' with Ace., and rarely with Abl. or Gen. ; as, ifflUT
^TJ * along the Ganges ;' fT^Tj or TnftsTj ' after that.'
e. Tjfif , and more rarely ^TJ and ^rfT, may be used distributively to signify
' each,' ' every ;' thus, <|ef*ij ' tree by tree.' They may also be prefixed to form
Avyayi-bhavas ; TTfiT^TOT*^ or Wplrtlf^ ' every year,' ' year by year.' See 760.
/. ^fff, ^Sffa, ^ft. are said to require the Accusative; ^rfVf the Locative or
Accusative ; ^TT and ^ft, in the sense ' except,' the Ablative ; TT the Locative and
Accusative : but examples of such syntax are not common in classical Sanskrit.
g. Instances are common of prepositions united with the neuter form or
Accusative of nouns, so as to form compounds (760. 6); as, TTfW33I*y^ upon the
shoulders;' Hftf^^^ 'face to face;' 'Slfv^J*^ ' upon the tree ;' ^T^JT^^ ' along
the Ganges.'
ADVERBS IN GOVERNMENT WITH NOUNS.
731. There are many adverbs used like the preceding prepositions
in government with nouns, and often placed after the nouns which
they govern (for examples see 917).
These are, ^fy 'before,' 'in front of,' with Gen.; ^HIw 'under,' with Gen. or
Ace.; WT^ or ^Vj^tT?^ 'below,' with Gen. (^W^ is sometimes doubled; thus,
^3?\fts>J^) ; ^JrfiTi.*^ ' after,' 'afterwards,' with Gen. ; vj*ff^ ' within,' with Gen. or
Loc. ; ;tfl<.<!J 'without,' 'except,' 'with regard to,' with Ace. ; ^lf*ff^i^ 'near,' with
Gen. or Abl. ; ^rfaw^ 'on both sides of,' with Ace. ; ^rfaj^*^ ' in front of,' with
Gen. or Ace. ; WJTCT ' near,' with Gen. ; ^T^ or ^I^JTO or ^TO ' on account of,'
' for,' with Gen. ; ^%T^B ' after,' ' beyond,' with Abl. ; TfTTTH/ to the north,' with
Gen. ; d^RIU ' to the north,' with Gen. or Ace. ; "3^ft ' above,' ' over,' ' upon,'
with Gen. or Ace. (sometimes doubled; thus, "5HItjft) ; '3fc!^ 'above,' 'over,'
'upon,' with Gen. or Ace.; 'after,' 'beyond,' with Abl.; ^TrT 'besides,' 'without,'
' except,' with Ace., sometimes with Abl. ; otiK^fllrl or ^1T ' on account of,' for,'
with Gen.; ^fspn^ ' to the south,' with Gen.; ^fspim 'to the right,' 'to the
T t 2
324 INTERJECTIONS. COMPOUND WORDS.
south,' with Gen. or Ace.; ftffa 'for the sake of,' 'for,' with Gen.;
' behind,' with Gen. ; "T^ or "^w ' after,' ' beyond,' with Abl. ; tj^ftl^' after, 5 with
Gen. or Abl. ; *J1T 'on the further side,' with Gen. ; ^^fH^ or ^fC^ ' before,' ' in the
presence of,' with Gen. ; ^^ ' before,' with Abl., rarely with Gen. or Ace. ; JOf fa
inde a,' ' from a particular time,' ' beginning with,' with Abl. ; HT^I before,' with
Abl., rarely with Gen. or Ace.; *W 'in the middle,' with Gen.; ^f?^ 'out/
'outside of,' with Abl. or Gen. ; *uiit 'up to,' ' as far as,' sometimes with Ace. ;
faTT 'without,' with Inst. or Ace. or sometimes with Abl. ; ^fiT^P^ 'near,' with
Gen.; ^<*T^ltT^'from,' with Gen. ; WJ!P^' before the eyes,' 'in the presence of,'
with Gen.; *W^ 'together with, 'with Inst. ; Wfl l|H *^ or *wfa*^ ' near,' with Gen. ;
*Tjf ' with,' ' along with,' with Inst. ; ^iii^ ' with,* with Inst. ; ^nTSfR^ ' before the
eyes,' 'in the presence of,' with Gen. ; ^TM*^ 'along with,' with Inst. ; ^m^ or
'on account of,' 'for the sake of,' 'for,' with Gen.
Obs. Many of the above, especially ^Ht*^*, r 3T*f, eRRUm^, cjiff, frff^, flf^,
&c., are more usually found at the end of a compound, after a nominal stem.
a. The adverb ^Tc5*^, 'enough,' is used with the Inst. (see 918).
b. Some of the adverbs enumerated at 714, 715, may be used in government
with the cases of nouns ; e. g. ^f^!I'T, ^rK<u above, 'aifni.cmu, 'without,' is
generally placed after the stem of a noun.
INTERJECTIONS.
732. fte(, Tt, ^ are vocative; \, wt less respectfully vocative,
or sometimes expressive of * contempt/ fVoF expresses ' contempt/
* abhorrence/ * fie !' * shame P (with Accusative case) ; ^ST^,
'surprise/ 'alarm;' ^T, ^TfT, ^Jft, W$RH, ^TT, 'grief; 3
' approbation ;' yfw, ' salutation/
CHAPTER VIII.
COMPOUND WORDS.
733. COMPOUNDS abound in Sanskrit to a degree wholly unequalled
in any other language, and it becomes necessary to study the prin-
ciples on which they are constructed, before the learner can hope to
[ is generally found in composition with a nominal stem, and may be com-
pounded adjectively to agree with another noun ; as, firSfTOt ^5^1 ' broth for the
Brahman ;' "fesfp? ^^ ' milk for the Brahman.' See 760. d.
COMPOUND NOUNS. 325
understand the simplest sentence in the most elementary book. In
the foregoing chapters we have treated of simple nouns, simple verbs,
and simple adverbs. We have now to treat of compound nouns,
compound verbs, and compound adverbs.
a. Observe, that in this chapter the nom. case, and not the stem, of a substantive
terminating a compound will be given ; and in the instance of an adjective forming
the last member of a compound, the nom. case masc., fern., and neut. The
examples are chiefly taken from the Hitopades'a, and sometimes the oblique cases
in which they are there found have been retained.
SECTION I.
COMPOUND NOUNS.
734. The student has now arrived at that portion of the grammar
in which the use of the stem of the noun becomes most strikingly
apparent This use has been already noticed at 77 ; and its forma-
tion explained at 8087.
. In almost all compound nouns the last word alone admits of
inflexion, and the preceding word or words require to be placed in
the stem, to which a plural as well as singular signification may be
attributed. Instances, however, will be given in which the charac-
teristic signs of case and number are retained in the first member of
the compound, but these are exceptional.
b. It may here be noted, that while Sanskrit generally exhibits the first member
or members of a compound in the stem with the final letter unchanged, except by
the usual euphonic laws, Latin frequently and Greek less frequently change the
final vowel of the stem into the light vowel i ; and both Greek and Latin often
make use of a vowel of conjunction, which in Greek is generally o, but occasion-
ally l; thus, cwli-cola for ccelu-cola or ccelo-cola; lani-ger for lana-ger ; ")(a\Ki-
vao$, f)(6v-o-(f>ayof, fceder-i-fragus. Both Greek and Latin, however, possess
many compounds which are completely analogous to Sanskrit formations. In
English we have occasional examples of the use of a conjunctive vowel, as in
'handicraft' for 'hand-craft.'
Obs. A dot placed underneath words in Nagari type marks the division of the
different members of a compound.
735. Native grammarians class compound nouns under six heads :
I. DvANDVA, or those formed by the aggregation into one com-
pound of two or more nouns (the last word being, according to
circumstances, either in the dual, plural, or neuter singular, and the
preceding word or words being in the stem), when, if uncompounded,
326 COMPOUND NOUNS.
they would all be in the same case, connected by a copulative
conjunction; as, ^T^f^P^ 'master and pupil' (for
flcfiT: 'death, sickness, and sorrow' (for JTI3T
* hand and foot* (for inftff: M1<jq>).
II. TAT-PURUSHA, or those composed of two nouns, the first of
which (being in the stem) would be, if uncompounded, in a case
different from, or dependent on, the last ; as, ^n^Tprr ' moon-light'
(for V'tm WT * the light of the moon'); 3Hd t $3lrf:, -F5T, -c?^, * skilled
in arms' (for $1^4 ^5Ic5')j ifttfj^** ~1R> ~^> ' adorned with gems'
(for irfmfa^. $fa*:).
III. KARMA-DH^RAYA, or those composed of an adjective or
participle and substantive, the adjective or participle being placed
first in its stem, when, if uncompounded, it would be in grammatical
concord with the substantive ; as, iy.*H: ' a good person' (for *mjT
*R:); *3.$MTfig c all things' (for ^tifiir jsnfa).
IV. DviGU, or those in which the stem of a numeral is compounded
with a noun, either so as to form a singular collective noun, or an
adjective; as, f^jpn^ 'three qualities' (for grft TOUT:); f^ng:, -WT,
~"^> ' possessing the three qualities.'
V. BAHU-VRfm, or attributive compounds, generally epithets of
other nouns. These, according to Panini (u. 2, 24), are formed by
compounding two or more words to qualify the sense of another
word ; thus, Hiwi^lf UTT: for uiff*^ 7?[eji ^ 5fTH^ ' a village to which
the water has come.'
VI. AYYAYI-BHA'vA, or those resulting from the combination of a
preposition or adverbial prefix with a noun. The latter, whatever
may be its gender, always takes the form of an accusative neuter
and becomes indeclinable.
a. Observe These names either furnish examples of the several kinds of com-
pounds, or give some sort of definition of them ; thus, W3'' (scil. ti*ii:) is a
definition of the 1st kind, meaning 'conjunction;' rtry^J, 'his servant,' is an
example of the 2nd kind (for rf^T ^^') ; K^Vr<*t; is a somewhat obscure defi-
nition of the 3rd kind, i.e. 'that which contains or comprehends (VTTTjfTT) the
object' (*); %*J is an example of the 4th kind, meaning 'anything to the
value of two cows ;' *rscftf\f! is an example of the 5th kind, meaning ' possessed
of much rice.' The 6th class, ^I^nrttTn 1 * avyayf-bhdvah, means 'the indeclinable
state' ('that which does not change,' na vyeti).
736. It should be stated, however, that the above six kinds of
compounds really form, according to the native theory, only four
SIMPLY COMPOUNDED NOUNS. 327
classes, as the 3rd and 4th (i. e. the Karma-dharaya and Dvigu) are
regarded as subdivisions of the Tat-purusha class.
Obs. Panini (i. 2, 42) calls a Karma-dhdrayah a Tatpurushah samdnddhikaranah.
As such a classification appears to lead to some confusion from
the absence of sufficient distinctness and opposition between the
several parts or members of the division, the subject will be dis-
cussed according to a different method, although it has been thought
desirable to preserve the Indian names and to keep the native
arrangement in view.
737. Compound nouns may be regarded either as simply or
complexly compounded. The latter have reference to a class of
compounds within compounds, very prevalent in poetry, involving
two or three species of simple compounds under one head.
SIMPLY COMPOUNDED NOUNS.
738. These we will divide into, ist, Dependent compounds or
compounds dependent in case (corresponding to Tat-purusha); and,
Copulative (or Aggregative, Dvandva); 3rd, Descriptive* (or Deter-
minative, Karma-dhdraya] ; 4th, Numeral (or Collective, Dvigu};
5th, Adverbial (or Indeclinable, Avyayi-bhdva) ; 6th, Relative (Bahu-
vrihi). This last consists of, a. Relative form of absolute Dependent
compounds, terminated by substantives ; b. Relative form of Copu-
lative or Aggregative compounds ; c. Relative form of Descriptive or
Determinative compounds ; d. Relative form of Numeral or Collective
compounds ; e. Relative form of Adverbial compounds.
a. Observe A list of the substitutions which take place in the
final syllables of certain words in compounds is given at 778.
DEPENDENT COMPOUNDS (TAT-PURUSHA).
Accusatively Dependent.
739. These comprehend all those compounds in which the relation
of the first word (being in the stem) to the last is equivalent to that
of an accusative case. They are generally composed of a noun in
the first member, and a participle (but not a present or indeclinable
* As being composed of an adjective or participle preceding a substantive, and
always descriptive of the substantive. Bopp calls them ' Determinativa,' a word
of similar import.
328 DEPENDENT COMPOUNDS (TAT-PURUSHA).
participle), root, or noun of agency in the last ; as, ^THTTr:, -TIT, -T
'one who has obtained heaven' (equivalent to ^JT iron);
* one who speaks kind words ;' ^fT^ * one wno gives much ;'
* god-praising ;' ^pp^ f one who bears arms; 5 ^WT^S -cH,
, 'committed to a leaf/ 'committed to paper' (as 'writing');
f:, -in, -cf^, 'committed to painting;' ^Nfhr*RT, -T>TT, -fa,
' thinking one's self handsome.'
a. JlrT ' gone' (past pass. part, of *T*^ ' to go') is used loosely at the end of com-
pounds of this description to express relationship and connexion, without any
necessary implication of motion. In XTfpTfT, f^*T7T ahove, and in others
(such as f$lc3rT37Tlft *!%: 'a jewel lying in the cleft of a rock ;' ^'W.iMJTTT:,
-HT, -fl^, 'lying in the palm of the hand'), it has the sense of W ' staying :' but
it may often have other senses ; as, *?lv'^*TWJ, -1TT, -If*^, ' engaged in conversation ;'
*srt/m f^f^TT ' something relating to a friend.'
b. In theatrical language ^iirw/irn^ and *s*iif^ (lit. ' gone to one's self) mean
' spoken to one's self,' aside.'
c. Before nouns of agency and similar forms the accusative case is often retained,
especially in poetry ; as, ^rfTj^TJ, -TT, -*T^, ' enemy-subduing ;' ^^W, -HT,
-tn^ ' heart-touching ;' H^ffC, -TT, -t*^, ' fear-inspiring' (see 580. a) ; TO J 14^*1 J,
-*TT, -T^, ' going to the ocean ;' ttr<jsni*4t, -*n, """T^, ' one who thinks himself
learned ;' Tjfe*i*i; ' one who thinks it night.'
Instrumentalty Dependent,
740. Or those in which the relation of the first word (being in
the stem) to the last is equivalent to that of an instrumental case.
These are very common, and are, for the most part, composed of a
substantive in the first member, and a past passive participle in the
last ; as, wfrrJrtff H: , -UT, -H^, ' beguiled by avarice 5 (for 7^fT *ftfid:) ;
{d.3ffc7n, -?T, -1T^, 'covered with clothes;' UW^lffinn, -TIT, -H^,
'honoured by kings ;' f^raT^ffa:, -TT, -!*( * deserted by (i. e. desti-
tute of) learning;' ^f^f^rK , -rTT, -Tf^, 'destitute of intelligence ;'
:^jt:, -rtT, -il^, 'pained with grief;' airH.'^iiT:, -rTT, -71^, 'done by
one's self; 5 ^nf^Tr;*-^:, -^ft, -^, 'like the sun' (for wfsfr^R ^rp?:,
see 836); ^w^nf^rf:, -m, -W^, 'acquired by us.'
a. Sometimes this kind of compound contains a substantive or noun of agency
in the last member ; as, fmrtfT*^ ' money acquired by science ;' ^i^|i^fift 'one
who lives by arms.'
Datively Dependent,
741. Or those in which the relation of the first word to the last
is equivalent to that of a dative ; as, TrfbfH^ <s=M*( 'bark for clothing ;'
DEPENDENT COMPOUNDS (TAT-PURUSHA). 329
'water for the feet;' ^r^Hj 'wood for a sacrificial post;'
r:, -m, -TH^, 'come for protection' (for $rc*ori ^n*nn). This
kind of compound is not very common, and is generally supplied by
the use of ^rfr (731); as, $rc?UT*I*T ^Hllrt:.
a. Parasmai-pada and Atmane-pada (see 243) are instances of
compounds in which the sign of the dative case is retained.
Ablatively Dependent,
742. Or those in which the relation of the first word to the last
is equivalent to that of an ablative ; as, ftnpITRt, -TTT, -WT, ' received
from a father;' TT^T^I?:, -ST, -SH, 'fallen from the kingdom' (for
:, -TTF, -t*T, ' more changeable than a wave ;*
^i: ' other than you' (for iT^ffts 1 ^:); H'^n^ ' fear of you' (814. e);
^^Tni*r ' fear of a dog ;' 3TI4ri. | KI4d*Kt -^, -W, ' turning the face
from books,' ' averse from study.'
Genitively Dependent,
743. Or those in which the relation of the first word to the last
is equivalent to that of a genitive. These are the most common of
all dependent compounds, and may generally be expressed by a
similar compound in English. They are for the most part com-
posed of two substantives ; as, THfJifa^ ' sea-shore' (for WJ44|
' shore of the sea').
a. Other examples are, ^m.j8*\' horse-back;' V^'l*uJ 'bow-string;' ^fecR
* brick-house ;' f*l(Vn<{) 'mountain-torrent;' Ic"l Tlli?^ ' water's edge;'
or ^nffm^n ' acquisition of wealth ;' f^M^Il ' state of misfortune ;'
'separation of friends;' T^jftl 'on whose brow' (locative); iTS^t 'his words;'
or WT^f^I 'birth-place;' ^j^.'^IHJ 'with hundreds of fools' (inst. pi.);
' a couple of Slokas ;' ^rtcJ*^ ' the surface of the earth ;'
'lord of the earth;' H^afanTR 'for his support' (dative); fli*ii^dit 'the sons
of a Brahman;' ^WPJT^U 'our sons;' Wijli^ 'thy deed;' ft^M'flH'*^ 'a father's
speech;' *ii*J.3U*^ 'the gate of death;' ^Vs3tr*M i^ ' fulfilment of wishes;' TT?fT-
't^t ' a mother's joy ;' "STHT^Tm ' a water-receptacle,' ' lake ;' f^aTtfl" ' knowledge-
seeker,' ' a scholar ;' ^^1^3*^ (for <f $MaJ<!^) ' a hen's egg.'
b. Sometimes an adjective in the superlative degree, used substantively, occupies
the last place in the compound ; as, TT'5nr: or ^Ti^^T: ' the best of men.'
c. In occasional instances the genitive case is retained ; as, fi^u**tfTTJ ' lord of
men ;' f^WfiT. ' lord of the sky.'
d. Especially in terms of reproach ; as, ^T^TTr^: (or ^T^ft^9T') ' son of a slave
girl.'
u u
330 COPULATIVE COMPOUNDS (DVANDVA).
Locatively Dependent,
744. Or those in which the relation of the first word to the last
is equivalent to that of a locative case ; as, MffiHH:, - T n> -*&(, 'sunk
in the mud 3 (for H% JTR:) ; *I*TCrf^rnft * sporting in the sky;'
* sport in the water;' 2JT*r^reft 'a dweller in a village;'
* going in the water;' *ra7K * born in the water;' fyO.^H 'gem
on the head.'
a. The sign of the locative case is retained in some cases, especially
before nouns of agency ; as, JfTO^Rfl' * a villager ;' M t -: * going in
the water;' grftnjlfafr:, -HT, -"&(, 'ornamented on the breast;' ^81171:
or ^,tK: 'going in front;' f^P^'MT^ (rt. *re) 'abiding in the sky;'
(rt. Wl[) 'touching the sky ;' gftrfet: * firm in war.'
Dependent in more than one Case.
745. Dependent compounds do not always consist of two words. They may be
composed of almost any number of nouns, all depending upon each other, in the
manner that one case depends upon another in a sentence ; thus,
:, -JTT, -nf^, 'passed beyond the range of the eye' (for
T*T*n*TW 'standing in the middle of the chariot;' v
f<jsn; ' skilful in censuring the means of rescuing those in danger.'
a. There is an anomalous form of Tat-purusha, which is really the result of the
elision of the second or middle member (uttara-pada-lopa, madhyama-pada-lopa)
of a complex compound; e.g. ^rr^Hlf^I for ^TRTfin^ m f*l q I (see 775).
b. Dependent compounds abound in all the cognate languages. The following
are examples from Greek and Latin; oivo-6yK7],
auri-fodina, manu-pretium, parri-cida for patri-cida, parri-cidiwn, matri-cidium,
marti-cultor, mus-cerda. English furnishes innumerable examples of dependent
compounds; e.g. 'ink-stand,' 'snow-drift,' 'moth-eaten,' 'priest-ridden,' 'door-
mat,' 'writing-master,' &c.
COPULATIVE (OR AGGEEGATIVE) COMPOUNDS (DVANDVA).
746. This class has no exact parallel in other languages.
When two or more persons or things are enumerated together, it
is usual in Sanskrit, instead of connecting them by a copulative, to
aggregate them into one compound word. No syntactical depend-
ence of one case upon another subsists between the members of
Dvandva compounds, since they must always consist of words which,
if uncompounded, would be in the same case. The only grammatical
connexion between the members is that which would be expressed
COPULATIVE COMPOUNDS (DVANDVA). 331
by the copulative conjunction and in English, or ^ in Sanskrit.
In fact, the difference between this class and the last turns upon
this dependence in case of the words compounded on each other ;
insomuch that the existence or absence of such dependence, as
deducible from the context, is, in some cases, the only guide by
which the student is enabled to refer the compound to the one head
or to the other ; thus, *T?rf5rsr.'iTT<*T: may either be a Dependent
compound, and mean 'the servants of the pupils of the Guru/ or
a Copulative, 'the Guru, and the pupil, and the servant/ And
JTRrsfffiun*^ may either be Dependent, 'the blood of the flesh/ or
Copulative, * flesh and blood/ This ambiguity, however, can never
occur in Dvandvas inflected in the dual, and rarely occasions any
practical difficulty.
747. There are three kinds of Copulative compounds : ist, in-
flected in the plural ; 2nd, inflected in the dual ; 3rd, inflected in the
singular. In the first two cases the final letter of the stem of the
word terminating the compound determines the declension, and its
gender the particular form of declension ; in the third case it seems
to be a law that this kind of compound cannot be formed unless
the last word ends in ^r a, or in a vowel changeable to ^? a, or in a
consonant to which ^t a may be subjoined ; and the gender is inva-
riably neuter, whatever may be the gender of the final word.
Inflected in the Plural.
748. When more than two animate objects are enumerated, the
last is inflected in the plural, the declension following the gender of
the last member of the compound ; as, ^5jftr?5;WTa|iT: ' Indra, Anila,
Yama, and Arka' (for ^ftsfacft Wtslro); TTH.<*wnmn; 'Rama,
Lakshmana, and Bharata ;' JJTr^rrinriTsjcK^T: * the deer, the hunter,
the serpent, and the hog/ The learner will observe, that although
the last member of the compound is inflected in the plural, each
of the members has here a singular acceptation. But a plural
signification may often be inherent in some or all of the words
constituting the compound ; thus, arsransff^l^ \ JJj^T: ' Brahmans,
Kshatriyas, Vaisyas, and Sudras;' fa^*THfrr$T^: 'friends, neutrals,
and foes' (for ft^rftg ^nft^TT: 5I^n?) ; ^f^Tf^firftrijirnf^ ' sages,
gods, ancestors, guests, and spirits' (for ^r*nft \^\\ ftnnft sffl*nft $7nfVr ^) ;
ffTTTT: 'lions, tigers, and immense serpents;' "'ETTpnT
u u 2
332 COPULATIVE COMPOUNDS (OVANDVA).
: ' dogs, vultures, herons, ravens, kites, jackals, and
crows.'
749. So also when more than two inanimate objects are enume-
rated, the last may be inflected in the plural; as,
'virtue, wealth, enjoyment, and beatitude 5 (for wfs^h
* sacrifice, study, and liberality ' (for
In some of the following a plural signification is inherent ;
as, yBnjr?Tfif3TfT ' flowers, roots, and fruits ; ' 'SHTi iT*J 7njl& RD1T ' of the
unborn, the dead, and the foolish' (for *TTnnTT iJFRT
: ' eyes, mind, and disposition ;' t
' sickness, sorrow, anguish, bonds, and afflictions ;'
' wo d, water, fruit, roots, and honey.'
750. So also when only two animate or inanimate objects are
enumerated, in which a plural signification is inherent, the last is
inflected in the plural ; as, ^^*J*n: * gods and men ;'
'sons and grandsons;' tmfotnTTT: 'falls and rises;'
'ramparts and trenches;' *J^[iinj 'in pleasures and pains' (for
' sins and virtues.'
Inflected in the Dual.
751. When only two animate objects are enumerated, in each of
which a singular signification is inherent, the last is inflected in the
dual, the declension following the gender of the last member ; as,
' Rama and Lakshmana' (for Tjrft rfEtfUl^) ; ^^^51 * moon
and sun ;' JjJi;cfc|oW 'a deer and a crow ;' Hl5i;i|ifl ' wife and husband ;'
' pea-hen and cock ;' *J?l57*nnif ' cock and pea-hen.'
752. So also when only two inanimate objects are enumerated, in
each of which a singular signification is inherent, the last is inflected
in the dual ; as, 'STTWRvnT 'beginning and end' (for
n * affection and enmity' (for
'joy and sorrow ;' TgfVqqre 'hunger and thirst' (for ^
wirrvft ' hunger and sickness ; ' WTTT*TTTwiT*T x ' by standing and sitting '
(for FTT^T HlfH't ^) ; *T^;^rfl^ ' honey and ghee ;' ?j^|:?j ' pleasure
and pain;' Ttjp^cSJTpFfc 'mortar and pestle;' UWr'iJHTf>T^T^TnT ' by
rising and saluting ;' ijifTftw^ ' by earth and water.'
Inflected in the Singular Neuter.
753. When two or more inanimate objects are enumerated, whether
DESCRIPTIVE COMPOUNDS (KARMA-DHA'RAYA). 333
singular or plural in their signification, the last may either be inflected
as above (748, 749, 750, 751), or in the singular number, neut. gender ;
as, JpriJcTTfitW ' flowers, roots, and fruits' (for gwrrftrr J?nfJT *Br5TfT ^) ;
'grass, food, water, and fuel' (for Tjcrefts^
a day and night' (for ^ffr TTf?nj. A form
masc. sing, also occurs); f^x^p? ' quarters and countries' (for
^rro) ; srfJTSI* or f^fJT^I* ' day and night ;' f$r^?ffa* head and
neck ;' w?lf?r^fVT?T * skin, flesh, and blood/
a. Sometimes two or more animate objects are thus compounded ; as, Hcf.'JMH
' sons and grandsons ;' ^*i*J V A*\ ' elephants and horses :' especially inferior objects ;
as, TT-MHIjflci 1 ^ ' a dog and an outcast.'
754. In enumerating two qualities the opposite of each other, it is common to
form a Dvandva compound of this kind, by doubling an adjective or participle,
and interposing the negative ^T a; as, ^Kl^<*^ moveable and immoveable' (for
^T^ ^T^t ^) ; ^J^n^P**^ ' good and evil ;' fmnflTO ' in agreeable and disagree-
able' (for flR ^fftTO ^) ; gi*^ ' seen and not seen ;' epmepflR ' done and not
done;' } g *M:H N ' gentle and cruel.'
a. In the Dvandvas which occur in the Vedas the first member of the com-
pound, as well as the last, may sometimes take a dual termination ; thus, ft^T"^-
^In (see 97. a), ^l.fau^, fW<J>drtij : and some of the anomalous Dvandvas
used in more modern Sanskrit are probably Vedic in their character; thus,
SRnjftrel ' heaven and earth ;' mwrftfifn 'mother and father,' &c.
b. It is a general rule, however, that if a compound consists of two stems in rt,
the final of the first becomes ^TF, as in JTTTnfmTu above. This also happens if the
last member of the compound be $3, as fTifnjWi ' father and son.'
c. Greek and Latin furnish examples of complex compounds involving Dvan-
dvas ; thus, /3aiY?a)o-/Ai;o-//,a%/a, ' frog-mouse war ;' su-ovi-taurilia, ' pig-sheep-
bull sacrifice ;' %vo-<pvTOV, ' animal-plant.' Zoophyte is thus a kind of Dvandva.
In English, compounds like 'plano-convex,' 'convexo-concave' are examples of
the relative form of Dvandva explained at 765.
DESCRIPTIVE (OR DETERMINATIVE) COMPOUNDS (KARMA-DHARAYA).
755. In describing, qualifying, or defining a substantive by means
of an adjective or participle, it is common in Sanskrit to compound
the two words together, placing the adjective or participle in the
first member of the compound in its stem ; as, *T^."*nT: ' a good man*
(for *rr^: IR:) ; f*nrfa?r^ ' an old friend' (for f^rt ftf^) ; Tjarn^: ' a
troubled ocean;' ijirirfl&H 'a holy act;' ^R^inWT 'the infinite soul;'
K ' polished speech ;' -pr^rmfiir ' holy acts' (for TpnfiT ^Tftj) ;
* of the best men' (for ^rlHHI tfUTJTT^) ; TfT^TinF'^ * a great
334 NUMERAL COMPOUNDS (DVIGU).
crime' (see 778); JT^rrR: 'a great king 5 (see 778); ftnrw: 'a dear
friend' (778); ^f^TT^T ' a long night' (778).
a. The feminine stems of adjectives do not generally appear in
compounds; thus, fmnrnh 'a dear wife' (for firm HT%); T$fr>TT*fT
'a great wife' (for JTtnft >TTOT, see 778); ^q^irmT 'a beautiful wife'
(for ^trerft *Rt); tni^ir^t ' a female cook' (for infrrar ^).
b. There are, however, a few examples of feminine adjective stems
in compounds ; e. g. ^TffeHT^T ' a wife with beautiful thighs ;' oFrfa-
fh3R: ' an impassioned woman,' where cBlfRt may be used sub-
stantively (cf. 766. 6).
756. An indeclinable word or prefix may take the place of an adjective in this
kind of compound ; thus, ^T&i ' a good road ;' *f^T*^ ' a fine day ;' *>TTftir^
' good speech ;' g^srfcr*^ ' bad conduct ;' ^WH^ ' not fear,' ' absence of danger ;'
'external cleanliness' (from vahis, 'externally,' and sau6a, 'purity');
' internal purity;' ^N$H*^ ' a slight inspection ;' ^^^t' a bad man.'
757. Adjectives used as substantives sometimes occupy the last place in
Descriptive compounds ; as, '<rc?nJTfTcFJ ' a very just man ;' MtJHTigr!*^ ' a very
wonderful thing.'
a. In the same manner, substantives, used adjectively, may occupy the first
place ; as, *Tc?~ qTfJ(!I 'impure substances ;' TTSfftj ' a royal sage.'
758. Descriptive compounds expressing 'excellence' or 'eminence' fall under
this class, and are composed of two substantives, one of which is used as an adjec-
tive to describe or define the other, and is placed last, being generally the name of
an animal denoting 'superiority;' as, TJ^H 4 *m$rJ 'man-tiger,' *P>^73W^* 'man-
bull,' TJ^v^f^Jt ' man-lion,' ^J^nfcn ' man-bull,' i. e. ' an illustrious man.'
Similarly, tPfl. *!*(. ' an excellent woman' (gem of a woman); ^ij 1 ^*^ 'face-
lotus,' i. e. ' lotus-like face.'
a. So other compounds expressive of ' comparison' or ' resemblance ' are usually
included in native grammars under the Karma-dharaya class. In these the adjec-
tive is placed last ; as, "^Tm/qaartJ, ~o5T 5 ~^^> ' fickle as a shadow ;' ^IR^JIRI,
-TT, -*H^, ' dark as a cloud ;' ^JVrf^^ft^I, -^T, -W^, 'spread out like a mountain.'
b. The following are examples of Greek and Latin compounds falling under this
class ; fJieyaXo-fJi^Tifip, /Vc-Tre&ov, peyotXo-voia, yfAt-Kvcov, sacri-portus, meri-dies
(for medi-dies), decem-viri, semi-deus. Parallel compounds in English are, good-
will,' 'good-sense,' 'ill-nature,' 'holiday,' 'blackguard,' &c.
NUMERAL (OE COLLECTIVE) COMPOUNDS (DVIGU).
759. A numeral is often compounded with a substantive to form
a collective noun, but the last member of the compound is generally
in the neuter singular ; thus, ^f ^ ' the four ages' (for ^r^rft: f TTfT) ;
ADVERBIAL COMPOUNDS (AVYAYI-BHA'VA). 335
' tne four quarters ;' ffcl.'fyH^ ' three days' (triduum) ;
* three nights' (ntft being substituted for trf^, see 778); ^^\ 'three
years' (trienniuiri) ; H^lfH 'the five fires/
a. Rarely the stems of numerals are compounded with plural substantives ; as,
'^TJ^Jlh; 'the four castes;' Rtf.<uait 'five arrows;' OTnHj: 'the seven stars of
Ursa Major.'
b. Sometimes the last member of the compound is in the feminine singular, with
the termination $; as, fdr-il 1 *^ 'the three worlds.'
c. Compare Greek and Latin compounds like rerpaoQiov, rpivvKTiov, TfQpiTTJrov,
triduum, triennium, trinoctium, quadrivium, quinquertium.
ADVERBIAL OR INDECLINABLE COMPOUNDS (AVYAYl-BHAVA).
760. In this class of indeclinable (avyaya, i. e. na vyeti, ' what does
not change') compounds the first member must be either a preposition
(such as "srfw, ^rfv, ^rg, ufir, &c., at 783) or an adverbial prefix (such
as 7r?n ' as,' *n^ as far as,' ^H or ^ ' not,' ^ ' with,' &c.) The
last member is a substantive which takes the form of an accusative
case neuter, whatever may be the termination of its stem ; thus,
'according to faith' (from TTTT and ^T^l); IffilTtf^i^ * every
night' (from ufir and fnn); nfiT^^ ' in every quarter' (from Tjfir
and ftfSi); ^rfinj c beyond the ship' (from ^rfir and r^).
a. Many of these compounds are formed with the adverbial prepo-
sition l-Tf, generally contracted into *; thus, fl<*ta( 'with anger'
(from *c and ojrfa) ; TRi^i.^ ' with respect' (^ ^n^rj*() ; ^iTSI^'MIrt^ ' with
prostration of eight parts of the body ;' Httrfv (i. e. sa-upadhi)
' fraudulently ;' *rfrT * with fire.' Panini (n. i, 9, &c.) gives some
unusual forms with postpositions ; as, ^xnrfir ' a little sauce.'
b. The following are examples of indeclinable compounds with other prefixes ;
jrj ( Ttf8^ ' according to seniority ;' HWJI^ ' over every limb ;' WfTTTra^ ' every
mouth' (730. e); ^^f f<^fv 'according to rule;' fHT3jfai or MI^TMIH*^ (45)
* according to one's abih'ty ;' 4VI^^*^ ' na ppily ;' ^Mi^*^ ' suitably,' ' worthily ;'
' as described ;' ^T^^JTD^ ' every moment ;' i (^ ' before the eyes ' (778) ;
< upon the shoulders ;' ^rfv^p^ ' upon the tree ;' ^4*llfrtlTjO<*^ 'near
the banks of the Malini ;' ^a^[*(*^ ' without doubt ;' faP^S*^ 'without distinc-
tion ;' iflWT^*^ ' in the middle of the Gauges.'
c. Analogous indeclinable compounds are found in Latin and Greek, such as
admodum, obviam. affatim, avrijSiyv, a.VTi{3iov, virepfjupov, 7rapa^p>7/xa. In these,
however, the original gender is retained, whereas, according to the Sanskrit rule,
obvium would be written for obviam, and off ate for affatim. In Greek compounds
336 RELATIVE COMPOUNDS (BAHU-VRIHl).
like (ryfACpov, the feminine ^jtcepa appends a neuter form, as in Sanskrit. In
English ' uphill.'
d. The neuter word ^T^ 'for the sake of,' ' on account of (see 731. Obs.), is often
used at the end of compounds ; thus, *SHiJ*^ ' for the sake of sleep ;'
for the sake of the performance of business.' See, however, 731, note.
e. There is a peculiar adverbial compound formed by doubling a nominal stem,
the final of the first member of the compound being lengthened, and the final of
the last changed to ^ . It generally denotes mutual contact, reciprocity, or oppo-
sition ; thus, j/i*jf5 'fist to fist;' ^IHIrjftli 'stick to stick' (fighting); ^hflif^l
* share by share ;' qf$ltlf$l ' pulling each other's hah* ;' ''Mjj'lf^ ' body to body ;'
' arm * arm '' l^'lfi^ 'scratching each other.'
f. Something in the same manner, ^STS? and TIT, ' another,' are doubled ; thus,
, 'one another,' 'mutually,' 'together.'
KELATIVE COMPOUNDS (MOSTLY EQUIVALENT TO BAHU-VRlHT).
761. The compounds in the preceding four divisions are generally
terminated by substantives, the sense of each being in that case
absolute and complete in itself. Most of such compounds may be
used relatively, that is, as epithets of other words, the final substan-
tive becoming susceptible of three genders, like an adjective (see 108,
119, 130, 134. a). We have given the name relative to compounds
when thus used, not only for the obvious reason of their being
relatively and not absolutely employed, but also because they
usually involve a relative pronoun, and are sometimes translated
into English by the aid of this pronoun, and are, moreover, resolved
by native commentators into their equivalent uncompounded words
by the aid of the genitive case of the relative (*rw). Thus, Tf T^R^
is a Descriptive compound, meaning 'great wealth/ and may be
used adjectively in relation to ^^:, thus flifTVf: 3*>^i 'a man who
has great wealth;' or to ^-ft, thus l^TV'TT JRjft ' a woman who has
great wealth ' and would be resolved by native commentators into
?P9J or ^qr ijffS VF^. In English we have similar compounds, as
'high-minded,' 'left-handed,' and the like, where the substantive
terminating the compound is converted into an adjective.
Relative form of Tat-purusha or Dependent Compounds.
763. Many Dependent compounds (especially those that are instru-
mentally dependent at 740) are already in their own nature relative,
and cannot be used except in connexion with some other word in
the sentence. But, on the other hand, many others, and especially
EELATIVE COMPOUNDS (BAHU-VRIHl). 337
those which are genitively dependent, constituting by far the largest
number of this class of compounds, are in their nature absolute, and
yield a sense complete in itself. These may be made relative by
declining the final word after the manner of an adjective ; thus,
"Ki$f7E, -fir:, -fir, ' moon-shaped 5 (see 119), from the absolute com-
pound -^l^fiT: ' the shape of the moon/
a. Other examples are, ^'r^4t, -TT, "^j 'whose form is godlike' (see 108);
H*?TWre:, -^FT, ~^j 'splendid as the sun' (108); IfftH.ll^t, -^T, -^*,
'elephant-footed' (see 57); STT'Kini;, -*?TT, -'iT^, 'ending at the sea;' "n^npflT,
-nTT, -'iT^, 'terminated by death ;' ^hp^T*?:, -H, -T^, or W3J^:, -^STT, -1^,
'headed by Karna;' faw"pii.uiij -*TI, -*T, 'named Vishnus'arman ' (see 154);
t^:, -T|t, -T5P^, ' lotus-eyed' (see 778); ii<jM*gT^T:, -^TT, -^H^j 'called
Narayana;' V|1 4 *Jrtt, -HT, -<3*^, 'founded on wealth;' cSSf^H^Tfif (agreeing
with V*rrfT), 'money to the amount of a lac;' 'l^tJW:, -^TT, -W^, 'having a
club in the hand,' or 'club-in-hand;' 9i{cr.mftut, -fe, -ft?, 'arms-in-hand;'
ilc4.'^W;, -Wl, ~W^j 'net-in-hand;' yss^fcmq:, -ITT, -^J^, 'on the subject of
flowers,' 'relating to flowers;' *mTM<.J, -U, ~^ 'having meditation for one's
chief occupation;' nfst^, -?TT, -S^, 'having his knowledge.' These examples
are not distinguishable from absolute dependent compounds, except by declension
in three genders.
b. Similar compounds are found in Greek ; e. g. J7nrc- i yAa><7<70f, 'horse-tongued.'
763. Many of them, however, are not found, except as relatives ;
and if used absolutely would yield a different sense ; thus, <**rrj^
means ' the face of Karna, 3 but when used relatively, as 2fiifrj^n TTTRr,
* the kings headed by Karna.' So also ^K^TEJ: signifies * the eye of
the spy,' but when used relatively, as ^HXH^TTifT, * a king who sees
by means of his spies.' See 166. c.
764. The substantive ^nf^, 'a beginning,' when it occurs in the last member
of a compound of this nature, is used relatively to some word expressed or under-
stood, and yields a sense equivalent to et cetera. It is generally found either in
the plural or neuter singular; as, ^ f rj;<;*tJ 'Indra and the others' (agreeing with
the nom. case ^Fdt expressed or understood, the gods commencing with Indra');
*&
of Agni and the others' (agreeing with Jqiwii*^ understood, of
those above-named things of which Agni was the first'); ^TSprnftfa 'the eyes,
&c.' (agreeing with ^fT;<.uf<u 'the senses commencing with the eyes'). When
used in the neut. sing, it either agrees with ^T^f^} ' the aforesaid,' understood, or
may be substituted for TT^ in compounds of this kind, but not after
See 778.
X X
338 EELATIVE COMPOUNDS (BAHU-VRmi).
with a number of things taken collectively, and the adverb iti * may be prefixed ;
as, ^TfTWTf^ 'the word devdn, &c.' (agreeing with ^5T%^ understood, ' the afore-
said sentence of which devdn is the first word'); ^TTTf^TT 'by liberality, &c.'
(agreeing with some class of things understood, ' by that class of things of which
liberality is the first'). See also 772.
a. It may occasionally be used in the masc. sing. ; as, TTWnf^t ' brooms, &c.'
(agreeing with 7*n3FC 'furniture').
b. Sometimes ^TTf^F is used for ^Slf^ ; as, ^Tfnf^cF^ ' gifts, &c. :' and some-
times ^rra; as, Client ^JKTJ 'the gods of whom Indra is the first.'
c. The feminine substantive JJ^ffrT, 'beginning,' may be used in the same way;
thus, frin|rR: *JtK 'the gods, beginning with Indra ;' WWT ?JTOf *nTftrH| ifl TI *\
'of those villagers, &c.'
d. Observe The neuter of ^Tlf^ may optionally take the terminations of the
masculine in all but the nom. and ace. cases; thus, ^wai^t^ 'of elephants,
horses, &c.' (agreeing with qc^tjn gen. neut. of "^c5 'an army').
Relative form ofDvandva or Copulative Compounds.
765. Copulative (or Aggregative) compounds are sometimes used
relatively; especially in the case of adjectives or participles; as,
-*$[, -W^> 'black and white 5 (cf. Xeu/co-/xeXa?) ;
-TTT, -THJ, 'bathed and anointed; 3 xUFFl^:, -^T, -^, 'belonging to
town and country; 5 ^ffiTlejnT:, -TTT, -1T^, 'done and done badly;'
SJT$J:, -T, -H^, ' good and evil 5 (754) ; ^K.fa'v:, -nfr, -^M^, ' thick
and unctuous; 5 ftft^T^fwfTW:, -iTT, -H^, 'noiseless and motionless 5
(night) ; Jj'^1 ri^Pri^Th^ ' of him taken and let loose. 5 See other
examples under Complex Compounds.
Obs. Many compounds of this kind are classed by native gram-
marians under the head of Tat-purusha (Pan. n. i, 69), though the
accent in many conforms to the rule for Bahu-vrihi (vi. 2, 3).
Relative form of Karma-dhdraya or Descriptive Compounds.
766. A greater number of compound words may be referred to
this head than to any other. Every style of writing abounds with
them; thus, -flg^lfli:, -f%:, -fa, ' whose strength is small 5 (119).
a. Other examples are, *n!rWc5J, -HT, -c5*(, 'whose strength is great' (108,
see also 778); *^TnWT', -TII, -W*, 'whose glory is great' (164. a); ^T^nnTt,
-TT, -!*?, 'whose wealth is small;' *^]WT, -7TT, -W, 'high-minded' (151);
n, -fTT, -TTH, 'of noble demeanour;' "^TTWJ, -WT, -WT, 'having
* Sometimes evam is prefixed ; as, ^HT^TfT TJc57'*nfT ' lamentations begin-
ning thus.'
RELATIVE COMPOUNDS (BAHU-VRIHl). 339
many fish;' <O"^nelfpi<SJ, -^T, -<r5*r, 'having very little water;'
-fit, -fg", 'of wise intellect' (119); fWI^TR:, -%, -"^R, 'having a dear wife;'
^rar*nn, -TT, -*T 1 ^> 'not to be reconciled;' fl^TT^Nr^:, agreeing with
TT*TT, ' a king who conceals what ought to be concealed.'
b. Occasionally the feminine of the adjective appears in the compound; as,
^Sfanh ' having a sixth wife.' Compare 755. b.
767. Although a passive participle is not often prefixed to a
noun in an absolute sense, this kind of combination prevails most
extensively in the formation of relative compounds; as, UT7r<*l^:,
-75T, -o3*^, * whose time has arrived/
a. Other examples are, fWfff^niJ, -T(T, -f^, 'whose passions are subdued;'
JfTFfT^iTn, -int, -IT, 'whose mind is composed;' ^J^TTTTK, -TTJ, -TJ, 'whose
mind is rejoiced' (see 164); VFrJT^H, -"5TT, -^F^, 'whose hopes are broken;'
^TTTTrZIt, -j^T, -3*1*^, 'whose kingdom is taken away;' ^TftfiTiRn't, -TK,
-n, 'whose glory is boundless;' ^TO^TFS'' ~^3*> ~^3> ' w h se death is near;'
T^rpR;, -*TT, -*P^, 'whose desire is accomplished,' i.e. 'successful;'
TJ, -TT, -T*^, 'one who has finished eating;' ^IffV'i
by whom the S'astras have not been read;' ftf^jf^IJ, -TR, ~^> or
'whose heart is pierced;' ftTTT^I^J, ~W'j ~W> 'who has conquered his enemies;'
fg^cir^r:, -JJJT, -^JT, 'having the hair cut;' f*T ffT^rTt , -TT, -! 1 ^, 'eating
sparingly;' tJjnTT'J.', -"TT, -TI'T, 'purified from sin.'
b. The suffix "35 ka is often added; as, UTTSftcFJ, -epT, -F^, 'reft of fortune;'
^Wfr^7^:, -T^iT, -^IW, ' shorn of (his) beams.' Cf. 769. a.
c. Examples of Greek and Latin compounds of this kind are, fJLfya,Xo-K(f>a\Of t
magn-a.nim.us, longi-manus, multi-comus, albi-comus, multi-vius, dtri-
color. In English compounds of this kind abound; e.g. 'blue-eyed,' 'narrow-
minded,' ' good-tempered,' ' pale-faced,' &c.
Relative form of Dvigu or Numeral Compounds.
768. Numeral or Dvigu compounds may be used relatively ; as,
flTWt, -TDT, -^R, ' two-leaved ;' fg'TyN'T:, -U or -ft, -f^ir, * tri-ocular.'
a. Other examples are, %Tj>h, -VT, -V^, 'three-headed* (^ being substituted
for ^*^, see 778); ^f^:, -^, -^H, 'four-faced;' ^fWFtw:, -W1, ~W(,
'quadrangular;' ^nT^STCt, -TT, -TH, 'hundred-gated;' ^Ijffsr:, -W, -&[, 'pos-
sessed of the four sciences' (108); ^^TT^J, -^, -'^T, 'thousand-eyed' (see 778);
Ra/T<;*R:, -!T, -TW, 'having the wealth of five bullocks.'
Relative form of Compounds with Adverbial Prefixes.
769. The adverbial compounds most frequently employed rela-
tively as adjectives are those formed with the adverbial preposition
x x 2
340 RELATIVE COMPOUNDS (BAHU-VRIHl).
^ 'with,' contracted into *f; thus, *rte:, ->H, -*?*, ' angry ' (lit.
* with-anger,' * having anger'); WTS&l, -<5T, -<3*, 'fruitful' (108);
*^% : > -"^ -^, 'possessed of kindred' (119); ^ni^n, -^T, -W(,
'energetic;' ^riffa:, -^T, -^IT, 'possessed of life,' 'living;' ^H^:,
-?[T, -^T, 'joyful;' *r*f^:, -^r, -^pr, ' accompanied by ministers;'
*n?nJ: 'accompanied by a wife,' * having a wife;' *rw:, -l^T, -
* strung' (as a bow, lit. ' with-bowstring').
Obs. When adverbial compounds like *T*nWT (760. b) are used at the begin-
ning of relative compounds, the final T is dropped ; e. g. ^"fl eh/*! I MIC, -TT, -TT,
'employed in the manner described.'
a. The suffix ^i ka (80. LVI) is often added to this kind of compound ; as, ST^fraK,
-^T, -^K^i 'possessed of fortune;' IT^pfNiJ, -RT, -F*f, 'accompanied by women.'
b. In some compounds H^ remains ; as, *nr^T?nf: ' with his army ;' *ltnje?t
' along with his son.'
c. *T is also used for ^HTR ' same ;' as, ^T*ft<ft , -<3"T, -^*T, ' of the same family.'
d. There are of course many examples of nouns combined with adverbial prefixes,
so as to form relative compounds, which cannot be regarded as relative forms of
Avyayi-bhava ; thus, ot^igV:, -VT, '^^5 'with uplifted weapon;' TT*TTTTfiTT: ,
-TJ, ~T*T, 'of various shapes;' "9fTTnHt, -^TT, -^W, 'where dwelling?' g^afm,
-WTT, -^1, 'where born?' fa^TOV:, ->H, -VT, 'without fault;' ftT^T^KJ, -TT,
-T*T, ' having no food ;' ^tfh, -tfh, -f, ' fearless ' ( 1 23. b) ; FSTrfW, -VT, -V^ v ,
'of that kind,' 'in such a state;' ^5%', -1%', -fS", 'weak-minded;'
-fat, -fif, 'ill-natured;' ^jt , -^T or -^t, -^W, 'handsome-faced;'
-fS'*, -f } 'of good understanding.' Some of the above may be regarded as
relative forms of Descriptive compounds, formed with indeclinable prefixes ; see
756. Similar compounds in Greek and Latin are, av-^epof, ev-oyXo?, in-imicus,
in-felix, dis-similis, semi-plenus.
e. Observe The adverbial prefixes 5[^ and ^ (726. d.f) impart a passive sense
to participial nouns of agency, just as Qv<r and v in Greek ; thus, fe^oiK ' difiicult
to be done,' 5g3FH ' easy to be done ;' gc5*T ' difficult to be obtained,' ^p?W ' easy
to be attained ;' ^3T 'difficult to be crossed.' Cf. evcfropos, 'easy to be borne ;'
$v<rTropof, ' difficult to be passed,' &c.
f. ^(^I^i, -''JT, -''PT, ' possessed of a master,' is used at the end of compounds
to denote simply 'possessed of,' 'furnished with;' thus,
'a stone-seat furnished with a canopy ;' f^Tf5TMg 4 r|i'<n T^^J 'an arbour having
a marble-slab as its master,' i. e. ' furnished with,' ' provided with,' &c. Similarly,
I ' a fig-tree occupied by a number of cranes.'
g. Observe The relative form of a compound would be marked in Vedic San-
skrit by the accent. In the Karma-dharaya compound mahd-bdhu, 'great arm,'
the accent would be on the last syllable, thus T?T3"Rj ; but in the Relative mahd-
bdhu, 'great-armed,' on the ante-penultimate, thus, T^T^TT?. So, native com-
mentators often quote as an example of the importance of right accentuation, the
COMPLEX COMPOUND NOUNS. 341
word Indra-satru, which, accented on the first syllable, would be Bahu-vrihi (see
Pan. vi. 2, I, by which the first member retains its original accent); but accented
on the penultimate would be Tat-purusha. The sense in the first case is ' having
Indra for a conqueror or destroyer ;' in the second, 'the destroyer of Indra.'
h. Note, that >HIr*J<* and ^J (80. LXXIX) are used at the end of relative com-
pounds to denote 'composed of,' 'consisting of;' but are more frequently found
at the end of complex relatives ; see 774.
COMPLEX COMPOUND NOUNS.
770. We have now to speak of complex compound words,
or compounds within compounds, which form a most remarkable
feature in Sanskrit composition. Instances might be given of
twenty or thirty words thus compounded together; but these are
the productions of the vitiated taste of more modern times, and
are only curious as shewing that the power of compounding words
may often be extravagantly abused. But even in the best specimens
of Sanskrit composition, and in the simplest prose writings, four, five,
or even six words are commonly compounded together, involving
two or three forms under one head. It will be easy, however, to
determine the character of the forms involved, by the rules pro-
pounded in the preceding pages.
Instances of absolute complex compounds, whose sense is complete
and unconnected, are not rare.
a. The following are examples : ^TWTiTTT^f^3p*TSpTrfT ' good and evil
(occurring) in the revolutions of the interval of time,' the whole being a dependent,
involving a dependent and a copulative ; Htl^fif fcl*efi ' the general of the
army and the overseer of the forces,' the whole being a copulative, involving two
dependents ; ^ii oni <j Pci^HTr^nn^ ' the protection from sorrow, enemies, and perils,'
the whole being a dependent, involving an aggregative ; '3T^VlfVn 4 *j^l < *M*l ' the
disregarded words of a friend,' the whole being a descriptive, involving a dependent ;
3|3ii tJ< 4 *iiM^i*i ' a white robe and a string of garlands,' the whole being a copu-
lative, involving a descriptive and dependent ; *H.!M4pf.MK,*lJ ' one who has gone
to the opposite bank (para) of all the S'astras,' i. e. 'one who has read them through ;'
^ e D0nes f a dead lion.'
771. Complex compounds are generally used as adjectives, or
relatively, as epithets of some other word in the sentence ; thus,
*rf^ rrT^7TTTt , -ft, -! I T, ' whose nails and eyes were decayed,' the
whole being the relative form of descriptive, involving a copulative ;
Wrnr^fW: ' having a throat emaciated with hunger/ the whole being
the relative form of descriptive, involving a dependent.
342 COMPLEX COMPOUND NOUNS.
a. Other examples are, ^ft^T^T^FStnT: , -rff, -*T^, ' having a white garland
and unguents,' the whole being the relative form of copulative, involving a
descriptive; ^1 l < *5ti^lT^^ 1 T^t 'broad-shouldered and strong-armed,' the whole
being a copulative, involving two descriptives ; ^5."'t w ^iTJ , - ffT, -iH^, ' done in a
former birth,' the whole being a dependent, involving a descriptive; f^STT^-
*ft^*> ~5T -5*^} 'advanced in learning and age,' the whole being a dependent,
involving a copulative; fjfalTBlpf^rfao -TT, -F^, 'having fresh garlands,
and being free from dust,' the whole being the relative form of copulative,
involving a descriptive and dependent; ^jfaH<*i j'f^PCn, -tit, -^t, 'whose head
was moist with unction ;' *r*rfonr*p^!, -^T or -^T% -W^, ' having the face turned
in any direction one likes; 5 ^J<?.~JfiCSWi, -HT, -^cP^, ' spear and club in hand;'
tt , -jfT, -TTH, 'sufficient for support during one night' (see 778) ;
n ' those who are acquainted with the meaning of
the three Vedas, called Rig, Yajur, and Sama ;' ^T^TT^ n aa^TTRT'TerTJ ' biting
their lips and having red eyes' (agreeing with TJTTT')> l^^^
another by action or by intention.'
772. The substantive ^Tff^ 'a beginning,' often occurs in complex relative
compounds, with the force of et cetera, as in simple relatives at 764 ; thus, ^pITOT-
Rchi^MJ 'parrots, starlings, &c.' (agreeing with trftSfKH 'birds beginning with
parrots and starlings '), the whole being the relative form of dependent, involving
an aggregative ; ^farfa?T?Tfif ' peace, war, &c.' (agreeing with ^TW^ under-
stood); 'J^il'iKjfq.^hJ, ~?BT, ~W^j 'possessed of houses, temples, &c. ;'
, 'possessed of property such as elephants,
horses, treasure, &c.'
a. Similarly, ^TRT in the example wr*t**it!6nJ (agreeing with 6Tft ' garlands
possessing the best odour and other qualities').
773. Long complex compounds may be generally translated by beginning at the
last word and proceeding regularly backwards, as in the following : T'W^T^'If^ffT-
-?T, "***{'> causing pleasure
by the music of the voice of the cuckoo, blended with the hum emitted by the
swarms of joyous bees.'
774. ^iwofi or ^t^l, at the end of a complex relative, denotes 'composed of;'
thus, l[*i<4' < *.'q > m^rrt < tiJTc(Kir*ieu ^9^ ' a force consisting of elephants, horses,
chariots, infantry, and servants;' wl*^rt*r*j<y'rrg>ejrr^ : f ^f*mft 'the two actions
consisting of the good and evil done in a former birth.'
775. Complex compounds may sometimes have their second or middle member
omitted ; thus, ; 3rfH$i I *1.3I $ nreW[ is really a complex compound, the whole being
a descriptive, involving a dependent ; but the middle member T?TiT is elided.
Similarly, 3nFmnN'l 'the era-king' is for ^i i <*, ftHnTI^H^J 'the king (beloved)
by the era ;' fTBWta^ft for f^flWHlHlW^ft ' Urvas'i gained by valour.'
a. Complex compounds expressive of comparison are not uncommon ; as,
, 'unsteady and trembling as a drop of water;'
ANOMALOUS COMPOUNDS. 343
j: , -?5T, -c?*T, 'tremulous as water on the leaf of a lotus;'
the last two examples are complex. Compare 758. a.
b. A peculiar compound of this kind is formed from Dvandvas by adding the
suffix iya ; thus, ^!TFfTTf5 : NlJ , -TT, ~1*^> ' like the story of the crow and the palm-
tree ;' ^Rj'ewYflfan , -*n, -*!** 'like the story of the hawk and the pigeon.'
c. The substantive verb must often be supplied in connexion with a relative com-
pound ; as, HTWTH'^ft^! 'his success was proportionate to his undertakings ;'
^tiTRfftr ' on his drinking water,' for (Hf ^wfa Tfrff ^Ftl.
776. Complex compound adverbs, or indeclinable compounds,
involving other compounds, are sometimes found ; as, '^^^rH
* not differently from one's own house ;' $| ^^N | *mi I H rf O^ ' after utter-
ing a sound ;' ^nr>TT;f =< H H ^ vi?*Wl **^*{ ' regardlessly of the curving
of her waist bending under the weight of her bosom ;' ^rergywriTT
* as seen and heard.'
ANOMALOUS COMPOUNDS.
777. There are certain compounds which are too anomalous in their formation
to admit of ready classification under any one of the preceding heads.
a. W*8 t ^ITI, <^JI, ^*TO, TTcf , affixed to stems, form anomalous compounds ;
see 80. LVII, LXX LXXII, LXXVI.
b. There is a common compound formed by placing ^TJflT after a nominal stem,
to express 'another,' 'other;' as, ?q i i I *n <,*i^ or ^ ty J*fR*f ' another place ;' TTilJifWT
^H? ' along with another king ;' af^TpfTTTftn ' other births.'
c. Similarly, TIW is added to express ' mere ;' see 919.
d. i3 or ^^ or ^^'^ (meaning literally 'preceded by') may be added to
nominal stems to denote the manner in which anything is done ; as, "SM *T^%*T ' with
anger ;' ^*n^[^3> ^ ^?^ ^T ' he gave food with reverence.'
e. A peculiar compound is formed by the use of an ordinal number as the last
member ; thus, ^TR*r%rffa; ' accompanied by the Sarasa ;' ^ftrtrgiifa: (agreeing
with XWt) 'having Sita for his third (companion),' i.e. including Lakshmana;
.) 'Nala made double by his shadow;' *iig t Hi:
' the Pandavas with their mother as the sixth ;' ^^T vjn^fm.M^aiiTt ' the Vedas
with the A'khyanas as a fifth ;' ^Hfil<,3M TT^J ' ten cows and one bull ' (Manu
xi. 129).
/. The following are peculiar : iiirWir<iirrt*lT ' a fighter who abandons life ;'
w^flT^TCi:, -HT, -1*f, 'having no fear from any quarter;' ^T^F^I, -%T, ~^>
' never before seen ;' tiH^i^^TT! ' one who has lodged seven nights.'
g. With regard to compounds like 'inj^ ni*l ' desh-ous of going,' see 871.
h. The Veda has some peculiar compounds j e. g. vidad-vasu, ' granting wealth ;'
ydvayad-dveshas, ' defending from enemies ;' kshayad-vfra, ' ruling over men.'
These are a kind of inverted Tat-purusha.
344 CHANGES OP CERTAIN WORDS IN CERTAIN COMPOUNDS.
CHANGES OF CERTAIN WORDS IN CERTAIN COMPOUNDS.
778. The following is an alphabetical list of the substitutions and
changes which take place in the final syllables of certain words
when used in certain compounds. They are called by native gram-
marians Samasanta suffixes. They are properly only added to
Tat-purusha compounds (which include Karma-dharaya).
TOT5J at end of various compounds for ^rftsj n. ' the eye ;' e. g. T^TEf! ' a bull's
eye (window) ;' c^fi?eTTT5f: , -T^ft, -W^, ' red-eyed .' ^Ijp* for TO^pfe f . ' the finger ;'
e. g. "STf^Sl, -75T, -e5*(, ' measuring two fingers.' ^H^c* for 'SHsTfo m. 'joining
the hands in reverence.' TOil for TO53^ m. 'a road;' e.g. HTW, -&fl, -*$*(,
* distant (as a road).' ais in Dvandvas for "siis^ m. ' a bull ;' e. g. MHis^
or -*!T ' cow and bull.' r^nnET in Karma-dharayas for TOf^ n. ' a cart/ ' a carriage ;'
e. g. T$!Tro*T ' a large cart' (Pan. v. 4, 94). TOTH in Karma-dharayas for ^*f^ n.
' iron.'-' TO^f in Karma-dharayas for j^*i^ m. ' a stone.' - ^TS for TOfol f. ' an
angle;' e.g. ^TJI^sn, -^TT, -?&{, 'quadrangular.' TOUT in Dvigus and relative
compounds for ^n?^J e.g. TOFTT^'a car drawn by eight oxen;'
-c5T, -75*^, ' having eight receptacles.' TOTi?fa in Dvandvas for TOTTfaiT m. n. ' the
knee ;' e. g. ttfts'fa^ ' thigh and knee.' TOW for TOfiw 'a bone.' TO^ or TO^T
for TOIf^n. 'a day;' e.g. JT^rirj 'the period of one day;' j<!*U*^'a holy-day;'
TO^qfiH ' the lord of day.' TOg for TO^n. ' a day ;' e. g. y^l^t ' the forenoon.'
^ for TO^f. ' water ;' e. g. ^IH ' an island ;' ^RT^JT ' an island.' ^5^ for
^T 'a wound' (Pan. v. 4, 126). vTSJ in Karma-dharayas for ^T5|^ m. 'an ox;'
e. g. *R|VEf I ' a large ox.' "3^ for ^^ n. ' water ;' e. g. "^^^fl ' a water-jar ;'
"Ff^Tl^: 'the sea of milk.' ^T31 in Karma-dharayas for 7^ n. 'the breast;'
e.g. TOTgfcftt, -Tft, -TW, 'broad-chested as a horse.' ^T*lT an old dual form
in Dvandvas for TS^f. n. ' the dawn;' e. g. T^nTHplH ' dawn and sun' (Pan. vi.
3, 31). ^I^ (f. '3>>ft) for "3M^n. 'an udder,' at end of Bahu-vrihis (Pan. iv.
i, 25); e.g. ''Tmtlft 'having a full udder;' STlft 'having two udders;' 'Sfi'Ijrt
' having an exceedingly large udder.' '3HT for ^^f. 'water ;' e. g. TOfJtf: , -TIT, -^,
'near water,' 'watery.' ^J^ for ^f^; see 779. - R"^ for F"^ m. 'the top,'
' head ;' e. g. f^^T^W 'three-peaked (mountain).' ^K^ or ofiT or ^i^ for ^ express-
ing inferiority or diminution: e.g. et>rt*ii or ^!TW or ^^tW 'slightly warm;'
'a bad letter;' ^g^I 'a coward.' ?flofT at end of Bahu-vrihis for
m - '^e palate;' e.g. f^^T^j^' having no palate.' "^TSf for ^f^? m. 'the
belly.' WK for ^it^ J e. g. TO^^TT^ ' half a khari ' (a measure). Trf^ for JW
m. 'smell ;' e. g. ^flT'Tf^i:, -fin, -flf, ' fetid.' >R in Dvigus for rft m . f. ' an
ox ;' e. g. H^j'm"^ ' a collection of five cows.' ^$f- for '"Jtjt ' four ;' see 779.
H^ for *niT ' a wife ;' e. g. T**fift du. ' husband and wife.' *?Wr^ for n*f ' a
tooth;' e.g. ^ISnWf, -*HT, -'H, 'grass-toothed,' 'graminivorous.' nfT for
f. ' a wife ;' e. g. ^T^TTf^Tt ' having a young wife.' sj and si in Bahu-vrihis
CHANGES OP CERTAIN WORDS IN CERTAIN COMPOUNDS. 345
for TFJ n. 'the knee ;' e. g. TTsJ.*, -1?:, -sT, or H$T:, -$TT, -$T^, 'bandy-kneed.'
TT8J for rtBj't, m. ' a carpenter ;' e. g. Rfcrr^: ' a carpenter who works on his own
account;' ?ITHlT^t 'the village carpenter.' rPTO in Karma-dharayas (preceded
by ^, ^T3, or ^FH) for fTT^ n. ' darkness ;' e. g. ^RHH*^ ' slight darkness.'
r5T^ for r^, see 779. ^(f. ^rft) for ^nf m. ' a tooth ;' e. g. *J^> -^rft, -^Tf ,
' having beautiful teeth.' <^[ for TT1T ' a wife ;' e. g. <5**(rf*)' ' husband and wife '
(according to some, 'the two lords of the dama or house '). f^ at end and f^^T at
beginning for ft^c^m. 'the day;' e.g. f^rf^^' night and day;' f?[^rfT$W ' day
and night.' f^^I at end for f^SI, see Gana S'arad-ddi to Pan. v. 4, 107. STO at
end for g^T 'yielding milk ;' e.g. H*Tipn 'the cow of plenty.' 1TTWT an old dual
form for f^f. 'heaven;' aTTnjfsi^iT du. 'heaven and earth.' >P^ at end of
Bahu-vrihis for *TJ^n. 'a bow;' e.g. T3^V^T, -*^T, -^, 'a strong archer.'
W( at end for V*f m. ' virtue,' ' duty;' e. g. ht^UirVRT, ~^T> ~$, ' virtuous.'
>JT for >J^f. ' a load ;' e. g. ^T.VJ^ ' a royal load.' 1 T at the beginning of a few
compounds for ^ 'not;' e.g. ^pT5K 'a eunuch.' T^ for T<ffr 'a river;' e.g.
^l^'the Panjab.' ^S or ^ for VfTftToRT 'nose;' e.g. ^riOi:, -TRi:, -IB'.,
or ^r^I!T5R:, -^TT, -TT^, ' sharp-nosed.' TT* for nftT f. 'the navel ;' e. g. *JiTTW:
' lotus-naveled,' a name of Vishnu. tfR 1 for TT f. ' a ship ;' but only in Dvigu
compounds and after ardha (Pan. v. 4, 99, 100) ; e. g. fs"ll"f*^'two boats ;' ^WTT^
' half of a boat.' T*l for nHq*^ m. ' a road ;' e. g. ^T^K ' a good road.'~ Tt^ and
"TT^ (fern. T^t) for >TT^ m. ' the foot ;' e. g. tff|fH^ ' coldness of the feet ;' %^T!^,
-^T^t, -TiT, 'a biped;' "qgnmrT 'a quadruped.' T^ for "HT^ m. 'the foot;' e.g.
Tt, -TT, -JT 1 ^, ' going on foot.' TJ^T in Dvandvas for *J^ m. ' a male ;' e. g.
nom. du. ' man and woman .' *J?^ for ^TTJTT f . ' an army.' HTO N at end of
Bahu-vrihis (preceded by ^T, ?J, or |^) for THTT f. ' people,' ' progeny ;' e. g. ^?TI~
"nt, -WTt, -1TI, 'having a numerous progeny.' "31! for ri*( m. 'a Brahman ;'
. g. ^flt ' a contemptible Brahman.' *JH for *jfi? f. ' the earth ;' e. g. '
* land towards the north.' R in Dvandvas for H f. ' the eye-brow ;' e.g.
' eye and brow.' 1f*{3 in Dvandvas for nl^ n. 'the mind ;' e. g. ^T^pTO nom.
du. n. ' speech and heart.' *T^ an d *T^ (preceded by fTWT, TTTTT, &c., 754. a) for
f^ 'great;' e.g. fmiM^: 'grandfather.' fl^T at beginning of Karma-dharayas
and Bahu-\Tihis for f^fl m. f. n. 'great ;' but in Tat-purusha or dependent corn--
pounds TiTi^ is retained, as in *T^<JTSnU ' recourse to the great ;' also before >Jlf
* become,' and words of a similar import, as T^^fTI ' one who has become great ;'
^- j
but TsTPJin^ ' an element.' ^V at end of Bahu-vrihis (preceded by flf, fW, &c.)
for 'JV^m. 'the head ;' e. g. %^&t, -"T, -^ (see Pan. v. 4, 115 ; vi. 2, 197).
TV^at end of Bahu-vrihis (preceded by ^T, *J, <^, ^C^, 1^) for 1VT f. 'intellect ;'
e.g. ^^.Hmt, -^Tt,-y:. TI^Tfor *3^, after ^,^^, and Ifff; e.g. ^T^T:
' solitary.' tTT at end of Karma-dharayas and Tat-purushas for TTT^ m. ' a king '
(see 151.0); e.g. tJ^*rnT' 'a supreme monarch ;' ^"TTTSTI 'the king of the gods,'
But occasional instances occur of ITHT^at the end of Tat-purushas ; e.g.
346 CHANGES OF CERTAIN WORDS IN CERTAIN COMPOUNDS.
gen. 'of the king of Vidarbha' (Nala xi. 21). - U& at end of Dvigus, Karma-
dharayas, and Dvandvas, for Tjf?f f. ' night ;' e. g. ^T^T^TW^ ' day and night ;'
'a period of two nights ;' TWTCTW: ' midnight.' tf\R (after ^*J, ^TW, and
for TSfa^ n. 'hair;' e.g. ^JoFta, -*TT, -H^, 'with the hair.' T^*f in
Tat-purushas for ^^^ n. 'splendour ;' e. g. "5T3l^r^ 'the power of a Brahman. 1
in Karma-dharayas and Bahu-vrihis for vm*{ n. ' virtue,' ' felicity ;' e. g.
, -^^, ' destitute of excellence or happiness.' ^3 or "*3T for T^m.
' a dog ;' e. g. ^ffinsn , -"^ffr, -"^H*^, ' worse than a dog ;' "JET^I ' a beast of prey ;'
15 8T<^'tn ' a dog's tooth.' - ^1 at beginning of Avyayi-bhavas and Bahu-vrihis fop
^H? 'with;' e.g. <*W*^ 'with anger;' ^^1 'accompanied by a son' (*T^t[<^t
would be equally correct). IX for WTTT ' same;' e. g. ^jftl^J ' one who eats the
same cake.' - HWH in Karma-dharayas and Bahu-vrihis for tif<*v n. 'the thigh;'
e.g. ^SrenTOt, -oRT, -PI^, 'having no thighs.' - WH in Tat-purushas and
Dvigus for Ufa m. ' a friend ;' e. g. *f ^W^J ' the friend of the winds ' (Indra).
*H3f in Karma-dharayas for ^RT^n. 'a lake ;' e. g. *l^l*K*^'a great lake.' *TW
(after ^tJ,^re, ufff) for i*i^n. ' conciliation ;' e. g.^l^WJ, -TT, -*TO[, ' friendly/
- ^e? for ^f<5 m. 'a furrow;' e. g. ^f^75t, -<5T, -^^, ' unploughed.' ^ for
<|^T n. ' the heart ;' e. g. ^'<ddiM' ' sleeping in the heart ;' *J<|T^m. ' a friend.'
779. It is evident from the above list that the most common substitution is that
of ^? a for the final vowel or final vowel and consonant of a word. Other stems
ending in **, ^, ^, ^, ^, ^, *[, ^ may add a; as, 1^ for r^T in ^Te^r^^^
' voice and skin ;' l^f for H^^ in ^J^ajHfl^ ' the Rig and Yajur-veda.' Also TT*1
for rST^f , TXT$3 for ^T^, ^T^ for ^ITS, &c. Also ^^ for ^fT in 'STV't: , -^T,
half a verse of the Veda ;' and "^S'^t ' one conversant with the Rig-veda.'
a. Some words as the first member of a compound lengthen their finals (see
Pan. vi. 3, 117; viii. 4, 4); e.g. ^tm before ^f (^fo^TW^'a wood full of
hollow trees'); W^T before flft (^Wilflfc 'name of a mountain'); f^^T
before TT^ and fo^ (f^^T^T^ 'a universal sovereign ;' fmnfacfl ' Visvamitra').
This is more common in the Veda.
b. Some few shorten their finals, when they stand as the first member, especially
nouns terminating in IS u or ^ i; e. g. ^ for ^ in ^^f^t f. ' a frown ;' JJIHfm for
in in*tf^)^ 'the son of a harlot' (Pan. vi. 3, 61) : so Hft^TH'TflrJ for
J 'endowed with good fortune' (Ramdy. i. 19, 21).
c. A few feminine words in ^?T d (such as ^fHIT, *WT, fH^T, ^TTf5T, <**^t) may
be made neuter at the end of certain compounds ; e. g. ^raj<*i x the shade of
sugar-canes' (Pan. n. 4, 22); H-od.!^!^ ' a shady place ;' ^1^0**^ ' an assembly of
princes ;' ^ffaw^ ' an assembly of women ;' ^fin{P^ (or -^IT) ' a night when
dogs howl.'
d. A sibilant is sometimes inserted between two members of a compound ; as,
(for irn^faU^) 'expiation of sin;' TTOrJTC^ 'mutually:' cf.
' place.'
780. Numerals, when preceded by particles, prepositions, or other numerals,
COMPOUND VERBS. 347
may change their finals to ^T a , or if their final letter be a consonant, may either
drop that consonant or add ^T a to it; thus, f&<?t (nom. -olT^, -cTT^, -5flf%)
'two or three;' IRR (nom. -"^IT^, -^Hf^, -^Tftff), 'five or six;' TXJ^iJT; (nom.
-tTC() ' nearly four.'
781. Vf^*^ is found in the beginning of certain anomalous compounds (such as
T, &c.) for T^' I.'
SECTION II.
COMPOUND VERBS.
782. It might be supposed that 2000 simple roots (74. b) would
convey every possible variety of idea, and that the aid of prepositions
and adverbial prefixes to expand and modify the sense of each root
would be unnecessary. But in real fact there are comparatively
few Sanskrit roots in common use ; and whilst those that are so
appear in a multitude of different forms by the prefixing of one or
two or even three prepositions, the remainder are almost useless
for any practical purposes, except the formation of nouns. Hence
it is that compound verbs are of more frequent occurrence than
simple ones.
They are formed in two ways : ist, by combining roots with pre-
positions or prefixes ; andly, by combining the auxiliaries sp ' to do'
and */ to be' with adverbs, or nouns converted into adverbs.
Compound Verbs formed by combining Prepositions and Prefixes
with roots.
783. The following list exhibits the prepositions chiefly used in
combination with roots :
a. ^rfk ati, 'across,' 'beyond,' 'over;' as, ^rfrtMT, ^Tift (pres. ^fiqftT, &c.),
^nTHi*^, ' to pass by,' ' to pass along,' ' to transgress.'
b. ^rftj adhi, 'above,' 'upon,' 'over;' as, ^Tftnn 'to stand over,' 'to preside'
(pres. ^rfafireTfa) ; ^IV?^ ' to climb upon ;' ^fHj^ft ' to lie upon ;' ^rfiffT^ ' to
go over towards;' ^nft 'to go over,' in the sense of 'reading.' The initial ^T a
is rarely rejected hi Epic poetry; as, fVjflTiT for ^TfVfFrT-
c. '3TJ anu, 'after;' as, ^T^^'to follow;' ^TJET 'to stand by,' 'to perform;'
"Tjop 'to imitate;' ^^tl/to assent;' WJ>J/to experience,' 'to enjoy.'
d. Wfl^.antar, 'between,' 'within* (Gr. ev-ToV Lat. in-tus, inter}-, as,
' to place within,' ' to conceal,' in pass. ' to vanish ;' ^S'iT'J.' to be within ;'
'to walk in the midst.'
e. ^H| apa, 'off,' 'away,' 'from' (omo); as, ^mT^, ^RJJ> ^1 (from ^HT and
^), 'to go away;' Rit 'to lead away;' ^ni^r^'to abstract;' ^I^T? 'to bear
away.' It also implies ' detraction ;' as, ^8^*1? ' to defame.'
Y y 2
348 COMPOUND VEEBS.
/. ^rftl api, 'on,' 'over' (n), only used with >H and T^; as, ^rf<TVT 'to cover
over;' ^rftlT^ 'to bind on.' The initial ^T a is often rejected, leaving faVT,
g. ^ffa aMi, 'to,' 'unto,' 'towards;' as, wfatTT, ^wt, 'to go towards;'
Vl^'to run towards ;' ^Tm^SI 'to behold ;' ^rfa^f or ^rf*VT (see VT at 664) 'to
address,' 'to accost,' 'to speak to,' 'to salute.'
h. ^R ava, 'down,' 'off;' as, ^T^^f , ^RfT, 'to descend;' 'Smff'to look
down;' ^ITf 'to throw down,' 'to scatter;' ^R^rn ' to cut off.' It also implies
'disparagement;' as, VKf^T 'to despise;' 'ST^fsp^ 'to insult.' With MT, 'to
attend.' The initial ^ a may be optionally rejected from ^RfT*. ' bathing.'
i. ^TT a, 'to,' 'towards,' 'near to' (Latin ad); as, ^TTfaS^'to enter;' silJft*^ 'to
go towards;' *r^ 'to mount up.' When prefixed to *T*^, 7JJ, and ^, 'to go,'.
and ^T 'to give,' it reverses the action; thus, ^11*1*^, ^TOT, *T, 'to come;' vti^i
to take.' With ^T, 'to practise/
j. T^ ud, 'up,' 'upwards,' 'out' (opposed to ff); as, va^. (48), ^f^ 1 , 'to go
up,' 'to rise ;' T|^ 'to fly up ;' 3^ 'to strike up ' (3^ and ^, 50); "& (&$ and
, 50) 'to extract;' ^fare and *0t^ (47) 'to open the eyes;' ^l^
*to cut up;' "3" ; *Jo5 'to root up;' Tf^ 'to lift up' (T^ and f^T, 49).
When prefixed immediately to WI and W*T it causes the elision of s; as,
* to stand up ;' ^^*>T ' to prop up.' In some cases it reverses the action ; as,
from T*^ 'to bend down,' w*{ (47) 'to raise up ;' from ipj ' to keep down/ "3"?F(
'to lift up.'
k. 7*1 upa (opposed to apa), 'to,' 'towards' (wo), 'near,' 'down,' 'under,' joined
like ^TT and ^rfi? to roots of motion; as, ^^TT 'to approach;' ^T^T. 'to wait
upon;' 3M*fT 'to stay near,' 'to be present,' 'to arrive.' With f^I (cl. 6,
^Tftrcpfff), 'to sit down;' with ^TT^, 'to sit near.'
Obs. TT with ^ft^fir (from T^) = ^^ft^fff ' he burns ;' see 784. a.
1. fff ni (thought to be for primitive am; cf. Lat. in, Gr. evi, ev, e/v), 'in,' 'on,'
'down,' 'downwards,' 'under' (opposed to "3T^); as, fnn^' to fall down;' f^l^
'to suppress;' f'ff'r'T and f : f*rt^ 'to close the eyes;' fTf^n^, f*T>IT, ^, 'to
lay down,' 'to deposit ;* fi ff Sf 'to go \vithin,' ' to encamp.' With ^TT, ' to return,'
to desist;' with $?*^, 'to hear.' In some cases it does not alter, or simply
intensifies the sense ; as, fT^^ ' to kill outright.'
m. f*R^ nis, ' out ;' as, f*T L< a5*^ (69. a), flM*^, f^T^> ' to go out," ' to come out ;'
f^^lT 'to cut up;' fa^lT ' to come to an end,' 'to cease;' fffo3f 'to determine/
n. TTO para, 'back/ 'backwards' (napa), combined with ftl and ^in the sense
of 'defeat;' as, 11TTfF 'to overcome' (cf. 7rapav;/caco) ; tnj$,'to be defeated/
With ^, cl. 2, it signifies 'to retreat' (pres. ^ftr); with ^ or ^HT, cl. i, Atm., 'to
run away/^)ara being changed to paid (pres. Hc5Pl).
o. "Tft pari, 'around/ 'about' (Ktpi, per); as, ^rfl^T?, ''^r 'to surround;'
TTft^T, XjftJT^, 'to go round;' tRfaj 'to look round/ 'to examine/ Tjft^'to
turn round/ 'THCTT^'to run round.' When prefixed to ^i it signifies 'to adorn/
and ^ is inserted, ift^. With ^, 'to despise/ and with ^, 'to avoid.' It
COMPOUND VERBS. 349
sometimes merely gives intensity or completeness to the action ; as, ncW*^ ' to
abandon altogether;' tffVsjil 'to ascertain completely.'
p. TI pra, 'before,' 'forward' (npo, pro, prce); as, HM*^, HJH. 'to proceed;'
' to set before,' ' to present ;' 3135*^ ' to begin ;' H^' to proceed,' ' to begin ;'
' to run forward ;' u**n ' to set out,' ' to advance ;' H^' to be superior,' ' to
prevail;' JT^SI^to foresee.' With ^T, 'to deceive.'
Obs. H with ^SfiT ' he goes,' makes HTtf?f (or UT$fn) ' he goes on quickly '
(38./); II with *?tR, causal stem of ^'to go,' makes JI^lTfa ' I send.' Similarly,
H + U*TW = Hl?r ' he trembles ;' and H + ^ft^rfiT (from TS) = jffafiT ' he burns.'
See 784. a.
The r of pra influences a following n by 58; as, W3*{ ' to bend before,' 'to salute.'
Sometimes U does not alter the sense of a root, as in UTR/to obtain' (see 681).
q. Jlfff prati, ' against,' ' to,' ' towards,' ' near,' ' at,' back again ' (irpos) ; as,
Hf?npj 'to fight against;' Tfift 'to go towards' (pres. HiMfl) ; nfiF^ 'to go
towards,' ' to return ;' ufrf^^'to dwell near or at ;' Tlfff^ ' to counteract ;' UfiT^*^
4 to beat back,' 'to repel;' ufrT^f'to answer;' uffffWT'to recover;' nfff *0 ' to
lead back ;' IlflTT^ ' to re-salute.' With ^, 'to promise ;' with TJ^, 'to arrive at,'
* to obtain ;' with ^JST, ' to wait for,' ' to expect/
r. fa vi, 'apart,' 'asunder,' implying 'separation,' 'distinction,' 'distribution,'
'dispersion' (Latin dis-); as, fa^ 'to wander about ;' f^T^c^ 'to vacillate ;' f%^
'to roam for pleasure;' fa^ 'to dissipate;' f% 'to tear asunder;' faT3^ 'to
divide;' fTf^ 1 ^ ' to distinguish.' Sometimes it gives a privative signification ; as,
f^p^'to disunite;' f^R 'to forget;' fa^ft 'to sell.' With ?f, 'to change for
the worse.' Sometimes it has little apparent influence on the root ; as, f^ffSI ' to
perish,' or 'to perish entirely ;' f^fafr 'to think.'
s. 5R^ sam, 'with,' 'together with' (crvv, con); as, fef, |f^, 'to collect;'
fl^^ ' to join together ;' *$f*\ ' to meet together ;' *H^ ' to happen ;' '^F^'H/ to
contract.' With "^ it signifies 'to perfect,' and ^ is inserted, 5H"^!. It is often
prefixed without altering the sense ; as, ^^ ' to be produced.'
t. g^rfiw, 'badly,' and *J su, 'well,' are also prefixed to verbs or verbal deriva-
tives ; see 726. d.f.
u. Also other indeclinable prefixes ; thus, ^ftcT^ ' decline ' is compounded with
^ in the sense of ' to go down,' ' to set ;' fn^ ' across,' with ^TT in the sense of
'to conceal,' with *T*^ 'to disappear,' with 'to revile ;' ^Tif with VT 'to believe.'
784. Two prepositions are often combined with a root; as, ^n^T
(fa + '^n) 'to open;' sn^ (cl. 10) Ho kill;' ^xni^ (^+ "SIT) 'to go
under/ ' to undergo,' ' to arrive at ;' ^ (^ + ^HT + rt. ^) ' to assemble ; '
Hftpfi^ (w + f^T, 58) * to prostrate one's self;' ife (iT + ^ + rt. f ) 'to
raise up :' and occasionally three ; as, inm< (n + fsr -f ^f\) ' to predict ;'
WW^T^ (ufn + Tcf + *&[) ' to answer.' Other combinations of three
prepositions, occasionally prefixed to roots, are ^ + Tr + ^?T
350 COMPOUND VERBS.
a. Observe Final ^T a and ^TT d of a preposition combine with the initial
"^ ri of a root into dr, and are rejected before initial e and ^sft o (except in forms
from the roots ^ i, ' to go,' and JT*^ ' to increase), see 38. /. g ; and see U and
"3"IJ above : but in other cases prepositions ending in vowels combine with roots
beginning with vowels according to the rules of Sandhi ; thus, ^T with 3[ ' to go '
becomes ^ (32), and in pres. ^f*T (^TT + *?fa 33), &c.; in impf. ^fH^, ^(645,
33), &c. ; in pot. ^TT^ (^TT + ^Tl^ &c. ; in impv. ^TRTfa (^TT + *nfa), &c.
Similarly, ^HI with J*fa becomes ^?4R by 33.
b. Observe also, a sibilant is generally inserted between the prepositions ^TCJ,
^tf, *jft, TTfif, *l*^, and the roots ^ 'to do' and efi 'to scatter;' see above under
tjft and V^. Similarly, from ^ and 'W is formed ^TH3R ' excrement.'
c. The final i of ^ffir, TffiT, *lft, fT, is optionally lengthened in forming certain
nouns from compound verbs ; as, 'Wfaut, JfiffaflK, *H?N[TO, ftM*.
785. In conjugating compound verbs formed with prepositions,
neither the augment nor the reduplication change their position,
but remain attached to the root*; as, xjifriri^, impf. of ffr, with Tjfic;
, impf. of fan, with gr?; ^S^fjre^, impf. of ^n, M'ith ^;
, perf. of ^, with JlfiT; ifl'-nl^K, perf. of ^r, with w and ^.
a. In the Veda, as in Homer, prepositions may be separated from
the root by other words ; as, 3ST RT fasfpj * let them enter thee/
786. Grammarians restrict certain roots to either Parasmai-pada
or Atmane-pada when in combination with particular prepositions
or when peculiar meanings are involved f. Most of the examples
specified by Panini (i. 3, 193) are here added. The 3rd sing.
present will be given, the termination either in ti or te marking the
Pada to which in each case the root is supposed to be limited.
'S^ 'to throw' is generally Parasmai, and '3i? 'to reason' is generally
Atmane, but combined with any preposition may take either Pada. ^ 'to do;'
anu-karoti, ' he imitates ;' adhi-kurute, ' he overcomes ;' ut-kurute, ' he informs
against,' 'reviles ;' ud-d-kurute, 'he reviles ;' upa-kurute, he worships ;' upa-s-
Tcurute (784. 6), 'he prepares ;' upa-s-karoti, 'he polishes ;' pard-karoti, 'he rejects ;'
pra-kurute, 'he offers violence,' 'he recites (stories).' ^ 'to scatter ;' apa-s-kirate
(784. b), 'he (the cock) throws up earth ;' but apa-kirati, 'he scatters (as flowers).'
1 "95^ 'to go ;' d-kramate, ' he (the sun) ascends ;' but d-krdmati when not in the
* There are a few exceptions to this rule in the Maha-bharata ; as in
(Johnson's Selections, p. 33, 1. 14).
t In Epic poetry, however, there is much laxity ; e. g. Ti^ and TTT(, which
are properly Atmane-pada verbs, are found in Parasmai. Instances of passive verbs
taking Parasmai terminations have been given at 461. c. On the other hand,
' to rejoice,' which is properly Parasmai, is found in Atmane.
COMPOUND VERBS. 351
sense of 'the rising of a luminary, &c. ;' vi-kramate, 'he (the horse) steps out;'
but vi-krdmati, ' it (the joint) splits in two ;' upa-kramate or pra-kramate, he is
valiant;' but upa-krdmati, 'he approaches;' and pra-krdmati, 'he departs.' "9RT
'to buy;' ava-krmfie, pari-krimte, 'he buys;' vi-krinite, 'he sells;' but kri alone
takes either Pada. ffcfe 'to play;' d-Mdate or anu-kridate, 'he sports;' pari-
kridate, 'he plays about ;' san-kridate, 'he plays ;' but san-kridati, 'it (the wheel)
creaks.' f^p^'to throw;' ati-kshipati, 'he throws beyond;' abhi-kshipati, 'he
throws on ;' prati-kshipati, 'he throws back or towards.' T5?J 'to sharpen ;' san-
kshnvtc, 'he sharpens.' T^ 'to go ;' d-gamayate, ' he delays or waits patiently ;'
vy-ati-gaMhanti, ' they go against each other ;' san-ga66hati when motion towards
anything is implied, as 'he goes towards (the village);' but Atm. in the sense of
he goes with' or 'agrees with.' *T 'to swallow;' san-girate, 'he promises,' 'he
proclaims ;' but san-girati, 'he swallows ;' ava-girate, ' he swallows.' ^^ 'to go ;'
ut(for ud)-6arate, 'he goes astray;' u6-6arati, ' it (the tear) overflows;' san-darate
or sam-ud-d-6arate, ' he goes in a chariot.' fT 'to conquer ;' vi-jayate, pard-jayate,
he conquers ;' with other prepositions ji is generally Parasmai. sTT 'to know;'
apa-jdntie, 'he denies (the debt);' prati-jdnite or sah-jdmte, 'he acknowledges.'
Without a prep, this root is restricted to either Pada if certain meanings are
involved; as, sarpisho (for sarpishd ) jdntte, 'he engages (in sacrifice) by means of
ghee ;' gdmjdmte, he knows (his own) cow ;' svdm gdmjdndti orjdntte, he knows
his own cow.' ft 'to lead ;' un (for ud )-nayate, ' he lifts up ;' upa-nayate, ' he invests
(with the sacred thread);' vi-nayate, 'he pays,' or 'he grants,' or 'he restrains ;' vi-
nayati, 'he takes away' (the anger of his master) ; vi-nayati, 'he turns away (his
cheek).' Without a prep, this root is Atm. if it means 'to excel,' or 'to ascertain.'
J to praise;' d-nute,' he praises.' TT^' to burn;' ut-tapatiorvi-tapati/he'w&rmsi'
ut-tapateorvi-tapate, 'it shines,' 'he warms (his own hand).' Without a prep, this root
is Atm., cl. 4, if it means 'to perform penance.' <^T 'to give ;' d-datte/he receives ;'
vy-d-daddti, ' he opens (his mouth) ;' vy-d-datte, 'he opens (the mouth of another) ;'
sam-ya6chate, he gives' (as ddsyd, to the female slave,' the instr. being used for
the dative). 73? 'to see ;' sam-pasyate/he considers thoroughly.' lT*^'to ask
for;' always Atm. if used with gen., as madhuno ndthate, 'he asks for honey.'
TT^j to ask;' d-pri66hate, ' he bids adieu to ;' sam-pri66hate t ' he interrogates.'
*J^'to eat' is Atm. if it means 'to eat,' 'to possess,' or 'to suffer ;' but Par. if it
means 'to protect.' 'J^'to bear;' pari-mrishyati, 'he endures or forgives.' -
^[ 'to restrain ;' d-ya66hate, '(the tree) spreads ;' d-ya66hate, 'he stretches out (his
hand);' but d-yaMhati, 'he draws up' (as a rope from a well); upa-ya66hate, 'he
takes (a woman) to wife ;' but upa-yaddhati, ' he takes the wife (of another) ;'
d-ya66hate, ' he puts on (clothes) ;' iid-yaMhate, ' he takes up (a load) ;' but ud-
ya66hati, 'he studies vigorously (the Veda, &c.);' sam-ya66hate, 'he collects' (or
stacks as rice, &c.) $*^'to join ;' ud-yunkte, 'he makes effort ;' anu-yunkte, ' he
examines ;' ni-yunkte, ' he appoints ;' pra-yunkte, ' he applies ;' but pra-yunakti,
'he sets in order (sacrificial vessels).' T^'to sport;' upa-ramati, 'he causes to
refrain*;' d-ramati, 'he rests;' vi-ramati, 'he ceases.' c 'to cut;' vy-ati-
* This is an instance of a simple verb involving the sense of a causal.
352 COMPOUND VERBS.
luntie, 'he performs cutting (of wood) which was the office of another.' ^ 'to
speak;' anu-vadate, 'he speaks after or like' (with gen.); but anu-vadati, 'he
imitates ' (as giram, a voice,' ace.) ; upa-vadate, 'he coaxes,' he advises ;' vi-pra-
vadante or vi-pra-vadanti, 'they dispute ;' sam-pra-vadante, they speak together ;'
but sam-pra-vadanti, 'they (the birds) sing together;' apa-vadate, 'he reviles im-
properly ;' but apa-vadati, ' he speaks against.' Without prep, vad is Atm., 'to be
learned in interpreting' (the S'astras), or 'to be earnest in the study of anything'
(as agriculture, &c.) ^ 'to carry;' pra-vahati, 'it (the river) flows along.'
f^^ ' to know ;' sam-vitte, ' he is conscious ;' sam-vidate or sam-vidrate, ' they are
conscious' (308). "fasi'to enter;' ni-visate, 'he enters.' ^I^'to swear;' 6apate,
he swears at' (with dat.) ^J 'to hear ;' sam-srinoti, 'he hears (the speech) ;' but
sam-srinute, he hears well' (intransitively). WT to stand;' ava-tishthate, he
waits patiently;' pra-tishthate, 'he sets out;' vi-tishthate, 'he stands apart;' san-
tishthate, 'he stays with;' upa-tishthate, 'he worships,' 'he attends on.' Without
prep, sthd takes the Atmane when it denotes ' adhering to,' giving one's self up
to shewing amatory feelings' (Pan. i. 3, 23), as tishthate gopi Krishndya, 'the
shepherdess gives herself up to Krishna;' but upa-tishthati, he waits on' (not in
a religious sense, and governing an ace.); ut-tishthate, 'he aspires' (to salvation);
but ut-tishthati, 'he rises' (from a seat). $J^ to strike;' d-hate (see 654), 'he or
it strikes ' ( himself or itself,' the object being omitted) ; but d-hanti vrishabham,
he strikes the bull.' ^'to sound;' sam-svarate, it sounds clearly.' ^ to
seize ;' anu-harate, 'he takes after' (the disposition of his father or mother), other-
wise anu-harati. 3^ to call ;' vpa-Tivayate or ni-hvayate or vi-hvayate or sam-
hvayate, he calls,' ' he invokes ;' d-hvayate, ' he challenges ' (an enemy) ; but
d-hvayati, he calls ' (his son).
a. Some causals are also restricted to either Parasmai or Atmane, according to
the preposition prefixed or the meaning involved ; thus the causal of *Jf with T|ft,
meaning 'to bewitch,' is limited to Kim. So also, *pj *to be greedy,' when its
ausal means 'to deceive,' is restricted to Atm. : and the causal of "^^, meaning
'to deceive,' takes Atm. ; meaning ' to avoid,' Par. Again, in the causal, when
joined with mithyd, and signifying ' to pronounce badly,' takes Par. ; but only in
the sense of doing so once. In the sense of ' causing a false alarm ' it requires Atm. ;
but the above specimens will suffice to shew the little profit likely to be derived
from pursuing this part of the subject farther.
Compound Verbs formed by combining Adverbs with 2 and *%.
787. These are of two kinds : ist, those formed by combining
adverbs with ^i 'to make* and /to become ; 9 andly, those formed
by combining nouns used adverbially with these roots.
. Examples of the first kind are, ^Tc5i 'to adorn;' ^nf^^i 'to
make manifest 5 (see 72); ^f^^i 'to eject ;* *$&% 'to place in front,'
'to follow ;' fMTl^i 'to deprive; 3 TO^i 'to entertain as a guest;'
'to revere; 3 *rrejT5, IT^,, 'to become manifest/ &c.
COMPOUKI> ADVERBS. 353
788. In forming the second kind, the final of a stem, being a or a,
is changed to i; as, from TTW, ft<f 'to make ready/ *twt>j/to
become ready/ from ^H!T, ^njfl 1 ^ ' to blacken ;' from trft^T ' a ditch/
'to convert into a ditch :' and sometimes a becomes a; as,
' to please/ from ftnT. A final i or u is lengthened ; as, from
ft^'to become pure;* from cS^, 75*$ 'to lighten.' A final
ri is changed to tf ri ; as, from HT^, HT^^'to become a mother/
A final a* and an become i; as, from *J*H^, *JHfl*jL*to be of good
mind ;' from nT^, TTsft^J. ' to be a king.'
a. But the greater number of compounds of this kind are formed from nominal
stems in a. The following are other examples ; ^Sft^ ' to esteem as a straw ;'
^rTaft^i ' to stiffen ;' CflfifM^^J/ to fix the mind on one object ;' ^sft^t ' to make or
claim as one's own ;' *i eft^L ' to become friendly.' Substantives are sometimes
formed from these; as, 'fsffaT^' 'the state of being friendly/ 'friendship.'
Obs. This change of a final to i before kri and bhu is technically said to be
caused by the suffix 6oi, and the change to d by dd6.
b. These compounds often occur as passive participles ; thus, ie*sif 'adorned /
Wg>fjT ' become manifest >,' 4ttiflfjf f made ready ;' <^^fl f lightened / ^^1!-
Wfa ' to be agreed to.'
789. Sometimes TffiT, placed after a nominal stem, is used to form a compound
verb of this kind; as, from f?3 'water,' Tce<ui^ 'to reduce to liquid}' from
' ashes/ >w*tlrj (57) ' to reduce to ashes.' Cf. 725. a,
SECTION III.
COMPOUND ADVEBBS,
790. Compound adverbs are formed, ist, by combining adverbs,
prepositions, and adverbial prefixes, with nouns in the ace. singular
neuter; andly, by placing adverbs, or adjectives used as adverbs,
after nominal stems.
c. The first kind are identical with indeclinable compounds (760).
791. Most of the adverbs at 731 may be placed after the stems
of nouns ; thus, 7T(?eiraHlq^ ' near the child ;' T^jpi^ * for the sake
of protection;' HTT^f 'for the sake of offspring;' foF*r*i*^ 'on what
account?' 51 <WK*!.iJffK*^ 'after uttering a sound.* See also 777. d.
793. The indeclinable participle ^TTW, ' having begun/ is joined with *J1T, 'to-
day' C^flTRWl), in the sense of 'from this time forward;' and with the stems of
words to express ' beginning from / see 925. U^fa is used adverbially in the same
sense; as, *P*?TO|frl 'from birth upwards/ T^TlPffiT 'from that time forward*
(see 917).
z z
354 SYNTAX.
CHAPTER IX.
SYNTAX.
793. SANSKRIT syntax, unlike that of Greek and Latin, offers
fewer difficulties than the other portions of the Grammar. In fact,
the writer who has fully explained the formation of compounds has
already more than half completed his exposition of the laws which
regulate the order, arrangement, and collocation of the words in a
sentence (vdkya-vinydsa, vdkya-viveka, paddnvaya).
794. Observe In the present chapter on Syntax, that the subject may be made
as clear as possible, each word will be separated from the next, and vowels will
not be allowed to coalesce, although such coalition be required by the laws of
combination. When compounds are introduced, a dot will generally be placed
underneath, to mark the division of the different members. Much vagueness
and uncertainty, however, may be expected to attach to the rules propounded,
when it is remembered that Sanskrit literature consists almost entirely of poetry,
and that the laws of syntax are ever prone to yield to the necessities of metrical
composition.
THE ARTICLE.
795. There is no indefinite article in classical Sanskrit; but
cirf^[ (228) and in modern Sanskrit eR (200) are sometimes used to
supply the place of such an article ; thus, ^ffw^ IT^^T ' in a certain
country;' effft^ $pn<5: 'a certain jackal/ The definite article may
not unfrequently be expressed by the pronoun 7H* (220); thus, *c ^^:
may mean simply ' the man/ not necessarily ' that man/ It is,
however, more commonly omitted, and H^ when joined to a noun
must generally be translated by ' that/
CONCORD OF THE VERB WITH THE NOMINATIVE CASE.
796. The verb must agree with the nominative case in number
and person ; as, l<nf eflWlftr ' I must perform/
a. Other examples are, r^ ^f^ijf^ ' do thou attend ;' Tl ^tfa * he gives ;'
VHNJ "fRl 'we two say ;' 3?mifT "3^' ' the pigeons said ;' ^f f^flqfl*^ ' do you
two reflect ;' *^\ 'STPTTTT 'do ye come ;' ^H'sjiniJ ^**(tT ' good men are honoured ;'
^flflT *reT: ' the wind blows ;' ^f?f ^T^IT|j: ' the moon rises ;' ^^fff yH*^ ' the
flower blossoms.'
Obs. Of course, therefore, two nouns in the singular connected by ^ require
the verb in the dual; as, TTWT *il ^ sTrjfiJJ 'the king and minister went;'
J^T fn8rtJ ' as long as the moon and sun remain.'
SYNTAX. 355
b. The position of the verb is not always the same as in English. It may some-
times come last in the sentence.
797. When a participle takes the place of a finite verb, it must
agree with the nominative in number and gender; as, *r *nr: 'he
went ;' *n *nn 'she went ;' ^rntr 3'rMflT 'the two women spoke ;' un
jrir: 'the king was killed ;' ^rTTfT fs^lfa 'the bonds were cut.'
a. Sometimes, when it is placed between two or more nominative cases, it agrees
with one only ; as, ^sTnjt JT^rrViTT ^c^TST ' his wife and son were awakened.'
b. The following is noticeable : ils*^ ^euwT ^ ^J^ TtTnf*I milrtl*^ ' king-
dom, self, we, and wife were brought (neut. pi.) to the state of a stake (to be played
for),' Karat, xi. 47. See also 906.
c. Very often the copula, or verb which connects the subject with the predicate,
is omitted ; when, if an adjective stand in the place of the verb, it will follow the
rules of concord in gender and number; as, VT H>^ 'wealth is difficult of
attainment;' WRT ^TTTfUCT 'we two have finished eating.' But if a substantive
stand in the place of the verb, no concord of gender or number need take place ;
as, *M^i 1<t* 'WlH^l* ' successes are the road to misfortune.'
CONCORD OF THE ADJECTIVE WITH THE SUBSTANTIVE.
798. An adjective, participle, or adjective pronoun, qualifying a
substantive, when not compounded with it, must agree with the
substantive in gender, number, and case ; as, ^rr^Jt ^^T^J * a good
man;' r^ g:^ 'great pain;' ^| ^^J^ tli^ 'in these before-
mentioned countries ;' ^fiff fH^rftr * three friends.'
CONCORD OF THE RELATIVE WITH THE ANTECEDENT.
799. The relative must r agree with the antecedent noun in gender,
number, and person ; but in Sanskrit the relative pronoun generally
precedes the noun to which it refers, this noun being put in the,
same case with the relative, and the pronoun TT5f follows in the latteu
clause ; as, IRS U*ir ^fe: * <4{4ml ' ^he man who has intellect is
strong' (lit. 'of whatever man there is intellect, .he is strong').
a. The noun referred to by the relative may also be joined with TRf,. as
jf3* *f TO ^ca~fl^; or may be omitted altogether, as *T?^ HfasUW TTT^
' what you have promised, that abide by ;' *tar*^ ^MiUlf1 rtfi;mff nt
understood) f*i$ii*u 'tWKd4T ' by those (birds) whose young ones were devoured
an inquiry was set on foot ;' *T: WP
' he who would obtain all objects of sense, and he who despises
them, of the two the despiser is the best.'
800. The relative sometimes stands alone, an antecedent noun or pronoun being*
Z Z 2,
356 SYNTAX Gtf SUBSTANTIVES.
understood, from which it takes its gender and number ; as, ^Jr*T fR *n T
*ti < Kif ' Of what use is scriptural knowledge (to one) who does not practice
virtue ?' VHf f^ 'ft T <^TffT ' What is the use of wealth (to him) who does not
give ?'
a. Sometimes, though rarely, the antecedent noun precedes the relative in the
natural order; as, rf ^TT >TTT *n*il H7TT T jJTfiT 'she is not a wife in whom
the husband does not take pleasure.'
801. HN'i^ and 1f^ stand to each other in the relation of demonstrative and
relative ; as, II^ffT TfT ^ti^i ^^T fll^fW ^fTTcfi^ JM^H^TffT ' as many
products as belong to that island, so many are to be brought to us.' See also 876.
a. Similarly, TTT^T and *H$ ; as, ^l^^f ^ WT^^T if w *fl*JriNdt ' as the
event occurred, so they related it to him.' Cf. 920. a.
SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES.
802. Under this head it is proposed to explain the construction
of substantives, without special reference to the verbs which govern
them ; and for this purpose it will be desirable to exhibit examples
beginning with the nominative case.
Nominative Case.
803. A substantive simply and absolutely expressed must b6
placed in the nominative ease; as, finfai^n 'the HitopadeSa ;*
* the poem of Bhafti.'
a. Two nominative cases in different numbers may be placed in apposition to
each other ; as, TpUTf f ^1*41 ' grass as a bed.*
Accusative Case.
804. Substantives are not found in the accusative, unconnected
with verbs or participles, except as expressing * duration of time ' or
* space' See 831.
Instrumental Case.
805. This case yields a variety of senses. The most usual is
that of ' the agent' and * the instrument' or * means' by which any-
thing is done ; as, *nn (jf>^) 'by me it was said ;' arnN (m^ft Tftffir:)
*by the fowler a snare was laid;' ^TI<R! 'by the study of the
Vcdas ;' ^r.'^uitn ' with one's own eye'
806. It also has the force of ' unth' in expressing other collateral
ideas; as, ^rtlqui ^nh 'vying with the strong;' f*&*8 iwm: 'con-
versation with a friend;' xrfa: mm>H*( ' equality with beasts j'
SYNTAX OP SUBSTANTIVES. 357
' with the knowledge of (his) father :' especially when 'accom-
paniment 9 is intended; as, fijTHn&r ^T?y 'the master with his pupil;'
: * the fifth with myself/ i. e. ' myself and four others.'
807. The other senses yielded by this case are, 'through' 'by reason of' 'on
account off as, ^fTTr 'through compassion;' WT 'STmnT'T 'on account of
that transgression :' especially in the case of abstract nouns formed with 7TT
(80. LXII); as, ij^TPTT 'through infatuation.'
a. 'According to,' 'by/ as, f^fftfn 'according to rule;' HH s*inr 'accordhig
to my opinion;' *titqr 'by birth.'
b. ' The manner ' in which anything is done, as denoted in English by the
adverbial affix ' ly,' or by the prepositions ' in,' ' at ;' as, flijWT ' in abundance ;'
' virtuously ;' l^-edHIT or yfl.*ll ' at pleasure ;' *J^T ' at ease ;' ^TTT
'in this way;' H'^rfl ^T^*T (fitful) 'they both dwell together in great
intimacy ;' (J^5 "^IT^JiTTf'T 'SffiwrftT) HTT ' a king surpasses all beings hi
glory ;' TT^TT (T Brtq*^) ' such a deed must not even be imagined in the mind ;'
iiJr^M!if ' in human form ;' TjfWP*IT ' for a hindrance.'
808. Substantives expressive of 'want,' 'need,' may be joined with the instru-
mental of the thing wanted ; as, '^IT T JJ*UTt*^ ' there is no occasion for inquiry ;'
TTT iNFT T M*}T*|*{ ' there is no need of me as a servant ;' i^fa Rni*^ ' there
is use for a straw.'
809. ' The price ' for which anything is done may be in the instrumental ; as,
jnJoT (irrfir 3!T*W^) ' for five Puranas he becomes a slave ;'
'they fight for great rewards.' Similarly, JTtTSTTjfTiq I
' fortune is not obtained at the price of the sacrifice of life.'
a. So also ' difference between ' two things ; as, F^IT *tj $*u ^T H^? iif*.^ 'there
is great difference between you and the ocean.'
b. ' Separation /rom,' either with or without 1T^ ', as, H^T Pq^TJ * separation
from a husband ' (or H^T ^ f^rtni). Similarly, f^W^t ^fCHIT ^ c separation
from Hari.'
c. The English expression 'under the idea that' is expressed by the instrumental
case of the substantive "^S ', as, TTTr^sn 'under the idea that be was , tiger.'
Double Instrumental.
810. Sometimes when two substantives come together, expressing parts' of ft
common idea, they are both placed in the instrumental, instead of one in the
genitive ; as, ^$wi ^ t| rc ^T^lfS ' an odour is emitted by the Vakula-plants by
their flowers ' (for ^r?5T*Ti ^^t). Similarly,
I ' he caused her to revive by her attendants by sandal-water.'
Dative Case.
811. This case is of very limited applicability, and its functions,
irrespectively of the influence of verbs, are restricted to the expression
358 SYNTAX OP SUBSTANTIVES;
of ' the object, 3 * motive' or ' cause 3 for which anything is done, or
* the result 3 to which any act tends ; as, Wrff'fo^ni * for self-aggran-
dizement; 3 ^TTTrinftsfinTq ' for the counteraction of calamity ;' *$$$ ^
$n^ ^ uffnTW'T ' arms and books (lead) to renown/
a. When, as in the last example, 'the result 3 or 'end 3 to which
anything leads i& denoted by this case, the verb is seldom expressed,
but appears to be involved in the case itself. The following are
other examples: ^g ^rrer fV^fanff SIJIT TT^fti Jjm^ 1 ' where there is
admixture of poison, then even nectar (leads) to death; 3 3M<Uft
^TOf H<+!MI^ ?T Zfrrani ' advice to fools (leads) to irritation, not to
conciliation ;' *T ^ST^^ iWTJ ^PiftanDf *f ^Wi^ * that old husband
was not to her liking ;' * ^TUT TT^TT ^ni ^ ?>$$ ' that king was not
to her liking ;' fti^ Jrsa; 'go for the accomplishment' (of this matter).
b. It will be seen hereafter that certain verbs of giving and relating govern the
dative. Substantives derived from such verbs exercise a similar influence ; as,
vtrq^K t*ii+i ' the giving to another ;' ii*H w <*^T*^ the telling to another/
c. Words expressive of ' salutation ' or ' reverence ' are joined with the dative ;
as, *W5T$n*r W ' reverence to Ganesa;' ^ra> if ' health to thee.'
Ablative Case.
812. The proper force of the ablative case is expressed by 'from; 9
as, c7ten^(wte: IW^firT) 'from avarice anger arises ;' firt: ^W^ ' falling
from a mountain ;' ^TCTOT 5^1 if ' from the mouth of the spies.'
813. Hence this case passes to the expression of various correlative ideas; as,
^TI^TtTiT f^f'slri ' a portion of (from) their food :' and like the instrumental it
very commonly signifies ' because,' ' by reason of' in consequence of;' as,
'on account of the slaughter of cows and men;' 'BT
' he blames his son for entering inopportunely ;'
'through fear of punishment;' sjHr^<ii)q*ll!T 'by reason of my good fortune;'
Tfi^rnsf^mifi ' because (there is) no difference as to the result.'
a. ' According to/ as, Tfc^ -q i rn ' according to the advice of the minister.'
Abstract nouns in c^ are often found in this case to express some of these ideas ;
as, 'SRefftsifrfWwr* 1 1^' by reason of the unsteadiness of his mind :' especially in
the writings of commentators; as, fH*lTOI^T?f ' according to what will be said
hereafter ;' WK l *i**J? < ^fe^'Tn^'r$N'irH^TTl ' according to the division of touched,
slightly touched, slightly open, open and contracted.'
814. It also expresses 'through the means' or instrumentality of;' as, T
t ' caught in the toils through the instrumentality of the jackal ;'
an>fr: 3Ilf*iT^ HT!^) 'the alleviation of disease is not effected by. the
mere knowledge of the medicine.'
SYNTAX OP SUBSTANTIVES. 359
a. ' The manner ' in which anything is done is often expressed by the ablative ;
it is then used adverbially (compare 715) ; as, ^T^ffi^' with diligence,' or ' diligently ;'
' forcibly;' ^TTle3Ti^ with wonder;' 4 H-q KTT^' figuratively ;'
* tearing up by the roots :' or by the ablative suffix H^J as, gain: 'at one's own
pleasure' (see 719.0.5).
b. This case also denotes 'after/ as, ^lOclVwii^' after separation from the
bodyj' 'parJlfiTT ; VrnT ' after the imprisonment of the chief;' iT^T ^fUl*Hlil
' since his arrival.'
c. So also, in native grammars the ablative case is used to express 'after/
thus, T^T^H^' after the letters ra and ha;' ^ITTT 'after the letter &*,' ^J^JjfTrf rf^I
Hfi3 ^TxJJH ' it should be stated that after the letters ri and rt the cerebral ?Bf n is
substituted in place of the dental ^n.'
d. In reference to time, 'within/ as, T^nTSfn^' within three fortnights.'
e. Nouns expressive of '/ear ' are joined with the ablative of the thing feared ;
as, Jwk. HT[ ' fear of death ;' ^Cift H ' fear of robbers.'
Genitive Case.
815. This and the locative case are of the most extensive applica-
tion, and are often employed, in a vague and indeterminate manner,
to express relations properly belonging to the other cases.
a. The true force of the genitive is equivalent to ' of,' and this
case appears most frequently when two substantives are to be con-
nected, so as to present one idea ; as, (Hd44l 'RT*f x ' the speech of a
friend ;' 7fT TRT: TOf $5*5^ ' the best ornament of a woman is her
husband; 5 tf FCW rd ^r*ft ^TO^ 3 ^HN*T 'man is not the slave of
man, but the slave of wealth.'
8 1 6. 'Possession' is frequently expressed by the genitive case alone, without a
verb ; as, ^T^TI -Mr4^[ TTCT *iT? I^T *H*J^*{ ' all riches belong to him who
has a contented mind;' >T*fts|f *Rq ^^ft **T*h 'happy am I in possessing
such a wife.'
a. It often, however, has the force of ' to,'' and is very generally used to supply
the place of the dative; as, HUBt WWftsijfan: 'one's own life is dear to one's
self;' T ^ni^in ^t <! llt5l*illtM TJW*H 'a hundred Yqjanas is not far to one
borne away by thirst (of gain) ;' f% H$ulril*^ ^rf^f^fl*^ ' What is unknown to the
wise ?' fcR^ ^IR-IT (fl<*l5l^ffT) JT^tm ' What does a lamp (shew) to a blind man ?'
ra' IT?: ' What offence have I committed towards the king ;' f3f&{
TOT:) ' What can this man do to us ?'
b. And not unfrequently of ' in ' or ' on / as, ^^^51 fl*alMI ' confidence in
women;' W ^TlMrq*^' dependence on me.'
c. It is even equivalent occasionally to 'from ' or ' by,' as usually expressed by
the ablative or instrumental ; as, T <*tmfa (^T'Tl^ J |4tn^' f l) ' one ought not to
360 SYNTAX OP SUBSTANTIVES.
accept a present from any one ;' -ef^Hicii (^T WT5^) 'the wood is to be abandoned
by us;' *f Vsft Tra*I 'Slfshft rf giufff fagifT: 'he is blessed from whom sup-
pliants do not depart in disappointment;' irt^M 3Mti<sirt *u+^'meat cooked by
Nala.'
d. 'Difference between two things' is expressed by the genitive; as,
' there is great difference between the master and the servant ' (cf . 809. a).
e. In native grammars it expresses 'in place of-' as, 3<<!i T^KI 'an in place of
ri is followed by ra.'
Locative Case.
817. The locative, like the genitive, expresses the most diversified
relations, and frequently usurps the functions of the other cases.
Properly it has the force of ' in' ' on' or * at' as expressive of many
collateral and analogous ideas ; thus, TT^ * in the night ;' qr^ ' in
the village ;' *| 'on the back;' r?fa fVanf: 'confidence in you/
ffe: * rain on desert ground ;' UWJKjmi^ ' at the first
desire of eating; 5 Tjftnqf ^tfwt J^: 'a tree planted in the earth/
818. Hence it passes into the sense ' towards ;' as, "S^RT ^TefT ^ f*?& ^ ' leniency
towards an enemy as well as a friend ;' TI^JTT ^ t^TF ' compassion towards all
creatures ;' *J<J*' ^ftf5K ' upright towards friends ;' *J^ff~5Tff*t, ^?TI?g ^TU^ ' a
hundred good offices are thrown away upon the wicked ;' Tf5'S'gn i TI ' love for
Nala ;' dWI^ ^^tl'IJ ' affection for her.'
819. Words signifying cause,' 'motive,' or need' are joined with the locative ;
as, ^*lr<r i?([: ' the cause of his modesty ;' >^ToW ffy
'your speech was the cause of the war between the two princes;'
TJ ' the absence of a suitor is the cause of a woman's chastity ;'
' What need of a boat ?' Also words signifying ' employment '
or ' occupation ; as, *a^Iir( P^fwi ' engaging in the acquisition of wealth.'
a. So words derived from the root yuj usually require the locative ; as,
*r4*iW: ' I am of service in preserving the kingdom.'
b. This case may yield other senses equivalent to ' by reason of,' 'for,' &c. ; as,
^ ^T5T5 ' through my faults ;' ^?TC "mr^TJTOT^ ^SRfJsfafflT ' a 8 Py IB f or tne sa ^ e
of examining the territory of one's enemies;' *J?T 3Tr5^ 5 T^ 'this is the time for
battle ;' TT^"5JSrfR[Tt ' disregard for advice;' RT pqn i TT?!T tTO ' What anxiety
about dying in battle !' ofiTf5 *r*X ^p5T**T ' I think the time has come for escaping ;'
y<3*4 -w^n ' with the consent of a son.'
c. It is also used in giving the meaning of a root ; as, ?J? ^m^l'f ' the root
arah is in taking,' i. e. conveys the idea of ' taking.'
d. In native grammars it expresses 'followed by ;' thus iTiTT means when any-
thing having an indicatory n follows.' So again, HPtTFI *l^f ^^TTTt f fJ3 ' in
the room of m final in a word followed by any consonant (hal) there is Anusvara.'
e. The locative case is often used absolutely ; see 840.
NOUNS OP PLACE AND DISTANCE. 361
SYNTAX OF NOUNS OF TIME.
820. When reference is made to any particular division of time,
the instrumental case is usually required; as, fcjfar ^: 'in three
years;' gT^lfar: *nfh 'in twelve months;' T5f*!TT 'in an instant;'
fF^nn <*lcH 'In how long time?' ^h$nr: 'in hundreds of years;'
'41 fJTJ^FTOI (or simply ofiTSR) 'in process of time;' uravr 'in a
month;' HI^HId^/ 'in the space of a month;' JTrrRTTT <*TcM 'in so
much time/
821. When duration of time is implied, the accusative case is
generally used; as, 13^5^ 'for a moment;' ^RoTofiTc^ 'for a long
time;' foFW <*M*^ 'for some time;' Tj^i *m>^ 'for one month;'
f%fw SRTT^ 'for twenty months ;' ^ m*ft ' for two months ;' ^;^T1T^
'for a hundred years ;' ^irenft: WRK ' to all eternity ;' ^TiT ^flfiff ' for
a hundred years ;' ^TffT ^lfT 'for many days.' The instrumental,
however, is sometimes used in this sense, and to express other
relations of time ; as, ST^rfa^ ^*k srrfaTZT ^i^T ' having traded for
twelve years ;' ssfirmrf^fh ' for a few days :' and even the genitive ;
as, fcisir ofiTc?ftT (or simply (Viuu) ' for a long time ;' "sfiffTtnTT^^ 'after
a few days.'
822. When any particular day or epoch is referred to, as the date
on which any action has taken place or will take place, the locative
may be employed ; as, cRftRftj<* f^^ ' on a certain day ;'
'on the third day;' ^TT^rsfg 'on the twelfth day;' ^rr:
' seventeen days from this time.' Or sometimes the accusative ; as,
it *if ff gin: ufasifcr w grff uf nf HTTR ^r^ -$s: ' on the night
when the ambassadors entered the city, on that night a dream was
seen by Bharata.'
a. The adverbs at 731 may often be found expressing relations of
time ; as, wrrare 3!b^ or ij^ ' after six months ;' M'UHl^f or WfT-
' six months ago ;' or (employing the locative absolute)
' after a thousand years.'
NOUNS OF PLACE AND DISTANCE.
823. Nouns expressive of ' distance or space between two places 9
(according to Carey) may be in the nominative ; as, ^nr JffcW. *fl*Hiv|ijj
' a hundred Kos from Somanath : ' but they are more properly in
the accusative; as, ift5R^ 'for a Yojana;' Jtfam 'for a Kos:' or
3 A
362 SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES.
in the instrumental ; as, WtT$R TH^T ' having gone for a Kos.' ' The
place ' in which anything is done is expressed by the locative ; as,
in Vidarbha.'
SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES.
Accusative after the Adjective.
824. Adjectives formed from desiderative stems will often be found
governing an accusative in the same way as the verbs from which
they are derived ; as, ^p? fPTfai?: * desirous of going home ;' tj^^
^rfag: 'desirous of obtaining a son ;' TTTR f<Tf!^* 'desirous of seeing
the king/
Instrumental after the Adjective.
825. Adjectives, or participles used adjectively, expressive of
' want 3 or 'possession' require the instrumental case; as,
' destitute of wealth ;' ^n5: TOTipR ' possessed of riches ;'
TTJ: ' a jar full of water/
826. So also of ' likeness,' ' comparison ' or 'equality;' as,
^T^ft <yl^r fT lft T HfrarfTT * there never has been, nor will there ever
be, any one like him in this world ;' l^TCHER $&*{ ^nrft ' he reads
like a Brahman ;' irnt?*l: ^f^T "&FK ' his success was equal to his
undertakings ;' Tfrclh ^TT t^t ' a wife as dear as life ',' ^fiTT ^T?rVcp\
^: * more liberal than (other) kings ;' wf^Tfa g^T: ' equal to the
sun.' These are sometimes joined with a genitive ; see 827. b.
Genitive after the Adjective.
827. Adjectives signifying ' dear to' or the reverse, are joined
with the genitive; as, 7[T$rf ftni: 'dear to kings;' Vfihr: ^fani finn:
* husbands are dear to women ;' r fiftjil ^jlilll^ ^fftTT: 'women dislike
nobody ;' l^ift >T^fw if^TOT^ ' he is detestable to his ministers.'
a. Adjectives expressive of 'fear' may govern the genitive or
ablative ; as, ^^c *rfa: ' afraid of the sage.'
6. Adjectives expressive of ' equality,' ' resemblance,' similitude,' sometimes
require the genitive as well as the instrumental (826); thus, ^91 *W 'equal to
all;' if^r ^J^i: 'like him;' 1 ^*S ir3ff: 'rather like the moon;' ^ fTC-H "g&l
^8T ' nobody is equal to him.'
c. So also other adjectives ; as, ^TC^T^It THRT *J!Ri *J"^ ' giving advice to
others is easy to all men ;' ^J4slMI*^ "Pidt ' worthy of happiness ;' ^PmiJ 31^(1 li*^
* capable of toil;' ^TTIf TfH^Tg^ 'unknown to Dhrita-rashtra;' V^I ^T^i: 'com-
petent for duty.'
SYNTAX OF THE COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE DEGREE. 363
Locative after the Adjective.
828. Adjectives, or participles used adjectively, expressive of
* power 3 or * ability, 3 are joined with a locative ; as, ^Kefffr ^pn ^nai:
* horses able for the journey ;' *f ftr ^TWT 'gpft ^in ' a king who is a
match for a great enemy ;' ^T^I^iT *% ^inOT ^T^iT T^T^% ' unable to
build a house, but able to demolish one/
a. So also other adjectives ; as, ytljfSf? ^^Tc5t ' skilled in arms ;' ^T5*T*J JTT$n
'wise in trifles ;' r^fa ^^C*t fw^t ^T ^T*ft ' Is your master attached or adverse
to you ?' ^J'flfV^ 1*<^T; 'neglectful of his dependants.'
SYNTAX OF THE COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE DEGREE.
829. Adjectives in the comparative degree require the ablative
case ; as, Tfij^ UTOftsfa TlffaRft * a wife dearer even than one's life ;'
T f^snt * there is no pleasanter touch in
this world than the touch of a son;' w*hrn^ TnJTOSJ*!! ^m 'the pro-
tection of one's subjects is better than aggrandizement ;' f rwt (719.0)
' there is not a more wretched man than I ;'
' mind is more powerful than strength.'
830. Sometimes they govern the instrumental ; as, irrah ftnJHTt
* dearer than life ;' tf ^rfcr TTT '<xfa'^ ^(MJHl'Mri'Ol jfa * there is nobody
upon earth more unfortunate than I/
a. "When it is intended to express 'the better of two things' the genitive may
be used ; as, ^Jt*4l^ ^"^nffc oft ^^ft HrRJ ' Of these two countries which is the
better ?'
831. The comparative in Sanskrit is often expressed by 'better
and not 3 or 'but not; 3 as, ^
* better abandon life than (but not) engage in such an action ;' ^t
^*f wr ^T ^ ^'q*?^ T^i ^ ^"f ^ * i* i s better that silence should be
kept than a speech uttered which is untrue;'
T g ^Ti*4!VH < 1 M ! l' 1 ^r5l'MJHT^ 1 ^srmcTni ^WT ufriM'l^^i^ ' a teacher
of the Veda should rather die with his learning than commit
it to an unworthy object, in the absence of a pupil worthy to be
instructed in it/
832. The superlative degree is usually joined with the genitive;
as, cuauft f^r^f wt *n^ ^ftsi ^nj'ocr^p^ i JJ^T Tpfrirai w: ^: w^iqni
^t.: ' a Brahman is the best of all bipeds, a cow of quadrupeds, a
Guru of venerable things, a son of things possessed of touch: 5 but
3 A 2,
364: NUMERALS.
sometimes with the locative ; as, 7JTJ ^?5^T: * the most powerful of
men :' and even with an ablative ; as, vr^TT'U ^^ TWTJ ^t^Tlf^Ti^
* a store of grain is the best of all stores/
a. Rarely with an instrumental ; as, J^rte f i*JiJ JTTOT ^STTRJ ' a hero dearer
than the life of Kunti.' Hence it appears that comparison may sometimes be
expressed by a superlative suffix. Another example is W$jv*n ?T' ; ^*Tt ^TJ ' people
well-read in books are better than ignorant people/
b. A superlative degree may even take a comparative suffix, and govern the
genitive; as, TT^T 3^hnTT; 'the eldest of them.' See 197. a.
c. A comparative word may have a superlative sense ; as, ec nUt ' very firm.'
833. 'Comparison' is often expressed by an adjective in the positive degree,
joined with a noun in the ablative or instrumental case ; as, nfw IT^RTTT j*mm\
'there is not a happier than he;' ST T^T (719. a) T^T^ 'he is greater than I.'
Similarly, ^HH^. f^r^in ' more excellently than all.'
a. In more modern Sanskrit 'comparison' is sometimes expressed by the use of
^nT3?T ' regarding,' ' with reference to ' (indecl. part, of root ^T5T with WTT), which
may take the place of 'than' in English; thus, <J
^frifT<Kt refw ' an A<5arya ought to be higher
in estimation than ten Upadhyayas, a father than a hundred Adaryas.'
834. Many words have a kind of comparative influence, and require an ablative
case, especially W^, ^RR^, ^RT, 'S'^T, ^TST5r, ^fHC, "Tt, ^%, '3rfwir, "3iT,
^^fftfl?, ^H!J ; as, ITCfT^fnT^ "Tlf^I ^Wl^f ^T^ ' it is better not to touch mud
than to wash it off;' ^TfiCTJ^ ^T^t H<*ini^ 'poverty is less desirable than death;'
?ft *?f fo^T^ ^"31^ ^T^ *W*h 'Who is able to rescue me, other than a friend ?'
fcff*[ g:*3^ ^nrt TT^ ' What grief is greater than this ?' T ^pHf ^3% f^sf^Tf^
one ought not to speak differently from what one has heard ;' rtr*irtl^ V<M^I 'at
another time than the present;' *!<.<*( T ^'T^T TT?HT5 *T^^ 'there is no cause of
fear to man from any other quarter than from death ;' ^i-aj^Til (731; 778) ^5^%
'on the day before that of the S'raddha;' *4\ K t^jTTT^ ^rfVoRT^' more than a hundred
Yojanas;' qiifl|^fii ^l^Hlr^ f?nf^ ^5^T: 'intelligence of a lover is something
less than a meeting;' ^RTT5 ^T^f^T?^' the remainder of the food;' *j>5U it M^^*U*i(
five times more than the value.'
NUMERALS.
835. The syntax of numerals is explained at 206, 207. The following examples
may be added: f^HT HJ<UI*^ 'of ninety men;' 'RTT'C TOWT^ 'of sixty men;'
'of a thousand men;' *T|J^ frfiTC 'a thousand ancestors;'
' one hundred multiplied by three ;' TRFT^n^I |r ' two thousand
fruits;' ^RT ^TRJT 1IT^ ^"aTTTH: 'one of these three;' ^HJIT TT ^ 'he gave
ten thousand cows;' xj^^fif ^TT^ 3J*II( ' he killed five hundred deer.'
SYNTAX OP PRONOUNS. 365
a. Sometimes the plural of the numerals from URt upwards may be used ;
as, tfed^ifk^ TI%; ' with fifty arrows.'
b. The aggregative numerals may be employed at the end of compounds for the
cardinals ; thus, 'M.S***^ ' two armies ;' fq Ml ^^ gg *\*\ ' four marriages.' 866214.
c. Numerals from nineteen (una-vinsati) upwards may take the genitive after
them of the things numbered ; as, ^r^TRT ^^#1% ' a hundred thousand of
horses;' tT^Nri HH^frtlfa 'seven hundred foot-soldiers;' $ld*^ ^nil^U!!!*^ 'a
hundred preceptors ;' *RT *T^nnfT Hfe^ 'five hundred and sixty cows ;' WTRJT
TEfT $rmfW f^^lflTO ' six hundred and twenty chapters ;' TO'!)! f^5I^fv<*5lif if
*I|Sr ^ 'two thousand one hundred and thirty men;' "Oft v<st*TF<{J 'five
thousand chariots;' F^nf T^T^ 'a hundred and one cows' (Manu xi. 129).
They may be used at the end of genitively dependent compounds ; as, "^^T^ftfiT
' eighty Tridas,' i. e. eighty of Tricas.
Obs. But the genitive is not admissible after numerals below nineteen ; e. g.
^1 TTT: 'ten men' (not ^$1 *TCTOT^).
d. When numerals are used comparatively they may take an ablative; as,
flU^l^ f^T^TTjft ^T: ' a fine the double of that in dispute/
SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS.
836. The chief peculiarities in the syntax of pronouns have
already been noticed at 216240, and at 799801.
With regard to the alternative of ^*T*^, &c. (see 223), it is properly
only allowed in case of the re-employment (anvddesd) of this pronoun
in the subsequent part of a sentence in which 3^ or nnz has already
been used ; thus, '3nr*T *mH.*!J*^ 'STtfhm ^ "Sr^wni * the grammar
has been studied by him, now set him to study the Veda J (cf. Nala
xn. 31, 32). It is an enclitic, and ought not to begin a sentence.
a. In the use of the relative and interrogative pronouns a very peculiar attrac-
tion is often to be observed; that is, when either a relative or interrogative
pronoun has been used, and an indefinite pronoun would naturally be expected to
follow, the relative or interrogative is repeated, as in the following examples :
TT TW (for eR^qfq^) >TRt ^Tcf ' whatever may be the disposition of whom (i. e.
any one);' ^ TT^ff *W 'whatever is pleasing to any one;' *n TFI 'RT^T^
^BT^nfiT 'whoever eats the flesh of any animal;' *TC*! *T ^J^T ^sfif 'whatever
excellences belong to any one;' 1^ TT ^TiT 'whatever corresponds with any-
thing ;' iref fiji $|l{(^ 'SiuWiOq^ ' What book is to be read by whom ?'
837. The relative and interrogative are sometimes used together, in an indefinite
distributive sense ; as, *Hf?T fiTftT (*idif*U 'any friends whatever :' or more usually
with fa^ affixed to the interrogative ; as, 'TOr oFwPmi ' to any one whatever.'
a. The neuter of the interrogative (fS^) is often joined with the instrumental
366 SYNTAX OF VEEBS.
to signify 'What is the use of?' 'there is no need of;' as, ^pTT f% *u T
VHI-cj^H I f%J^ ^TrT*TT *ft "^ ftrwf'^'ft H^'Of what use is scriptural knowledge
(to one) who does not practice virtue ? Of what use is a soul (to one) whose
passions are not kept in subjection ?' f^T ff ! 3>fT W&ft ' What business have you
to make this inquiry ?' f% ^?TT ' What need of more !' ' in short.'
b. As already shewn at 761, a relative pronoun is sometimes rendered unne-
cessary by the use of the relative compound; thus, TTT^' ^f*Tj<*r**'rt.^*"^' * s
equivalent to fTTTffr *twS^ ^f'^^mlTfVT ^*^if*nr ' a city whose palaces were
silvered by the moon-beams.'
c. The relative, when followed by a pluperfect tense in English, may be expressed
in Sanskrit by the indeclinable participle ; thus, fiff^t ^TV ffi^T ' a lion having
killed a hunter,' or ' a lion who had killed a hunter.'
838. The following examples will illustrate the use of pronouns of quantity and
pronominals : *TRTK (or MW<eHnit,) ijW't ^j^R illicit (or
' as many mouthfuls as he eats, so many he gives away ;' *ff
'if so much is given to me, then I will give so much
instruction;' TTRT ^faf flWT **3uW ' one out of all those.' See also 801.
SYNTAX OF VERBS.
839. Nothing is more common in Sanskrit syntax than for the
verb to be omitted altogether, or supplied from the context.
a. This is more especially the case with the copula, or substantive verb ; thus,
'as long as the gods have existed in Meru, as long as the Ganges upon earth,
as long as the sun and moon in the sky, so long have we (existed) in the family of
Brahmans;' tjft^^i MifyscM*^ 'discrimination (is) wisdom.'
Locative and Genitive absolute.
840. The locative case is very commonly used absolutely with
participles ; as, irfw^ irfafrr sfhnfa J?T irfFl^ fa^ ^l f he living I
live, he dying I die;' ^WRT TT?n 'the night being ended;
WT?rPc SH^ 'the elder brother being unmarried;' ^wfj
* there being no other expedient;' W*n tffw 'it being so.' Sometimes
the participle is omitted ; as, ^ ^ 'the danger (being) distant.' When
the past passive participle is thus used absolutely with a noun in the
locative, the present participle of *n^, * to be,' is often redundantly
added; as, iniT H *rfif or w^IT ^njfoiT 'it being so done*.'
* Possibly the object of adding the word sati may be to shew that the passive
participle is here used as a participle, and not as a past tense. So also in com-
mentaries ^rfiT is placed after a word like ^TlflSfiT, to indicate the loc. sing, of
the pres. part., as distinguished from the 3rd sing, of the pres. tense.
SYNTAX OF VEEBS. 367
a. The genitive is less commonly used absolutely; as,
'calamities impending;' TTTin Kmu*^ the men looking on.'
6. When the nominative appears to be thus used there are really two sentences ;
as, ^5*^ H SHWI'rf: ^JPr^N^ 'sftR 'my friend having arrived, I am happy.'
c. It is evident that the locative and genitive absolute may often take the place
of the English particles 'when,' 'while,' 'since,' 'although;' and may supply the
place of a pluperfect tense; thus, TTftR^ 'STO'aiT'iT 'when he had departed.'
Nominative Case after the Verb.
841. Verbs signifying 'to be/ 'to become/ 'to appear/ 'to be
called/ or ' to be esteemed/ and other passive verbs similarly used,
may take a nominative after them ; as, T^iTT H^PUM**: Wi^ ' let a
king be the protector of his subjects;' *TT f*KH*<l TTftwrfff 'she
appears sorrowful;' sn^s^BJ HfTWlfw 'the village appears like a
desert;' nTT V*? 'STfinrNfifr 'a king is called Justice.'
Accusative Case after the Verb.
842. Transitive verbs generally govern an accusative ; as, f^g *rcn|
^\JT: ' Brahma created the universe ;' ipnftr f^ffrflT TTCfr ' the woman
gathers flowers ;' liuui^ TR^ *pji| : ' the dying man gave up the ghost ;'
T$ '*f*rtii! ' one should avoid wine ;' rf^sf sf\r ' speak the truth.'
a. Verbs of speaking to or addressing take an accusative; as,
TPJ ^rarh^ ' he said to him ;' ^fk ^re tfiMJj*( ' he ^ us addressed
Arjuna.'
843. So also verbs of motion ; as, TOLfa ?fHl gftTt ' the holy man goes to the
place of pilgrimage;' "*&K ^^J "5^^ 'rivers run into the ocean;' W?fll Tf^
' he wanders over the earth.'
844. Verbs of motion are not unfrequently used with substantives, to supply the
place of other verbs ; as, 9mfin lift ' he goes to fame,' for ' he becomes famous ;'
l*^ IjffT ' he goes to equality,' for ' he becomes equal;' THTtT
' he came to the friendship of those two,' for ' he became a friend of those two ;'
trafi^ T Hft 'he went to death,' for 'he died;' plfW Tjfl? T^f7T 'he leads the
king to satisfaction,' for ' he satisfies,' &c.
a. The following are other examples : ^W'm T^TT ifV^fir ' he avoids paining
others ;' ^Tm*M^ ^5% ' he desires what is unattainable ;' f^?Tf f^if'MH ' he
should think on wisdom;' ^n5H^ ^T^t^flT ' he mounts his horse;' F*iifilS
'they began the business;' TffT^ HT ^^t 'grieve not for the departed;'
'he deserves the sovereignty of the universe;'
'he lies down in a cave of the mountain;' if Tjffa PM^tA' T
one ought not to prevent a cow from drinking milk.'
368 SYNTAX OP YERBS.
845. There are certain verbs which take a redundant accusative case after them
of a substantive derived from the same root; as, ym*4 TJT'T he swore an oath;'
^Tfirr ^T*!^ ' he dwells ; ' ^fif ff ^fe*J ' he conducts himself ; ' ^TT ^fiT ' he speaks
a speech ;' ffrfV<*f affafif ' he lives a life ;' H^ftl TT^ ' he raises a cry ' (cf. the
Greek expressions Ae'-yw Aoyov, yct'ipa %apav, &c.)
Double Accusative after the Verb.
846. Verbs of asking govern a double accusative ; as, ^ ^t TT^fT ' he seeks
a boon of the god;' Vf Cl'Hl*! HlQ^fl 'he begs money from the king;' W
' he asks whether he has had a good ablution.' Of speaking ; as,
lT 'he addressed a speech to the king.' Of leading; as, it
'he leads him home;' Kt5f^TT ^TSTpfft "fa*fT*l 'he led the princess to another
king.'
a. Other examples of the use of verbs of this kind are, *rf ^frv TjTlt ' he milks
milk from the cow ;' g|^c vft^ff *^fifT ' they milked jewels out of the earth' (cf.
895. 6) ; ffWl Tc3 <!T*(*^ ' having won his kingdom from Nala,' i. e. ' having by
play deprived Nala of his kingdom' (cf. 895. 6); ^T^f^rVf7T $*j*fifT ^5^ ' she
gathers blossoms from the trees ;' TTT^ JJTf^nte *<*r*0^|*^ ' he sent them to the
abode of Yama ;' ^qfYfflf't JT ^T^?=T fqM4.1nnT ^T T*UnT ' his own acts lead
a man to eminence or the reverse ;' f^I^nHTO WT^ v^iftT ' he taught them the
use of arms;' W ^TTT^fin^ ^f^f^f^^J 'they inaugurated him general,' more
usually joined with an ace. and loc. ; ^ ifff <K4fTI ' she chooses a god for her
husband.'
Obs. When verbs which govern a double accusative are used in the passive,
one accusative will remain (cf. 895. 6); as, 1 3T^f*TfVT ^TJJiT *WI 'the ocean was
churned for nectar' (Kirat. v. 30).
847. Causal verbs ; as, ''Hfffftf ftnTffr ^^ ' he causes the guest to eat food'
(see Pan. i. 4, 52); WT ^hl*nf*T ^ rT f^lf^ 'I cause you to know what is for
your interest;' f^fOI ^T5^ ^I'WlTtnTfif 3J^: 'the Guru teaches his pupil the
Vedas ;' HT *J^ H^^rtfW ' he causes her to enter the house ;' ^co^ 1 *^^
'he presented the king's son with fruits, flowers, and water;'
n ' she causes her son to sit on her lap ' (literally, ' her hip ') ;
TT pl V^nrfiT 'learning causes a man to have access to a king.'
Instrumental Case after the Verb.
848. Any verb may be joined with the instrumental, to express
* the agent? * instrument' or ' cause? or ' manner 9 of the action ; as,
yt ^TlNr IHlflf ' the flower fades by reason of the wind ;' ^%: "^teflT
* he plays with dice ;' NftsfVf ^h: (\HTmjfrt * the cloud puts out the
fire with its rain ;' ^7f "srWlT 'he lives happily/ See 865.
a. In this sense many causals take an instrumental ; as, eft
SYNTAX OF VERBS. 369
he caused her to eat sweetmeats ;' tjfisffa: fa?J3T^ ^T^<*frf ' he causes the pieces
to be eaten by the birds.' Cf. 847.
849. After verbs of motion this case is used in reference either to the vehicle by
which, or the place on which, the rtiotion takes place ; as, T^T TJ*nflf ' he goes in
a chariot;' ^n^tT ^TCflT 'he goes on horseback;' TTJRI *T$fir 'he goes on the
road/ $rc*rvjjfcf<!l JRSfif 'he goes through afield of corn;' "$Sr3 'fll'li; tf<**l[
' he navigated the ocean in a boat.' Similarly, ^HT^f Tin ^fSTS^ ' tears flowed
through the eyes.'
a. After verbs of carrying, placing, &c., it is used in reference to 'the place' on
which anything is carried ; as, ^fif ^T ^VT'T ' he bears fuel on his head;' ^W^'
s -s , *
^Vrf T?fiT the dog is borne on the shoulders.' e is found with this case in the
sense of placing; as, fjflTOT $c=T*^ ^wftw ' he placed his son on his head.'
The following are other examples: f^T^TO 1&f?r *J^: 'the master goes in
company with the pupil ;' T^nTTRT^f lfsfHJ ' he consulted with his ministers ;' but
in this sense ^T^ is usually placed after it. >?!T W^JTT fj"aa.fiT ' the husband
meets the wife;' fl*iW<4fiT r*J ^tt 'he harnessss the horses to the chariot;' ~*WH
^TGjW ' he fights his enemies,' or ^lejfa: ^H?, &c. ; qt T ^Mffac^^Rr ^hi^' one
ought not to be at enmity with any one ;' HT <ftW "Rft^I^ff ' he suspects me of a
crime.'
850. Verbs of boasting, &c. ; as, fafclm fa Fr*TO ' you boast of your learning ;'
'you glory in the fame of others.'
a. Of swearing ; as, VJ^T ^HJ ' he swore by his bow.'
b. Of thinking, reflecting ; as, TTW faf^PT ' thinking in his mind.'
c. Of comparing ; as, Wc9Tfi^T ^nftnif IHT^T ' a beautiful woman is compared
to a leech.'
851. Verbs denoting liberation, freedom from, sometimes take an instrumental
after them ; as, *1%'1JTO IJlpEffi ' he is released from all sins ;' ^^*f fa^Tff ' he is
separated from the body ' (more usually with ablative).
852. Verbs of buying and selling take the instrumental of the price ; as, ^*nre
1 Hf<|Srt^ ' buy one wise man even for thousands of fools ;'
' he sells his house for a thousand cows ;'
: ' buy that for ten Suvarnas.'
Dative after the Verb.
853. All verbs in which a sense of imparting or communicating
anything is inherent, may take an accusative of the thing imparted,
and a dative of the person to whom it is imparted. (Frequently,
however, they take a genitive or even a locative of the recipient ;
see 857.) ijcjTi! H^cRT^ ^iflT ' he gives sweetmeats to his son ; J
*TT HflT^pftfir ' he promises a cow to the Brahman ;' ^^rR Vf
* he ov;es money to Devadatta ;' wxti WW nfinn^ * consign the maiden
to him/ more usually with the locative ; see 861.
3 B
370 SYNTAX OF VERBS.
a. Other examples of the dative are, iNf fqTl$lHl JT^pjlf JR: ' he sets his
mind on their destruction;' *1HT(1 TflT <pJT 'he set his mind on departure,' or
with the locative. TT^ T^j ^Nff 'that is pleasing tome;' fffWm iHV4*ttf*T TfT^
' I will declare this to my pupils ;' ^ TT^ f^fT^TlflT ' he makes known all to the
king,' these are also joined with the genitive of the person. ^njffSTPT tiJ4rt ' he
is rendered fit for immortality ;' JH^fiT *W "3T*rR 'he has the power to kill me;'
TTI^ *?TiJT "qTVni i< <<t iT^i|ri ' he incited them to the murder of their mother ;' ycH*f
lptTf?T ' he is angry with his son ;' ^T HT^T^ft TTTTT ^W'^nTTT ' this lump of flesh
is produced for a hundred sons;' U^f% fa*WT ' I had no hopes of success.'
Ablative after the Verb.
854. All verbs may take an ablative of the object from which
anything proceeds, or arises, or is produced ; as, a^fa ^W\ M^*^
* the leaf falls from the tree ;' ^fvt ^T^flT TR3T^ ' blood flows from the
body; 5 ^nsn^ ^fwfir 'he rises from his seat; 5 JjfrtRjTif: (719) R7fT
Tf *sff 1?T^ ^33[f?r * from the lump of clay the artist makes whatever
he wishes ;' fetj*n^ Tnfir TTT^HT^ ' from education a person attains
capacity ;' fVf^irm H J KI^ ' he went out from the city.'
855. Verbs of fearing are joined with the ablative, and sometimes with the
genitive; as, ^T^ T "iHlT l^ft^ fa>TfrT ^IT ^JjrtTT^'a good man does not fear
death so much as falsehood;' TT ^T^fil (VnTrt 'be not afraid of a noise;'
the whole world stands in awe of punishment;' ^fvsjmw IT
' I fear thee, a cunning penitent;' see 859.
856. Verbs which express superiority or comparison govern an
ablative ; as, HHHHI^ cKTinTf ^ftwpft faf^T 1 ^ ' the abandonment of
pleasure is superior to .(better than) the possession/
a. Other examples of verbs followed by ablative cases are, WTW^f^ ^T^CfarflT ' he
descends from the palace ;' "fetflji 3Mi^ ^NflrtH. ' Vishnu descended from heaven ;'
' he takes off (causes to descend) the golden bracelet
from his body ;' fTJncl trt^fiT ' he ceases from wickedness ;'
'he left off speaking;' i<.mi^fani ^P?T ^(\ Vlfil^r: 'a virtuous son saves
his father from hell;' VH^HVTV^tlli^ ^T?^ 'SrfTfft.'^ni 'truth is superior to a
thousand sacrifices;' ^^f^rilt^ HHIilfw 'he neglects his own interest;' facf*^
^T^c9T^ fnTCVfiT ' a friend guards one from evil.'
Genitive after the Verb.
857. The genitive in Sanskrit is constantly interchangeable with
the dative, locative, or even instrumental and accusative *. It is
* This vague use of the genitive to express 'various relations ' prevails also in
early Greek.
SYNTAX OP VERBS. 371
more especially, however, used to supply the place of the first of
these cases, so that almost all verbs may take a genitive as well as
dative of 'the recipient;' e.g. ^fr^T Vf ^ifw 'he gives money to
the poor; 5 TtTf^Tfr >rbn^ 'he benefits others/
858. It may be used for the locative after verbs of consigning, as
' he deposits a pledge with me ;' or of trusting, as T
' nobody puts trust in women :' and for the accusative in examples such
as wfrfjnTTfT gn6TTfT ^TCTfnT ^f^rf[*^ 'unexpected ills come upon corporeal
beings.'
859. It is sometimes used after verbs of fearing y as, TT^tl f?i *T H'^rftr 'Why
wilt thou not be afraid of him ? ' see 855. Also after verbs of longing for, desiring,
envying ; as, aq*ili^q ^ToFTCfr^'he should desire contempt;' *
^TO'SJWP^ ' I envy men who possess eyes.' After verbs of remembering ; as,
*T +KffT 'they do not remember heaven ' (Kirat. v. 28).
c. Other examples of verbs followed by genitive cases are, i(niini*t w
^rftf WHTT ' tell us, who are ignorant of it, whose wife you are ;'
(for ofi^RTT^) fw^Tfir Vrf^sSTt 'Of whom are the righteous afraid?' ^
HfTT3TTftfT T 1T^ ^T^T^T ^ITTl^'one should not give to one what one
promises to another;' *HT *T 3J*nrfTT ' he does not hear me' (cf. the Greek usage);
*W ^RT 'remember me,' or with an accusative. -a^Hrii JJ7J! UH^fff ' death over-
comes us;' ^ff''f^ T ^OTfrT BTFR7^ ' fire is not satisfied with fuel;'
'forgive them ;' feR T^TT (TFT ^SRU^*^ ' What offence have I given him ?'
Locative after the Verb.
860. This case is very widely applicable, but, as elsewhere re-
marked, is frequently interchangeable with the dative and genitive.
The first sense of the locative requires that it should be united with
verbs in reference only to ' the place ' or ' time ' in which anything
is done; as, ~q% wsstfit 'he sinks in the mud;' TJT ^^fw 'he dwells
in the city ;' W?|f8 fjffif ' he stands in the front of the fight ; '
.^rf^f JRVfl^ ' at sunrise he awakes. 3
S6i. The transition from ' the place ' to ' the object ' or ' recipient ' of any action
is natural ; and hence it is that verbs are found with the locative of ' the object '
to which anything is imparted or communicated, as in the following examples :
TT THRJ f^T > *TH ' bestow not money on the mighty ;' 7Tft<R^ ^RT^TfilT ftrfsf-
'Tlf'T ' I entrust my affairs to him ;' tjof ^wO*4li 'BT'WfW 'he consigns a ring to
his son ;' *TtHfc wf'^ ^wfif t.T5^H*?^ ' he entrusts the burden of the kingdom
to a capable minister ;' uf^T or <M$"?5 PtA^fk 'he informs the king ;' Tw ^
' say to Nala.'
a. TJH ?! ffl^'Uiri^ ' one should place (bury) a dead man in the ground ;' vf
' be applies his mind to virtue.' In this sense ^ may be used ; as,
3 B 2
372 INSTRUMENTAL CASE AFTER PASSIVE VERBS.
' he placed the wood on his back ;' *fif TPT oFTtfrT ' he applies
his mind to sin.'
862. When <fT, 'to give,' is used for 'to put,' it follows the same analogy; as,
TOT y^ilil ^3" ^"f? 'put your hand on the end of its tail ;' VTFT'^re "^ 53
'he placed his foot on a heap of ashes.' Similarly, =Hd|^& ^iflisfw 'he was
s *>.
held hy the skirt of his garment.' So also verbs of seizing, striking; as, "^T^TS
JJ^rfw or ^n^TSfTT 'he seizes or drags him by the hair ;' *p TH-T^T ' he strikes
a sleeping man ;' J |'^rll ff ^foSPST TITTOT 'having taken hold of him by the right
hand.'
863. The locative is often put for the dative in sentences where the latter case
stands for the infinitive; thus, Hgt: ^T^W WT33 'hasten to seek thy spouse;'
Tc5^T ^IH*rl *lrt*jr ' strive to bring Nala hither ;' ^T ^T^[ 7RS VJ*ft 37^93
'they could not hold that bow;' T ^T^t s *T^ fTTfT*!T 'he was not able to
prevent it.'
a. Other examples are, <Ty H^ftf TrtW ' he is engaged in a very severe penance ;'
j *TT ^fjrft *! ' do not busy yourself about other people's affairs ;'
3*fff 'he is addicted to objects of sense;' ^Ht^ETfarf^rt T^JT 'he delights
in the good of all the world ;' ^TTfVfoBn; ff^ T^ ri ' he is appointed to the com-
mand of the fort ;' 1?T ^*n ^ft f^ftT^ffw ' he yokes two bulls to the pole ;'
^TTTW ^ffafa^T TFT ' anoint me to the generalship ;' ^W n TTTfrfllS ' he strives
to suppress evil-doers;' ehj^ W^T^ ^ra^ JiT 'they had anger against the
king ;' M 0*4(1 ^^ Tfi? IT ' make trial of Vahuka ;' 'SITVT^T i^flT ^^ ' I will lay
the blame on you;' r<1*3 iT ifcTis 'choose him for thy husband;' ^T 'W *Jrt
^(fj^tu ^*Jf ' 'the gods exerted themselves for the nectar.'
b. T Tf^I ^W'T c nw*^ ^'5^' : ( ' sucn language is not suited to a person like
me;' H*J?^ Wftf M^-Kfri 'sovereignty is suited to you;' ^TTCm ^fTf^Ti^'he
reclined on a seat ;' ^TF( ^TPff^ * ' sit thou on a cushion ;' ^Icfl! fT^ftrfif ' he
confides in his enemies ;' M!.m*k tnrffl ' it falls at his feet ;' ^7f?T ^TT^^ ' it rolls
at the feet.'
Change of Case after the same Verb,
864. This sometimes occurs ; as, f^H ^fTTrFfT cjjift ^ TT^n^TJ 5T% "3^^-
^TTn^ ' Vidhura and Kunti announced everything, the one to Dhrita-rashtra, the
other to Gandhari ' (Astras'iksha 34), where the same verb governs a dative and
genitive. Similarly, in the Hitopades'a, 3jf jjT*OT f%*ai*U T cSfl^t tfl^"^ ^ ' con ~
fidence is not to be placed in horned animals or women.*
INSTRUMENTAL CASE AFTER PASSIVE VERBS.
865. The prevalence of a passive construction is the most remark-
able feature in the syntax of this language. Passive verbs are joined
Epic form for
SYNTAX OF THE INFINITIVE. 373
with ' the agent, instrument, or cause/ in the instrumental case *,
and agree with 'the object' in number and person; as, ^TfR TT
' the dust is raised by the wind ;' ^r t
* let all things be prepared by him ;' ^jfar wf^TTr STflTTrfair ' the sun
was concealed by arrows.'
866. But the past passive participle usually takes the place ofihepast tenses of the
passive verb, and agrees with 'the object' in gender and case as well as number;
as, H^lfal HTjfnfT Tfft?!TT ' (their) eyes were suffused with tears ;' iTT
(S^f 1 ^ being understood) 'it was said by him.' Cf. 895.
a. This instrumental construction after passive verbs is a favourite idiom in
Sanskrit prose composition, and the love for it is remarkably displayed in such
phrases as the following : <p^*T *ljrt, 'he is gone to by misery,' for |[W JTxSfiT;
and ^HNIWIHT ^^T, 'let it be come by your majesty,' for ^TlxgfiJ ^J ; and
again, ^RTfar. Teficf **i1(iii*^ 'let it be remained by us in one spot,' for 'let us
remain in one spot ;' *I*T HTT5I 3J? iT*T 'i-Mfii*^ ' by whatever road it is desired, by
that let it be gone.'
b. Active or causal verbs, which take a double accusative, will retain one accusa-
tive when constructed passively ; but the other accusative passes into a nominative
case; thus, instead of *T *H Tlj'mft!? "TTP^, 'he addressed me in harsh words,'
may be written IHT 1 5T^ T^Tftl T3J, ' by him I was addressed in harsh words.'
SYNTAX OF THE INFINITIVE.
867. The infinitive (formed with ij^ turn) in Sanskrit cannot be
employed with the same latitude as in other languages. Its use is
very limited, corresponding to that of the Latin Supines, as its
termination turn indicates.
a. Let the student, therefore, distinguish between the infinitive of Sanskrit
and that of Latin and Greek. In these latter languages we have the infinitive
made the subject of a proposition ; or, in other words, standing in the place of a
nominative, and an accusative case often admissible before it. We have it also
assuming different forms, to express present, past, or future time, and complete-
ness or incompleteness in the progress of the action. The Sanskrit infinitive, on
the other hand, can never be made the subject of a verb, admits of no accusative
before it, and can only express indeterminate time and incomplete action. Wherever
it occurs it must be considered as the object, and never the subject, of some verb
expressed or understood. As the object of the verb, it may be regarded as equiva-
lent to a verbal substantive, in which the force of two cases, an accusative and
dative, is inherent, and which differs from other substantives in its power of
* There are a few instances of the agent in the genitive case ; as,
' a crime committed by me,' for f*n.
374 SYNTAX OF THE INFINITIVE.
governing a case. Its use as a substantive, with the force of the accusative case,
corresponds to one use of the Latin infinitive ; thus, HIT ^T Wjp^ ^s^ifa ' I desire
to hear all that,' 'id audire cupio? where ^nij*l and audire are both equivalent to
accusative cases, themselves also governing an accusative. Similarly, -Ctf^lj H<|WT
' she began to weep ;' and T^ *rg*^ ^TTT*? ' he began to conquer the earth,' where
JT^'ST^H ^?TT?, 'he began the conquest of the earth,' would be equally correct.
b. Bopp considers the termination of the infinitive to be the accusative of the
suffix tu (458. Obs.), and it is certain that in the Veda other cases of nouns formed
with this suffix in the sense of infinitives occur ; e. g. a dative in tave or tavai, as from
han comes hantave, ' to kill ;' fr. anu-i, anvetave, ' to follow ;' fr. man, mantavai, 'to
think :' there is also a form in tos, generally in the sense of an ablative ; e. g. fr. *
comes etos, ' from going ;' fr. han, hantos, as in purd hantos, ' before killing :' and
a form in tvi corresponding to the indeclinable participle in tvd of the classical
language; e. g. fr. han, hatvi, 'killing ;' fr. bhu, bhutvC, ' being.' Infinitives may also
be formed in the Veda by simply adding the usual case-terminations to the root ;
e. g. in the sense of an accusative, fr. d-ruh may come druham, to ascend;' fr.
d-sad, dsadam, to sit down :' of a dative, fr. d-dhrish, ddhrishe, 'to get at,' subdue ;'
fr. san-faksh, sandakshe, 'to survey:' of an ablative, fr. ava-pad, avapadas, 'from
falling down.' Infinitives are also formed by changing the final d of roots ending
in this letter to ai; e. g. fr. pra-yd, prayai, 'to approach :' or by adding se (liable
to be changed to she} to a root, as fr. ji comes jishe, 'to conquer:' or by
adding ase; e.g. fr.jiv,jivase, 'to live:' or adhyai; e.g. fr. bhri, bharadhyai, 'to
bear ;' fr. yaj, yajadhyai, ' to sacrifice,' &c.
868. But the Sanskrit infinitive most commonly involves a sense
which belongs especially to the Sanskrit dative, viz. that of ' the end*
or 'purpose* for which anything is done; thus,
wrarfif ' he comes to devour the young ones ;' "$?[
' he sent an army to fight the enemy/
a. In these cases it would be equally correct in Sanskrit to substitute for the
infinitive the dative of the verbal noun, formed with the suffix ana ; thus, vrajWRT,
' for the eating,' for Hfsfg*^ ; *VVfi*l, ' for the fighting,' for *H5*^ ', and in Latin
the infinitive could not be used at all, but either the supine, devoratum, pugnatum,
or, still more properly, the conjunction ut with the subjunctive mood, ut devoret,'
1 ut pugnarent.' The following are other examples in which the infinitive has a
dative force in expressing ' the purpose ' of the action : miUl *TTjJ l<ft*^ ^TTHTf
' he went to the river to drink water ;' *W '^V'T [W*^ ^WnfTT ' he comes to cut
asunder my bonds ;' *TT ^Tlj WT^J ' he is able to rescue me ;' tfT^n^ fHfr^ fl^
^>J^ ' he busied himself about collecting together the snares.'
b. The best Pandits think that the infinitive ought not to be used when the
verb which is connected with it refers to a different person, or is not ^*UfTftj4t-ir ;
.thus W 1^3^ ^TnjTTOI, ' command him to go,' would be better expressed by 7f
USE AND CONNEXION OF THE TENSES. 375
c. The infinitive cannot be used after an accusative to express ' that' as in
Latin ; thus, ' having heard that Duryodhana was killed ' would be expressed by
869. The Sanskrit infinitive, therefore, has the character of a
Supine, and in this character is susceptible of either an active or
passive signification. In its passive character, however, like the
Latin Supine in , it is joined with certain words only, the most
usual being the passive verbs ^r^f * to be able' and Jpf ' to be fitting/
and their derivatives; thus, ?H5 T $Tffl * it cannot be abandoned;'
^fft T %^ 5IWrf * the snare cannot be cut ;' 7f $|<wi: WTVTfif ^ ^far:
' those evils cannot be remedied ;' ^fhj tT ^rifd ' it is not fitting to be
heard ;' %^ ^HTTO: ' unfit to be cut ;' WTT T
( contempt is not proper to be shewn by thee for him ;'
' worthy to be celebrated.'
a. The following are other instances : *i<jSHl 6KfMrj*^ ^TR3H ' the shed was
begun to be built;' TTi^ 'Slftf^ VT^T^ fn^faiK 'your Honour has been
selected to be inaugurated to the kingdom ;' ^*?flT KJ*^ ' it deserves to be done ;'
'improper to be done' (cf. factu indignum and iroien a7^ov);
'she ought to be released;' ftp^ ^ inf^TT F^ 'what is
sought to be done.' The infinitive of neuter verbs, which have a passive sense,
will of course be passive ; as, "StS "H ^rftl ' deign not to be angry.'
870. The root ^rf^ ' to deserve,' when used in combination with an infinitive, is
usually equivalent to 'an entreaty' or 'respectful imperative;' as, V*ft^ TT 1$'*^
^f^ftr ' deign (or simply ' be pleased') to tell us our duties.' It sometimes has the
force of the Latin debet; as, f Hl'^^ft WT^ ^rfi?HT^ ^I^fil ' such a person as I
ought not to address you;' f iT ^uPMij*^ *a^r 'you ought not to bewail him.'
871. The infinitive is sometimes joined with the noun WTT, 'desire,' to form a
kind of compound adjective, expressive of wishing to do anything, but the
final m is then rejected ; thus, 5ni*iJ, -TT, -T*^, ' desirous of seeing;' SfipKHn,
-IT, -*P^, wishing to conquer.'
a. Sometimes the infinitive is joined in the same way with Hlt^J thus, H
jfeHtit ' he has a mind to see.'
872. When kirn follows the infinitive a peculiar transposition sometimes takes
place, of which the ist Act of S'akuntala furnishes an example; thus, A n
, ' I wish to know thy friend,
whether this monastic vow is to be observed by her,' for $15*^ ^a.i(*i f^f ^T^fT n
&c. ' I wish to know whether this vow is to be observed by thy friend.'
USE AND CONNEXION OF THE TENSES.
873. PRESENT TENSE. This tense, besides its proper use, is often
used for the future; as, n JTSSlfa 'Whither shall I go?' ^r wf
376 USE AND CONNEXION OP THE TENSES.
When shall I see thee?' fan ofrdfo 'What shall I do?' and
sometimes for the imperative ; as, TTTT ^fH: ' let us do that/
- ______
874. In narration it is commonly used for the past tense ; as, <H >JT*T tM^I
^T^lflT "i|ff ^ ' he, having touched the ground, touches his ears, and says.'
875. It may denote 'habitual' or ' repeated' action ; as, *JJTt BTHJ Tf^ *Tr^T
UT^fcf ' the deer going there every day was in the habit of eating the corn ;'
Iff if^T^n^ ^JRltf rf H^T flSTr5 ff^fofif ' whenever he heard the noise of the
mouse, then he would feed the cat.'
876. It is usually found after *n^ and cTRi^; as, ^R^ T ^?TT ^ ^Ca| ^
fir^TI H^ TRff f^Tftl ' as long as my teeth do not break, so long will I gnaw
asunder your fetters.' (Compare the use of the Latin dum.)
877. The present tense of the root ^U^[, 'to sit,' 'to remain,' is used with the
present participle of another verb, to denote continuous ' or ' simultaneous ' action ;
as, ''^'Tf <TW cgej*(_ ^TIW ' he keeps making a slaughter of the beasts ;' *fH Wil^.
^T I T33^[ ^n^cT ' he is in the act of coming after me.'
878. The particle W, when used with the present, gives it the force of a perfect ;
as, Ufe^rfcr FT "$&{ 'they entered the city;' f*n^lf^T 9? 'they dwelt.' See
251. Obs.
879. POTENTIAL. The name of this tense is no guide to its
numerous uses. Perhaps its most common force is that of 'fitness*
in phrases, where in Latin we should expect to find oportet with the
infinitive ; as, WTTT TO ^ts$ R: ^13" *T*ftfan^ ' having beheld danger
actually present, a man should act in a becoming manner/
880. It is also employed, as might be expected, in indefinite general expressions;
as, 11^? ^ffr >TRt ^tJTlI ' whatever may be the disposition of any one;' left UfT
_ # *_ ^ cr
35^ "r\ eftlTH 3RT*r<; 3f l*t k when the king may not himself make investigation of
the case;' ^rcnTT9fiT^^^*f "spF^ TUTTI!^ ^14*111*^ 'by uttering unseasonable
words one may meet with dishonour/
a. Especially in conditional sentences and suppositions; as, Ti^ TT|T <^!? T
' if the king were not to inflict
punishment, ownership would remain with nobody, and all barriers would be
broken down.' Sometimes the conjunction is omitted; as, T *T^nf 'should it not
be so ;' T ^ffif ^TOVfcn ' were he not subject to another.'
88 1. The potential often occurs as a softened imperative, the Sanskrit language,
in common with others in the East, being averse to the more abrupt form ; thus,
au, 'do thou go,' for T^I; and ^reffi^ Tfic4tfi, 'let him eat fruits,' for 'W^ ;
t, 'let there be,' for 'there must be' (in comment, to Pan.)
883. IMPEEATIVE. This tense yields the usual force of * com-
mand 9 or 'entreaty; 3 as, ^TTOHlf^ 'take courage;' *TP^ 'SPJW:
' remember me/
m, and not TT, must be used in prohibition ; as, wpf TT fff ' do
USB AND CONNEXION OF THE TENSES. 377
not tell a falsehood;' TT f3-5l*<f 'be not ashamed;' see 889. The
first person is used to express ' necessity, 3 see example at 796.
a. The 3rd pers. singular is sometimes used interjectionally ; thus,
*&% 'Be it so!' 'Well!' THiJ 'Let it go!' 'Come along!' 'Come!'
883. The imperative is sometimes used in conditional phrases to express ' contin-
gency;' as, ^rrjnffrf^ HT T5Tf*f ' permit me, (and) I will go,' i. e. ' if you will permit
me, I will go ;' ^SisMMl Ift*T e 4 (<r|*^'if you command me, I will kill the villain ;'
"^WTT^r^ JT tr^a; TS^Tftr 'if you give me a promise of security, I will go.'
884. IMPERFECT. Although this tense (see 242) properly has
reference to 'past incomplete action,' and has been so rendered in
the paradigms of verbs, yet it is commonly used to denote ' indefinite
past time,' without any necessary connexion with another action ;
as, ^?nzi ?T^if TC^ ^TR3^ { I made an effort to collect wealth,' not
necessarily ' I was making.'
Obs. The augment may be cut off after *u, as in the aorist ; thus,
H 9T vm^ ' May he not become ?' See 242. Obs. ; Pan. vi. 4, 74.
885. PERFECT. As explained at 242, this tense is properly used
to express 'an action done at some definite period of past time;' as,
^ R*<|: ' Kausalya and the others bewailed king
Dasaratha.' It is frequently, however, employed indeterminately.
886. FlRST FUTURE. This tense (see 242) expresses 'definite
but not immediate futurity ;' as, TTTCJ f^SJ oBWST ific5 753nfa ' in those
regions thou shalt (one day) obtain the fruit of thy desire.'
887. SECOND FUTURE. This tense, although properly indefinite,
is employed to express ' all degrees and kinds of futurity' immediate
or remote, definite or indefinite ; as, ^rg trq: tn^Tfa * thou shalt
drink sweet water;' n^ ^raspi xj^ff <*^ fa 'there certainly he will
see his wife ;' ^?r Tftrefa 'this very day thou shalt go.'
a. It is sometimes used for the imperative ; as, ^ ^4 ir^r ^RSfa
* whatever is to be given, that you will give,' (do thou give.)
888. AORIST. This tense (see 242) properly expresses ' time in-
definitely past ;' as, ^^ ra 'there lived (in former times) a king.'
889. It is also employed to supply the place of the imperative, after the prohi-
bitive particle *JT or *TT T*T, the augment being omitted (see 242. Obs.) ; as,
' do not make ;' *TT TTTCfh WH^' do not lose the opportunity ;' *TT W
' do not tell an untruth ;' TT 1SV! ' do not be angry ;' TT ^^1 ' do not grieve ;' *TT
T^^rh ' do not injure ;' *!T l^'T^lI ' do not destroy ;' >H ^fa: ' do not speak so ;'
*?T Htft: 'be not afraid ' (contracted into IT H: in Nala xiv. 3).
378 SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES.
890. PRECATIVE. Only one example of this tense occurs in the Hitopadesa :
^T^rfin ' May he constantly he the ahode of all happiness ! '
It is chiefly used in pronouncing benedictions. Also in imprecations.
a. In the latter case a noun formed with a suffix ani is frequently used ; thus,
fT *J?ffi^ ' May there be loss of life to thee ! ' ' Mayst thou perish ! '
891. CONDITIONAL. This tense (see 242) is even less frequent than the last.
The following are examples : ifij tTSTT ^J? T H*u*<^ff^T ^J1
! ' if the king were not to inflict punishment, then the stronger
would roast the weak like fish on a spit ;' or, according to the Scholiast,
>Nh(Vm^' would cause injury;' ^^51 ^ WTfawri^ TT^T $faSf
there should be abundant rain, then there would be abundance of food.' According
to Panini (in. 3, 139) it is used fawifimTJT ' when the action is supposed to pass by
unaccomplished ' (faW^f ^(ViwrFn Schol.)
a. LET. The Vedic mood, called Let by native grammarians, corresponds to
the subjunctive of the Greek language. In forming it a short a is inserted between
the conjugational stem and the termination, or if the conjugational stem ends in a,
this letter is lengthened ; at the same time the augment of the imperfect and aorist
is dropped, e.g. from han comes pres. ind. han-ti ; but subj. han-a-ti: from pat,
pres. ind. pata-tij subj. patd-ti: from as, impf. ind. dno-t ; subj. asnava-t, i.e.
a4no + a+t. So also, from pat, impf. ind. apata-t; subj. patd-t : from tn, aor. ind.
atdrit (for atdrish-t, cf. du. atdrish-va, &c.); subj. tdrish-a-t. It may also be
mentioned that in the A'tmane the final e may optionally be changed to ai, e. g.
mddayddhvai ; and that the subjunctive of the aorist sometimes takes the termina-
tions of the present tense without lengthening o, e. g. from va6 comes aor. ind.
avo6at, subj. vo6ati.
Observe The characteristic of Let is the insertion of a.
SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES.
892. Participles in Sanskrit often discharge the functions of the
tenses of verbs. They are constantly found occupying the place of
past and future tenses, and more especially of passive verbs.
893. Participles govern the cases of the verbs whence they are
derived ; as, 9JTV q$*J^ * seeing the fowler f SHUW ^T^ ' walking in
the forest ;' fn^ ^rRT^ * he did that ;' 314^ ^rrannf ' having heard a
noise ;' VI'vOM^ ^Mlrtl ^TTTt * he went away without drinking water/
a. In the case of passive participles, as will presently appear, the
agent is put in the instrumental case ; and the participle agrees with
the object, like an adjective.
Present Participles.
894. These are not so commonly used in Sanskrit composition as
past and future participles, but they are often idiomatically employed,
SYNTAX OP PARTICIPLES. 379
especially where in English the word 'while 5 or 'whilst* is intro-
duced; thus, ^ ^fi3paTT3Pir ^T^ ^M^*!^ 'whilst walking in the
southern forest, I beheld/ &c.
Past Passive Participle.
895. This most useful participle is constantly used to supply the
place of a perfect tense passive, sometimes in conjunction with the
auxiliary verbs as and b hu, ' to be ; 5 thus, ^rrf^l^sf^r ' I have been com-
manded; 5 3*f f^ftRTn: ^R: 'we were astonished; 5 ^"ftnftsftR 'I have
dwelt 5 (cf. 866). Of course the participle is made to agree adjec-
tively with the object in gender, number, and case, as in Latin ;
and the agent, which in English would probably be in the nomina-
tive, and in Latin in the ablative, becomes in Sanskrit instrumental.
Thus, in Sanskrit, the phrase ' I wrote a letter 5 would not be so
idiomatically expressed by ^Tf ^f fJ37TO, as by ITTT tiff f cjftnn^ * by
me a letter was written, 5 ' a me epistola scripta. 3 So again,
' by him the bonds were cut 5 is more idiomatic than
' he cut the bonds ; 5 and Fff 3-&\ ' by him it was said 5 is more
usual than TT T^re ' he said *. 5
a. This participle may often be used impersonally, when, if the
verb belong to the first group of classes, it may optionally be
gunated ; as, afari^ or sftfaff HW ' it is shone by the sun. 5 The
same holds good if the beginning of an action is denoted ; as, HTJ:
r: or mftfinn * the sun has begun to shine. 5
b. When a verb governs a double accusative case (see 846), one accusative will
be preserved after the past passive participle ; as, fT^Tf*ic^<u ^^1<."J\ TTW Tlf^rf '
' Das'aratha was asked for Rama by Vis'vamitra ;' TrftftlT ?fr^ S 7 ^ ' the sky has
been milked of your wish,' i. e. 'your wish has been milked out of the sky;' fr?ft
<JT( ^tiT'Ti ^ ' deprived by defeat in play of his kingdom and property ' (cf. 846.
Obs.)
896. But frequently the past passive participle is used for the active past
participle; in which case it may sometimes govern the accusative case, like a
perfect tense active ; thus, *T ^P^ ^u^J ' he ascended the tree ;' ^ fi? ^Titt or
t|j|rtt 'he went home;' 'WW Tf\W 'having crossed the road;' ^T
* This instrumental or passive construction, which is so prevalent in Sanskrit,
has been transferred from it to Hindi, Marathi, Gujarathi, and other dialects of
India. The particle ne in Hindi and Hindustani corresponds to the Sanskrit Tna,
the final letter of the commonest termination for the instrumental case, and can
never occasion any difficulty if so regarded.
3 c a
380 SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES.
' I have descended to the road ;' ^Rf fiO*^ ^RHW ' I reached
the city;' 'SII^T^ ^STTWT lff%T ^: 'we two have entered the hermitage.' But
observe, that its use for the active participle is generally, though not invariably,
restricted to intransitive verbs which involve the idea of 'motion,' and to a few
other neuter verbs. The following are other examples : ^f%*U ^r^fifiTTJ ' the
birds flew away ;' *T *pTt ' he died ;' ^HVfr f*T<^WJ ' the fowler returned ;' *T *?W^^
W^WJ 'he proceeded to eat;' ^T SHifisiirfi 'he had recourse to;' ^T T^"' 'he fell
asleep ;' ff ftsfiTTt ' they stood ;' ^fartt ' he lodged/
a. This participle has sometimes a present signification ; thus, TW?T ' stood '
may occasionally be translated ' standing,' tffa ' fearing,' ftJTff ' smiling,' "sllfVB
'embracing;' and all verbs characterized by the Anubandha f^T may optionally
use this participle in the sense of the present. See 75. e.
b. The neuter of the passive participle is sometimes used as a substantive ; thus,
' a gift ;' 3Tff*^ ' an excavation ;' "SJ^ ' food ;' *pV^ ' milk.'
Active Past Participle.
897. This participle is much used (especially in modern Sanskrit
and the writings of commentators) to supply the place of a perfect
tense active. It may govern the case of the verb ; as, Tf% ^JrfWT^ * he
heard everything ;' Tfj-fi ^fin^ 'snfcSffFcnnrl * the wife embraced her
husband ;' tT$ft ^T tficfc ^IRT^ 'he gave the fruit into the hand of
the king ; ' HIT ^ilT^fft ' she did that/ This participle may also be
used with the auxiliaries as and bhii, ' to be/ to form a compound
perfect tense; thus, UH ^rHi?^ ^fer 'he has done that;' Tfi
* he will have done that/
Indeclinable Past Participles.
. The sparing use made in Sanskrit composition of relative
pronouns, conjunctions, and connective particles, is mainly to be
attributed to these participles or gerunds, by means of which the
action of the verb is carried on, and sentence after sentence strung
together without the aid of a single copulative. They occur in
narration more commonly than any other kind of participle ; and
some of the chief peculiarities of Sanskrit syntax are to be traced
to the frequency of their occurrence.
899. They are generally used for the past tense, as united with a
copulative conjunction, and are usually translatable by the English
' having/ ' when/ ' after/ ' by/ see 555 ; thus, wT ^raFTpl ftrf^cl^ **
^ni ^^r: ^frf *r??T -^m FniT ^TRT ^PJf ^ ' having heard this, having
thought to himself " this is certainly a dog/' having left the goat,
SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES. 381
having bathed, he went to his own house/ In all these cases we
should use in English the past tense with a conjunction; thus,
* When he had heard this, he thought to himself that it must cer-
tainly he a dog. He then left the goat, and, when he had bathed,
went to his own house/
a. It is evident from the above example that the indeclinable participles often stand
in the place of a pluperfect tense, a tense which does not really exist in Sanskrit.
b. But although they always refer to something past, it should be observed that
they are frequently rendered in English by the present participle, as in the fifth
sentence of the story at 930.
900. Another, though less frequent use of them is as gerunds in do ; thus, TO!
^vrfol* H^ftfT TjftSJffn 'men become wise by reading the S&stras;'
^5rfi!M t VH ^r^T T?pqrT ' a wife is to be supported even by [or in] doing a
hundred wrong things ;' f^f ^nfT^ fTFJT <JH*^ ' What bravery is there in killing
a sleeping man ? '
Observe This participle is occasionally capable of a passive sense.
901. Note The termination WT tvd is probably an instrumental case, and bears
much of the character of an instrumental, as it is constantly found in grammatical
connexion with the agent in this case ; thus, ^: ^^^ fafciHM ffffft fV$IH: ' by
all the beasts having met together the lion was informed ;' ^%TC flf4*f
' by all having taken up the net let it be flown away.'
a. Another and stronger proof of its instrumental character is, that the particle
^T?5^, which governs an instrumental, is not unfrequently joined with the inde-
clinable participle ; thus, '3Tc5 H^Hf T, ' enough of eating,' is with equal correct-
ness of idiom expressed by ^Trj *$W, see 918. a.
Future Passive Participles.
902. The usual sense yielded by this gerundive participle is that
of * fitness' ' obligation,' ' necessity ' (see 568) ; and the usual con-
struction required is, that the agent on whom the duty or necessity
rests be in the instrumental, and the participle agree with the object ;
as, i^n H^f%T I fa\nn ' by you the attempt is not to be made/
a. Sometimes, however, the agent is in the genitive case; thus,
*T^?^ ^1^ ' boiled rice is to be eaten by Brahmans.' Compare 865, note.
903. Occasionally the future passive participle may yield a sense equivalent to
' worthy of,' 'deserving ,' as, B^fl 'deserving a whipping;' fiisjhT 'worthy of
being beaten ;' ^^H?! ' deserving death by pounding ;' T*fl ' worthy of death.'
904. If the verb govern two accusatives, one may be retained after the future
* As the Latin gerund is connected with the future part, in dus, so the Sanskrit
indeclinable part, in ya is probably connected with the future passive part, in ya.
382 SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES.
passive participle ; as, f^H^frtcS RTT ^ITftf *l^ ' the tear of the eye is to be
brought to assuagement by thee.'
905. Occasionally the neuter of this participle is used impersonally ; in which
case it does not agree with the object, but may govern it in the manner of the
verb ; thus, *nn ?fW "Tir^^, ' it is to be gone by me to the village,' for *niT Ifnft
J l*H*Mt. So also, r^TT WTT IpfafS^ ' by you it is to be entered into the assembly.'
a. The neuter ^(ViF 5 ^ (from >jj is thus used, and, in accordance with 841,
requires the instrumental after it, as well as before ; thus, WJTTftl HTWT **fq ci q*^
'by something it must become the cause,' i.e. 'there must be some cause;'
*Slf*iiT ^rc^(mff HfqrtM*^ 'a ruler ought to be possessed of discrimination;'
*PIT 1R ^Tj^T*!T ?fart*j^ ' I must become your companion ;' ^T*t*JT H^^T^-
^H HfW*q*^ ' the lady must be seated in the carriage.'
906. Similarly, the neuter of ^iw may be adverbially used, and impart at the
same time a passive sense to the infinitive ; thus, "T^Tt ^cw*^ ^nft^Pjfij^ 'Sff?!
for ~*m*i\ 31*4'. &c. 'the breeze is able to be embraced by the h'mbs ' (S'akuntala,
verse 60). Again, ^jw*^ "w^cfefHJ *?Tj| ^TrTTt 'the breezes are able to be drunk
by the hollowed palms ;' fw^jHTt tyw*| ^^TH*^ ' great successes are able to be
obtained.' Observe a similar use of *}W\ in T $15 vm*^ ^T^ ' his Highness is
not proper to be addressed' (Maha-bh. A'di-p. 27).
907. It is not uncommon to find this participle standing merely in the place of
a future tense, no propriety or obligation being implied, just as the past passive
participle stands in the place of a past tense ; thus, JjT^ ^Sfn T <gsrt&rf 1*T*ri-
' in all probability this hunter will go in quest of the deer's flesh,'
where JI^T*4*( k is used impersonally ; Wf Tggl 75^%: fefNl^ q*^*^ ' when the
people see you, they will utter some exclamation ;' Tfi^ iHJft TTTfif H^T TTT ^rf^if 93ft
'if the bh*d falls, then it shall be eaten by me.' See 930. xi.
908. The neuter of this participle is sometimes used infinitively or substantively,
as expressive merely of ' the indeterminate action ' of the verb, without implying
' necessity ' or ' fitness.' In such cases ^fff may be added ; thus, ^ff^ri^*^ ^fa
'the being about to deceive,' ' deception ' (Hitop. line 416) ; flrNn*^ ^fcT ' the being
about to die,' ' dying :' but not always ; as, aft fart <aj^ ' life.'
Participial Nouns of Agency.
909. The first of these nouns of agency (580) is constantly used in poetry as a
substitute for the present participle; implying, however, 'habitual action,' and
therefore something more than present time. It is sometimes found governing
the same case as the present participle, but united with the word which it governs
in one compound ; thus, $C^*I ' city-conquering ;' ffl^of^ ' speaking kind
words;' nrt^T! 'going in the water j' TOffTSf 'lake-born.' But the word
governed is often in the stem ; thus, TN^ft, ' light-making ' (see 69), from tejas
and kri; T'ft^C, ' mind-captivating,' from manas and hri (64); ^/J? 'giving
much,' from bahu and da ; VNIrM^i, ' self-knowing,' from dtman andjraa (57. 6).
SYNTAX OF CONJUNCTIONS, PREPOSITIONS, ADVERBS, &c. 383
910. The second (581) is sometimes, but rarely, found as a participle governing
the case of the verb; thus, ^T^t ^1H 'speaking a speech;' Wn*\nT ^Tt
'bearing the Ganges.'
911. The first and second species of the third (582.0.6), like the first, have
often the sense of present participles, and are then always united with the stem
of the word which they govern in one compound; thus, itl.ifV^, 'mind-
captivating,' from manas and hri; 4i5 4 *UVIli, 'effective of the business,' from
kdrya and sidh. They may sometimes govern the case of the verb whence they
are derived, and may then be compounded, or not, with the word which they
govern ; thus, m^mPn^ or IH*T rrf^ ' dwelling in a village ;' 'g^cSTf'T ^g<*;
' kisser of the buds ' (Ratnavali, p. 7).
SYNTAX OF CONJUNCTIONS, PREPOSITIONS, ADVERBS, &c.
Conjunctions.
912. ^ 'and' (727) is always placed after the word which it connects with
another, like que in Latin, and can never stand first in a sentence, or in the same
place as ' and ' in English ; thus, q(Y***( -s^rtl^M ^ ' walking round and looking.'
Unlike que, however, which must always follow the word of which it is the copu-
lative, it may be admitted to any other part of the sentence, being only excluded
from the first place ; thus, cH*J*^ ^if^RTi^ WT^ 1 ^ ^T U^T ^ m<H*^ ' and
having after a short time given birth to a pure son, as the eastern quarter (gives
birth to) the sun.'
a. Sometimes two fa's are used, when one may be redundant or equivalent to
the English ' both ;' or the two <fa's may be employed antithetically or disjunc-
tively, or to express the contemporaneousness of two events ; thus, ^ST&Q UfcfHI
' both day and night ;' H ^fc*!J*Hi (1fe|iT ^ ^ifiTc^t? 18 ^T ^HJ 1 ^ W ' Where
on the one hand is the frail existence of fawns? Where on the other are thy
arrows ?' "Bif^if ^ <|WT {pjl.HtflM ^ WlfiiC. ^fr^l TT TTTT ' no sooner
had she began to weep, than a shining apparition in female shape, having snatched
her up, departed' (S'akuntala, verse 131); TT^nig^ <ft^*ff ^^f^^if^^M! 'they
reached the ocean and the Supreme Being awoke' (from his sleep), Raghu-v. x. 6.
b. Observe When Hi, 'where?' is used as in the above example, it implies
' excessive incompatibility,' or 'incongruity.'
c. Sometimes *^ is used as an emphatic particle, and not as a copulative ; thus,
f&R ^ T*n M^utHcr^T ' Was she indeed married by me formerly ?'
913. inn 'so,' 'likewise' (727. 6), frequently supplies the place of *f; thus,
' both Anagata-vidhatri and Pratyutpanna-
mati ' (names of the two fish in Hitop. Book IV).
914. fl? 'for,' ^ 'but,' ^T 'or' (727. d, 728.0), like ^, are excluded from the
first place in a sentence ; thus, ^tT^ftfcf ^ft g:^ f^ ^?f^H^ ' for happiness
formerly scorned turns to misery;' fe^MM IJ 'but on the contrary;' F*rf W5f ^T
' either abandon her or take her.'
915. if^ 'if and ^ 'if ' (727.6) may govern the potential or conditional (see
384 SYNTAX OF CONJUNCTIONS, PEEPOSITIONS, ADVERBS, &C.
891), but are also used with the indicative; thus, ij
'if he live, he will behold prosperity;' tff^ *f*TT U^THT^ ^ftcT 'if there is need
of me ;' 1JWT ^T^ ^ft?H$I "^ ^ft^J ' If avarice were abandoned, who would be
poor?'
Prepositions and Adverbs.
916. Prepositions often govern cases of nouns. See 729, 730.
917. The following examples illustrate the use of adverbs in con-
struction with cases of nouns, as explained at 731.
TTCT S|*ft 5 ir ftrf^TI^ 'flesh thrown before the dog;' fT^UT'^ ^W 'under the
trees ;' TTTT iNWri'lri ' below the navel ;' ^pf*r ^V^TIl^ ' beneath the tree ;'
"STHnTT^ ' after eating ;' W&{ <sjrtW ' without fruit ;'
' without the consent of her husband ;' V1t*i ^T*l*^, or more usually VTT"J*^, 'for
the sake of wealth;' fa^TT^ ^%TF 'after marriage;' ^TcJT ^T^RT^ ^TWT*^
' after collecting the bones :' TUft, with genitive, occurs rather frequently, and
with some latitude of meaning; thus, *TW^ TTft* above the navel;' %?^ 1T9T
^ft ^mtiT ' the lion fell upon him ;' H*T TTft fVfclf<.fft ' changed in his feelings
towards me;' !f3 TTK SW^l^iR^TCl' 'not behaving properly towards thee;'
l ' angry with his son ;' TTH^ 'gil^ ' above the navel ;' TT^^
' after that period ;' $N(*TO^ "liSel^' after a year,' i. e. ' above a year having
expired ;' T ^<!5i^ ^ff ^iwl B7T ^Ttrf^frftJ^t ' the restraint of crime cannot be
made without punishment ;' W3 ^T^IrT ' on thy account ;' TT^TTt ^W or ITi^lT 'for
her sake;' ^Tf^^TTT ^f^^!T*T 'to the right of the garden;' ffPsfaw 'on that
account/ ^sfH^T^rfliT TT?^' after saluting ;' sj *+j i efc tpgrj^ f after us ; ' ^TH'il ^t*T
' before bathing ;' f^^T^TTf ^5^ ' before marriage ;' ^T^f5T<*t 4 f<!.i'nT Wfffl 'from
the moment of seeing (him) ;' WTOjfif 'from birth ;' ifflJ JPffa 'from that time
forward;' <3Mn*4lT < i^ JT^fff 'from the time of investiture;' ITT^ fn^^nn^' before
telling ;' JJTT ^H**Trn ' before investiture ;' HVsnTTTT HT^ ' before eating :' IfTaJT
may take an accusative ; as, UTT IfT^JJf^'HTt ' before twelve years are over ;' ^TH 1
fJI 'for a hundred births;' ^Enrfa^T Miqr^' up to the serpent's hole;'
creeping out of the hole;' ^W f^*TT 'without cause;'
f%TF ' without fault;' yif^f^'^rMf ri i'sFI! 'without injury to living
beings ;' ftnjt 5R^I^IT^ VT^ ^T^% 'he receives money from his father;' fW y*isf*^
' in my presence/ *J$U ^Jr)^ 'near the king ;' "$&*$ ^ ' along with his son :'
^rr^ni^may take an instrumental; as, ^Wt TTl^T?^ 'before others;' ^ 4 ^if^: 'for
the sake of a son.'
918. 'Wc?*^, 'enough,' is used with the instrumental, with the force of a pro-
hibitive particle ; as, 'STcS ^l^JTT ' away with fear,' ' do not fear.'
a. It is also used with the indeclinable participle ; as, 'SoJ ^f^FTT ' enough of
weeping !' TOcS f^T^ ' enough of consideration !' see also 901. a.
Obs. ^tj is used in the same way ; e. g. ^^ f f^T = ^c5 ojif^T (Pan. m. 4, 18).
SYNTAX OP CONJUNCTIONS, PREPOSITIONS, ADVERBS, &c. 385
b. It is sometimes followed by an infinitive ; as, T
' I am not able to turn back my heart.'
919. *n^*^ 'even,' 'merely,' at the end of a compound is declinable; as, T^-
^T^T^ tf ^TfiT ' he does not even give an answer ;' T ^i^*ii^Trr HTT 3 ^ ' one ought
not to be afraid of mere noise ;' 3i<(^*ii<a<u ' by mere sound ;' mH.HId*!! ' by mere
words;' '^fiJHItf ^^ 'immediately on the mere utterance of the speech/
920. Tr*TT and "JT^n, when used as correlatives, are equivalent to the English ' so
that,' and the Latin ita ut; thus, TTT ^"ntf" nJTflf inn *nn GTl^*^ ' I must so
act that my master awake,' i. e. ' I must do something to make my master awake.'
So also, c^ f *TRTfa Tl^JT 'J^.TSJT ^frtfo ' Do not you know that I keep watch
in the house ?'
i e^i*^, and TTT^P^ may be used in the same way ; thus, TTT^I*^
T f frf%^ f^^TIT TT^ST m./5K. J l*H*^ ' nothing is so opposed to length
of life as intercourse with the wife of another.'
b. *n^, as well as WT, is used for 'that;' thus, 'Wf 'Jinft Vnft ^ ^Rlfff
^T^T *T*5fTO: f^HTW 'this is a new doctrine, that having killed an enemy remorse
should be felt.'
921. ftR*(, 'why?' may often be regarded as a mark of interrogation which is
not to be translated, but affects only the tone of voice in which a sentence is
uttered ; as, 1irrt < HM*U f^i (ff'yi! ^rl(ri ' Is any one honoured for mere birth ?'
(Cf. 837. a.)
a. It sometimes has the force of ' whether ;' as, stHlWT ftF^ ^*J~* ^^^ ^ *T
'i %n'fa ^^H^hl ^T 'let it be ascertained whether he is worthy to receive so
large a salary, or whether he is unworthy ;' Tsft '5ff% faf *J*lT*J^ ^H'TT *T ^T
the minister knows whether the king is meritorious or not.'
922. ^(technically vati) as a suffix of comparison or similitude (724) may be
compounded with a nominal stem, which if uncompounded would be in the accusa-
tive case ; thus, *iirltf JJH^ ^T^^^ ' shewing himself as if dead ;' ^U^*(3 ^
' he regards it as a wonder.' Also in the locative or genitive case ; thus,
rnSTTJ 'a wall in Srughna like that in Mathura.' According to
Panini v. i, 115, it is used for the instrumental after adjectives of comparison,
when some action is expressed ; thus, dUMUR ^^4*\ ^HftlT (see 826) may be
rendered i*y^ ^TVlff, but it would not be correct to say jjcfl^ ^<9: for
923. The negative T is sometimes repeated to give intensity to an affirmation ;
thus, T ! qa^PiT 'he will not not say'=^TS?rfiT *T^ 'he will certainly say.'
924. The indeclinable participle sC^q, ' having pointed out,' is sometimes used
adverbially to express ' on account of,' ' with reference to,' ' towards,' and governs
an accusative ; thus, fsff^ 'Sfj^Jf ' On account of what ?' 71^ 3f^$1 ' with refer-
ence to him.'
925. The indeclinable participle ^TFT?*T, ' having begun,' is used adverbially to
express from,' ' beginning with,' and may either govern an ablative or be placed
3 D
386 ON THE USE OF THE PARTICLE
after a nominal stem ; thus, fKHd*LIT^ ^TTT*T "WS *TRi^ ' from the time of
invitation to the time of the S'raddha.' fJTH r?HllRl would be equally correct.
926. The interjections fa^T and ^T require the accusative ; as, fV^i ^lftn?H
'Woe to the wretch!' and the vocative interjections the vocative case; as, >Ttt
iflTO'O traveller!'
a. Adverbs are sometimes used for adjectives in connexion with substantives ;
as, WW W?5Hn^ for fTOT ^TcJT^T^ ' in that hall ;' ^HTT^ gCT^K for
' among the principal ministers.'
ON THE USE OF THE PARTICLE ^fif.
927. In Sanskrit the obliqua oratio is rarely admitted ; and when
any one relates the words or describes the sentiments or thoughts of
another, the relator generally represents him as speaking the actual
words, or thinking the thoughts, in his own person.
a. In such cases the particle jjfrT (properly meaning 'so,' 'thus') is often placed
after the words quoted, and may be regarded as serving the purpose of inverted
commas; thus, f^PRT ^B^J ^T^"^ ^HR[ ^ftT 'the pupils said, "We have
accomplished our object;"' not, according to the English or Latin idiom, 'the
pupils said that they had accomplished their object.' So also, ^^T^iTfr ^frT W5T
HBT 'your husband calls you " quarrelsome," ' where eftoJ^^TT^ is in the nomina-
tive case, as being the actual word supposed to be spoken by the husband himself
in his own person. So again, *J*fll^ fVnii'WjJ'ni ^fff *lW tjfwjft Jffi ^TJ
Tl^Tf*iT 'all the birds praise you in my presence, saying, "He is an object of
confidence," ' where the particle ^fff is equivalent to ' saying,' and the word
ff 1 SI^r*J*W is not in the accusative, to agree with ^**il^, as might be expected,
but in the nominative, as being the actual word supposed to be uttered by the
birds in their own persons. In some cases, however, the accusative is retained
before ^fff, as in the following example (Manu n. 153): ^f$f ^Tc?^ ^fff ^T^t
' they call an ignorant man " child." ' But in the latter part of the same line it
passes into a nominative ; as, flrTT sffW *JW jj *i*a<^ ' but (they call) a teacher of
scripture "father." '
928. In narratives and dialogues ^TT is often placed redundantly at the end of
a speech. Again, it may have reference merely to what is passing in the mind
either of another person or of one's self. When so employed, it is usually joined
with the indeclinable participle, or of some other part of a verb signifying to
think,' to suppose,' &c., and may be translated by the English conjunction ' that,'
to which, in fact, it may be regarded as equivalent ; thus, R%5\ Vii
'having ascertained that it is a monkey who rings the bell;'
^rfan ^fa idir^ W^ ' his idea was that an increase of wealth ought
again to be made;' >F*fts*i ^TOT ^ITT'^ft >TRT ^fif RTlir ftTVn^ 'reflecting in
his mind that I am happy in possessing such a wife.' The accusative is also
EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION AND PARSING. 387
retained before ^HT in this sense; as, fiT^ ^flT *TT3TT 'thinking that he was dead.'
In all these examples the use of ^fff indicates that a quotation is made of the
thoughts of the person at the time when the event took place.
929. Not unfrequently the participle saying,' 'thinking,' 'supposing,' &c., is
omitted altogether, and ^f?T itself involves the sense of such a participle; as,
"^TcStsfa T ^TVHflT^rt W$**1 ^TTT fTO 'a king, even though a child, is not to
be despised, saying to one's self, "He is a mortal;" ' tii^i^is ^T f^J^C ^fa ^T
J?nT ^Tw^in ' either through affection or through compassion towards me,
saying to yourself, "What a wretched man he is !" ' ^nf "^U^J I ^HI $lTc^c5 ^flT
qi.ufwM ^if^^rT ' There's a boar ! Yonder's a tiger ! so crying out, it is
wandered about (by us) in the paths of the woods.'
CHAPTER X.
EXERCISES- IN TRANSLATION AND PARSING.
930. STORY OF THE SAGE AND THE MOUSE, FROM THE HITOPADESA,
TRANSLATED AND PARSED.
* There is in the sacred grove of the sage Gautama a sage named
Mahatapas (Great-devotion)/
.
c\
* I * By him, in the neighbourhood of his hermitage, a young
mouse, fallen from the beak of a crow, was seen.'
m. rTcft ^rr
* Then by that sage, touched with compassion, with grains of wild
rice it was reared.'
v.
<^j? I ' Soon after this, a cat was observed by the sage
running after the mouse to devour it.'
v. ?f
H^ll f^nnFy* RfT * I ' Perceiving the mouse terrified,
by that sage, through the efficacy of his devotion, the mouse was
changed into a very strong cat.'
3 D 2
388 EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION AND PARSING.
vi. ^ "R3T<5: ^IRK t^ntrf I TTrf:
O O ""s
* The cat fears the dog : upon that it was changed into a dog. Great
is the dread of the dog for a tiger : then it was changed into a tiger/
* Now the sage regards even the tiger as not differing at all from
the mouse/
'Then all the persons residing in the neighbourhood, seeing the
tiger, say/
JX. ^Rrf JjrTT TjFS ^ninf 'fT: I 'By this
sage this mouse has been brought to the condition of a tiger/
x. t^jfT^ ^RT *T ^ITO ^T^sf^nT^I 'The tiger
overhearing this, being uneasy, reflected.'
x.
I * As long as it
shall be lived by this sage, so long this disgraceful story of my
original condition will not die away.'
xii. ?f?T UHIojM *|ft! fTnT JRJpfif: I 'Thus reflecting,
he prepared (was about) to kill the sage.'
I ' The sage discovering his intention,
saying, "Again become a mouse," he was reduced to (his former
state of) a mouse.'
931. Observe in this story: 1st, the simplicity of the style; 2ndly,
the prevalence of compound words ; 3rdly, the scarcity of verbs ;
4thly, the prevalence of the past passive participle with the agent
in the instrumental case for expressing indefinite past time, in lieu
of the past tense active with the nominative : see 895, with note.
932. i. Asti, ' there is,' 3rd sing. pres. of rt. as, cl. 2 (584). Gautamasya, ' of
Gautama,' gen. m. (103). Munes, ' of the sage,' gen. m. (no) : final s remains by
EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION AND PARSING. 389
62. Tapo-vane, 'in the sacred grove' (lit. 'in the penance-grove'), genitively
dependent comp. (743); the first member formed by the stem tapas, penance,'
as becoming o by 64 ; the last member, by the loc. case of vana, ' grove,' neut.
(104). Mahd-tapd, 'having great devotion' (164. a), relative form of descriptive
comp. (766) ; the first member formed by mahd (substituted for mahat, 778), 'great ;'
the last member, by the nom. case masc. of the neuter noun tapas, ' devotion '
(164. a) : final s dropped by 66. a. Ndma, ' by name,' an adverb (713. b). Munih,
' a sage,' nom. masc. (no): final s passes into Visarga by 63. a.
ii. Tena, by him,' instr. of pron. tad (220). A'srama-sannidhdne, in the
neighbourhood of his hermitage,' genitively dependent comp. (743) ; the first
member formed by the nominal stem dsrama, 'hermitage;' the last member, by
the loc. case of sannidhdna, 'neighbourhood,' neut. (104). The final a of tena
blends with the initial d of dsrama by 31. Mushika-sdvakah, 'a young mouse,' or
'the young of a mouse,' genitively dependent comp. (743); formed from the
nominal stem miishika, ' a mouse,' and the nom. of idvaka, ' the young of any
animal ' (103) : final s becomes Visarga by 63. Kdka~mukhdd, 'from the beak (or
mouth) of a crow,' genitively dependent comp. ; formed from the nominal stem
kdka, ' a crow,' and the abl. of mukha, ' mouth,' neut. (104) ; t being changed to d
by 45. Bhrashto, fallen,' nom. sing. masc. of the past pass. part, of rt. bhrans"
(544. a) : as changed to o by 64. Drishtah, ' seen,' nom. sing. masc. of the past
pass. part, of rt. dri: final s becomes Visarga by 63. a.
iii. Tato, 'then,' adv. (719) : as changed to o by 64. Dayd-yuktena, 'touched
with compassion,' instrumentally dependent comp. (740) ; formed from the nominal
stem dayd, compassion,' and the instr. of yukta, ' endowed with,' past pass. part.
of rt. yuj (670). Tena, see ii. above. Munind, 'by the sage,' instr. m. (no).
Ntvdra-kanaih, ' with grains of wild rice,' genitively dependent comp. (743) ; formed
from the nominal stem nivdra, ' wild rice,' and the instr. pi. of kana .- final s
becomes Visarga by 63. Samvardhitah, 'reared,' nom. sing, of past pass. part, of
causal of vridh with sam (549) : final s becomes Visarga by 63. a.
iv. Tad-anantaram, 'soon after this,' compound adverb; formed with the pro-
nominal stem tad, 'this' (220), and the adverb anantaram, 'after' (731, 917).
Mushikam, ace. m. (103). Khdditum, 'to eat,' infinitive of rt. khdd (458, 868).
Anudhdvan, pursuing after,' 'running after,' nom. sing. masc. of the pres. part.
Par. of rt. dhdv, ' to run,' with anu, ' after ' (524). Viddlo, ' a cat,' nom. case masc.
(103): as changed to o by 64. Munind, see iii. above. Drishtah, see ii.
v. Tarn, ace. case masc. of pron. tad (220), used as a definite article, see 795.
Mushikam, see iv. Bhitam, ' terrified,' ace. sing. masc. of the past pass. part, of rt.
f f
bh{($32). Alokya, perceiving,' indec. part, of rt. lok, with prep, d (559). Tapah-
prabhdvdt, ' through the efficacy of his devotion' (814), genitively dependent comp.
(743) 5 formed by the nominal stem tapas, ' devotion,' s being changed to Visarga
by 63, and the abl. case of prabhdva, noun of the first class, masc. (103). Tena,
see ii. Munind, see iii. Mushiko, nom. m. (103) : as changed to oby 64. Balishtho,
'very strong,' nom. masc. of the superlative of balin, 'strong' (see 193): fl*
changed to o by 64. Viddlah, see iv : final s becomes Visarga by 63. Kritah,
390 EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION AND PARSINGS
'changed,' 'made,' nom. sing. masc. of past pass. part, of rt. kri (682): final s
becomes Visarga by 63. a.
vi. <S, nom. case of tad (220), used as a definite article (795) : final s dropped
by 67. Viddlah, see iv. Kukkurdd, 'the dog ' (103), abl. after a verb of 'fearing'
(855) : t changed to d by 45. Bibheti, ' fears,' 3rd sing. pres. of rt. bM, cl. 3 (666).
Tatah, 'upon that,' adv. (719): as changed to ah by 63. Kukkurah, 'the dog,'
nom. m. (103) : final s becomes Visarga by 63. Kritah, see v. Kukkurasya, 'of
the dog,' gen. masc. (103). Vydghrdn, 'for the tiger' (103), abl. after a noun of
'fear' (814. e) : t changed to n by 47. Mahad, 'great' (142), nom. case, sing,
neut. : t changed to d by 45. Bhayam, 'fear,' nom. neut. (104). Tad-anantaram,
see iv. Vydghrah, nom. case : final s becomes Visarga by 63. Kritah, see v.
vii. Atha, now,' inceptive particle (727. c). Vydghram, ace. case. Api, even,'
adv. Mushika-nirvisesham, ' as not differing at all from the mouse,' relative form
of dependent comp. (762) ; formed from the nominal stem mushika, and the ace.
of visesha, difference,' with nir prefixed : or it may be here taken adverbially, see
776. Pasyati, 3rd sing. pres. of rt. dris, cl. I (604). Munih, see i.
viii. Atah, 'then,' adv. (719). Same, 'all,' pronominal adj., nom. plur. masc.
(237). Tatra-sthd, 'residing in the neighbourhood,' comp. resembling a locatively
dependent; formed from the adverb tatra (720), 'there,' 'in that place,' and the
nom. plur. masc. of the participial noun of agency of rt. sthd, to remain' (587) :
final s dropped by 66. a. Jands, 'persons,' nom. pi. masc. (103) : final s remains
by 62. Tarn, ace. of pron. tad (220), used as a definite article (795). Vydghram,
' tiger,' ace. masc. (103). Drishtvd, ' having seen,' indec. past part, of rt. dris (556).
Vadanti, ' they say,' 3rd pi. pres. of rt. vad, cl. i (599).
ix. Anena, 'by this,' instr. of pron. idam (224). Munind, see iii. Mushiko,
nom. masc. : as changed to o by 64. a. Ayam, 'this,' nom. masc. (224) : the initial
a cut off by 64. a. Vydghratdm, the condition of a tiger,' fern, abstract noun (105),
ace. case, formed from vydghra, ' a tiger,' by the suffix td (80. LXII). Nttah,
' brought,' nom. sing. masc. of past pass. part, of rt. ni (532).
x. Eta6, this,' ace. neut. of etad (223) : / changed to 6 by 49. Chrutvd, 'over-
hearing,' indec. part, of rt. sru (676, 556) ; see 49. Vydghrah, nom. case : final s
becomes Visarga by 63. Sa-vyatho, ' uneasy,' relative form of indeclinable comp.,
formed by prefixing sa to the fern, substantive vyathd (769) : as changed to o by
64. a. Atintayat, 'reflected,' 3rd sing. impf. of tint, cl. 10 (641) : the initial a cut
off by 64. a.
xi. Ydvad, as long as,' adv. (713. a): t changed to d by 45. Anena, see ix.
Jfoitavyam, ' to be lived,' nom. neut. of the fut. pass. part, of rt. jiv (569, 905. a,
907). Tdvad, so long,' adv. correlative to ydvat (713. a). Idam, 'this,' nom. neut.
of the demonstrative pron. at 224. Mama, ' of me,' gen. of pron. aham, ' I ' (218).
Svarupdkhydnam, ' story of my original condition,' genitively dependent comp. (743) ;
formed from the nominal stem svarupa, 'natural form' (see 232. b), and the nom.
of dkhydna, neut. (104): m retained by 60. Akirtti-karam, 'disgraceful,' accusa-
tively dependent comp. (739) ; formed from the nominal stem akirtti, ' disgrace,'
and the nom. neut. of the participial noun of agency kara, ' causing,' from kri, ' to
EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION AND PARSING. 391
do' (580). Na, 'not,' adv. (7 17. a). Paldyishyate, 'will die away,' 3rd sing. 2nd
fut. A'tra. of the compound verb paldy, formed by combining rt. i or ay with prep.
para (783. n).
xii. Iti, 'thus,' adv. (717.6; see also 928). Samdlofya, 'reflecting,' indec.
part, of the verb sam-d-lo6 (559), formed by combining rt. Io6 with the preps, sum
and a (784). Munim, ace. case. Hantum, to kill,' infinitive of rt. han (458, 868,
654). Samudyatah, ' prepared,' nom. sing. masc. of past pass. part, of sam-ud-yam,
formed by combining rt. yam with the preps, sam and ud (545).
xiii. Munis, nom. case : final remains by 62. Tasya, ' of him,' gen. of tad
(220). Cikirshitam, 'intention,' ace. neut. of past pass. part, of desid. of rt. kri,
to do' (550, 502), used as a substantive (896. b). Jndtvd, discovering,' indec.
part, of rt. jhd (556, 688). Punar, 'again,' adv. (717.6): r remains by fi.d.
Mushiko, nom. case : as changed to o by 64. Bhava, become,' 2nd sing. impv.
of rt. bhu (585). Ity answers to inverted commas, see 927. a : the final i changed to
y by 34- Uktvd, ' saying,' indec. part, of rt. va6 (556, 650). Mushika, nom. case :
final s dropped by 66. Eva, ' indeed,' adv. (717).
SENTENCES TO BE TRANSLATED AND PARSED.
933' Note The numbers over the words in the following sentences
refer to the rules of the foregoing grammar.
220 783. i, 602 220
^ W
220 ^> 783. k ^s 676 676 218 * 687
7T ^TTRSJnT I KT
219^ ^ 587 218 f 783. j, 587 220
fH I "3RH ^nTBTR I ^
^> 783.h,66ls f ~+. 6BS 219
I ^? T^PfniiJ I ?^H ^^VT? I H ^ I
663 233 233 607
^s ^s 646 655 ^. ^
H ^^rTT^I TO HlMrf I H
644 ^ 219 ^ ^ f* 228 *y 668. a
;E rrtH i ^TTTH: t^rnt^ HT^^TH
218 311.S69-V *
r^T?
N
311.569 *s ^S 896. b
668. a 218, 896. b 668. a 219 896. b A 589
I
ft tfr i -z ^r
889 ^s 714 655 A 106 <^ 889 438. e 882 85S .- 666
H TT:
882 ^ 769. b 692
TIT
392 SCHEME OF THE MORE COMMON SANSKRIT METRES.
783. j
783. p
II
717. f
SCHEME OF THE MOKE COMMON SANSKEIT METRES.
934. Metres are divided into two grand classes : i. Varna-vritta,
2. Mdtrd-vritta. The first has two subdivisions, A and B.
CLASS I. Varna-vritta.
A. Metres, consisting of two half -verses, determined by the number
of SYLLABLES in the Pdda or quarter-verse.
Note It may be useful to prefix to the following schemes of metres a list of
technical prosodial terms : *H^ = the fourth part of a verse ; TI<^T = an instant or
prosodial unit = a short syllable ; TIT = four Matras ; *lflT = a pause ; ^J^\ or T
= a long syllable ( ) ; WQ or 75 = a short syllable (w) ; *PT = a spondee ( -- ) ;
tf& = a pyrrhic (w w) j TH = a trochee ( v->) ; TJT = an iambus (w ) ; T = a
molossus ( --- ) j >T = a dactyl ( w w) ; T = a tribrach (^ w w) ; tj a bacchic
(\j -- ) ; Tl = a cretic ( v- ) ; ^ = an anapaest (w \- ) j H = an anti-
bacchic ( -- v-)j T=an amphibrach (w w).
or Anushtubh (8 syllables to the Pada or quarter-verse).
935. The commonest of all the infinite variety of Sanskrit metres
is the Sloka or Anushtubh. This is the metre which chiefly prevails
in the great epic poems.
It consists of four quarter-verses of 8 syllables each or two lines of 16 syllables,
SCHEME OF THE MORE COMMON SANSKRIT METRES. 393
but the rules which regulate one line apply equally to the other ; so that it is only
necessary to give the scheme of one line, as follows :
9 10 ii 12 13 14 15 16
Note The mark denotes either long or short.
The ist, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, pth, roth, nth, and i2th syllables may be either long or
short. The 8th, as ending the Pada, and the i6th, as ending the half-verse, are
also common. Since the half-verse is considered as divided into two parts at the
8th syllable, it is an almost universal rule that this syllable must end a word,
whether simple or compound *.
The 5th syllable ought always to be short. The 6th and 7th should be long ;
but instances are not unusual in the Maha-bharata of the 6th being short, in which
case the 7th should be short also. But occasional variations from these last rules
occur.
The last 4 syllables form two iambics; the I3th being always short, the I4th
always long, and the i5th always short.
Every S'loka, or couplet of two lines, ought to form a complete sentence in
itself, and contain both subject and predicate. Not unfrequently, however, in the
Ramayana and Maha-bharata, three lines are united to form a triplet.
936. In the remaining metres determined by the number of sylla-
bles in the Pada, each Pada is exactly alike (sama) ; so that it is
only necessary to give the scheme of one Pada or quarter- verse.
In printed books each Pada, if it consist of more than 8 syllables, is often made
to occupy a line.
937. Trishtubh (11 syllables to the Pada or quarter- verse).
Of this there are 22 varieties. The commonest are
i 2345678 9 10 ii
938. Indra-vajrd, ^ w w \^>
i 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ii
939. Upendra-vajrd, w ^ w w w
There is generally a caesura at the 5th syllable.
Note The above 2 varieties are sometimes mixed in the same stanza; in which
case the metre is called Upajdti or Akhydnaki.
i 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ii II
940. Rathoddhatd, v_/ v^^w w w
941. Jagati (12 syllables to the Pada or quarter-verse).
Of this there are 30 varieties. The commonest are
* There are, however, rare examples of compound words running through a
whole line.
S3
394 SCHEME OF THE MORE COMMON SANSKRIT METRES.
i 2345678 9 10 ii 12
942. Vanfa-sthavila, w w w w w w *
123456789101112
943. Druta-vilambita, ^wv^ ww wv^ w II
944. Atijagati (13 syllables to the Pada or quarter- verse).
Of this there are 16 varieties. The commonest are
i 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ii 12 13
945. Manju-bhdshint, v_/ w w w\^w w w
i 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ii 12 13
946. Praharshim, wwww w ^
i 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ii 12 13
947. Rutird or Prabhdvatt, w w v^w^vy w w
948. Sakvari or Sakkari or Sarkari (14 syllables to the Pada).
Of this there are 20 varieties. The commonest is
i a 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ii 12 13 14
949. Vasanta-tilakd, w v-v-w ww w
950. Atisakvari or Atikakkari (15 syllables to the Pada).
Of this there are 18 varieties. The commonest is
1234567
9 10 ii 12 13 14 15
951. Mdlini or Mdninf,
There is a caesura at the 8th syllable.
952. Ashti (16 syllables to the Pada or quarter-verse).
Of this there are 12 varieties ; none of which are common.
953. Atyashti (17 syllables to the Pada or quarter- verse).
Of this there are 1 7 varieties. The commonest are
i 2 3 4 5 6 I 7 8 9 10 ii 12 13 14 15 16 17
954. S'ikharim, w |owwwv-> ww^
Caesura at the 6th syllable.
1234
955- Manddkrdntd,
Caesura at the 4th and loth syllables.
5 6 7 8 9 jo ii 12 13 14 15 16 17
123456
7 8 9 10
ii 12 13 14 15 16 17
956. Harini,
Caesura at the 6th and roth syllables.
957. Dhriti (18 syllables to the Pada or quarter- verse).
Of this there are 17 varieties, one of which is found in the Raghu-vans'a
1 2 345 6 7 8 9 10 ii 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 II
958. Mahd-mdlikd, \j ^ v ^ v v ^ w w v- -r II
* The mark is meant to shew that the last syllable is long at the end of the
P&da or quarter-verse, but long or short at the end of the half- verse.
SCHEME OF THE MORE COMMON SANSKRIT METRES. 395
959. Atidhriti (19 syllables to the Pada or quarter-verse).
Of this there are 13 varieties. The commonest is
i 2345678 9 10 ii 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 ||
960. S'drdula-vikrtdita, w ^ <u ^ v v ^ v> II
Caesura at the i2th syllable.
961. Kriti (20 syllables to the Pada or quarter-verse).
Of these there are 4 varieties ; none of which are common.
962. Prakriti (21 syllables to the Pada or quarter-verse).
1234567
8 9 10 ii 12 13 14
963. Sragdhard, ---- w --
Caesura at the 7th and i4th syllables.
964. Of the remaining metres determined by the number of syllables in the
Pada, Akriti has 22 syllables, and includes 3 varieties; Vikriti 23 syllables,
6 varieties ; Sankriti 24 syllables, 5 varieties ; Atikriti 25 syllables, 2 varieties ;
Utkriti 26 syllables, 3 varieties; and Dandaka is the name given to all metres
which exceed Utkriti in the number of syllables.
965. There are two metres, called Gdyatri and Ushnih, of which the first has
only 6 syllables to the quarter- verse, and includes ii varieties; the second has
7 syllables to the quarter-verse, and includes 8 varieties.
a. When the Pada is so short, the whole verse is sometimes written in one line.
b. Observe, that great license is allowed in metres peculiar to the Vedas ; thus
in the
966. Gdyatri,
which may be regarded as consisting of a triplet of 3 divisions of 8 syllables each,
or of 6 feet of 4 syllables each, generally printed in one line, the quantity of each
syllable is very irregular. The following verse exhibits the most usual quantities :
but even in the b verse of each division the quantity may vary.
B. Metres^ consisting of two half -verses, determined by the number
of SYLLABLES* in the HALF-VERSE (each half-verse being alike,
ardha-sama}.
967. This class contains 7 genera, but no varieties under each
genus. Of these the commonest are
* This class of metres is said to be regulated by the number of feet or Matras in
the half-verse, in the same way as class II. But as each half-verse is generally dis-
tributed into fixed long or short syllables, and no option is allowed for each foot
between a spondee, anapaest, dactyl, proceleusmaticus, and amphibrach^ it will
obviate confusion to regard this class as determined by syllables, like class I. A.
3 E 2
396 SCHEME OF THE MOKE COMMON SANSKRIT METRES.
968.
Validity a (21 syllables to the half- verse).
1234567
9 10
II 12 13 14 15 l6 17 18 19 30 21
There is a caesura at the loth syllable.
969. Aupaffhandasika (23 syllables to the half-verse).
The scheme of this metre is the same as the last, with a long syllable added after
the loth and last syllable in the line; the caesura being at the nth syllable.
970.
Pushpitngrd (25 syllables to the half-verse).
1234567
9 10 ii 12
13 14 15 l6 17 l8 19 20 21 23 23 24 35
There is a caesura at the i2th syllable.
CLASS II. Mdtrd-vritta, consisting of two half-verses, determined by
the number of FEET in the whole verse (each foot containing
generally four Mdtrds).
971. Note Each foot is supposed to consist of four Matras or instants, and a
short syllable is equivalent to one instant, a long syllable to two. Hence only such
feet can be used as are equivalent to four Matras ; and of this kind are the dactyl
( w w), the spondee ( ), the anapaest (w ^ ), the amphibrach (^ w), and
the proceleusmaticus (w w \j \^) ; any one of which may be employed.
Of this class of metres the commonest is the
972. Aryti or Gdthd.
Each half-verse consists of seven and a half feet; and each foot contains four
Matras, excepting the 6th of the second half- verse, which contains only one, and
is therefore a single short syllable. Hence there are 30 Matras in the first half-
verse, and 27 in the second. The half-foot at the end of each half-verse is
generally, but not always, a long syllable ; the 6th foot of the first half-verse
must be either an amphibrach or proceleusmaticus; and the ist, 3rd, 5th, and 7th
feet must not be amphibrachs. The caesura commonly takes place at the end of
the 3rd foot in each half-verse, and the measure is then sometimes called Pathyd.
The following are a few examples :
^
3
4
5
6
7
o o
o o
o w
o o -
V-* W
o
3
4
567
o
o o
w w
o o -
o o
w
wo
3
4
5
6
/
o o
w w
w w
o o
wo
w
ACCENTUATION.
397
I
{ vlr
trA"
973. The Udgiti metre only differs from the Aryd in inverting the half-verses,
and placing the short half-verse, with 27 Matras, first in order.
974. There are three other varieties : In the Upagfti, both half-verses consist of
27 Matras; in the Gtti, both consist of 30 Matras; and in the Arydgiti, of 32.
ACCENTUATION.
975. Accentuation (svara, 'tone') in Sanskrit is only marked in the Vedas.
Probably the original object of the marks used was to denote that peculiar change
in the ordinary intonation practised in reciting the hymns, which consisted in the
occasional raising of the voice to a higher pitch than the usual monotone. Only
three names for different kinds of accent or tone are generally recognized by
grammarians ; viz. i. Uddtta, ' raised,' i. e. the elevated tone or high pitch, marked
in Roman writing by the acute accent ; 2. An-uddtta, ' not raised,' i. e. the accent-
less tone ; 3. Svarita, sounded,' i. e. the moderate tone, neither high nor low, but
a combination of the two (samdhdra, Pan. i. 2, 32), which is produced in the
following manner : In pronouncing the syllable immediately following the high-
toned syllable, the voice unable to lower itself abruptly to the level of the low
intonation, is sustained in a tone not as high as the uddtta, and yet not so low as
the an-uddtta. A syllable uttered with this mixed intonation is said to be svarita,
sounded.' These three accents, according to native grammarians, are severally
produced, through intensifying (dydma), relaxing (visrambha), and throwing out the
voice (dkshepa); and these operations are said to be connected with an upward,
downward, and horizontal motion (tiryag-gamana) of the organs of utterance,
which may be illustrated by the movements of the hand in conducting a musical
performance *.
976. But although there are only three general names for the accents, it is clear
that there are only two positive tones, viz. the uddtta or high tone, and svarita or
mixed tone, the an-uddtta representing the neutral, monotonous, accentless sound,
which lies like a flat horizontal line below the two positive sounds. There remains
* In native grammars the uddtta sound of a vowel is said to result from
employing the upper half of the organs of utterance, and the an-uddtta from
employing the lower half. In my recent travels in India I frequently heard the
Vedas recited and intoned by Pandits at Benares, Calcutta, Bombay, Poona, &c.,
and found to my surprise that the voice is not now raised in pronouncing the uddtta
syllable. _Great stress is laid on the an-uddtta and svarita, but none upon the uddtta ;
and I was told that the absence of all mark on this latter syllable is an indication
of the absence of accent in intoning.
398 ACCENTUATION.
no designation for the low tone, properly so called, i. e. the tone which immediately
precedes the high and is lower than the flat horizontal line taken to represent the
general accentless sound. The fact is that the exertion required to produce the
high tone (uddtta) is so great that in order to obtain the proper pitch, the voice is
obliged to lower the tone of the preceding syllable as much below this flat line as
the syllable that bears the uddtta is raised above it ; and Panini himself explains
this lower tone by the term sannatara (compar. of sanna, ' sunk,' for which the
commentators have substituted the expression anuddttatara), while he explains the
neutral, accentless tone by the term eka-fruti, i. e. the one accentless sound in which
the ear can perceive no variation.
977. The expression anuddttatara, then, is now adopted to designate the lowest
sound of all, or that immediately preceding the uddtta or high tone. But no
special mark distinguishes this sound from the an-uddtta. It must be borne in
mind that no simple uncompounded word, whatever the number of its syllables,
has properly more than one syllable accented. This syllable is called either uddtta
or svarita, according as it is pronounced with a high or mixed tone. But if a word
have only a svarita accent, then this svarita must be of the kind called independent,
although it may have arisen from the blending of two syllables, one of which was
originally uddtta, as in ifil (for tanu-d, where the middle syllable was uddtta).
A word having either the uddtta or the svarita accent on the first syllable is called
in the one case ddy-uddtta, in the other ddi-svarita ; having either the one or other
accent on the middle is in the one case madhyoddtta, in the other madhya-svarita ;
having either the one or other accent at the end is in the one case antoddtta, in the
other anta-svarita. All the syllables of a word except the one which is either an
uddtta or independent svarita are an-uddtta. Although, however, no one word
can have both an uddtta and an independent svarita, yet, if a word having an
uddtta is followed by an an-uddtta, this an-uddtta becomes a dependent svarita,
which is really the commonest form of svarita accent.
978. As to the method of marking the tones, the uddtta or high tone is never
marked at all, so that if a word of one syllable is uddtta it remains simply un-
marked, as ^[t ; if a monosyllable is an-uddtta it has a horizontal stroke underneath,
as H ; if svarita, it has an upright mark above, as Ifi. A word of two syllables,
both of which are an-uddtta, has two horizontal marks below, thus ^Tt ', and if the
first syllable is uddtta it is marked thus, ^TJtC J if the last is uddtta, thus ^TRTf .
A word of more than two syllables being entirely an-uddtta (sarvdnuddtta) has
horizontal marks under all the syllables, thus ^M'ir J but if one of the syllables
is uddtta, the horizontal stroke immediately preceding it marks the anuddttatara,
as in 'Sm^rffi, where the first and second syllables are an-uddtta and the third
anuddttatara, the fourth being uddtta; and if the uddtta syllable is followed by
another an-uddtta, this becomes a dependent svarita, and is marked by an upright
stroke, as in ^tWTcHf (Rig-veda in. 3, i). Similarly, in a word of three syllables
like ^3iTT, the syllable ^ is anuddttatara, 5T is uddtta, and T is svarita.
ACCENTUATION. 399
It should be noted that in Romanized Sanskrit printing and writing it is usual
instead of leaving the uddtta unmarked to treat that as the only accent to be
marked, and to treat both anuddttatara and dependent svarita as an-uddtta or
without any accent at all.
979. The foregoing explanations will make clear how it is that in the Samhita of
the Rig-veda an anuddttatara mark is generally the beginning of a series of three
accents, of which the dependent svarita is the end ; the appearance of this anuddtta-
tara mark preparing the reader for an uddtta immediately following, as well as for
a dependent svarita. This last, however, may sometimes be retarded by a new
uddtta syllable, as in f^T tfrtMii*^, where the syllable H, which would otherwise
be a dependent svarita, becomes changed to an anuddttatara because of the uddtta
syllable 7f following.
980. But if an independent svarita is immediately followed by an uddtta or by
another independent svarita, a curious contrivance is adopted. Should the syllable
bearing the independent svarita end in a short vowel, the numeral ^ is used to
carry the svarita with an anuddttatara under it, e. g. 4<S*T (Rig-veda x. 89, 2),
^fi: T^infr (iv. 17, 2); and should the syllable end in a long vowel, the
numeral ^ is employed in the same way, but the anuddttatara mark is placed
both under the long vowel and the numeral, e.g. f^Tfr^faiJTnn (i. 166, n),
reft^^R (iv. 55, 6), ^TT^fo: (vi. 21, 8).
981. It should also be pointed out that the absence of mark is employed in a
sentence to denote an-uddtta as well as uddtta ; thus, in the Samhita of the Veda,
at the commencement of a sentence a horizontal stroke underneath marks the first
anuddttatara syllable of the sentence as well as all such an-uddtta syllables as
precede ; the next syllable, if without mark, is uddtta ; and the next, if it has an
upright mark, is svarita ; but the next, if it has no mark, is an-uddtta; and the
absence of all mark after the upright mark, continues to denote an-uddtta until the
appearance of the next horizontal mark, which is anuddttatara. In fact, all
the syllables, both in words and sentences, which follow the svarita are supposed
to be pronounced in the accentless tone until the voice has to be depressed for the
utterance of another uddtta syllable.
With regard to the absence of accentuation, we may note that in direct sentences
a verb (unless it is the first word) is regarded as an enclitic and loses its accent.
The same rule applies to Vocative cases, which are accented only when they begin
a sentence, and then on the first syllable. Verbs preserve their accent in con-
ditional sentences and in a few exceptional cases.
982. The system of accentuation in the Pratis'akhyas often differs from that of
Panini. The rules given by these treatises for determining the accent when two
vowels (each bearing an accent) blend into one are very precise, but are liable to
exceptions. The following are some of those most usually given : uddtta+uddtta
=.uddtta; uddtta-{-anuddtta=uddtta; anuddtta-\-anuddtta=anuddtta; anuddtta-\-
uddtta =uddtta ; svarita + uddtta =uddtta ; svarita + anuddtta=svarita.
When anuddtta vowels are pronounced with the uddtta tone, this is called in the
400 ACCENTUATION.
Pratis'akhyas pra6aya. When the accent of two vowels is blended into one, this
is called praslishta, samdvesa, ektbhdva. The expressions tairovyanjana and
vaivritta are used to denote forms of the dependent svarita ; while kshaipra
and jdtya apply to the independent svaritas caused by the blending of the accents
of two vowels, the first of which has passed into the semivowel y or v.
983. A few compound words (generally names of Vedic deities) have two accents,
and are therefore called dvir-uddtta, e. g. <f^tMfrTJ, IT^T^TiT, where the first
syllable being uddtta remains unmarked, and the second being an-uddtta ought to
become a dependent svarita, but the third being uddtta again the second becomes
anuddttatara and is so marked. In ftT^rMj*!IT both the second and third syllables
are uddtta, A compound (called trir-uddttd) may even have three uddtta syllables,
as in ^rii<j^**in1.
984. In the Pada text where compounds are divided, if the first half of the
compound ends in a svarita coming after an uddtta, and the second begins with
an uddtta, the svarita accent at the end of the first member of the compound is
called tdthdbhdvya.
985. Observe The accent in Sanskrit is not confined to the last three syllables
of a "word, as in Greek and Latin.
Observe also Although the .Sanskrit independent svarita is in some respects
similar to the Greek circumflex, it should be borne in mind, that the latter is con-
fined to long, whereas the svarita may also be applied to short syllables *.
* See on the subject of Vedic accentuation, Roth's preface to the Nirukta : two
treatises by Whitney in the Journal of the American Oriental Society, vol. IV.
p. 195 &c., and vol. V. p. 387 &c. : Aufrecht, de accentu compositorum Sanscriti-
corum, Bonnae, 1847; reviewed by Benfey, Gottinger Gelehrte Anzeigen, 1848,
pp. 1995-2010.
INDEX I.
ENGLISH.
(The numbers refer to the paragraphs, except where the page is specified.)
ABSTRACT nouns, 80. xxviii,
xxxv, Ixii, Ixviii, Ixix,
hex vii, 81. ii, iii, xi, 85.
iv, vii, &c.
Accentuation, 975-984.
Adjectives, 186; syntax of,
824-828.
Adverbs, 713-725; syntax
of, 917-923.
Agency, participial nouns of,
579-582.
Alphabet, 1-24.
Aorist, 416-441; syntax of,
888.
Augment a, 251, 251.0. b.
Benedictive, see Precative.
Cardinals, 198; declension
of, 200.
Cases of nouns, 90.
Causal verbs, 479 ; termina-
tions of, 480; formation
of stem of, 481 ; passive
of, 496; syntax of, 847.
Classes, of nouns, 78; of
verbs, see Conjugations.
Classification of letters, 18.
Collective nouns, 80. xxxv.
Combination (euphonic) of
vowels, 27-38; of conso-
nants, 39-7 1 ; of the finals
of verbal stems with ter-
minations, 296-306.
Comparison, degrees of, 191-
197 ; syntax of, 829-832.
Compound verbs, 782-787.
Compound words, 733-737 ;
Tat - purusha or Depen-
dent, 739-745 ; Dvandva
or Copulative (Aggrega-
tive), 746-754 ; Karma-
dharaya or Descriptive
(Determinative), 755-758 ;
Dvigu or Numeral (Col-
lective), 759 ; Avyayi-
bhava or Adverbial (In-
declinable), 760; Bahu-
vrihi or Relative, 761-769 ;
Complex, 770-776; Ano-
malous, 777 ; changes un-
dergone by certain words
at the end of, 778.
Conditional, 242, 455; for-
mation of stem, 456 ;
syntax of, 891.
Conjugations of verbs, 248,
249; three groups of, 257-
259; first group of, 261-
289 ; second and third
groups of, 290-362. ist
cl., 261 ; examples, 585 :
2nd cl., 307; examples,
644: 3rd cl., 331; ex-
amples, 662 : 4th cl., 272 ;
examples, 612: 5th cl.,
349 ; examples, 675 : 6th
cl., 278 ; examples, 625 :
7th cl., 342 ; examples,
667: 8th cl., 353; ex-
amples, 682 : 9th cl., 356 ;
examples, 686 : loth cl.,
283 ; examples, 638.
Conjunct consonants, I, 5.
Conjunctions, 727 ; syntax
of, 912.
3 F
Consonants, i ; method of
writing, 4; conjunct, 5;
pronunciation of, 1 2 ; com-
bination of, 39-73.
Declension ; general obser-
vations, 88-101; of ist
class of nouns in a, d, {,
103-109 ; of 2nd and 3rd
classes in i and u, 1 1 o- 1 2 2 ;
of nouns in z'and u, 123-
126; of 4th class in ri,
127-130; of nouns in at,
o, aw, 131-134; of 5th
class in / and d, 136-145;
of 6th class in an and in,
146-162; of 7th class in
as, is, and us, 163-171;
of 8th class in any other
consonant, 172-183.
Defective nouns, 184, 185.
Demonstrative pronouns,
221-225.
Derivative verbs, 460-522.
Derivatives, primary and
secondary, 79.
Desiderative verbs, 498 ;
terminations of, 499 ; for-
mation of stem, 500 ; cau-
sal form of, 506; nouns,
80. i ; adjectives, 82. vii,
824.
Euphonic combination of
vowels, 27-38 ; of conso-
nants, 39-71.
Frequentative verbs, 507 ;
A'tmane-pada frequenta-
tives, 509 ; Parasmai-pada
402
INDEX I. ENGLISH.
frequentatives,5i4; nouns,
80. i.
Future, first and second,
386 ; formation of stem,
388; syntax of, 886, 887.
Genders of nouns, 89.
General tenses, 248,363-456.
Hard consonants, 18. a. b,
20. b, 39.
Imperative, 241 ; termina-
tions of, 245, 246 ; forma-
tion of stem, 261,272,278,
28 3> 37> 33' 342, 349'
353. 35 6 ; syntax of, 882.
Imperfect tense, 242; for-
mation of stem, 261, 264,
272, 278, 283, 307, 330,
342, 349' 353. 35 6 > syntax
of, 884.
Indeclinable words, 712;
syntax of, 912.
Indefinite pronouns, 228,229.
Indicative mood, 241.
Infinitive, 458, 459 ; syntax
of, 867 ; Vedic, 459. a,
867. b.
Intensive verb, see Frequen-
tative.
Interjections, 732 ; syntax
of, 926.
Interrogative pronouns, 227.
Letters, i ; classification of,
1 8 ; interchange of letters
in cognate languages, 25 ;
euphonic combination of,
27-
Metre, schemes of, 935-974.
Moods, 241, 242. a.
Nominal verbs, 518-523.
Nouns, formation of stem,
74, 80-87; declension of,
103-183; defective, 184;
syntax of, 802-823.
Numbers, 91, 243.
Numerals, 198-215; syntax
of, 206,835; compounded,
759-
Numerical figures, page 3.
Ordinals, 208.
Participial nouns of agency,
579-5 8 2-
Participles, present, 524-
529; past passive, 530-
552 ; past active, 553 ; of
the perfect, 554 ; past in-
declinable, 555-566; ad-
verbial indeclinable, 567;
future passive, 568-577;
of the 2nd future, 578;
syntax of, 892.
Particles, 717.
Passive verbs, 243. a, 461 ;
terminations of, 462 ; for-
mation of stem, 463 ; ex-
amples, 700-702.
Patronymics, 80. xxxv, 81.
viii-x, &c.
Perfect (reduplicated), 364-
384; (periphrastic), 385;
syntax of, 885.
Persons of the tenses, 244.
Possessive adjectives, 84. vi,
vii, 85. vi, viii; pronouns,
231.
Potential, 241; terminations
of, 245, 246 ; formation of
stem, 261, 272, 278, 283,
31> 33 342, 349' 353'
356; syntax of, 879.
Precative, 242, 442 ; for-
mation of stem, 443-454;
syntax of, 890.
Prefixes, adverbial, 726.
Prepositions, 729, 783 ; syn-
tax of, 916.
Present, 241; terminations
of, 246, 247; formation
of stem, 261, 272, 278,
28 3' 37> 33, 342' 349,
353' 35 6 5 syntax of, 873.
Pronominals, 235-240.
Pronouns, 216-234; syntax
of, 836.
Pronunciation, of vowels,
n; of consonants, 12.
Prosody, 935-974.
Reduplication, 252, 367.
Relative pronouns, 226.
Root, 74, 75.
Sandhi, rules of, 27-71,
296-306.
Soft or sonant letters, 18. a.
b, 20. b, 39.
Special tenses, 241,248,249.
Stem, nominal, 74, 77 ; for-
mation of nominal, 79, 80-
87; inflexion of, 88-183;
verbal, 244 ; formation of
verbal, 249-517.
Strong cases, 135. a.
Strong forms in verbal ter-
minations, 246. c.
Suffixes, forming substan-
tives, adjectives, &c., 80-
87; adverbial, 718-725.
Superlative degree, 191, 192.
Surd consonants, 18. a. b,
20. b, 39.
Symbols, 6-10.
Syntax, 793-929.
Tables of verbs, 583.
Tenses, 241, 248.
Terminations, of nouns, 91,
96; of verbs, 244-248.
Verb, 241 ; syntax of, 839.
Voices, 243 ; roots restricted
to, 786.
Vowels, i; method of writ-
ing, 2,3; pronunciation of,
ii ; combination of, 27.
Weak cases, 135. a.
Writing, method of, 26.
INDEX II.
SANSKRIT.
^T or 'Sn^ prefix, 726.
^T augment, 251.
'eye,' 122.
' fire,' no.
'before,' 731, 917.
'to anoint,' 347, 668.
prefix, 726. a ; prep.,
783. a.
1 26. i.
'then,' 727. c.
'yet,' 728.6.0.
'then,' 727. c.
to eat,' 317, 652.
' eating,' 141. c.
is/ 'that/ 225.
'under,' 731.
' under,' 731.
prep., 783. b.
'to read,' 311, 367. a.
'a road,' 147.
breathe,' 322. a.
' an ox,' 182. /.
after,' 731, 917.
prep., 730. d. e, 783. c.
' time/ 170.
within,' 731, 783. d.
' another/ 777.6.
'without,' 731, 917.
'near,' 731.
' other,' 236;
T 236.
'aiJ^ ' mutually,' 760. /.
' water,' 178. 6.
^T^ prep., 783. e.
833. a.
' a nymph,' 163. a.
., 730. /, 783.5-.
' on both sides,' 731.
' i n f ron t o f,' 731.
'near,' 731.
a mother,' 108. d.
' to go, '385.6.
'to worship,' 367. 6.
'to ask,' 642.
'on account of,' 731,
760. d, 917.
or '3TT1 ' on account
of,' 731-
e sun,' 157.
'a horse,' 158.
' after,' 73 1, 917.
to deserve,' 608.
' enough,' 901. 0,918.
' a few, 1 240.
119.
1 08.
prep., 783. A.
^ ' to despise,' 75. a.
3 F 3
'a priest,' 176. /.
' southern,' 176.6.
' to eat/ 357. a, 696.
3! 'to obtain/ 'to pervade,'
367.0, 681.0.
' a stone/ 147.
'to be,' 327, 364. a,
584.
'to throw/ 622.
'blood/ 176. d.
' setting/ 712.
' existence,' 712.
'we/ 218.
'to say/ 384. 6.
' a day/ 156.
^IT prefix, 726.6,- prep., 730,
730. a. 6, 783. i.
' to stretch,' 385.
ft 126. i.
' consisting of/ 769.
h, 774.
soul/ 'self/ 147,
232.
'beginning with/ 'et
cetera/ 764, 772.
or ^rrei ( = ^1^)
764. 6.
' to obtain/ 351, 364. a,
681.
404:
INDEX II. SANSKRIT.
' beginning from,'
792, 925.
' tawny,' 126, /.
' a blessing,' 166.
' to sit/ 31 7; withpres.
part., 877.
^'togo,' 310, 367.0, 645.
^inserted, 391-415.
.' other, '236.
'so,' 927-929.
224.
1 'to kindle,' 347.
' so much,' 234. b.
'to wish,' 282, 367, 637.
"8['to 866/605.
f ' to praise/ 325.
pl' so like/ 234.
^' to rule/ 325. 0,385. a.
' a little/ 717. d, 726. b.
' to move/ 367.
' also/ 717. h, 727. a.
195.
1 66. c.
', 783-y-
'northern/ 176.6.
'with reference to/
924.
to moisten,' 347*
prep., 783. *.
'above/ 731, 917.
a shoe,' 183.
' both/ 238.
'Venus/ 170.
'to burn,' 385. e.
a metre, 182. b.
the hot season/ 147.
'strength/ 176. A.
'to cover/ 316, 374. j.
'above,' 731, 917.
' to go/ 334, 374. n.
%' to go/ 381.0.
'to go,' 684.
'except,' 731.
'a priest/ 176. e.
' to flourish/ 367. J, 680.
fl5f^' Indra/ 162.
C to go/ 358.
'one,' 200; iW 236;
1^238.
'this,' 223.
' to increase/ 600.
'the syllable Om/ 712.
'^r[ 'a few,' 230.
'to say/ 286. a, 643.
off ^ffa^, cfifiTir 194.
^^ to love/ 440. o.
R^'an action/ 152.
^ ' any one/ 228.
^iT prefix, 726. c.
' desirous/ with inf.,
8 7I .
' on account of,' 731.
' doer/ 159. Obs.
'to shine/ 385. e.
' but/ 728. o.
' who ? ' ' what ? ' 227.
why ?' 921.
'how many/ 234. b.
prefix, 726. c.
'to pain,' 360.
'to play,' 75.0.
' a girl,' 107.
n. ' a lotus/ 137.
^ 'to play/ 271. o.
'to sound,' 358. a.
'to do/ 355, 366, 369,
682, 683, 701.
i^'to cut,' 281.
'who made,' 140. a.b.
'on account of/ 73 1 -
' times/ 723. a.
^fre'to draw/ 606.
3 'to scatter/ 280, 627.
"SK 'to hurt/ 358.
oRfT 'to celebrate/ 287.
'to make/ 263.
ftl ' any one,' 229.
'to buy/ 374. e, 689.
'a curlew,' 176. c.
' a jackal/ 128.0, 185.
'to harass/ 697.
' to kill/ 684, 685.
' a charioteer,' 128. a",
'tokill,' 684.
'to throw/ 274, 279,
635; fre q-> 7 J .
' to sneeze/ 392. a.
' to agitate,' 694.
J 'to sharpen/ 392. a.
'to dig/ 376.
' a sweeper, ' 1 2 6 . b, 1 90.
'to vex/ 281.
^n' to tell,' 437. b.
Iff ' gone/ at end of comps.,
739- 6 -
'fearless/ 126. h.
'to go,' 270, 376, 602;
freq., 709.
' heavier/ 194.
' speech,' 180.
'to protect/ 271.
? 'to conceal,' 270. b, 609.
'to evacuate/ 430.
INDEX II. SANSKRIT.
405
'T 'to sound,' 358.
n 'to sing/268, 373. d, 595.0.
fTT 'a cow,' 133.
' cow-keeper,' 181. c.
'the goddess,' 124.
'to tie,' 360, 375. h, 693.
?T^ to swallow,' 286.
?J^ 'to take,' 359, 699;
freq., 711.
SfTfrafl 1 126. d.
M ' to be weary,' 268, 595. b.
TT^' to eat,' 377.
"^TC 'to proclaim,' 643. a.
TTOT 'to shine,' 684.
ITT ' to smell/ 269, 588.
^ 'and/ 727, 912.
'to shine/ 75.01, 329.
'brilliant/ 164. b.
'to speak/ 326.
203.
'food/ 712.
'the moon/ 163.
' a host/ 125.
TC 'one who goes/ 180.
leather/ 153.
'to move/ 602. b.
'to gather/ 350, 374, 583.
' desirous of doing/
166. a.
' a painter/ 175.0.
' to think/ 641.
T 'to steal,' 284, 638, 639.
' if/ 727. 6,915.
' a pretext/ 153.
'to cut/ 667.
"3^ ' to cut/ 390. a.
WET 'to eat/ 3io.Obs., 322.0.
'the world/ 142. o.
^ 'to be born/ 276, 376,
424. a, 617. a.
^' to produce/ 339, 666. i.
' birth/ 153.
' decay/ 171, 185.
126. b.
'to be awake/ 75. a,
310.0, 374- .P, 39 2 - d -
'watching/ 141.0.
f 'to conquer/ 263, 374. b,
59-
1 66. a.
'to live/ 267, 603.
' sacrificing/ 141.0.
'to grow old/ 277, 358,
375- *> 437- ^
'to know/ 361, 688.
'to grow old/ 359. a.
fr ' to fly/ 274, 392.
' a carpenter/ 148.
'then/ 719, 727. /.
TTZTT'thus/ 727.6.
7T^ 'he/ 'that/ 220, 221.
ff^' to stretch/354, 583,684.
iTJ 'thin/ 118, 119. o.
'a lute-string/ 124.
'to burn/ 600. a.
'a boat/ 124.
' such like/ 234.
' so/ 801. a, 920. o.
' so many/ 234, 801,
838, 876.
76. b.
^ 'but/ 728. o, 914.
iJ<J 'to strike/ 279, 634.
'Indra/ 182. e.
'to eat grass/ 684.
TJt^'to be satisfied/ 618.
^ ' to kiU/ 348, 674.
r['to cross/ 364, 374. r.
7T5T ' to abandon,' 596.
W^ 'he/ 'that/ 222.
fc? 'three/ 202.
^7 'to break/ 390. o.
3" 'to preserve/ 268.
r^ 'thou/ 219.
r^N' thine/ 231.
i^ 'a carpenter/ 128. d.
<^3T 'to bite/ 270. a".
^fispHTR^ or ^fB|^T 'to the
south/ 731, 917.
760. e.
giving/ 141.0.
ghee/ 122.
' impudent/ 181.
' to be tamed/ 275.
1' to pity/ 385.6.
'to be poor/ 75. a,
i8, 385-
'to burn/ 610.
'to give/ 335, 663, 700.
'a giver/ 127, 129. b.
'a string/ 153.
' to play/ 275.
' sky/ 180.6.
' a day/ 156. o.
T 'to point out/ 279,
439- ^ 583.
SI ' a quarter of the sky/
181.
7 'to anoint/ 659.
'to shine/ 319.
'evil-minded/ 164. a.
<*$( prefix, 726. d, 783. t.
5f ' to milk/ 330, 660.
406
INDEX II. SANSKRIT.
! a milker/ 182.
, thunderbolt/ 126. c.
^'to see/ 181, 270, 604.
'a looker/ 147, 149.
; ' to split/ 358, 374. m.
V to pity/ 373.7.
^. *v
'an arm/ 166. d.
'to shine/ 597. b.
' to run/ 369, 592.
' to injure/ 623.
'one who injures/ 182.
e a door/ 180.
'two/ 20 1.
' having two mothers/
130.
'to hate/ 309, 657.
'one who hates/ 181.
' rich/ 140.
' rich/ 159, 1 60, 161.
' knowing one's duty/
137-
>IT ' to place/ 336, 664.
' a house/ 153.
'torun/ 'towash/6o3.a.
' understanding/ 123. a,
'wise/ 140.
^' to agitate/28o, 358,374.^,
677.
^' to hold/ 285.
*| ' to drink/ 438. c, 440. a.
*TJ 'a cow/ 112.
IT 'to blow/ 269.
^ <
"Hi to meditate/ 268, 595. 6.
"H 'to be firm/ 421. /.
' a river/ 105.
' a grandson/ 128. a.
' to bend/ 433, 602. a.
'reverence/ 712.
TSI 'to perish/ 181, 620.
*T? ' to bind,' 624.
T? 'one who binds,' 183.
'non-existence/ 712.
prep., 783. 1.
'to purify/ 341.
' for the sake of/ 731.
ftf^ prefix, 726. e, 783. m.
eft 'to lead/ 374. a, 590. a.
J to praise/ 280, 313, 392. a.
T 'a man/ 128. b.
JT^'to dance/ 274, 364, 583.
j' to lead/ 358.
^^faf^, Tf^T? 194.
TT ' a ship/ 94.
T^'to cook/ 267, 595. c.
cooking/ 141.
' five,' 204.
to fall/ 441, 597. c.
'a lord/ I2i.
a road/ 162.
^ 'to go/ 424.0.
'the sun/ 126.7.
'behind/ 731.
' after/ 731.
126. a.
'mutually/ 760.7.
tm prep., 783. n.
prep., 783. o.
'a cleanser/ 176. e.
176.6.
'after/ 731.
'after/ 731.
*IT ' to drink/ 269, 589.
IT 'to protect/ 317.
' pale/ 187.
'a foot/ 145.
/ 147.
'on the further side/731.
164. b.
'a father/ 127, 128.
' desirous of cooking/
thirsty/ 118.
'to form,' 281.
t/ 147, 149.
^ 'a male/ 169.
JZ to embrace/ 390. a.
'holy/ 191.
m again/ 126. c.
tW: ' preceded by/ 777. rf.
or ^ ' before/ 731.
' a man/ 107.
T ' a priest/ 181. a.
T 'to nourish/ 357. a, 698;
'to be nourished/ 621.
to purify/ 358, 364, 583.
or f5ir 'preceded by/
'with/ 777. c?.
'
before/ 731.
sun/ 157.
'a deer/ 142. a.
1J or f^ ' to fill/ 358, 374. m,
640.
Til 'to grow fat/ 373. i, 395. b.
H prep., 783.^.
H^ 'to ask/ 282, 381, 631.
Ufa prep., 730. c, 783. 9.
' western/ 176. b.
'superior understand-
ing/ 126. g.
73 1 * 764- c, 79 2 -
' quiet/ 179.0.
'a steer/ 182. c.
INDEX II. SANSKRIT.
407
'before/717./, 731, 917.
'an asker,' 176.
' eastern,' 176.6.
' worshipping,' 176. c.
' dear,' 187.
' love,' 153.
' to bind,' 360, 692.
' strongest,' 193.
' stronger/ 167, 193.
134. a, 190.
'rich,' 134. a, 190.
126. i.
'to know,' 262, 364;
01.1.583; 01.4.614.
J ' one who knows,' 177.
'under the idea,' 809. b.
'to speak,' 314, 649.
5T 'to eat/ 643.6.
'to break/ 347, 669.
onour/ 143, 233.
'yours/ 231.
*?^ ' to shine/ 340.
VTFJ 'the sun/ no.
182. c.
wife/ 107.
'to speak/ 606. a.
,' 267.
' to fear/ 333, 666.
'fear/ 123. a.
'timid/ 118. a, 187.
JT'to eat/ 346, 668. a.
' sky/ 7 1 2.
'tobe/ 263, 374. i, 585,
586; caus., 703; desid.,
705 ; freq., 706, 707.
>J/the earth/ 125. o.
'a king/ 121.
'earth/ 712.
w to bear/ 332, 369, 583.
>f ' to bear/ ' to blame/ 358.
" " to fall/ 276.
'to fry/ 282, 381, 632.
one who fries/ 176.^.
' to wander/ 275, 375. g.
'to shine/ 375. i.
'to shine/ 375.1.
'to fear/ 358.
' Indra/ 155. c.
to be immersed/ 633.
'the mind/ 112.
^'a churning-stick/ 1 62 .
to be mad/ 275.
mine/ 231.
'honey/ 114.
in the middle/ 731.
'to imagine/ 617, 684.
' the mind/ 164.
^'to churn/ 360, 693. a
great/ 142.
' magnanimous/
164. a.
' a great king/ 1 5 1 . a.
'to measure/ 274, 338,
664. a.
not/ in prohibition, 882,
ITT W 242. a.
HTO^p^ ' flesh-eater/ 176.
WTo? 'merely/ 'even/ 919.
TTTeir 'my/ 231.0.
Tli<*1f ' mine/ 231. a.
'to be viscid/ 277.
' to let go/ 281, 628.
'to be troubled/ 612.
'foolish/ 182.
<{' the head/ 147.
$' to die/ 280, 626.
IT ' a deer/ 107.
^'to cleanse/ 321, 651.
^'tender/ 118. a, 187.
IJ3I N ' one who touches/ 181.
1^ 'one who endures/ 181.
HVlf^'inteUectual/ 159.
T ' to repeat over/ 269.
t 'to fade/ 268, 374, 595. b.
< the liver/ 144.
T 'to sacrifice/ 375. e, 597.
a sacrificer/ 149.
as/ 721; at beginning
of comps., 760, 760. b.
<T ' who/ 226.
' if/ 727.6, 880. a, 915.
to restrain/ 270, 433.
126. 6.
' to go/ 3 1 7, 644.
' to ask/ 364, 392, 595.^
'as many/ 234, 80 1,
838, 876; 'up to/ 731,
917.
'to mix/ 3 13, 357, 391.0,
583, 686, 687.
'to join/ 346, 670; pass.,
702.
' a youth/ 155. b.
' you/ 2 19.
T ' to preserve/ 606. b.
(with ^?T)'to begin/6o i .a.
T^'to sport/ 433.
TTT ' to shine/ 375. i.
^'a ruler/ 176. e.
408
INDEX II. SANSKRIT.
' a king,' 148, 151.
' a queen,' 150.
ft 'to go,' 280.
^ ' to go,' 358.
?> 'to sound,' 313, 392. a.
"^ 'to weep,' 322,653.
'HjV ' to hinder,' 344, 67 1 .
' hindering,' 141. c.
< 'wealth,' 132.
Tfa^'hair,' 153.
'fortune,' 124.
v ' lightness,' 147.
' lightest,' 193.
' lighter,' 193.
'to take,' 601.
*T ' one who obtains,' 178.
ho paints,'i75..
'to anoint,' 281, 436.
'to lick,' 330, 66r.
' one who licks,' 182.
'to adhere,' 358,373.0.
/to break,' 281.
' to cut,' 358, 691.
f v 'to speak,' 320,375.0,650.
'to speak,' 375.0,599.
rf^ 'the fortnight of the
month's wane,' 712.
^' a wife,' 125.
'to ask,' 684.
'to sow,' 375. c.
' to vomit,' 375. d. Obs.
TT^ ' a road,' 153.
H^ ' armour,' 153.
^' a frog,' 126. c.
I x ' to wish,' 324, 375.0, 656.
'to dwell,' 375. c, 607;
'to wear,' 657. .
'to carry,' 375.0,611.
' out,' 73 1.
' or,' 728, 914.
' speech,' 176.
an antelope,' 126. /.
'water,' 180.
' water,' 114.
'bearing,' 182.0.
prep., 783. r.
'to distinguish,' 341,
346.
'to shake,' 341, 390.0.
'to know,' 308, 583;
'to find,' 281.
' wise,' 168. e.
' without,' 731.
' splendid,' 176. e.
desirous of saying,'
'to enter,' 635. a.
' one who enters,' 181.
182. c.
176.6.
'to pervade,' 341.
'to go,' 312.
'to cover,' 'to choose,'
3 6 9> 6 75-
'to be,' 598.
I 'to increase,' 599. b.
' great,' 142.0.
'to choose,' 358. See ^.
'to weave,' 373. h.
' a loom,' 147.
' a house,' 153.
'to deceive,' 282, 383,
629.
'without/ 731.6.
1 'to be pained,' 383.
' to pierce,' 277, 383, 6 15.
4; <j.
( to cover, 373. g.
'sky,' 153.
'to cut,' 282, 630.
' one who cuts,' 176. g.
~5f( ' to choose,' 358.
$ 'to go,' 358.
? ' to be able,' 400, 679.
' ordure,' 144.
^ 'to fall,' 270.
'ease,' 712.
'bearing rice,'
182. c.
'to rule,' 310. Obs.,
328, 658.
'ruling,' 141. a.
' S'iva,' ' prosperous,'
103, 104, 105.
^'to distinguish,' 672.
'to lie down,' 315, 646.
' to grieve,' 595. e.
'pure,' 117, 119.0, 187.
166. c.
126. h.
'fortunate,' 187.
'fire,' 147.
3T 'to hurt,' 358, 374. m.
^n ' to sharpen,' 373. a 7 .
' to loose,' 360, 375. h,
693. a.
'to resort to,' 374. e, 392,
440. a.
t 'prosperity,' 123.
'to hear,' 352, 369, 374. h,
676.
'adog,' 155.
INDEX II. SANSKRIT.
409
a mother-in -law, '125.
to breathe,' 322. a.
' to swell,' 374. /, 392,
437- 6-
rei^ ' Indra,' 182. d.
( = T&f) ' with,' 760. a,
769 ; ( = TOTR) 769. c.
,' 712.
' near,' 731.
'from,' 731.
' once,' 717. /.
' a thigh,' 122.
'a friend,' 120.
to fight,' 75. a.
' an associate,' 166.
' to adhere,' 270. d, 422,
597. a.
'to sink,' 270, 599. a.
^' to give,' 354, 424. 6,684.
' possessed of,' 7d9./.
^ prep., 783. *.
' before the eyes,' 73 1.
'with,' 731.
or Wfiin ' near'
'fit,' 176.6.
'a river,' 136.
195.
' all,' 237.
omnipotent,' 175.
^Y ' a charioteer,' 128. d.
'to bear,' 611. a.
' with,' 731, 769. b.
with,' 731.
' before,' 731.
' good,' 187.
' conciliation,' 153.
f^' along with,' 731.
'to sprinkle,' 281.
'to succeed,' 273, 364,
616.
' a border,' 146.
*J prefix, 726. /, 783. t.
^ 'to bring forth,' 647.
?J 'to press out juice,' 677. a.
126. g.
126. g.
' well-sounding,' 166.6.
'the fortnight of the
moon's increase,' 712.
intelligent,' 126. h.
' beautiful,' 187.
M5-
'well-intentioned,'
164. a.
' jumping well,' 175.0.
^'very injurious,' 181.6.
'to bring forth,' 312, 647.
' to go,' 369, 437.6.
'to create,' 625.
'to creep,' 263.
'a general,' 126. d.
^'to serve,' 364.
W ' to destroy,' 276. a, 613.
'a Soma - drinker,'
108. a.
T'to stop,' 695.
'to praise,' 313, 369, 648.
' a woman,' 123. b.
'to stand,' 269, 587.
' to drip,' 392. a.
'to touch,' 636.
' to desire,' 288.
3 G
wi<s ' to expand,' 390. a.
^^ ' to vibrate,' 390. a.
W particle, 251. 6. Obs.,
717. /. Obs., 878.
ftR 'to smile,' 591.
^ 'to remember,' 374. k, 594-
^' to flow,' 369,592.0.
^ 'own,' 232. 6.
^cfitPf ' own,' 232. c.
'Svadha,' 312.
'to sound,' 375. /
,' 322.0, 382,655.
' self,' 232. a.
^J.' self-existent,'
126. e.
C' heaven,' 712.
' a sister,' 129. a.
salutation, 712.
own,' 232. c.
' to kill,' 323, 654 ; freq.,
708.
' green,' 95, 136, 137.
' ghee,' 165.
'to abandon,' 337, 665.
' a Gandharva,' 108. c.
' to send,' 374. c.
' for,' 727. d, 914.
[ 'to injure,' 673.
'to sacrifice,' 333, 662.
'a Gandharva,' 126. /.
' to seize,' 593.
'the heart,' 139, 184.
or ^ ru ' for the sake
of,' 73i-
j(t 'to be ashamed,' 333. a,
666. a.
jft 'shame,' 123.0.
$' to call,' 373. e, 595.
INDEX III.
GRAMMATICAL TERMS, AND NAMES OF METRES.
Ak, the simple vowels,
18, note *, b.
A-ghosha, 8, 20. b.
Anga, 74, 135. c.
A6, the vowels, 18, note *, b.
An, a Pratyahara, 1 8, note*,i.
Atikriti, a metre, 964.
Atijagatf, a metre, 944.
Atidhriti, a metre, 959.
Atisakvart, a metre, 950.
Atyashti, a metre, 953.
Adddi, 249. Obs.
Anuddtta, 75. c; accent, 975.
Anuddttet, 75. e.
Anundsika, 7, 7. a.
Anubandha, 75. e.
Anushtubh, a metre, 935.
Anusvdra, 6, 7.
Antah-stha, semivowel, 22.
Abhinidhdna, suppression.io.
Abhydsa, reduplication, 252.
Ardha-visarga, 8. a, 23. b.
Ardhdkdra, 10.
J/,the alphabet, 18, note *, b.
Alpa-prdna, n, 14.0.
Avagraha, 10.
Avyaya, 760.
Avyayi-bhdva compounds,
760.
Ashti, a metre, 952.
Akriti, a metre, 964.
Akhydta, a verb, 241.
Akhydnakt, a metre, 939.
f
Agama, augment, 251.
Atmane-pada, 243, 786.
Ardhadhdtuka, 247. c.
.4rya, a metre, 972.
Arydgiti, a metre, 974.
Jsir lin, Precative, 241.
I, rejected from itha in 2nd
sing. Perf., 370 ; rules for
insertion or rejection of i,
39I-4I5.
It, an Agama, 250. b,
391. a.
It, 75- c.
Indra-vajrd, a metre, 938.
Ishat-sprishta, 20.
17, a Vikarana, 250. 6.
Unddi, 79, note *.
Utkriti, a metre, 964.
Uttara-pada-lopa, 745- a -
Uddtta, 75. c>- accent, 975.
Uddttet, 75. c.
Udgiti, a metre, 973.
Upagtii, a metre, 974.
Upajdti, a metre, 939.
Upadhmdnfya, 8. a, 14. a,
23.6.
Upasarga, 729.
Upendra-vajrd, a metre, 939.
Ushnih, a metre, 965.
Ushman, a sibilant, 23,
23. a, 6.
Eka-vadana, singular, 91.
Eka-fruti, 976.
Ektbhdva, 982.
^d, the diphthongs, 18,
note *, 6.
Oshthya, labial, 18.
Aupa66handasika, a metre,
969.
Kanthya, guttural, 18.
Karma-kartri, 461. d.
Karmctrdhdraya compounds,
755-758.
Karman, go, 461. rf.
Karma-pravadamya, 729.
Ka-varga, the gutturals, 18,
note *, a.
JfiTa/a, tense, 241.
JSTrtY suffixes, 79.
Knit, a metre, 961.
Kritya, 79.
Krid-anta, 79.
Kriyd, verb, 241.
Kryddi, 249. Obs.
Kliva, neuter, 91.
Kip, 87.
Go, a long syllable, 934.
Ga^a, a spondee, 934.
Gana, four short syllables,
934-
Gati, 729.
G/a, a trochee, 934.
Gdthd, a metre, 972.
Gdyatri, a metre, 965, 966.
Giti, a metre, 974.
Guna change of vowels,
27-29; roots forbidding
Guna, 390.
Guru, a long syllable, 934.
Ghoshavat, 20. b.
N-it, a Pratyahara, 91,
note *.
INDEX III. GRAMMATICAL TERMS, &c.
411
Caturthi, Dative, 90.
Candra-vindu, 7.
Ca-varga, the palatals, 18,
note *, a.
Curddi, 249. Obs.
Cli, 250. b.
Cm, 788. a. Obs.
Ja, an amphibrach, 934.
Jagatt, a metre, 941.
Jas, a Pratyahara, 18,
note *, b.
Jdtya, 982.
Jihvdmuliya, 8. a, 14.0, 23.6.
Juhotyddi, 249. Obs.
Jhar, a Pratyahara, 18,
note *, b.
Jhal, a Pratyahara, 18,
note *, b.
Jhas, a Pratyahara, 18,
note *, b.
Jhash, a Pratyahara, 18,
note *, b.
Ta-varga, the cerebrals, 18,
note *, a.
Nal, 247. Obs.
M<?, 250. 6.
Ta, an antibacchic, 934.
Tat-purusha compounds,
739-745-
Taddhita suffixes, 79.
Tanddi, 249. Obs.
Ta-varga, the dentals, 18,
note *, a.
Tdthdbhdvya, 984.
Tdlavya, palatal, 18.
Tdsi, 250. b.
Tudddi, 249. Obs.
Tritiyd, Instrumental, 90.
Tairovyanjana, 982.
Trishtubh, a metre, 937.
Dandaka, a metre, 964.
Dantya, dental, 18.
Divddi, 249. Obs.
Dirffha, ii./.
Deva-ndgar'f, I.
Druta-vilambita, a metre,
943-
Dvandva compounds, 746.
Dvigu compounds, 759.
Dvitiyd, Accusative, 90.
Dvi-vafona, dual, 91.
Dhdtu, 74.
Dhriti, a metre, 957.
JIVa, a tribrach, 934.
Nati, 57. Obs. 3.
Napuysaka, neuter, 91.
Nipdta, adverb, 712. a.
Pan6am{, Ablative, 90.
Pada, 135. c; a complete
word, 74 ; voice, 243 ;
restriction of, 786.
Parasmai-pada, 243, 786.
Pa-varga, the labials, 18,
note *, a.
Pdda, a quarter- verse, 934.
Pit, 247.
Pum-linga, masculine, 91.
Pushpitdgrd, a metre, 970-
Prakriti, a metre, 962.
Pragrihya exceptions, 38.
Pratyaya, a suffix, 74.
Pratyahara, 91.
Prathamd, Nominative, 90.
Prabhdvatf, a metre, 947.
Praslishta, 982.
Praharshini, a metre, 946.
Prdtipadika, a stem, 74, 79,
135- c-
Pluta, n. f.
Bahu-va6ana, plural, 91.
Bahu-vrlhi compounds, 761-
769.
Bha stem, 135. c.
Bha, a dactyl, 934.
Bhdva, Passive, 461. d.
Bhvddi, 249. Obs.
Ma, a molossus, 934.
Manju-bhdshint, ametre,945.
302
Madhyama-pada-lopafi^ty.a.
Manddkrdntd, a metre, 955.
Mahd-prdna, 14. a,
Mahd-mdlikd, a metre, 958.
Mdtrd, 1 1./, 934.
Mdtrd-vritta, 934.
Mdnint or Mdlinf, a metre,
951-
Murdhanya, cerebral, 18.
Fa, a bacchic, 934.
Yak, 250. i.
Fan, a Pratyahara, 18,
note *, b,
Yati, a pause, 934.
Fama, 73. b.
Far, a Pratyahara, 18,
note *, b.
Ya-varga, the semivowels,
1 8, note *, a.
Ydsut, 250. b.
Ra, a cretic, 934.
Rathoddhatd, a metre, 940.
Rutird, a metre, 947.
Rudhddi, 249. Obs.
Repha, the letter T, I.
La or laghu, a short syllable,
934-
La^ra, an iambus, 934.
Lan, Imperfect, 241.
Lat, Present tense, 241.
Lala, a pyrrhic, 934-
Lin, Potential, 241.
Lit, Perfect, 241.
Luk, 135. b.
Lun, Aorist, 241.
Lut, Furst Future, 241.
Lriit, Conditional, 241.
Lrit, Second Future, 241.
Let, the Vedic mood, 241. a,
891.0.
Lot, Imperative, 241.
Lopa, elision, 10, 135. b.
Vansa - sthavila, a metre,
942.
412
INDEX III. GRAMMATICAL TERMS, &c.
Vary a, class of letters, 18,
note *, a.
Varna-vritta, 934.
Vasanta-tilakd, a metre,
949-
Vdhya-prayatna, 8.
Vikarana, 250. 6.
Vikriti, a metre, 964.
VibhaJcti, a case-ending, 74,
90 ; a verbal termination,
244.
Virdma, 9.
Vivdra, expansion, 18. a.
Visarga, 8, 61.
Vriddhi change of vowels,
27, 28, 29. a.
VaitdUya, a metre, 968.
Vaivritta, 982.
Vyanjana, consonant, 20.
/
S, a Vikarana, 250. i.
r
Sakvari, a metre, 948.
Sop, a Vikarana, 250. b.
Sapo luk, a Vikarana,
250. b.
Sa-varga, the sibilants and A,
18, note *, a.
Sdrdula-vikridita, a metre,
960.
Sikharim, a metre, 954.
Siva-sutra, 18, note *, b.
/
Snam, a Vikarana, 250. 6.
SW, a Vikarana, 250. b.
Snu, a Vikarana, 250.6.
Syan, a Vikarana, 250. b.
/
Slu, a Vikarana, 250. b.
Sloka, a metre, 935.
ShashtM, Genitive, 90.
Sa, an anapaest, 934.
Samvdra, contraction, 18. a.
Sankriti, a metre, 964.
Sandhi, pages 23-49.
Sandhy-akshara, 18. c.
Sannatara, 976.
Saptami, Locative, 90.
Samdvefa, 982.
Samdsdnta, 778.
Samprasdrana, 30, 47 1 . Obs.,
543. Obs.
Sambuddhi or sambodhana,
Vocative case, 90.
Sarvandman, a pronoun, 216.
Sarvandma - sthdna cases,
135- c.
Sdrvadhdtuka, 247. c.
Szp, 250. b.
Styut, 250. 6.
SM?, a Pratyahara, 91, note*.
SMJ, 91, note *.
Stri-linga, feminine, 91.
Sparsa, 20.
Sprishta, 20.
Sya, 250. i.
Sragdhard, a metre, 963.
Svara, vowel, 20; accentu-
ation, 975.
Svarita, 75. c; accent, 975.
Svaritet, 75. c.
Svddi, 249. Obs.
Harint, a metre, 956.
HZ, the consonants, 18,
note *, b.
Hrasva, n./.
INDEX IV.
SUFFIXES.
Obs. K. = Krit or Primary (including Kritya and Unddi) ; T.=:Taddhita or Secondary ;
adv. = adverbial suffix. For distinction between Krit, Kritya, Unadi, and Taddhita
suffixes, see 79.
a, K. 80. i ; T. 80. xxxv.
aka, K. 80. ii, 582. b; T. 80.
xxxvi.
aki, T. Si.viii.
anga, K. 80. xxxiv.
anda, K. 80. xxxiv.
at, K. 84. i, 524, 525, 578.
ata, K. 80. xxxiv.
atra, K. 80. iii.
athu, K. 82. i.
an, K. 85. i.
ana, K. 80. iv, 582. c.
antya, K. 80. v, 570.
anta, K. 80. xxxiv.
anya, K. 80. xxxiv.
opo, K. 80. xxxiv.
apt, adv., 228-230, 718.
ubha, K. 80. xxxiv.
am, adv. ind. part., 567.
ama, K. 80. xxxiv.
amba, K. 80. xxxiv.
ara, K. 80. xxix.
dla, K. 80. xxx.
as, K. 86. i.
asa, K. 80. xxxiv.
asdna, K. 80. xxxiv.
rf, K. 80. i.
aa, K. 80. vii.
dta, T. 80. xxxvii.
dnaka, K. 80. xxxiv.
ofw, K. 82. ii.
ana, K. 80. viii, 526. a. Obs.,
527, 528.
dnaka, K. 80. xxxiv.
dnf, T. 80. xxxviii.
dyana, T. 80. xxxix.
dyani, T. 81. ix.
oyya, K. 80. xxxiv.
dra, K. 80. xxxiv.
dru, K. 82. iii.
a7a, K. 80. xxxiv ; T. 80. xl.
dlu, K. 82. iv.
*, K. 8i..i; T. 81. x.
ika, K. 80. xxxiv ; T. 80. xli.
it, K. 84. ii.
ita, K. 80. ix ; T. 80. xlii.
itnu, K. 82. v.
in, K. 85. ii, 582. a: T. 85. vi.
ina, T. 80. xliii.
ineya, T. 80. xliv.
iman, K. 85. iv ; T. 85. vii.
iya, T. 80. xlv.
ira, K. 80. x ; T. 80. xlvi.
ila, K. 80. x; T. 80. xlvii.
ivas, K. 86. iv.
isha, K. 80. xxxiv.
ishtha, 80. xlviii, 192.
ishnu, K. 82. vi.
is, K. 86. ii.
/, K. 80. i, 82. xv.
flta, K. 80. xxxiv.
(ta y K. 80. xxxiv.
ina, T. 80. xlix.
iya, T. 80. 1, 775. b.
fyas, 86. v, 192.
ira, K. 80. xxxiv ; T. 80. Ii.
ila, T. 80. Ii.
fsha, K. 80. xxxiv.
M, K. 82. vii.
uka, K. 80. xii.
utra, K. 80. xxxiv.
una, K. 80. xxxiv.
ura, K. 80. xxix ; T. 80. Iii.
ula, K. 80. xxx ; T. 80. liii.
itsha, K. 80. xxxiv.
us, K. 86. iii.
M, K. 82. xvi.
uka, K. 80. xiii.
ukha, K. 80. xxxiv.
utha, K. 80. xxxiv.
ura, K. 80. xxxiv.
ula, K. 80. xxxiv; T. 80.
liv.
enya, K. 80. xiv.
eya, T. 80. Iv.
era, K. 80. xv.
elima, K. 80. xxxiv, 576. b.
ora, K. 80. xxxiv.
ka, K. 80. xvi ; T. 80. Ivi ;
761. a.
414
INDEX I V. SUFFIXES.
Tcara, K. 80. xxxiv.
kalpa, T. 80. Ivii, 777. a.
Jcritvas, adv., 723. o.
6ana, adv., 228-230, 718.
tid, adv., 228-230, 718.
t, K. 84. iii.
ta, K. 80. xvii, 530.
tana, T. 80. Iviii.
<ama,T.8o.lix, 191,211-213.
t amain, adv., 80. lix.
taya, T. 80. be.
faro, T. 80. Ixi, 191.
tardm, adv., 80. Ixi, 197.
tavya, K. 80. xviii, 569.
tas, adv., 719.
id, T. 80. Ixii.
tdt, K. 84. v ; adv., 719. c.
tdti, T. 81. xi.
/*, K. 81. ii; T. 8c. xii;
adv., 227. a.
titha, T. 80. Ixiii, 234. c.
%a, T. 80. Ixiv, 208.
tu, K. 82. viii.
tri, K. 83.
tna, T. 80. Ixv.
tya, K. 80. xix ; T. 80. Ixvi.
tra, K. 80. xx ; adv., 721.
trd, K. 80. xx ; T. 80. Ixvii ;
adv., 720. a.
trima, K. 80. xxxiv.
tva, K. 80. xxi ; T. 80. Ixviii.
tvan, K. 85. iii.
tvana, T. 80. Ixix.
tvd, ind. part., 80. xxi, 555.
tm, ind. part., 80. xxi, 555.
Obs.
tvya, K. 80. xxii.
tha, K. 80. xxiii, 234. c.
thaka, K. 80. xxxiv.
tham, adv., 721.
thd, adv., 721.
daghna, T. 80. Ixx, 777. a.
da, adv., 722.
ddn{m, adv., 722.
fa, T. 80. Ixxi.
/asa, T. 80. Ixxii.
dM, adv., 723.
na, K. 80. xxiv ; T. So.lxxiii.
nd, K. 80. xxiv.
i, K. 81. iii.
n/rn, adv., 722.
nw, K. 82. ix.
ma, K. 80. xxv ; T. 80. Ixxiv.
mat, T. 84. vi.
man, K. 85. iv.
maya, T. 80. Ixxv.
mara, K. 80. xxvi.
mdtra, T. 80. Ixxvi.
rndna, K. 80. xxvii, 526, 527,
578-
mi, K. 81. iv.
min, T. 85. viii.
ya, K. 80. xxviii, 571-576;
T. 80. Ixxvii; ind. part.,
555-
yas, 86. vi.
yd, K. 80. xxviii.
yu, K. 82. x ; T. 82. xiii.
ro,K.8o.xxix; T.So.lxxviii.
ri, K. 81. v.
rw, K. 82. xi.
rupa, T. 80. Ixxix.
rhi, adv., 722.
la, K. 80. xxx j T. 80. Ixxx.
lu, T. 82. xiv.
va, K. 80. xxxi ; T. 80. Ixxxi.
vat, T. 84. vii, 234, 553 ;
adv., 724, 922.
van, K. 85. v.
vara, K. 80. xxxii.
vala, T. 80. Ixxxii.
vas, K. 86. iv.
vi, K. 81. vi.
vin, T. 85. ix.
vya, T. 80. Ixxxiii.
sa, T. 80. Ixxxiv.
sas, adv., 725.
sa, K. 80. xxxiv; T. 80.
Ixxxv.
sat, 725. a, 789.
si, K. 81. vii.
sna (shnd), K. 80. xxxiii.
snu (shnu), K. 82. xii.
LIST OF CONJUNCT CONSONANTS.
CONJUNCTIONS OF TWO CONSONANTS.
^ kka, ^5T kkha, ^"QJ kna, ^ kta, fZJ ktha, Jft kna, "^T kma,
kya, sfi or ^5 kra, |p kla, ^ kva, T5|- ksha. 4$f &Aya, Ij| khva.
<l
gdha, ^F #> *H ^Ma, **f ^ma,
TT ^^a, "QJ ^%o, U ghra, ^ ghva.
nkha, ^ TO^a, ^* ngha, ^ rtiAa, -^| ma.
5<5Aa, ^ 6na, "**\ 6ma, ^T <5ya.
jja, ^^ jy'Aa, ^ ^"jla, 5^ jma, ^ jya, Ijf jra,
dda, , dna,
$< nta,
nva.
/ra, rf tva,
^ dda, ^ 7 a 7 Aa,
dva. "
ntha,
T nsa.
h6ha, "^ n/o.
, dbha,
ntha, 1& tula,
tka, "^ /^a,
dra.
a'wa, 1" dba,
dhma,
tma,
a
, ^T dya,
nya,
f( pta, "^T ptha, TT ^wa,
I? ^ra, ^T ^?/a, "Ef ^v^ ^
IT bba, &T 66Aa, ^T bya,
rga,
rya, rva, rsa
, q rsha,
ia'Aa,
&sT bhra,
mna, ^C mna, ^*T mpa, f^\ mpha, f^ mba, 'H mbha, WT wzwa,
my a, ^ mra, '
a, "^f rta, ^ r<5Aa, ^[ r/a, Ty rna,
, ^ rtha, "^ ra'a, ^ ra'Aa, M rpa, ^ r6a, ^ rbha, ^ rma,
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
Page 29, line 27, for '260. a' read '251. a'
40, last line, dele note f
43, line 19, for '304. ' read '304. b'
Si, 15, for '257. a' read '257'
118, 4, for ^Tf^read ^
151, 33, for 'bases' read 'stems'
158, 27, for 'by 51' read 'by 50. a'
I 77) 5? 5> f r 'bases' read 'stems'
268, 2 from below, for '667' read '666. 6'
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY
Los Angeles
This book is DUE on the last date stamped below.
PHONE R
STACK ANNEC
FEB24 1986
DIRECT LOAN
3 1158 01078 4659
